CiXIV80b Provided by University Library of Tübingen Transcribed with Tesseract

Creative Commons, Attribution-ShareAlike, 3.0

 A grammar of the Kannaḍa language in English Kittel, Ferdinand .. s s - iz o T - o e i = e s .. 5 = s o - o 0 v o o i R i i = o A o2 g % R % % i B o A Y AT a3 S & (% hd 5 b et Ve i . “ e - § . w 3 S Nos L4 A ¥ bt £ s 7 - b & # ST s, 5 o i % R 5 A 3 TR RO N w e e 2 " S e o . G e s v % N et % b e ) % " e » s Ly 5 P 3 o " > Ry ot s ey WX i A S - o P G % o e e e By % o i ey % % i x S o T o e e i ,m i ¥ o a > 2 A e " oy & i A s "o & e SRR e g o e o &~ X N “ T s e % oL e % S s % o o o s e e v Gk 5 F 3 . ¥ P P e % w e > » %%, by @i ® R e Ak S e TR, o, e ) ok M ¥ m‘y. > % ¥ f v b R S W i - s e % Fos ™ b % e e o o X i " ", e v s w e s e W % Ao g b\ - LR or & " b b, e w % ¥ & % \ &~ o 4 N NS S & & e e ¥ v, & % ¢ 5 5 ~ - Lo - 3 P i ¢ i o . 5 ¥ T S % 4 S o & & b % A i " % : ~ & % e ¥: & e o v = v . - % . b W o & & & P e s st £ R & v < v < RS ¥ ¥ i ¥ &) & - ot i W o v A oo Lo vk o ¥ v “y B & S & - b y - o % A e A A AR 7 Ry & 1~ & 3 S s A b S o e « o % % w - & . W g > P e B N (= . 3 5 £ b % o EoEReN A e o, 3 B & o s i A e ) > o = B > o b s s ek i g ¥ e A5 ~ e, % B e 2 P ¥ W oA S - o R m O w Neh, e, S e % - s X % e o %« ot NCw ” & 4 R 2 S BN > Ah, b P N A % Sy & % e v £ “ ; > % i v Z R e . ‘. S 3 S b . 4 e i e 3 N o W D ) e e W N Y \,m, o eyt o . ¥ e « i - oy St "y o e o & & R s o @ i o e B KRN S e & e S S S o, 1, S v e % 7 W . s ey St i Y A G 53 e Wk e b i i ; b A R e G Lo e e e, G0 I~ o s - A K W g o O 4 o i o s o Ny > e - 2 e oS o e - > % A R, . > Wi —— e o < e Sl e e S 7 A e & b " o o p: m S ar B P e e, & W B 5 SN o s & e ok « m i Mg > & ik & i Sper i sl S v b e e o - o i ke % i, i s o v e = 5 » b 5 e % % by By % v v & PR Ar A e o i ar wn s &, % s = o i = g i v SO NEY S » & % p P e M ey £ i % o ek o W o Y. e = &9 e b (5 B ey 5 PRI I % s - 5 e > 5 ¥ & w by S o e s i G A b - e b 5 % %, - - ' & e R i ok i~ i % o - b o % ° o e W 4 . W s R % S N o 0 s b, S - A, ¥ o o N o > - P I < A & e i 5 i w W e T 5 e o W e - A e % v v e o Y 3 A > =% o o ¥ L P i o i Rt St (o s o~ A A ! W e e e e & £ > O b e - 3. w ~ o % e o b SOt oA a S e \Q % N e o 4 # N s “ > P o & s o N A atie e e et et e - : i S e vhe s G S A s bt 2 % X, S o i “ % e > @, “ (e W & T fiatpe Py - 5 ey v , o o P * v oW e o v i & & o ¥ e W VR o A R B e ey o AR e i W i’ = - e i v s ol o o N et ¥ o A e an v & X Y " (e s o e e i o el 3 o o - e S & ) o & o ™ - < w e ey T A, XN s o e e " o 2 ¥ e Pty s - o oy (e e s o [ N, e N % o e A o Y e b o Mo % 3 b = ] e Rtk VA Y RS e AL o e o o < p e - b ks % & 3o > & S oo, L s y T SO = e M, - S o b &5 f o ww o S W, for g o o B ek ok ey 25 - ,m b e Sy 5 & " g e W > . o v e A ¥ & ke i g, o % s % o ot o e e X e , i . % m .y ¥ W v o T e e wy Aok fh b e e & c e e s e Py P o o o i e St A S & o e “ i e S s &g b e b b ook > *or i o 7 X s o e e s @ - LA e 5 A B i o H g e ¥ = - 2 R ' vt 9t e e >, e e G i o S , v o = o & ¥ P > % e e At B oTe e b S ¥ o o T i b X R % e "l v ¥ ¢ & o Lo e oo i o o oo ¥ e o ey N R N . A AR X v . 3 o ® e e o { i o~ e, ¥ » M DBty W - i o % o e v o o e o o - e et e ™ & S £ < ¥ Pah b P S e & o B e ? i e w 2 £ - B Gela e o C v > T o i - i o oo G > A A " v - NS e b, 5 A i e e g e < 25 S 3 . &Sy B e o e 4 oy # £ ® v P W w S G P b o A o S 5 o o " T S V. e e Pty o e by b s P i e - S, G e - s b b o i i . o i e koS = i S, . v ™ » < v ie £ B e A e e S i e B e s S & - 5 o 3 e e oot - W » 7 e » H »m A > o ,u o i & P A o s e o Sl A o o . o s S e e S ol A Ve, T e - e ow r e A w ey o o ' o o v e M 3 W Vir Nt & S o &% e D & T o S 2 o P o o, e b W % gt W %, & Mt &y ¥ e ¥ S e e e I g i T & B S & 5 @ m v o . . < & ity A ¥ S v e o » o o P ¢ £ ¥ & . % o . o & P e o S NS Ve S DRt it S A ek, S > # o e ke B e ey > e N e e @ S G o i St Pl R (S R H ¥l - (e - oL o i 3 i & A Pt Vs s PP i ghoa o T PRl “r o & g ™ o g v i o e o S AR I =t e v 4 e B o e ». R o ) & i b ».\ - o P i ¥ % o g o 5t i re e % N i e ! W b o e o e b % S SN % D =5 5 ; ¥ it o iy o3 o e ‘. v P PR e o~ > p b A = " oL ¥ et o 3 > > o e W " e & ek v o e o e e i e g 3 o~ > et % s ¥ / o L5 B "3 R 2 A e H\ ¥ - RS » P A P > 5 - v sy Ao i 0 gt R & (S S R, e g ] " ot o 4 M v < M 'y e - 2 o 1 e g ¥ % i~ Wi A - ok Sh e v e & % w b Y % G " e B . D e s e it R e A i e & > & b s e e Tt - - 3 A & P > x Fe & Y > > =%, Gy e R e v ke £ v ¥ r b 3 e v P e * = e whet P S v X A i o @ S s T o s - B, 58 e - iy ¥ m s P o Pt e B o w o B o i » < - O & g N . " i % e N G e i v SN o P i o e bur S A A - : a, oo o B A » s > S i v £y P - o e A e > N o W - s Ve e e g e o X R 2% S R o Gl g < & T D AN 2 S s v > A 5 B W B i Wl e e oo o o o ;s ¥ B R - o P s > ts >, st > W o : sk PR o N By < & % S & o 5 % 4 e o - e s P P o » A S & i e o ey oy e o -t D) = o v % X < % i~ ok S b e R s S o e £ - gt ” ¥ J 5 Tt o Ay 5 o o i A o 3 % & o i~ > = T o i 3 = ity A e i 25 e N G Ol O = i A3 o N e ke W o % R % at 7 T 3 ¥ = o @m > ¥ T < P ey - v g s > 7 - o o @ i . o e e Ny o i~ e e i - A o, P i e o i A ¥ ¥ ot G & 5 o & @ N B 9 e S et o < s o e X, e 7 Bt e i Ry & w - % Rt R - Ve - & g I e M .m e S A s 0 G ol ok o~ o i i b i e i e i o S e, 7 o > 2 o & e W P et T 5 & e i b 7 W ke o = S e e > @ o ¥ o ¥, S &8 < % 8 Prs et Py 3 g L o O s e e e g i ' o & o o ey TV i e W A ® o e % Ve < .4 v v e & e s WS 2 & ol P For o - \“M ey PP o o S ¥ & Ky i Y (i " o o % ' e 5 W o i 2 o o o e S o s G - W oy S o e 2 i e 4 £ b T P . ) - . o i o b -3 i s , e o & 2 W L W Ty o g R, ¥ o S o & o pd . G e > o 4 b & S A ety i i e % e ot 5 T 3 v o T o o 3 & L w2 A s o 5 Ty Lo wie ‘r i iy b S w5 o oo, o > £ R S Y R W o e * (s P . ¥ o v s > o o e e #, ¥ & 5 L ¥y i ” i e i > v v 3%, > L v ¥ e S s e - o e g o ) e = o A e - @ e Py A " W & P G b - L - o e T P v % i (o e s % P o e S o : o s s 3o > > ¥ el 4 o S i o @ w A N e ¥ M P s TS > d ¥ v A e o = 25 e N2 i el - T o - £ s N o T S i B - e v o R, Rneh v w o e N e 4 e 3 3 P e S s o v o & oty e & i Lo e i Ty W N o o R 0 e @ i > 3 s o/ > S > ¥ o Lol P w e, S X / o v o o “ * e oy falll Vi i 4 Ot S » e e o > # . ) 4 - v » ww e S & i - - £ 5 1 Pt o2y S o e e & £ St A 2 it v e @ e A w > G e A > ol ot % 25 s # Pl u e e i e v v o % Tt ey s 5 = ” o it b o i e o N A % S <R = A S0 v = - 3 ¥y 75 S - o 7w oy - s B o e ~ i > o b = W o . . % e > » oy P & > 7 Tt Dl M s e N 3 v X % . ” % v ot % i = g < e o o i > e a0 2 I ety gt S R~ e ¥ o P - ot D K\H\ e o = e ¥ iy o o m s A - e, @ W v e ) e S T T A N 5 e % Ve e G 4 5 W ) s o o # P i e o e S oar i B TR iy * o ~ S s e o e L ¢ e = v % - o e T o B L5 > e A 2 w P s v Sy wie o ~ R o’ w3 R n o o i ! DU S & o o e e oo - S s, A o v PR e X " o' 3 - S - n s A= ‘ Vo o At S Py iy L R & Ly e 2 B ‘o Pk Tt o A P AR D e ., N W B e R A s & - £ o 5 s i o -8 R e e - v i i o e Aoy, e o £ e o Vo g gl & Fa o A M e P M ¥ & 94 > Y e O 2 D 5 e o o W s B b oo T R (O O B o i # T A e > o ¥ W R N ! i o o o b S % ok o % @ 8 o 3 W > 4 A - o 7 - o ey o ¥ Pk ot % Pl Tt L > W 2N o > v e et PP o ey o o b ol ¥ Ay -~ o s 4 r ¥ o s 2 = % - e R e e M oy Y A 0 e . St e G e o Pt s M M 7 @i 25 P & 5 5 oy i S, Ty ! ed o e 7 et o 0. S Pegt e : ey 55 P o ¥ 4 Sy Bt £ e 2 s ~ R < M e 55 N e e A o g A e o 3 s b = o i w o i Pl P 5 S F e s e ot - S e, & ok, gt 9 o el & R P e s £ o - o & g - e, e 2 o Sk w % " A [ o S e P < Sl SN i R O { TR e w % ¥ w Y Pl U o o s et P b i P e o oy - o - o e e < v o &, M s o > % W ¥ v e & ey APl s o o S e ke i .w b, oV e o e e P e S R AVt e b e < ’ o o i o o e o \é Pt v v feaboon v S T 5 ot o - w " & 5 "y - e e e ¢ o ey a A o S ¥ Tk w M ¥ o L% ol P, .~ 5 m D ” e s A R i v A " X, w e P 5 ol Concs e e ey o ok s i o e £ o S " W e A w &y A bt e S o oy v 5 s o i 3 e iy oy o o o o i o w v o P I * oA o ot % ,‘, & i~ r £ " > b = o & W % S o Yo s " Pa s & " o Pt a” v - e .m w\ Aty ook & o P 7 w & s M o o 5 o ~ R s A, S e s b RgE = e 5 T A S S K — & o W - o % > > g 5 e - & o 4 e > R, R F5r Ay o e = X o Sy . ) 20 Al ot e A o > 5 3, & o e St e o Oy w o W E =~ " o o o " O o . e D Bk o e v S e &x ¢ ¥ e o . . e L D P ru o - A ¢ i o o3 o 5oy e We # o v e o - e = i e B s Y thed -, . & e EA e Yy i " > # = & e P v N e o s e v o r e CoLs o o o e o . Q P e 8. o % g o ‘ v - e - - e .3 s e 4 22 p 4 o e 2 ” 2 o > 9 g S av o i m ¥ m o s i Pt - o o o e e - v u v o AR, > A w e 9 A 25 o o b SR A & ¥ % ¢ g R & A 5 o o s Ao o & . i M, - o Vo o P s i M X e o~ A, e A S s o G v T i S, 4. e - 8 N e > g Foun o~ s 7 % » i > s X P i e % Cr % A A e £ 3 P e % Ll At v W e P Pt A W S s 5 s e 1 M. i 5 2 Pl o g u e ’ ¥ v & s > > = w W & 2 . o o vl S "o T 5 P N b o e PR = oy e o S v h e Ay N et % ,, S > - o o - et o A e #iy i ° o Pl o~ Py oy ¥ ? g & 75 e Te > e &5 ! o R Ry o s & T X s N e P Sa o & S A W K RS o P P, o e = o v o e e Y e A & S e o o i o T e 8t sl i s % oo Pl S hif el W RIS el P i 0 i o i A Ay 5 2 o Bevs b o ¢ < et W it e o @ S o * & W XS B o e W b Py e W M e A [ W B e ¥ i & P e # ¥ o A o 22 & L e P 2 T o b e e o g o N S K v < s . A Kt X bR ¥ s s A o e X ¢ i W W & e VI N % e A e % e s e b S ot & ~ Ty o o o o e B s o Pl A A i . o i o A o & o5 s A % NH o N o M W fy v > N . o & > Ber Ve &y b A o W S e, G S % ¥ e Ty Hoy P e P i & » v S & Pty i e i R s O % w S e e e % = % S e A % - ' v " e g e i < e w W oo S e G o S - o e e A S e Y e s S0 5, - & P &% o B 2 o e Sy (st ey 5 G Ve e S g ey e LR % o 0% S o e i e Py e e., Frir G G 5 X S e e e Yo e A * W w A S - » 0 % Ar T Sy Foa o < e P (3 o "~ bl 3 S o v e a4 P R o % e o P e G : b O % mw b v g s oy FR o o s 8 - o G e % ' A s, . 2 P v ¥ Catr B e S v e Uy o o et ¥ G e 4 G 1 o whe P 4 4w, o P o e % o 2o O X o 5 P v Sy e W XS e s W e P 5 > % 5 e S TS ¥ e o 2 Col s ‘“ o o Sy ! iy i ) A Vg £ ot i & s S o e Nl Y b s b S o, ™ % e A " i i T s > e w3 g i S B s e S e W e o e e ¥ Wl oA P 2 s s & o+ ¥ FBNP T ek P s od o PoX e o S o & S e o N e - P & -2 AL S e S ¥ > « .w =y - e Ny e - e < oy 72y M e VL P s i P P P w w W M B £5 o Rt o & % - & L i et 2 A B @ A ¥ ke R £ S e - e B % i e oy s ot o g > o oy o £ = v & P s o o s e v 24 5 - 7 G 2 o v Y & VA < ¥ s A e e nr e s oS s o e w b i s o e B N . s P o A o A e e S o A .m b A 7 o > e . Lo o v o e P g . e o s o % o 5 i £ i, A 5 & Sk o 5 - ~ > Sy A e e s S > m 7 P £ e ¥ o a~ P « e R A s B s ) W & el . S el e w P o N = g e = o s s - - & 3 e e > i i i bt o oy o e o s T S 5 o #hs e ~ A o P S5 - - ¥ e ,. P o F AR g P ~ S Sy s e A w e > > e o & i b WA SRR R e P o * & 5 v % e 7 e Pk P v % & - ey 5 T e o o o St \.u & LR ! e - o P J ok A W, oy vy N, = e, - > i o, & @ . e R g S o i e, A2 o R R b - il - +7 # o S7A M o 3 7 s 7 & i o s > i Sy e 0 - 55 o ¥ > ~ e o A N . s & o A 5 e ¢ o w 5 &g & o o 3 o S - e b 0, o % ¥ S P 5 £ \s M " o 5 D S s P e e e el dy e T o P P! o i i - ) 5 e e 2 o SN A e A e v o p o & e T W v e e P A e % Sa v hedie e i & S T LA e e A e o R A G iy PR apo w5 B e S 2 o i w 2 . % o e D% St ~ < T R o e > e & S Lo e e v i i iy iRy o w, i o N & o 3 = 2 S ‘m = S o B P RS Sy N g i o i i i D & A ¥ e W B o R e 4P e “a =0 . o m - e e 5 ek oy A A B W 5 5 . ok e W T @ ¥ s A v e P > e s i 2 4 PN et - ey iy e e, 2 o \ e i e R o o o % T s i e 5o G Bl I i T 25 e e wr A o L) oS e s o o W e e b - o S P v A = oo o Sy oo o 7 e «M it Py . ¥ 4 e e Nale o 2 i Pl A e £ m ey e Vo ¥ s - b e 5yt N b A £ S 2y % = AL i % 1 et i < e i N R AN i M o o & A > o R A oo Ay s o ey o 5 P i iy oy S P ot s s o w '3 e o (o M P e A % 3 i o wv ‘M i v N G N S Pt > o e i~ 5 b Y v o o ol A o R i v X O Co e S o g N T ot o . Pt o~ o =, 4 > w v Lo > i £ G S 5 e i o Sy ol 7 % e >y o P { o R £ i v R - v W e o e W o e o ; W Ch SRR 8 i ¥ e %, w m b @ > v Pt Lo P it 3 i v o 7o A5 v # ¥y R ¥ # e o o s S p & e S N o W B, Y A A &) o o o~ e e e g o # A 0 o AT e e o ey e > i o G ¥ o A e # 4 ; o i et 4 m. i g o S ~ e L o % & £ s 7 52 o & Fe L 1 s i s @ % R ol e by o ad &) % o K * o o~ o o e - O o g St A S N % s okl o i A S % 5 " ol @ 5 s P ¥ 55 ~ < & vt b el Sl o 7o w o A o M S & N e . g o % e A ™ > 5 m P s <4 eV o § e, © s 5 & o o DR i o 5 v s N %y e o s S - e % i~ i . \M P s A i e 7o IO S G - W L " v e e ¥ ‘s oL s o St e " i 7 O 5 o S & N ™ o v e > Sy o v e S o s A o N g R > P e o Rt e o & P o ' i w % £ g o o~ i~ e e » o e O M. s T o ey s S # % & D . v £ Ea o e o v i A, e w % o e % s ¥t P v Pt ,w P b 5 o s e Y X O ot s P > rer & 0 G & v Sy YT X F o e = i v o o e & WA &5 ghan o ¥ e 5 5 e i ot o o Pk B ¢ o e s ¥ 3 s > FoF e S s (e S e o o ar & R m et s o o 3 e 5 S s o o ;w <, o 'S 5 ~ P -y N g e S o S S 5 s o 5o & & m e e & o ™ w - e, o e ey & i e e e ,v > & e el 4 g o & Pl X iy it i i vl e Ky o > e e L = o oy o < o P W 3 A s s 3 s - Bt 4 Sl . N S o o . A G 2 o R Fod F % ¥ e g A o~ ¥ 25 i 5 £ e iy s o « ¥ X T B e il T & et oy O s s - Place 5 i i & o i o s % o FE Y SV =~ RN G ,\ e % o A, R o o > V5 P i R o i s D e ¥ - - R S o o ¥ e e o S At A s > . g br R - e W ety o Rk G o v i T T o ¢ Ay -« & o e W s B S o5 A AN v e o P o] o 2 Dy b ‘s # s o, 7y il - Vs o S o T P 7 o’ Ao s s e % & i 4 e o oA . ” " R o " i xS, ,, 5 5 o 5 o > - 2 P 2 g o P A o e % e S AW, W e B B P N N M oA s o b - e P P T o 2 2 e 5 o 2 Py g m i o e i S o SR v ¥ v s e e i 4 o L e - . G b %, st - e . W S " o e e &% e 2 e 2 i o m«\ A 7 s L o s 3 ! ? p. A o o D s i - o * %3 o W & Y w o Y P " o iy P S g o Bt Es ¢ S e Ty 7 “w o N W A A N Ut Ny o, = S e P > 5 bt £, e 4 S 4 P L &% o o 9 % % vy pigd s % w " P Pt W & Di - s e o AL ¢ PR 4 & e o X L o R o e S ol o - s s &, s A b 4 s e o o e & vy 50 " o % % e - @ & b A e 4 i £y i ¥ S “ v s 1 v, o g For o S, g R ¥ R P 5 & o g . A o K e N S5 e e e s S - i, £ P b, Y e e P i o v N e > £ e e > e e i W s e o . e G oA e - &3 Yo o 4 f ot & PEIRe £ P £ s Vo L. A o s e A e FG O o SNy e e 3 ' 7 e o e e e o N 4 N o A - 7 W s m e S v A o o o w 5 2 é L 5 m oLy & T m S P 4 oL B o i > W e e S v, e o T8 e W % ot e R A S b g ¢ G g e & A s e S o <, e & i ot e e s e Tt "> i * o~ w 5 o 5 T » A o ® > it v NS e T A S e S 4 %o’ Y ¥ % Sy o5 3 & P £ o o 7o 2 «H % S ot C & ST o NP i s & he N A & A ¥ e Sty . Booav e S o o R e o o s > s i i W' ) ¥ s o o s w o G i e R hot s e Y w * o e P if: Bs oy - 7 .” i i 8 " ¥ e o W 4 o e S Ay o S A s g e WS e e o G o " o o & ., o < F s o oy 2. i A wr e 9 S e o+ S & Mgty e S DTATS - e L o o e o Lt 4 S wr iy " po o~ e o P 5 v oy S Ay % o % S S R &5 . Pt S o e s S 54 s 5 P R iy w > 5 o s o e b2 7 . o e Far oY * o & "ty S s o e - A @ Lg < e Al as g S 7y = > > i N SRS Sty e e s > e , AT i 5 i S s o " B e 2 " PP e o o g g - a2 o - £ 5 sy 5 s o e $ P, Sy o ~ o e s o & S R R e AR 1 T o ) % & i S i FarE o e s .H SE P e T Gy L0 s & s ! i & o i s o S o R A A A i o o T s % e & S > e i 4P o b s e o ¥ e T e < g % o wn o o oA S o 2 b e o i % 5 s e r g o # v & £ o e e "y W T Py &' R o i CoR e i K & > v T WS Fe G A y s e b £ . =4 e AR & % e o ™ v . o - N S R o e e -4 * # 7 o Pt e B & L & S Foy Ry i~ &) S D G P T e 5 R & s SN e 3 e g o LA BT & 5 P A e M v v S " R as W N A e e R N, ko, 2 ey o LT e > % 5 " 5 P Tue 53 PP B0 L ey i e i, 5 o Ty S e o P Ll s J P L R et £ & o LA 3 2 % i r o S R o o™ & P L o M3 s P e i oo o L, S & K % ¥ W .M # % e Sy N w0 ¥ o & ok £ o G el 7 A e 5 L ol R ] e . 2 o PR b . e o & - o & w3 T s b S W A o » v % R A e > S e % & i e i 5 5 > b h\ o Epg k. ,. P Sl i o i i L4 % o u e L R ey < 4 o e o £ o s > L e v SR o N s B S TS v v ¥ - o e o A o WS o o g o BLiced % o w W o Sl i ey - N > o 3 e # o P R o Fed " = By et ey 3 e o S s v ~ ! s L 0 i w & m H e o o P! Ay e - R & AR e g0 S S i P o byt S o o, T et - S 3 “ar Rt TN o - h N b Ay R - b S A > T s ¥ ¥y ‘\ A £ P e e P F P 5 b Exe C £ , b L s 2 o 2 o o £ = o @ o WA b g 5 O S s S R e e ek 5 ~ e o TR A, X W R £ P & o S A ~ o Ve s @ e z e [ e e h N & @, st ; 7 A e A e P D L # o o PO e P i e e e 7 ey 7o B % guAa ¥ ’ £ R o # o " i e T & k(u # W ‘o e s s .. k4 bh ¥ I e SR AN Dt o o s % - e o w o R A & = £ is S s o %, g . P N A e w S " - Pt b o ol i % o s o o & o el O e a e it Aty e B P s % vr g e 8% 3 2 o7 Ay e b R s o N 0 W e e e o N s ~/ %5 ok & 5 el 7 M. oty v & s % /e & ) & A S o o ik B g L5 & » i, St e ) R % o S P ¥ 7o s s £ o i s S e o e PR Gy £ o 2 s\m.fl 3 G e oo .y S 203 = e v R e oot . . o8 e i e A e o A e 2 o ¢ e » e % o e g A A % S W e W Py ot Wi St S o M R o 4 sy & o e g P & o S e P e o SO 1 s o R * it BB o AL o & e o W s o S L 0 o A % i o S e e ' o W o ! P B S P (T o R Sy W e > FouE. ! A o s £ e 2 Lo SR o T AR WARI I ' X P Tt W i S iy S & " S W ~ Ll B A A R s " o il e o @ oA W N g N s T s S W s s T o S £ i L o » 2, e e & e poalat s A s o et S x e G R e e 2 R W iy 2y o ol £ PRl g ~ ik e * T A S T @ - & “ L S # o s R S e o g <, e e PR e o e ol A -~ B, W ey e 5 7 TR L v o AL AL g v o S S e s e R & % el o i e e o oF, ety e S b g Al oo R i A S i o e e £ e o gy b : - % oo Sy e ! W o] ¥ N 55 S A o et - e @ s el o e N % o ot Pl . e s St £ S e 2 . il & 0% o Sy 4 & S G o 2, S m i e < s SN R Ny it 2 -2 W e A s (O o o e 27 o, e S g o 4 o AL o ey % o % e R A e Y i 3! e s R -~ o ¥ 7 ¥ S s FAs o £ P £z W%, o s o Tk PO S e g e e & £, S s o For e G SRR < 7 & Sy o & G Sk P e A AN N s A A e I g W . W . e B S e s 2 Vil e ey o ‘!\ £ A i & P e S ol i e, o s i S R Fe S EERTy o el P o v e i S 9 e oy R e e g S S e e N ay 5 o % o e ‘s ot % v, i 3 o S e e ik v gty iR ; & X “ v P Ol Sl r £ w £s L ¥s o o PAFLAIO AP S et 2 Ly Syt e Ly e % £ s > ) & i e P e g 7 A R g o 2 fo e S b e o K el e T e e o sl o e w e o e w’ S 5 < 4 e A Mg A 5 A s P 5 & # & > ol oty o P L P iy P Rea AR P o S % W Ty e SN S S A " e < s i or M e s o B Sy g ka4 o #% B 3G o 0% P R i "~ T o G R T A 4 R G iy 5 2 S A s : e P 55 o £ e P i S S ) . T A T s i st 3 o 7 7 T A 25 Sl Sy o e y oy ' “ e ; St e R i B e e e i 5 b A % ! s o e s e = e e PRGN e 4 Vi P % o s s Pl oy ¥ P S e S g e PRSI SIS el ey < Dt g Fld o o Yo s & g S el A Cols £, A, oS e S e o R % s % g s S 2 o - M 5 D i e G i, < e P ot e P o ks, A R et 5 S 2 e P e e o P . 7o 7 9w M £ o s T £ E s o 7 e PP i 2 o e e I S o NP Sy iy 3 S5 S P P A o s 3 4 o i o G e R . e qw A e SO o oy g e, & & e e SO s 5 B o = s s A o < e e o "4 o W s . 4 Pt St v s = o i et e S 7 24 k. e S Lo 7 R i £ R s ¥ U AL A i - L W e Rl A S A < o & A L a o o O o T g P e ol e e o A s W R s i b o P 7o s T T Fod > S ¥ i & A T PN P e g o > o ‘Y 25 2: o ol e Sala s 73 = 3% S oty % s RN R o, > < A % N ght e, SRR S b o N o e s & i £ R S " o S AT i ok s s e o) roF % e G ¥ A s % & T A i E A Ll S v S A E P A ok i i AP i e Sy 2w g T ot o s (v\ o 5, o S i s ol AL o i e b o s 4 < = o S P 0P D . S R s e o R KL o s R A o 4 = (¥ A A s o 1 i P g P T & ool s A 2 . > £ e e i o i . S A s e .wfi o e £ o S e S % e 2 o e sy e ey e v T 4 &S L o o i et X g o e 5 ey O v o T T K20 s e PR S X R & s & A o P g P 2 e 5 ! M % < > 7o e e R v £ P . o e R o S i R R e % e SR s o e 3 B e o 5 Li A Sy SEE A L ; s % N e i L P R e e sy S e o Yo n o o e T e Yo o e S b e o ’ T £ e Ly o A o e A v oyt Tl o el L b A5 s 2 & 4 SFNe - # %3 e £ R ol & o AP f g e = e e % R i 4 s 5 e o S CslA O P 2 ¥ W A A o O $or S B B o & &3 * G & St ww& s el - ) e R, el ¥ S > S oA P g v s Lo o S K s & " L5 v S s e % A A s o o o S 5 5 o e 5 0 L A N o % A L i ! v Ox! s, s (s g 7S e o i K i L R L ol & 4 ol 4s - 0 . iy o5 e e w ol A S, e A G o ok W ey o ” s oy > o A > o o s i,” e ol o &4 g it Sy T R e b e oo Col s Mo ¥ e " R B 73 S S B S £ gl v ' Sy 5 P ¥ p L s s Ll g E W) CH0s W S 3 s P L A iy > A e S e e s W ot o oy, o o 4 o = R % e 7 e 9. o e e 3 W, e e 4 W E I i o W S . # pe 4 g b5 = & £ty ol o g v A P gt e . 48 o Ay 5 N A e Ve Fre £ g o N, oo e P oy Y e R i e Ty o G ,ifi% : e AR R @ C, R B o o fily 2 bl e S e ey oy v,v Ex AN E Sy e o A S i 3 R b e A e SR 5 vl o > o s < fe o8 - ! S o i a4 s X o ke £l ot £ LR Lol BN £ o & P e g S & T T & uwam R o 23 & fié i o W s R dre ) S o s . R e e Bt o £ s : o e o £ = ¥ o i i o s LTS = o - . " - .W i s By ™ - e oS s " o o s o 5 a0 g e = o s i o x: 5t S5 P = s 5 2 = =5 Loty g PR i i gl e - S o s i o e el 3 S e . <L s o © o . ¢ = i = i e - # 4 o & - ¥ B G SRR i o e G GESCH EN(K (7 ot 44 Ly N12<519761940 021 R RN Ew b & ] | A GRAMMAR OF THE KANNADA LANGUAGE IN ENGLISH COMPRISING THE THREE DIALECTS OF THE LANGUAGE (ANCIENT, MEDIZVAL AND MODERN) BY THE REV. Dr. F. iR T TEL AN Gel’ Al N 4 \ . — '::: ufi '\}N”_’ & i X : (9!-; 4\f ree 0 v MANGALORE BASEL MISSION BOOK AND TRACT DEPOSITORY 1903 - (2 Sioy S Q % S 46 “\99150‘ b, 5 ‘é Ei:l C g@r(‘ N 2y, %, JARGAINSS AT SNARS. 8 4 ;’//fi = e £ PREFACE. et The present Grammar is chiefly based on Késava’s Sabdamauidarpmm. The terminology of this his Grammar is simple, and fit for the three dialects of Kannada. At the same time it will be interesting to learn the general way of an ancient native scholar’s teaching Kannada grammar. In Késava’s age most of the rules of Kannada grammar were fixed. That before him there had been grammarians who had not deserved that name, seems to follow from his quoting a part of a Kanda verse that is fully quoted in the Sabdanusisana (under its sttra 469), from which we translate it as follows — ‘Remain, O daughter! Could the unprofitable grammarian (sushkavaiyakarana), the unprofitable sophist and the rustic have as (their) subject matter the gem of poetical composition which is the subject matter of the assemblage of very clever poets ?’ Some specific statements of Késava concerning his predecessors or conte.mpo- raries are the following— He considered it a matter of necessity to caution literary writers against using final ] in several Kannada words, as only rustics would do so (§ 228). He teaches (§ 252) that if there exist Tadbhavas of two words compounded, both words ought to be in their Tadbhava form. In this respect he quotes an instance from his great predecessor Hamsaraja (of A. D. 941, according to Mr. B. Lewis Rice), viz. taravél manikyabhandarada putikégalam, which, he says, is a mistake (tappu), as manikabhandarada would be right (Suddha). He says that in satisaptami (§ 365) which always refers to two subjects, the letter & is to be used:; by some (of his predecessors or contemporaries) al has, without hesitation, been. employed for it; clever people do not agree to that. Then he quotes two sentences with al, and calls them wrong (abaddha). He states (very probably in order to counteract a tendency of that kind) that to form kaniks, téralike, panike of kin, pan, téra] (which formations are frequently found at least in the medixval dialect) is faulty, as the suffix iké should not be added to verbs ending in a consonant (see § 243, 4, 5). iv PREFACE. When introducing the suffix tana, he teaches that it is not to be used for Samskrita words, as e. g. 4rdhakatana would be wrong (abaddha, § 243, 4, 14). That he certainly has done so for the above-mentioned reason becomes evident by the fact that the Sabddnusisana (under its stitra, 431) adduces unnatatana and pannatatana as instances of ancient usage. He states that to form a causative verb, e. g. khandisisu, to cause to cut, from khandisu, to cut, a verb derived from a Samskrita noun, is not allowed (§ 150, remark), which statement probably also opposes a tendency of grammarians (or poets) towards doing so. He says that nouns ending in a consonant do not insert in before the & of the genitive, except pagal and irul; to form e. g. bémarina, manalina, mugalina is a fault (d6sha, § 121, @ 6). It follows from his opposition to such forms as bémarina that they had already come or were coming into use. He states that forms like nodidaparm, mfi@idapa{n are not used as declinable krillingas (§ 194, remark 2); but according to the Sabdénusisana (sttras 447. 448. 544) they were used as such, because its author Bhattikalankadéva adduces nbdidapanam, kididapanam, madidapangé, irdapana as ancient formations, He says (see § 240, remark) that some (grammarians or poets) who are fond of a practice that is connected with grass (satrinAbhyavaharigal), do not consider that abnormity does not enter in poetical prose, and use a short letter followed by an initial letter which is a compound with répha, as sithila ; such disgustful persons (arbéigal) do put it in poetical prose without calling it a blame (tegal). * The author hopes that the remarkable fact that Kannada and the other Dravida languages have no relative promoun (§ 174), has been satisfactorily explained and established by him (§ 330), and that the origin of the negative form of the verb in Dravida has been made evident by him (§ 210), two subjects which (he may remark) used to puzzle European scholars. See also his explanation of the participles (§§ 169. 185) and of the infinitive (§ 188). As to the age of Kannada poets Mr. Rice’s Introduction to his edition of the Sabdanusisana (p. 11 seq.) should be consulted. * Here the remark may be added that according to the Sabdinusbsana (under its sitra 288) the pronoun nam (which is not mentioned by Késava, § 137) was agreed to by some of the great poets of the northern way, whereas those of the southern one were siding with am. According to Nripatunga's Kavirdjamarga (1, 36) of the 9th century the region in which Kannada was spoken, extended from the Kavéri as far as the Godavari. " PREFACE. v Regarding the comparison of Dravida languages see <A Comparative Grammar of the Dravidian or South-Indian Family of Languages, by the Rev. R. Caldwell, 0. p., LL. D, etc., 2nd edition, 1875, London, Triitbner & Co.’ Dr. Caldwell in his work is inclined to think that Dravida exhibits close traces of relationship to the languages of the Scythian group. The Publications consulted for the present grammar are, besides the Sabdamanidarpana. the following — 1 The Karpataka Sabdinusisana (see p. 4, note). 2. Nudigattu. A Kannada Manual of School-Grammar, by Dhondo Narasimha 2nd edition. Mulbagal, Kannada Teacher, Training College. Mangalore, Basel Mission Press, 1894. 3 Kannada Schoolbooks, by native authors. Bombay, the Department of Public Instruction. Printed at the Basel Mission Press, Mangalore, 1882—1898. 4. An Elementary Grammar of the Kannada Language, by the Rev. Thomas 2nd edition. Hodson, Wesleyan Missionary. Bangalore, 1864. 5 2nd A Practical Key to the Canarese Language, by the Rev. F. Ziegler. edition. Mangalore, Basel Mission Press, 1892. 6 Nagavarma’s Karpitaka Bhashabhtishana (of about the beginning of the 12th century), edited by B. Lewis Rice, u. r. . s., etc. Bangalore, 1884. (. A Kannada-English Dictionary, by the Rev. F. Kittel. Mangalore, Basel Mission Press, 1894. 8 Very valuable Inscriptions published in the Indian Antiquary and Epigraphia Indica, by J. F. Fleet, »u. 0., c. 1. E., etc. 9 Elements of South-Indian Paleography, by A. C. Burnell, Ho~. pH. D. of the University of Strassburg, ete. Mangalore, Basel Mission Press, 1874. 10. A Sanskrit Grammar for Beginners, by Professor Max Miiller, m. 4., London, 1866. Special thanks are due to the SECRETARY OF STATE For INDIA for his generous aid by ordering a certain number of copies of the forthcoming Grammar for the Home Department in Calcutta and by inducing the Governors of Madras and Bombay and the Governments of Mysore and of His Highness the Nijam to take a considerable number of copies of the work in advance whereby the Publishers have been enabled to carry it through the Press. VI PREFACEK. The author would also gratefully acknowledge the encouragement he has received from the interest that several gentlemen have taken in his composing the present Grammar, of whom he may mention Mr. B. Lewis RICE, . I E., M. R. A, 8., Director of the Archzological Researches in Mysore; the Rev. G. RicutER, late Inspector of Schools in Coorg; Dr. E. HurrzscH, Government Epigraphist, Bangalore; Dr. J. F. FLEET, BO. C. S,, M. R. A. 8., C. L. E., and Professor R. GARBE, PH. D., Tiibingen. As the author lived in Germany, the printing was carried on in India, and proof-sheets could not be sent to him for correction, there occurs an unusual number of misprints; but a corrected list of the errata will enable the student to set them right before perusing the Grammar. Finally the author quotes for his work the words of Késava (sttra and vritti 4) —«<If there are any mistakes (dosha) in this (my) Sabdamani- darpana, may the learned (first) thoughtfully listen, and (thgn) with mercy combined with gladness of heart rectify them.” Tiibingen, 5th February 1905. IR S35 O < 3 — gy TABLE OF CONTENTS. Pages. Introductory observations - . o 1—3 I On the form of the signs that are us ed z;s I:ett(;x's (Alphabet, ;tc.). 4—22 29 II1 On roots or verbal themes . - — 29 v 29—87 On declinable bases (Declension) On verbs . 88—163 VI On adverbs, ete. . 164—169 VII Euphonic junction of letters 170—185 VIII . 185—198 Particulars of some letters, also in prosody, IX On primitive nominal bases 198—200 On secondary nominal bases 200—207 XI On compound bases 207—218 XII On verbal declinable bases 218—222 XIII. On pronouns 222—242 XIV On adjectives 242 —251 XV On numerals 251—260 XVI On a . . 260—300 adverbs (again) XVII. On the repetition of nouns, pronouns, adjectives, numerals, adverbs, interjections, and imitative sounds . . . 300—311 XVIII. On the expression of ‘other’, on the article, and on the expression of 311—31+4 ‘only’, ‘alone’ XIX On additional tense-forms of the verb 314—330 XX On so-called auxiliary verbs . 330—342 XXI On either—or ; neither—nor; whether—or; the—the; as—as; for; namely, as follows; what is that?; what happened?; in this manner; as—so; how much—so much, how many—so many; when ?; who—he, ete. 343 —352 On XXII the verbs én and an 352—359 XXIII On 359—362 illadé, alladeé, altu XXIV. On the repetition of verbs, and on the combination of certain verbs 362—376 XXV On comparison 376—380 XXVI On syntax . 380—432 XXVII On ) ° 432 — 439 words corrupted from Samskrita XXVIII On the doubling of consonants . 439 —442 On a number of words contained in various places of the éab.dénuéfisana 442 —456 Index . - . . 457—478 Corrections and Addit.ioue". - 479 —483 = === = =~ S == = = = = =4 p— R SUNPHRS—— RE—— A GRAMMAR OF THE Kk 2N NADA LANGLUALE I. Introductory observations 1 The term Kannada (¥3®), the Canarese of European writers, is formed from Kar-nadda (¥0°-3980), the black cultivated country,-referring to the black soil, commonly called cotton soil, which characterises the plateau of the Southern Dekkan (3% ). In the Samskrita language the term appears as Karpata (¥m2r &) and Karnataka (Fmor &F). Kannada is the appellation of the Canarese country and its language. " 2. Kannada is spoken throughout Mysore, the Southern Mahratta country, in some of the western districts of the Nijam’s territory (as far north as Bidar), and partly in North Canara on the western coast. The people that speak the Kannada language are estimated at about nine millions. 3. The Kannada language belongs to a group of languages which has been called the Dravidian (i.e. 39& or @3,9@) family by European writers. The chief members of this family are Kannada, Télugu (39970), Tami] (3, Malayala (F000339%), Tulu (30%), Kodagn (F431), and Badaga (W3R, on the Nilagiri). 4, The so-called Dravidian languages have borrowed a great many words from Satskrita, especially such as express abstract ideas of philosophy, science, and religion, together with the technical terms of the more elegant arts, ete. (¢f. § 369); but their non-Samskrita portion is considerable, and once was sufficient for ordinary conversation. Chiefly by a comparison of their gram- matical structure with that of Samskrita the essential independence of the <4 = 1) The district of Canara (a corrupted Vf:oirm of K‘zrt;mada) on the \Veeterncoastgotthat name because it was subjected for centuries to the rule of Kannada princes, and the Carnatic (4. e. Karntaka), the country below the Fastern Ghauts on the Coromandal coast, was (by a misapplication of terms) called by that name first by the Muhammedans. LE Dravidian languages of Samskrita can satisfactorily and conclusively be established. 5. The earliest written documents of the Kannada language are inseriptions on walls and pillars of temples, on detached stone-tablets and monumental stones, and on copper-plates of the Canarese country. The inscriptions are often dated ; if they have no date, the form of the letters used and historical references to dated inseriptions serve to ascertain their age. 6. As regards the forms of the Old and Modern Kannada alphabets, they lare varieties of the so-called Cave-character, an alphabet which was used for the inseriptions in the cave hermitages of Buddhists in India (e. g. at Salsette, Kan- héri, Nasik, Sahyadri, Ajanta), and rests on the Southern Asoka character. This character was about 250 B. C. employed in the Edicts of the Buddhist king Asoka. Different forms of the letters used for the Kannada inscriptions appear at differ- ent periods, the earlier forms differing in the greatest degree from those of the Modern Kannada alphabet”. At the time of the composition of the Basavapurana 1369 A. D. the old alphabet had become already out of use, as the author of that work mentions the letters of Old Kannada (3¢°n3©E9&) as belonging to the past. 2 The Kannada language in the old inscriptions (of the Kadamba, Ganga, C‘élukya, Rashtraktta and other kings) of which specimens exist that belong to about 600 A. D., is not the same as that of the present day; it is what is called Old Canarese. This Old Canarese is also the language of the early Kannada authors or the literary style. It may be said to have continued in use to the middle of the 13th century (see § 109), when by degrees the language of the inseriptions and literary compositions begins to evince a tendency to become A Modern Canarese or the popular and colloquial dialect of the present time. characteristic of the literary or classical style of the early authors is its extra- The classical authors were Jainas. ordinary amount of polish and refinement. One of them was Nripatunga, who wrote the Kavirajamarga (a treatise on 1) The earliest authentic specimens of writing in India are the edictal inscriptions of the Buddhist king AsOka (also called Dharmisdka and Priyadarsi) who was the grandson of the Maurya king éandragupta at Pataliputra (the modern Patna), and ruled from the extreme north-west of India as far as Magadha in the East and Mahishmandala (Mysore) in the South. These are written The inscriptions in two different alphabets. alphabet which is found in the inscription that is at Kapurdigiri (near Peshawar), is written from right to left, and is clearly of Phenician or old Semitic (Aramaic) origin (it has been called )"l Khafioshti) ; the Southern inseriptions that are found in numerous places from Girnér in Gujerat to Siddapura in the Chitaldroog district of Mysore (these last ones discovered by Mr. B. L. Rice), are written from left to right, and the alphabet employed in them is the source of all other Indian alphabets. It has been thought by some scholars (Professors Weber, Biihler and others) that the character of the Southern inscriptions also may be traced back e —————— to a Phenician prototype. alankara) in the 9th century; another was Pampa or Hampa who composed his Bharata (an itib4sa more or less based on Vyasa’s Mahabharata) in 941 A.D.; and a third one was Argala who finished his Purana in 1189 A. D.Y 8. The grammatical treatises on Kannada were constructed on the Satskrita plan. Their Jaina authors took Panini and others as their guides. The earliest grammarian, whose works have come down to us, is Ndgavarma who appears to belong to the first half of the 12th century. Késirdja or Késava, the author of a well-known grammar, lived about one hundred years later, in the 13th century. The above-named authors treat on the Old Canarese language, illustrating it by Nagavarma quotations from the writings of former (or contemporary) poets. wrote his first grammar, an epitome, in Kanda verses and Old Canarese, and embodied it in his treatise on the art of poetry, the Kévyavalokana (in Old Canarese) ; his second grammar, the Karpatakabhashabhtishanpa, is in Samskrita prose sltras, each accompanied by a vritti or explanatory gloss also in Sataskrita. Késiraja’s grammar, the Sabdamanidarpana, is composed wholly in Kanda verses and Old Canarese (each verse having its prose vritti), and is the fullest systematic exposition of that language o, 9 The ancient Kannada grammarians held the study of grammar in high esteem, as may be learned from the following words of the author of the Sabda- manidarpana : -— ¢ Through grammar (correct) words originate, through the words of that grammar meaning (originates), through meaning the beholding of truth, through the beholding of truth the desired final beatitude; this (final beatitude) is the fruit for the learned” (stitra 10 of the Preface). U The Kavirdjamirga was edited in 1898 by K. B. Pathak, B. A., Assistant to the Direc- tor of Archaological Researches in Mysore, the Bhérata also in 1898 by Lewis L. Rice> (o1 T 48 M. R. A ] H Director of Archeeological Researches in Mysore. (Mysore Govern- ment Central Press, Bangalore.) 2) Nagavarma’s Karnitakabhéshdbhtshana was edited by B. Lewis Rice, M. R. A. 8., It contains Director of Public Instruction (Bangalore, Mysore Government Press, 1884). 10 pariéthédas, viz. sanjnAvidhana, sandhividhana, vibhaktividhéna, kérakavidhana, sabda- ritividhana, samasavidhéna, taddhitavidhéna, akhyAtanigamavidhéna, avyayanirtipana- vidh&na, and nipatanirGpanavidhana, in 280 sttras. An edition of Késirdja’s Sabdamani- darpana was printed at Mangalore (Basel Mission Press, 1872). His work has 8 sandhis or chapters and 322 sitras. A short summary of its contents is as follows: — I. Sandhi or euphonic combinations of letters. 1) aksharasanjonéprakarana or the section of the sigms used as letters. b) the vowels in particular; ¢) the conso- @) the letters of the alphabet; nants in particular, 2) sandhiprakarana or the section of combination of the mentioned letters. a) combination of vowels; b) combination of consonants. II. NAma or nominal themes. a) lingas or declinable bases, aa) krits or bases formed from verbs by means of suffixes, bb) taddhita-bases formed from nouns and verbs by means of certain other suffixes, cc) samasas or compound bases, dd) nAamas or ready nouns (distinguished as ridha, anvartha and ankita; they include the so-called adjectives, pronouns, numerals, and ¢) the seven cases in the sin- themes from Samskrita, altered or unaltered); b) genders; gular; d) the two numbers; ¢) the augments of the plural; f) particularities regarding lr{ A 4 in ortho a,cquiret The II, On the form of the signs that are used as Letters 1 (akshararfipa, aksharasanjiakara, aksharasanjiariipa, varnasanjie, akkar, 0 varnanka, cf. §§ 217-241), ete. 13 10. XKésava, the author of the Sabdamanidarpaga, remarks on the origin fhe first of articulate sound: — * By the wish of the individual soul, by means of suitable 1 (vital) air, at the root of the navel, like a trumpet, the substance of sound (Sabda- dravya) originates which is white (svéta, dhavala); its result is (articulate, 18, aksharatmaka) sound (Sabda)”’; and: — “The body is the musical instrument, the later dus i’ hful tongue is the plectrum, the individual soul is the performer; on account of the yout operation of his mind (articulate) sound (Sabda) originates which is of a white Saiskr colour (dhavalavarna) and has the form of leiters (aksharartipa).” also cou Inarticulate (anaksharatmaka) sounds, as thunder from the clouds or the roar so-calleg of the sea, have no representations in grammatical alphabets. Of t 11. There is a distinet letter for each sound, and therefore every word “ sea-gir is pronounced exactly as it is spelt; thus the ear is a sufficient guide are pey declension; g) uses of the cases; h) remarks on number, gender, construction, etc.; ¢) VLV b ) III. Samésa or com- declension of pronouns; j) change of gender; k) change of letters. position of words, compound bases. 1) augment, elision, and substitution. 2) the six R classes of Samskrita compounds. 8) the compounds called kriyAsaméasa, gamakasamésa, 1n thi and vipsAsamisa. IV. Taddhita-bases formed from nouns and verbs by means of certain suffixes. Kannad N Akhyéta or verbs and their conjugation. VI. Dhatu or verbal roots (or themes). VII. Tadbhava (Apabhramsa) or words corrupted from the Samskrita language. ¢.§2 s VIII. Avyaya or adverbs, ete. o (see \ Besides the Karnatakabhashédbhtishana there is another grammar of the Old Canarese The language in Samskrita shtras, etc.,, the KarnAtakasabdinushsana, written by the Jaina Bhattakalanka, dated A. D. 1604. It was edited by B. Lewis Rice, c. 1. E., M. R. A. 8., vav Director of Archeological Researches in Mysore, late Director of Public Instruction in letty Mysore and Coorg (Bangalore, Mysore Government Central Press, 1890). According to its Thy learned editor it treats, in the order given, of the alphabet; avyayas; sandhi; nipatas; gender; tadbhavas; case affixes; compound words; uses of personal pronouns; uses of the P](rht singular and plural numbers and numerals; taddhitas; verbs and verbal affixes. lfl The first grammar of the Canarese language which appeared in English, was compiled (Suddp by John McKerrell Esq., M. . s., who dedicated his work to the King (George IV), Madras, November the 16th, 1820. In his He calls it “A Grammar of the Carnataka Language”. dugyay Preface he states: ¢“In the course of my labours I have derived much information from a b () { very scarce and accurate treatise upon the ancient dialect, which was compiled, about seven 9 6 A, W centuries ago. by an Indian author named Céshava, and by him termed 3%&5385&35-’8@0, or ¢ The mirror of verbal gems’ 8- ve e s e I feel myself under considerable obligations to Edward Richard Sullivan, Esq., of the Civil Service, for his kindness in procuring for me 1§, from His Highness the Rajah of Mysoor, the work of Céshava.” MeKerrell’s work has With 211 pages. pmllOu — in orthography. After the exact sounds of the letters have been once acquired, every word can be pronounced with perfect accuracy. I} The accent falls on the first syllable. 12. The name of a pure, true letter (Suddhakshara) is akshara, akkara, or varna. 18. Each letter has its own form (akéra) and sound (Sabda); by gin hle the first it becomes visible (Cakshusha), by the other audible (Sravana). 14. da Kannada is written from left to right. te, 15. The Alphabet (called aksharaméilé, akkaramalé in the old and the later dialect and also Ondma in the later one), as an instruction for the the youthful (balasikshé), consists of 57 letters, in which case the so-called lite Samskrita and Prakrita kshala (the vedic letter z of certain schools) is also counted, though its form and sound are the same as that of the 0ar so-called Kannada kula. Of the 57 letters forty-eight (in various forms) are notorious on the od «sea-girdled” earth, ¢.e. throughout India, and the order in which they ide (pa) are read (pathakrama) is as follows: — e A B w0 v 93 RVR & b ) el i e iR v Sl -l v o VUl il ol ol o ) com- ) ) =6 ~ o509, The letter os ¢ §iX aS @6 aG 55 jfis wG 2‘\36 g 56_ Q:'};S 06 @6 sg 36 ndsa in this list is called kshala in order to distinguish it from the true tain Kannada kula. In Samskrita the kshala is a substitute for the letter ¢ (or (¢f- § 230); in Kannada it is a substitute for the Samskrita letter age. o (see § 31). rese The other nine letters are:— o % &% o5 €9 o 3 X oo, Of these e 2 % & $° ¥ are peculiar to the Kannada country (désiya), and this o By nifl letter o< is the kula. @ 0 118 The four letters o Q X oo, together with the above-mentioned forty- atas; f the eight, form the Samskrita alphabet of 52 letters. In true Kannada (acéfagannada) there are 47 indigenous letters fled (Suddhagg), viz. (the vowels) © & @ & ov 4B & 0 D % % W; (the 4 his anusvara) o; (and the consonants) s¢ &3¢ n* P G o o dyr e ésS 56 Zgé Cgé‘ {ao) ex6 oJ P At @86 @6 ;56 -&6 &6 p & 35 @6 ms @6 FSG e R ey O yen QQG \6Q€ i ¥ ® 4 or 16. The consonants (§ 25) that in the preceding paragraph appear me with the top-mark ¢ (3¢, o, etc.) which indicates that they are to be ha pronounced without any vowel after them (asvaravidhi, vyanjanavidhi), e A 6 — i are commonly printed with the sign = (a sort of crest, nowadays called talékattu) added to the top (@, A, etc.), in order to point out that the short Kannada vowel a (@) is to be sounded after them. In the case of ten consonants (DB R Bwwoed €9), however, the crest does not appear on the top, as it is so to say incorporated with them. It is supposed that the sign — is a secondary form of the Kannada vowel a (e, see § 24); but why are certain other vowels (u, 1, ov, enp, ete.) united with crested consonants? See § 37. 17 The following is a tabular view of the forms of the 57 letters of the Alphabet as they are written and printed nowadays (¢f. § 6), the Their sounds consonants bearing the sign - (the talékattu, see § 16). are expressed in Roman characters with the aid of some diacritical marks, and illustrated, as well as possible, by English letters (the illustrations being given according to English authors of Kannada, Télugu, Tamil and Malayala grammars): — 0. a. This letter has the sound of the English initial a in ‘about’, ‘around’, or of the English final a in ‘era’, ‘Sophia’, ¢ Victoria’, or of the English i in Sgnn’, teup’s (There is no letter in Kannada to represent the sound of the English a in such words as ‘pan’, ‘can’, ‘sat’, ¢hat’). This letter has the sound of the English a in ¢ half’, ¢ father’, ¢ (299). & or of the English final a in ‘papa’. 2 1 This letter has the sound of the English i in ‘pin’, ¢in’, ¢ gig’, ‘folio’. = 1 This letter has the sound of the English i in ‘machine’, ‘ravine’, ‘pique’, or of the English ee in ‘eel’, ¢feel . Q e N u This letter has the sound of the English u in ‘full’, ‘pull’, ¢ put’, or of the Bnglish 00 in ¢book . enp, 1. This letter has the sound of the English u in ‘rule’, ¢ crude’, or of the Fnglish 00 in ¢fool’, ‘root’, ¢ shoot’. 230. Ti. The sound of this letter can only be learned from the mouth of an efficient teacher. (Rustics pronounce it like the English ri in ¢rich’, or also like the English roo in ‘rook’.) 93000 (33R). ri The sound of this letter is that of lengthened #. oy, Iri, The sound of this letter can only be learned from an educated native. (Rustics pronounce it like the English loo in ‘look’.) 1 3 . drl, The sound of this letter is that of lengthened . (The letter is a mere invention of grammarians.) This letter has the sound of the English e in ¢end’, ‘leg’, *beg’, ¢ peg’. o This letter has the sound of the English a in ‘ache’, ‘fate’, ‘late’. 7. &9 al This letter has the sound of the English ai in ¢aisle’, of the English ei in ‘height’, or of the English word ‘eye’. W 0 This letter has the sound of the English o in ¢police’, ¢polite’, ‘romance’, ‘produced’, ‘potential’ ‘located’. (There is no sound in Kannada to represent the sound of the English o in such words as ‘on’, ‘hot’, ¢got’, ‘object’. Uneducated Canarese people use to pronounce this English 0, & (&) making, e. g. lost @372, hot &), top &93.) éfl- 6. This letter has the sound of the English o in ‘gold’, ‘old’, ‘sold’, ‘ode’. Z3. au. This letter has the sound of the English ou in ‘ounce’, ‘out’, ¢ mount’. o. m, This letter, when it is final, has the sound of the English m in ‘botom’, *bartram’. (When in the middle of a word it is followed by a consonant, its sound depends on the character of that consonant, as in the words 80%, 3o, Ron, Rox, word, Vo, Word, ToldF, Tod, wod ’ @W0R, Wom, Fod, Togy, Fom, Foy, R0z, RoJR', Roww, o=, B0, RoBE 9, BodW, Rows®, BoB03Y, do:&, ROFIV, ROBY; cf.'§8 34. 39. 40.) 00 This aspirate has the sound of the English initial h in ‘hat’, ‘head’, or ‘hiss’, the aspiration proceeding directly from the chest. (Rusties, in reciting the alphabet, use to pronounce it aha the a having the sound of the Kannada letter ©.) X. h. This aspirate is used only before the letters ¥ (ka) and & (kha), and o then pronounced like the letter o () 00 (€9). rh. This aspirate is ased only before the letters ® (pa) and $ (pha), and then has a sound somewhat similar to that of the letter s (h) (In Samskrita it is often represented by the letter =°, sh.) F. ka This letter has the sound of the English initial k pronounced with the Kannada letter ¥ (a) after it. kha. This letter has the sound of the preceding one, but aspirated, the aspiration proceeding directly from the chest. ga This letter has the sound of the English initial g in ‘gold’, ¢good’ pronounced with the Kannada letter @ (a) after it. gha This letter has the sound of the preceding one but aspirated. Zj na This letter has the sound of the English letter n before g in ‘king’, 7 ‘ring’, ‘long’, ‘song with the Kannada letter ¥ (a) after it. 1) ca This letter has a sound similar to that of the English ch in ¢ charity’, ‘charm’, ‘chase’, ‘child’, ‘church’, pronounced with the Kannada letter @ (a) after it. (¢3). ¢ha This letter has the sound of the preceding one but aspirated. € -& Ja This letter has a soand similar to that of the English j in ‘judge’, “join’, ‘jar’, ¢jackal’, pronounced with the Kannada % (a) after it. — 8 3. jha. This letter has the sound of the preceding one but aspirated. e, ha. This letter has a sound which is something like that of the English ni in ‘opinion’, ‘onion’ (the n being nasalised), pronounced with the Kannada letter @ (a) after it. & ta This letter has the sound of an English letter t that is formed by curling back the tongue, foreibly striking the under part of it against the roof of the mouth, and pronouncing the Kannada letter © (a) after 1t (It differs essentially from the true English t, for which there is no letter in Kannada. Natives, however, use to represent the English ¢ by &,) tha This letter has the sound of the preceding one but aspirated. da This letter has the sound of an English letter d that is formed by curling back the tongue, forcibly striking the under part of it against the roof of the mouth, and pronouncing the Kannada letter © (a) after 1t (It differs essentially from the true English d, for which there is no letter in Kannada. Natives, however, use to represent the Knglish d by 3. See also sub-letter S, ra.) dha This letter has the sound of the preceding one but aspirated. na This letter has the sound of an English n that is formed by curling back the tongue, forcibly striking the under part of it against the roof of the mouth, and pronouncing the Kannada letter © (a) after it. (No English letter answers to it; see under letter &, na.) ta This letter has the sound of an English letter t that is formed by bringing the tip of the tongue against the very edge of the upper front teeth, and pronouncing the Kannada letter © (a) after it. (There is no corresponding letter in English; see under letter &, ta.) tha This letter has the sound of the preceding one but aspirated. da This letter has the sound of the English letter d that is formed by bringing the point of the tongue against the very edge of the upper front teeth, and pronouncing the Kannada letter @ (a) after it. (There is no English letter which answers to it; see under letter @, da.) dha. This letter has the sound of the preceding one but aspirated. na This letter has the sound of the English letter n that is formed by A QL placing the tip of the tongue against the very edge of the upper front teeth, and pronouncing the Kannada letter ® (a) after it. (There is no Natives, however, use to represent the corresponding English letter. English n by ¢, na.) (68 pa The sound of this letter answers to that of the English initial p pro- | nounced with the Kannada letter @ (a) after it. o pha This letter has the sound of the preceding one but aspirated. | fRa— e Y 2, ba. The sound of this letter is the same as that of the Efiglish initial b pronounced with the Kannada letter © (a) after it. &3 (33 33). bha. This letter has the sound of the preceding one but as- pirated. 530, ma. The sound of this Jetter is like that of the English m pronounced with the Kannada letter @ (a) after it. 8025 ya. The sound of this letter is the same as that of the English initial y in ‘yard’, ‘young’, ‘you’, ‘yonder’ pronounced with the Kannada letter © (a) after it. & T, The sound of this letter nowadays has an indefinite character like the Samskrita r (which Canarese people occasionally mistook for their letter ©); in ancient times it was formed by placing the point of the tongue against the very edge of the upper front teeth, producing a trilled, delicate sound of the English letter r, and pronouncing the Kannada letter @ (a) after it. At present the sound may be said to resemble that of the English initial letter r in ‘ring’, ‘risk’ with the Kannada letter © (a) sounded after it. (English people often used to represent the Kannada letter @, by their r, as in Canara, Coorg, Dharwar = 38, FRER, 0703E.) e ra This letter has the sound of a very harsh English letter r pronounced with the Kannada letter © (a) after it. Nowadays it is not unfrequently represented by a double Kannada S, 7.e. S, (see § 39). ©. la This letter has the sound of the English letter 1 that is formed by bringing the tip of the tongue against the very edge of the upper front teeth, and pronouncing the Kannada letter ¥ (a) after it. (The Kannada letter © has neither the same sound as the Samskrita © nor that of the English 1. The Samskrita letter © is very often represented in Kannada by the so-called Kshala; see §§ 15. 31.) oSl 1) The sound of this letter resembles that of the initial letter = in ‘wife’, ‘woman’, the Kannada letter @ (a) being pronounced after it. 2. Ba, The sound of this sibilant letter cannot be represented by any English letter; it is to be learnt by hearing an efficient teacher pronounce it. (Englishmen, however, have represented it by the s in ‘sure’ and ¢ session ’.) X. sha. This letter has the sound of an English initial sh (as in ‘shoe’, ‘shan’) that is formed by placing the tongue near the roof of the mouth, and pronouncing the Kannada letter @ (a) after it. A ~ Sa This letter has nearly the sound of the English initial letter s in “sat’, ‘sin’, ‘so’, the Kannada letter ¥ (a) being pronounced after it. 2 10 e QO N ha The sound of this letter is something like that of the English initial letter h in ¢horse’, ‘husband’, ‘hoop’, the Kannada letter © (a) being pronounced after it. & la This letter has the sound of the English letter 1 that is formed by curling back the tongue, forcibly striking the under part of it against the roof of the mouth, and pronouncing the Kannada letter © (a) after 1t (It represents two letters, viz. the kshala and kula; see §§ 15.31.) 3. la. See the preceding letter. 3. la. The sound of this letter 1 is formed by curling back the tongue and 16 pronouncing the English letter r, e. g. in the word ‘farm ', in a rather liquid manner (Dr. Caldwell) with the Kannada letter © (a) after it. he 18 Of the above-mentioned 57 letters sixteen are vowels (svara). by 19 The initial forms of the vowels are as follows:— §6 — Kannada Present Tami], Present Malayala Dévanagar i Y (2 = @Yo a of & 2 a & HT A a8 0r i i SNM i i (8 I8 zf:j;\f@ o6 ) 82 Tl rl 111 161 it & g8 9 0 o Tl f1 & Ir1 Ir1 3 Iri JiL il o Iri Iy S I 1 I o pa) e Wl E () th é oy e a Ya (S al an al & al o) 7 al ) & 0 th Tt (@) & 0 (SN au A au ear au ) aa 0n —— gk s sh 20. Seven of the vowels are short (hrasva), viz. @, @&, ev, 33, @, o, 1 %; and nine are long (dirgha), viz. @, &, oW, $B, «, 2, D, b, 0. Short vowels have one measure (méatré or prosodical instant) or by are ¢ckamatraka; long vowels have two or are ubhayamatra or 18t er dvimatra. A consonant (%, 2, etc.) is said to last half the time of a short vowel. L) Occasionally a vowel is lengthened to three measures in pronunciation or becomes trimétraka or protracted (pluta). See §§ 140, a and 215, 6, nd letter k. T In prosody a short or light vowel is called laghu, and a long or heavy vowel guru. Such a long vowel is long either by nature, or by position (4.e. being followed by a double or compound consonant; see § 38). 21 Vowels are again divided into ten monophthongs (samanakshara):— ¥ o, A 8, 90 9w, 3 3R, @ «, of which each pair is of the same class of letters (savarna) whether its letters be read in regular order (anuldoma) as & ¢, 2 &, etc., or out of the usual order (viloma) as ¥ », & %, etc., or as v, & B9, &, ete; and (in Samskrita) into four diphthongs O 0 % 3. The vowels o o % T, however, are no (sandhyakshara): real diphthongs in true Kannada; in this language the radical forms of 5 are o3, ©®y, and those of T3 are o5y, w3 (see § 217). Also the vowels o & 2 % are such as belong to one class, or are savarna. 22. By the way it is observed that, in so far as Sarmskrita is concerned, the true Samskrita vowels (§ 15), except a and 4, 7. e. 12 of them, are subject to the peculiar changes called guna and vriddhi (see § 217). Though the terms are mentioned by the grammarians Nagavarma and Késava, their use is not stated. The same is to be said with regard to the term nami which they mention, and which in Samskrita denotes all the true Samskrita vowels, except a and &, as changing a dental into a cerebral. The Upéndravajra verse cited by Naga- varma and Késava (probably from a Purana), in which the terms guna, vriddhi and nami oceur together, is in praise of the 12 Adityas. 23. In pure Kannada the vowels 335 33% o o are not indigenous; they are found only in words borrowed from Samskrita. 24, If the initial vowels mentioned in § 18, follow a consonant, each of them uses a secondary form that is always compounded with one of the consonant forms (see §§ 36. 37). 2% — 12 The initial forms of the vowels together with their secondary ones §€ appear in the subjoined table:— Initial forms W Secondary forms fi %) (See § 16) ) % &R Jo ns JVM) gilal WAND QS(“ % e ——— ;ZJ :§ W bt 4 G —“Re () Remark. The form of the long initial vowel ©, and the sign ¢ (see § 37) nowadays regularly used to mark a long secondary vowel form, are somewhat uncommon in Kannada manuscripts of the 18th century. Initial ® is written 0% (euphonical 03 4-22) in them, but to be pronounced ¥, e. g. 0T>T, = 953 ; only oceasionally we find ¢ for ©, Initial ¥ appears as 3% in them (euphonical 35° + © +the sign ¢). The existence of the sign ¢ at the time that the manuseripts were written, becomes further certain e. g. by the form of the verb ®%e> (miru), to transgress, etc. repeatedly used in them, a form which is used also nowadays (29> for Do¢e9), %, ® and % however in vowelled compound-syllables (see § 36) are generally not marked as long by the sign ¢ in the manuseripts, e. g. 3#e93 stands for 3RENT, wod for wWesS, 22 for 088, B for T, c?:))é for %)Qé, 2363 for 23ee®, DR for @wery, ete. Cf. also § 41. 13 — €8 25 The consonants (vyanjana, bilakkara) of the alphabet are thirty- seven in number. Bearing the sign which indicates that they are sounded with the short vowel e (a) after them (see §§ 16. 17. 36), they a‘re the following: — di o=k o e O 2L 3 9§ 83 oJ & otock & a6 g el o)) o - a & o g P N 8 X | (%fi, the kshala) & e The same in present Tamil :— Z: ] 8 b 601 sia El oy T w on The same 1n present Malayala: — o) oW 6YO) Qv 51D 3 @0, ;;; oY1 AL 2 oM ¥ Q) jon ol The same in Dévanagari, as far as they exist therein: — lly he 3 T & €} on E) 98y N 4] o B g ) lly for :: AL Egi :g: a4 4 g a # 4 9 g —— 14 — 26. It will be observed that 25 consonants are horizontally arranged e in sets having five letters (pancaka) in each. Such a set is called a the series or class (varga), and a letter belonging to it a classified letter (vargikshara, vargiyakshara). o Al 27. The five classes (pancavarga), each from their first‘letter, are Wa distinguished as kavarga (¥=nF), Cavarga (@¥nF), tavarga (83nF), W tavarga (8=37iF), and pavarga (£S0F). 00 The remaining 12 (11) consonants are unclassified (avarga, avarglya). and 28. The letters of the first perpendicular column (called vargapra- ally thama or vargaprathaméikshara) are hard, those of the second one disa (called vargadvitiya or vargadvitiyakshara) hard and aspirated, those of It the third one (called vargatritiya or vargatritiydkshara) soft, those of the are fourth one (called vargadaturtha or vargalaturthikshara) soft and aspi- Bad rated ; those of the fifth one (called vargapanéama or vargapantamakshara) are the particular nasals (anunisika) of each class, which are used as lett(. such when, in combination, they precede a consonant of their respective Ief class; see § 220, and ¢f. §§ 39. 40. Y The difference between hard and soft eonsonants is not expressed in words or §4 in the old Kannada grammars. By the way it may be remarked that modern Kannada grammars eall hard ones karkasavarna or parushavarna, and soft ones we f to de mriduvarna or saralavarna. t0 wg 29. Kannada grammars distinguish between consonants with- slight breathing or weak aspiration (alpaprana), viz. 3¢ @& &° 8° *° n° ¥° @ World o o, and consonants with hard breathing or strong aspiration (maha- Obsgry prana), viz. &° &° o @ »° P F §° §; but practically alpaprana t() spe is an unaspirated letter, and mahiprana an aspirated one (see § 218). (for Nowadays some call an aspirated letter gandakkara (male letter) and (for Plage an unaspirated one hénnakkara (female letter). mfi: 30. In pure Kannada the consonants 3 and 8 do not occur; they Rl are found only in words borrowed from Samskrita. freg l g I e 31 The letter « in paranthesis in § 25 is called kshala (§ 1) Vagte, (for & by the grammarian KéSava. It is, In fact, i1dentical as to form 0 sy and pronunciation with the kula, as KéSava terms it, or the true of 119 0 mg) Kannada ¢ (§15); and it is, therefore, unnecessary to make it a separate letter. It is often used by Kannada people as a substitute for ik to g Samskrita e, the sound of which in the Samskrita language apparently "ill —— 15 ed bears a dubious character for them, one that is neither their (@) 1010 | 4 their ¢3: this ¢ is Késava’s kshala Cf. §§ 2217. 2928 fer 32. The consonants £9¢ and ¢% have become, at the present period obsolete (although they are of intrinsic value for Dravidian philology) are .36 A Already the grammarian Késava had to state in which words the F), was used according to previous authors (see § 233) In bygone times £9¢ e was occasionally changed into o5 (see § 236) occasionally into ¢ occasionally into the letter which it preceded in the mediaeval dialect va) and nowadays it is as a rule represented by ¢ (see §228), is exception- 1} ally converted into a fellowing letter (as DG, for WEIY Or WEIF) or one disappears also altogether (as wg, for wedy %0 or ucsg'r--fig) ¢ &9, 0 of in the modern dialect, appears as o or as a double 5 (). qs and 6—36 the are up to this time in common use among the Tamil Malayala and 3 The Badaga people; €35 occurs still in the present Télugu (see § 3) 14 letter &3¢ appears still in Kannada literature of the 18th century a8 In the course of this work the ancient original forms have been f1ve retained 1) Some historical dates regarding the € (based chiefly on the very valuable inscriptions ords or sasanas published by Dr. Fleet in the Indian Antiquary are the following (¢f. § 109) 1 From about 600 to about 900 A. D the 036 as throughout in use; in that period dern we find e. g. €32, a paddy field, 20w 3p,F0%, seven hundred persons, @ 30, seventy, @€ ones to destroy, = to be (could this be the 2D, to stay, to be, of the Dictionary?), T to wash joht We meet also with the strange forms TR (for T¥7%), below, PreT (for SweT), the 8 world, /¢ (for 3wy ), having gained or overcome 2 From about 900 till about 1200 A.D. a transition of the €*° into F and %%, is A observed, as we find @0, pleasure, and IDIP (for TAFLN), seventeen, H¥S (for TeLdS), P to speak, in a sdsana of 929 A. D.; $€> and F® to wash in one of 951 A. D.; @& F&mowso (for (for €@ ®Wowv), it immersed, V& €0 ), having fallen, $0 (for HCV), seven, D% 19) (for C2) increase N & (for mi6d2), a paddy field, in one of 1019 A. D.; W% (for W), and place, etc., % (for €3 staff, and 72 a paddy field, in one of 1048 A. D.; 87€¥ and 871195, to shine, ? (for we¥), place, etc., TW (for V), to wash, in one of 1075 A. D al®, to be, and %0 (for NCEV), seven @ (for «t¥), to destroy, @Vow® (for gVowld), a rent- hey free grant, in one of 1076 A. D.; S7€»* to shine T o6 N. of a place, €d*® to be, and SB FOs (for T ©F), F[pmws (for F[pritde), to praise, SNS F (for I7C2), fame, TIPS (for TICF), waste, % (for (), to ruin, in one of 1084 A. D.; =»% (for SW3), may he make, iyt 19 (for ©@nCd®), to dig, @¥ny® 29 (for 7¥), a ditch, SZp7Iws (for [pricd?P), to praise, S¥E (for J7ICH), é form to shine, 811%, (for SME2), fame, Sp% (for HJpM?), praise, i3, (for 813, fame, in one true of 1123 A. D.; &2 1, N. of a place, We, place, ete., B, to speak, S0, to see, TIDEI to make, and T&EOF (for T ), to wash, @ (for ©€>?), to destroy, Spn%, (for Bp7C3), praise, R 8n$, (for 81€1)), fame, in one of 1181 A. D.; &pnI%* (for Sp7Ie¥), to praise, S (for SMEH), to shine, ©%® ) fOL 0% (for CI° »CV), seven, in one of 1183 A. D a¥noo (for CPm00), he will descend, in one of 1187 A. D. Cf. § 228; § 160, 1 enlly et S 16 P — sibil 33 The throat (kantha, koral), the palate or roof of the inouth nan (taluka, talugé, galla), the head or skull (Sira, mastaka, miurdhan), the teeth (danta, pal), the lips (Oshtha, tuti), the nose (nasiké), the chest (ura, érdé), and the root of the tongue (jihvamftila, naligéya buda) are (sv: the eight places (sthina, tana) or organs of the letters. f the The letters pronounced from the throat are guttural (kanthya); they are {10 o uEe e 8 (X) Those formed by means of the palate are palatal (tlavya); they are @ o 0 @ ¢ wdp ¥ & ; (L and o have been called also kanthya-talavya). Those coming from the head are but cerebral (mirdhanya); they are 33 3% & 3 ® @@ ©@ O €9 |/ &9 ) 3 The letters formed by the (sometimes these letters are called lingual). =) clud aid of the teeth are dental (dantya); they are & & I 3 I F I © ~ 3 Yowe Those pronounced with the lips are labial (Oshthya); they are en ew giver S - oY $ W 2 30 B oo; (sometimes & 3 are called kanthoshthya, and <3 sylly has been called dantdoshthya). The letters uttered through the nose Vowe are nasal (anundsika, nasikya); they are 2 0 0 3 o (g has been orest called also kanthya-nasikya). The letters o3o © &3 (called semi-vowels) are not nasal (anunsika, niranunasika) and, under certain circumstances, nasal (anundsika, see § 219); there is no mark in Kannada to show the difference. The letter pronounced in the chest or pectoral letter (urasya) is g, That uttered from the root of the tongue or the tongue-root sibilant (ihvamiliya) is X. When two consonants are produced in the same place or by the same organs, they are called ékasthani (see §§ 238. 239). 34 The labial sibilant (or aspirate) oo is called upadhmaniya, . e. a letter that is to be pronounced with a forcing out of breath; it only occurs before the consonants z and 3 The nasal o is called anusvara or after-sound, as it always belongs to a preceding vowel; from its form are ] that in Samskrita is a dot, it is called bindu, and from its form in Kannada where it is represented by a circle or cipher, it 1s called sfnya or sonné; it is a substitute for a nasal letter, and when it does not stand 8yl at the end of a word (where it is pronounced like the English m, ¢f. ey tllem § 215, 8), its sound depends on the following consonant (see under letter oin § 175 §§ 39. 40). The sibilant (or aspirate) g is called visarga or Serje visarjaniya either from its being pronounced with a full emission of &fter breath or from its liability to be rejected; if followed by another letter, it is frequently changed and occasionally dropped. The tongue-root fOll()v —~— LY — uth sibilant (or aspirate) jivhdmfliya X can only stand before the conso- the nants = T and 2, host 35 The Sinya (sonné or bindu) o and visarga g are semi-vowels are (svaranga) and semi-consonants (vyanjanianga). They and the upadhma- niya oo and jihvimiiliya X are so to say semi-letters, and as such form are the 4 so-called yogavaha letters, ¢. e. letters always appearing in connec- are tion with, or depending on, others. ave Visarga, upadhmaniya and jihvAmiliya do not occur in pure Kannada, are but are used only in words borrowed from Sarmskrita. AN w 36 As has been stated in §§ 16 and 25 the crested consonants (in- the cluding 2) % %= %0 & @ W © 69 €9) are always sounded with the short 3 ¥ vowel e (a) after them. When any of the secondary forms of the vowels ) W given in § 24 is united with the consonants to form vowelled compound- syllables, the consonants partly retain the shape they have when the 0086 vowel & (a) is sounded after them, but mostly lose their talékattu or heen crest. Here follows a tabular view of them:— jels) 168, ) ko) N the & 1) T; 5 873) @ lant .a_ a & §a @ @ ame P ¥ LL ko & B)ed 0% T W) i ) Z 06 2L A <o & o L ou : 45 © only At When the union has taken place, the vowels, like the short es (a), form are pronounced after the consonants to which they are attached. i} n 37 In the Southern Mahratta country the vowelled compound- finya tand syllables are called ka-gunitakshara, ¢.e. syllables that are multiplied or increased in number after the manner of ki, this being the first of } (f them; and a series of them is called balli. In writing and reading the eftel series of the ki-gunita-syllables it is customary to place the consonant % 0r after which the short es (a)is sounded, at the begipning of each series. p 0! 3tt81 A table exhibiting the union of vowels with consonants is given on the following two pages:— 100t 18 P — ] ka =3 ki & ki e ki =2y kel IR ki F, kri Q T kt‘ S— 2 kha 59 kha D khi De khi 29 khu 2H khit 2y khri Lo khri n n ga o g N gl ne gi no gu nw gl ) gri 7153 gri 3 gha 3> ghi gre ghl 50 ghu >R ghii 2 7o gha 7'.)“‘9) ghri P ghri 259 Na 20 11 @ ni 22 nu %P Nl (2 nri 1 I(;z 150} ¢l % Gl o8¢ Ci 23y Cu 2N Cll aéa ¢ri - COrl " ¢ ¢h a ¢hri T VD) & thi e Chi ¢35 Chu Vi) ¢hi ejg) ¢hri e i <t e T AT e A ot 8 8 ) =9 ]2 ol 23e ;1 229 Ju w0 Jl jri ] %) jri T W £ 3 gyo Jhd oo Jhi o9pe jhi d)‘a_) jhu Sp e jhit dyp, jhr jhri nri 4 &L na oo i gr® 1 &ee i Py N corde Nl el nri Ly &3 ta o th & tri tri W tyo ta 4t e ti edo tu ) % 3 tha oo tha ® thi ®¢ thi 3y thu 3» thi thri i g, thri d 2 da zo da a di &e di > du 3de du @, dri dri d dha p) dha & dhi ge dhi &> dhu g» dhi @ ¥ D dhri Fp dhri ;:; € Na &3 ni £90 U £o nit nri I /o 1A g9 ni O 3 ta 3» ta 3 t1 3e t1 3 tu 30 th 3 tri i 3@ tri 3 tha fp) tha & thi &e thi 3o thu 3H thi c;je) thri 3 0 0° thri g g da oo da & di &e di oo du gw di Gy dri s dH1 2 dha oo dha % & dhi &e dhi 35 dhu 3R dhit 3 ) dhri 5.5939 dhri S na o9 na Q ni Q¢ ni S nu SR nit ~® nri é,) nri S pa o9 pa & pi »e pl % pu e pl 59) \plji Ty P S:: D pha 59 pha phi ¢ phi 5 phu P phit 5’.3)@ phri 8.:))5@ phri 2 ba 259 ba 2 bi e bi 20 bu 2o bl L bri EJ G ¢3 bha 5o bhé 2 bhi %e bhi 23> bhu 23 bhi 2;9) bhri By bhri 2‘" Ty =9 ma 359 mi Dy mi 239 mi 300 mu =00 mil afiae) mri ;Sogp mri 30 yri o3 ya o359 YA o yi 0O» yi o300 yu ooyl 03‘?3} yri g ra Go I'a B ri De 1l 3 ru S ri O 1 :ii 3 rri &9 ra £9s9 Id eo? 1l 6396 ri G TH e3» 1l €2, tri Oy Irl : o la o9 la ol Se 1 oo lu oR i ) Ir1 o il : Vi vri vril o Va =t Y e Vi %) vu ;gpvfi =) vl 3 sa 39 S4 3§81 de St 30 Su 30 Si Srl STl i, 0° sha =9 sha &, shi ¢ shi R shu R0 shi ) shri rméa shri ) STl Sa =9 S4 ~ s1 2@ sl o su R sl g :3& sri gl i he & hi %o hu =H hit hri hri &9 ha &e bi ) B 5 la oo 14 ¢ li Pe I Sy lu S0 1 g Ir1 Ir @ Bl g2l i s LB Il e la e3s9 14 e I ce i e lu cow lu 1ri &35@ Iri > g l 19 — 1 # klrl 3 ké Je ké 2, kai 20 ko Fwe ko z» kau 3 klri hn &3 khd 23¢ khé 9% khai 3% kho s30¢ kho o5 khau 2 blyi ;1 khlri [l n glri n glri i gé ne gé A, gai RR g0 Rwe go e gau hrf ghlri 5 ghlri 5> ghé s»e ghé >0e ghod gf’yé ghai 3% gho 572 ghau I 3] nlri oo nlrl @3 né @3¢ 1né zagé nai =3p» 1o 23R¢ 10 %5 nau Il o3 Clri = ¢lrl %3 Cé %3¢ C8 22, Cal B3H €O 2w@e €O oF® Cau ¢5® Chau hrd oy c¢hlr1 ¢ ¢hlri ¢§ ho eS¢ Ché 63, Chai 3» ¢hd e3¢ ¢hd % jlri 2 jlri 23 )6 230 jé 3 jO BRe jo e3P jau %, jai hri Cbp«z jhlri &‘sz jhlri S jhid Bpe jhe &, jhai G jh e Jhod gy5@jhau o3 e 3 nai or3n no cops® nau 1I'1 P nlri s nlri 53¢ 1é ¢ 3, 5 ard3Re 1o 8 1o e té &, tai 3w to Bpe to &5 tau I1 Gt 4t Il 3 thlri 3 thigi 3 the Be thé 3, thai 30 tho 3»¢ tho &° thau 1 2 dlri 3 dlri B dé ®e dé @, dai wh do Bwe do @ dau e q&:ae dh@ hrl 30 bl % dhlrk % dhé ge dhe z‘?g dhai gw» dho z° dhau 11 & nlri &0 nlri 0] l}é e né L N0 ®° hau Sl 9-7395 nai e 1o 1 3 tlri 2 i 3 té 3e té 3, tail 3n to Swe to 30 tau z thlri i C;Z thlri AC,Z 3 thé e thé 3, thai B3 thd 3¢ tho o thau dlri z dird 3 dé e dé &, dai 3w do Bwe do 5° dau i 0 22 dhlri 3 dhlri DL.Q cfi dheé 3¢ dhé q393 dhai % dho B@¢ dhod z;"a dhau i nlri nlri 11 % 8 neé v Re né 393 nai R 1o e nod 2 nau L_] o Ir o) sv pe ¢ pé 3P po 2pe pd SO pau )11 593 pai SC; phlri S phlri 5 phé 3¢ phé "1—35 phai 590 pho pe pho 55° phau hrl blri 1ri @3 bé 230 bo 11 % 3¢ bé 23& bai Bwe bd 259 bau o3 bhlri 'Z hlri 23 bhé 3¢ bhé ¢ bho e3¢ bho AL bhau 23, bhai )hll ool )] 191 ) o mlri =0 mé 330¢ mé 3%,) mail 3H» mo 53RQ¢ mod =32 mau mIl os;z ol osg2 Flri ol yé o3oe yé 033&‘y&i o3» yo o3Le yo o35° yau i 3 ré Je ré 8P 1o 3¢ 1o o° rau 11 g’q rlri g«z rlri 89.)) I'a,i &5 rl ri 63 phrd es3 ré es3e ré e93m 1o es3ne 1o 6950 rau Il 3 6;.‘)3&)) rai ) 1lri e)o2 lri S 1é Se 1é S 10 Swe 16 5 lau 1 viri D vé 5O vau 11 ;z vird 3¢ vé Efié Vai 3p v 3pe VO §lr1 3 &lrd C 3 s8é 3¢ se 30 S0 3¢ 50 Fo Sau 11 ] shlri o ? shlri = shé K¢ shé R0 sho Rwe sho =° shau i %gz slri ~ S].I'I = sé g“g s}%ai 20 so =0 sau Re sé Né sal JPe 0 311 = hlri = hlri ® hé ¢ hé 20 ho B¢ hd =? hau hd £QS hal ¢ llr1 11ri 3 18 e 1€ lai S 10 Soe 10 ¢ lau il s llri &y Hari “Q e3 18 e3¢ lé 3% lai e3Bn 16 cBmwe 16 eI lau Jri — 20 — At school the mark ° used for the vowel » and the mark = used for In the vowel o are called Ro@zy, Mo&=y or ro@o=Ry, the mark o used for VF ey 18 called %Jaafigo the mark 3 that descends from a consonant as the nwv o sign for the long vowels ¢g and & (as in 9, ete., and in 5o and Nse) W&’ [ is called %ee, and the name for the mark ¢ is ezpr. FH TRC BP RWEe b etc. may be written also F) Fe 77) V)¢ ete 208 38 If a consonant is followed immediately by another consonant 4 or by more than one, the two or more consonants are written in one part group (samyoga), and thus double or compound consonants (dvitvikshara, [n e ottakkara, dadda, daddakkara) are formed (¢f. §§ 20. 240) o a When two consonant are compounded, the latter consonant is Gy written underneath the former one or is subscribed when three Tt il consonants are united in one group, the third is written underneath attach; the second one; and when four are compounded, the fourth is subscribed uasal to the third In true Kannada a combination of more than two consonants does not occur N 0 In reading, the upper consonant that is crested (including 2 o 2 UO% ka ¢ 0w » 69 ey, § 36) is pronounced like a half consonant, and the % or ¥ short vowel o9 (a) is sounded with the lower consonant if three 0r @20 consonants are compounded, the second one too is pronounced like a 4 R half consonant, and the short vowel e (a)issounded with the lowest one and so on and = 111 ta] 39. The subscribed consonants, as a rule, have the uncrested shape that is used for the union of consonants with vowels (§ 86); but jin the N 3& case of seven letters the shape is different, namely @ appearing as o3 as . glas © as and 3 often takes DY s Sas |, &0 as \’ ) ) also the form of « in wh1ch case it is written after the following ¢4 3 consonant, but sounded before it; the same is to be said concerning 9 remark The following are some examples of double and compound conso- £, nants:— V1 Sargy kka, T kkha, ¥ kéa, 3 kéha, T kta, T,; ktya, ¥, ktra, & ¢ ktrya, taltkag ¥ . ktva, ¥ kna, ¥, knya, ¥ kma, % kya, % kra "v”'fikrva, g kla, ? . kva, Wayg ¥ o3 ¢ kvya, © ksha, T, kshma, %, kshya, T , kshva; & khya; 7 gga %, ghna; Y by, nka %3 cca vl 2] B jja, ¥ jha; P néa; 8 tta, & tna; ® nda, s ndrya; tka, S tta, 2 ttha, 2 tna 3, nna; ppa; %) bba P; bhya o)) mpa, Wag ) mba, =) mma, <, mra, =) mla; yya rka, O rta; @ réha; ¥ lpa; a3 ~ Y Lt S, vva: 3 sta ; shta, 36 shtrya ska, ® sta, ) stra; ; stha, ® sma; ® hna. Soup ds for Instead of o, 3, g, ete., &9, &9, etc., the forms Br 3F, @F b etc., &3¢ for 30F, etc. may be used The ‘upper nasals (for the sake of convenience the in writing) may take the form of the circlet called sonné (§ 34), so that 8 8, 5) _a_) L% ) (%} Q S 8, B 3, 39, may appear as o%, o ) otd, , 03, 0%, of, of, oR§ 0D, oW o:’)a e. g.in @o¥, Totd, wokl, Mok 03 eflocs Wol, BoB, Vo, ToVL, 0V, V053D See § 220 ant 40 If one of the secondary forms of the vowels (§ 24) is to form a one part of a compound consonant, it is attached to the upper consonant \a, In reading, it is sounded after the lower consonant, or if more than two are compounded, after the lowest one, just as the short vowel e b1 e of § 38 hree The following instances may be given, in which also the way of afl attaching the vowels appears in case the sonné represents an upper hed nasal (§ 39):— two ©3 akki; © appi ¥ appu; @) or Yo ammd; AT or OB indu; AT, or BowW imbu g0, or BRF irmé; W& otti w8 or o ontd; FBY or Q? Fo% kanki TP r Fo% kanéi 03 kukshi; 0 or 3902 kunti; F¢¥) kéldu; 38 or 30 tandé; Wed or Wod bandi; A,¢stri; A9,¢3, stdtra; AT sthana; BRI he or R0V, hénnu See § 220 hree ke a 41 Many Kaunada people pronounce and write the initial vowels D B Vv MW O D W % ungrammatically, prefixing o3¢ to v FH o D one and ¢ t0 o0 B 2 b, thus: oy W ol cde; ) =p 3p 3pe. Regarding initial o they use also, instead of o3y, o3y e. g. o3y, 030 £o for 39, hape ota ) Initial & may appear as o3, e. ¢. ofisau% (—Ne)z%) 033%’ the (=%, see §125; § 265), also when attached to an mma,l consonant 6. g, 98 TS (=0e), 'SJ@QQB (=330e8). Initial 2 is vulgarly changed into =3 fakos e. g. s@m for we)fid and 33 into %, e. g. a,;) = for ;3;3 =), Cf. also il remark under 8§ 94, gu 42. With the exception of jihvimfiliya, upadhmaniya, anusvara and 0080 visarga, all vowels and consonants (the latter compounded with the talékattu or with any secondary form of the vowels) are named in four L] ways 1) by simply using their sounds, e.g. e, &, etc., B, &9, etc kva, 2) by adding 393, ‘making’, to their sounds, e. g. ¥398, #3598, BFT Ghn&, TFO0, NT0, NT0, 39590, 3F90, BuTd0, BTOT, LTO0, YTV, [T0 dryas €°T93, OF90, RTT; 3) by adding 3 to their sounds, e.g. ¥3, 43 P& f:aé "v“é 35 65 @3 rea:% and 4) by adding Zcor, ‘letter to their Ipa3 bOllI]dS, e. g eaficcr faafiw;' BSIEEF, IVSEIF, IILDF ) hnd 22 The letter © (o°, F) is generally called ez or Jes3, also when the ¢ A is a substitute of &9, NS 43 The system of punctuation in Kannada manuscripts is the same 4t as the Samskrita one, viz. in prose at the end of a sentence the sign | s is used, and at the end of a longer sentence, the sign || ; in poetry the § sign | is placed at the end of a half verse, and at the end of a verse, ias 10 the sign ) . (In certain prose writings, as in Dévarasa’s Sanandacaritra, abore 1 the sign | is put not only at the end of a sentence, but also after single 4%, words or a number of words.) 44, The Kannada figures used to express numbers (anké, lékka, 4 4 he sanikhyé) or the numerical figures are:— A% s)i 9 D B 8 & [« Rk G o 1 1 ( 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 § 181, ¢ fort her They have been adopted from the Samskrita, wherein they first appear in the 5th century A.D. The Arabs who borrowed them from DR the Hindus, introduced them into KEurope, where they were called Bu Arabic figures. of @ Y e VN\) (oi III. On roots or verbal themes 2 (0 45 Before introducing the chapter on declinable bases (IV.) the Ofem e | he exi author thinks it desirable to treat of the so-called verbal roots (dhatu), as very many nominal bases are derived from them (§ 100). &, 3 46. “A (verbal) root (dhatu)”, the grammarian Késava says ¢«is the 49 basis of a verb’s meaning (kriyarthamfila) and has no suffixes (pratyaya, vibhakti) ”, or, in other words, a root is the crude form of a verb. the Eng the ey 47. Ancient Kannada grammars based on literary writings,' dis- fo ngt tinguish between monosyllabic (ékdksharadhitu) and polysyllabic roots o) Wi, 8 (anék&ksharadh;itu) g These roots have been collected by Késava in his ‘root-recital’ (dhatupatha) or list of roots. (W0 ( D In this list there appear as monosyllabic roots e. g. &, D, ©T°, RO%F, FRWF, TR, TR, 3, Te°, 30%°, B¢, TN, AT, KPS ; i boy Dotl()[]s as dissyllabic ones e. g. ©0, D, oA, 0D, B, IB, zo%a%, BP0, %é.i&, z—‘aéfl%, TR, W, T, TWIF, DWOF, TRWIF, 3¢oF, aoeazg, FRWIF, 100f 4, of £l § TWIF, VTS, IF0F, TOPTT, ©RY, 3PN, PNy, RPeRy, Berdy; as Hig e trisyllabic ones e. g. ©¥@T, @Bord, wCINY, 3TF), 9%, 8B, NOD), ver y, i — 23 the ¢ FARY, WHRY, WOWIF, JIWIF, a:omg;, THL, BIXA, DERY, %Jo%%zéa, Demory, YWPRy; as quadrisyllabic ones e. g. ‘@@%&Gm, 23?,53@:33, WBBY R, same . S0ee9%Famy; and as quinquesyllabic ones e. g. IBTORy, THSPRY, MOB igh | MIRR, IRBORI, MW ADITI, TRHVWINR, WO ToNRRPE. y the verse, 48. It is a striking peculiarity of modern Kannada that it apparently it has no roots ending in a consonant without a vowel, so that e. g. the above mentioned roots Bof, Bo3F, FPWF, TROS, TR, 37°, T, I%°, single TR, AT, RPES®, WHTF, 39T TP, by the addition of the vowel e lekka, as a help to enunciation, have the forms of %3y, fiojooqs, BR300, TR, %?fa#i), 3Ry, T, 3%, TR, AR, ANELI, BTy, SPT, TP in it (¢f. § 54; § 61, remark; § 166; the present-future participle in § 181, and also the imperative Fo® for FHo3 etc. in § 205, 2 and 3); further that such monosyllabic roots as &, 93 and e, appear as godoo, j first from Qw3 and 3ecdw in it (§§ 162. 163). called But we have, in the modern language, e. g. the past participles BT, (of @Es%k)’ 3:5% (of 33 2> Fwodw (of Fweday), Acdy (of Roday, § 155), ELN (of 30), LSS (of 2280), ¥, (of D), BRI, (of ¥REY), WBeR3, (of 2exea9, § 160), 33o, (of €9, § 161), B (of Weaso, § 162), PERY (of evedy), Teoy (of Boe), Bcay (of By, § 164), which forms prove ) the i), the existence of roots with originally final consonants in it oo (eg?, 3, Iwor, ete.), s the 49. When carefully examining Késava’s list of roots, one finds that the English term ¢root’, in many instances, does not properly express Lty&ya’ ) the meaning of the term <dhatu’. The verbs gDy, => and D&, in § 47, B s for instance, are formed by means of the suffix @Ry, from =0, and 70018 2R, Boor and ddvedor, by means of the suffix ¢y, from ©oo and in bis QTS (see § 149 seq.); %Jas@s:%aéo is composed of %@98% and &R, w3 S, of WAy and =@, Beowind: of BTRow and 33, wOTIoRRNG %Uga of wesTe BR%*, and so on. Such verbs are, according to Kuropean 96 notions, no roots. Késava’s term ‘dhitu’ may here and there denote a root ¢. e. the primary element of a verb or primitive verbal theme, but 3, APy often stands also for a secondary verbal theme and a compound verb. i B His definition of dhitu, therefore, is that it is the crude form of any verb which is not always a real root. i) — — 24 Al 50. In further discussing the subject of dhatus let us use the general term of ¢verbal themes’ for them. literat 51. o There are a good many monosyllabic verbal themes in ancient Kannada the vowels of which are short, e. g. @os, enm’, 209°, OT°, WO, il T3 (or RoKF), R, JeF, WO, WeF, Soee; other monosyllabic verbal short themes have long vowels, e. g. &5¢f, To03°, TevS, 300°, HIOF, H[T’, EN) T, T[RCKF, Dok, HeSSS, [PETT, PeSF. being past 52. Some monosyllabic verbal themes appear with short and long vowels, e. g. @956 and &%, e and e, e and L, HC and by a 9%, 8% and oo, 3o and 39TF, 3%¢ and 39%”, wo* and 2390F, § 16: 2005 and 23903, weX¥ and Necy¥, Feof and mpef, It may be supposed prim that the short vowels are original, and the long verbal themes secondary. § a shy (About zaof and z390¢ see § 210.) ey 53. DBecause some monosyllabic verbal themes with a long vowel the change, in the past participle, their long vowel into a short one, as & euph makes its past participle @3y (§163), zom* %"9@5)5 (§ 164), IR¢ ;3\@5%, of ) e B3R, D Y (§ 162), and maoxs® =39, (§ 163), it is reasonable to sylla think that their primitive vowel has been short (regarding som® ¢f. T&°, assl) TR, w9y in the Dictionary). A similar lengthening of a vowel is also 011] seen. in the verbal themes 3we and o, as they have also the form of Par 203 and &R, (See also the remark under § 59.) In such cases too we refe may consider the long themes to be secondary. 54, In §48 it has been indicated that nowadays there are no diss monosyllabic verbal themes in modern Kannada, the vowel ev, as a help o i to enunciation, being added to make them dissyllabic. A similar atel tendency to lengthen an originally monosyllabic verbal theme with a short vowel by the addition of the euphonic vowel = is observed already (V1 in ancient literary works in which we find e. g. w® for s, v9 for (hl\ o, Rodo for Rexs, RO for Res, wo for wer, WO for wer, FO for diss 30e¢, and also v& for T¢s, 1§ ¢ Concerning the lengthening of an originally monosyllabic verbal i I theme with a short vowel by adding the vowel en it may be remarked Wy that this practice too, now and then, took place already in ancient Pt literature; thus, for instance, Bwer and Iww,, Rers, and R, Boek als and =ye0 were used therein, an é 25 ———— > the Also monosyllabic themes with a long vowel were in ancient literature occasionally made dissyllabic by the addition of e, as e. g. Cient Fey* was written Fesdh, Seof Sewy, and Jweef Awew (¢f. § 166). WY 55 There are several seemingly dissyllabic verbal themes, with a arhal short vowel in the first syllable, that end in @, as @&y, wR, wury, Sl SR, BRI, VWY, RIB. Were these originally monosyllabic, the final ey being merely euphonic or a help to enunciation? No doubt, for their long past participles efiéjgj, raéjgd, W‘“gy j,:jéjgj, gjéj&,' 22)‘@3& and oed, are formed and by adding the formative syllable gy (which by assimilation becomes &, 0wy, § 164, 4) immediately to e, @rs, wues, etc.,, which thus represent the 0sed primitive themes. aty. 56. A small number of seemingly dissyllabic verbal themes having a short vowel in the first syllable and ending in €99, represents itself in e, (ED0), BC, NEDY, (), e, 369, J€ and JpEde, Like wel the e of the themes @@y, vy, etc. in § 55 that of ened), ete. too 1s a 5 & euphonic addition, as their past participles are o3y, 333, 3y, (instead 0, of pZy), 33y, 33y, (inspead 33y), £y, and Jpdy, ‘the formative syllable gy having been attached directly to the radical €9-5, which by i) assimilation was changed into gs (§ 160, 4 § 161). They are, therefore, ls originally monosyllables, and as such primitive themes. (For the past ) of We participle of &3 and 23¢9y we have as yet no grammatical or other references.) 59. Also the verbal themes ==, €=, and DFy are not radically 10 elp dissyllabic, as their past participles are 032,313_ (for @), gjzézi, and Bedo (for @), the formative syllable 8o having been added immedi- Jar ately to the radical zf with the proper euphonic change of consonants | 4 (§ 164, 9. 10). dy 58. We have now to examine another class of verbal themes that or (like those in §§ 55. 56. 57) are customarily pronounced as if they were 0r dissyllables. They have their first syllable long, and their second syllable s R. Three of them are Sweds, Bedo and =5y, and the final ev of al these is simply euphonic, as they appear also as RBReCHs, 23023 and od 2990 (§ 183, 4). They are, therefore, true monosyllables and as such ot primitive themes. (According to the Sabdanuiasana, stitra 85, there are 7 also 30930 of Zopdy, 3L o of Twdy, stitra 514 FeY) of RN, and slitra 545 SN of ¥Ry, JeeI 0,¢ of Ssezmv.) Of. § 234. 3 ] [ 26 and Others are @, NBE, W@, TR, THRI, JoBY, etc. Although no direct monosyllabic form of them exists to show the merely euphonic sylla I o B —C— m— character of their final v (but see the Sabdanusasana’s ©£95,% in §58); 6] they apparently are monosyllables, because their verbal nouns (bhiva- introc valanas) o5&, enwdl, fobl, Totd, TR and mokl are formed exactly like dN\h Swedd of Rwerdy, Betd of Bery, and Ikl of Ssez. Cf. § 242. 7 L(a.c syllab 59. A further number of verbal themes similar to those mentioned in § 58 are the following:—es&9), e, 2D, TEH, 6N, TN, n, in 180 F9C20, 3685, . JREN, JREE), TREN, T, [ALD, e, (HEN), syllab 20, 339, DWW, TG, A, The difference is that they have viJ W d 00 &30 as their second syllable. As a rule their past participle shows the formative vowel & (Rl etc. § 166), and the €9 remains before the W f9 formative syllable 3 of the present-future participle relative (ewtdas, Lie ete., § 180, 3); but there are exceptions. Thus we have e3or (wCF+ 39, (onsor § 160, 4), unF (&L 4+ 3, =33, § 183, 2); 5L and Fo%oF (TOCHF + W, ~ARQ WUWN § 166); 2Re0s and 3RIJF (3REF -+, §180 6); 3P0, SREROF ancier (3R + o, § 166), 3Rt and SRenF (SHLF 4%, § 183, 2); o mediz =, oos3F (Rt 4, § 180, 6) and Fomr (T +%, § 183, 2); L%, d ) DOBIF (98 + ), § 166), HESI and meIF (HCF 4+, § 180, 6); partic EED°, WOWF (WL + 1Y, § 166), 20e2033, and De3F (DS + =, § 180, 6y 62 follow SR, SPRF ([WEF 4T, § 183,2) and IpF ([WEF+ § 180, 6); oy Q3P and JPBF (DI + %3, § 166). At the same time we have the AN verbiLl nouns 23 (for H3F of D), oL (for 3L2), S5 (for SE), and the past participle T30 (for Sodor of matdy, § 159). It must, K b therefore, be concluded that the final ev of the verbs is nothing but a Y help to enunciation, and that they are originally monosyllabic themes. It may be remarked that the long vowel of Ta€9), ety and FseC ai\o is short in the nouns g9, ©E9% and e, (see ¢ 60. As has been stated in the preceding paragraphs (51 seq.) there ) are many and various monosyllabic verbal themes in Kannada. U verbal themes may be adduced e.g. As examples of dissyllabic ano i @i, DN, Wi, B, A8, BB, I3, 3B, BB, VB, T, W, B, B8, A, hag . ;é ©D, B3, WP, B, ¥S B, WA, 39, WP, NCP; but with respect to 0 by their finals @ and « it is to be said that they are not radical (see § 157; g § 169, letter o, 3.4.5; § 172; § 180, 5; § 243, 16, 18. 21. 23, 84, 25, 26. 27), j — 217 — 10 and in the vulgar dialect some of the themes may become mono- e syllabic (§ 151, a, ¢ ; § 158; § 165, a, 7). J 61 Another class of verbal themes which in KéSava’s list are Va introduced as trisyllabic ones with the final syllable e3o, are really ke dissyllables, which by several of them can be proved, e. g. by %N 2009, Rwt9y. 2569 and Bge9y, as these occasionally add the participial ed syllables zo and = (see § 59), with elision of the merely euphonic vowel N ov, immediately to €% (w¥roF IQ00F, ete., nwrsr, WBSF, § 166 jj )s § 180, 6), by 9,69 and B389, as they always attach the participial ve syllable 3 directly to e3¢ (CO,30F, B%¥,3.F) and by 8369, @RI e 3o 69 and ¢xe9, as they do the same, changing the € into & I (€9 3y,, ¥Ry, etc., § 160, 4) y Let it be remarked here that dissyllabic themes with the final consonants of @6 o and C9F such as eYold TS 235300°¢ By 3RCIeF. 2CIe%. 3ruys, @it are never written as trisyllables in the I3 ancient dialect although they are occasionally trisyllabic in the N medizeval dialect, and always so in the modern one (see §§ 48. 166) An exception is formed by a few ancient themes when they suffix the particle »®y, for which see § 151, letter a, ; 62. Some instances of verbs that are always trisyllabic are the ) following :— @3y, BBy, WHEIFOBY, SoVRY, FIRIONY, JDGEIF, BTow ; 20T sao FOBY, &Soomc%o TTRY, BRTBY, 3633, TN w’ D%, WCIRY, ) Besxo; and some instances of such as are always quadrisyllabic are: W ) WHTAY, iz ORy, R0 &; quinquesyllabic verbs are e. g. FTTRR, @O N Pt A M) Two trisyllabic verbs with final @, viz. ¥n@s and Doy, appear also as dissyllabic when their forms become 3ncss and RIS (see § 183, 4) More or less of the trisyllabic verbs can be derived from monosyllabic Of the above-mentioned terms WRIF0TY 18 or dissyllabic themes. another form of 2 oom which has sprung from cect, to live. BBRFY has arisen of ez, to fill etc.; FoRoBo of 0@y, to beat; Soerty of Zoed, to bend or be moved out of a straight or standing position; Fogoony of 30R, to bend; aduEor of ddvos, to be stretched; 3gozs of X33, to join Do0oea0 of Zodoss. to contract; Bory of €, to be mixed 5550 of w(s 4% — 28 — to spread ; 30353 of 3ed, to grow cool; T30, of 39, to be mixed; 3% 66 vowels of the noun g, adjustment, compared with the verbal theme =8, to partic be joined, etc.; ee9zy of eese, to learn,to know; 5@&#3 of s;&)gb, to trust (¢f. § 49). (§ 16 Of the above-mentioned quadrisyllabic verbs %50=, comes from the may, p) 81 noun %x3, gsmg’)gb;jo from @rflasfiog);' fi%bm may be connected with %fi%, 1 the to dig. Fom) Of the above-mentioned quinquesyllabic verbs ema%)fi;j%bdo 1s composed of eve o and =@y (¢f. § 49); regarding IZBHR> see § 211, remark 2. ) aI 2) & E 63. We have scen that the vowels » (§ 54) and ey (§§ 48. 5459, 61) at the end of verbal themes are often simply euphonic, also w and B T vy d) N oJ when they seemingly belong to them (§ 60). the ver 64. KéSava says that there are no Kannada verbs which end in O3 2 aspirated consonants (mahaprandkshara), the nasals = and oss, the pue—— W, # consonants >°, o3 s and ¢, and the ‘double consonant o With regard l()flg an to ¢ it is to be observed that his statement was true only for his own 8 a time, as in a later period many verbal themes with final ¢ (Ry) were locatire in use, this letter often taking the place of = (3); see e. g. wePRy, that of BALP T, PVENTY, FHITY, TRV, 3oy in the Dictionary. Cf. § 223. 4,% ar 65 KéSava’s list of verbs (§47) is so arranged that the alpha- betical order shows itself in the final letters, ¢3¢ and 9 coming after x¢, ~ Of verbs that form a single vowel, he adduces only two, viz. & and b, and of such as consist of one consonant with a long vowel, twelve, viz. 67 T, ¢, Te, 3¢, 3RE, BN, Tp, 239, We, B¢, e and Doe. pl‘akriti) The final consonants and syllables of the verbs in his list are the Verba] following :— but el B, 0F0; T, oT0; 2y, 00 (AWY); W, owd; &, & & ; 8, B, B; ®°, 6, B; 3; 68 ol e L TR Y- R AR 5030; modyigios Ola%; 0°5,.0,78: &f, 8. & By 0 kindsy Ui (3R, &; U R e ML (CF. 8§ 149-151,) The finals often are essential parts of the verbal theme. That they 1’ [ Verbg by are not always radical, but sometimes mere formatives, e. g. B, 0BV, Ry, ony, 2, 0wy, &9, £99, appears to a certain extent from the §§ 62 ity 9 o (A Yoy VS - and 63. We add as a peculiarity that what may be called the root of : 0f A ) A4, To verbs of frequentative action, is seen in the first form of reduplication, 2, by as in 003 :Soo“‘&iiom (§ 211,6), 3R%¥ 30T 3e%n, B¢ B 3$n (§ 211, 10). formed by ff[)m HOum 29 —— ) 66. A peculiarity of some verbal themes 1s that they change their root {0 vowels. This, in the ancient dialect, is especially seen in the past fo participle, in which @, takes the form of @zég 22y that of 3230 (§ 164, 10), &z that of %*éjg (§ 164, 8), 36D that of T3, A9y that of the 139, 363 that of 33y (§ 161) eorto that of 2w ) o that of Jp7o % (§ 164, 12), oy that of B0 0%y that of 3wtdy, (§ 164, 17) 22PN in the later dialect has become Bt 1 A BB FE FTOTO sed BRT, &)Céo é\@v&) S893° 8%y QUMY W o@fi& ogffig and o & 3=y and 233, =IeVy already in Késava’s time appeared as OES3 59 i as W, VY aS WS FPe¢ must originally have been Foes and as I (not %?Jae‘)) 18 a killer and JIRD to take, TIYE as the verbal noun Observe, further that FRYy exists also as Bo | 1n UO3s® appears also as wod®, TooIF as FROIF, 3903 as 3RGNE, PO as the PB, TOIF a8 T, BAOWIF a8 2B0K0, and that several themes have a rard long and short vowel (§§ 52.53) Observe also the change of « into own . o and and that of ey into enm and %, in §101 that of enes of the yere locative into ¢es, and that of o of the instrumental into « in §109 that of o into o and en, that of ey into o in § 247, d, 9. 10. 13. 17. 18 ag‘), 23 &t 2. and that of . o into w5 in § 251 pho- o] IV. On declinable bhases d b, (4 67 According to grammar there are words called bases (linga Such a base is defined as follows prakriti) «It does not express verbal action (kriyé), has no case-terminations (vibhakti, ¢f. § 105 seq.) the but embodies meaning (artha),” v); 68. According to the grammarian KéSava hbases are first of four d ) kinds, vez 1, verbal bases (krit, krillinga), . e such as are formed directly from hey verbs by the so-called krit-suffixes attached to the relative present and past 0T participle (krit, see § 102, 8. e; §§ 177. 180. 185. 253, 9, d; 254), e. g. to ¢ 62 BeBOS, TOBOT, PO TPRRT, BeRW, JET, JNRWRT, THRB, IOR; FORT; PIAAT it of BoNAB, CoARR; 2HRIAB. IR £10 2, bases with other suffixes (taddhita, taddhitalinga), i. e. such as are Qa"fi) formed by the so-called taddhita-suffixes (a7, 3¢, 3¢, ©9, &0k, ete., see § 243) from nouns and verbs, e. g. #zfi’m mm BOBIIY, :)o@;j%# &5, #és —_— R 30 3, compound hases (samisa, samésalinga), i. e. such as are compounded of they have 30 7,81 two (or more) words, e, g. SOMWP, YIN P, FoBIDY, JooonR o3 ; PHUIS, &e@qae:ie), 2 <) DI 8,800, AW (cf. No. 4, b; see § 244 seq.); Rl ) dW 4, nominal bases (ndma, namalinga, namaprakriti) or crude nouns (see ANY, % § 242) which include n @) words not etymologically derived by the public, but commonly known 1ot been and used in a conventional sense (rtidhanima, ditandma, niséitanama), e. g. R, same sha Y, %, that by their number of syllables (aksharavritti), also without being 0T 4 compounds in the generally accepted meaning (asamésaté), may be monosyllabie, ! ete., and even quinquesyllabic, as 35, 303, BeIR, FINX, FU LT, ) Ly ) ) words whose meaning is intelligible in themselves (anvarthanama), ff §20 expressing either quality (gunénurtipa) of beings, as @, TKNIT, GIHPINK, o | [T, or circumstance and condition (arthanurtpa) of beings, as RePmY, JR pronouns SORT (or RWIZRT), TARWIY (¢f. No. 3, so that Késava enlarges the compass (sattrinant of nominal bases by including also compound bases, and, we may say, also all bases in | the others); which the ¢) words by which one of a species is pointed out (ankitandma) or proper Dy ) \-031 names, as o8, FAZ, InW, 9T, which though occasionally without a clear il meaning (sarthakam alladuvu), are current everywhere in Kannada and other languages. see g 86), but with Besides these four kinds of declinable bases there are three others, Y37, 33 k which will be given in § 90. dr ~ O o the first Remarks. T, 1, When a verb (kriyé) stands at the end of the description of the character in§ T0),¢ of a person, it too has been called a krillinga by poets, e. g. (with case-termina- hases iy | tion) SFRRYT¥C YTF ©F OF® 9RF0, he who was as Jainas are. OF 8rg % 2, When a series of words (vhkyam4ls) is considered as a whole, as in n attributes, poets have called such a series too a nominal base, e. g. (with case- {‘J@%a’ [ terminations) ©%0m> JTZow¢ cfi;fiorfiom%&dm fiaéo;firamfics e5699%30° ; ém%?@\s‘%s ¢ 3 %?ofm%ifiid Be30; fiota%%ée%fifi@o; AnTFINFoTo. deelinab}e V%03 { ~ 69. A word is termed gy or o5 in grammar. &, however, has 6, two additional meanings, signifying also either a nominal base (§ 68) i Kallna§ with a case-termination (vibhakti) attached to it (nimapada) or a verbal s theme (dbatu, § 50) with a personal termination (vibhakti) attached to NP FE- Wy .I)'v‘m’ it (akhyatapada, kriyapada, §§ 144. 192). defi]inab]e 70. Not only Kannada words do belong to the nominal bases or crude (t nouns (linga, nimalinga, namaprakriti), but, as seen in § 68, also words ) wJ“Q ; that have been adopted from Samskrita. These often exhibit the form —— 31 c— ed of they have in Sarmskrita dictionaries, in which.case they are called & 139, ROX 8 terms, €. 9. DY, PO, TNY, FVTIT, B0, T, PISE, PIT, 3 % Qs SOR, IR, 23,8, RS, efis%, Ag, ¥, 8, ¥, NO, O, T, i) (see 30D, B3, 33, 0%y, R, e, Aedy, Ted, wy, A, TS, eo. <l Another series of nominal bases called 33 530 terms which have nown not been borrowed from Samskrita, but of which nearly all exist in the same shape in Kannada as well as in Samiskrita, are 0%, eories, @i, heing ahic, FoT, %”.@Q% (Jpeed or %J@Q'@gj), fie@a, no, ne%, NP, 3%, 3weoe, w’ W, WO, VO, S8, NB, 00, NS (SPo), 03 (VI), WY \ma), (¢f- §252, 8). Also the nominal bases &pd, Fowp @ are tatsamas. 308 72. Samskrita particles (avyaya) as ©80°, w0 IO, or Samskrita ), 88 8, W¢, 3w, oW , or Samskrita participles ending in ©3° pronouns (sarvanama) as D 1pass (Sattrinanta) as T,008°, 0ms®, 2,3>3%, cannot form by themselves declinable 50 all bases in Kannada; but compound bases (samasalinga) with a final vowel, of which they form the first member, are declinable, e. g. O3 Z0Fa), whdorn, s toper 3, 338. DT ; 3 3&&55, 5%235, 0308y N ; Eb'jea:ej&oésa, B3R, TS, zg)m » clear %8, The Samskrita numerals (sankhyavagdi) ©F, Q, &, ¥3)0°, Jowd (JowT®, and see § 86), ®&°, AT (RYIF), ©F, (VF,F9), I3 (IIF°), ©3 (¥33%) are indeclinables; but with suffixes (pratyaya) in the form of &30, 830, W3¥, Joudw, =Y, 387, hets, ©%,F, IIF, 323, and in compounds (samisa), as PTION, YFW, 3,807, 83 BFR, VoWLWS, c"ié&difi\)%", 'n))oé?jfifi, U%ng%, D2, 6537333688 (of which they form the first member), they are declinable bases in Kannada. %4, Samskrita words with final &, e. g. 3993 (which is one of the tatsamas actor in § 71), W03, BID, VT, AW, T¢I, change this & into » to become declinable mind bases in Kannada, in which case they appear as 398, 398, 238, ¥o®, a8, Gl or are DTV, terms. a8 10 75 As an exception to rule 74 the Samskrita words 409, WS, FI®, AsSe @5?5,55@, 150?&;5 %9, 2T and others change their final ¥ into © fo become P n % declinable bases in Kannada, appearing therein as ?%5, WS, ete. or being ©TI0IT, terms. has 76. 'When the Samskrita words 0,¢532 and ke a are used as declinable bases Z; 68) in Kannada, they appear as D83 or 0,¢3, 9T or uO\' ethal 77. Some Samskrita words with final ® (93033, terms), viz. G, VPR, BB, G, 5,3, W and LT (¢f. § T4), change this § into © to become ed {0 declinable bases in Kannada, and then appear as 3%, 9 93, ete. 78. Samskrita words with final 8 (83903, terms), e.g. 3 ¢ M0¢, AR, U0 e oo, ™0t always change their & into @ to become declinable bases in jord Kannada, and then appear as @3 , 9, etc. orm e 32 ] 79 Samskrita polysyllabic words (¥3:¢32F383%) with final 9\ (NRTITF, terms), e. g. H003)R, TR, DBWAT, FoTR, VVIP, change their ¥W into ¥V to The g become declinable bases in Kannada, and then appear as 85032, T80, ete. (§370) v 80. All Samskrita monosyllabic terms (93T 83Y), e. g. VY, IN, T, e, did not N & 7 e, PR, TR, remain ufichanged when used as declinable bases in Kannada. %0 essenti 81. As a rule Sarskrita words ending in 930 (%903 terms), e. g. D 9. 733359), ES?_)DQ)./ #C‘%‘F, fi@%, %JM%, 253335350), Ci)gooéé. &5@5@, E‘SD% remain unchanged declinabl when used as declinables in Kannada. ool 328, however, often takes the form of %93, also in P53, and that of P3, Besid in 2598, For the 90 in 13 the substitute ©0 (890333¢3) méy be used, so that 3, appears as N0 9, o 82. The declinable base of 3 may become ¥ in Kannada. words, & 83. The second class of Samskrita words that are used as nominal bases § 20 s in Kannada are such as end in consonants (J0%T0&, terms); but before they attributiy become Kannada declinables, they have to undergo various changes, as will be 34@33 ( M seen from §§ 84-89. numerals 84. The Samskrita words ®3°, 2,2, @8300°, S2808°, WIFF, TFYE, JeTITF, or < RT°, BT, RZVT0A, MoryIeE’, HTICWA®, RS B° and others add @ (@a:j) to their (a finals, and become 83, 3% (¢f. § 85), ¥2T, ete. dmfi'@’, 85. The Samskrita words @®°, ¥ 3¢ (T3 &%), 8,938¢ (I,330°), 930T° (90%), Thug Qe (BFF), oDWIRT, WS, IS (AIWF), WP, WTS, T (3u°), AITC A gy (RDwF), BT (3B°, of. § 84), Qb (BF%), D, W7 (TJI[NC), TT® (F93) and class, 1 others double their final consonant (or take & %97 3) and add @V, e. g. ©I, T332, indefinite £,8388), z):o%’o&, ete. Regy 86. The Samskrita words Dd%T®, S0LFFT’, PRTF, VBT I0®, FO°, FIFF, ) W,B 5 and others drop their final (or take ©3, S2¢T), e, g, 0%, TRFF, ete. that they But ¢H3° and ¥WwS, & dropping their & become 3 and ¥R, L0mipg]| 8%. The Samskrita words 0333%°, exma®, Jodae, JoHA®, JoIAC 3¢030m° ) either drop their final consonant, or double it and attach ¥V, in which case bases they appear in Kannada as 038 or 038Ry, 3 or $tmAY, =od or JAY, dlSs} lal B3 or BODRY, [T or S8Ry, 3,803 or 3,0039R0, e optj 88. The Samskrita word ¥0° remains as it is; neof (AT®) does so too, & 1ylg bat appears also as AS. 89. Lastly, the nominative plural in Samskrita of some Samskrita words, Hm hkq after having dropped its visarga, is used as a nominal base, e. g. 33,3 (of Z3°), 0300 (of 03T, @c,s%a’ (of @%afi), Re0203) (of AD), zsafiodsao.f) (of zsafioims), B 0f { F1033203 (of#modmfi), sscs?jofi (of :)%706), %83 (of wafob:gs), 3¢9 (of 303, %, mwog (of BRI @6). ey 33 c—— 0, Remark. @ty The grammarian Késava does not class the apabhramsa or tadbhava words (§ 870) with the words given in §§ 74-79. 81. 82. 84-89, probably because he did not consider the changes they undergo in order to become declinable bases naa, so essential as those of the tadbhavas. 9= 38, anged 90. In § 68 it has been stated that first there are four classes of declinable bases (lingas) in Kannada, viz. 59 off, é%é@of\, 398N, S30000n. [ @ g ) that Besides these we have a fifth class called &=3¢ o530, pronouns, e. g. BEY, B, I, BJYR, HV B, VI, D7, together with the ewd,, words, o, (&90), Jeo, Jvo (see § 102, 8, letters @ and b; § 137, a, 1, hases § 255 seq.); a sixth class called Rosam®R, mocomad or Howweed,, they attributive nouns or adjectives, e. g. 2930, 5093, WABY, WA, WF 30 9 %)__D ill be 3093y, (see § 273, seq.); and a seventh class called R0, or 760938{863323, numerals and appellative nouns of number, e. g. '“533 , 20RY, SIRE, TV, Rowe, wasr, (and, with the termination of the nominative plural, aFoe, ) their SN[, etc., and also To), Foy, TS, Fuwes, see § 278, 4). Thus there are 7 classes of declinable bases in Kannada. ), A subdivision of the numerals may perhaps be adduced as an 8th oy ) and class, véiz. the four words @230, B3y, ¥R, V3, 2 09 that express indefinite quantity (nirviséshapavan; see § 273, 8. 4). %) Regarding the avyayalingas or adverbial declinable bases see § 281. OFe, a1 What has been said regarding verbal themes (§§ 47. 51 seq.) that they are monosyllabic, dissyllabic, etc., applies also to the Kannada nominal bases or crude nouns (namalinga) of the ancient dialect. }ecfi)fif 92. In modern Kannada all monosyllabic true Kannada nominal (43¢ bases with a final consonant generally appear as dissyllabic, and all Cj-)"“)a dissyllabic ones as trisyliabic; in the medieval dialect the two kinds The lengthening, as are optionally used as dissyllables and trisyllables. 0 tOO) a rule, is done by the addition of a euphonic ey to facilitate pronun- ciation (c¢f. §§ 48. 54 seq.); monosyllabic nominal bases ending in o3 jords may likewise use the vowel = to become dissyllabic (¢f. the euphonic =0 ) o of § 54; see § 93), doubling or not doubling their final. o) 93. Monosyllabic true Kannada nominal bases of the ancient dialect 3)9)> end in consonants (or are ;;Soma;_sg terms), these consonants being ¢, ) 34 p—— 06\ We g 636 ! 0336 06 ( i) )’ ¢, w5 and £o¢ (cf. § 61), .9 T 5&9@ e BPe, B, 2o APTE, TOISF, 300336, TOO3ISE J90° 300° e 6, 89, (022°) FTOE ol TS (AL 5 2990%* 3Re%° 259C3¢ 2008 é)' oo DOE, TR s 7 7 e BRLSF, BeCo (23eass) See some exceptional forms in § 121, a, and ¢f the remark under § 96 (Obse In medieeval Kannada the above terms are also dissyllabic, viz o a8 § FTO, T 205D Recy, Jps B0, R, ALY, TV, 90, [N v being [O0T 2e0 23\50 T T SN FSRAIN, a9) (DN %) L WO WY T SR, WH Do, TPy, 3B, 2398, RPN, 330 (WELN) Kesa In modern Kannada they are dissyllabic (as far as they are used Instance therein); but see the exceptional forms in § 120, ¢ 9, g | 978, 29 94. Dissyllabic true Kannada nominal bases of the ancient dialect down in ending in consonants are e. g. eVATS 390° 3300, N!\‘CG TS FREIS he does c eV T3 B¢ 3 Tow)d 2 r\\“—\9‘; plev)l ROk, R \Wilive)] 99533 the B SRTSF, DL 38 ©f TGS FIVIYE 300%* e9CIs aness PO, c.%e) BiaMAN OB BF,CO¢ o0 T 3 239RICIS See a few exceptional forms in y § 121, a with In medieval Kannada the above terms may become trisyllables by erefo adding a euphonic ev; in modern Kannada they always are such (as reseml far as they are used in it), e. g AT, 3930, TR Y Observe that ancient 23¢Re% becomes 23¢R®, and ancient €65 becomes 9T, & E @ in modern Kannada 1§ Q 95. There are a few trisyllabic true Kannada nominal bases with a final consonant in the ancient dialect, e. g. B&PASS, [YCPWS*, PR &F % The last term occurs in the mediseval dialect also as RHAZ3 0 (with the 3 euphonic ev), 4. e. quadrisyllabic; but in the same dialect and in modern VA Kannada is trisyllabic too, viz. SR &9 an\)\ NOTY 96. Dissyllabic true Kannada nominal bases ending in vowels ( 5,098, i terms) are used in the same shape as well in ancient and medieval as VALY The final vowels are in modern Kannada (as far as they occur in it) I\ 9, &, e and o With regard to the bases with final eny it is to be ang observed that, in this case (see the contrary in § 97), this vowel may somehow originally have been euphonic, as it is nearly always elided i taddy before a following vowel in sandhi (see § 213 seq also the optional use § 215, 4), and as we have 5929 for zazEy, and Bwecd for Bwery Qumq VT, 3§ — 35 eme— o) We give the following instances: =un, 3@, o9, FR%, 33, 83, 7, W ) WO, RO, BPW, P, JPRF, 3REF; 8O, 298P, &, TP, PO, CP, F¢eI, D) W P TR 308y, O, (DB,), TP, (Bp 30.) 2200/ S5y, TR, [IVRY; 339, 1 of 38, TR, TCHB, (TF,), 08, SoEB, [oeck, XS, A3, oL, Jpesd, BS. Observe that =533 occurs also as [se, 3¢ as 305y, <IT as ITY), U 30 as 383, 0% as SwFF), WT as W), % as w¥sy, the unradical 200 erv being suffixed by means of a euphonic ¢, ) Remark. Q9 N Késava in the sitras and vrittis of his éabdamanidarpaua (but not in the 1sed instances given) occasionally adds a final euphonic @ to the suffixes ¥0° and ®O°, g0 that they appear as ¥3 and ©) (see pages 120. 121. 123. 124. 147. 278. 296 of the Mangalore edition) and treats them acecording to the rule laid lect Vo Jo.og down in § 215, 4. Also with regard to the suffixes ®@, @03, B8y, 9, ¥ il he does so (pages 264. 265). Compare also the ©¥3> (for ©°°) in § 119, a, 1 the ®oo (for ©o°) in §§ 109, a, 7; 120, a, 7; 121, a, 1; 187, 1; the %% (for 045 Wy %9%) in § 109, a, 7; see BRI 450 in a verse quoted in § 271. 10 97. There are a number of true Kannada dissyllabic nominal bases" with final &v in which this vowel is not euphonic but radical, and are, by therefore, never elided before a following vowel in sandhi, in this respect (cla resembling the final ey of the Samskrita nominal bases 1ogy, ©30, oy, Such bases are e. g. ¥, T, FEYD, TS, 3, T, 053, Z)?fig@, etc 5; 30890, TEI, TYCI, 0B (see § 128), and their euphonic letter in sandhi 18 ¢ (§ 215, 8% d). | 4 98. Trisyllabic true Kannada nominal bases which end in the vowels @, B, v and o, the ev being like that of § 96, are e. g. =oeP R, T lie B, zs%id, WLNT; TIB, PHTe, TE P, BRZ,LP, Rpod; BN, INRY, 11 TRV, VU, FBB, BWJRY, BTy, ?.fijae);fiogb, SRCINY, RN, So®, WP (see also 3T ete. in § 96); Foced, IRARDY, WAR, BAW, 5 as $RS, TS, FI,S (¥3,9). 16 The bases 8% and &J@o are also dissyllabic, appearing as oI - he and e, ) 99 As quadrisyllabic true Kannada nominal bases which are not plain 1 taddhitalinga words (§ 68, 2) may be mentioned WNTH and ST (see also § 95). 56 Quinquesyllabic and sexisyllabic Kannada words, as ¥n&3g, 86?007, T¢adom 2T, 30038T, are plain taddhitalinga terms. 5% 9 6 Taddhitalinga terms will be treated of separately in § 243. LS 102, 100. As will be seen from the Kannada-English Dictionary very according | seren deck many true Kannada nominal bases (lingas) are identical as to form with 2 & nint verbal themes (or are @ terms), e. g. efiéjfis’ pursuing; S©z, (Remak f piling; ez@y, cooking; 9_95\0)&, embrace; egef, flower; @3, ground state; The v 563, wave; ®JoTo, pressing firmly; e93j), hankering after; efisé%, fear; LM 09033, destruction; ey, coming to pass; ey, motion; gy, putting; of men, mé =, swimming; ewnoC, spittle; emzé&gs, making loose; ev@, fragment; those of s AR AN) wfl swelling; end, burning; engor, rising; eveny, crookedness; 4%, s A ne, sound ; euC3®, remaining; enpet, outery; ,pag&‘jfl waking; 39, 2 39) female sex raising; oG93, pouring; &9, rising; weordy, drying; ) fitness; 2.0, 039 \6’? y \AMJ7 reading; %éjgj, binding; &, cutting; z¢s theft; o unripe fruit; 3, T Fogef, cuckoo; égéjgy blow; ¢, coolness; TR €0, o, limping; Feny, § belongs 13 crying as a peacock does; 3@, obstacle; 3gor, training, etc.; 3ress, inanimate TR, F blame; 3eny, belching; 39@E3, entanglement; TRy, passing over; g, walk; Swexo, looking on, etc.; T[p, flowering; sBe3or, increase; $EI=¢, dy T This 13 g ffear; 03y, seed; WAL, soldering; 3%, crop; :3ueder, fondness; FpTorF, Pronouns infatuation; Rwes, saying, word; etc., etc. See § 242. maseuling Such nominal bases represent the true 29m=m=@I or P50 terms GG.Q ) v o 134 or verbal nouns, signifying the abstract notion of a verb either as to state or action. Regarding bhavavatanas see § 243 and the paragraphs Itis g quoted there. » 18 masey; Other nominal bases are formed by adding e. g. & or » to the verbal 5 T theme, as Qe¢ (from Jeys), mow (from zmoer), FHRG (from Fwes), %% the noypg (from %’—é}%) these and other formatives will be treated of in § 243. 3 (the Several nominal bases have a form in the ancient dialect that differs from B g e that which they have in the medizval and modern one, e.g. =, T*, R, . Vi W), (see § 233). their yopy 101 Kannada nominal bases derived from verbal themes by altering “]at anima. their radical vowel (cf. § 66 and sce § 242), are e.g. &x (from rg{d\)), RRIERY ”fit; wedy (from w@v), e (from @), Fedo (from 2Ry), 2Ry (from daiy ( 84 53@@33&)&? .\ BRY), 39 (from Bozy), Fwedy (from Fordv). Others alter that vowel and add a formative vowel to the final con- od i, The N sonant, as =20 T 3 (from &&9-¢ ) 3es3 (from 89=), ‘S (from RoF), 33 iel'ned 0ng Wl N Y 3 (from De). Bomb 1 5ol 3 1 102 (Theoretically) it may be said (the grammarian Késava teaches) that Very according to properties and qualities, there are eight genders (lingas) for the | with seven declinable bases (lingas, prakritis, §§ 67. 68. 90), and that there is also, e ta VT as a ninth kind, a gender of particles (avyayalinga) Compare § 116 (Remark that the term ¢linga’ thus has two distinet grammatical meanings.) state The nine genders are the following :— fear 1, The masculine gender (purn, pullinga, purusha) It is seen in the names tfing; of men, male deities and demons, e. g. ¥, :cS;S , 38, ®OR, W, AT, ¥R, and in ment those of some animals, e, g. 0%, @Jaefi‘a 650{1 5 B2, AVF, NOIB, FRF, F308), Iness S8, wAI.Y E 2, The feminine gender (stri, strilinga) It appears in the names of the female sex of the human race, of deities and of demons, e. g. $903°, ¥, O \(rvdd 933, 2902, WeD, MR, INI, TF frmt; 3, The neuter gender (nappu, napumsaka, napumsakalinga) To this Ufm belongs everything which is destitute of reason whether animate (¢étana) or i Wy 0 0uf inanimate (a€étana), e. g. ® 01, 30807, P03, Nz (but see Nos. 1 and 5); NB TR, FIR A?Cg :9@(3 2) 11 ey ) 4006 JIWT 4, The masculine-feminine, ¢.e. common or epicene gender (purnstrilinga) This is seen in the plural of nouns and demonstrative (sece No. ) remark RF, pronouns (¥T0, BFTo, ¥wFo) wherein the sume suffix €T° (4C°) is added to masculines and feminines without regard to sex, e. g. 9<0° JHTINTT, QIT® A eodd ferms 06 OJTE 1169 TF T0F J3 O° QUSTS L3830 VTTT L3e0INTE Cr. §8 119. 132 134 s 10 oraphs It is seen also in the singular, namely in that of 3£, which term by itself is maseuline and feminine. Cf. § 243, B, 7 »elbal 5, The masculine-neuter gender (punnapurmsakalinga) This is found in b the nouns 8 (or ARIF) QW (or ¥ 5), Joonew, WG, W BT 3, 3T, 3R, 0d®D b7 § %30 (the nine planets navagraha), @ (see § 120), WA, B3, STOV03IJW: 3 %939 and ~09®, which are used either as masculines or neuters Al 1§ from 2 1) The Kannada grammar called Nudigattu (p. 122) says that e. g. 3#e$&, S007i3) have %5 J their verb in the neuter, e. g. & ®RZ0ND Wy 3WPEFT0 B FTOOMIRY B®DLY FTARBWI W, but that animals, if they are introduced as speaking, have their verb in the masculine, as S92, |terin &0 288 &, or in the feminine, as WBYS 3, 5 . 9 2) With xeo*ard to masculine and feminine terms the Nudigattu (p. 122) saysthat in dis- ), N TRAI? dain (38%3,0) they may be used as neuters, e.g. ®3 72 NFO SPRZ W ? (fi ol FoRBoNS SRR [TPIFT 0D w3 ? WY JNPRY, O JITW In a Bombay schoolbook we find likewise S BoAR IRV, BALRY TIHRI B! The Nudigattu (p. 120) says that such is also done in ignorance (%2 &), ¢.e. if the con- ) col cerned ones are ignorant g BVITINTY BRI 53; BOBIN WS BB [T B, BRI LT g BRS IO a0 30030, 300030 ANT [oJIOND wR TOR0 @3, AT W TS e In a ;8 Bombay schoolbook we find likewise AT, WNRFRY & D, BIBITICO 53 P M 38 This Aljout D 6, The feminine-neuter gender (strinapumsa, strinapumsakalinga). is used for the nouns 3%°, FF, 0, AR and ©e=3, which are treated either CJ 80-( as feminines or neuters. wase from 1 7, The masculine-feminine-neuter gender (trilinga). This is employed e. g. (masculine) L) for the words 0o, ¢, 390 (see No. 8, letter @, cf. § 256), and the nouns 33), 9 (), DAY, oY, TR, AeY, IR, FI, VTR, 30039, which are either of the hases, § 68 masculine or feminine or neuter gender. 0) so 8, The adjective gender (va€yalinga) or the gender that depends on the 0, FaRe word whieh is to be distinguished or defined (viséshyadhinalinga). ¢ ver This gender comprises (of 05, @) the words (ukti, sabda) ¥o (I90), dto, 330 (§ 90). (of 3B, { Remark, S remark 1; Neither Késava nor Nagavarma (sttra 99) reckon ©o, dto, 830 amoug the /) ba pronouns (sarvanama), though Europeans would call the first two the personal 9, BAWY, In order to pronouns, and the last one the reflexive (reciprocal) pronoun. g) distinguish them from the pronouns mentioned under letter & let us call the hefore nouy three words simply ‘pronouns’ here. See § 278 viz. VR, BB, YT, VIR, VW, b) the pronouns (sarvanama, § 90) Y 9, Th S8, Jem (neuter) ¥ ; HI° (masculine, feminine, neuter, see §§ 255. 262); 9Jo, (avikara, ay Q30, YVT0, IO (ma,scu]ine); TP, |IPC, VTP, DePs (feminine); ©$30, €30, ning), ¥ ¥Ww3o (masculine); ¥F, &F, ¥WF (feminine); cf. also &, T, ¥ in § 264. adding ‘“&; Remark. and neutey Both Késava and Nagavarma (sttras 42. 49. 66. 102) ecall these terms TEpresents sarvanama. W@, AW, R, I8y, JOR), 2D, VIo, GJ0, T, Jwo, VIS, (&vyaya, yi Q5%%, UIYE, Jevs, ¥do, &30, YWIo, YT, &F, YWTF are what Buropeans call demonstrative pronouns, and ¥IJIR, (930, B39, 0339330, 03IITNY, 03333%30), DT §344) of i are what they call interrogative pronouns. To distinguish these pronouns from ouly udey those under letter @ we may term them adjectival pronouns’ in this place. Neuter, gy 25 s L Vatanafriy o In Samskrlta,‘-‘usj‘r‘aofiomeansougmally 73 class of words beginning with RIF (ISF 03 23, ¥uF, ete.)’ under which native grammarians have included also the real pronouns (¥®o, I, 3,0, thou, X8, he, etc.). $102 4 2) As seen in the Dictionary under @), the Basavapuréna and Jaiminibhdrata occasion- ally use the pronoun ®z in combination with masculine terms (see §270). The Nudigattu > (p.- 122) says that in disdain (édn?%d) @Y, B0 and their plurals @8y, @) are used for f@iflinine males and females, e. g. @@ (for VFTY or VLIW) TSR, Wy (for ®TTL) 3R 3. It (p. 162) further says that in order to express positiveness (3 o3uazr) w®l¢ and ¢ 69 are combined with masculine terms and feminine terms, e. g. ¥®e TOIVH 655& eSS *%5@ femal (‘ 0d ®ne BICO B I3 D €99, &SJ w@e BoriRy BIRETY,P; wWR T SN 0% 0 BRI es; WL 733 g Qe S Y BRSRED; wBde W[ RS TLIWRY; nne AEde 87 RPodhD; WL AT ) OFdS W 54,:06 EJEKS%OGJ’, Brde BonA AR, FOOWHY; PWE VITO eg%do. (In such a case % and & Vi might be used instead; thus: e aomc‘%&eie SO fi%&o; G HonAL &83 TR, DI N )\J { fo an zz%‘;o:b 3e@I3 €3.) 9 T P — — 39 This About possessive pronouns see § 272, and about indefinite ones § 290 either %) so-called Kannada adjectives (gunavaéana, § 90, clearly formed in this ase from nouns by means of pronominal suffixes, see § 276), such as R¢9%0 ode.g (masculine), $¢05%° (feminine), 3¢085 or 8¢08y (neuter); BRG30 (m.), ARBIFS (f.) § 99) 9@ (n.), and Samskrita adjectives (which partly are used also as nominal f the bases, § 68, 4, 8), e. g. TIBY, VF, T, TF), VPIPY, TR, YReA, D d) so-called adjective compounds (bahuvrihi, § 249), e. g. DFOIY, TRy he 230, TRIRCR €) verbal bases (krit, krillinga), e. g. 830 (of &, masculine), DRTES (of T[IBW femlnme), TIRTOTY (of TIRT, neuter), TIBID0 (of TIBYD m.), D[IBIS P (of TIBOS f.), TIBOJHT (of 233, n.). See §§ 68, 1. 177. 180. 185. 198, 3. femark 1; 253, 2, ¢c; 254 0 the ) bases with certain suffixes (taddhita, taddhitalinga, § 68, 2), g X o) rsonal Q, WRAWIY, INSIY, 90310 D, JLOTVY, SILNTOP (see § 243) der 9 numerals (sankhyé, § 90 11 the e. g. MONT (FAT, FT), because it is put before nouuns in the plural whether these are masculines, feminines or neuters See § 278, 1 ALY 9, The gender of particles (avyayalinga), although they are unchangeable 20, (avikara, avikrita) A It appears in words like T23,®0 (masculine), FRI%° (femi- £90, nine), ¥N35 (neuter), in which from the particle (avyaya) ¥3) (¢f. § 273), by adding B+ @° + @o, 9+ T + ¥%° and 9+ 2 (see § 276), a masculine, feminine and neuter term has been formed, so that one may say that ¥ in such a case terms represents three genders;—and then in the particles or adverbs themselves ThLa (avyaya, nipita, §§ 212. 281) used to modify the sense of a verb, e. g. %#¢0¥3 1§ Ca” SA8E, TR, A0dyR, F3 3, which so to say are of the gender of the agent (kartri, ):O(V § 344) of the verb to which they belon the agent (whether actually given or only understood by the verbal termination) being either masculine, feminine or g from neuter, and being in any of the three grammatical numbers (vabanatraya, vaéanatritaya, § 107). ; 7 (R 103. Although the nine genders (Késava continues) mentioned in nOUDS § 102 are occasionally accepted and used (kvacitpraydga), practically eanlflfl there are only three genders (lingatraya) in Kannada, véz. the masculine d]("Mm feminine and neuter Words denoting males (purushavataka) are of [ved of 355 O® 099, T R; words denoting the masculine gender, e. ¢. PO, Ehi) ~ O TEL females (strivitaka) are of the feminine gender, e. g. ma3F8, SEAT 5 4‘), RS, 3w, SReded, T, P, TRued, 93 SVOI°: and all other -0 o ANV words, whether Samskrita or Kannada, are of the neuter gender, e. g 83, BT A S TOV SpeT, [9T, N ] ‘md s 59)'0' 208 Tjess RPTET oo @ B, 3,8, TR 'x@)@ F08 fiw 23&1 Cf. §§ 115. 116 e —— 40 The terr Remark following :- If it happens to be necessary to distinguish the sex of any animal, (tree, ) inth river, ete.), T2, male, and 8%°, (38) T®°, B)). female, are prefixed } , No o8 104. As a special rule it is to be stated that the terms %3, SFI%T, and (of WY ), W S0¢¥ (in the sense of ‘man ‘men’) are neuter in Kannada, whereas the terms The 0 0 BOBF Az S, and ROV are masculine; but AR S, if it denotes a woman of .U good family (kulastri), is neuter Likewise ¥v3,, wife, and ¥33,, child (whether ¥2 &w(o by male or female) are of the neuter gender (of w® {) In metaphorical diction (rtipaka) a substantive (viséshya) in the neuter may [ willl represent a feminine noun, as 39, the earth, may mean F0 the earth or the considered as a woman (§ 239); or an attribute (visésha), e. g. ®NZTFO, may and termin; be masculine, feminine or neuter according to the gender of the noun to which In true it refers (§ 239) 105 prakriti) employed For the seven (or eight! declinable bases (linga (f”\)v) % adduced above (§§68.90) there are seven (sapta) cases (vibhakti) and case-terminations (vibhakti, ndmavibhakti, pratyaya) 3, In 106 The names of the seven cases are sy or the English nomina- AR ( f-jVULJ tive, @éeo&) or the E. accusative, :%éeoja or the E. instrumental, 233, In thi &F or the E. dative, Zowdo or the K. ablative, cm& or the E. genitive, augment < and 3 = O or the K. locative (About the vocative see § 140.) of @ Josiy 107. Kannada declinable bases have two numbers (vaCana), viz the 0213 s JJOa singular (ékavadana, ékaté, ¢katva, ¢kokti) and the plural (bahuvacana (in the Jate bahuté, bahutva) euphoni g A third number, the dual (dvitva, dviva¢ana), may be thought of with The § propriety (uéita, aucitya), that is when two persons forming a pair are so introduced that the first one is without a case-termination and the al 1at1\e ¢ T30 dq 1¢e9 second one has a termination of the plural, e.g DOTITOWIF J0F 4D ©F ,000°, STVITBRESoS; or when objects are mentioned that exist as or % J’i_ | pairs in nature, e.g. Fro¢®, 3RBNY:, 30e% v° (see § 102, 9) The ( 108. The case-terminations are attached to the end of a declinable With the base, and therefore are suffixes. at or gxe 109, The instances of the case-terminations (or their series, vibhaktimal@) ictiongy. are taken from writings of the three periods if from inscriptions (sasanas), they are marked by ‘in a sasana The period of the written ancient dialeet (of ) ) extends from about 600 to 1250 A. D that of the mediseval dialect from about The ¢ 1250 to 1600 A. D., and that of the modern one from about 1600 A. D. to the L present time Compa1 e 32 note. fl ¥ Segp — 41 ——— The terminations for the singular of neuter bases ending in € are the *(tree, following : — @) in the ancient dialect L, % and Nominative o, e. g. 39T0 (of FT), Fvo (of DY), Fvo (of V), WO (of W), aflégjo (of 88, Fowo (of Tov), ) ferms nan of The © or 23 when followed by a vowel, becomes °, 35, or 7° (see § 215, 9). hether 2, Accusative o, e. g. TCI0 (of FT), Yo (of Pv), JFo (of Jv), WoFo (of W), or aflég;sao (of wé;d), T\'éfi_jmo (of fi&i{), 33%:)500 (of ¢ e)), @.@e{)mo (of T2, w0 (of WY). o Mmay garth It will be observed that in this kind of accusative either the augment (Agama) 3, Ay ®° or the augment ®° is, for the sake of euphony, inserted between the base and termination. which In true Kannada words it is optional which of the two augments may be employed; but in Samskrita words the 3% is always required, e. g. TIVT0O kit (of TV), B0 (of BY), VTSTI0 (of VIS, l) and 3, Instrumental o, fa;go, 'a;g, 0, €.g. BOVRO (of FT), SRV (of BVF); z,sosmx@ O (of 03), iojo@?a o (of fiéoso); ?;03363% (of 5039), oafi@;{%b (of OT), mfizflds@m; mind (of mfiédm)-’ 7,398 (of T,a0), 8038 (of 303, Po3® (of $30d)), =4 E) y & In this case the terminations are annexed to the base by means of the N1fIVE, augment 3, that is the secondary termination of the genitive, ¢. v., the final © of @ losing its sound when it coalesces with the terminations or in sandhi § 218 seq.). 2, the 93 0 and 93 are forms of 9o lengthened by the addition of the suffixes @o Léfl,fla, (in the later dialect ©) and ®, and stand for 980 and @3, the ©° being simply euphonic or a help to enunciation. yith The first three terminations of the instrumental are often used also for the r ate ablative, e. g. 08 FQo, eug Inorio, Wy Vo, SeRLTAT 0, IRLFRR . See § 352 q the 4 a,l1 seq. g0 4, Dative T, %’;, e. g. $BT or 3BT, (of 39Y), JVF or IVF, (of JV), VT st 48 or 5'\9539)5‘;; (of 6‘3}9&)), WITF or Z)Esfi;_ (of &)5), FIOT or @JO@_& (Of 63\)&)), The doubling is optional (see § 371 regarding it). s° (:TYG, § 117, a, 1) with the vowel ® (or with the vowels ®©, %, &) conveys the meaning of pointing nable at or exciting attention to. Cf. ©-F, 0.¥n, 8-8, B30, 9-Twe, B-TR¢ in the Dictionary, and see also in § 265 the ¥ of ¥T, &%, «wd. male) 5, Ablative 95::3;850, 25;;%_095(‘5@0, @32’35{‘3, e.g. STRZ 3o (of 393), SOI=3 edo {tflfis)a alect (of 3R); BERZ I 0 (of BY); MW IZBF (of T8, The suffixes ©3,80, ¥ 8330, WS B3 are the ablative of ¥, that side, mean- ahout ing ‘from that side’ (see § 123, a, 5). They arc attached to the base that has to the the secondary @ of the genitive. o 42 P “from In the dialect of the present time @R0033 or TR both meaning Compa the side’, are occasionally used to imitate the form of this so-called case 120, 121, The terminations 9o, 4o, ’8@3 of the instrumental are, as has been stated % Ac under No. 3, often employed for the ablative. ¥ ,3’%3 ll S 6, Genitive 3, ©9, e. g. VB (of J0T), WIB (of WI); ST (in a \ ] U3, sasana between 597-608 A. D.), IRFW9, BF®™ (in Shsana of 804 A. D.). The e The suffix @ is not the primitive termination of the genitive., It is composed the termin of @°, a letter of euphony facilitating pronunciation, and ¥, the real termination has taken of the sixth case (see § 120, q, 6). W is @° 4, i.e. a long form of @. Gf. Concer the lengthening of the genitive in §§ 117, «,6; 119, a, 6; 120, a, 6; 128, a; on the ace 6; 130, a, 6; 131, a, 6; that of the accusative in 122, a, 2. About the ®° see 3, In also § 119, a, 1; and compare also the euphonic 933° in § 130, a, 6 Qfsgo; b If ¢33’ of the word, in the éabdamanidarpana, page 53, is not a mistake for ST, the existence of the termination & (. e. euphonic & + @, =3° 4+ €) of the 9 03 medieval and modern period is proved already for the ancient period; ¢/. the In 'age the euphoy S in BROSY under the locative, and SVILER (FVF 4 2803 in § 243, B, 23, Regarding the augments ° and & compare the angments ®®° and ¥&° in form of th § 122, a, 6 Dictionary 7, Locative ougf) 209, W%, WHNR, VO, B, w9, B, e g. [ITHIDD 4, D b] W% (in a sisana of 689-696 A. D.), [PHFSRIRES, IVIJRIPE, MBRIP® (in a Al sasana of 707 A.D.); S0RR$S, ILRYE, FRIRAE ; IBBRP, PoIIBRYY (in a the RM& I sasana of 1084 A. D.), Be38s%), STo38R¥ (in a SAsana of 1123 A, D.); w3 b, @ BRER ; BFFROS (in a $4sana of 1181 A.D.); wofiaémdw@o, :’)%Sm?,;antsm (in a The 3 sisana of 1132 A.D.); 3:0m¥%w), YOOI, X YBW (in a Shsana of 1182 AD.); TR¥IY, WIRY; BLYSY (which form oceurs in a §isana of 1186 A. D.); 7) L( To0 FeZ® (in a Shsana of 1187 A. D.). ke The suffixes V%, .95, %%, %%} mean ‘inside’, ¢ within’, and ®o°, @) 133 A1 (¢f. remark in § 188), ©9 mean ‘place’, ‘in a place’; ¥€ is composed of ¥&° and the termination 4; the @V of 2% and ®©J is a help to enunciation or eupho- Wi nic (c¢f. 92. 96, remark). The suffixes are added to the base by means of the For ] 0 i B (f.e. B+ 9) or B (1. e. 3%+ ) of the genitive. b) in the medizval dialect 1) I, R0), ug Nom. o, R0, 53, and (the nominal base itself without any termination, W), (g i. e.) the crude base, e. g. 3330 (of 337), Tw¥o (of TR¥), w0 (of 3e); JHTIV (of 2 ;:( Jet), SR (of 39), ILWIV (of Vwe), JITBR (of FT), BRI (of Bes), IR (of 300); TAI (of TR), 1MOJ (of noes), SR8 (of 383), VORIBI) (of VORIE), BN 9 U @E 1D (of TR¥M); BIF, BRI, 708, F3, B, FRPID, (aa;)o)was. In & and D the © or A28, has been changed into & and o, to which the ua&) WY hw ms euphoniec ¥V has been added (regarding which see e. g. the locative under letter gsguosy L1 112,113, 119,121, 128.°1286). dOub]Ed f — 43 it “from Compare the erude base for the nominative in the ancient dialeet in §§ 110. e 121,122, 123, 125, 126. 127, 128, stated 2, Ace. @ 4Ry, ©, @;ag e. g. 30030, dwo; FRIZ0; WellTo, WeeaSo, (in TR0, PRSI0, BonFo, PIT0; WPRBITRY, BRIITI; FREI, YFWI; AT, Bet 83, FouI, BRI, R ¢®T; T $IF,. The euphonic augments 3° =9° and %° are inserted between the base and nposed the terminations. ©%0 is ©®o with the euphonic #V; in ¥, the termination STA nation /Cj has taken the form of ®%, and its final has been doubled on account of euphony. Concerning © compare the @ of the genitive (§ 120, a, 6), and see the remark 28, 4, on the accusative in the ancient dialect in§ 117, 9,2 o see 3, Instr. 3o, a%o, ra%, "a;g@, fa;g, @, ¢ g. dBBR0; W DI o, FOII nistake @%o; éoem@i; aiofio@fi@s@, :s#eiafiaz{»; @é@@%, fi%ofio@%; e:oajaéb, g%adzb, P RITY, ¥ BE,090. of the f, the In 989 (i. e. B0+ & + ©F) the ¥o has been changed into ©=° to which The 9 is another B? the euphonic @ has been added; A% has dropped the 327, form of the ancient © of the instrumental. Cf. the note under @ 2 in the 9 1n Dictionary and see also § 151, &, 2, and the close of § 282. D)) 4. Dat. B, é_&, e. g. ITF, ;:mz?od@; SI0T,, VT . -y m a 5, Abl. w3 o, 93 BF0, w8 3 @ Qfi:i:’ga;, e.g. BYTZIT, in which ) (ina the 323, has been dropped. )?)3 6, Gen. 3, B, e. g JI0R; FRERT, BOTRERT, INGT. ) (in 4 The augment &° like @°, is euphonie. Compare the & of the genitive in 1182 §§ 109, a; 117, a, b, c. . D); T Loe. vt %9, w;fi, B, 89, &9, B, e g. FUTRR P, AT03BRPY; NRCREPR; ToURLO (in a Shsana of 1509 A.D.), ™OBOTVRY (in a sasana of i Y) 1533 A. D.); B3RO, Pandd, 33 39; JHTR. f 97 ©¥9 is a curtailed form of ©9. euphO' For the augment &° occasionally 3° is used, as in S00S¢. of the ‘) in the (later and) modern dialeect 1 Nom. mu, 53), and (most frequently) the crude hase, e. g. SRV (of = = S0), WHID (of W), J9TI (of J9T), AR (of NBE); AT D (of BRTF), AIIY (of 148 01y VR), NBI (of N&), JBI) (of 397), aaéod@ (of fisgad), PRI (of TYM); NE, =C. 2, v O and (most frequently) the crude bases, e.g. i) (of Ace. 989, ¥R, ¥ b b | Ron=II, BRSI), BRI, BY I0; TINBIIY, m&ssmd, TINTIRY, NBTRY, SOOI ¢ 7 303, BHS, JUS; IR, FUIAS, NBEI, JTT, IFI, 3IT; YT, (of YY), TW (of Tobd), TT (of TB), Pewd (of PW), SLe™ (of Jwe), TWd (of M), B9 (of BY); AR, &390, oh the Jofter The euphonic augments are ¥° and °; in ©3) the final of ©3 has been doubled for the sake of euphony; the & is attached to the crude base. b’i’ 44 ad ¥, tf 3, Tosic. o8, 2. 6. g FORI0T, T3 DoR; W30, T3V, FHWIID, T\ 3.& 0, f’\m OP.n0), DASH -MJ‘)\} 4, Dat. F. 2 e.q Foo ¥ 0%, W8 0F; ;Sodfi o@@, TR, 3" 5, Abl AR S0 £@a§ \\ &8 128 S The augment & is the same as ©° 14 6, Gen., &, 9, &, ¢ g. S0R; TITI0IWD, FFIF W, FTSF0; FREI, IV fIve Case-S| The lengtheuned @ appears frequently in poetr neater and DIORO ; WOURY, JRRRRD 7, Loc. w%n 1) LI e g N, 0w ¥N 10“, lett ) (658 50, # PR e WRD: DIS® FINo, A YR, I3, S0 mascuhne g 110 In ancient Kannada no nominal bases receive the (o) ()i SN l ¢ and terminatior in. the nominative singular, except masculine, a few feminine (sce § 102, 2) and neuter bases with final es, nnes (3 11 originally Words of which the crude base forms the nominative singular, are e.g o A s of euphony ¥ i IR T TS PO WAY cSClalovy ~NEevd % O 9 f(]r V\)\J q\ Seri=l o] RN %76 S)0) 'cro Qe -('55 0356 DOTE, ARSS, nRTS, Jeos, WeTs formation ¢ -Jp_c) (A %6 NBY, TE, S0C2°, WE 390, TOB, 88, ¥, 33, LTI el 9y also therenr o , B0, $30; 3@, NPL. Um+aa | FRS, CB; T, TS, zso@ BeR, Be33, 7 3, = D6Yer uges See some exceptions in § I1and & 109 under b 1. 15 1 111 In the mediseval dialect, as has been stated in §§ 9 and 94 ‘le.asx nominal bases ending in a consonant may receive a final euphounic e, formed, in which case their nominative singular shows such an ev, e.g. T, Which th F 3] F00, T, WRY, PYVI, YD, DB, SN e two |g VAN & ¢ Exceptionally this is the case in the ancient dialect too, as we find in a Sasana of about 778 A. D. also Sorish (for =on$), in one of 1048 ¥ 00 Joing A.D. Sen (for o), in one of 1084 A. D. ernno (for PWTF) n one of lalive gaq and el 1123 A. D. Zs@dy (for RedTe), in one of 1182 A. D. Fpews, ABDY 0 P36 tombingg (fm 3P Qe A&ef), and in one of 1187 A. D. 353,8y (for 508 o) man:—s 112 In modern Kannada, as will be seen from the same paragraphs Oined g nominal bases with a final consonant generally receive the euphonic e, Cagg Slo often ends in such an epn and their nominative singular, therefore ver %I‘fl ( May 113. A strange peculiarity of modern Kannada writings, especially W of school-books, which begins to appear already in medieval works that also to nominal bases with the final vowels . . = oS0 S or g &0 AR % e T Oj‘ o 3 the pominative singular of which in the ancient dialect has »J)+:-\‘ 0 no termination at all (see § 110), an en is annexed, at option, as the (ran s termination of the nominative singular by means of the letters ox¢ (i \m, 45 — ) 7,30 D) and ¢, these ¢3¢ and ¢ being merely a help to enunciation, e. g. 3 0390 ) AP0, 3900030, SR, BB, u%ofioo, @9@0330, @%ofi&&, o3 QJ FENFY, NEO), o), TP, FD), BRJ, R, I See ‘ 2 £ ; Y 8. 129. 130, and compare letters b and ¢ in § 109. 114. As very many ancient true Kannada pominal bases have no nomina- , 303, tive case-sign in the singular (see § 110), as already in the medieval dialect neuter and masculine bases with final & too occasionally appear without it (see 0 i W i) § 109, letter b and § 117, letter ), and as in later Kannada such neuter, masculine and feminine bases are most frequently used without it (see § 109, S letter ¢ and § 117, letter ¢), the thought arises that the ancient © (sonné), the termination of the nominative singular of neuters (§ 109), masculines and femi- 102,2) nines (§ 117) ending in e, of which &, 3%, =¢, & and ® are but other forms, originally may have been a sign introduced by grammarians, partly for the sake 1€ 6., of euphony in sandhi (§ 215, 8) in order to avoid an hiatus (e. g. =98° YRIF EV{08 for 08 BRIFR, @OAF® o for WOR A Bo) and partly as a help to the - 0;“! formation of the oblique cases, especially the accusative and genitive, it forming 2pe3 Wiy also therein the euphonic letter (e. g. =0+ ° 4 ¥o, [0 1. Q€ - ©; T 4 T° + VO, 0% + &° + ). Let it be added that Tulu, one of the sister-languages of Kannada, never uses a nominative case-sign for neuter bases ending in ©. 115. Kannada grammarians teach that by the suffix @ (which means fl]d gifi ‘he’, as we learn from § 193) true Kannada masculine nominial bases are ic oY, formed. The application of this rule appears e. g. in the following instances, in 700y which the formative © is annexed to the ¥ of the genitive (§ 109, letter a, 6), the two letters % being euphonically joined (§ 214, seq.):— ve filid $eA®, a reddish foot, Gen. FeR® (§ 130); TeRR03 + the formative suffix TN =2 0= [ 1048 ©, or joined and forming the crude base €03y, and combined with the nomi- native case-sign 0 Tt&AR030, a man of or with reddish feet;— @&, charm, Gen. one 0 9R03 (§ 130); B+, or joined and forming the crude base «aR03Y, and 9, 8 A )] combined with the nominative case-sign © @030, a man of charm, a charming man ;—QORFRS, a flower-like eye, Gen. ®VRFH (§ 120); YONFY +9, or uaphq, joined and forming the crude base «@oriF®’, and combined with the nominative nic case-sign © YUNFHO, a man of or with flower-like eyes ;—303%, gold, Gen. TR, (§ 120); BT, +, or BRF, or TRJ0, a man of gold, a very precious an man;— 0%, a bow, Gen. VY (§ 120); WY +©, or VY, or VLo, a man of the »eCIflH) bow, an archer ;—=%3, the east, Gen. =083 (§ 123) ; SRTH + ¥, or IINTEX, ks, 18 or $8HE0, a man of the east;— F9, the side, Gen. FOX (§ 109); FOT+ ¥, or A 3$% F03, or FVT0, a man of or on the side;—=%, youth, Gen. 0¥ (§ 130); ¥ 'y b has 03+ @, or %0, or ¥¥0, a man of youth, a youthful man;—w®, vainness, gs 16 Gen. WD (§ 128); WD - ¥, or WD, or 2.)63)530, a vain ma,n;—-figef)o&)), envy, 15 W Gen. Fe0w (§ 122); TeW+©, or Feow, or I®IWO, a man of envy, an envious e — 46 man ;—7&%°, theft, Gen. F% (§ 120); #%Mfi, or %, or F‘%j)o, a man of theft, proftgate, a thief;—ne) strength, Gen. 7 (§ 122); ©® +©, or ©®, or RO, a man of pasous, 3 a male pers strength, a powerful man. Cf. §§ 224 ; 248, B, remark; 249 Analogously the formation of the true Kannada masculine nominal bases 28, 4 cow ©r, 33, TR, Pew, PIAFY, BOW, ete. may have taken place, although the ¥, who? 1 themes to the genitive of which the formative was attached, are nowadays 4 whore, ¥ out of use. final conson 116. But the form of true Kannada crude bases with final @, used in books 3%, o fon and the language of ordinary conversation for the nominative singular, e. g. (), life, =08, Po, Jv, vorire, ©e, BAT, does not by itself indicate the gender of them Lot it (see also § 102). Likewise © (the sdnné), the grammatical sign of the nomi- the gender native singular of bases ending in ® (§ 114), does not express distinction of (\ 136), gender ; thus, for instance, the neuters 080, Zpwo, Jwo, @ &0 &) t cannot, by their listinguish sonné, be distinguished as to gender from the masculines ®®o0o, 8330, T30, fac) 0 ®#3,0, or from the feminine tadbhavas ©T,0, ¥ 0 (§ 117). with final This impossibility of discerning the gender by the sonné appears also in the three per oblique cases of neuter bases ending in ®, because they show, with regard to singular of their final o or sdnné, frequently the same forms as sueh masculine bases do ) (see §§ 109. 117), e. g. Nom, 3083° (7. e. 3380 before a following vowel; cf. its vocative 3308¢ and the vocative TRH¥I in § 140), ¥V (i. e. VB0 before a N 10 &R0, ) B following vowel) or also 3883, ©88d; Ace. 39830, ¥ Jo; Fwo, ¥ J0; TRYS, E AT ® B Ve ; Gen, TRER, B F; Abl, F98aF, ©0 a7 ; Loe. FBIY, ¥ 39, o‘;m " Hence it is to be stated as a general rule that all Kannada nominal bases with final ey are, in the singular, destitute of a particular sign to express 3193, 1 an 9 their gender, except in the nominative when it has the euphonic ¥, in the ‘\Cv genitive when it is formed by means of the euphonic @° (§ 109), and in the Ao, & of 1189 A dative ending in ¥ or T, (§ 109). When the grammarian Késava says that there are eight or nine genders ¥330 in the Kannada language (§ 102), he does not found their difference on outward The au| signs in the nominal bases, but on their distinguishing properties and qualities, leltel‘s 0y It is a fact that in Kannada no nominal crude base in the singular, whether n 83, ending in es, 3, & and o, or in a consonant, shows a difference of termination The oy expressive of the distinction of male, female and neuter, except in the feminine pronominal suffixes ©9¢, ©% (§§ 120. 121), in the neuter pronominal suffixes Whih y 4§ 3, 8 and ® (§§ 122. 169), in the neuter pronouns ¥m), BR, N (§ 122); Msteaq of and in the feminine suffixes 8%, 98 and 3 (c. g. FTZRNS, VT FOY, NG, I 3), ghat m thls although also these suffixes and words do not bear such terminations as specify the Teutey absolutely their gender by themselves. di&leets ( of The termination & has above been treated of as to the impossibility of its expressing by itself a distinetion of gender. The same absenee of an outward L'lkewis n Q&i e sign of gender is seen in the final vowels 9, ¥V and =, as there are ¢. g. 393, a that 3, b P 417 f theft, profligate, 30N, a younger sister, ¥¥8, a female friend, 338, male or female man of persons, 33, a hog, T°, a sheep, Ne?, a feather; TR, a male person, nesy a male person, Bon&, a female, F0) (B, a female, FLRY, a child, 932, an ox, | hases 208, a cow, ¥3), the neck; &% a master, 83, a father, ¥, a dumb man, igh the ¥, who? which ? w&, such a woman as, ¥, that woman, ¢ a damse], 8, wadays a whore, ¥%, an elephant, T¢% a tank, 33, a wave, 3¢, the crescent ;—and in final consonants, as there are e. g. ¥9° (¥%), a person (mase., fem. and neuter), 1 books o%°, a female, T°, a stone, 3¢0%, a chariot, 3¢, (Bew), a scorpion, oS (A (W30)), life. of them Let it be added that also in the plural no terminations exist by which ) 10Mi- the gender is fixed (see §§ 118. 119. 131, 132. 134. 185); also ¥, B, v tion of (3 136), the plarals of ©%, ¥, @I, do not show such forms as at once y their distinguish them from the singular of the neaters F¥, w9, W), ete. 317, ] fif’%o, In § 109 the case-terminations for the singular of neuter bases with final ¢ have been given according to the forms they have in the ) in the three periods of the language; here follow the case-terminations’ for the »ga.rd f0 singular of masculine and feminine bases with final es, viz. ases 0o a) in the ancient dialect ', Cf. its 1, efore @ Nom. o, e. g. T80 (of B28), FAZ0 (of ?:-”:S;S), DE00, SeWIWo, WeTo, =Iw ; #097, &Bo, e@BoTo, @e)fis‘a‘%o, TeRARO0, BBIIYo, @To, ¥Jo, w?q)rfio, é’%do, 399 o, B30, 30 edH0, WY Bo, BAWIO; @8:;0, ifi::‘ogo, w0 @To appears also as U0 (¢f. §§ 119 and 120, letters a; 122, letter a; 1 hases § 193, 1 and remarks). pEpIESS 2, in the Ace. ©o, ©R), (39), e. g. ¥VAZ0 (of WTA), IPHIFIo (of BR=F), in the SNPRAT0, VRITYT0, VIT0, WIN0; efif%fio, v o, WI0; BeIII0 (in a Shsana of 1182 A. D.). @xT0 appears also as ¥PIo (Sabdanusisana sttra 175). genders The augment &° is euphonic like that of neuter bases in the accusative § 109, utward letters @ and b). alities: ghether In © the euphonic & has been added to the sonné of o. ination The termination © in the parenthesis refers to a quotation in the Sabdamani- ominine darpana (page 164), viz. ~VIPe, T° 3, @h@gme (oh, thou killedst me), in which, as Késava supposes, the =3 (of ®o, I, §187) is the genitive used sufiixes § 122) instead of the accusative D0, Késava appears to be wrong; our opinion is J ) ) that in this case 2% is the accusative with final © that so frequently occurs in Sp(—,‘@lf the neuter, masculine and feminine singular of the medizval and modern dialects (¢, ™ and 3o@33) in § 122, a, 2; § 352, 1, ). Likewise when Bhattikalanka in his grammar under stitra 231 thinks that ¥ 0 f it in o8, Se*Fo (he forgot me) the genitive is used for the accusative, we believe )utwflrd ) that in this case too =8, is the accusative with final ©. G 48 3, Inst Another similar instance of KéSava that belongs to a neuter noun with final ©, is QuI (of S} in the obscene sentence oI Tt (Sabdamanidarpana page 4, Dat Yourer, &3 75; see § 215, 6, remark 8); it too is the accusative of the mediseval and modern dialects. 5, Ab It is reasonable to think that the accusative ending in & existed already in mental, tho colloquial dialect of the ancient period, but had not been generally accepted 6, Ger by classical writers. T, Lo FORDY; 3, Instr. Bo, “&%o, "5‘%’ e. g. TISFTRO (of WTF), VIR0 (of 233), SPRERO, BT, R0, VI RIRT0; VI, Rees9s . () it 1, No The terminations are attached to the genitive, the final © of which disap- M, o pears in sandhi (§ 213 seq.). 2, Au 4, Dat. (R), oRt, €. g. (SBR, in a Shsana of 1123 A. D., if the reading be PR el right; ®DOWFSR in the stanza under rtpaka in § 239); ¥YRoR, Fadoon, 29,3, e W, 7.1 ;‘; 00R, SNAROR, YWEIIFoR, WIOR; @Bf}rofi, w%ofi. 3, Ins R is the true termination; the sonné before it is merely euphonic (¢f. § 137, 4', Dal a,4). T+ has the same meaning as ¥° +« (see § 109); ¢f. e. g. ©-118, 2R i, Bk in the Dictionary. L) The alg 5, Abl. ©3cdo, w3 dgo, ©Ie3Y, ¢ g IOIFIIdo, VAIIVIIo, Towels & g IRAVTS o, 8%5?_53950, IS 830; 6:9#@,_?5%950, @33,38 d0; @%S%S’é’é@o; v%fi%z‘ééfi. for o, The terminations are added to the genitive the final © of which disappears 9 A in sandhi (§ 213 seq.); those of the instrumental are optionally used for the G» Ge ablative. See § 352, 4 a, 1 seq. 55\-@50:'53, 3 6, Gen. 5, ¢, e. g. FOFS (of TooF), JTI, INGTT, VBIIIR, VIT; SEAA Ya LO( SBRS ;5%):55\, DI, FHVBT?, QY BT, VIT0. 8 1 The augment &° is a letter of euphony facilitating pronunciatibon; cf. the @° About the lengthening of and &° of the genitive in § 109, letters a, b and-c. foal o5, (C 0 1 S see § 109, @, 6 7 e, v (O], ©9, e g PORIRLYE, TRRATINGS, VBVIPING®, VI 1: NO Bt 3 ) SR ¢f; VT IR, ChRMLA (23RIRERN); BORID dc*s;&)e; The terminations are added to the genitive according to the rule of sandhi. NSNS in the medizeval dialect % 4 b n oy, 1 Nom. o, &, and (the nominal base itself without any termination, z. e.) o the Pluy the crude base, e. g. ©0R0, WI0, ¥J0; @3':3-0; 2QBRY, BOTIRY, @osbfie‘oo, WwBARY, 0 md T 9,030, CANGRSIAR 50, o, cafioofigs, [PRTTR, D ~ ,\\\IJ o) 3, SRS, T, U3 E[ther In =0 the sonné has been changed into & before the euphonic vowel ¥v. ac%l‘ding 2, Aecc. o, 9RY, G, B, eg. gawso (of FaT); 9T, Fo; VPAT I é*asana of 1 \ 30D, saosoés‘fiao, BROPFITY; JoNEIIY; &E IS U Thg Casey In ®39, the & has been euphonically doubled. ) \)n]y [ “hh(‘llgh i : . 49 ith final 3, Inmstr. @0, aRo, vy, (88T, BY)", €. g. T 00; BRyRF 0; FoFIRY A page 4, val and Dat. R, on, e.g. Sfiojbéfi, 3R, @R, &3R; zewon, TITFonR, WASOR, doHren, kon. ) ready in 5, Abl. (23,280, v33o0 &9_3_39552 ), the terminations of the instru- mental. ceepted 6 7 Gen. 9 e.g. TIXT; BN 7, Loc. %%, 29, (w¥R), W9, (9, see § 109, letter ), e. g. ©9RRR ¥, TR0, B0TFCINRP; efiegaég; @"fiéé%. ¢) in the (later and) modern dialect h disap- 1, Nom. v, frequently the crude base, . g. BOBIRTY, BRIII, VI, B 29, 03325330; wfim, VFE; VT, 3T, IR F, INSIT, VHRITS, BRI, WS, AT; S 2, ding be Ace. ¥R, ¥8Y, B, ¥y, €. g. VBIT, EJT I, BHIIF; BRIAITY, 1, ulbfl YZIRY, YIIZY; WORR, FRAFI, BIDTT, BIEINI, VIT; SN, WINTY,, WT/OIT fifiq, z*r;)m S DBOT ; @Biéd. © ) o3 o3 §1 31, 8, Instr, "a%, e. g. BBINRT, VI, *ve'éz’é'og, Gfl%i(og, e o, 58 b Dat. A N, N, €. g. HITR, PER, 3FH, Qfif‘g)@fi, ¥R; VTR; T R, o%aai;dfi; @3RN, w-z?ojmfi,(ad)cs’mafi, Sonan, ¥S8R; @;gszofi. The augments 8 and ? and other forms of the euphonic sonné, to which the 938 % el i3 vowels © and B are joined for the sake of euphony, so that 33 and &% stand 9w A= @ for on. appears J 9, Abl. fa;da, e. g. @dfidag, @aa;cio; CL ° mja. for the 6, Gen. ©, & (especially in poetry), e.g. TR, VII; ©T,8; 7w :, BIBDFIIY, FREIZTII2. 5 ? (2 o/ @, Lioc. w9n, @@m, 99, e. g. YORIRIR; BIRINID, 339 ; ©IVY; VT IO 118. The case-terminations for the plural of neuter nominal bases with the @ final e. (Cf. §§ 131. 132)) oning of @) in the ancient dialect 92 1, Nom. R%f, oi%s, on®, onPos, e. g. JVAY®, JPpuRe®, TORYS; Jogones, RPVORYS, FLones; noone®, JoRBonNes, WeJo nee fifidOfi% (in a sAsana of 1123 A. D.); 808F>0030n9TT, m’odédodgéofi%fi. andbi n%° is the true termination; in oR%® the sonné is euphonic, likewise the @V in on%o. The oneT® ig composed of oni®® and "90° which is another termination of the plural (see § 119). b;‘;gfl);% Either 1%° or on%® are added to true Kannada bases. Samskrita bases A N according to grammar always use to receive OT¥® or onwd® (¢f. 109, a, 2); in a sasana of 1076 A. D., however, we find 2¢37 38290 and FSoF 394, U) REY 93 1) The absence of instances for certain terminations in parenthesis in this and other cases, only means to say that instances with them have not been met with by the author, although they do exist; see e. g. '9%353 in § 119, b; ”9% in § 120, b. 7 E o, et 50 -y Ace. es0,¢e. g S8R0, FoBonPo; SWIonwo B, | A final 2V, as The terminations are attached to those of the nominative 6, in on®y, disappears then in sandhi (§ 213 seq.). 3, Instr. Qo, '8«(-50 Qgfi e. g. SN0, FOONYo; NotonYo. 1 The terminations are added to the genitive, the ® of which disappears in eplotle | sandhi (§ 213 seq.) oceuy 00 4, Dat R, BR, e g. 300 3080ne : BeJonY; FIFneR (in Sasana of ) 1 1076 A. D.) i The @ in @R is euphonic 5, Abl. ©3. 030, ©3 0930, 9338, e. g 300198 8o, SoBonw3 do; WeBo 3, 40 e, ¢ 30 13 %o (of T); AN The terminations are attached to the genitive om= U 1) 6, Gen. ©, e. ¢ SOONY. =ConY; Redone Y 0 o 7, Loc. %%, %% (aog;*fi) w58, e. g 38R BH 6. FBonRBHRTS; WeBonLR $° By, 7 .‘\ AOFORE WRIONSRTE; AFFNSRP (in a Sasanaof 1076 A D.) 308N, $CoNFY ; weSonyd The terminations are added to the genitive 680 and b) in the mediseval dialect §a8an4 ( 1, Nom. Rg*, 1%, oftss, onid, NLTF, (oRLTF), e. g. SVAS; Fdonv? O Fres FoFNPY, BeIVONNRYY; SIToNPY, YVBTIHONRPY; SIVNYTS neess 3 92, Acc. 90, 90, 9, e. g. $VONYFo, JOWOWR0ONFo SOORBRY, TIBRTBONE I BRICNINTRY; SEIBF Y, SAIIoNE BADe 00t 3 $nRo; TN 3, Tnstr. B0, ’850 &N, =¥ ('3\(-5@) e. g es&on®o, 8, v 0 nes o; VT Sonds ; m,fl;jofi@é (e §1 4, Dat. R, @R, e g. S00Y, Idonte, Iy ond; MZIFBoNIR, FORONLN, euphon R.BoneR, FIFonenR, SZ,0neN wdeaofle?fi #omofi@d 1§ 00111[ 5, Abl. ©3 cdo, 93 330, 93 I EE 2'35) the terminations of the Sonng instrumental R 6, Gen. 93, e.g. IVNY, [yBon¥ JRONY genitiy Loc. 2%5, 2%, 29N, efl@ I8 fi BoNSH YL ; BIONBRYY; ?,3\.43 on 1§ 24 70 SR30, ;Séaan)ofi&?fa%?fi 0320noneY, ;S#omf& efi’@ofiéfi%fi@ w@a’oioo"{\fi@ wfif i‘aofi 2 ! o1 (nag c) in the modern dialect 1, Nom. R%y, e.g. NERS, JVRT FIFNRPY, BREINRYY Ace L) FTONS 0 IRINESRd ABNRY I 2, SSISN) (SAN) e.g. 3BrEanivo i BONFNF R0 JONY, ABNRY, YWIFTIVNY (§21 3, Instr e ¢.q. NBRYR, Frnos 4, Dat. a3, e.g. NANYR, FIFNon B g o ABL. @, e.g. AGTIOY, Forney. W, as Gen. &, e.yg. ABNRY, TIFNY, dd@ 1. Z';E Loc. w¥R, 99, 89, . g. NENLIR; ABNGY, FIONYY; ©IINTO. 119 ars in The case-terminations for the plural of masculine, feminine and epicene (§ 102, 4) bases with final ¢, including also some bases that occur only in the plural. (Cf. §§ 131. 132. 134. 135. 137.) 04 of @) in the ancient dialect 1 Nom. onlg®, B¢, ©0f, 890y, w0°, WO, oWTF, S0, WTFES, VNFES, %0 Bof, WOTE, NPT, VIFYT’, oDTF, 0DVTF, oDNFYS, e. g. VO, Waxo nes, &3ories, &Ionee, NRIoNY?, FPFoTNS, INToTNYE; VT oNYe, VIoNee; T, 9°, (of SoM); @WORTE, FITT T, JITFO®, INRRO®, VI, FIERTOF, Jewos, WITF, JIT?, QURTT, w? BT, DoYR0T, 0T, QICITE, HOITT, [oe3MPEITe, QWFTE, TTS, FOTS, DV TF, RWOT; VIR, SO TAY (both in a Shsana of 1123 A. D.), 3Ny, ig%f, ReTBY, RBPROFB), IdJRTY (the four terms in a Sasana of 1182 A, D.), SORNTI, 169 RRoFSRTY (both in a Shsana of 1187 A.D.); 93 WwFT° (in a Shsana between 680 and 696 A.D.), BRRFPFT® (in a Shsana of 866 A.D.), SATIFAOINT® (in a Sasana of 916 A. D.); QWFTS, ©AW05, QIWTE, HAWTF, FOWTF, FLWT'; JUI) TS, \fi%";; . %v;figécs ) DO [0S, |IFOS, TOATTE, IRIFTS, TATFTL, JUTTE; WRTFFS, BB FEYS, YOIRTF 9, 3T $F, TR ITF 9T, TIBONRF C, VINE P, JINF PC, eI z nEes; wsgcs; 369,00°, 89 00, YGeROTS, ng:«;acf, 3¢070TE; @iofie{?cfi; WPTFYTE efisgagcs, wa:j%ofl ma;figgac*?, @ofiofi@ace, 'aas’egacé', VIR, TE, em;fi:g)c*f; e:a#%g%cf; ;Somae% Wb} oT?; fa;jgcxbflr%fi. @3 is ©T° and a euphonic ¥V (¢f. § 96 remark); %0° is another form of ©T° {ef. 5117, letier a). Tu 20°, oWT® gnd =0° the letters ¢, 0W° and J° are {9R, euphonic augments; ©TF 9, ORF° are composed of ¥O° and F¥° and T¥°; ©OT° is composed of ©° and 0%, and WTFYO® of VT, T¥ and BO°; in 0BT the the sonné is euphonic; o80T® is olT® and Q0°; OR&)T“F%’G is composed of o®T® and ne°; Q0° is composed of a euphonic ©° and B0° (cf. the euphonic & of the genitive in § 109, q, 6; that of &9° in §§ 132, a. 134, a; that of ¥9 o, ete. jort in § 243, B, remark; that of 9,30 in § 276). 2, jof Ace. &0, R, e.g. e:)a‘ga@ofi%*o; 30%;%30; @iofl%fio, ©8RT0, ete.; SJPUTRY (in a sasana of 1182 A. D.). ©3 is 0 (3°) and a euphonic V. 3, Imstr."50, 'aggo, "3\;2, é.g. @Pg’eofi@o; fioi@o; @%o?’\@o; DeBd0; PETTFL0; ote. 3 The terminations are added to the genitive according to the rule of sandhi ! (§ 213 seq.). 5 Dat: 3, 7{?\, aB, B, e g. ©RoNY; DEY; vFond; ISR or BeIRF, WIRRF or uozfirj‘r, wa%sfis or waajpmir, QBIRF or 03831'3\?, ete.; B¢30R (in a 7( .'l 52 Anoth sasana of 1123 A. D.), Y308, 133, 208 (both in a sasana of 1181 A. D.); BeFF p]‘OHOUUS (in a sasana between 597 and 608 A. D.). 1} oceurs optionally after the répha; such a doubling of a consonant after it #4030 is very frequent. Cf. 88§ 132, a; 155; 240, under 5; 248, under a; § 871, 1, gl 0o The 2 before 1 is a euphonic prefix. \ (§13) 5, Abl. »3,edo, ©3 330, ©3,e33; the terminations of the instrumental, 3, I e. g. ¥ on¥3 8o, ete. 6, Gen. e, 09 -/ 3 LD e. g. a—asg@omf; ;Sob’-%%f; @%;ofi%*; a?&c%od; ete.; 3633%0506@ (in a Sasana between 680 and 696 A. D.), %3305 (in a Shsana of 804 A. D.). The € ¥ is simply a euphonically lengthened ©. See § 109, a, 6 5 A 1, Loc goes, (agsifi), @%, e. g. @gg@om?fwfi; aa#*om?wfi; ®eSVRYE, TATF 6, G BH P, TIRIVRYS; ete. A ——— he'h b) in the mediseval dialect é 10, L Nom. the same case-terminations as in the ancient dialect; further nes, &L, ondy, TP, THRYE, WDy, oWTY, VIINY®, VIING, BINRST, (HInd of 0 oy il BT, DT, 0BTy, e.g. HBNT; BeINSy; BowIonwy; wfior’\@cs; s.)a;%; swfiefiofivfi; 0 WI0; BeTT, PFB, ST, IPVITY, NRGSE), FUTY; FOWDY; %@;figoda; BT BoTI ¥, ST BOTPT, 3003BINY’, FRBIVoN®; PTINY), WIVONYY; RAEINYTT; VIAOL, R £ 5 6:953@60; 3;3%3{30 )0 NS, ¢ The terminations show a free use of the euphonic @ and an occasional omission of the euphonic sonné. ef; 206 9 H, ‘Ace. @90, o9, e. g. 2000328NF0; FoRIT0; @ofiqsfiey’, WJVING, Swend, T, i S, Tmstr. rg{o, ra;go, "SKFZ)D, fg;g@, e. g. ;fiaéfigofiao; :m%o-,séé), 'aafiazi); % ‘c\\v wefngdma?:&@. 4, Dat. B, @R, BoR, e g. PEARF, BIDAF, SORF; @ofi)qsofi«?fi, 2%303)0R, ujv" :s 98 ROR, m?aefi, T,3050R, S0R0w0R, SRITON, ©IdR, o8, SJBRITOR, JTBONR, Shib BT Bonen, %fiédm@fi, WINFOR; ©I[oon. The The @ and o are euphonical prefixes. lakes ) 5, Abl. ©3cdo, v 330, ©3,238; the terminations of the instru- Kes mental, (o) wj 6, Genitive @, e.g. @ojofimi, BeITFY, VINFY, BRBITONY, JINTT, JUG, (ahadd a0 ws%d el to 7, Loc. %%%, %@, w¥R, ¥, (¥9), ¢ g. FWHDNIR; I0THN; O an { g BRPR, VSBRPR, ITBHR, eicsfidom?mfifi, BIV. Deople) c) in the modern dialect Ppear L, Nom. 1%, T, TLTY, 08, 2TV, $T, odéo, oD, e.g. VTN, 327 m#_&efio; ;Sof}@do; RIBINT, o—”oe%do, ¥TBY, BTT), BYBY; BOWD, faagbdo; BT, the oy FOID, FowT0); WaNT BY; SF9,R B, W T, %s%:%do. 3, FYR is FH (= F¥%) and A3 (= BT°). ARy — o 53 o o ur Another plural is formed by adding ¥39), the nominative plural of the pronouns ¥3 or ¥F, to the nominative singular, e. g. ©I,IT (¥Fo or VI fter it T 4 9[0), BFIIT, VBLTIW, or to the nominative plural, e. g. DT WTTT, 371, 1 Cf. § 131, ¢, 1, and see § 258. 2 =9 Ace, 8380, ¥R, B, 9, ¥, eg. #%{)déo, &9 33; BIRINTRY; 039903, ental, (§ 135); 03, 0 (§ 135); 23,09, ) el 3, Instr. fa;g, e.g. BOBOTIOF. (i dy Dat.. o, AR, e, 'a‘z.godfi; 233008, BIRONOn. The © and B before © are euphonic additions. g AT 5, Abl fa;g, e.g. BOBINO. 6, Gen. @ &, e. g. BIBNT, JNRIT, BOIT, WY T; VIV, 22,09, 0*89%03- T, Loe. 291, 09, (v99), e.g. {T0AeH; BoERdY. rther 120. The case-terminations for the singular of neuter and feminine bases (and of one that is either masculine or neuter in the ancient language, 90, e viz. 8%, § 102, 5) ending in consonants. e a) in the ancient dialect 300, L Nom. the crude base, e.g. FoF, D, T, Twe, Foise, FTF, DY, FREOE, FI0I9E, @NT, IR, 30T, JHRTE, [INT; IWE, I0°; VIPE, YIS, QURPE, WIPS, JwP®, YA, TOR30PE, u%dw, WRFYE, WWFPS; B9, IROF, JPpn jonal WF; BORCIVIST, TS (see § 187, 1). v 0o @39 appears also as SR (Sabdanusisana sttra 175). 0 2, Ace. ©c, o, the crude ba;se, €. g. %JQQ,,O1 w%?,o7 500%01 @OQSO, EDGC, TIWO, BREWo, TI0I0, 230300, TVBIBo, WMo, SwRT0, WSPo, BTV, Yo, ¥ZFo; FU 0, 1 WP 0; WWF (in Ve TH ), TR (in TR TIY), NPT (in YW 9RY). 300, @F¥o appears also as ¥P¥o (Sabdanusisana sttra 175). e, The doubling of the consonant of monosyllabic bases with a short vowel takes place on account of euphony (¢cf. § 215, 7, d). t- Késava (page 297) gives the following quotation (see § 365); W00 T30 A8 RO® QADY @B 0B BBonve, and remarks that the ©O° in K¥F® is wrong (abaddha), as it ought to be =¥ or 2¥RSRE0 or ~YRASLEIR, because a new o0, agent or subject is introduced, viz. 83N, @3330?\‘@6, therefore, is the crude base ¥ and stands for the acecusative. A translation is:—‘When (they, certain people) desired the purple sunshine of the evening, the trees of the hermitage appeared’. Cf. the anecient accusatives ® in § 125, SoRBS° in § 126, ¥ in § 127, 0¥ in §130, a, 2, especially also the Kriyasamasa (§ 253, 1, @) in which &) the erude base represents the accusative, a,nd.§ 352, 65 & 10, 3, Instr. %o, 'a;go’ 'aé, e.g. ¥Q0, FZ0, FYY, T30, FneSo, 3edo, ¥BBO, JWIROT . 54 The terminations are attached to the genitive according to the rule of sandhi he?. 78, re in union § 213 seq.). Cf. the <o in the Dictionary, Additions, p. 1711. aoh, ), &> Dat. %,y ‘eligh oY, Swd, 520, T, T ; #e;j\,‘;j»a;‘, m;\, S0¢, (of 0% @o’f%, T, ém%‘a‘{\, Aee , T, W3R BI85 03¢, 9N 0 T 5, Abl. 3 cdo, efi_%e%% o, efiéos%% , the terminations of the instrumental (and of th e. g. TY 3 edo, éo&oézieéo, 203 do. ialect) e / 6 Gen. B ‘= ien T, VY, #e{), ir"’o.’»qs, TIY, TRLO, éfaeeé,‘ [0, AL, FIT 3, :35;% 3203); VI, VTP, NIP, ¥IP, wIFrP; @P; LWOY (in a Sasana auclent bas of about 750 A. D.). bases appe but there : Here we have the primitive form of the genitive, v¢z. ©. About the doubling see the Accusative. I its datt 7, Loc. suwf, 209, (2¥1), ©ef, o, 89, e yg. &oni$2%° (in a Sasana of (for 3°), 707 A. D.); 998, (of 29°), Fo3n, 9%, 334,95, 5288, 380 °, ROWPHY*; TBy® Ao, Of (in a $4sana of 971 A. D.); 3RtvW (in a Sdsana of 1187 A. D.); 336?@92,, SN @) o The terminations are added to the genitive according to rule. 1, No b) in the medieval dialect A D), o 1, Nom. the crude hase, e.g. TO°, ToO; BH°; @3.96, ~a5e;6, BT, WUFTS, (in one of | WRFPE;, HRNYE. 4.D), 20 2, Acc. @o, @, the crude base, e. g. FLo, Towo; Forivo; B ; FY, JY, 4 D BOV; GWY® (in YWY QRY), B0 (in BT wwe), BeP’ (in W' INR), F90%° Aatoon i (in 30 \3336?3 ra#%). of 1123 A 3, Instr. @o, (faaé)o'), f‘ai, (f*a\%;;)), a%’ e. g. FVY0, &edo, TR, The gl %\o‘.’)ofia;, @@d%‘?%. O, e 4, Dat. 3, R, e. g. 3NY; BCRAY, ¥nd, ©od) &;; ewirF, wacky, TS, their dat; bt ihey h 5, Abl. ©g o, efigsig o, 291'%995&; , the terminations of the instrumental. 1), ang 6, Gen. 9, e.g. T, #ofiofi, 308, BOY, YT, Food; 30 (or 330536); 939, VIP, BIY, WwWFY; Y. Srammat Moder 3 7, Loe. 2%, %@, w¥R, v, 9, ¥, ¥, ¢ g. TV, e, tative (g TSR PT; BHPY, WINBHRPY; WRBRYR, TRTBRER, WISHIR; @ofiofiw; a@oda?sez, §TEF g 2RV ; #z;a@@, FYO, T, VY, FHTPY, $ITY, JLITY, Beemed; FO . lialegt ) In @9 the auxiliary augment B3° of § 121 appears to have been mutilated. the anej in the modern dialect %) o) i In §§ 92. 93 and 112 it has been stated that, in general, all ancient nomi- T (seq § nal bases with a final consonant appear with a euphonic final v or @ in modern b, ( Kannada; but there are exceptions, that is especially when such bases are immediately connected with another moun or verb, e.g. F°-Bwed, Fo7.ToD), The Stampg FO . RBHRJY, TV -FII R, To°-IB, FWI-TLR, %ojaf‘-mc‘&@, So08r .08, B203°.30e8, DU} 1 P — — 55 f sandh WO FR, T 3R, TS FTRE), TI° i?uaeég), 30036 w3y, or also when they are in union with case-terminations, e, g. T203; WIONF, BT ; Fady, P08y ; Y 239039 ; 3)33@5%38, 3903898, See also TNV and WIS g,moi, 39039, TIR; ;3303)2392 (of 239033°) in § 121, and Fo%°, 239035 in a proverb under FR) in the Dictionary. 1mental 121 The case-terminations for the singular of neuter and feminine hases (and of the base e3¢y that is masculine-feminine-neuter in the modern , Aa, dialect) ending in v, this vowel being merely euphonically suffixed to $asana Such ancient bases ending in consonants (see §§ 92. 93. 94. 96 remark). bases appear nowadays chiefly in the medieeval and modern dialects; yubling but there are proofs of their existence also in the ancient one, namely in its dative and genitive, and in the words Zon% (for Zorig) 0N sana of (for 3°), Fpewy, ARV, FZ,To, VPEHOY (BLFWw), TRV, R0ET 6’“03)7305 2eN. 0 51801 @) In the ancient dialect 1, Nom. v, %.e. the crude base, e. g. JN¥ (in a s4sana of about 778 A. D.), T (in one of 1048 A. D.), P, 3B (in one of 1182 A. D.), 3083 WFe (in one of 1187 A. D.), ®903>0) (in one of 1076 A. D.), 9% AYY (in one of 1123 A.D.), 203 AW (in one of 1182 A. D.). Y 4, Dat. @oR, B, e. g. ¥noon, snior; ¥wdoR (in a Shsana of 1084 A.D.), b RABOOR (in a S4sana of 1123 A.D.); pr¥ed (for &PrRwWF), IRWF (in one of 1123 A. D.). 00,0 Al The grammatical bases of the terms @ni9on, &noR, vwdon, ALEdN, JpNRE WT, YNWT gre VNS, H|NYE, NWT°, FRBTE, JPRYSS, YRS, According to rule their dative ought to be ¥1i¢, &n&, vir, AeERF, PRIY, und, (see § 120); ental but they have been treated as if they were ¥T®o, 3¢, ¥dy, FRTETy, FPprivwy, 1o, analogously to the ancient ¥7@> and &1&> (§ 122), for which GoR is the A grammatical termination of the dative, and somewhat analogously e. g. to the modern S»Bw and BRenoY, for which 8% is the grammatical termination of the T dative (see under letter ¢). Thus the forms $9N%°, KNE°, NNT®, ARRET®, PNPS°, W) ) ©neo® have existed with the euphonic suffix v of the medieeval and modern dialect already in ancient times, and have been used like the bases with final @ in § 122. Observe that ©¢° and 2, seven, appear in these two forms in heen the anecient dialect. <90R consists of the euphonic augment 90 and the termination of the dative R (see § 120). The @ before ¥ is simply euphonic. ot 6, Gen. ¥R, e.g. QO 3, INO b 3, BRI, YN, HKNYR. detn 410 The bases of these terms are Q3 %%, JIRSS, ARWS, ©Ne’, SN, and the 0, grammatical forms of the genitive would be 98%¥, Inw, Aew, ¥N¥, SHNY (see § 120). Késava remarks that 93093 and SNOS are optionally used for 89% and b<6a 56 o110, which goes to show that 992% and SR, forms with the euphonic ¥V, were 4! Da ; together with AR, ¥R¥y, &NR%), in common use at his time and in the time (see§ 370 preceding. Késava adds that it is wrong (ddsha) to use such forms as @308, e, 307 SO, IWNOI, ete. He evidently opposes the too free use of forms of ordinary 5, Al conversation, which presuppose the existence of many bases with the euphonie mii , final @0 (§ 122), in the present case of B¥m90), S99V and JWNY, 9% is 9, the termination of the genitive, and the euphonic augment @0 (83, 6, Ge aR; @ b) in the mediseval dialect V| Yivy [ v 1, Nom. &y .e. the crude base, e. g. 99, T, Ty, LAl T, T, i B DRFV, AR, BonYy, IRAT), ARTTY, RFWW; VIP, VI, (YITPY), WIFHY, %, 903 KNP, BN, BRWY; &P, E =6 , T 2, Acc. @0, ¢35, the crude base, e. g. 20n%o; Wvo, VFPo; FY, HNT, F0tY; T, L Y ; JO0IP, 0¢ MYV, QIR It is impossible to settle whether 20m¥o, Wodrwo, WIPo, Ty, IR, J0tY, Y¥ 3030, @ are the accusative of bases with final consonants (§ 120, letter &) or of bases SR0RS with the eaphonic V. Consonants 3, Instr. o, (faaéo, "aa;, “3;653), "ag);:’,a, £, g, T 0, YN0, ete.; FOTIAR In 9t It is possible that in such forms as ¥ o, ¥Wd0; ete. the bases are FO°, LT, 12 etc. (see § 120, letter ). neuter hag 2Q% is 93 attached to B3 of the genitive. 4, RortRy, Dat. eaofi’ r\afi’ (ag’ e.g. ?sgofi, B on, YRR, peoon, TIVoR, Nedon, Boedon, BRwooR, Bovon, Brdon; YwoR, WBeoR, AreeR, FRIVR, FIR; RNV, always en Like the %o the % that precedes the terminations ? and %, is a eaphonic (see §§ 9 augment. - Concey . Abl. (3 edo, ete.), the terminations of the instrumental. %&‘.’fi), 1o 6, boeq §89 Gen. &, AR, e. g. V%), Y, YT, THV, TRIY, WYY; VI¥, YIY, (YIY), b hase-tér\m WIFE, W& ¥¥; VI 3, ©IORF, 3ATNOR, BBHPa. y 123, 2, I8, ete. may be referred also to V9%, I3, ete. (see § 120, letter 4). (89 N & ‘) 3) 7, Loc. Bdw%*, "&682’, e. g. Tee3309%; BIOTL. in the modern dialect 169), 11‘1 €| ¢) fomatiop 1, Nom. en, 4. e. the crude base, e.g. 29, T, YW, FHT), INBW, ;J@,- 5\)3(; B0 ¢TIV, BREE; %ea{ga; TP, BT, INY., u&b)oeéa; YY), HR; &Y. and i the 2, Ace. 9%, ®Ry, ®, o, the crude base, e. g. BN, FLVII), AT, 3)’ :’gi 599 Sy, TFYRY, BAT Y, BeBRY, TRAVI); ¥VIPIY, AILIY; $8RY; BY, YWG, IV, Dl‘imitive 5 TR, 3¢, INT, JNY, WINY; @a’fq@a, wzgaesa, R8,09; Ty, 3. It is impossible to decide whether ®2, ¥W3, ete., also in this case, are formed Wien th w)( from VY, YWD, ete. or from TO?, YWTF, ete. (see § 120, letter c). o, Hung) g 3, Instr. 9, VAT, €. g. FOF; TYRY, ae0F, BOF. g Mgt : 33.)&@8(33 may come from 2398 or =3939°. h o [PR— 57 N, were 4, Dat. "‘3\%, fa%_&, f*g\fi, 8. g INRBOF or 3'552)593%_, BRENBOF or o%@@fi@fi‘; the time (see § 370, 4); BB X, AR, w3eR; wor; FOR, wR, BBR, BT, s, 60, R0, 23960218, SRR, SWADR. -~ rdinary R uphonie Abl. ra;g, ’83’&;, e. g. YO, 3nIF; YRORT | F0¢DRT, TREORT . w07 , 3¢OF may, also in this case, come from SRBY or GWRTE, SV or BILSF. o #) 6, Gen. o, 33, e 9. E:-JESG)@, Fo, VY, T, BIY, FRTY, IVNY; VIY, FIY, o33=Y; *’sgas; #z:éazs, TO R, W3, &s{é@é, 3:03, R0, WNAT, BV, 0T, TR, ), T, SNVAOT; IR, D] o , etc. may, also in this case, come from Ty, FO), ete. or from mgfi), 839%, F THE, TOF, ete. 3, 309, i Loe, ¥Ry, 99, 299, 29, 989, 99, 9, e g snde$i; T, QSD:» b ) K \V, ) [ v 44 RECY, BIVY, VALY, IRRTY; GR¢Y, VIFY; 109, 00; GORY, T IY, 7O 1 32039, BV, FRE*IY ; #s?gasei; ?ei@, 00, WIONY, BRYY; BRIF, Ty . f hases NRSRYR, FYO 7 etc. may, also in this case, be referred to bases with final consonants. TR W In © the @€ or 2 has been mutilated (¢/. § 130, letter ¢). 5, 0, 122. The case-terminations for the singular of dissyllabic and trisyllabie neuter bases, (of the masculine basgs m? Ry, newy, of the feminine base BonAY, and of the masculine-feminine-neuter bases TRy, FWAD) 0o, always ending in the euphonic «v in the ancient, medieval and modern dialect (see §§ 96. 98). See wiy, By, VOFY, HTY in § 127. :I]phOl]ic Concerning the terminations 3o, 39, and Jo in w93, w33, B, LS @), 0B, ete. (which are classed with the so-called adjectives, § 102, s, b.c; §§ 273. 276) the grammarian KéSava teaches only that they are their (fiOfl base-terminations. They are pronominal forms; 30 we find again in D8 90 (§§ 123, a; 272), in @3>F (§§ 135. 270. 272 under 2), in 8, RN, 3, rb) (§ 272, 2), in 93> (§ 125), in ®v, (§ 212), in past participles (3§ 166. 168. 169), in 908 (§ 194), in a personal termination (§§ 193. 198. 199), in the formation of the pronouns 3> (§ 138, 4, 8) and ¥3, ete. (§§ 138, d, 3; 265), in SRRV Y, BN, (§ 243, 4, remark &), and B in past participles (§§ 166. 168. 169) and in the modern 32¢2@), SRR, ete. (§ 254, 1, a and remark 3). aL0; 35, 33 (euphonically doubled) and &> represent the letters S°, 8, &, the )j’ ) primitive signs which point to an object in a general way, with a euphonic V. When the vowels @, @, @0 (other forms of &, &, W, see § 264) are prefixed to fyrmed R (¥R, BB, ¥R which are the commonly used demonstrative neuter pro- nouns) the direction becomes distinet ; ©3), ¥3, (which are substitutes for ©OR) are met with in combination with o8 (of me), ete. as V&3), 2T, ete. (S 135 a, 6; § 272, 2), ©30, 93, 9B, (=98 as personal terminations (§ 193), B 8 58 w3 is t (=) in combination with 39, (of us), ete. as 2%9,3), ete. (§ 272, 2, and eniive; i W), as a participial termination, § 173). Compare also § 124, &5, 4; § 265. augments ¢ Regarding the neuter plural of 9,39, ete., 3@, ete., W, ete. see § 136. The case-terminations are i LO_I b a) in the ancient dialect 0‘ {/' \':, 1 Shoana of 1 Nom. e, ¢. e. the crude hase, e. g. 23, 20, F), FHR), T, IR, — and 696 A :«a’oesmog), BRB), FRIY, IKNR), YR, RRY, Awomy, WM™, FENRY, Jeny, &fig, Ww “n o 29 mmgo, DIy, [NV, [pwry, WD, 23'%:%0, W, 89, zfiéfi%é_)), w930, R, VWY, T, D) Iil n BIR), VD), VWD), TR, GARY, uéo@, TR, 1, No ©E) appears also as %W (in a $asana between 594 and 608 A. D.; cf. My § 117, letter a). g, 6wy A 2. -Ace, e8¢, (efi), o, e. g. w¥o, BNJ o, JJo, JBo, INI0, BBRT0, Feworno, 1650, ¥ ©230, u%éo, ¥30, ¥IR0, 0, 230, VB30, ©03) o, 20¢T0; (G, S0839); QWO it WV, ry ..ji" (in a sasana between 680 and 696 A. D., in one of somewhat after 732 A. D., and in one of 750 A. D.). ikl We take ®& to be the CSVERY) 000w The © in parenthesis refers to % and )03). W v | accusative in the sentence quoted by Késava (page 164) in Sov®a Sow’odrd < = N DE)0 JoFo WFFH (could it ever come to (my) mind to forget the southern country ?). He, however, supposes that o= is the genitive used for the accusa- 4 1 tive. 25330, stands (according to a Mdb. Ms.) in the passage qnoted by Késava 0 A i in page 288 :— W00 HPFYOF® QWROAWP) BB (they scratched the (i. e. his : 2 © or her or its or their) navel and clawed the hair-knot). (f. the note under the NG Pl ancient accusative in § 117, and see § 352, 1, &. Regarding the lengthening cf. Bon §'109, a;.6 uphonic 3, Instr. Bo, BQo, "9@:» raga;i, ©8P0, €. g- BP0, TRIV0; INIJ0, FRID of 597 Q0; WY 2392352, dJa?oFSQ; fiaofi&?\"&; ORE0, YJHRr0, %E(SbeflSo, N0RE’0, [IRWE’0, formg. of 29 Q36°0, DRBEPLO, JILVITEO. for e 4, Dat. v0oR, eflsfi, @B e.g. SRR, Staon, Sadod, FeaoR, @nr@cH, iaw%;, &nRon, SIRAON; fioem'v;\, fi?%#fle‘?“\, &Sooi\é&;, &%5’/5\, &zifi;\, mfifie“{%\; VRFF, |RTF, BIRTF, TSBRTF, u%%sy VTVBEF, ooegfir, N3 TF, SRBTF, VABFF, JQBHF, afié?éé@s—, SICITHF. Ry 2 N The terminations are ® and &; 9o, ¥®° and ¥«° are euphonical augments. '\«'\'" Wi ey 5, Abl. ©33, o, aéésfi%o, “&5%95%, ®e30, »298 30, the termina- Nt tions of the instrumental, e. g. <2238 do; Joenedo, F¥nedo, 3203 edo, 23 o, The SHendo, wenedo; I3 do; ANEEIN é@mm&i. b 6, Gen ¥, BT, WO, LY, e.g. &, DHITY; 23, AT, SN, LN, 0% o \¢ ANT, BRTAT, WO E, I8 T, ¥nRS, HNRT, TROIT; FEn,, S, BT 19, RS & :-2 , DT, Pones, wenn; WK, ARe, TR, SREETY, wI®, ToYe, efioflg}w, < 0 AR e, P23, VJB® N AN ) :‘1 mll] 43 is the euphounic augment B30 (93°) and ©, the true termination of the 63 and in ©® it is @&k genitive; in ©® the augment is ©%° Compare the 136 augments &° and 3 in § 109, letter a, and see § 141, remark under Dative. 7, Loc. vdwsf, aldnd, 2RR9R, ag9, ©liyf, weBias, vl e. g. INZRYY, IRIWNPE, INVINEE, TASLYE, FTIFINTT; ISNRBRP (in a , ) Sasana of 1123 A. D.); w8 3a9R; 39032 ; &30 3ed¥° (in a $hsana between 680 ~ 2 and 696 A. D.); 28R, LIRePRYE, TReAD YT, 059,833 e 12 ¢85, BRSPS, B3 ;% PR F°, NRBLPR ; VReY, e:)od%esQ. b) in the mediseval dialeet Dt of 1, Nom. ev, ¢. e. the crude hase, e.g. ©33, w3, W), oI, Teun, 8%, AW, B B, 29,3, WYI), %5%'5'), FEPT, z,d%, NTBBY, DED, efifi%, DRI, JILIT. ) () gorio, oy Acc. es0, @, the .crude hase, e. g. 280, TIRo, INSo, w0, YO, S TANe) %esscso, ©ZBo, VWO, NVRO; YVTF, 3?-0—’&), .52.2%3, TOENT, TB, 83, %o%, ©8, 9%, u%; B D) FERY, BER, DORY, A D, 3, Instr. @0, ©Ro, VAo, By, B o, fa%@, BT, 9830, BEPT | ¢ the @wgfié@’ 95@-39% e. g. F&odo, TR0; FRARO, BRI, RO; %?Je'd@;o%o; %zim?n, S 0; o) 553%&%; PAIONICS) u@%&&fi@@; %zz&c%, zm:afi@, %r“%f;’mc’o, ;Soo:béég; BRE0; @cflcssa;; hern @Cfi%fisg@; @&36&)’%. Hibig 4, " Dat. a0}, BB, BT, ”a‘v_”é\_, Do®¥, &3 oI, «9F e g. SHOR, $av0 R on; SRR, =207, Seant, 338, Roan, BaR, VAR, FFMF; FVT,; WEWNIOT; , his & V0] zuagoér, WRBEF; @‘('\)é?%, DAY, oodcé%, IR &7 N % a@é%, u%é@%, a\nfimfifi, 3 the %o%% B0e0T ; ¥RF, ARF, WAST; :Sooa;%?, &3 F, ez, I Qon, an, |o¥F, |, B %9 are fia T k) ? & < ,» the terminations of the dative, and the euphonic augments 9c and . In 9T, %‘9%3033%7, WP N0F the final letter 1O i of ¥¥10 and %% has been changed into 3. ©3, ©F generally are mutilated DEVT. DV B0, forms of 3. bl .6.7 mm@% S03E, 23T, &3 %, either stand for Soc08, 03B, WFR (see letter @), or for ScwFr, JINITF, &3 T, o 306@%&\7, ete. i 5, Abl. ('353950, etc.), the terminations of the instrumental. i 6, Gen. & AT, W, 99, e g. BT, BT, VTR, JewB; YT, WOT, 31T, VYR, WS, TONI, WINF, WOAR, JedI; FEN,, [oenes, mo%m, %ogea, Jpone, Bewns, LN, R0 M, [oew; VT, OF 6, 'a;fi;@’ oRe, u%ee, 0Tes, &3 Jopeses, TOV,E, u%ées, VT, cfifa&;%riw, ?,Sé\e?d:ées. 14 The Basavapurana, exceptionally, has 505@9955; see § 123, letter ¢, 4. 5. 6. 7, Loc. adwef, aRR, (ARRFN), asY, a9, stPre’, wtBRW, P BEBRER, ¥e9Y, BeYo, e.g. % B0 ¥, %zgca'm%vs, BeAIN P, FEAIHYE, TOR IR, FPAIB P, WIDBR P, LTARRYS; #%3@%, DS INP); %Y, WY, T RIY, VAT, TOATY, c%fafi@_/asez; wd T, %zié@, FoeIO, BIINTY; GRZSD 9, wy a’ae%ess.fa%vs; DR P ; u%es%a@fi; WOFOY, JReed | WITHO, VTS, em%éese?fl, 8¥ e 60 ] ) n d@%é@@“, 23%5&)‘%; EHELIA 39%@3@, RERCL efloi%eae“}, Toud, J860, ®3 @0, WY 3®O N ¢) in the modern dialect 1, Nom. en, @.e. the crude base, e. g. 23, BTy, T0A, FIA, BIM, % il WO, BT, AR, ud%, efix%, %osgo. (i 2, Ace: B8, @m%, Vg, eaajv oo es @C‘f)s\&, the crude base, e. g. ¥ j m S, AT, [N, VI, BRI, WD), PYIY; BonADY, NYHRIY, T@I, No WBRY, BB, 0BRITIY, VIR, Wi I, [, D) % QI 5’0%5&; OR; ’@da;; ‘VJ%, TR, Da 33, IN, TN, BBIW; MTIF; BEHIY, WBPTTOIY, W BIY, B BDY; TR0, TR In 8% About ©3, ete. see e. g. § 109, letters b, ¢; § 117, 4, c. In the vulgar hecome a w®3) the ¥3) is attached to the ©® of the genitive. . 1§ 109), e. g. RRIAIA] @’ L33, Sewd; By o} 3, Instr. b3, 'ad;], ’a@a;, LR hase with | aa@@&zfla, %ao@g)g, ?Ja:%aaé, WODRT, 2 ’T ; O '3, R e 9(-5. () 9, ), Al 4, Dat. an, 93, ¥T, e g. 3004} ~ é;fi, PR3 R, AR, TR, WOIR, B¢ J I s | z For & AR, mé@fi, e Ak, ToNAR, JRLR; @dai, e o’ 00T, BYT, IenT,, LT, I = =2 ative, an 3 %, mw%‘;, OB, ol &%%, B0 T, ?302\?03?, BeVTF, TERTF, wLIT. TIORT comes from THMY, and w¥eF (for 2900F) from W¥™ (see letter ). - The ba 9, Abl. the terminations of the instrumental, e.g. »¥N3, Hewnd, b, G i?%fifixé; mflfia;g, o%@wh&%, B0 RF ;5 B @I 6, o [eL Ta'm) d N , 8¢n, 8, (SR); Regar Gen. ¥, o8, B, Y, @9 e.g. TI), 3 75 L( SRED; fi%d, FRAB, T, F, $oN3, 33,8, FIAF, VYN, J0ers, FIAT, wEAT, Be BN, S033, 2 T; TONER, [0, WP, VRN, B0F e, oFm, RZw; Jene, The o3I ¢ o0y, A8e, O 8,09, o &3 N, wI O, L. e fing] % (§ ©¢ is another form of ©. 14, 3§ 122 4 7, Loc. 9, (v9), vdR¥R, v, w9, ¥eBH¥A, VLD, ©LIY, of the ply e. g. WY, Fwed; FaZLIR, ?z;o&agffi; W RY, TIRIY, FRATY ; FEIO, TN, SR NY; ¥BSPRER, efia;esamfifi; TR &Y, em&‘dweg, BT 00, JRODY, INBH ; %3 09, o 123. Kight neuter nominal bases with final es (words denoting direction. 1: iH digvacaka, digvaci), which, in the ancient and medieval dialect, and Qa‘;a (4 ai\‘ 9 23) I partly also in the modern one, are declined like some bases with the final 31 i] euphonic of ey § 122. (Their lengthened form appears in § 126). a) in the anecient dialect (:;“\1 %53) } Nom. ¢, i.e. the crude base, viz. ¥3, 438, W3, 23, 0¥, IFF, VAN, é‘:‘)! ;‘m}, AN céj of fi-’&gd; | 4, b W gng {] Dat. @9‘53\., e.g. O3 8, 938, 30T :’)6505553’\, wcéfie*{:z, dodacés";\. 9, 9098 ia ii Abl. €30, @S’:fi%o, 29008 t30, €. g. 9o, ©Z83o, ©II; Pronoyjy, 3 80, éo%’séo, WRENES0, SORBL50; SR B3 do. 6, Gen. @09, ©Ks, . ¢. V8o, 98 £, 300, IRITM, WRNL, SoRTD. i‘mfid el‘l]] ))1 The simple ®%° appears in 083, that stands for the full form 3% (see [ Doy 10ng S 272 under No. 2). N N 61 80 %9 b) in the mediseval dialect Nom. ¢, ¢. e. the crude base, e. g. ©¥38, B3, 3. 4, Dat. (&fi ). o, Abl. em%g, (Qsz%ggo), @9’3%, eggg;g €. g. SoRBBo; 2033 ; ©I BT . 6, Gen. ©c0, 5%, e. g. Q8 0, 23 0, 30T, IRIFH, WAEND, FMED; I8,¥ i B in the modern dialect 78 ¢) : 1 Nom. ¢9, 4. e. the crude hase, e. g. ©8, 93, % 43 4, o 3 Dat. 959@'-0‘2 or @9@-‘3-3_&’ @ or fi%’ €. g. 20T DT or éo??@% WENF or &)?3?'(@6_ In 20T0%, 20¥®T, the augment ¥%° has received an @, and as ©® has vuloar become a part of the base, which is declined like a neuter base with final © b B (§ 109). In WRENT, WERT, no augment appears, and WAET is treated as a neuter b base with final . 23 , 423 =iy i, 49 5, Abl. aez%:g, WD, BR, 6. . 30T ; DouR0Y; For 330@5?&@% the base ®02%Z% has been formed like that of 30%F of the 3 dative, and has been declined like a neuter base ending in © (§ 109); ¢f. the ) %o?v'@?ad in § 122 under letter b. with final @v, § 122). HENR The bases for ©8,3, 923 seem to be €33, 93, (¥E, 9, 6, Gen. 2329, 993, e. g. 30T, RIS, SIRTH, Regarding @37 see the ablative and locative. (68 RE)) Loe. TN S ed o 7, g9, 89, e.yg. IRTHIO ; NI 7 ® o) ¥, The bases are ®@IIM and W&EN, that are declined like nguter bases with final © (§ 109). 124, Remarks on the employment of the augments &% and % of §§ 122 and 123. (See also the declension of the pronoun ¥%° in § 125 and that 599 of the plural of ©®, ete. in § 136). o) i) 0996 is used b ;fl L, {10 in numerals (sankhys), e. g. w8, ~0B, JoHw, FpVY, VoI, G, VN, Y, mffii, BB (BB, BREN; and 2, in pronouns (sarvanima), e. g. ¥R, AR, YR, FIR), OIIF, B&B0; p fiml 3, in terms denoting quantity (praméanavi¢i, pavan), their finals 33, 33 (%, &3) being pronominal forms (see § 122), e. y. DRI, V2B, MY, VA, VA, BR), VRY, i, BhED, v, 2R, 9, omgd; (the ¥R is probably another form at of ©¥83d; W& one of YRY; WX, one of ¥AIB), the 3> having taken the form of W and the ¥ having become short); 4, in the so-called adjectives (gunavafana), their finals 89, 33, T heing 300 pronominal forms, and the pronoun ¥R, e.g. w9, w3, IL, AR, (modern) @wad @, B3, Z&f&d\); in verbal bases 9, (krit), their end-syllables V&> or @B heing neuter pronouns, e. g. IPRBIW, ) (see TRREIR, IR R, FHBIYR), IRARBR, (SNRXY), [RBY SR; — 62 — 6, in the term S9¢20%, it being composed of 33¢&° and the neuter profons 0) int ital) Nor The Sabdanusisana under its stitra 269 states that VY (D2 0), which is one At of the words which express indefinite quantity (§ 90), exceptionally receives Ing the augment ©&* in the neuter forms 2 &, DV BF, DO, DV et0 ¥, The dative Da @%i appears in the Sabdamanidarpana, and 2QT, obvfi in the medieval and Ab modern dialect, in which forms the répha has disappeared. See the neuter b, (i plural of 29 in § 136, its epicene plural in § 119; ¢f. § 266. Lo e985° 1s used in nominal bases denoting direction (digvadaka, digvagi), e.g. 30em, TEM, " = v, WEM. Fpon, ¥, 93, 3o Compare the terms IB), FB, I8, VO, BY, WY, VO, §12310 in § 139. they may 10 the ab 125. Declension of the interrogative pronoun ¢ (Do, ¢f. §§ 262. 269. 301), the augment being 595 This is not directly attached to o or and local its crude form, but to 30, 4. e. £ and the pronominal form 3y (§ 122), 15 the fol literally meaning ¢ what-it . G) 1 a) in the ancient dialect [ Hisang of Nom. o, the crude bhase, ¢. e. ©0; . In thi Acc. o, the crude base, ¢. e. OF0; . Instr. e589% 7. e. d3ero. arises ] Dat. 56358 sB, B, i. 6. DITF; HIF; 2T, (see the _&_) For ek »3F is a mutilated form of H3FF; compare the mutilated forms of the dative tstablish of the medizval and modern dialect in § 122 and in this paragraph. Such 9 ) forms, therefore, must have existed in ancient times. In ®% the termination & Here has been suffixed directly to ®. See also § 124 w0 F, 20T for VQTF, DY TF. A0cUsat b Abl @wggg%o, 3. e. ©33 odo. ly b, Gen. €3, ¢. e. 3w In 1, Loec. e5€380%5, 4. e. D3P0 ¥S. been g b) in the medizeval dialect base & 1 ‘) Nom. o, &9, the crude base, ¢. e. ®0; DdIV; D, (0359). l HIJ is MO (9% and the euphonic ¥v. 0333 is another form of ® (see § 41). 9 Ace. 50, ¢, the crude base, 7. e. OFT0; HIJ; O I Instr. ©65%0, 4. e. ¥Sero, (WK3e’0). 9 ‘) Dat. e&%&, wB, B, 0. e O3, or V3T, WNIT, or SF; OF, T 9 Abl. (5893 230), the termination of the instrumental. b) Gen. eI, . e. VG, oS3R8 e. b ? Loc. ®&30¢¢, ¥CBR, SLRRYA, 6tiQ, &LIY, e. g. P30S, 63 ¥ Pronouy %) in the modern dialect Nom. =, the crude base, i. e. ®30; 0. ich i ope 5 iy Ace. R, @Ry, », the crude hase, 7. e. ©30; PII; V3. | IeCeIVes 3, Che dative Instr. e§°-"‘9(2, 7.1 05393&)9(\2}. 4, T O330F ieval and Dat. @%t}, 9F B . e 0393, or 0393 ) 18 nefer Abl. @@9%, i. e. O3S, 6, Gen. €9, 7. e. 033>3e. 1 Loe. ¢330 1, VL9, (£L9Y), e. g. 3w, Ty, B9 126. Concerning the eight nominal bases with final ¢s mentioned in 0o, 39 § 123 it is to be stated that in the nominative, accusative, and locative they may receive the termination ey or WeU; WO Or WO appears also 62, 269, in the ablative of the mediseval dialect, and eyoy in the ablative, genitive, 0 o O and locative of the modern one. The declension of the ieng'thened bases " § 122) is the following. @) in the ancient dialect 1 Nom. the crude base, oV, e.g. SIPBLF, IRIJF, ¥ &¢; WIRW (in a sasana of 1123 A. D.). In this case the ©©° means ¢ place’ (see § 109, letter a, Locative). The question arises whether e. g. RES* may not be FRE, the genitive of J0HA), the east (see the genitive with © in §§ 120. 122), and ©9°, 4. e. the place of the east. o dative For ©80°, 93 0%, ®w3 &*, w3 o, however, no base ending in @V has as yet been established; but see the curious modern ablative ©33, 433 in § 123, letter c. Such 2, Ace. the crude base, e. g. S0RTL°, IBITO®, @3 o°. jation 3 Here we have an accusative represented by the crude base; ¢f. the ancient |gg§£ accusative in §§ 120, 125, 127. by Loc. the crude base, e. g. SIRBY°, BRITT, ©F oF. In this case ©©° means “in the place’. It is not impossible that ®©° has been suffixed to the genitive of So»® and SRD; but, as remarked above, a base ending in @V for ©8 &° ete, is still to be established. b) in the medieval dialect 1 Nom. the crude base, e, e. g. S0LTST, LA YREB Y, "a:i@o, (il 9, Abl B, e.'g. ©8O0, 7, Loc. the crude base, o, €. g. SVRTBST; &, in the modern dialect ¢) 1, Nom. e, ¢. e. the crude hbase, e. g. 3oFw), WBRwy, SERSM 5 Abl a8, e g. d\i@:&, fazi@% 6, Gen. e, e. g. WAV, ®3 0. (B Loc Y, e.yg. REVY, JIFTY, WERWY. 64 127. Declension of four nominal hases always ending in the euphonic ev WIED (w knows, (see § 122) that express time (kalavalaka, kalavaci), viz. ©g), B8, MR, IR, the nominative, accusative, and locative of which have the H3)), The ¢ same form, though the locative may receive also the terminations ©R8R%°, {0 one fo =Y (Cf. the declension of ga%, etc. ?11 § 139.) Q) ir / a) in the ancient dialect l N Nom. the crude hase, ¢. e. ¥, B, WI), VT "Bl Vm-)‘ Acc. the crude base, ¢. e. ¥R, 9T, WS, HTY. S; W W Instr. 8o, €. g. ©30, B30. g, A Dat BoR, €. g. ¥yon, [ on. =5 2 Abl o 833,830, e g. ©@33do, By o, %if;)} Gen A0; ag, € g. VAT, AT, Loe DR 3 § 7, the crude base, BRRT, BRY, e g. VI, W, 3D, T b A @%fimg wegée?w, in the mediseval dialect mental, b) b ¢ 1, Nom. the crude base, i.e. ©3), B, 2. 3R 0R; An instance for @& has not been found by the author. Acc. the crude base, ¢.e. O, AT, WFY. Tl i &, 1t Instr. the terminations of the ablative. Dat BoR, AR, €. g. Ao, Koi; 231, ) i Abl a0, VAN, BF, € . TGO DR AT DT A&, Gen B8, 4 e VT, AT, Q. ) % Loe the crude base, 7. e. O, BIY, I, R ¢) in the modern dialect | Nom. the crude base, é. e. @8, B3, I8 4 ] Acec. the crude base, @. e. ¥, A3, DT - Instr. the termination of the ablative. % b Dat. B8R, ¢ €. ©31, B3R, 237 LAY Qu Abl fags%, e. 9. ORI, A T Gen. ¥R, €. g. ¥R, 9. T % W) 8 A Loc. the crude base, 939, e. 4. ¥8, B[R, VT ; VIR, A fa ih| 198. The case-terminations for the singular of nominal bases with a radical final ew (see § 97), whether masculine, feminine, or neuter (see § 139 regarding IRv)- }2 The bases comprise Kannada and Sarskrita words. They can easily wJ wj"aa be distinguished from those in §§ 121, 122, and 127, as their final en The never unites with a following vowel without the euphonic augment ¢ ( ramm being inserted. For instance, we say Tamad)e (DB BRBY), B3, Bouy — 65 o e e gy 03y ([, YNy), but we cannot say, as every intelligent teacher 3%, knows, s0o003), 0w, but must say FoBoTeIBy (ToTa-F- ve the FGOR), FIBITOIBY (Bora-53°-yW ). See § 215, 3, d. R0, The case-terminations are suffixed by means of a euphonic ¢, except in one form of the dative. @) in the ancient dialect 1, Nom. e, . e. the crude base, e. g. ¥R, B, YO, F3), Fed, T, T3, TID), 3690, B, Bow), IW, Je, Y, e, zs’édgs, FB); 1B, 3RV, [TB), T3, PIXY, 0, I 2, Ace. &0, €. g. TIBOTo (FB0-T-290), DT (Te-7-20); MBITo (M- ss-efio). 3, Imstr. B0, o, '&‘cgo, 'a‘éb%o, rag)%, 6. g, JorINo, VWINO, 1OBINO, SORON0; FIBIVRO, NIBINRO, TIVIVRO; mdm%m fiocfioaaa’mo; mqb:bé‘)%. RN 4, Dat. R, @oR, €. g. BN, BN, 3308; SoBIROR, ROBINOR, 5 Abl. 'asiz%o,‘,[aaigségo, "aaigs%;g, the terminations of the instru- mental, e.g. FBIITI o, 6, Gen. ¢, &, BF, 6. g. DT, F,Z, MOIT, IPT; SIFIT; FIBINT, 1B DV, IDR. 7 . TOELR 1, Loe. 25, (ég), BERY, AFY, 6. g. MWOIR, RTrpes SR 95, TIBINRL ¥ ; FBIVTY. b) in the mediseval dialect 1, Nom. wv 4. e the crude base, ev, e. g. NS, o, ™, IB; T, NBYY, 30I (see § 113, and cf. § 130, letter b). 2, Ace. ®o, (¥R), ¥ ) e. g. WRTo, TewJo, TN To, B0, 330,30 w IR, DT, 55’053%;5, S8, WD, 333, o) Instr. a0, @0, €. g. VBR0; BZoRo. 7 Dat. &, @R, (o), e g. smgpfi, aR0R; mogaanr, 3309R. ? Abl. (a88,ed0, ete.), the terminations of the instrumental. % 7 Gen. (2); AR, e.g. BIINT, WRIDT, TN, @ofi»@;’m, TOBIDR, BWINT, BRI DS, ¥ 7, Loc. (%%%), 28R%, BR8%), alR9R, 959, Br9, €. g. IR, B NBL P ; VROIIRP, IRAZRFY; ZJ0ABLER; %?053%3359;1, %v'é?)r:me‘;h; BRIDIO 308D IO, th & €) in the modern dialect eut&l 1 Nom. e . e. the crude base, ou (see § 113), e. g. TBY; MBI, BRI 2, Acc. ®8), ¥, B8, BRI, the crude base, e. g. ROBODRY, TAIIRY, ; asll) BROT; MIVIVT; TOBIDRIY; BAD. | 0 The strange forms MBI, MOBILRIY, are given in his ‘Outlines of Kanarese b Grammar’, page 17, by Venkat Rango Katti, Kanarese Translator, E. D., Bombay, 1886. W 9 p—— ——s 66 Forms of the modern dialect like Rom3233), (of Bo83)) and BW3BLIIY (of 0) (M ®»)) in which the final ¥V is wrongly treated as if it were radical, are modern Y { licenses in literature. ’? ) Instr. f&%, fa‘{a%, e. g. T3 ; mdmag. QS)Q, %0 kl Dat. @R, e. g. OB, FeIT, RogoaR, BRIIR, The ¢ - Abl ra-(?;, rao@-%, e. g. MBIV, BRI ; NSRS BRIV Y AT Il ?f - Gen. ¢, B, 6 g BRT; MIBIVT, BRIV I % ) Loo. ¥9, BRY, €. g. BRFY; DDFY, MY, BRIDFO. Fdono, 1 129. There are some nominal bases ending in enn, 935, 83, &, and 22 3@03)%; which in the singular are declined like those in § 128, e.g. Tp, B, Nripatung 28y, B, WA, FW, Awe, M2 gl @) in the ancient dialect b A 1 éfi%fl)i?@( Xy Nom. the crude base, e. g. &, 28, ¥», L] b 6 2, Ace. o, €. g. P, ¥ZTo, RAtFo, M Jo. In Sabdamanidarpana p. 67 there is 938280 or the crade base. Cf. letter c. Rdilad, 3109, g, 8, Instr. ®o, B, ¥T0, Ao, € ¢ PRo, 2ID0; PIY; PRFo; P 0, &)50)5) Q0. 8 4.+ Daty R, 'aofi, ey, PR, paoR, Reedon. (in a $sa Fadoay 5, Abl. 238 3o, e. g. PRV o. Mk 6, Gen. 9, B, e. g. MRS, MT; PRI, TFIF, YT, BHIT, BRI, LN n’?n;m (in a shs 7 Loc. %%, ARRS, €. g. [ees; PdJae:, T3 ragaes, RADIA. (in ong o in the medizeval dialect b) D i Nom. the crude base, eu, €. g. IP; PRI Hed Ace. ©o, e.g. @PTo. 5503)) %{f; 6, Gen. 43, €. g. PIT, BADR. The in the modern dialect d he]p fi Nom. the crude base, o, €. g. 38, {Re; BLHI, RAD §128 4 Ace. ©3y, the crude base, e. g. BRITY; Tb. ) bl G Dat. anR, e g. @R, é Gen. @R, €. g. BRIT. 3, 130. The case-terminations for the singular of mascaline, feminine and ONNQ ?1} "0 neuter bases ending in @, 8 and o. (Regarding some exceptions see § 139.) oy The terminations are suffixed by means of a eaphonic c3s¢, except by, 2 in the dative (¢f. the & in § 109, q, 6). e 67 e 33 ([)f @) in the ancient dialeect modern 1, Nom. 0, &, o, 4.e. the crude base, e.g. 39O, FI&, W, T, 3663 EX et 1R | ¢ Y, BB, KT, YNT, 63 \’;_\)3 Ace. 90, (the crude hase), e.g¢ DO03o, MIPO3N0, W00, TR0, AA 0390, 80280330, L9T20300, 38030300 £0300: TIZ030. B33, T30, RF30, Aedodvo The crude base is seen, e. g. in the following instance of Késava:—n? aw¢ ST’ See § 120, @ 3, Instr. Bo, B8 0, BR, , €.g. TV, BITS o, WFIOWO FRTO 00 TR0, N0 QIR 020 OF TS00; IDWT 0, TJROJIFROVIT 0; JARFO W and see SR ; @werodd (in a sasana of 929 A. D.; Pampa Bharata 1, 140 ) Nripatunga’s Kavirdjamérga, edited by K. B. Pathak, . a., introduction p. 2) 4 9 Dat. 7, e. g. 3R, 3084, FaB, VAR 3R, FAR. SR 2R, TN 5, Abl. ©3do, ©3 %o, @3 33, e. g. ARNI0E ed0, Bomavcdrg o, Fe’0308 80, IR £30, 0:35,0303, 2'30 : vesaofné 833 o; #es%sos 33, 13900328, &8s « 6, Gen. &, &5 e. . M9, A9 foamojg SF 203y, Tanody, FBG %es-’:os) [efter ¢ FORIBO, &I T3, T O 033, 02033, Ne3,0339, TonRodID See under o; W § 109, a, 6, about the lengthening $ITBID3IN Y (B Loe. enuy®, wof W W IS8 (SLDN] 40).. €. g (in a Sasana of 707 A. D.), %90®A30%° (in a Sisana of 866 A. D.); IDCR®* FHRHBONDL & PR BIABN ¥ QBRXR $° T30 ¥ fajelostoloid 23030 ¥ 3. B03% ) ReeR no@ne*oln®y (both in a Sasana of 1076 A. D.), $02,030%) (in a §4sana of 1123 DonR®30320 A. D.); 20&3¥R, 033L¥R; VIPO® (in a Ssana of 1186 A. D.); (in a shsana of 1076 A. D.), Rw & 03 (in a sasana of 1123 A.D.), dwgoden 360 U@OS)@D ~2303.)ef) (in one of 1182 A. D.); b) in the medizeval dialeet L, Nom. 3, &, o, ¢. e. the crude hase, the augment e (see § 113),e. g ZDOV), TeO; A ¢; S0 ; P3N, W3 030, L3y, dBa3N The augment @V, like that of § 128 and § 129, is in reality not euphonic or Like that of a help to enunciation, and is so to say, superfluous addition § 128 and § 129 it disappears in sandhi (§ 213 seq.) ) - 2, Ace. 090, Ry, 5, e. g. 3,030, TIIdo, ©:F,030; EY) ) %o:b o b efé 03RY, ’ @B0303030; F20eD303), [AC, F 8030, 3 03, F08ad), N a3 SReR No; Taed 3, Instr. o, ©wQ0 (o = e.g T ON0, .88N0 OB 0, PO.Q AT O, BSOWS 0; VRN, VT O doNoE, JSoS . I .I3eS ot ne 1fld TOI0 0N . I, 0N 2330, 81 00T 4, Dat. i3, e. g. 3R 30001, BE R, DRSFAR, 33 R, BTR, AR, SN 5, Abl. (»g 3o, ete.), 9333, the terminations of the instrumental e\Celt e.g. 3DWIY; BN 6, Gen. es, €. g. 3,03, 30n0), ¥Z0d), BB, 33 3, YFD), ST 9* 68 e for the 7, Loc. %%¥, W, ¥R, vy, B9, ¥, e g. § 23RV, VDALY, ad vowel 030 9°, m’ies@@o.%fws; 9T 03RP), FIBRRPY, PRIBRPY, FTBEHRPY, SFeB3RPY; T BePR, BIRBRYR, PEABHER, T S3H ¥R, FRRRIR, INPRRRIN; BRVLY; L& (§130 039, z?zgf?wag; fifaeé’&oo&@, BFRHFOV0Y, T00Y, PT S, 38039, assiosm, wherel a3, "rj?gq)fi(fi)@, AR 0308, Re30300. the ple 0) in the modern dialect The 1, Nom. @, &, ), ¢. e. the crude base, the augment erv (see § 113), e. g. () 3on, T, TH; A8 %‘Ri, aSsi, NP3, BRI, [T 03K, 2,608, $,050032, miéoéoo. I ST O3, fis?g\ ¢, 2, Acc. ¥, ¥R, ¥, ¥, lengthening of the final vowel, the crude mg\ ¢ base, e. g. B003r89, 31OBI, wo%osmo, Re303r0; 20803339, TR0V, 239,03339, ?.‘Df'u')t 13 ©erS3038Y; BRI, I, JNR0I, ao?e%éow, 3803, TerTad), Te8FR03); Iones, s, BIVR I, BIBINES, ©3 ¢S, ANAT; Wone, @Ja%e, mQe, FAE, 3IRE, WINE, WRTE, TG e, oy FHBRe, 37 8¢, 38, Swrrie, Bode, ToF ¢, Avee; T, RO, &I, HR. T A 1§ 93 is ¥R with a final ¥, and 30, ¥ 3, ete. stand for BoNR, ©3 33, =) etc. The forms ©one, ete., VAT, ete., stand for BoNa, ete., VETW, ete. 3, 3, Tustr, fag, e. g. SN, fio@o&od@, éiofiog, ;S-)ccfio;’)ofi@. 0n Vi Dat. Y0, 4, R, €. g. SR, &R, kR, TR, AW, VI, fi@fifi, éifi, &R, J0IN, &IA. 5, Abl. The raa;, e qg: mmofi)o% 53@60‘:)0%, é@ofio;\;. 6, Gen. e, ¢, lengthening of the final vowel, e. g. S0103), T, A 03, ééofio, AR, =T, KT, 3803, FRNASH; wé;dos:a, TIROIR; BV, lenta], TI00R, MPe, IV ¢, BYe, ToWUW, 2039, ¢, Ue, ToRTe, Fefy, Tk, B, b waere, Jweett, SoRe, TBe. 9, my T 32009, ete., 33 % ete. stand for SICVICD, ete., BS 03, ete. 7, Loe. %878, &9 99, &9, 0O, O, e.g. PREI5IR, Fdeer, S’ l RRIN; BORGRY. FFHY; B0, FR0O, AP, [T030; WA, ! BR O, TIND; 'azéueei’), RO, 23¢9, FoFe0; Fe0O, I, IO, WY, Fond, 18 o o)f)ia@. M%), 3% WD, ete., B3O, ete. stand for IV, ete., B 30, ete.; and FedI, In ; ete. are corrupted forms of T009, ete. (¢f. § 121, letter ¢). th& 10 131, The case-terminations of the plural of neuter bases with final e oA are given in § 118, and those of the plural of masculine and feminine 0 (and epicene) bases with final ¢ in § 119. E)é.) in it Here follow the case-terminations for the plural of neuter hases, (the 3 feminine bases 3»03s¢, S, and the masculine-neuter base &%) ending I in consonants (§ 120), in the vowel ev that, occasionally also in the Foy ancient dialect, is euphonically suffixed (§ 121), and in the euphonical vowel ev that in each dialect is always suffixed (§ 122), and further those il — 69 % 1 for the plural of masculine, feminine and neuter bases ending in the radical 0; 0 vowel e (§ 128), in e, 23y, 93%, % and ¥ (§129), and in = and o v o (§ 130), the case-terminations nowhere indicating the gender (see § 132 fiicj)& wherein the gender, to some extent, appears from the terminations of the plural). The case-terminations are ), 6.1 @) in the ancient dialect <1 W 1, Nom. fi%f, %, 1w, €. g. TH, T e, YWNres, o e°, TP, crude fiesg‘%?fi. éu@e%f\w, @figg\%fi, wafiocg\@s, mmoqg\w, #odoqg\@fi, FINFYS, BINFSS, ejef\%’fi. 303y ¥°, Ty 9°; Fwoee ¥°, T2 9°; FOI NS (in a Shsana of 1187 A, D.); ©0=onee, {)*\ T TIST, eaos%mvs, SREINYS, FJYFNes, FRIJFRYE, XYY N9S; Nodone’, Boennes, 30N, 3VINPE, DRI ; JPNST, &%mvs, zgg):-s)flvs; TORYS, TINYE, WIATIYT, TIJNFE, Y , it 1S, QU3 Ne°, FAMeT; 3z§3fis’6, W3 NY°, YIN®, VNS, SRABRYS, BANYS, JOINSS, FOTIBNRS; TOBINRS, [,NPS (both in a shsana of 1182 A. D.). i M3, H, Ade, @0 . ¢. 4, 'v"ae%%?o, YWRFPo; Bn¥o; FednNPo; e InFo. 3, Instr. w0, ((3-(?;0, raé)), e. g. TI0I 90, TeY 1o, 39NFRo; BFENYo, we NP0, YVTIBIBNYO0. , VT I f, 4, Dat. B, i3, e.g. YWRF Y ; 3INY; B3),N¥A (in a Shsana of 1187 A.D.). The @V in @R is merely euphonie. - 9, )OO, Abl. (6380, ©3,0d80, ©3,ed), the terminations of the instru- 33 mental, e. g. ??JNC%%?O; 505@030%71@%. o 0%y W\ ot 6, Gefi. ©, &, ¢ 9. #sg\e?, a"ooj%%f, afodo%j\%f; TOOIRY, BoINnY; JPNY; WI o 1%, FNT; 1IBTPa. 6 Loe. w%F, (@e?o), e. g. %’99\93@96; WINTISR ¥°; R AL S, ) VW <y b) in the mediseval dialect J)o)\‘/i iy Nomi. ‘Mo, Reb, e'yg. &Ss%e;fi, @’59‘96; PN ; SPVIN P, o N e, u%fiw, Ol\ge’y fim%r{%’s, éa‘g’ar{%fi, rfs‘im’s; 3903) &, T &; ST, JMOBINPY; NS MPy; Fend N%), SRIJINFY; BINRPY, FoRIBNL. Y In SRJINP) the termination TP has been appended to the euphonic ¥V of the nominative singular (see § 128, letter ). 2, nal Ace. ©0, ®R, ©, e.g. %ae;\%fo; wBWNYo, BPINFo; WITNPo, FeNSo; 3,01%0, INANPo; ISMER0, JBINSIo; T NP, TLeINY, RTPINY, ININY, e Fody e, TR T, HONY, eI 1Y, 29N, Ny ne. (the 3, Instr. ao, '”5‘%0, 'aéj raéo, 3, e. g. 3)en9o, A INY0; cg&m@z\jbo; @os.)% r\@z}b, w@m%, R*Jaéfi%;; @ofioo@fl@%, mm%, Defifl@%; S303NY. pding For the %@ in IR0 see § 109, letters & and c. ] the 4, Dat. 8, 2R, €. g. 2PTNY; TYIR 39RYR, WTRRIR, TITINER, . Ve gnifial those noR, ©aneR, $INIR, e IR, JN e e 70 P Aadndsy 5, Abl (&9_:?’9950, ete.), the terminations of the instrumental, e. g. SOINY0. REHE% 6, Gen., @, e.g. %aeg\eé; BTRINY, 2B NY, FB1Y; BeI0NRP, IBonY; JNT; The | SrNY. Of mnee an and ¥ 7, Loc. w%f, (%%), w¥ih, 89, ¥9, e g. ey N80 es; T HERER, SARSRER; T203) $O 5 BNV, JINRTY, BRF Y, JInFY, FPneD, BN, and %, 0) in the modern dialect (¢f. § 119 9 1, Nom. #%, €. g. TN, S0VYNG, By 1ie), TING), BAVND, Y& L ! gl NP5 MBI TP, FTRAING), INIINPY; MITIN, IR NP, BRINGY; PING), RPENS, #%meo; F2O0ITIFY, TN, TN, BINP), TIWNG; I 1Py, RHRTNPY, 30 6T 1Y, SwIndo. or gl Another plural is formed by adding the plural of the pronouns ¥ or 939, bl viz. ©30), to the nominative plural, e. g. ®RVNLITTY, 3,NEID, or to the nominative o5 singular, e. g. ¥ TSF 0T, Cf. § 119, ¢, 1 % ! E 2, Ace. 9950 Q e e 1, #@gfl@di, o“oeag@fieédgl, FOINERY, YLNETY; W3, ) i ¥Ry, INBINEIY, ms%ne;sqi; TOBINERY, IR NBRY; SNJNFRY, QONYRIY, THOW Lo} NERY, SATIOWNLTY; 33 NE¥RY, VSRS ; FRRONY, MOTINY, FNANY. ohé, 3p 3, Instr. v s ) e. g. TN, NN ; BNV, FRRMYT 5 MBI ; ), B Snaned, Fanes, denes; desney, RoMes. 4, [RNAYR; MOTINIR, 8 N,id; Dat. @R, e.g. WNNMIR; 39 19N, FTRRNDA, FEONON; &%rfi@fi; SNINR, asg)eérie?fi; 3, nen, SUrRNIn. Tami]' (by B¢ 5, Abl. the termination of the instrumental. e 6, Gen. e, e. g. TS, BeBINY; FRRING, 236-’%71%3; NBINY, FeONY; &ée)fi%‘f; BNY, TN, BONY; SF N, RReRNY, 0) 1 1% 7, Loc. %%n, 95@;)), @O, e g. FTNSRTR, DHRMSRER, FHENSLER; TR n¥Y, MBI, IRNPY, TN, THAWNSD , WBINGL, BoorN¥Y ; ANF. Wiy, W‘ 132. As has been remarked in § 131 there are such plural case- ~ 13 terminations for nominal bases as indicate their gender, but only to luralige a certain extent; for these terminations are of an epicene character (cf. kind (jat‘ § 102, 4), and besides in poetical diction are appended even to neuter 2, 0eute, objects. (Cf. the terminations in §§ 118. 119. 134.) cmr;; 3 The terminations that are affixed to bases ending in B, &, (¥, e. g.in bstraot o), 9, o, (033, in SOHY), (O, e. g. in IVAL®), are the following:— in the ancient dialect . 134, a) 10 the 1, Nom. ©0f, B0f, NPT, BOTE, VT, BTFFYC’, DO, DFFF, 9T, Y an DBTS, TFYS, INFeF, e. g. :9‘3‘2)03966, @3 0300°, wWeNo3TT, 4,003)0°, rj%éosocg, 2 o3 0300°, R $300%; 06 T (of 3w); AMIDEo BRINYTE; We03ddTS, @eofia@cs, 0) j éa‘éofio#mfi, 3 GDTFF, TINJRBITF S, ieoiaa-’r%;fi; BeONTFYTS ; éa;ibacs, 3@0:’)%06, L ) ms, 30NQT, WE BT°, ReADTY; éia%’wfi? W3 BTF®; 3T JT°, IOYTT, 4,3 DTF, 8 QTF, ) wiz e — 11 ) &g ARANTE, YBIT, HKFN0°; B3I HATT; -é;i:s#ws, W3 NTFYS, HFITEY; O JF YL, GTINFPE, HTBINFFS. | e 190¢ consists The 03 in 33 030%, ete. is eaphonic or a help to enunciation. of T¥° and B0°, ©OT® of WU and A0S, WFFY® of WOF and TY°, VFFYV® of WO° néad and T9° and 0%, QFFYS of AT and TP, DOTS of VT and WO, IFFYE of LT ! v and T, JINFES of AT® and N7, In &0° and 20° the ©° and ¥° are euphonie (¢ § 119, ). g, 49 9 “y Aecec. &0, €. g. 2 e03y30. = Raee, 3, Instr. B0, ('&%o, '3%), e. g. TIDI QAT F 0. ), 308 4 s Dat. 3, z?\, e. g. ODNF or IR F, T ARF or IR F, A» Fadoke - or ~ R eo?oigzi £ See § 119, @, 4 as to the doubling. 08 9&5%, 7 Abl. (@éefio, etc., the terminations of the instrumental). minative Gen. e, e. g. 3 333, Loc. (%%°, ©9). ) b) in the mediseval dialect ‘;, FON 1 Nom. @06, racs', fi@oG’ &56\), @UG’ e.. g 33@0&)06, @@@O&)UG, 35359)@ 0300°, 303 0° (of 303)); 30 T® (of 303)); JRANYTT, RITSNPTS, @%fi@os; ?@3}8 oeR; 03280, BWe33030T0, ©BAC30TY, VVIARIITY, wa’:j ¢0); #o@zi & 03390° , et ©33,¢00 stands for ©3,0308). The ¥0° in 330@&1639033906 has been adopted from Tami), (by the Basavapurana). 6, Gen. @, e. g. "0 FT. 7 Loec. (&)%?6), WHY, (efie(z), e. g. R&0dBR. 1 d) 3 %) in the modern dialect 1 Nom. 30, o3, . J. BoA0TY, BRIV, @eofixfl), ARA0NT), I fi; WA 4 &) 03380, ©T,[ISeTY; LAY T, WRNETY; :3@?3@063. ‘émf)fi%@d.), WANRED stand for ‘5.98fi%>03.)50, WARE3IT. al Cast 133. Let it be remarked here that many declinable bases are optionally ooly 10 pluralised in Kannada, 1, neuters expressing the idea of genus, species or cter (0 kind (jati), as @8, ToRB, O, ToF, AeR, TR, 3o, 8%, IJG; ) neute! 2, neuters of numerical character (sankhyéya, sankhyAnavastu), as ©%, Swc¥, o301 ; 3, numerals (sankhyé, sankhyana), as So23, ©03%, &8w0; and 4, abstract neuters (bhava), as FHIJF, B¢y, TIF. See § 354, I. 134. The case-terminations of the plural of feminines of which the singular in the ancient dialect ends in e9¢¢ in the medieval dialect in esg$ or w0 e9¢y, and in the modern dialect in esgdy, (Regarding their singular see g é/\ (355’ §§ 120, 121, and regarding the plural of their masculine bases, § 119.) in the ancient dialeet hoc®; @) ;;: 1, Nom. &o°, (and with the elision of ©¥°) ©gs, T¢¢ e g. OFT2T° (of ¥ a0 ¥8), QFLT° (of WHY®), WIPT® (of WI’), YIY L, a%ce%cs, T003)9 07, WPedP TF, ) - C‘ao} —— 2 — U&wa, coefio:h%cs, 503303)%56, adcfifiofio%ofl 3)@@3033%05, a:“gpéoj)e?acfi, ;Sofiegacf; ¥J08, (of ®F9), ASTT® (of BIYF), WSV (of WI¥), YT° (of YN¥), Tt (of Jwee), ; §122 QR3T® (of BRBYE), FORBT® (of FOII¥F); ;59#&96 (of Son®F). plural § ) ©0° stands for ¥ST° (see § 135). The case-terminations for the oblique 1 i, cases are identical with those of the plural of the masculine bases. 3. 88 \ b) in the mediseval dialect 00y, W9 v) 1, Nom. e3gf, ©3), e.g- ©Z0%, |ITC, WWFT®, WIFOS, PO®; WTTY, BI0Y 3 In% c) in the modern dialect i, 09 maseuline L Nom. B8y, 6.4, @5(53, “&550, 292,.1)‘)53, 03330. w(§ 121 135 In the preceding paragraph we have met with the forms eo°, hase ©4, gy and oi5»dy as the nominative plural of feminines with final ese* Regardin and 9%, It is to be added here that the same forms of the plural are 4 also those of the masculine interrogative pronouns ©So, (©330), 0HRY, [ 1 1 93no, their singular being declined like that of masculine bases with final e (§ 117). Gf. § 210. ] a) in the ancient dialect Nom. ©¥T° 5 L i [ 0% is a contraction of ¥JT° (see § 265). 2, Acec. e$30. 4, Dat. @niir. TheI 6, Gen. 3:5’(3, 08, ©@0f oceurs only in @3)F for &83) or ¥R, of whom it? whose (is) it? (§ 270). j E b) in the medieval dialect Nom. &0T°. 2, Ace. &T00. E 4, Dat. (¥13F), &OR, doR. ) 1 6, Gen. ¥0C. 9 in the modern dialect ! W Jne ]7 Nom. (¥8v), 03398, wTI. In®, 2, Acc. 03338y, WY ; 03323, 033TJ, {0 b@, o ) Dat. 033201, m0N. ~y 6, Gen oj'sad_, 0. i) 136 The plural of the neuter pronouns Qs 2, VT, SR, 5098y, B (§ 102, 8, b. ¢), oBO=Fy, w35y, and of the neuter ‘é pronominal bhases (so-called adjectives, § 102, 8, ¢) with final 8o, 3y, and | oo (¢f. §§ 116. 122. 276), such as m%éo, ?»%3_39, 209 2, ;30@2)339, 9 I 3 (S2a) 30, WARY, BRI, DR, d%éa, 233.93399 5%59, 3%3_)9, 30030, Red3y,, (see§ i@ PRs— Y, TR, PO, LRy, VYR, TOI, Regarding their singular see f 5%%“5), §§ 122. 124, and regarding their masculine and feminine or epicine, plural §§ 119. 134). in the ancient dialect oblique a) 1, Nom. ¥3, 93, 9w, ¥IY, VeI, VVJ; vYRY, YT, WY, 39 9 DR, 3RORY), FORY; VR, WAKD), [INT, 2000, TR, BRI, T ), 0% oY), VPN, TOI. In ¥33 NF is attached to the base &3 (§ 117), and in oI, KD ¥ to 8, 295 in 29 B, ete. (of 93, ete.) the YOI is joined to a euphonic T° (¢f. the masculine bases 29,8, 09T, 39,7, ete. in § 117) ;5 in @B, ete. the pronominal % (§ 122) has been dropped and ®3 (for ¥v3) been suffixed to the original s §0, 1l ogt base ©&, etc. by means of a euphonic 333, or to their genitive (see § 276). Regarding the 3 compare the plural signs 3% and @ in §§ 137, 193, remarks. ml are 2 , Acc. ©30, ¥T0, W0, (¥JISo, JwIo, u%cfio:fio, ¥ 303)30), DY Fo, HVF0. woan Instr. @3w0, ATwo, NV Jeo, (Jeveso, WYTT’0, VAHTH*0). sog with Dat OIFF, AIVF, 29 DTF, SuIFF, (WWITF, BAQIFF). Abl . (%8 fdo, wIewo), Gen VT, e, JHTe, N T, (u%dom, 29 303039). g Loc . VIR, TR Y0, TuTLPRYC, v TP P° ? ©TNO, [T, b) in the medizeval dialect 1, Nom. ¥3, 93, ¥II, VL. The plurals S, w9, etc. have not been found by the author. 7 Ace. ¥F0, BTo; DY Fo0, WV I, ? Instr. (@30 ) (1‘;] lt) % ) Dat @3%_& or ¥IF, '335%1 or 93T Abl . (VT3 8o, BT o). Gen VT, Y. ?73 9 Loe @aeaea o)&r)nmaé};. ¢) in the modern dialect L, Nom. ©3, a4, WBRTF), WII, MVJ; OINL, BINP, BRSNS, DY ITF. In IR, ete. the termination T¥Y (see it e. g. in § 131) has been added to ¥, ete. 2 Ace. ¥I), 93T, VITY, ATRY; VINEIY, YINETY,. Instr. ¥INLT, QINR . Dat @&Sgd or ¥IT, r&lfi'@i;_ or =T, @o@fl'@fi, eJnen. o 3% Abl @@”@‘—‘:’Da AIND 5@ Gen VING, JINS, b neuter -~ o Ot = W Loc. ®J3NSeen, aIndesn; VINCY, GINSD . i 5, and 137. Declension of the personal pronouns and of the reflexive pronoun <10) 9% oAl (see § 102, 1, 8, a). 10 74 y a) in the ancient dialeet Singular. b 1, Nom. o (3 before vowels), viz. ¥o (¥3°), (I, &Ms'); REO (REF); B0 (337°). I, According to some ancient poets also % (39%%) is used (Sabdanu$isana (™) stitra 288; see the plural. 2 The long vowel of the crude form of the above terms, as will be seen, In presents itself as short in the oblique cases of the singular as well as of the freated plural. 2, Ace. ®o, viz. V80, {0, BF0; (I30); (I3, see § 352, 1d). 4 The & is an augment; its doubling is euphonic (see ¢. g. § 109, & and c). 3, Insir. ©o, B o, ra;(‘s’n, Viz. 20, dYO, 3R0; MRIFo, dQTO, 3] 0; 23, A, 3R ; (80, ete.). 4, Dat. of}, viz. 288, ds8, 330; (IN). The forms are irregular, as after the euphonic augment ©° (0) the letter € has been inserted ; ~37, ete. stand for 208, ete. (cf. e. g. letter ¢ and § 117, a). 5, Abl. @3 o, ete., e.g. 933,680, 37 3do, 373 o; (373,80, ete.). 6, Gen. &, viz. I8, T, 335 IF, I, 3J; (I, *°, 3F°); (T, ete.). The not doubling of the augment & appears when the pronouns ©3), ©3) ;% (substitutes for ¥®, see § 122) are added to the genitive, e. g. 283, (I83v), The DR, (IF3Y)- Exceptionally the pronominal form 2> (see § 122) is suffixed to often-ug DT®, AT®, IIF, e.g. AT, (see § 272, 2). and 81 7, Loc. 2% (959(2), Viz. WRR,95, 23R ¥¢, 330, ¥¢; (I38,9%, I ). Plural. 1, Nom. o (3% before vowels), 3, oni¢®, viz. ¥o (¥I¥F), o (D), s 330 (B9x3%°); (T0); I (in a Shsana of 1181 A, D.), 3 (in a shsana of 1123 0) A. D,); JOTIPE, JROTIPE, SIOTI&E. The change of the sdnuné into 3% and D (see also the medieval and modern forms) reminds one of the &° as a sign of the plural in ®3, ete. (§ 136) and of that of the plural of the personal terminations (§ 193). Cf. § 265 o g 2, Aco. 90, Viz. oo;Soéo &;Soéo, -@*méo; (SaSoéO). 3, Instr. o, ete., e g DRNY0, AV, 3 % 03 (5&)0&0, 5&)%%, SJJJ&%O). 4, Dat. oR, viz. 238, a3, 33R; (IR, TSR T s In Regarding the form see the remark under the dative singular. In the often- Uceasign; used form of reduplication 33> 8308 the 83 is an abbreviation of 331 - 9, a) Abl. (e&itfi’)o, ete., e. g. obdoét?’:r?f)o, etc.); (535%3%950, fifi.)é?:o&%?;, fifi)@%&%%m. RS 2 TR R 6, Gen. @, viz. O3, 33, 3305 VT, DY, 379; (IVY,)- i The not doubling of the augment 35° appears when the pronouns ©3), ©3) ahbTEVia are added to the genitive, e. g. T, 2303, In the often-used form of 33 |y reduplication 335° 33 the 33 is an abbreviation of 33 or 33, Cf. § 250, N 15 0 Lioe, 2,05, (©9), viz. 988 9%, AR ¢, 330,97; (I30,9°, IJD) b) in the medizval dialeet ¥); 30 Singular. L 023403 Nom. o, 30, the crude base, viz. ¥o (¥5°), dto (JLFF), o (IFF); To (59TF); ¥R, (RERD)), BRV; T, dE, I, 2, Acc. @0, viz. 230, dF0, 3F0; VYT, dJYFo, 3IYJo. 06 Seen, s of the In 239,70, ete. a euphonic ¥V has been added to »&°, ete. which has been treated as if it were radical (see § 128). . 3, ) 00 383, Instr. (20), raao, fafia, ra;é, e. g. (VR39), dR 30 Dat. oRR, viz. 238, d38, 331 and ¢). 30 Abl. (Qfiit%o, ete.). 40 Gen. @, viz. O3, &, 3. X i; Loc. 2.9¢, 2%, w98, (89), e. g. 33,9 a3a9), 330,9; 330,91 Plural. lotter © 117, 0) Nom. (o or 3%), ), Viz. (¥, ete.); R, I, D), . te.) Ace. ©o, viz. W0, (5;30@0), 8330, éméo; DT,TO, [T Fo, 839y To. gIc ) Instr. (®0), fasmo, (ra;g), e. g. oo:)oé:&o, ;S::)oé:&o. ; 3) g 9 % Dat. oR, viz. 23008, 231, IR, SR, 3Z0, 3IR. In the ('é 7 éa], The %° in »3% and 83N is an optional substitute for I9°; see § 225. often-used 330 33 and 83 3R the 330 and 33 are abbreviations of 3301 ffixed fo and 330, Abl. (93 3o, ete.), Gen. @, e. g. 33%; D3, (mjoé), S 35% (—Z (?;2;5*)7 Loc. (w%°), %%, ete., e. g. 359,90 in the modern dialect of 1123 ¢) Singular. | modern 1, Nom. 0, the crude base, viz. I89, deR), Fd3); T, R, 3. S ) and of 2, Ace. &Ry, @Ry, ©, viz. IFI, ¥, IZFo; IFI, R % 3R ? 3, o3, 3% 3, Instr. v, viz. 303, a3, 3R ; I]T, AT, 333 0 4, Dat. oR, @R, viz. Soi, doR, 3ok; 23R, IIN, WK, 33%; IR, 2ar, San. DIN is " In 328, ete. the euphonic B of § 117, letter ¢, has been inserted. occasionally used in proverbs. he often ! 5, Abl. the termination of the instrumental. Py 6, Gen. ©, viz. 33, ?3, 33; I, Y, ;5 (I°, ¥, =F°). it 8 83 in S, 83 R, 2 in AR/, d3I, and 33° in 83) (1. e. 7 ¥B) are abbreviations of 83, 8%, 38 (see § 272, 2). 43), 9% b . 7, Loc. (&J%gfi)’ @e;)’), Qfl@, Vez. dfie?,,v afie?,,a 55&27 55‘,{@2,, g)é;‘e?,g éél@m form of 33¢, 239, 339; 379, ARE, IR L. . § 280 10% e 16 e Plural. () Th i ? In the Nom. ), viz. Y, JD, 3. 2, long vowel Ace. @Ry, ¥R - bl @, viz. IFRY, A, 3B F0; IFYRY, ALY, 3By employed i Sy BDY, DY, X, 3, Instr. B, viz. ST, T, 30T ; IV o 9 IS % 3, 39 () Kanna( 4, ‘Dat. on, am’z. I31, aZoR, 3Ton. sionally In and followi For 830 3308, which is often used, see under letter &. - Dy Abl. the termination of the instrumental. and dative) the first pe 6, Gen. &, viz. I3, dDY, 33Y; a’mé, &mé 330, Kannad 839 in éo—joé,fi’ 550&5%'9;0’ Z\J)&joéis, AT in 3)350@85“, and 335 in 5&3:)33506 are abbreviations of 830, 3, 33v. Télugu ¢ M) 33 ’ . R83Y, AY, 8Z0Y ; Tami]: % 4 7, Loc. (%%R), 29, &0, viz. 838, &% e’ Qe, 2 5:5%@, moé@, :a’mé@; DY, ATO, 3ZD, second pers The fo 138. As it is possible to trace the origin of the personal pronouns and the reflexive pronoun almost with the following etymological the third D certainty, remarks on them may not be out of place. [1) P T} @) Forms of their nominative singular in the five chief Dravida languages. Kannada &o (¥5f), T90 (J98%), S99, I9; The v Malayala &993°; The exee) considerati Tami], 0333°, Jo°; 9 and o Tulu ©339%; Télugu 90, e, o, I The s forms of Kannada &¢o (2¢3%), ¢9, ¢ (ifferepce Malyala &¢; Which Tami] &¢; of the fiyg Tulu %5; Télugu ¥, 3. ang 00cag) Which Kannada 3% (323%), 939, &9; possible ; Malayala 335°; ¥ T, Tami] 333°; o g ;‘ia Q, Tula 335%; Télugu 39, 3. If ye fOrmation b) 1ts erude forms. ot el o1 The finals o, 3% &9, J are not radical, as is learned from the forms &9, ¢, Ued i 06 ®; d S5 395 they are signs of the nominative singular. Gr. §114. ('31’ &):) th Without them the bases are ©, 3, 99, 0333, », J¢; &, do; I (Cf. also But the interrogative ® in § 265.) MY infy ——— R {L ¢) The forms used for the oblique cases. In the oblique eases the long vowels are, as a rule, short. If we accept the §JVU é;Saé long vowels to be primitive, the shortening rests on nothing else but euphonism employed in attaching the case-terminations (¢f. P9 =YI0, 94D in § 265). Kannada & appears as », ™ as o, Malayala ¥ as « and 9@ (this occa- sionally in the dative), Tami] 0335, © appear as «, Tulu 033 appears as 0% and following a consonant as », Télugu ®, 3¢ appear as 2 (in the genitive and dative) and as 3 (in the accusative). The forms of the oblique cases for the first person are, therefore, o, @, ©, 9. 3 are Kannada and Malayala &t appear as & Tualu 8 appears likewise as d, Telugu &¢ appears as ® (in the accusative) and as ¢ (in the genitive and dative), Tami]- ®¢ appears as &, 89, ®v. Thus the forms for the oblique cases of the second person are ¢, Q, T, V. The form for the'oblique cases of 33, the reflexive pronoun (the pronoun of s and the third person), is 3 in Kannada, Malayala, Tamil, Tulu, and Télugu. ological d) Probable origin of the three pronouns. i) k) That of the first person. 08285, The vowels used in the formation of this person are ), &, 3, ©, 9, The exceptional @ of the dative of MalayAla may be dismissed from further consideration, as the regular vowel of its dative too is »; it may be added that 9 and » frequently interchange in Kannada (see e.g. § 66; § 109, 4, 3). The short ©® and » of the oblique cases have been taken to be the shortened forms of ¥ and ® (above letter c¢); if the reverse be accepted, no material difference will proceed from it. Let the radical vowels be & and . Which of the two vowels has been leading in the formation of the pronoun of the first person? We may say the one or the other, because they are related and occasionally interchanged, e. g. Kannada ¢, 9, 0! (see § 140); &, ©, what? which ? &0, ©0°%, a pair of oxen yoked to the plough; &ef, oo to be possible; @0, A¢T®, to be or become near; Tami], Télugu &, 9, o; Tamil e, Teélugu 28, a river. )] (Regarding the interchange of short ¥ and o cf. €. g. = » 9 0! (see§ 140); ©° =% to say; TN, F0°, the hand; 3%, 33 the head; ¥TF, %7, swallow-wort). If we take & (or ©) as the leading vowel, the idea which underlies the formation of the pronoun of the first person, is that of calling the attention of another or others to one’s self or the ¢‘I’, the particle ® (or ») being commonly used in ecalling ‘o iy} or calling to, a person near or at a distance (see § 140). bele} ; 8 (or ¥0o) thus is the person that desires to be taken notice of, ¢ the-o-here’! But what about the initial consonants o3¢, 9° and 2 Do they in any ( 3180 way influence the meaning of 0 (¥0) or in other words are they essential? R e 18 substitute The answer must be in the negative already on account of their not appearing D (= in Kannada @o, Télugu 939, 9, and, as a rule, in the oblique cases. 9 = i In order to explain this we add that the letter o35 (like the Samskrita 033%) The v0 is a semi-vowel in Kannada, and especially Kannada and Télugu people very That t often use it euphonically as a help to pronouncing the initial vowels B, &, o, ® its absenc (§ 415 ¢f. also the euphonic 053¢, ¢. g. in §§ 113. 130. 132); only exceptionally oblique ca it has disappeared in the tadbhavas ®=09¢ (=03)30¢) and ¥OR (=03007); in the The I tadbhavas ©3 (=0332), 23, (=), V3 (=) theinitial <, when not preceded Also EXpressing by a consonant or a consonant with a euphonic @V, is pronounced 05 original m before & the 035° is euphonically sounded, e. g. ¥, 33, what? which?, ©o° as short e, o3330°, who ?, Tami] &0, 63390°, who ?, &, 03333y, an elephant, Télugu OF, 033 [n the wild, which is likewise done when an initial ® appears as 03, e. g. OO, as o, a st o503, eardamoms, V3, 08I, a picotta, ¥, 03, what ? which?, »F, 039%, why ? the presen (or when an initial short « appears as o, e. g. &, 0B, oil, N, 3D, a direetly f female buffalo, Télugu ~38), 03230, who?). Thus the initial 3¢ of the ‘right opy nominative singular of the pronoun of the first person must be declared to be a0 unessential or simply euphonic, when at the same time one considers that The v occasionally it has no place there, that ¥>® and ° are used in its stead, and the first ¢ that it is not found in the oblique cases. the obliqu 0= is never initial in a true Kannada and Télugu word; but is found as S —— mean ‘tha the initial of some Tami], Malayala and Tulu terms. The form ¥335° of the 3 W6 hay first pronoun is Malayala. @ is another form of °; thus Tami] G300, Y ang 0308 are Kannada S¢R&°, the sun; Tami] 59w, 3w are Kannada (S©9°), §1 29 e ), a1 3¢, to be suspended ; Tami] F309, 323 are Kannada 399°, Télugu I3, 8309, of sandh; 339, a peacock. Besides, as apparently in the first person of the pronoun, it fot he 4g6 makes its appearance as a vowel (* or ) also in other words, as does likewise Wby 8000 its co-ordinate and substitute °. For instance for Tami] &9, TP and [ARS Vap Kannada 3¢®°, to be suspended, there is the ancient Kannada 2©o° (Télugu le-it-he Bew)) ; Télugu 393, a peacock, appears also as »9; Tami] F), F0Y, 39, a erab, are & in Kannada and obé*g in Télugu (in Kannada there is also the I[ Se primitive form w&&, a crab) ; Kannada 3%, Tami), 8%, Malayila 9, to-morrow, Pronopg are 29 in Télugu and ©3, in Tulu. There is, therefore, no reason for consider- f 16 verh ing the °° to be an essential part of the nominative of the pronoun of the first mparg person, as it bears the same character as the semi-vowel od®; it is used to the W, o) facilitate pronuneciation by a small seetion of the Dravida people. By = bears no character in the pronoun different from that of its substitutes : e W % and 0%°, the last occurring in Tami) side by side with 3°; it too is simply Sitong I euphonie (¢cf. the of the second person), although it has been, and still is, U the ; often used in the nominative of the pronoun and its oblique cases by a large 0 thy number of the Dravidas.- By the bye, in a few tadbhavas &° appears as a direct 193 ) ppeating substitute of 0%, ¢. g. in Kannada 3%7 (=030T), a yoke, and in Tami] <, P (._—.05);50), Yama. o ria ) iy That of the second person. The vowels used in the formation of the second person are &, 9, and ev. ple very That the initial consonant ¢ is not essential, but euphonic, follows from - R its absence in Tulu &, Télugu &3 in the nominative, and Tami] @ in the ptionally fin the oblique cases (cf. the 3° of the first person). The leading vowel is &, this, the proximate demonstrative particle, preceded expressing that a person (or any object) is situated in front of another; the ) Also original meaning of the pronoun is ‘next (to me) one’! This = appears also h?, ol )R, R as short e. g. in B, 4. In the oblique cases of the Tami] pronoun the leading vowel presents itself g, &')“Ju{ as oy, a short form of ¥W, the intermediate demonstrative pronoun, denoting, in 7% why the present case, a person who is intermediate between the left and right and cfi):bs, 4 5 of the directly faces the speaker in being addressed, the primitive meaning being ‘right opposite (to me) one’! This W is also short e. g. in VB, Y. red to be 3, That of the pronoun of the third person or of the reflexive pronoun. ors that The vowels employed for the formation of this pronoun are & and ), gad, and the first appearing in the crude base 33, the second in 3, the base used for & is shortened into ©, both demonstrative particles which the oblique cases. found a8 mean ‘that’ (§ 264), i. e. he, she, it, being used for all the three genders; ©, f of the as we have seen in § 115, has got also the specific meaning of ‘he’. 0 (), & and @ are attached to the pronominal syllable 3> (3°+ euphonic 9V, , (#6%) § 122), another form of ¥ or ®¥®, the demonstrative neuter pronoun, by means )é) ?33)53, of sandhi (§ 213 seq.), the @v disappearing. The 2o in this case points back nout i to the agent or subject, and 3 (30 + &), 3 (3> + ¥) originally mean ‘that-that’, Jikewise i. e., according to circumstances, ‘that-he’, ‘that-she’, ‘that-it’. (The same 500 and 80+ @ appears also in @S, &3, WS, ‘that-it-he’, ‘this-it-he’, ‘this-intermedi- (Télugu ate-it-he’; see § 265.) Remark. | i), 8 also the It seems proper here to refer to the connection that exists between the morow pronouns of the first, second and third person and the personal terminations of onsider the verb. Regarding the vowels ©, &, «, & of the pronoun of the first person the first compare the ©, @o, & of the first person plural of the imperative in § 205 and the », ~0, and 230 of the first person singular and its 20, O in the plural in § 193 ; regarding the vowels @, & of the pronoun of the second person compare the B, » and ®03° of the second person singular in § 193, the B0°, Q0 of the stiutes g simpl)’ second person plural in § 193, and the %, <o, 0 of the second person plural of the imperative in § 205; and regarding the ¥ and ¥ of the pronoun | stl” i8, of the third person compare the ©, ©@o, ®% of the third person singular in 4 Jarg® § 193. 3 direCt . 80 — 189. Peculiarities(in the declension of some nominal bases are still to Tn the be adduced. In § 122 there are some terms of direction with final 140 euphonic ev, and in § 123 some such terms with final ¢ of which the sidered ¢ genitive singular, etc are formed by the help of the augment o only sev (see § 124). This augment is used likewise in the ancient declension of (&ma.ntra: the following words when they express direction:— g@o, TB, 2. of reason sy, a term of direction with radical en (§ 128); instrumental and (évaprat a term of ablative I@.30do, dative IFom, genitive F@oIes. 23, and one's The direction with final « (§ 130); 1nstr. and abl. 3Bcoedo, dat. %a@ofias"’é\, gen. TWO30eD, %, a term of direction with final o (§ 130); gen. % (! 1l oJ0e%. If the three words are not used as terms of direction, their declension follows that of §§ 128. 130, e. 9. RBIJR, TR, LB, Tod The use of the same augment is seen also in the genitive singular m;fim of ©9, 29, wd and 2@, terms of direction with final = (§ 130), oo Ao chiefly in the ancient dialect, viz. w9 asaee, DD, Mo, oY This O30€9 2 The common declension, however, of OB rae_:)o, and w9, 18 If Bm ! a) in the ancient dialect e. g. dative SO R, Q:)e;)ofi, ablative ®9o, @%%, ) ©9Zo, genitive ®Hly; b) in the medieval dialect e. g. dat. @947, This of gl ¥9 off, faeafi, 297, abl. Qfifig(‘g, ¢OF, gen. v, B 030, O 0 118 V0 3 ] ¢) in the modern dialect dat. ese?nfi, fae;)nfi, @e?ofi, abl ese;)o;g, @@2%, 10 bases DO, gen. wPok, 0O, 29, VI, 23 and e3, terms of direction with final ., are generally declined ending i N (Of ‘ like terms ending in o (§ 130), e. g. genitive 23030 (in the mediseval f g and modern dialect); but in the modern dialect we find also e. g. ] :a;)a) SR (for &237) and & (for seIod). i P W Further, in the same manner as the nominal bases always ending | of oz The ¢ in a euphonic ev in § 127 which express time, F»¥, ¥ and SR8, terms with final > which relate to time, are declined, viz. @) in the by ] ancient dialect e. g. nom. (the crude base) Fo%, dat. TePorR, gen. Tarticla e [o98; /R g‘);)a‘ofi, RAT; m@{, fi@@dofi, SRR b) in the medieval dialect e.g. 79%, S, T9RY; ¢) in the modern dialect e. g. T, [OER, a‘a%’&(’q, ;3@%?@5@, [OPR; IR QR 3@3‘*, 3\@;)&5. I.Cfi Besides, two terms with final ¢ that relate to time, are declined like o 3 and R, In the bases with final euphonic ev (§ 122), wiz by W] medieval dialect we have e.g. »ng, and in the modern one eNg, WY % o sNdn, «@NS; OB, SNAT, SR, The medieval form B0QYR may be referred to ;jooazv also a term ending in es, 4 - . 81 still to In the ancient dialect the genitive of the term =08 is =03 . th final ch the 140. The vocative (sambddhana, sambuddhi, &mantrana) is not con- sidered as one of the cases by Kannada grammarians, who enumerate I 8% only seven (§ 106). It is used in addressing, calling or calling to 1sion of (3mantrana, abhimukhikarana) objects that are inanimate or destitute 3, o, of reason (jadavastu, as posts, pots, flowers, trees, bees, etc.), idols al and (dévapratimé), persons which are different from one’s self (lf)kfiunt\ara), ferm of )R A4 (3 ) and one’s own self (Atmiyaditta). A % The forms of the vocative are as follows: GIEN @) in the ancient dialect their Singular. M W 1, The first form of the vocative is the crude base, e. g. ®es3! ®TR ! ingular FIRITRBNG! INGI! 1T ! R3er 31 fi%aa%! :Jmfizsif)sfiérz RS ST et ! 130 BoomPRA! B2y 1 SPHIY! IR ! d'fiio! 38pe3 B! FRNS! j WY This form is called short emphatical speech (hrasvakaku). W9, ! 2, In its second form the vowel of the base is lengthened, e. g. @ead! 90, ! 23&“@;%)! PIRIBROWI! FoVIT3L! WPTIT (S 80 This form is called long emphatical speech (dirghakaku). A pluta form of this vocative is e. g. Td=»¢ (§§ 20. 215, 6, letter k). S} Wy 3, In its third form the vocative particle o is suffixed either immediately U, to bases with a final consonant, or by the help of a euphonic letter to bases sclined ending in a vowel, e. g. SV ¥ (of 3L %) ! WARLS (of YweIVF)! 39T (of S9T)! dizeval SR3 (of SNJ) ! FERI (of FER) ! TRII (of TRY) ! 235@3 (of 235@)1 SMART M (of RDWITOV) 1 RS (of BeS)! @ORS (of @TR)! BRI (of BB ! 3200 ) 6§ (of 3300)! TRA (of THRY)! VPRI (of BPIZY)! IFF (of I ! [oDF (of [oRY) ! 39:3803) (of 39:T) ! awsfoie:?ofio (of 2eTIT S)! BORAWBIVF03 onding (of BoR03TR) ! c\.)vg‘ !‘: y The euphonic augments, as will be observed, are ©°, 3%, 33367 S8 4, in the In its fourth form, instead of the > and in the same manner, the vocative particle & is attached, e.g. efumfieflez IS¢ ! éfi%efiez So0Re ! WeIRe! TRAL! gen, FR0[e ! FReNSoDe! AewFIT Sodae ! BoRodsatodoe ! Jival Plural. a“fl/ 1 The first form simply is the nominative plural, e. g. ¥vMd,0Ne* ! 1T nes 1 ¥eIof ! 2, In its second form the vocative particle ¢ is added to the nominative, i the e.g. SVAYLT! 93 Sones! ;ie%cdz 808! 20508 keS0T ! BencddT! WIRFFT! ehg, BeITFET! BedodTFEYS! 0INYS! BANYS! INIR 03! W3 ROT! ] m]\ 3, In its third form the vocative particle e is added to the nominative, e. g. WeS001 BeN0d0TI! WeIFFYT! 1i1 82 4, In its fourth form the vocative particle o is added to the nominative, 121,051 e g zjééjé! Re3B! BeSTEd! Mdond! INTQ B! 125, 0,0 5, In its fifth form the vocative particle « is added to the nominative, ¢ suffixe e. g. We3Be! BeSTrSe! D, ¢; 117 o fs b) in the medieval dialect fo 9 1 Singular. 130, ¢; L ReS! O ©I! @i! 2030331 ! 2FT! ?f)éos' 3oA! B! FTION! 122, a); 0! éi@! ;333:«3’9;‘53! 53! WBong! STY! by the in = @eo! TIW! T SHI! V! B! Insr, 3, 303! BNZM[! FoVBVUTR! T0NIO3! T33! mo%fi! Il b 4, @3 odoe! TI Ie! 23803)3e! 330d_e! noBISe! 13 ), ( 1]} Plural. 4, 0 3 S0M93! VI NYS! BT oReT! TANIT! ®)33$03! 128, ¢, ¢ @Zfi&&fi@@a! RRIINYOI! méfiééds@)ca! [IBTO0I! ®eT! QeI! genitive or by %0 §4) we3de! ROBINNBe! (4,]}; 12 ¢) in the modern dialect its geniti Singular. The ¢ VI JoFow! FYI! PRRE! 13! ©D! @Dy IR domd! AMAP! JoNt! TIPH! FJL! rodse! Dat g 23! AIer3 P! BoBRI! NEI! B30301: = B! ;geofio! o33! R 128, g, | B! BnSe! Sonee! SonJe! BIBINIE! ndifi’e!‘ 90 Q03)¢! ,396030@! 4, euphonic OBV e ¥ which Plural. euphonie 3e3Td! o master' by a eu ;’omfi@rfi@ca! mfiée?ca! 6 137, RVIBINT! COBRITNY ! b 19 é SoonBe! TOBIN et T90303¢! BOBINBeE! 3 121 141, Here follows an enumeration of the terminations and augments N of the seven cases. Pft‘csd'e ’d 1 Singular. I Prece Nom. 1, the crude base (§§ 109,D, ¢; 117, b,¢; 120; 121; 122; 1233 143, 2, o or the sonnd (§§ 125 1261290 488 129 1308 F87:b, 3 13Y) ; 4 Vilggy 109. 117); 3, a euphonic @ added to the sonnd, in which case it appears as <), ) ¥ o or & (§§109,0,¢; 117, b, o) 4, a euphonic ®v added, by means of an enunciative 033 or ¥°, to the vowels %, 8, ¥V, 4w, (K, %0, &, ¥) and 2 (§§ 128, That by ex 429,60, c; 180:0,:0). Ace. 1, the erude base with or without a vowel (§§ 109, ¢; 120 9 LRl 2 b,es di‘fil(%(}t it 1) 8, 0i.a; &: pec 122, b, c; 125, ) 1265 127128, ¢; 129,¢; 130,.0); .9 260 1 7, b, e); by 0 121, b, ¢; 122); 3, @ preceded by a euphonic & (§§ 109, D, L} g § or 0% (§ 130, b,¢), or & (§§ 109, b,c; 128, b, 0); 4, Bo 8§ {;; 0,a,b W Dy e — 83 = ninaive, 01,0 1220, b); 9, ©o preceded by a euphonic (§§ 109, a, b; 117, @, b; 125, a, b), or.o3° (§ 130, @, ), or =° (§§ 128, a, b; 129, a,b); 6, a euphonic linative, v suffixed to ©0, the sonud of ¥o becoming & or 37, (3. e. ¥, &Y, §§ 109, g0 117 121165 122,05 125, ¢; 128,05 189,65 180, 0,00 7. 2 added fo 0, its sonné becoming ° or I, (¢. e. V3, ¥, §§ 109, b; 117, ¢; 122, ¢; £50, ¢ 8, @ (§§109,¢; 121, ¢; 122, O3 9, ¥o (§§ 120, a; ! ! k80 0} 3 122, a); 10, the euphonic @V of No. 6 added to o and suffixed to the base by the insertion of the augment @&° (4. e. ©®3), a quite vulgar form, § 122, ¢). B 1 9 (§.109,.°0, o 2, 2188 109, @ 130, a); 3, @0 (§§ 109, 29 -l.d, @, 0120, @ 128, a,.05 129, @ B 117, a, b; 120, q, Bt b he ol 50, a,0: 137, a); 4, 9o extended in length either by the final augments 8, Bo, B, B (4. e. A, ete., §§ 109; 117; 120, @, b; 121,65 1225 127, 0y 128, @, ¢; 129, a; 130; 137), or by B3, 930, 9%, by means of a8, the genitive of 90 or A% (i. e. BT, ete., §§ 121, b, e 122 127, 6,0 128000 % or by 0 through %, the genitive of 40 (i. ¢. A0, §§ 12 gy @ b; 127, 5: A g a, b; 129, a); 5, @0, 93, @30, 98 preceded by the augment ¥ through its genitive ©¥® (i. e. ¥&0, ete., §§ 122 5 125). The terminations and their augments presuppose the genitive. Dat 1, ¥ (§§109; 120; 121, a; 123, ¢; 125); 2, R (§§117; 120; 198, a0, 05 129, a; 130); 3, %, (§§ 109; 123, ¢); 4, ® preceded by a A ! 5, 1 preceded by a euphonic 4 euphonic sénné (i.e. o8, § 117, @, b; cf. § 137); S which is to represent the somnd (i.e. S0, § 117, ¢); 6, § preceded by a euphonic ® which is to represent the sonné (i. e. a8, § 117, ¢); 7, ® preceded by a euphonic @ (i. e. %, §§ 121, b, ¢; 122,b,¢; 127,b,¢; 128, b, ¢; 129, 6> 137, 0 8, ® preceded by a euphonic 9o (i. e. B8, §§ 121, a, b; 122, a; o 127 0,0, 128,a0; 129, g); 9, © preceded by a euphonic @ (i.e. BT, §§ 121, b, ¢; 122, b); 10, %, preceded by a euphonic @ (. e. 9%, §§ 121, ¢, 22, 0); 11, ¥ preceded by a euphonic @0 (i.e. 0%, § 122, b); 12, ® onts preceded by the euphonic augment & (i. e. ¢, §§ 122, a, b; 125, a); 13, R preceded by the euphonic augment ©®° (i.e. ©8, §§ 122, a; 128, a), 123; 14, % or ¥, preceded by the euphonic augment ©® (i, e, ¥0F, ¥®F, which is e NN \\ a vulgar form, § 123, ¢); 15, ©%, i.e. a mutilated form of &% (§§ 122, 0, ¢; 885, 0, ¢) ; 16, ©%, i, e. a mutilated form of @«3 (§§ 122, 0, ¢; 125). eats 89 g o1 4D Remark. That the letter ®° is another form of ®° becomes a fact when the Tulu §128 dialect is compared (see Kannada Dictionary p. XVI, note 1, sub 7); further, HM ®° appears as ® in Tulu (see the same note, sub 5), and #° as 3° in Télugu (e. g. Télugu ¥, T3y =Kannada T, T, T, the eye; cf. also § 222). , B¢ ) 6) Hence it may be concluded that the letters ®°, ©°, ®° and S° are closely related in Dravida and change places in the dialect. The augments @ and &° of the 11% [OS—— 84 PRET— The te genitive (§§ 109; 117), 035° of the genitive (§ 130; e¢f. 243, B, remark), &° and ® of the dative and genitive, and to some extent the sonné o (&) are, Nom, therefore, ultimately the same euphonie letters (¢f. @°, &% and ®° in § 176; see The vowel @ sounded before &° and ®° (i, e, ©-&°, ©-&°) ase this 1 also the @d in § 265). apparently is a help to enunciation. lengthene 131,6; 1 lengthene Abl 1, the terminations of the instrumental except =; 2, %0, B, B0, augment 93 preceded by the augment ©%° through its genitive ¥® (i e. wedo, ete., 1% with 8§ 122, a; 123); 3, a8 preceded by the augment ©® through its genitive ®&0a with the a (i.e. WOOQR, § 123, ¢); 4, 9o, B3, 30, AP, A3 preceded by ¥, the genitive of ¥3 (§ 128, i. e. ¥8 030, ete., §§ 109, a, b; 117, a; 120, a; 123, by a e 12, 1% a); 5, o preceded by ¥e, the genitive of the augment ©®°, and ©®38 (i e. 13, ioe wegso, ete., §§ 122, a; 125, a); 6, @0, a3, B3 preceded by B3, the 14, €0 genitive of A%, and ®8® (4. ¢. 93 Vo, ete., § 122, a). o (e, The terminations and their augments presuppose the genitive. the addit Gen. 1,-9 (§§120,a,b; 121,b,¢; 122; 126,¢; 137); 2, ®@ preceded by ‘the : by the euphonic augment &° (l.e. @, §109); 3, © preceded by the euphonic lengthen 4, © preceded by the euphonic augment augment 3° (i.e. 3, §§109. 117); ol by th AT (i e BS, §§ 121. 122. 127); 5 ® preceded by the euphonic augment the add OB (1. e. V9, §§ 122, 123); 6, © preceded by the euphonic augment ©%°, addition this being another form of ©®° (i. e. ¥¥, §§ 122, ¢; 123, b); 7, © preceded B00?, § § by the euphonic augment 90T (i, e. ©6%, which is a vulgar form, § 123, ¢); Nos, 29; 9, © 8, © preceded by the euphonic augment ®&° (i, . ©®, §§ 122. 125); 0 184, preceded by the euphonic augment 033° (i.e. 03, § 130); 10, @ preceded by niné AP P A 5 %0 lon the euphonic augment &° (. e. 3, §§ 128; 129, a); 11, @83 (9 + 9, i e 125 5% lengthen No. 4) preceded by the euphonic augment &° (7. e. I8, §§ 128. 129); by a ey preceded by the euphonic ©33° and forming with the final @ and « of the base (1. e, of a long syllable (i.e. & or ®, §130,0); 13, ¢ preceded by the euphonic augments ®°, 3%, 033° and & (i. e. W, ®, Bwand F, §§ 109, a, ¢; 117, a, ¢; éUphonie aldition 128, a; 130, a, ¢); 14, © (88 120, a; 122,0). (1. e, 3 Loc. 1, @v®° (§§ 109, a; 120, a; 122 A-i—i, a; 130, a); D) e , w9 (§§ 109, a, 3132, ¢ b 117, a,b; 120, 0. b: 1219 §22. 0, 0; 186 0, b 127, a; 128; 0,08 36, aof 129, @ 18000, 057180, a, D) ; 3,090 (8§ 109.a, b; 117, b5 120,96 128 [eced a, b; 125, b; 128, b; 130, a, b; 137, b); 4, 298 (§§109; 117, ¢; 120,05 EUphop 124, ¢: 122, a, ¢; 425, 0. ¢ 1285:0;: 130: (187, b); 5, ®o* (§§ 109, a; 120, a; 130, a); B, /2920 (§§.109,¢,05 120,90, b; 130, a,h); \ PO § b 19 h 109 110 A20::121,0,c; 122 428,02 128, b,.¢; 126, 125 @b 1 TE £, s 180: 13875:C); 8, ©® (§§ 109, b, ¢; 117;¢; 120, by 121, ¢; 122, by 125, b; Aeg 128,105 180,:5,.¢;:1387,.6); 9, a0 (§§ 120, b; 121, ¢; 122, 0); 10, 9 (§§ a,{,; 1 121,85 71380,0); 11, 3 (§109); 12, the crude base (§§ 126. 127). g o pE— 85 atk), & The terminations are suffixed to the genitive with and without its augments. Y are, 2. Plural. 65 se Nom. 1, o (=%, § 137, a); 2, a euphonic ¥V added to the sonné, in which f 6.5) / case this is changed into &° (i.e. ¥, § 137; cf. § 136); 3, D (@ e. No, 2) lengthened by the addition of T%0 (7, e. T, § 136, ¢); 4, T (§§ 119, a; 131, a; 134, a); 5, 59 with a euphonic @V (i. e. T9, §119, 0, ¢); 6, T 0 % lengthened by the addition of ©%% (i, e. TSN, § 119, b); 7, ¥%° with the ) 4 e OA augment 90 (7. e. T90, § 119, ¢); 8, ne° (§§118,a,b; 131, a,b); 9, 0, etc., e OO n¥° with a euphonic @V (i.e. 1¥, §§118,8,¢; 119,b,¢; 131); 10, ngs with the augment 0% (¢, e, 190°, §§ 118, b; 132, a, b); 11, 1% preceded 3, the 15 123, by a euphonic sdnné (i. e. OR¥F, §§118, a, b; 119, a, b; 13%, a); 9 (e 12, 1% preceded by a euphonic sénnd (i.e. on%, §§ 118, @, b; 119, b); 13, 190° preceded by a euphonic sonnd (i. e. oT¥0% §§ 118, a; 119, a, b); 93, the 14, ©0° (§§ 119, a, b; 132, a, b; 134, a, b); 15, ¥0° with a euphonic 0 (¢ e. 182, b, ¢; 1384, 0,¢); 16, ©0° lengthened by the addition of T¥° (i, e. ©TF9%, §§ 119, a; 132, a); 17, ©0° lengthened raceded by the addition of T9° (. e. ®FF90%, §§ 119, a; 132, a); 18, " oy >uph0nic lengthened by the addition of ©%° (7, e. ®¥TF9%, § 119, a); 19, @30 lengthen- wgment ed by the addition of 1% (i, e. ©3OR%S, § 119, b); 20, ©0> lengthened by mgment the addition of T (7. e. WOINY, § 119, b); 21, ©3 lengthened by the ot 6%, addition of NM9T° (7. e. WIINYTE, § 119, b); 22, ©®0° lengthened by BT° (i. e. receded F Y 58 119, 0; 132, 0); 28, 900 (88 119 a3 1382, 0. 0); 24, A (see 123, 0 Nos. 29. 30); 25, 90° preceded by a euphonic @° (1. e. 0%, §§ 119, 03 132, Bt a; 134, a); 26, a°° preceded by a euphonic o%° (7. e. 0®T°, § 119, a); 21, oded by oR0® lengthened by the addition of @ (i. e. 0®0D°, § 119, a); 28, oR0o° 806 lengthened by the addition of T¥° (i. e. 0QNF®®, § 119, a); 29, 0 preceded 12, ¢ by a euphonic @ (i.e. 3, § 119, b); 30, 90 preceded by a euphonic ow® he hase B o0, 8§ 119, b, ¢; 182, ¢); 31, @3 (i. e. No. 15) preceded by a upbonic euphonic o%° (i. e. 0T, § 119, ¢); 32, & (. e. No. 25) lengthened by the 7,d70; addition of T9° (i. e. BFFYS, § 132, a); 33, @C° preceded by the euphonic &° 34, J0° lengthened by the addition of @°° (i. e. 20T, (2. e. d°°, § 132, a); § 132, a); 35, 20° lengthened by the addition of F%° (i. e. JFF¥, § 132, a); 109 by 0, 36, ¥0° lengthened by the addition of T%® (. e. JNFP®, 132, a); s o preceded by a euphonic 2° (i. e. WT°, § 119, a); 38, ©¥T° preceded by a 122 euphonic 0%° (i. e. 0T, § 119, a); 39, ¥T° preceded by a euphonic =° (.. e. 1207])’ 09, 6 S0%, §119, a); 40, @8 (i, e. No. 15) preceded by a euphonic %° (i. e, W0, N B 19, b, 0); 41, @8 preceded by a euphonic 0%° (. e. oW, § 119, b); D) Ny 1285 42, ©0 preceded by a euphonic &° (i. e. S0, § 119, ¢); 43, ©o° (§ 132, b). 120¢b’ Ace. 1, © (§§ 118, b, ¢; 119, b, ¢; 131, b,¢c; 135,0); 2, ®@o (§§ 118, N B 119.a,b; 1381,0,¢5 135, ¢); 3, a euphonic @V attached to ©o, the bb) sonnd becoming I or T (i, e. VI, ¥, §§ 118, b,g; £19, @.0: 131, 0,:¢; e P 36 a) 18 135, ¢); 4, © added to ©o, the sonné becoming &%, (i. e. @3, § 119, ¢; 135, ¢); or neuter 5, & (§ 119, o). ancient dia Regarding the augments see the nominative. are formed fnstr. L, 9{s131,0); 2, B0 (88'118,a, b; 119, a; 181, a, b} 132,05 euphonic 137, a); 3, 9o lengthened by the final augments &, Bo, B, & (i. e. B, ete., e, 8 §§ 118; 119; 131,0,¢; 137, b, 0); 4, 30 preceded by the augment ©&° their phure (¢, e. ©0, § 136, a). b) e Dat @ D68 1180, 0: 10830, b: 131,90, 0 152-a; 1856, 4l 2, R one 1. (§§ 119, a; 132, a); 3, § preceded by a euphonic sonng (i. e. of%, § 137); 4, R preceded by a euphonic @ (i. e. @8, §§ 118; 119; 131,0,¢; 1385, b, ¢; always (v medizval 136, ¢); 5, % preceded by a euphonic @0 (i.e. @R, §§ 119,0; 135, 0); T, W 6, © preceded by a euphonic @ (i. e. @08, § 131, a); 7, ® preceded by a euphonic & (1. e. ¥R, § 119, ¢); g8 8 1Y d); 9, ¥ preceded by the Hod, & also &), euphonic augment ¥&° (5, ¢, ¥, § 136, a); 10, ©%, a mutilated form of R, G @eflf& (§ 136, b, 0); 11, ©%¥, a mutilated form of ®e2 (§ 1886, b, ). x‘?aéi cAl Abl. 1, B0, @30, 43 preceded by the genitive of ¥3, (i. e. ¥, ete., §§118 a; 119, a); 2, the terminations of the instrumental. r pA Gen. 1, © (§§ 118; 119 131; 132, a, b; 1353 136, ¢); 2, © preceded 0) by the euphonic augment ®&° (i. e. ®®, § 136, a, b); 3, ¥ (§§119, a,c; m:és,ls g il o). plural 1 lige. | e (BeRl8, o By 109 a, b 131, a4, b 138 uis 2. W% h €108, 0, b; 119, b; 132, B 137, b); 3, BIN(§ 118, 0, c: 1100 ¥4 8l 0 0: 156, ¢); 4, 99 (§§ 118; 119; 181; 8, ¢ 136, ¢); 9, (S &0, plural § 118 6.0 481, C: 137, 0); 6, %9 and ¥9 preceded by the augment b Ver (i, e. VPR and ¥w9, § 136, a, ). %, 142. Looking back on the declension of bases (§§ 109. 117-137. 139) W T one observes twelve more or less distinet modes of declension. WL j 1 The first mode comprises neuter bases with final ©, e. g. NG, FG, 3, T ?’3%’ TRB, Tu¥, IHV. Their singular appears in § 109, their plural in § 118. tv:i 9 2, The second comprises masculine and feminine bases ending in ©, e. g. 8, 9 "6 28, TIAT, P, BT, ¥R ; INAB, BRIT ; O, |, WS, 8, &3, YW, ¥, ) 03393 @?fi, @;Soé, SER Their singular is given in § 117, their plurals appear in y §8 119. 185. Yo, ¢4 3, The third comprises neuter and feminine bases ending in consonants 1 (and one that is used either as masculine or neuter in the ancient dialect, vez. &9%), e. g, TH, TOF, VO, JNGE, WTE, TIOS, FOS, TRHT: SH0NF, JH°; ©IYS, Prong YITE, TP, WWFYE, WIFF, PIPS, JwP’, FOaHYE WPPT; &S Their IO singular is given in § 120, their plurals appear in §§ 131. 134. Regardingfl IS, SHNe see § 121. ang | ; 4, The fourth comprises two kinds of bases WY — 87 —— 135, 6) /1 ) @) neuter and feminine bases (and one fhat is either masculine, feminine, or neuter in the modern dialect, viz. ¥%d) which, occasionally also in the ancient dialect, optionally in the medieval one, and always in the modern one 3 are formed from bases with finkl consonants (see No. 3) by the addition of a i [ euphonic @, e. g. 03%3%,), %‘z‘afig@, Ty, T, WD), T, FRTPY, 01y ; WIYY, i ol v BIPY, BIVITP), WIFPY, ?”?'23%; BNGy; . Their singular appears in § 121 their plurals are given in §§ 131. 134. ch b) neuter bases (and two masculine ones wiz. MRV, 1), one feminine -li 3) one viz. ®on&), and two masculine-feminine-neuter ones viz. WBRY, TWRY) ¢ always (with option only in two numerals) ending in a euphonic %V in the ancient, medieval and modern dialect, e. g. 90, 23, e, P, VRS, 37y, Bom, 5, 0) T, IB, Fe@, WENY; ®R), R, W), [, HV B, BIHR), WITRY; W 9.3, ) by a 7 the B9 30, BAR, WA, TFOR, TWR); w3, DTBE), FINW), TVY, VBN, B, VN, (or m of also 06°), 280, BB, 30 (or also IRE); VB, QD) VRSB, VRBY, YR, HKAY, DR, : DRV, BIY, AR, e)j’ WY, 2Py, Beeny, é’od%, 2Ry, [N, FEMY, By, ee, fioé_;fi. Their singular is given in § 122 (¢f. 124), their plurals appear in §§ 131. 136. 5, The fifth comprises eded @) masculine, feminine, and neuter bases ending in a radical @V, e. g. ¥, 1, C; PURY, T, &), IR, NI, I, JI). Their singular appears in § 128, their W9 plural in § 131. b) masculine, feminine, and neuter bases ending in ¥w, 9, %W, % and &, b e. g. B, DO, I, SR, %K., Rwe, M. Their singular appears in § 129, their 9 Y plural in § 131. B 6, The sixth comprises masculine, feminine and neuter bases ending in 8, &, o, e.g. T, 3:, 3oh, T, 99, TeW; ag 83, @3, w3, 9, T, KT, J) T, I, U Their singular is given in § 130, their plurals appear in $§ 181. 132, o, 7 The seventh comprises eight neater bases of direction with final ©, e. g, = @?n’ (\a%’ o T. Their declension is given in § 123. J 8, The eighth comprises the bases of the seventh mode when the suffix o BO® or YO is attached, e. g. V8 O, WS, SIRBLE, [IRB. See § 126. i 9, The ninth comprises four bases expressing time that end in the ¥V of See § 127. No. 4, letter 0, viz. ©F), 9D, Y, VI 10, The tenth is formed by the pronoun o (J3°), HI0. See § 125. s i1 The eleventh is formed by the singular and plural of the personal pronouns and of the reflexive pronoun, viz. &0, o, dto, 390, EFI, TFI, AR, 3. See § 137. 12, The twelfth mode comprises a number of terms that express direction and time, viz. SR, TQ, 08, ¥ Y, WY, ¥B, &3, WP, Y, I3, ¥n, BN, B0F,, (S08). See § 139. — 88 —— ,()du&k al V. On verbs (sce §§ 313—315) 03 % O 143 In chapter III (§ 45 seq.) verbal roots or themes (dhatu) have If oeca We have seen that Késava calls the crude 0 Ifiwwd\)fi been already treated of form (prakritisvartipa, dhatusvartipa) of any verb its root, whether it be meant that the primary element (primitive theme) or a secondary theme The ¢o He gives the rule (siitra 216) that the crude form or theme is found 48 by dropping the pronominal termination (vibhakti) o of the negative to isting (see § 209, text and note 2) This rule, however, is (to say the least) such a d insufficient, as it does not enable a student to make a distinction sfitra aho between themes ending in ey (which alone are contained in Késava’s he term instances, (as TWRY, IAReB), 3¢wy) and themes ending in consonants (a8 OF° Ro3F, BROXE, 39%°, 25aCY¥, Apewf), and as it does not take Abog notice of the doubling of final consonants in the negative (§ 215, 7, f), (sutra 44 and intr; of the euphonic o3¢ of themes ending in & and o (§§ 170. 209), and of themes that lengthen their vowel (§ 209), thus presupposing the Voices grammarian’s list of dhatus (§ 47) Nagavary 144. Ancient Kannada grammarians call a verb 303y or SRR Which g its action, or the general idea expressed by any erb, they term Writers, g & o3y too 149 Kannada They do not distinguish between mocd (mode) and tense 15 chuga] has so to say only one mood, the indicative, for which, however, it uses a(ldmg no particular word. Cf. § 314 \5:3) (N Tense they call To© A conjugated verb, ¢. e. one ending in a personal termination, is called 3% tause (g peak (i 5833, 333 or 3,033983 (§§ 69. 189. 192) o= he hg ( 145 The name of the present tense is Z3FrTsexg or gPs3ss, or e L0 500 or DEFs 8_ 9 PRFOY, O ISFS Fow, or 830, 3; that of the past tense Perwn) is 2303, or PRIBTow, Or PRIHS, Or [P Tow; that of the future tense (meSn BRI, ©, Or WHT TO®, Or 2598 The 18 PON.3¢, or H“@S@ 0 cange comprehensive term for the three times or tenses 18 Fa®3 0 appea 146 The action of the imperative, or the imperative, is called 28 The b 009, Or DO, or SRGF The negative form of the verb, or the negative, 1s termed 95 N @o&@d S(]fl]e hHh 0r » 147 A person of the verb is called PO The name of the first 97 person (4. e. the third person in European grammars) is & @30 or 8,870 ik e )com, or also Vg ©R.5309N; that of the second is 5 0530 or ’Socfigwo mfll\e, and \Wm}'\x) e — 89 PHTBox; and that of the third (i.e. the first in European grammars) is g 3 or eud FoPYdoR. Cf. § 192. 1) have If occasionally the term 0% is added to JFD), JF and LI B, or to o crnde B, PSYOOR, SOFHOYDE and WS SOYTOR, it is to say that no other persons are er 1t he meant than those who regulate the action of a verb in grammar. The comprehensive term for the three persons is PTIRE 03v, s found 148 The grammarians Nigavarma and KéSava do not use a word egative to distinguish a transitive from an intransitive verb; they mentally saw 6 least) / tinction such a distinction themselves, and expected others to do the same. The 65ara's stitra about the so-called passive voice in the Sabdamar}idarpana wherein sonants the term Z¥zor®, transitive, occurs, is an interpolation (efiéoi;&@%}. of take About 400 years afterwards Bhattakalanka in his SabdanuSasana 5) 71/)? (sitra 443) introduced by name transitive verbal themes, R¥=or3codh, 9), and and intransitive verbal themes, efi%afio.f%’cpaéo. ng the Voices, i.e. active and passive (see § 315), are not mentioned by Nagavarma and Késava, and the terms parasmaipada and atmanépada which have been introduced from Samskrita into Kannada by modern Tt y term writers, are not used by them. 149. Causation is called ®¢3y. A verb that expresses causation or aunadd is causal (%e30%), is formed from an intransitive or transitive one by it uses adding the particle @gy (or also, as we shall see in § 151, R, 239, AW, VRY), e g. ISNRy, to cause (somebody) to laugh (from |SmY), w&xy, to cause (somebody) to cook (from @), FoMoRy, to cause (a person) to Jled 98 speak (from SaB), [RWRY, to cause (a person) to put (something) into pom the hair (from 30,8), RB®IRY, to cause (a person) to churn (from T3Q), 0F ww SRy, to cause (a person) to give (from &), ey, to cause (a ) sf tense person) to grind (from 8¢), SPeRuRy, to cause (a person) to feel pain ro tense (from 3w¢), [oecdaxy, to cause (cattle) to eat grass (from 3300), ¥R, ) The to cause (a flower) to Open\(f'rom BOT), %9635y, to cause (something) to appear (from 5@@6)," led 0 The agent (¢f. § 344) that causes another to do something or causes eo‘ame something to be done or happen, is called %eéfié‘@r, VT T, BOTIF, or 2‘;)50{559)?‘. SR S the first Y It may be remarked tha.t”a. causative verb may also be formed by the verb =), to [ Ndfl make, and an infinitive ending in ® (§ 187, 2), e.g. BTTTY W& SWRY, make him read (i= ‘2.9&)7\“0). A0 o 12 R 90 pa—. 150. But if a verb is formed by means of »=o (etc., § 149) that 1s 3 used in the sense of doing that which the word expresses, the agent is ancient, k) A termed RWTFYF, BTG, Or 3 03083 . Such verbs may be intransitive or transitive, e.g. g)éé g9, to look, to stare ; 53%& =y, to decrease in power; 9 (‘(; 89 =0, to become greater in bulk; o¢ =y, to move about, to float; ¢ zon AV 23)D0Ry, to roam or wander about;— 263 %o, to break, to crush; (or exceptio effecting a useful object, = c3REWRIRY) wg=, to draw (sketches, it figures, pictures); B8R, to affix a seal to (see § 151, remark); TpoNz,, especiall to extend, to widen; X Ry, to slacken (v.t.). Cf. §215, 1, 3. means of Remark. 303, It is not allowed to form causative verbs from such verbs, e. g. to form REohm) 263 23> from 283 B> would be wrong. o, 151 The suffix w<> appears also as 2, @, ©e3y, and BFy; compare Regay some of the finals mentioned in § 65. It is more than probable that §§ 6051 the = in =%y and =3, and the e in @y are euphonic (¢f. the = 3, B of §§ 63. 168). it 18 atts ‘It has been supposed that R and 93 are the same as B, A, to R, § permit, ete.; but that is wrong, as B, &> are formed from 3, to give, ete., to R n the by means of & which is another form of 8%; see letter 4, 3 in this paragraph ) 1 and § 316, 14. 1 We further state fi a) that =0 is suffixed TR) (IT lefter (, 1, to verbal themes which originally are monosyllabic, and end in T consonants if they have not received a euphonic wu (see § 54), e. g- 60, uex BDRY, BUEIRY, HRFY, HEPRY, TIWRY, ToOWAY, FEIR, TN, TRPAY, :‘)5 n; 30Ry, 3JR0, 300RY, TNV, WPEORI, WORY, 23CP°AY, fl@e‘%:fio, JReOR, v % ) A 7 = \ RReOR. See exceptions under letter b, 1, letter ¢, 1, and letter e. E 9, to verbal themes that originally are dissyllabic and end in consonants, but are made trisyllabic by the addition of a euphonic e, i ii e. g. ONOR), BODRY, ©LIORY, UDDRY, TIPRY, TLIORY, IRUFAY, :‘j‘)v d?:\j\ 3RBORY, A0, Ines° =y PR, WEIORY, RROR), ToMLIRY, a‘:4alld( BRIV, To this class belong also the ancient 2wZ@DRY, ©WRLPRL o 3NCRY, BPNCPRD. See the common ancient forms under letter ¢, 2; Aboys and exceptions under letter d. ab()ut i ¢ a1n In o8R), 397, a8 and 29 (§ 150) no verbal or nominal theme 0 nowadays appears to which 8= is added. 208370, BY Ry, IZYOA), and similar 3 o terms are derived from nouns by means of A=>. i ) (op 91 that 1 3, to themes that appear as dissyllables and trisyllables in the et is ancient, medieeval and modern dialect and end in ev, e. g. BNR, BB, nsitive 202 A, WRAY, WRRY, FTIARY, %oééfio, TRRRI, TRAR, 8 R, B0 A, DOWEL; -r)('\% OJCGC han xR D3R, T[PRohA), TPEHR), HTITRY; float aaszé; R, BAHTR), SRERRY, ; (or BWBRoNRY, gma&)g)m, ;?J;aegwg:so, WRITRY, [OVONFY, TVBIFRY, See an exception under letter e. efches, 4 oA, b to themes that are dissyllabic and end in « and o, to which, especially in the ancient and medieval dialect, @z is attached by means of a euphonic o3, e. 9. WFRRY (BPWRIRY), VPR, HEI3WAY, TROWA, FORAY, SRR, BRFMIR), FREWRY (FBRIRY), FIRNR, o form REINRY (RESBRY), RPRMIBY ([PpERY), BFNRY (WSWRY), [0 oR0RY. See exceptions under letter b, 2 and ¢, s. mpare Regarding the dropping of the final vowel of some themes cf. letter b, 2; o that §§ 60; 157; 165, letter a, 3. 4. 5; 165, b, 2; 172; 180, 5 the % 5 b to monosyllabic themes that are a vowel or end in one, to which it is attached by means of a euphonic o3¥, e.g. SRR, SRR, 3P &), 10 DR, SPEMIRY, 3eMVRY, DIVOWRY, 30eRVRV. The forms occur also 6, efe in the modern dialect. See exceptions under letter 0, s. ragraph b) that o is suffixed 1, to themes that end in the consonants o3 and of, e.g. TRy, ¢f. moxo (in the three dialects), %Jae)ro\) (only in the medieval one). letter a, 1. end 10 2, to dissyllabic themes ending in % and », in the three dialects, L)* el e. . ¥BR, VIR (BFRY, BIR, WHRY), WCPR), VPR, evdRY (W3 SO, 5, BVBIRY), HUCPRY (PVEIRY, BuCIAY), D3Ry (2E9RY, DENRY), HEBRD 000R FORY, DAY, 3BRY (IBRY), 89R0, PRy (90K, BoWARY), JoLIPRY, / 3nAy (337, 3NR), 3RFR (BRER), IBRY (also in a Sasana of 1076 A.D., S8R, ARY), BB, BpRRY, VW1, VTR (VAY), BERo (V¥ 0k A ) J o, BERY), BoBAY (DB, SR (FEPRY), DO, BIR. See letter a, 4 and ¢, 3. R $eIRy, BeIRy are derived from nouns by means of = PR About the dropping of the final vowel of some themes see letter a, 4, tet 0y 5 about the change of « into « § 109, 5,3 (¢f. §66), and about that of @ into ev §§ 165, a, 5; 247, d, 13, 14, [} I themé 9, to monosyllabic themes that are a vowel or end in one, e. g. J simile! &y (or Ry, of @ §316, 145 ¢f. its past participle 230, FHeR, 12% ——— et 92 300X, 2eRy, LR, BDuexv. The forms are common to the three In the dialects. Cf. letter a, 5. LodRy, ¢ letter d. ¢) that 3 is suffixed 1, to monosyllabic long themes ending in the consonant s, e.g. 152 3ERIF, FOWIF, RPOWIF. Cf. letter a, 1. intrangit Themes 10 frequ o) is derived from a noun with a long vowel by means of 3. like D2oF, WBoF, 30008 are derived from nouns with short vowels which they turoed 1 retain. action 15 2, to dissyllabic themes ending in.the consonants ¢, ¢, ¥ and eS8, theme, in the ancient and medieeval dialect, e.g. e350230F, WOWIF, YVARBIF, dvibpray WBWIF, BYWIF, éd%i\;, 3RTBREIF, 'gsmzéor, RNWIF, TPLaEIr, DOWIF ; Regardin 153 efifie)fl;, BLIVY, %Cfie);, weILy, RBWY ; mdae{i, %’dsfid_, ma, ;fgade;é; but also By, a”r‘iw{;, ;Somwé. Cf. letter a, 2 and letter d. 3, to dissyllabic themes ending in = and o, e g. ez, 09C°%, ]iliga), 6, DEIW, TAWY, TP, TRTWREY, [IBA. The forms appear more or less 50%3@&: louns op in the three dialects. Cf. letter a, 4« and b, 2. About the dropping of the final vowel of some themes see also letter a, 4 ?»a%;cfi, i1 of pume and b, 2. Whep d) that occasionally %235 is suffixed to the themes mentioned under called by letter a, 2, e. 9. 00TuPIY, WEORY, FTLBY, 3393, in the medizval dialect, grammay €) that occasionally esx> is suffixed to the themes mentioned under The 4 letter @, 1 and s, e.g. IR, WTRY, HFK, in the modern dialect. C0njugateg Remarks. of noung, As will be seen from § 150 9% is also used to form verbs from Samskrita 134 nouns, e. g. @.)9:25;7-50, WA, FOR, R, VU, TPFAY, BT R, PRI, FINRY, TINR been call 30028R), IR, IR, zffl):)ofio, BRI, TR, WA, LonRo, .Such verbs ocecur The in the three dialects. Cf. § 215, 1, letter . Plrvaks) Sometimes, in the ancient and mediwxval dialect, also a euphonic ©3° is used Terhy] I in suffixing the 4%, e. g. zfio«:éoao:do, SI0O0RY, ROFONR), TPTOWR, F9¢HB MNVIRY, See § 36, DERISAL MR TR ER d:)oo:)ofio,' NA0IA, BJWA, (LR Cf. § 215, 2, letter c. 155 Occasionally, chiefly in the ancient and medizval dialect, the @ of @A) is syllable { dropped, and we get such forms as 33033, &3032); in &oAR the 1 is changed (y adjan; into 03, and %033 is produced. Also in Kannada words that dropping takes Withoy p]ace’ so that TRTDOIR appears as %33’8505390 (or @&n@é#o), @Q‘)“O&)'f-fi) as fiefi)flojog (or 3¢ 4RY), STOWRY as SR (or 3¢3;R0), dé«zjot)-mo as déédosog, RBRFOWR as AR saiq R F03)), DICOWA ag TIT?Y, T IR as BRY 03 (BAY,7), see § 217). ), b s $h . = > three In the medizeval dialect the euphonic 935° in 9%) changes also into =°, e. g. LodR), BFFRR, VIR, TPEIRY, JeFAR), RRVIRY, TIVIR. Cr. § 215, s, letter a. fy 8.4 - 102, In § 148 it has been stated that verbs are transitive and intransitive, and in § 149 that there are causal verbs too. There are Themes no frequentative verbs in Kannada; no verbal theme (dhatu) can be ch they turned into a frequentative one. But though frequentative or iterative action is never contained in a particular shape of a Kannada verbal AV W nd 00§ Wy theme, it is expressed either by simple repetition (yugalottarana, WORF, dvihprayoga) or triple repetition (triprayoga); see § 165, 211, and 339. (WA Regarding a sort of reflexive verh see § 341. Sk 158. In Kannada not only verbal themes (dhatu) are conjugated, but also declinable bases (linga, §§ 68. 90), that is to say nouns (nima- linga), e. g. ircaaé, ©5°%3, compound bases (samésalinga), e. g. FDELI, 950 oQQJJ ] or less 0D TOWIF RIS, 'v“@a*“séé, pronouns (sarvanama), e. g. 29, attributive nouns or adjectives (gunavadana) whether Kannada or Samskrita, e. g. tor (l, 4 w9, 008, e0d, VAW, O, N33, ;Se)%, and appellative nouns of number (sankhyg), e.g. wsir. See § 197. When bases like the mentioned ones are conjugated they have been ] under called, by Europeans, appellative verbs or conjugated appellatives. Kannada dialect, grammarians use no name for them. | under The author of the present grammar has not met with any instance of such a b conjugated base in the medieval dialect; in the modern dialect no conjugation of nouns, ete. is in use. 154 There are two different forms of the Kannada verb that have Mskrita o been called verbal participles or gerunds by Europeans. bs oceu? The first is the preterit or past verbal participle (bhitakalakriyé, plirvakalakriyé, ptirvakriyé, §§ 155—171); the second is the present 15 used verbal participle (vartamanakalakriyé, vartaméanakriyé, §§ 172. 173). 3&%560359‘ See § 361. 155 §215)‘1, The first kind of the past participle is formed by suffixing the syllable @3> to verbal themes (dhatu, prakriti) ending in consonants ! A 15 (vyanjananta), in the vowel = (ikAranta), and in the vowel o (ékarafita) changed without altering the themes, e. g. SN (of F[peess), having admitted, 0g takes ;35@2@% (of 535995, having ceased, 9535% (of &g, the later Qfifi%{), having 3 é&()fl Cj‘)gj 2 48 i said, SLAY (of og*, the later %Y, ), having said, &8y (of &x¢, the later 939, having eaten, %Jaofio% (of FR03¥, the later %@os\nfis), having cut, —ne 94 JE— fiofioo (of Ro3s, the later fiodoo ¢f. § 48), having tilled, 03 (of The -'-1.30356) having jumped, Hegor (of 2eof), having sucked, fl@em? (of partly ¢ modern Nweof), having dropped, Aol having gained, ooy, having chewed, iem having swung, -'.-5’6;13 having stolen, ENLAY having become angry, See § 1 187 %e%fia having heard, m)ee;a B3y, WA, e.awocSaF WRBIFE, SPBRIF, P zédo%‘ WBoToF, BNy, i:"-*e)a ro&e)a :«sm 9, ~TalWUAE QBT (of 28), and seco BOBGEY, BIRR, SR, BEPDY, wOR, DAB, ¥R, BCPR; IBERY he altere modern (of Nz%) PRy 230, B0, WeGY, WREABED. LS5 Regarding N | the etymological explanation and original meaning see § 169 Themes ending in ©s optionally double the z¢ of @, e. g. LedoF (in a8 RREBIF, VNBIF, WRRIF, BRBRF, PBBIF (see § 371 of. § 119 \. D) 1 the n a, 4) The same formation of the past participle by means of z3o takes 16 place also when verbal themes consist of one consonant with a long (Gf:§ vowel, e. g. a0 (of w9), Fecsy (of F¢), Fwery (of Fwe), 3030, 3RET 158 20T, 0T, PR fin& Yow Remark consonant The grammarian KéSava states that the syllable @ consists of the vowel ¥V [ w Mg (ukara) added to the augment (Agama) 3. About @ see §§ 175. 189 o) ( 156 In the formation of the second kind of the past participle the W (: only difference is that in several themes 35 is substituted for 0, e. ¢ o) = , QO ), WY, N LU AP :-):‘z: R0 (Of Qfia‘) TR, FP3F, T (BAchy 9C UpVVON 3FCN ¥ nu3ofF 23;5&30? Foe @8ty (of wee?), T | (. § 165 3o, 30330, OB, VO, WL 523y (of @&33) 229330, 0EB33y: %3 The j (of %), e (of &¢), TP, wWody, WeB e\Cept 9 A list of themes that form their past participle by means of 3 is hich, ¢ given in sfitra 507 of the SabdanuSasana, viz. BZef, PR, W, TS dlclent P’ SO pSIdON 0 IO FROS FRT, NO FRRTE, 3PS 159 NPT g a M exd W300° eCo¢ VeI (VY PROLS €529, P FE9° UOHSOnant to which 1t WO, TC, T, WE, w, BTRT® e AT, UFF, RRe, BI° eal‘lv W] adds 2,893, 693 in sfitra 508, Jos in sttra 509, and [ee¢ in slitra 510 i remarking that one may use Sewo, or eoy : under siitra 553 it has also w3y f &3 (of &) ‘53@6) In some instances the use of 3> and & is optional, e.g. Sewy 9 e 3 t 230 030¢ RB0Br: [, Swndds: et 0589232 303030 32330 Dl ( TERTE Soe8330 WO, WO IADIAN WS Oth — 95 P The use of suffixing @y or 3 to themes with & final consonant has 153% (of VF (of partly disappeared in the medieval dialect, and still more so in the hewed, modern one, on account of a euphonic ev being added to the themes. gy, See § 166. OF, 2 157. The third kind of the past participle differs in so far from the first and second one, as in themes ending in a vowel this vowel (. or 1) may f aB), gy be altered or dropped before &> and 3. In the ancient, medieval and garding modern dialect the vowel > may be converted into the vowel €, e.g. DCITY (=633, AT (= BEF0), wBBY, WIRY, TSR, SBRY (in a S4sana between 750 and 814 A. D.), S5z (in a sasana of 929 o ) ? % A. D.), gpdn. (in a Sasana of 804 A. D.), B3¢5, BRFSR, B3T3, FRCIZ; in the modern dialect the vowel 2 too may be changed into the vowel ) b ake» 9, ¢. g. FRX (=TARY), RRBX, KTR, ABRY, ROVRY, RVITEY, TILID. 3 lon (Gf. §8§ 60; 151, a, 4; 151, b, 2; 151, ¢, 8; 165, a, 8. 4. 5; 172; 180, 5.) sfim 158, The fourth kind of the past participle is formed by eliding the final vowel (.5 or ) of the theme, producing a theme ending in a half consonant, and then suffixing o or o, e g. ¥3oF (=wCPI of ¥t¥), vowel NBF (=ovdB of ud), IR, (=HRD of 2F), 209 (=%BRY), WY (=wRBY), TR, (=FAR), %odg (=39037), TRRY, (:%J@flcfia), mw me DAY, (=RATB), Jpd) (=B, WA, (=WABY), FoRy, (FR), m,6d DY, (=N07Y), AT (=RBRY), AR, (=RAW), BE) (=BOR), TR, R (BA), BRI, (=BRAW), BRE) (=BRRR), VRRY, (=TBRAD). N) 70 Cf. § 165, letter a, 7 3 b The mentioned past participles occur only in the modern dialect except 2pz3y which is found likewise in the medi@val one, and Dy3y, of Hi which, according to the Sabdanusasana siitra 482, is met with in the ancient one. o, 3 § d?Jfl 159 The fifth kind of the past participle is formed by eliding the final s FIW PN consonant of themes before the termination 3o or 3. This formation is nearly wholly restricted to the modern dialect. We have hich it 1, the elision of &, e.g. ¥ (=), T3 O I (= 6853)1 fra 510 RRE3Y (=RPERY,), A3y (= AeRy,), for which there is the instance & has 90 (of ®g*) in the ancient dialect (¢f. the &3y of & in § 156); ] =3 , the elision of od¥ e.g. @ (= B0393), 8RR (= ;S:@ofio%), 'y £ R (=908 5 ¢f Rerdy (=Rx); )? | 3, the elision of €%¢, e. g. T30 (of FEF); s 9.6 s 0, th 4, the elision of ef e g. 2R (=BVAY), BRB (=THVY) medieval 803y (=Rewy), ®IB (=AYY), AN (=A#ewy, used also in the 10, mediceval dialect), Re3d (=RewY), BHEB) (= DREW,); Nl W W 5, the elision of o of the ancient theme o905, 2. €. IV (=TIPRIF); 11 6, the elision of O¥ together with the preceding vowel = of the ancient %@U{%‘J, | theme F.9cf, 4.e. To%y, (=3v9RoF), a form usedin the mediseval dialect; medieval 7, the elision of 0¥ of FRo, a theme formed from the ancient Fo9TF, o, t i. 6. TR (= TIPTOF). medizval 160. The sixth kind of the past participle is formed by changing or This 13 ¢ converting the final consonant into another one hefore &30 and So. ancient 5 changing takes place in the ancient, medieval, and modern dialect. 06 3 ¢ We find 16 1, the conversion of e3¢ into 0f before B, e.g. ATF (=0N), only the WOF (=0 in the ancient dialect, and ez (=9L3), DRIF its fnitia] (=) in the medieval one (¢f. § 236); To th 2 ) the conversion of €3¢ into 3 before 3o, e. g. ¥3o, (= W), Y, oy (& (= 90C,), 3, (=3CI,) In the mediseval and modern dialect; initial vo 3, the conversion of &% into I before 3 in o3y, (of Zood) of the ancient and medieval dialect; %, 11 4 33 “ % \ 4, the conversion of €3¢ (or €3¢ with the euphonic ev, i.e. €) howevey, into 3¢ before 3o, €. g. @03o, (= w03oF, of @B or ¥OE), I3, (of 162 0 CI¢ or @C’i@fio), SR8y, 3T Y, X3, Py, WeRD, of the ancient shorteniy and medieeval dialect, and &=53, 03?559_9, 33,30, BeR,, B, BRI, Mermings of the medizval and modern dialect; 33, (of 2€95°=3t9)) occurs in The | the Jaimini Bharata; exceptions to this rule in the ancient dialect are e. g. U, 2 9E3Y, WEIBY, BIIF, BRoF, LI, EF, d#&éw; 3 Modery 5, the conversion of e into @ before 35 in 23y, (=Jwy,) of the i § 4 modern dialect; 163 6, the conversion of o the subsitute of €3¢ (see No. 1), into @* Yortey;, before %o, e. g. V) (= %03y, VTF), DT (=830, DEIF), WEY (=W, the tel‘m: z‘t)dor) in the medieval dialect, and 0363% (= 0363%, DTOF), 22)(53) (= z;‘)@i)g), The ®GoF) in the modern one; ing NJ‘sfgb 7, the conversion of an original o° into @ before Zo in B e, thy (=®&eF) in the medizval and modern dialect; 8, the conversion of ef into ¢ before o in fir,j% (-_-fie)%) of the The f( medizeval and modern dialect, and in ;3353% (= a”g@%) of the modern one; iy Ky ————— i P vy 9, the conversion of ¢¢ into ¢ before o in *’d% (= %%3%) of the n the medieeval and modern dialect; 10, the conversion of of into ¢ before @y in 350% (of 3of, 80v) and W (of 2o¢, 20Ty) of the ancient, medizval and modern dialect; 90F); ancient 11, the conversion of ¢ into ¢ before Zy in fi'v@ég (of 3pe° dialect; FRw), QT (of QoF, do2), and o) (of B, Ko of the ancient, WY o] medizeval and modern dialect; 12, the conversion of ef into @€ before g5 in ARy, (=Qwy,) of the medieval and modern dialect; nging of 13, the conversion of the ¢$ of oy, a mutilated form of the y, This dialect ancient 3o9g¢ (see § 159, No. 6), into @° before 2, in TORY, (=T 2. e. %ge?mr) of the modern dialect. 161 The seventh kind of the past participle is formed by changing not ) N3 only the final consonant of the theme before the termination 8o, but also its initial vowel. ) To this kind belong only the three themes 2695 (3C), NEF (NE), ) 8% (&%) of the ancient and medizval dialect, which convert their initial vowel o into o and their ¢3¢ into 3%, so that their participles are ) of the B3y, N9, 33, (see § 66). 83y, occurs likewise in the modern dialect wherein its theme, e B) however, appears as 3¢9, which is found also in the medieeval one. 94) (0{ 162. The eighth kind of the past participle is formed by changing, ¢. e. ancient shortening, the vowel of the theme and inserting a euphonic ¢ before the o) \termination 0. oours 18 The themes which do so, are 3¢, Dso, Rwe; their participles are aree.J 23;5%, :;)\)fi%, SPQ0 1n the ancient and medieval dialect, and also in the modern one, though their themes herein are @3¢a3o, Dsecsey and FJwewdwn ) of e (see § 48). 163. The ninth kind of the past participle is formed by changing, ¢. e. it @ 009 shortening, the vowel of the theme and inserting a euphonic ¢ before wJJJ, the termination 3o, cb j‘)) The themes are & and =9 (Fo03), and their participles are 0.3, (s and X3y, in the ancient and medieval dialect, and also in the modern one, though the themes herein appear as g3 and zacdoo. i ”355% Remark. of the The form of @ is in sttras 477. 566 of the Sabdé‘mu%&sana; it is not given iefl] 0ne; in the Karnatakabhishabhtshana which adduces only the past participle 833 ;— 13 — 98 —— The ¢ the Sabdamanidarpana under sitra 48 clearly gives the form of #9033°; under sfitra 240 it has @R, which may be either ®3033° & or ®> &; it has neither medizval @3033° nor A in its dhatupatha. The present-future participle generally is # fi%, 3 a3, instead of @03, in the ancient and medieval dialect (§ 180, 1, remark). § v o 2! chanéing 164. From § 155 up to § 163 the syllables o and 3o underwent past part no changes when they were used as suffixes for the past participle; in In it the present paragraph instances of the tenth kind of the past participle remaing ¥ will be adduced, that is to say instances of the participle in the formation 9 Y P of which the suffixes 30 and 3> are changed. Namely comeé ) 1, o is converted into 3 after the theme ervsss (mi’as%), the past 10, participle of which is YVER in the ancient, medieeval and modern dialect; m%) and 2 o) Zo is converted into o after the theme zose (To), 1ts vowel forms o being shortened, so that its past participle is %9@% in the ancient, In the medieval and modern dialect; remain ¢ 3, T is couverted into @) after the theme Fne* (%J@%fi@), the final 11 ¢¢ being changed into ¢, and %Jase% becomes the participle for the three dialects; an, éab modery ¢ 4, 30 is converted into &3 after the themes z@s, w@y, R, [BY, taking 1} TR, VR, S0k, B and VRUR, their final @, being changed into &, become ; so that e_eéjé, B, eméjgy ‘5&3& ?déjod, 2,‘3&3&, ;dgéj& are the participles for 12 ) the three dialects, and ;50%,333, @méjgfg those for the ancient one. In the ancient dialeet 23#0@5%& is written also ¥R, a form that is common ancient ¢ 1 in the mediseval one. into 4, The original forms of the past participles of the modern dialect W& (of becone , DAIE = YRBY) and SR8 (of BLBY) must have been z&médas (FW + 8d) and The { Bopwkd), (Teed + @) ; ¢f. No. 6; dialeet, 5 the past participle Rpe3¢)o, mentioned under No. 4, is, by contraction, vulgarly changed into Z»eoy; is o'glei-’gt : 6 1 ) 0 ) the past participle 3Teso, is identical in form with the theme, the fopy @ e. BT (Sabdamauidarpana siitra 241); the participle’s original form must have been 3Teay, 4. e. 3Tead with the termination 3y which In§ 15 was converted into &30; 165 ‘3 3o 1s converted into &30 after the ancient and medizval themes Foso and 30®y, these changing their initial vowel e into 2, and taking 8 fope, the ey, the forms S0 and $o&*¢ so that the past participles become %J@:efi% ot i and 3% éjis' b the . 99 —— . under The themes 3B and 308) ocecasionally appear as FRRY and 3HBY in the neither medizval dialect, and always so in the modern one; the participles remain rally is FR é&gp 30 é&gd, matk), 8, 3y is converted into &35 after the ancient theme 3z, this lerwent changing its initial vowel = into o> and taking the form $€¢, 50 that the past participle becomes %éjgd. iple; In In the medieeval and modern dialect the theme is ¥®; the participle articiple remains T8 ; mation 9, 3o is converted into 235, after the ancient theme - oI A > which be- comes 23%, so that the past participle is ;jaézgx, he past 10, 3o is converted into e3> after the ancient (and medizval) themes ialect; w&0 and =y, these changing the initial vowel @ into o> and taking the s vowel forms o>¢3% and 2323¢, so that the participles become gzéé and 2523?3 ancient, In the medieval dialect the themes generally are ©®, $375; the participles remain 032333, 232330 3 he final for the 11, 3, is converted into @ after the themes gry, Dono (and ancient 3no, Sabdamanidarpana under sfitra 241) of the ancient, medieval and modern dialect, and &ry of the medieval and modern one, the themes ), 3 taking the forms ¢, Qow¢, (35°), HBS, so that the past participles into &, become I3, ;)o%%, (389), ATY; ¢f. § 165, letter, a, 7; ples for 12 ) 3o is converted into @ after the themes evio and zHrd of the ancient and medieval dialect, the themes changing their initial vowel ev Gonon into % and taking the forms 2.5 and 5p®*, so that the past participles become 2.3y, and FpT % 98_. ymth (of The themes V7> and IO appear also as %7 and P in the medieval + ) and dialeet, the participles remaining W, @#g&. In the modern dialect &#70 has taken the form of @»70 which oceurs also in the medizeval one; the past participle g, by is é@#%; cf. § 165, letter a, 7; 13, 3. is converted into ) after the ancient theme 333, this taking o il hene, the form Sx¢, so that the past participle becomes 3@@; see an instance riginal in § 165 under 0, 1. X which 165 From § 155 to § 164 we have seen how the Kannada past participle | th 165 ol is formed in various ways when the syllables o and 3 are suffixed to the theme; now its eleventh kind follows, a short form which appears with- Ry out 3> and 3o, is often identical as to shape with the verbal theme (which T at the same time often is a verbal noun), and may be considered to be a 13% 5 s 100 . oy, W " f verbal noun (see § 100 compared with § 60; § 169). Compare the short past participle with final ~5 in § 168. %J@%?S. A This short participle occurs only when a verb directly follows it which 5o shows that the sense of the past participle is meant, as it does not bear nto eV | the characteristic mark of a participle itself. modern d See, however, § 198, s, where the third person neuter singular is directly formed from it. It is used in the ancient, mediseval and modern dialect. W;g W It includes two classes, it being put either before a verb that differs W B4 from that from which it has been formed, or before a verb that is identical ; 3¢, 3 in the second case it is repetition (§§ 152. 211). 6, | a) The short participle used before verbs that are not the same as that are 503 from which it has been formed, chiefly before Fwe* (%@@gj, ¢f. § 341) and 30° (édo) : lialect), 1 Instances with regard to unaltered verbal themes with a final :.jl'i) (:':5 Here consonant, are e. g. 0¥ IT° (=303 ITF), TIWF ' (=T o), Uf 383 HIOW 30° (=m0 ITF), WEF o (=W Io°), FPT' Bof (=AIBOF [ I 207), Ae* FRT (= ALYy FREI), BROI® TRF (=BRWY FRF). thelr fine 2, Instances with regard to unaltered themes with a final vowel, are e.g. bgfore {l i BC> B (=BePR0 o), won BT (=83 3T°), Wi 3T° (= wniBy 3oF), . y U T8 30° (=T0R0 3F), TEB Bof, TN IoF, ToA WELF, 3 3¢, 80 SF, ; -2 ( A 3° 0, 3D TRY, 3N 30°, BRT BRT, KRB Io°, DX TPORF, IO IcF, [ ilegt QB BT, 1B TB, JB I, Y ‘306, DR Zof, VO I, Kd Zof, BO 3c°, d& 3. ) 3, Instances with regard to themes that have changed their final vowel froml Wfi » into e (which often are verbal nouns and occasionally appear in the medi@val dialect and frequently in the modern one), are e. g. 389 FRps e i e (= SCBD FRF), LI BRF (= 0BR) TRYF), I 3T° (= 20B3 3T), 0 ; X0 WR TR, W0 FRPS, T3 IR, T3 3of, TEI 3¢, 3P BRTE, B3 IR, )y 2y 4 TREI FRYE, 3B TR, 3N 3o¢, 3L TRY', SRR TN, 3RF TRY, BT VA TR, IR TR, WRB TR, WS TR, JNB TN, CF. '§ 157 X R 4, Instances with regard to themes that have changed their final vowel Wi LAY 2 into e9 (which often are verbal nouns and not unfrequently occur in L W the modern dialect), are e. 9. a@ FPY (=BRD FWY), B IR 3 (=BEPT TRY), NI TRY (= NEPRY TRYF), TR TN, TR DR, I TR FRPS, LI TRT, ¥ TR, B08) IRYS, T TR, BB TR, 3% Ver) i P — 101 — ) short TR, WCI FRP, VB TR, 2B FRYS, TL) BN, IT BN, eI TRFF, AV TR, BEI TR, HB B0, B 305, VR TR, Gf. § 157. which 5 9 Instances with regard to themes that have changed their final t bear into ey (which partly are verbal nouns and occasionally occur in the 98, s, modern dialect), are e. g. 2@y TR (=BRF FRF), VLN BRT (=0 By TRF), MR TRF (= NPTy TRY), T TRY (=TIR TNY), BB TR, 3% TRFE, B TR, BoBO FRYF, 80 TR, WA BRYS, differs WEDH BRPE, VT FRFE, JBY TR, SN BRF, TN B3R, &R tical; FRYS, DRV FRGF, Cf. § 151, letter b, . s that 6, Instances with regard to themes that have dropped their final syllable, are o3y (=0 of ©odon) 8¢ (used in the ancient and medieval ) and dialect), Zpe (= Bpen of P[pens) So¢ (used in the ancient dialect), and final 200 (=ooh of 73 ©nv) FRg (used in the modern dialect). Cf. letter b, s. Here may be adduced the vulgar V@ 30&R> (=WRA 3RRRAY; see § 166). &), AR Cf. 3 IR under 5, 4. ) 9 Instances with regard to themes that have dropped the vowel of their final A, ~> or A and converted the remaining consonant ~¢ into &€ 00, before the verbs 3nzEs and Iwgs (B0#y), are e. g. T (=unT) of wn) ) TR, w3 (of W) TRR, wE (of wil) Twes, 33¢ (of 3R) BRer, 3T° (of 8rd) Bwes, wss (of wif) Bwes, wse (of W) FR¥s, e (of JAn) i TR, Azd (of Any) ReF. The instances occur only in the modern dialect. C). § 158; § 164,11, 12, b) The short participle used before verbs that are identical with that from which it has been formed, 7. e. in repetition (§ 211):— owel § he 1, Instances with regard to themes that, in an unaltered form, precede Ay an identical verb, are e. g. 38 T& (=TAR TR), T T (=TIWX) TD), TIO* THOIF (=T20hY ToGIF), T3 T (=3T3 TY), FEB FEB (= T3 v), ) LN FERB), B B (=DAB TB), Ted Fom, TP T, wB =R, BN B, Al 3P >, 39 39, 3D 3D, 3P 8P, 3R 2R, 3 |, *O 39, IR AR, SR 88, TO RD, AB 1B, TPR WPR, N VN, VA VR, DD VY, & [, ;wel B S99, Q0B 0B, Swe® SweP, Sen 388, 3088 3885, A0 A8, Fe r i REP, DO O, REP AP, I8 BT, B B, Hd %Y, XN AR, aé@c% b 2R3 d It is to be observed that the instances always presuppose the second 2 NN verb to be in the form of the past participle ending in @o (§ 155) or also 10 9 i In the past tense, as & FABY, TO FIRY, ete. (see § 211, 4). They are (of (D by found in the three dialects. In Abhinavapampa 13, 53 there is 35 éa%)J 7 P 1 BoJPowss . . 2 ) Instances with regard to themes that have lost their final vowel GEOR ? before an identical verb (which are found in the medizval and modern ) dialect), are e.g. 3% (4. e. 930 of ¥9) ¥3, 3N (=34c. of 31) A, A ol M‘ 3R, BF B8, Sen B8R, I8 XY, DAB DAV, BRI BHR, BRT VAT (see 199 §6e 176 Cf. § 151, letter a, ¢ and b, . Remark. Theme In such an instance the short participle may be doubled, e. g. W8 W& W&, of the vor also when another verb follows, ¢. g. W3 W3 TH¥°. See § 211, 8. and 1n so 3, Instances with regard to themes that have dropped their Iast or 3 (§§ syllable before an identical verb, are e.g. 38 (of 38ny) 3Try, 30 (of RETF, o 3ony) 80my, 33y 3Tory, 3R Ry, 38Y RYN, D DT, 3B .3, B9y, ot Foedry, SeR Senz, e Seear, LR RANRL. into g (s Cf. letter a, 6. The instances belong to the three dialects. See § 211, 1. In th Remarks. C0nsonant In such an instance the short participle may be doubled, e. g. 38¢¥ 3a¢¥ 3¢ vowel g m, IB I3 SR (or SB), B¢ ®¥ BIMY (used in the ancient dialect, see § 211, 10 See also § 339, 8. [eouh Also in the repetition of nouns the last syllable has been dropped, as in 3970, ¢ gon gomn¥y, 8T SNBS* (see § 303, 1, a. b. c. d). thiS, a8 9 4 167 ] An instance in which the vowel of the penultima too has been lost before an identical verb, 1s £&9 2928y (=TEPA 2eP R, of the medizeval ADpear, dialect). Cf. @y 3R&=y under a, 6. §llahle 166 Hitherto the formation of the past participle of verbal themes in the a tngs. ending in consonants and the vowels o and .y has been treated of; 1t still remains to be introduced the formation of the twelfth kind of the past L. é\r participle. It concerns the themes which end in the vowel ev in the three st Y Dr;, dialects. i sogs l W Their past participle is formed by suffixing the vowel =, in the ancient, medieval and modern dialect. The final en is treated as a euphonic HE “l‘itea L letter, disappearing before the m according to the rule of sandhi (§ 213, seq.). fi“flg il 16 | EXOEp[iOD 0 Instances are Qfi%?_& (of efig,*%}_), having feared, i (of ufi%), having met Mfsore i together, sz:i (of ;323;), having trusted, ;50?55 (of ajozé;), having liked, éi Wl 04 103 .‘hey are B0l (of oEy), B, wa, W, 0, Ing, JpdF, vh, BN, Jpen, 3 3 WO, T, BB, TR, T, [P, WL, LY, TN, YRA, WHEEP, o BREP, AR, BREP, INA, ToAA, WwdA, BOWF, BOWF, DDA, LADA 1 vowel FTEIPA. modern e, gpeny, ®Peny form also the irregular past participles eso3sé, 3 i oPees, Rwecss, used for the third person neuter singular of the past tense d 248, (see § 199, and ¢f. § 176). 30356 appears also as e3¢, regarding which see §176, and compare ey (=) in the Dictionary V. Themes with final ¢35 generally form their past participle by means WA 0, of the vowel m; but if the €9y is changed into €35, which occasionally and in some instances always is done (§§ 59. 61. 160, 4), they suffix o oir last or 35 (§§ 155. 156), e. g. soror (0f T =TILN), BWERF, TIWVF, 30 (of WERIF, DIBF, WHBF, TRWF, VIBF, BRRoF; ¥30F, G3oF, & e3,3oF, <4 3 3, WY 3 23%?&597, and before the syllable 3y their final €3¢ is sometimes converted AR into 3¢ (03@35333, etc., § 160, 4). e In the medieval dialect a theme that in the ancient one ends in a consonant, is not unfrequently made to end in ey, in which case the 109 349 vowel = is used to form its past participle, e. g. RRe® (= ?,?,Jae@%), g ect, 960 (=ws)), TP (=TFeH), 0%, [P, TRLY, VP, BRO, VR, ~P 99 BRFD, B0, D, vnY, FIY, 3RO, WCIV, IR, W, wun VAT 3d, as 0 this, as a rule, is done in the modern dialect. Cf. §§ 48. 181,1. 198, 4. 5. 167. The thirteenth kind of the past participle which, as it would gen Losb appear, occurs only in the medieval dialect, is formed by means of the edizeval syllable =z, This is, instead of o (§ 155), suffixed to themes that in the ancient dialect, without exception, end in consonants, but in later t,hemt?s times have optionally received a euphonic ev (¢f. the close of § 166), | of; % e. g. Fe9ny (of Jedy, =3eH), IRFD (of B, = 3R¥), F20W Je post 1) Dr. I. F. Fleet draws the author’s attention to some copper-plate grants in which 0356 e three and ©033° have been used directly for ®A and @A in the forms SVHBOIE, ToweB03H, JoF oA, Bow3033%, ete. (for SHABA, TopBIA, JoFN, J039A, etc., to the east, to the south, ete.). w(}ienta He writes: “ With one exception, noted further on, I have found these forms in only some of the spurious copper-plate grants of the Western Ganga series, from Mysore. uphouic These grants claim to be of various dates from A. D. 248 upwards. But there are strong reasons for (Q 913, fixing the eleventh century as the period when most of them were fabricated.” The one exception occurs in a stone inscription at Bauntr in the Tiruma-Ktdlu-narasipura taluka, g mek Mysore district, which appears to include the word SmOT03® (or JRsIP03:5?), and may belong to about A. D. 920. Cf. § 281. We remark that @A appears as @00 in Télugu. f hl\ed [r— 104 ——— (of meT), =meBoF), AePRy (of Aewy, =Ae), RPTUEds (of RTI In pass forms 3R =RRTF), BROWY \ ( of Bwedy, =RweRor), BRELFm (of BPELO WE.0, WS __‘%Jae&%) WCIDT (Of WYY, =WLIVI), SoTLRY (Of F0TF, = 2THY) gavoid al In a Sésana of A. D. 1123 we find Reuddd (fm fie)o) in which a euphonic MR, S0G ey 18 used for he @ Towards the end of the medieeval period (e. g. in the Kannada Nagava Ramayana) here and there we meet with forms in which the =z> has that thi 1§ been used to form the past participle even of verbal themes that end fermination in gv in the three dialects (§ 166), e. g. ezoe8%0 (of 3 , =2 W) §193, Also 308,30 (of Bedy, =a Boedy), Awedny (of Fwemy, =a JRe@Y) el the curious past participle 22 Qo (==, of Jey) occurs in the Kannag Ramayana 1131 The vowel @ in @m0 in this case is, of course, nothing else but a hose witt euphonic letter employed before the real termination themes ] 168. The question naturally arises how the vowel g of § 166 came themselyes to represent the suffix for the past participle of verbal themes ending in A T18ing, | eny 1n the three dialects D‘w us)m It appears to be certain that < originally was a euphonic or enunciative augment put before @y (§ 155 seq.) in order QO‘\ &0 JJ, to avoid forms like DRy (of HIW), having sung (actually used in the -pUV\./ TR Jaimini Bharata 21, 51), Sw@) (of Se@o), having made (used in the If we thos Dharmaparikshé, edited by the Rev. G. Wiirth in his SDERE _56045'@:)"0') hefore <2 vacana 1 301) B éfio SN 0% , etc Such forms, certamly, are 4 Il ( clumsy and cacophonous and led people to use the enunciative augment Certann ) o between the theme and o, as they actually did in the forms Fegzp, o) 'g-f\g;e 3WeY, etec. and then in the forms 3380 3083 20 5«0\&63 which bring 5 probably as a remnant of by-gone times, we find in § 167 This is Wel corroborated by the fact that in the so-called relative past participle N0upg, | (§ 175, e. g. TRT, SRAB, T8 B, S0, =B’ T 3028 ), In the ancient (§ 199 and medizeval present tense (§ 194, e. 9. TIBTZDo, SPRIBIJo, %oe& B0, hag } 3 Degoyy 1 CSNO) and in the imperfect tense (§198, e.g. &30, %sej Qo, ;Szc ?30) ¥ A §gl the %39, in the form of 7 (§178), is always used. (In the contmgent lafing.jt present-future tense the participle with = is generally added directly to ¥ ) RV, etc.) ? § 188, of :) We are, therefore, compelled to think that the past participle with lmp[fl&tu, final = is another particular kind of the short participles treated of in g $Peciy § 165 About its representing verbal nouns see § 169 I h&\ g RO et 105 mm, In passing it may be observed that in the future tense (§ 200) the trisyllabic 3 forms IR@Fo, J0eRIFB0, when they are to become dissyllabic, do not appear as W AL, SRBo, 39eB0, but as IR o, 9’0, the ©®° in combination with S being used ;iod%*%). to avoid a hardness of the pronunciation, which is avoided in the past participles uphonic 2@, 9B by the insertion of an enunciative % before %> and finally dropping the Ro. 2 Remark. {annada Nagavarma and Késava call the 8 an augment (Agama), and Késava states 9% has that this @ and the ¥V in ® are vowels which are substitutes for the personal that end terminations (kriyAvibhaktyadésasvara). See the personal terminations in V) §193. ) Also 169 Is it possible to find out the original meaning of the past participle i the in Kannada? In § 165 it has been stated that the short past participles, namely 56 hut 8 those without @o and 2o, are often identical as to shape with their verbal themes which at the same time are verbal nouns, so that the participles 66 came themselves appear as verbal nouns and finally must be such, e. g. €, nding 1n a Tising, Ho03F, a running, Aee¢, a splitting, RBRoF, a striking; aL, 2209 ally WS T, TN, 35, 89, oL, &89, 3R, BR3, 3B, T, T, W@, Y, VR, in order 0, 0, &8; HLY, WB®, WO, B9, TP, 38, 309, 3B, BT, BRA; VLI, od in the 0CI, BR, IT; B, YOI, TRy, B, BRI, WA, WBI, BNRY, HTBY; TPE. of in the If we thus consider the short participles to be verbal nouns, their meaning oJp oY Y # before R and 3os is as follows: — BRoxs BReF, to take (4. e. to apply) are ly a blow (or blows, to one’s self); €3 3of, to bring a standing up (to a angment certain place, . e. to come); 03¢ 30°, to give a running (¢. e. to run); 18 36%, 3 TR, to take (4. e. to apply) a stabbing'(to one’s self); IB o, to bring a walking (. e. to come); etc : . Whichs This 18 We believe that analogously the past participles ending in 3o and > are purticpt® nouns, namely verbal nouns augmented by the pronominal suffixes 8> and &30 ¢ ancient (§ 122; ¢f. §§ 178 and 298, 3). Thus, for instance, 562, a descending, has become 203y, a descending-it; &, a walking, IBx, a walking-it; 5085307 ) DO, a selling, 0O, a selling-it; Se b a germinating, SHp$3, a germi- 0 5’2”.&) nating-it (¢f. our explanation of e in § 171, of ev3o0, ete. in § 173, of 3011ti5gellt iretly ¥ wg in §§ 178. 179, of 5y, 53 and R in §§ 185. 186, of the infinitive in § 188, of 710 and = in § 204, and of the second and third person of the imperative in § 205). The suffixes ©y and 3y are so to say redundant. } eiple Wi? The special idea of the past (‘a having descended-it’, ¢‘a having walked-it’, tod of or having descended, having walked, etc.) has, only by usage, been attached 14 — ——a 106 to the forms with @ and 3 (¢f. & in § 273). A similar indefinite shesd, 889 character as to time has been actually preserved in the verbal forms (f N produced by suffixing the syllables g0 and Ryo (see § 203), in the negative If e participle and conjugated negative (see §§ 170. 171. 209. 210), and in guphonie the verbal forms (participles) produced by the syllables &, w, =, and e XIS, W Wb ® (see §§ 180-185). Further the use of the past participle %) in & combination with 2z or 3 (@;&%&%, @%8), e.g.in §§ 322-329 and that of ) of ) of the infinitive with final o, (¥ef) in combination with me (§ 316, 2) will assist to elucidate such an original indefiniteness as to time. (f. also i( of [ 4n 0) § 313, ¢« about the combination of the past participle and verbal nouns negatire in the past. Mono short i In § 168 the short past participles with a final enunciative 2 which remained after the dropping of o, have been introduced. With their their fing %o they are obvious verbal nouns, and they are therefore to be considered e 3 { { as verbal nouns also without 3o, This is established by the fact that they in combination with e are used identically with other verbal nouns anclent in combination with fae:): in § 916, 2 (e. g. TRAY, SNY = SRR0Y, &), 1 eficiomcg’). monosy| 170. The fourteenth kind of the past participle is the so-called negative the uegy one (pratishédhakriyé, vilomakriyé, abhavakriyé). It is formed by putting (of fi@% | e9z$ to the short form of the so-called infinitive (kriyartha, see § 187), <. e. The to the form of the verb that is conventionally used to denote object, forming 1 design, purpose, or future of intention of action (before another verb), edigyg) expressing the idea of the English infinitive preceded by ‘to’, ‘for to’, (6§81 “about to’, ‘ready to’, ‘yet to’ (see § 188). This short form of the infinitive In Tel ends in the vowel e, e. g. 03 (of wT, @), to be or stay, about to be drops the or stay, going to be or stay, yet to be or stay. When 3@ is put to o3, In the form of the participle becomes either g ©@, or, with the application of sandhi (§ 214), =338, ‘not actually being or staying’ or ¢not having P&rticiph actually been or stayed’. The idea of the past is secondary, depending Iegation, Uce hay on circumstances (see § 209, and ¢f. § 169). Both forms, 33 e9z3 and 203, were used in the ancient dialect; in the medieval and modern 0 of pg one only »od is in use. Other instances are gse%zf‘; (of wef), not being (6. the I With N fit or not having been fit, fae%zfi (of aef), not being preseat or not having been present (§ 338), @owd (of wowy), not fearing or not having feared, %éfid (of Ty, not tying or not having tied, @3 (of wum@v), the fil'st | — $BG (of 33y, und, 3edd, BedB, [PBL, JIWCIB, BAAB, T4, o Saygy to f ( ——r 107 — efinite | formg 2eCIB, wrRwB, wunrotdrd, 3Ne¥s, WRNEE, WRBA, msgbzsc%, LOBORT. negative Cf. §§ 208. 209, 210. (212, 7). If verbal themes end in =, o, €3, 8, , or &, the infinitive inserts a and 1n euphonic 035¢ hbetween the theme and e when e9z8 is attached, e. g. 7 and L BePodd (of wed), wePod (of weP), Tdwd (of k), 39033 nd hat (of 32), SBd (of 88), BRWB (of B@), wchd (of i), ToKT 316, 2) E (Of T9), Hodd (of &), wechd (of we), Feadd (of F¢), SReC3T C also The theme % exceptionally inserts a euphonic z¢, and the (of a’@e) 1 nouns negative participle becomes $,3%. Monosyllabic themes ending in &, @, 03¢, ©f and ¥ and having a which short initial vowel or cozsonant, form the negative participle by doubling th their their final consonant before the ¢ of the infinitive and suffixing «&, e. g. onsidered wd (of we'), 273 (of 25, wod (of wer), FHYD (of 3R%°), hat they zoof)&%zg (of 203f). As an exception there is F$D (of F¢¥) in the ancient dialect. ] nouns In the medizval one we find exceptionally evest3 (of ‘wdj@?) ), nod (of Awf); as the modern one uses to double the finals of monosyllabic themes already before a euphonic e (§ 48), its forms of the negative participle are e. g. emz;%zfi (of U ), 2538 (of comd\),’ R s negative (of Ren). Cf. § 215, 1, 1. i puttmg 87), 1. The themes 3o and 2y0¢ generally appear as sooé and 2590 In forming their negative participle, which is z305% and ;5a38; only in the ) 6})j€0t: o verb), medieval and modern dialect also 38 and wdXd occasionally occur. tfor 10y (Cf. §§ 184. 210.) infnitive In repetition (see § 165, letter b, and cf. §§ 209. 211) the first verb drops the suffix g3, e. 9. W@ WRA. (Cf. §§ 211, 4 339.) out to 18 f t0 AV 171 It becomes evident from the formation of the so-called negative plicatio? (¢ participle given in § 170 that its primitive meaning was not that of direct )t havip negation, but that of futurity, ¢.e. the state of being yet to come or of i gpendy once having been yet to come, or, in other words, the state of not being ous 4 d or of not having been. 978 is @iy, the remote demonstrative pronoun | modery (¢f. the @ and 3o of § 169, and the eng, etc. of § 173), in combination The form with o, the particle of emphasis (¢f. § 215, 6, remark I). under consideration, therefore, is so to say a pronominal noun, and ¢ of BTt PAL the first meaning of the above-mentioned w5 @ or vod is ‘yet to be o) of or stay-even-it’, ‘not yet being or staying-even-it’, or ¢the state or condi- /%} Wy tion of not actually being or staying’, ¢not actually being or staying’, ) 14% e e 108 Jdmd or, according to circumstances, ‘not having actually been or stayed’. RV (of Thus also e. 9. 50383, ‘yet to make-even-it’, ‘having been yet to make- F00I3 /3l }) even-it’: ¢not actually making’, ‘not actually having made’. Before 172 In § 154 it has been stated that the second form of the Kannada b . REY ) J@?Jv Noy=Sid verb that has been called a verbal participle or gerund by Europeans, (0] et Tnsta is the present verbal participle (vartamanakriys, vartamanakalakriyé; see From § 362). in the mod It is formed by adding to the verbal theme one of the following ten Furthe suffixes: — e300 (in the ancient and medizval dialect), evd (in the O, used, ancient and medizval one), ewd o (in the ancient one), ewnd, (in the words and ancient one), evsgo (in the medizval one), ewd (in the medieval and 1 from the ] modern one)., evd o (in the medieval and, occasionally, ancient one), the rustie ev8, (in the medieval and modern one), evgo, evsd, (in the modern one). explanatio the place The final ey of a theme disappears (according to the rule of sandhi, IR O § 213 seq.) when any of the terminations is annexed; if a theme ends in B, o, €3, B, O, or &, a euphonic 03¢, or occasionally (in the mediseval remark 1. I repg dialect) &%, is put between the vowel and termination; after &, to love, the insertion of 3¢ is always required. M aduced i Instances are «C33vo (of @e3¥), weeping, Ro32Zy,0 0r RT3y 0 0 be anot) (of Rox’; ¢f. § 215, 7, ¢), doing, FoBo0 (of OF°), saying, sno0 (of 8rv), laughing, S0e@o300 (0of JWeRy), seeing, wLPWIs0 (of 6L, descending, (Salemayli gously. ¢ 330300850 (of ¥3), calling, zacwdic (of w9), guarding, &adwio (of &), may be fo giving, Becseagoo (of e3¢), burning;— ==d (of @Ry), throwing, g8 (of o), saying, weIwo3d (of weIwf), becoming weary;— 53280 Thege Yerhal ny (of TR), fighting, 0300300 (of wR), threatening ;— $35 3, (of %539), tiO[] Qf th quivering ;— oF0Zo (of 27°), FRFZo (of FN$);— w53 (of gys or B90), OF3 (of 27°), 808 (of W), IWREZ (of TeRd), [HBN3 oung (§- Pronoyy g (of SoB);— wvead o (of evEt) b g0 (of wT¥), T8 0 (of Tom*);— Which wil) 6308, (of wess or &), O3, (of F), ¥Ry 3, (of WRY,), S@g, (of fOT 10§ uan SRREY), @303, (of 83), WeaSwg, (of zfie), Rweosng, (of R0¢) ;— TR, 18 lll ldeg (of Fe%), %@%5@_0 (of %J@%fig)), Xeerazy, (of Beeny), BweBodwss, (of Tt RRR);— FOY3 (of FT), JBJY3 (of 5@), fiooig:% (of Booxf); &3, (of e g &), w3, (of &); Soo¥IZo (of S00¥), RIJYZo (0of BR); 00303 (of 20035, =~ QO T Wjunt;, 2838 (of 28), R0J3 (of Bd), FIYS (of 3), 333 (of €23, it 3333 (of F3), &JI3 (of B); WIZ,0 (of w¥); #oofio%go (of Roo3s¥), andlno } ] 109 e stayed, SiY3, (of 8a8), WS, (of ws). (The Basavapurana has once, 22, 29, 0 make- TR, treating the final e as radical). Before the euphonic ¢ the vowel .y of the theme may be dropped, e. 9. SBJZo (of 3B), woP3o (of wd); FBJYS (of 38), 3nY3 (of 3R), (annada ropeans, D003 (of FB), BRFYS (of BRY). Cf. § 151, letters a, ¢« and b, 2; ete Instances regarding the present verbal participle see in § 362. 1y8; see From 3% exceptionally Bne3, a contraction of 30R%03, is formed g fen in the modern dialect. (in th 1 the Further, in the modern dialect there are the puzzling forms esgd, and (10 he 23, used, like the past participles 9_95% and 93533 (§ 155), to introduce words and sentences (see § 332). They are likely to be forms corrupted oval and from the present participles z038 or ©303, B8 Or IRF,, saying (¢f. b o0ne), - modern the rustic form of the present tense in § 196, remark 3, and also the e [ - 9, and o, which may take explanation of &g, ibid., remark 4). the place of wwx and o3, would be equal to wzose or w3y, and [ sandhi, QRS Or osa’oéjg Another explanation will be offered in § 198, 7, ¢ ends in remark 1. nedizral to love, In repetition the evgs, of the first verb may be dropped (see § 339, 6). 178 Considering the origin of the suffixes of the present participle adduced in §172 we take evso to be their primitive form. e3> is known Wi Vo 3 ) to be another form of ez, the intermediate demonstrative pronoun neuter (Oi mm), (Sabdmanidarpana siitra 148 § 122; § 272, 2), from which evy, analo- scending, gously to the formation of e3y, from @ and w3y from KX, eV, may be formed. 14 N - These pronominal suffixes evsd and evsy, we believe to be attached to MR verbal nouns to form the present participle correspondingly to the forma- o 33 tion of the past one which suffixes the pronouns %o and 3, to verbal fg¢ 0 nouns (§ 169) and to the present-past negative one which suffixes the &0 S < ? o pronoun &% (7. e. @l 4-the emphatic ) to the short infinitive (§ 171) (L 3} S which will finally prove to be also a verbal noun (§ 188). Let us take, 3 Lo o =, =l for instance, the verbal noun &3>, reading; when to this ev3s or eudy o o a8 < (Y s 1s added, it would have the form of %%@o3y or %zo3y, and mean ‘a i % (ot reading-this’. (Cf. the bhavavadanas or verbal nouns of §§ 198. 200). It 1s the 7 ; i) (of The final ewo in w80, eudy o is still to be explained. pers ) conjunction ewo, further, denoting progression or continuity, which o WO w) conveys the specific idea of the present participle, as 83350 or %B939,0, (ot % )0 Wil standing before a conjugated verb, e. g. before ‘he was’ (aBFo, literally ) e 110 e ¢a reading-this-further’ he was), expresses that the reading was a 3, by info 9, €. | progressing or continuing action. The final conjunction ev9o has the g Y same meaning. i The final o in w03, wo3d, (put to ewdy and ovdy like the o of &7 M’JQ W o, in § 171) is emphatical, the idea of the evo or o disappearing (of. Regardi § 196, remark 3)". Inthe final e of «v3, w03, the sonnd bas been dropped, 176.1 T or perhaps o stands for o (¢f. e. g. the past participles before the & P Ml § I Zo or 3, of which the o of the verbal themes becomes s, § 157), and il Sl <> X S S Pl in evze, wvsy, the © has then been changed into es for the sake of A & rlv Y b (§ euphony. 1> = — sl The use of the intermediate pronouns (evg), wvdy) may denote that =1 = Pe o3 S o = the action is neither past nor future. being used 174, There are two forms of the Kannada verb that bave been called relative participles. This name has been given to them by Iuropeanss dative sing explanatior because they regarded them as including the relative pronouns within themselves. But the Kannada language bas no relative pronouns o, appe forms gy whatever; its pronouns &3 (09e=), FIYRY (CPVIVWY), Yo (WIRTY), sill in gy 95350 (0309RH), D (V) are not relative, but interrogative (§ 102, 8, dialect e letter b, remark), and the relative pronouns’ place is somehow supplied Nenter sing by the so-called relative participles. (Cf. §267 regarding the interro- gatives.) Dreterite ¢ The first is the preterite or past relative participle (bhiitavatikrit, 3 (§ 193) o (= §§ 175-179), the second comprises the present and future relative participles (bhavishyantikrit, §§ 180-186) which have the same form. §)\\ 183, f | 175 The past relative participle (bhiitavatikrit) is formed Ll 1, by removing the final ev of the past participle (§§ 155-164) or tmbingti LO\) changing it into &, e.g. pey (of Q ), % (of &), BeSBF or OZGF an ) (of BRToF, BTBIF), WATF OF WAG F (of 2RTBoF, wREIF), RLEHF or thingss efe fl@e%%- (of RAwewor, 7-3@@53%%—‘), 393 (of 39c)), To, (of To), ol o, 3 (of B03o3), S0¥3 (of ZI), s, (of ¥y, Rew, (of Fewy,), V3 (of mt‘amd;, SEBR), TRT (of FRR), wg (of wiy), 88, 33, Re, w0EY, FeY, BWeY, w&éu\:j y N Purthg, i [ SR %Jaégj, z'cégj, BaF or ag, 8%, 2wT,; ¢f. § 189; 185, 193, 2, by adding 3 to the short past participle ending in . (§§ 166-168), Either the e.g. 99,0 (of ©9)), wh o (of &), BB, BT, %oégjcfi, 3390%63355, w3, The to ToBT, SPAR, BeFd, WIDAR, 0aNAE; ¢f. § 189 e by, 29 1) The o might, however, in this case, be merely formative like the » in IZ3, A®3, Fes, v g iy g =08 and other nouns. —— — 111 was 4 3, by changing the final > of the negative participle (§§ 170. 171) has the into e, e. g. 93% (of w8d), wws (of vyd), vur (of WY 3), Woud, B3, wds, 333, s, 3d6, 3edd, SPAG, LARYEE, VPG, UN:T eGP O30T, TORIE, ws;%zs, DR, ITT. g (¢f, \ Regarding the meaning see § 179 and regarding the use § 363. dropped, fore the 176. The formation of the past relative participle of emy, Fperiy, 157), and owen is irregular, for, instead of sAR, Jpens, JReNT, they have &g, wpes, wes, formed from the irregular past participles esosss, $3peoss, o sake of Bpeo3* (§ 166) by means of syncope, the original forms being SIS note that RPEO3) , BRI, 5 occasionally takes also the forms oz (§ 292), or &3co or o (§293, Tamil = &3, Télugu ©odwg, the consonants ¢, =° on called being used for ¢, ¢f. the remark concerning ¢, s¢ and o in § 141 under LrOpeans dative singular) and probably also that of &g too (sée § 278, 2, the explanation of ©3; ¢f. § 212, remark 2). The original form of e, viz. 1 withio 603%, appears still as 503, and, by syncope, as ez, in the old rustic pronouns forms efio:b‘ga", etc. and ez, etc., used for the third person present W?fiéJ)a still in the modern dialect (§ 196, ¢f. ©dexy, § 195). In the same (§ 102, 8, dialect there is also the old rustic form 03y, used for the third person supplied neuter singular of the present tense (as to form originally of the past or o interto- preterite tense) which is eso3ss (the irregular past participle, § 166) and 3o (§ 193) in combination with the o of emphasis. Regarding the form qvatikety 0933 1N ¥y (= ury) see also the @R in § 212, remark 2, the vz oz b} participles §§ 183, 7, remark; § 184, the &350 in § 203, and the Qfl-‘é’% in § 205. 3 177. The grammarian KéSava calls the past relative participle in 5-104) o4) or combination with any one of the terminations eo (%), he, e%¢ she, sz, )L gwt’j; it, and their plurals egos, they (men or women), v, they (children, N ) norgF 01 things, etc., see e. g. § 254) a $RIBITyz® or Ty ont (§ 68, 1), also a5d )\ aéfi@ofi, &’)5e§a§@e§®or§ (§ 102, 8, e), €. 9. &0 (of DRT), TORTYS. b TIRRT, [IRTBT®, HolRBIR, the genitive singular, for instance, becoming 02373 0 DIRDR, TORTY, HIRGGLY, and the genitive plural TBET, TRTUTEI. Jm Ty Further instances are ¥ o (of v ), 2.9 Bo, yue3 Go. (Cf. e.g. §§ 180. 185. 193. 198 under 3. 254.) [Observe that bhutavatikrit may mean either the past relative participle or the noun formed from it.] 3 wBd The terminations o and e¢° appear also as 2o and %¥$; we find ,,fi ) e.g. AR 0 (in a S4sana of 707 A. D.), #8300 (in a Sasana of 866 A. D. Nfi, and in one of 887 A. D.), and Qg\@jg‘%%fi, @@8@@5 (in a Sasana of about — — 112 of the havr 718 A. D.). For ey there occurs also 2,0, as there is e. g. twice been’, Gl 03/, 3 (in a Sdsana between 597 and 608 A. D.); for the plural o we have also g,o‘ according to § 185, q. v. 3&50 (( Instead of the above-mentioned terminations which, except the pronouns who has sung - ouz3s and ey, are pronominal forms, also demonstrative pronouns sang’y i ¢ A themselves are very frequently used in the mediseval dialect; in the g child of modern one only pronouns are in use. Two additional pronominal forms 88 T, of the medizval dialect are e9gs and @ (for o), has played 0 smeared witt The demonstrative pronouns used for krillingas in the medieval or smeared dialect are @50, ¥SF, ©3, 9o, W3R, ¥, VI, ¥IH, VT, NWEY, being proper ©3Ry, WRTF, B30y, sy, &y, and those in the modern one &=y, ¥, man of the 3%, 53, ¥R, ¥B, ¥y, B, wY (see §§ 117. 119. 121. 1322, 134. 136). =30 and 52 are met with as suffixes for krillingas also in the M %o (zmg ancient dialect. aten’, i, o, See § 254. 3 field of { But not only pronominal forms and pronouns are suffixed to the cultivate, or past relative participles, but nearly every declinable hase (see § 67 seq.) nobody culti is used after them, e. 9. w&E Fpo, TpAB FRTNA, ToL, SR 3083 i 6. an affa Yo', T, T9B, ?éyao;ig WP, & JIY, SRR TOHRF, VO T TIOWF, TRB Regardi See § 282 regarding declinable and other adverbs afii, SNRG THONE. télative pag used after them, and § 363 the translation of the above instances. Further instances see in § 254. Késava terms the instances in which a relative past participle is followed In the ¢ by a declinable base (noan), consecutive compounds (gamakasamésa see § 253, § 181, note. having eqgk 2, d and cf. § 185). 0, e, 30 178. The author of the present grammar considers the past relative them WhO giv participle to be the genitive singular of the so-called past participle formed by means of the pronominal suffixes &0 and 25 (§ 169), in which 180, 1 case es, the primitive termination of the genitive (§ 141), would have that are i been employed without the usual augment € (§ 124). fron the ¢ With regard to ez8 (§ 171) it is to be remarked that o, the particle Regarding of emphasis, was removed in order to form the genitive ending in es, viz. lnstape ]! (@c’;o+&5). o Compare the explanation of the relative present-future participle in § 185 L s 179 Now turning back to § 175 seq. we translate e. g. Tpe bl 35 (Fpe3 + ©) ¢of the having promised’, °3§> <of the having said’, ®=ogF e gy 0 <of the having closely united’, ze%?_&cj ‘of the having feared’, 2pew NiwW ) QR i | ——— 113 i fwice . ‘of the having gone’ ) 2o ‘of the not being’ or ¢of the not having | been’, 5023 ¢of the not fearing’ or ¢of the not having feared’. DoRTBo (FIRE+ wo) means ‘a man of the having sung’, 4. e. 2 man 0uns who has sung or sang; mPR3%* (JeRE+©%°), ‘a woman of the having Dnouns sung’, 4. e. a woman who has sung or sang; [eRBIR (3[BT + ), 0 the “a child of the having sung’, ¢. e. a child which has sung or sang; forms $RT Bpwo, ‘a place of the having played’, 7. e. a place where (somebody) has played or played; ©pA% gx,oamo, ‘a colour of ashes of the having lieval smeared with’, ¢. e. a colour of ashes with which (somebody) has smeared N, or smeared (e. g. the body); VO To (VY B+©o), ‘A man of the not 09 W 0y being proper’, 4. e. a man who is not proper; B B0 (DY T+ ¥o), ‘2 man of the (something) not being’, 4. e. a man who lacks (something) ; n the msgecso (&me;a@mr o), ‘a man of the not eating’ or ¢of the not having eaten’, 4. e. a man who does not eat or has not eaten; IBZ Fox, 0 the ¢a field of the not cultivating’, ¢. e. a field which (anybody) does not b cultivate, or has not cultivated, or did not cultivate, 7. e. a field which nobody cultivates, etc.; #nd so0dero ‘an affair of the not being possible’, 0! ; ¢. e. an affair which is impossible. % (] o Regarding the use of the present time in translating the so-called verhs 1Ces relative past participle see §§ 169. 170. Note. owed In the modern dialect a change of ®3 into % is occasionally met with (c¢/. § 181, note a), e. g. ©BR stands for VU T (VY + TP, ‘a woman of the 993, having cooked’, i. e. a woman who has eooked ; T0B2 R (i. e, T J0R) Twiln ¢ 0.8 of (i. e. FRYTN) Focl DIPII W =’ they say ¢there (is) much more gain for ative them who give than for them who take . ciple ek 180. The p;esent and future relative participles (bhavishyantikrit, § 174) NE that are identical as to shape and receive their respective meaning only from the context, are formed by means of the suffixes &3, 20, g and &. ticle Regarding their meaning see §§ 185. 186. See § 364. U Instances of the present-future relative participle formed by means of 53 H] L such as regard verbal themes ending in consonants in which the j ',,M 144 suffix is added directly to the theme, in the ancient and medizval dialect, g W are &% (of ww), woed, (of wued), S (of wwe), %@%, 23983, 68, N 0 B« noye, fee, Aofvesal@lisae), Hl 15 — 114 PENE 81, In§ mmg, g3 (of o), FISF, VEIF. Cf. § 183, 2. 4. 10; about themes with final ¢%¢ see § 183, s. pa.rticiple wit Themes ending in ¢ optionally double the = by ¢ ) e.g. efie)zfj?, ialect; et U AL &msj, 3@%%‘, \%;’)oisjr, ?.'3;@5@%? See § 371, 3. 1, That Remark. themes with About ® for @3, see § 163, remark. formation Wt Tnstances 2 9 such as regard monosyllabic verbal themes that end in a vowel or 953 (of enr are a vowel, in which the suffix is added directly to the theme, in the AReRis, W ancient and medizval dialect, are 5953 (of T9), DI, 23053, 53005, RWE, Instance &3, b, 0N, B [ngtance %3 ocears only in the medieval dialect, the ancient form being %3 (see 183, 6); instead of T the medieval dialect has also IPF. i 01 ) d\ = 3, such as regard verbal themes that also in the ancient dialect end in gm0 & = e, in which the suffix is added directly to the theme, in the three dialects, g, The are RS (of Yu@y), FOBT (of ToRy), VBT, 28,3, BN, 3RS, themes to has heen a TRRIS, P93, 50022{3:;3, DRI, SPERIT, SR, WeRIT, SR, forth)’ L) 30069053, IICNT, [N, VEEWT, IPENT, VeRIT, VRIRS, PORI. PN See No. 6 and § 183, 2. 4. 7. 8. WV (of 4, such as regard verbal themes ending in @ or » in which the suffix is added directly to the theme, in the ancient and medieval dialect, are 3, T of of ag otPS (of L), BEP, BePs, IAD, 398, JBT, VOT; HBI (of ) 282), RS, TR, RB, B, A (of o) WY (of 9, such as regard verbal themes with final » which drop this vowel before the suffix, in the mediwval dialect and occasionally also in the 0 | ancient one, are ©@3 (of »@), @33 (of ©3), w3 (of ©¥), T, I, and the g WS, IRS, TEIS, SRYS, BES, BRIS, BRIZ; 33 (of I3, 1n a T ( flm% 3. Sasana of 1019 A. D.). Cf.§ 157. firs pors, 6, such as regard verbal themes that may change their final €95 into b | e=¢ before the suffix, in the medizeval dialect, are R3¢ (of NeC = nestdo) / the vy, BRIF, WO, BRIF, TIRF, Do, VeSF, SwsF. Cf. No.s and § 183, 2. = )Y ( Remark. Pers, ply W3 gy The present participle of the verb 0¥° is anomalously formed, it being not 0 @¥, but &u¥ in the three dialects. Cf. § 243, B, 205 § 194, remark 1. inasg e 115 i themes 181 In § 180 we have found only one form of the present-future participle with 3 in the modern dialect, viz. that of No. 8, in which the suffix is added directly to themes that end in ev also in the ancient Y -}gj dialect; let us now give the other forms:— L That of No. 1 in § 180 it forms by attaching a euphonic ev to the themes with final consonants (¢f. §§ 48. 166) and then suffixing the 3, a formation which occasionally occurs also in the medieval dialect. Instances belonging to both dialects are ¢33 (of 8% =o%¢), wono vel or 9053 (of ool = eurlelF), VTR, VENT, TN, FEHT, LRI, ) the RPERIS, WL, ALHIT, ReCIT, SHLIVIT, JNTIT. 9 0= XY Instances belonging to the medieval one alone are @¥oTE, BT, FRIT, BRFID, DECAT, BIIT, VPNCII. (see Instances belonging to the modern one alone are wToz, evea 3, DTIT OF IRYT, TV, FROTNT Or TRWode S, TP 3, %@%s, 3003, d in 3R or 3Ry, wBIE, VLT, FPWNT, TRHWod 3. (Cf. § 182)) 601, 2, That of No. 2 in § 180 it forms from originally monosyllabic 03, themes to which a euphonic ey (by means of o35¢ as a help to enunciation) %y has been added, suffixing the & to the e, e.g. 03053 (of 803w, to bring i forth), samx (of F9030), Recdws (of Readw), Recdnz (of Jeasw), SPec (of Bwecdn), Weadws (of Wecdw), DT (of D), Boe fiix 00033 (of Bogazw). 3, Mo That of No. 4 in § 180 it forms by adding a euphonic ev (by means of o3¢ as a help to enunciation) and then suffixing the =3, e. g. ©€2°030053 (of (of ee2°), 39030053 (of 39), RoARNT, DT ; FBWNS (of @), TR 030033 (of 3E22), FBWN, VBT, rel Notes. he a) In the medizeval and modern dialect the final @V of the verbal theme ) and the suffix = are pretty often changed into 2 or %, €. g. YRR (= VB), NWRER (= BTIPT), WwACR, 3890, JPrie'e (BHRN) ; YRRE (= BTOT), NRBWE, Fo0h0¢, FeodRt, BN, Verne, WRONE, JBolwe. (CF. §§ 179, note; 202, 205, 3, first pers. plural.) 0 b) In the medi@val and oceasionally in the modern dialect the final @V of the verbal theme and the suffix 3 may be changed into enp, e. g. BOR (= BOY), DBRR (= NBMIT), TIVR (= VIWT), W3R, (= WBT). (Cf. §§ 202. 205, 3, first pers. plural.) = @3> BRI m%ido (that is found in the modern dialect) may be W3HR BRENVI s—oa%édo. ©) Some vulgar forms in which the participle ends in es, that are found in a South-Mahratta school-book, e. g. F¢¥ (in T¥ID), INB (in IPBI) 15% 116 gzF 18 and 8XF, (in ST ID), are to be explained by the change of the % of No. @ Ul medieval on into ®, so that #¢¥, 393 and 5303%’_3& stand for TeBdR, SNBR and .;ioo%ra% (FeBRT, ete.). (¢f. the remark in § 187, under 2). Cf. § 211, 5. b, ¢ in the med 182, The second suffix for the present-future participle is 2y, which e is added to four of the monosyllabic themes that end in m* (nanta) and are Svi‘\w‘v'u 9 Ao\~ €9 to four of them that end in & (nanta), wviz. voeg, (of evsF), T 2) 2t (of zow’), SPRED, (of Fpw), TV (of Ssowf); S0 (of 23, 88, TR, 239, Gf. § 183, s. oy, 3 0 appea enue. becomes also euso in the medieval dialect, and always so in themes with the modern one; 389, becomes w30, in the modern one; oz, and 38 appear also as O3, and 33y, in the ancient dialect, and always so in 4 Int ¢ ((lakira) the medizeval and modern one; the ancient 233823 gets also the form e 09 W ) v of wasfié. (of dialéct. 3 The present-future participle of the themes Zwgs and [exs the author of the present grammar has not yet met with. Regarding the (f B \ 4 3 other modern form of the participle of euvm®, Fom’, ox° and 3g° R e e see § 181, 1. Ay ® b The present-future participle of 3% (Fwy, %5’.@%330)) which in the 1 fl ancient dialect is S¥0¥ (180, 1) appears therein also as %’J@sfigb, 18 '@N (0 frequently 3wo, in the mediseval dialect, and occurs in this form also 61 I[] in the modern one. Its other modern form is %J,)e;\%);j (181 0, 183 It In The third suffix for the present-future participle is g. 18 nsed ;- i, o, 1, In some themes ending in o¢ (vépha), viz. azmF (of wof), 3=F (ot b@@fif\d) (of 38v°), waF (of wof), BRwF (of Twos), AwexrF (of Rweos), and Sexr Wil ( t p— Participia] (of Recf) of the ancient dialect (¢f. No. 10 of this paragraph). The oJ 00C8 gpg; may be doubled by a ¢ after the of, e.g. 0, 3?{5\)?, Cf. No. 10, doubleg, and see § 371, s. ALl the In the medieval dialect azr, dxF, wxr and TwIF generally Uz, 5 appear as @z, ¥, W, and 3R (for TRT). Cf.§184. Regarding the modern dialect see § 181, 1. 2, In some themes ending in &9 (rakdra) with a preceding long vowel, viz. wF (of ©€%), 3eexr (of 30e29¢), Tewmr (of maceF), and or ¥R (S§ (stitrag 49" Sz (of S339C39) of the ancient dialect. ene and 3wezF are found also 1n the mediseval one. The - o2 Gan S“bsta may be doubled, e. g. OTF, QT faleg, (see § 371, 3). Thll‘d pers( — 117 — f No e oJ is esz in the modern dialect, and not unfrequently also in the @”M mediseval one 5359095, Tt%, etc. occasionally form their participle by means of &3 When which in the medieval dialect, e. g. To=F, JO=F (see § 180, 6) 3J\QvJ Slew e b Ewyl etc. are used with the final oy, their participles ) and are 3WeENT, TGN, =N, ete. in the three dialects (see § 180, 3) E ¥ 3 In themes ending in % (lakara according to Késava), wviz Ni @fiw 308, of the ancient dialect. The present-future participle of §0 10 %ew€ appears twice as %o@u in the Sabdanusisana. The use of & 10 d VN, ) themes with final ¢35 was perha,ps to some extent optional See § 180, 1 4, §0 10 In themes ending in c9s (lakira) when it is a substitute (3désa) of form ¢ (dakara), viz. gwety (of Rwery), WRLY, (of WREY), WRLY, (of Bn@y) m@@& (Of Jatéa) of the ancient Beed, (of Berdy), Sy, (of Sweav), ' the dialect fimw e3¢ °eI, and S5ed occur also in the medieval one. y the Cf. § 234. oy O ey SRR, VWRIRY, ete. form their participle also by means of 3, viz BRI, VRVBY, ete. in the three dialects S 1800 ) the 5, In four themes ending in 3¢ (nakara, ¢f. § 182), vie. 83 (of @) 1§ \ B (of &%), "R, AR of the ancient dialect also 6, In the themes & and &p, viz. Wz (¢f. § 180, 2), TpT - { 5 In themes with final 7> (ganta), in which case the 71> suffers elision It (10pa, ¢f. § 165, b, 35 211, 7.10), viz. zax (of zary), 30 (of 3wn), Tpes (of Jperty), 3wz (of 3evdrmy), Bn (of WHMY), QoRoT (of QUTITY), g SEDTD (Of DLIMS), DRT (Of DaRonY) of the ancient dialect These 07F 1Y participial forms are occasionally found likewise in the mediseval one b & £ oJ of the themes with a short initial may be once weD for Bpexd. The 10 doubled, e. 9. 3R¥T 5. (see § 371, 3) Cf. sx9.of in the remark All themes ending in 7o form their participle also by means of 3, e. g ally BN, SonusS, 3R¥NL, ete. in the three dialects (¢f. § 180, 3) the Remark BN The present-future participle of @10 (i. e. ¥TWT) often appears as & 9 g or ¥ (§§ 176. 184) in the ancient and medieval dialect The Sabdanusasana nd (satras 496. 502) teaches that its participle becomes also @ (or &T); we nd can substantiate its statement only by one instance which belongs to the ancient ¢ dialect, v2z. by ¥ 0° (for ¥R T, in a Sasana between 680 and 696 A. D.), the ) third person plural of the future of @7 (see § 201, 1) The occasionally used — 118 PR &% in § 184 might be adduced also in support of the Sabdinushsana’s 3. of. the tem &3 (of ®®¢) appears in the paragraph under No. 1. about thems 8, In themes that have been formed by means of the suffixes @=) 185, Th or = (sinta) whether they be causative, transitive or intransitive (§§ 148, so-called pre 151), in which case the final <o suffers elision, Kanpada instances are nouns, an €. the so-calle BodFs (of wnRidFRY), @7}\@33 (of efirfi\e‘.’)xo), won (of ¥z, 20T (of 52R0), wND (of PN, 2T, VPR, VW, T (of FRY), FJT, There ate n 09 303, 300TA, més SBWT b R T, o VA oJ , 008, SRR, R and oy instances of themes formed from Samskrita are ©ofez0 (of @ohemm), the genitive The circams VITPOD, Qj?aoé\s BWOT, NBWT, NEADD, NI, 0 ) W35 ES@F&J), < O The future part 2O, TODOT o) Teem, B3R (of BER), OT ov o o HomtiEy s instances are found in the ancient and mediseval dialect. The - o 10 valid ohi may be A num} . doubled, e. g. o33, 303, WO, ADILSY ) BT, YR (see § 371, 3). fiflal 8 W0 All themes with final a5y and s form their participle also by means (knowing, ¢ of I (§ 180, 3), e. 9. VORI, VEPRT, IR0, VRAST, SI0R03, in the (stabbing) three dialects. DY =00 TWh 9, In the themes eo53) and 3g3), these changing their final e into before 3, viz. ¥dT, 3D (Sabdanuéasana, sitras 473. 480. 513). This ¥, 208, rule is not in the Sabdamanidarpana, in which the verb e does not m‘@r Wou What t occur at all. wdT, 3% would, according to No. s, be regular forms of participle BT, SOV, 10, fmd Vfié}z&]i Optionally in eleven of the themes ending in ©f (¢f. No. 1 of this base (see § paragraph), viz. v@zr (of vdof), wans (of vdof), NWOTF, PVADF, ) - T oY £, BRBIF, oV A oy F, PEDF, VOTF, BEDF, enr (Sabdinusisana Datticiple | klji“iflga (t stitra 511) in the ancient dialect. wZz+ appears in the Jaimini bharata. \ The Pro The o may be doubled after the of, e. g. ¥Bz 7, wwds F (§ 371, 3). Their usual forms with I are @BSF or ¥BES.F are he gy 9 WRFF or @a;é'r—, base iy ygq ' DSE or m@%g etc. (§ 180, 1; § 371, 3). 1 formeg 18 x 184. The fourth suffix of the present-future participle iverh g Originally it may have had the form of & too, as it first appears as a The i substitute of & in ST (of &), BT, (ofwfaoe), 85 (of 8o), wx, (of thug We f wTf, see § 183, 1.7, remark). ez (or vz, see § 189) optionally appears as e In the ancient and medieval dialect (¢f. § 223). @3 (for 2%), 778 A‘ D.“ 338 (for ), VT (for 2055 occur only in the medizval one, in which (g §35a1] there are likewise eSe&® (for Beey,) and ope® (for Zpew, BReR). 18 1 The medizeval dialect occasionally shows the forms es&® (for o3, @, . § 17 — | P— s o3, ¢f. the remark about &z in § 183, 7) and e® (for w3 or a wezr; about theme 2390° see §§ 52. 170. 210). § AR an 185 The simplest and, as it would appear, true explanation of the \ 148 so-called present-future participle is to take it to be the genitive of verbal 65 are nouns, an explanation which is analogous to that given in § 178 regarding the so-called past participle (see also § 169) and well suits to its use. i There are numerous verbal nouns in Kannada formed by suffixing ), 53 o — % and o to verbal themes (see § 243); such nouns allow the formation of the genitive singular by means of its primitive termination ¢ (§ 141, 1). @Zd) Z &0 The circumstance that many of the verbal nouns used to form the present- future participle do not exist nowadays apart from that use, constitutes 1 h no valid objection to the offered explanation. 3 be A number of verbal nouns ending in 3) of which the genitive with 11,3) final e would exactly form the present-future participle, are 5e5°:) means (knowing, genitive Wl ), VP (perishing, genitive VP D), B’ 1 the (stabbing), eveoJ) (remaining), 23y (begging), wosy (being pleased), %5'23;@, EQ&Q@ éef?;?), é@‘f}@, 593;\3)7 ;3@0@7 Fgfifi\), ;36@) }3.@@@, 555\)@, e nt0 B This ), B[, [V, 30¢), Ao, BB, BAR); SRFT, LN, SReYF, moozgys would be such as end in ). See § 243, 4, 18 a. 24. 5 108 What the grammarian KéSava states regarding the past relative ms Of participle that in combination with suffixes it forms a krit or krillinga and vacyalinga or viséshyadbinalinga, in other words a declinable verbal f this base (see § 177. 200), he does state likewise regarding the present-future )0 Fl participle in combination with suffixes, it forming the bhavishyantikrit or Heand krillinga (¢f. § 174 and see § 177). rata, The pronominal forms and pronouns mentioned in § 177 (¢f. 193. 200) are the suffixes also for this participle, and besides nearly every declinable Baf, base is used after it. If it is followed by a noun, a consecutive compound 18 formed (¢f. § 177 and see § 253, 2, d). About its combination with adverbs see § 282. See further §§ 254. 282. 298, 5. 316, 1. (330). 364, 5 ® 48 4 The suffixes ©o and ©¢5 appear, as in § 177, also as 2o and 2¥*; (of thus we find 263°3p0, TSR 0, 38R, 0 (in a Sdsana between 680 and 696 pears A. D)), d&Jpo (in a Sasana of 707 A. D.), and @&%ef (in one of about 778 A. D.). The plural esg¢ has also the form of 2,0¢ in 9_9;33'3306, eme,?.%ot? ’3%)» phich (in a Sasana between 750 and 814 A. D.). 186. The primitive meaning of the so-called present-future participle 1) 9 (¢f. § 179), if derived from the genitive singular of verbal nouns, will e P— 120 . 08, B appear from the following instances, viz. &°s30 (d&fi95+ 90), he or a man of knowing (either now or in future), ¢. e. he who knows or will e (0 know; eCPPef (882°S 4 wee), she or a woman of knowi ng. 7. e. she who to}] When knows or will know; e€®Jny ($€2°=4 evrd), it or a child, etc. of 98 10 3 ¢ knowing, ¢.e. it which knows or will know; ©€2°Zof (we2°ss 4+ eof), they § 215,5, I or people (male or female) of knowing, é. e. they who know or will know; in the thre WEPIY (BCPT + wvay), they or children, ete. of knowing, é. e. they which e (Of 5 know or will know; ¥33=n® ©29°3o, he of knowing Kannada, i.e. he (or one) who knows Kannada; ez shof, grass of eating, ¢. e. grass Infinitiy which (an animal) eats or will eat; 395 Jewf, water of clearing, <. e. 1n 4 vowel, water that becomes clear or will become clear; 38¥s ¥8FTo, an ear- (of Sae), ornament of shining, ¢.e. an ear-ornament which shines or will shine; (. § 215 3wemr ww,0o, a letter of appearing, ¢.e. a letter which appears or will Some 1 <) appear. kalpa) the In the above instances actually existing nouns appear the genitive O of which presents the participle; in the now following instances nouus four theme before it, are to be assumed to exist: — m%o (of an ev$,53), he of being (or having); ema;e;s, she of being (or having); emgfii)cm, it of being (or having); FISs* theme & w0% o, riches of being he, 4. e. he who has riches; %0 T, (of an 9_95\33 (. § 215 ) =30, an animal of being young, . e. an animal which is young; 9 Nagav: b (of & HIBITY) 335333, a black bee of humming, 4. e. a black bee which g gy hums or will hum; 2xF (of a wHF) sowo, time of coming, ¢. e. time (f.§ 210, which comes; S@ox3 (of a 3BITY) 903Fo, a business of making, 4. e. In the a business which (somebody) makes or will make; @ex0s3 (of a 0eRIY)) ! e § 315 w3930 To, a chowrie of waving, ¢. e. a chowrie which (somebody) waves or 0, 4 forg will wave; 5009 o° (of a ADVVARR they of making, 4. e. they who make or ST @UQK@J) f will make; ZweryZ=Ty (of & BRERTY), he of going, ¢. e. he who goes or will go; ZweroS=H, she of going, ¢. e. she who goes or will go; Bwenos I the Jog v a g @, it of going, ¢. e. it which goes or will go. D). 187. What Europeans call the infinitive of a‘ verb Kannada gram- In the marians call 3 o3sgF, <. e. the meaning of a verb, and then the object, infillitive W purpose or scope of (a verb’s) action, 85033@?50%@@%3?5. Regarding the explanation of the infinitive see § 188. There are four kinds of the infinitive, viz. th‘e infinin‘, 1, The first infinitive is formed by suffixing ¢9e5¢ to the verbal theme, I 1@@1} ( 8@ \ in which case, by euphonic junction (§ 213 seq.), a theme’s final en h} e | 5 f«j’-}mfirg disappears, e.g. ®3e* (of B0f), vweaes (of wom), TP (of %), TRV, D'&t.), — PSSR 121 16 0L 3 FRFF, Ruer, 3TeF, SRF, BECITF, [owr, JpNCIeF, Berdes (of Bery), r will SPB* (of IRy, g ef (of F03y,), VG oReF (of VI DA). 16 Who otey of When the theme ends in = or o, @ may be suffixed immediately, , bhey as in ¥3 ©es (a form that was occasionally used in the ancient dialect, § 215, 5, letter @), but generally an enunciative o3s¢ is used between, in know; which in the three dialects, e. g. ©e*oef (of ©e2?), LPWef, NIRRT, HES e, he Bowf (of 3E53), Bdodoer, StsBcdoer. (f. § 215, 2, letters f. 7. grass Infinitives with ese of monosyllabic themes that are a vowel or end (8 o}l in a vowel, are &o30wf (of &), T00* (of T9), Ze030e¥ (of é’e), 3R e030e* 0 ¢ar- (of 3R¢), Swecdver (of 3we), BecSoer (of Be), JeWowF (of D). shine; Cf. § 215, 2, letters d. g. k. m. 7 il Some monosyllabic themes ending in o3s¢ optionally double (dvitvavi- kalpa) the o3s¢ before ¢ e.g. Jposies or 33;@,0336936 (of Rpo3s?), BP0 nitive ©f Or FRWyos (of FRwF), RS or Redye* (of Ro3se); the odos of the nouns four themes ernvc3s, o, 03¢ and ooy is always doubled (nityadvitva) Ting) before it, viz. en03o.ef, BB eF, WRIef and K03 oS, The dissyllabic J e theme gk optionally doubles its o3, viz. wTohe® or GTRy e, | 9%) £ §.215, 7, ¢ )} ) Q0 Nagavarma (stitra 234) suffixes @wes to the lengthened theme of 3¢ which and of, viz. se0wf, wadef (¢f. o8 under No. 4 of this paragraph). 1me Gf. § 210. ) p i 0 In the modern dialect ee¢ is used only in the so-called passive b ) (see § 315); in all other cases it uses eew, 4. e. ©ef with a euphonic e OF ev, & form that is not unfrequently found in the mediseval one too, e. g. ke or BIR®Y, BTWY, NV, 30WI, TIVAIWY, 2‘5:33\%@)3, and occasionally also 63 0L in the later ancient one, e. g. ®¥9oy, difiw, PONILY, BN, BTV ) (in a sasana of 1123 A. D.), D0eF AL, B (in a Sasana of 1182 5. D). Cf. § 96, remark; see § 121, a. ram In the ancient and medieval dialect a dative is formed from the bj b £0 infinitive with e9e* by means of & (see § 120, letters a. b), e. g. &nd,, y the RS, DeCIS, [IRONS 8_7 sfioi‘ffiofio%, ?éfmwefi_&, @2856&. The dative of the infinitive with e9ex is formed by means of & or @, in the modern dialect (see § 121, letter ¢), e. g. 3g 0% or 38,99, WBOF or WO T,. 10es In the later ancient dialect we meet with the curious forms Pprdws? | ¥ n (;?.3;9716393% , BNes (= Ejfi@%, in a S4sana of 1123 A. D.; see § 121, q, OV ‘[)a.t.). 16 —— 122 P About ®¥&f § 208 is to be compared. 4, The b The way of 2, The second infinitive ends in the vowel es. The grammarian sef and o, Késava states that this e has originated by the elision (lopa) of the final o¢ of eyeye. This statement is only in so far of value, as it makes the same a ialect; oce any rule about the way of suffixing the ¢ unnecessary, because it is remark ). identical with that of esess, This infinitive is used in the three dialects. Instances are &R03) or Tnstance FR®WI, NG or fiojo%, 80, WO, @, [WE, TRER, AN, TBRENR, B0k, G FROI, B0, B3, 0, To03, Se. 6?033; pVE] § 215, 1., In the infinitive formed by ¢ from themes with final » and o a sort of lengthening is allowed in the modern dialect, in which the e The Bas disappears (cf. the accusative and genitive under letter ¢ in § 130), e. g. has g3 (1 5e¢ may be used for meod, wde for 3. The gra An abnormal infinitive of Fnef (FRHy) is Fwe, often used in the it not unfr modern dialect. Cf. 3pe3 in § 172; Hwe in § 206. setl see {§ Remark. 188, M by the folloy The author once entertained the opinion (see Dictionary under © 4) that the infinitive (or verbal noun, see § 188) ending in ©® had a dative in the South- f to eat; Mahratta country, e. g. 3RB% or SRET,, WIF or WOT,, and with the lengthening it the timg of ©, J9@F (for I0@T), 2INT (for 850,F, Nudigattu, page 36). Such neke; 3 dative forms are in common use there; but, instead from the infinitive (or verbal (Somebody noun) with final ®, we now derive them from a verbal noun formed by means 30h, % 4 of the suffix = (for &, see § 243, 4, 20. 27), ¢. e. in the present instances from SRBIS (= SNRBIT), WD, IR B, \%3\)2)\)5, the ¥0S being changed into % and %, lov; o viz. INVH, W3R, INLRRE, 35@)@, and then again into ® and &, viz, SN, WS, WO, whil short fufiy SRe@d, 839, (cf. § 181, note ¢, and see &7 in Dictionary; concerning the change of @ into % see § 117, a, Nom. and Ace.; §§ 177. 185. 193). An instance But. e with % is: JI93) @3@‘3% SRE 9K, Bwees @UE“S{Q@G@ SRE @8, a word (or words) Yomehoy f, is (or are) made for saying, boiled rice is made for eating. ey oftep — 3, The third infinitive is represented by the verbal theme itself, and 169, 173, is occasionally found in the three dialects. It always immediately That g i g Verhy] precedes a verb, ©es° DR (:@6&9030 zbc%o), BeP TR, (=B \grie\'ing1 | ©903, ), BEPRY RO (=9ePR BWoTv), T8 FIR (=TFB-), I Tty BR0T (=TBW-), TR WA (= TROK-), 89 KL (= 3SFW0-), SRM TIT thl‘agh, etC. (=30r-), 37 B (=33c%0-), IR e (=330%-), SI1R (=xTH td ¢t 38), R IRy (=TT0N-), A3 W (=3BR-). e (s RSN — 123 The fourth infinitive consists of the theme with the suffix . 4, marian The way of annexing the « to verbal themes is identical with that of of the ey and es, This infinitive of which the meaning and use is nearly ) makes the same as that of No. 1, belongs to the ancient and medieval s 1t 1 dialect; occasionally it is found also in modern poetry (§§ 365. 366, remark a). nnt WJO Instances are oF, 3RS, TNV, M, 38, w3, JoG, Beesd; FLod or AT %Jaoioqs, opOdy or 33;@0336; @008y or ©308y; emo&)é, 230308, zooSaQS, K903 ; H03; SoR0D, TBROD; T[IB, WRWF, peR; VRS, WD, Wress. ¢f. § 215, 1, e. 1 o b th eGfl The Basavapurana suffixes the o> once to the long base of Zo#, as it 0), .4 has 398 (12, 43; ¢f. Nagavarma’s soces under No. 1; see § 210). The grammarian KéSava calls the infinitive with o, from a meaning in the it not unfrequently has, the locative state or condition (satisaptami or sati, see §§ 188, remark; 286. 365). 188. The force of the so-called infinitive in Kannada may be expressed by the following particles: — to, in its prepositional meaning, as ready to go, that the , South- fit to eat; to, denoting purpose, end, and futurity; so as to, so that; thening at the time that, when, while, e. g. 3oef, 28, to bring; JIPBeF, I, to Such make; IBSoef, IR, to walk; IBeFf, F&, so as to perish, so that : verbal (somebody or something) perishes or perished; IBcSoef, FIB0, IA, f means F©03y, so as to fall down, so that (somebody or something) falls or fell os from down; ma@, mo®es, when (somebody or something) sings or sang; w3, ) afld é"! wow¢, while (something or somebody) comes or came. Cf. the use of the 23, wj' change short infinitive with s in §§ 170. 171. 210. nstance But these special significations are not primitive; they are derived somehow from the verbal noun which the infinitive originally was and r ords) very often still is. Cf. the verbal noun in § 100, and its use in §§ 165. 169. 173. 205, and also in the so-called passive (§ 315). i and That the infinitive ending in @e* (¥, expressing ‘being’, ¢condition’) Jiately is a verbal noun, is an indisputable fact, because e.g. ©C3o¢ means 9o ‘grieving’ and ‘to grieve, etc.’, evede®, ¢ ploughing’ and ¢ to plough, ete.’, e ) swRer, ‘swelling’ and ¢to swell, etc.’, %% ¢, ‘thrashing’ and ¢to ) o’oDf thrash, etc.’, 3p@os, ¢joining’ and ¢to join, etc.’, LBef, ¢lying down’ AL, 4 250N and ‘to lie down, etc.’, and because this infinitive is declinable, as it has a dative (see § 187, 1). 16% o— 124 ——— The character of being originally a verbal noun can also be attributed (yhen the k the genitir to the second infinitive, viz. that with final €9, as e.g. @9z means ‘cooking’ Let us and ‘to cook, etc.’, ©@w, ‘compressing’ and ¢to compress, etc.’, o3, «lifting up’ and ¢to lift up, etc.’, e, ‘gaining’ and ‘to gain, etc.’, 3¢, infinitive w ‘ending’ and ‘to end, etc.’, 3wz, ‘putting on’ and ¢to put on, etc.’, own peculi servant’s W W, ‘coming’ and ‘to come, etc.’, JWew, ¢losing’ and ‘to lose, etc.’. Cf. § 205, 1, b, singular.— Verbal nouns, however, corresponding to the female serv: J. e, he orde infinitive formed by e and the insertion of o3¢ between it and themes i.. he kill ending in & and (as to form e. g. TR, 553’030), are nowadays scarcely met with in Kannada, although a few nouns end in o, e. g. (1t) so that -‘:?Jas‘f%odo, w3, BHG o, TG 03, WP, BRG W, - We think that ol i, ¢ he wen There are numerous he pushed s has been superseded by & or 33 in verbal nouns. . ¢ when | verbal nouns that end in & (see § 243, 4, 27) and some that end in =3 (see § 243, 4, 20), and, besides, of the above nouns, 23m& ol appears coming’, 7 also as BHAS I, and BRB as BHS . Remember that in the ‘the sun g Regardi present verbal participle (§ 172) ¢ is not unfrequently used instead of o3¢ At the same time we may conjecture that for verbal nouns, instead of themes with the formative o3y, the simple theme ending in The Spe1 e and oJ n N was preferred (¢f. §§ 100. 187, 3). ¢an $0 to g The third infinitive, being nothing else but the verbal theme itself which is very often used as a noun, requires no special remark. and b, locai; MMWM§ Some verbal nouns which are equal in form to the fourth infinitive 7. e. t. 9. that th that with final », are eru@fii, ‘loving’ and ¢‘to love, etc., '?r’ég)j, ‘a structure’ and <to construct, etc.’, ¥z, ¢‘throwing down’ and ¢to throw 189, T down, etc.’, ¥3, ¢a chip’ and ¢to chip, etc.’, 309, ‘killing’ and ¢to kill, thanges g etc.’, =R, ‘laughing’ and <to laugh, etc.’, $3pd, ¢joining’ and ‘to join, “the thyee etc.’, RPEIB (or BwEDB), <a load for the head’ and *to carry on the head, 0 fengeg” ete.’, 239033, ‘cultivating’ and ¢to cultivate, etc.”. — Verbal nouns which The th]‘a correspond to the infinitive with o suffixed by means of the euphonic are calloq 03 (e g. IR, Fo@d, IB03), we have not found in Kannada; it The may be that in such nouns o3s¢ was, for the sake of euphony, changed — e 98 0 into n¢ (¢f. SRR, V1R, S008, I0EPR) or I (¢f. 3EII, FLI). it thg e That the infinitive with 5 was considered to be a verbal noun in It wi) ancient times seems to be corroborated by the following two sentences pal‘ti(fiiple | quoted by KéSava (under stitra 134, from Sujanottamsa Hampa raja?):— (Present.) i gwéo%oi’)oo 8y=8 Seed, and %8, 330 W4 RPoB, literally < an ordering of d;ja CS; the king without fear’ and ¢a touching of the pudendum muliebre’, . e. — Dast Wl&th [ES— 125 — iy fed «when the king ordered fearlessly’, and ¢ when the p. m. touched’, in which ooking’ the genitive stands before that infinitive as before a noun. Cf. 352, 1a. y O3 Let us show by some further instances how the meaning of the 8 ¢ infinitive was attached to the verbal noun by Kannada people in their ( ? own peculiar way: — 353y, Ro8Z0 R03% O VRVTRo, literally ‘a female t servant’s work a doing he became ready’, 4. e. he became ready to do a 0 the female servant’s work; Q¢do gT3e o, lit. *he ordered a bringing water’, themes 4. e. he ordered to bring water; 3go° %@5@0, lit. < an eating he killed’, wadays i. e. he killed to eat; 39 meed, lit. ‘an understanding tell!’, 7. e. tell ), g (it) so that (I) understand!; SR Bpexo, lit. ‘a making he went’, A hat W i. e. he went to make; ¥8 IWodRo, lit. ‘a falling down he pushed’, . e. merous he pushed so that (it) fell down; ;3§D 2pness, lit. <the bard a praising’, dm 3 i. e. when the bard praises or praised; eg w3, lit. ‘the elephant a 1,ppears coming’, 7. e. when the elephant comes or came; Rexe¥ Sowrdes, lit. n the ‘the sun a rising’, ¢. e. when the sun rises or rose. Regarding instances etc. see § 365. tead of Remark. noun.s, ing 1o The specific meaning of ‘at the time that’, ¢ when’, ¢while’ of the suffix ¥ or ¥, which, like the suffix © (§ 187, 4), it often has in the infinitive, can so to say be accounted for by the meaning of ©©°, @ in § 109, letters a g itself and &, locative. The suffix «, expressing 8283 2, reminds one of the 9 of the locative in § 109, letters a, b, ¢, as a final 9@ is occasionally used for «; compare 76 0 0 e. g. that the ancient form of the instrumental is @in § 109, letters 6 and c. 4 [ ) throw 189 The grammarian KéSava observes ‘‘the verbal action (kriy8) to kil changes according to the three times or tenses (kalatrayaparinami), and ‘““the three (forms of) the conjugated verb (kriyapada) tell the three times toJ 1 01 or tenses’. o head hich The three tenses (§§ 144. 145) are formed by suffixes (Agama) which are called «the indicators of the three tenses (kdlatrayastiaka)”. ! phone ada; The names of the suffixes are 3, ; TT, 3D, 3B, 3T, H®; 8 W'D, 5, ®. Of these &, 3 are used for the past tense, 33, &%), 3, 37, BB — fi for the present tense, and &, @, o B, & for the future one. ) 1 It will be observed that © and g are the forms of the past relative oul participle (see § 175, 1. 2; § 176), and &, 2, =, o and & those of the (present-) future one (§§ 180-184). pl e, o3, ~ 33 2 . and z®, the tense-suffixes of the present, are the ¢, ! r past relative participle with final © and 8 to which w3 BT and oz b/ are annexed. oz, and o= we have met with as substitutes of ez, the present-future relative participle of 31y (see § 183, 7, remark; § 184); Isf pers. ez 18 another form of asi-’.a,\) and ez, Ind pes. [ a3% is found only in the mediseval dialect wherein = very frequently takes the place of 3, nd pers, masc, 08 190, Of the tense-suffixes mentioned in § 189 the modern dialect uses e and @ for the past tense, and & (exceptionally also 2y and &, see § 182 and § 195 seq.) for the present-future one. Its suffixes for indicating fom [ the present tense are, as a rule, peculiar, being ev3 and evs,, 4. e. two of the terminations of the present verbal participle (see § 172). nent, Nl 191 It is necessary to remark that z and 3 are but two represen- tatives of the finals of the variously formed past relative participle; they Abou ¢ are to indicate that all the forms of the past relative participle as The pe based on the past participle (see §§ 155-164; §§ 175, 1. 2, and 176) are meant. are also th The rules given regarding the formation of the (present-) future temark |, relative participle (§ 180 seq.) hold good also when it is used as the 2, The theme of the future tense. medival i 192. In conjugation (dkhyitamarga) personal terminations (vibhakti, pratyaya, akhyatavibhakti, kriyavibhakti) are used. They are suffixed Istpers, to the participial forms that indicate the tenses (§§ 189-191). When nd s, M a verb ends in such a termination, it is a conjugated verb (pada, akhyata- 3rd pers, pada, kriyApada; see §§ 69. 144). mase, g By means of the personal terminations the three persons (purusha, fem. ( g § 147) in the singular and plural are formed. neut, g It is the custom of Kannada grammarians to speak of only six (€9 An ogegg personal terminations (though there are actually ten), adducing those Perhaps g gy for the first person (prathamapurusha) feminine singular (and plural) and those for the third person (uttamapurusha) neuter singular and - 37 The Rotery g plural separately; we shall exhibit them all at one view in the next paragraph. 198. In presenting the personal terminations let us use the European way of placing and naming the persons, viz. first person (uttamapurusha), second person (madhyamapurusha), and third person (prathamapurusha). 1, The following are the personmal terminations of the present, past and future tense in the ancient dialect: 127 oz, Singular. Plural. § 184); st pers. o, (before vowels) Og° o (if not followed by a vowel); ) (¢f. § 137, a, nominative plural). 2nd pers B . 20° uently 3rd pers masc 50, (before vowels) e5a¢; 9% wof (§ 198, 3, remark; § 200, 1); 305 1868 WO o (§ 198, 8, remark; § 201, 1); 55) 8¢ 3o (198, 3, remark). dicating fem e g bt (8 198,39, VT (0°). o of remark). neut. PORY; BB, BEY; ¥3y; ovagy); exceptionally @5 (§ 194, ! presel- 39 remark 1; § 198, 1). o they About @z and ¢33) of the negative see §§ 209. 210. iple a8 4 176 The personal terminations o, %o, ¥, w%*, wuds, ©o°, and YO are also the suffixes for the krillingas in §§ 177. 179. 185. 186. 198, remark 1. 253. future 98 the 2 ) The following are the corresponding personal terminations of the medieval dialect: Singular. Plural. ibhakt N suffxed 1st pers. 0, (before vowels) g% O89; od 353 od -, When 2nd pers. (aof); al. khyate- 3rd pers. mase. ©o, (before vowels) ©9g; ¥ Y; © (©0°); wo. fem. (©ef); 9%, (®0F); V3o, )U,FllSha’» neut. B BB, BIY; B3y 3, V) 00 An occasional ®%> for @vR in MSS. for the third person singular neuter is : (G\jwi:’ ) perhaps a mistake of the copyist. g those | plul’&” 3, The following are the corresponding personal termina.tions' of the modern dialect: Jar 80l Singular. Plural. he nest 1st pers. SHEHES DY)y BN a0 uropes? 2nd pers. e R pumSha)? 3rd pers. masc. 2930 09 o (SloN 3) fem 9% 509 o, neut. WTe; Bo; 3. V) e 128 P — Remarks. 2o, Meat From a comparison of the forms of the terminations in the three dialects it of the hein tense 1s tl follows that the sdnné in <0, the sénné in 0, and the S (i.e. the sonné and a euphonic V) in ©®% and 23 are not radical. that 1ts The sonnd or its substitute D in the first person plural reminds one of the manner, 1 attention o0 plural of the neuter pronouns (§ 136) and of the sonné and its substitutes 39° and D of that of the personal ones (§ 137). or futare @Ry, wuiy, 9B (for AR, ®IY (for ¥Ry, 3 (for ¥R or BW or YVB, reply 1s, | ¢f. §§ 116. 122. 1388, d, 8. 173. 265), are the demonstrative neuter pronouns remark b, singular ©%, QVm, BB (§§ 90. 102, 8, letter &) and the corresponding pro- The pr nominal forms; 9=, 20 are the plural of ¥R, Y& (§ 136). ©o, ¥=0 and (the crude form) © mean ‘he’ (see § 115; § 138, d, 3 and 18 as follos remark; § 177), ©9° and ©%) (i, e. ©¥¥° with a euphonic @), ‘she’ (c/. §§ 177. P~ In %0 and %% © has taken the form of % (¢f. § 117, a). The & It pess, 185. 186). in ¥9° is either simply euphonically lengthened, or ©%° stands for the pronoun 9 Ps. ©0¢ and ©00 (7. e. ¥0° with a euphonic ®V) are the plural of ¥o, ®%, ©, ©¢° and @9 (¢f. §§ 119, a; 134, 177). In %0°, @ has taken the form of 2. 2nd pers, The & in &T° is either euphonically lengthened or stands for the pronoun ®ST°. 9, and ©®03° are connected with the %, 3 of the pronoun of the second person (§ 1388); their plural %" has taken the plural sign 0° (for ¥T° ete.; 31d pers, ¢f. §119); 90 is 90° and an honorific ¥ B0 often being an honorific plural mase, (ef- § 205, 2. 3, plural). The @ in », 20, AJ), and D is connected with the 2 of the pronoun of the first person (§ 138). By the way it may be stated that from ©o, ©3), ®, ©¥%°, ¥& the remote, fom intermediate and proximate demonstrative pronouns are formed by prefixing %, @0 and B by means of a euphonic °, viz. ®S0 (¥4 & o), lit. ‘that-he’, @FR), ¥F; WI9, lit. that-she’, ¥I9); 200, lit. ‘this intermediate-he’; YVI¥°; ngug, @30, lit. ‘this-he’, BT, B|F; AT, 9P, ¥, ¥ and A being other forms of %, ¥ and 3 (see § 265). Cf. § 122 about ¢, &, °. 194 The personal terminations of the preceding paragraph are, as remarked (§ 192), suffixed to the participial forms that indicate the Otllel ] tenses which in the case of the present tense are ©4 vz, O+ 9%, S+ NOj Op ] gy B4 L in the ancient dialect, and generally ©4 »® in the 304.L ) O medizeval one. ¥ % ¥ Let us take as an illustration the verb Fe¥¢ to hear, the relative past % L 83y participle of which is %e% (F¢%° + ), meaning ‘of the having heard’ (see § 179); to this e. g. ez, meaning ‘of the being’ (§§ 186. 201), is T@;+J@ added, and then e. g. the personal termination of the first person singular LA VR 5}0) ( . $29 JR—— 2o, meaning ¢ 1° So the literal translation would be ¢of the having heard- alects it of the being-I’, 4. e. I who is one who has heard, or I hear The present 18 and a tense is therefore a sort of compound tense (see § 31 T'o comprehend that its meaning can be expressed by Kannada people in the above e of the manner, it is necessary to know that they, in order to show their ready fos & attention or obedience, not unfrequently use the past tense for the present or future one For 1mstance if you ay to some one Come ! the ) C'i) reply is, I came, ¢.e. my coming is an accomplished fact See § 366 )ronouas remark b ing pto The present tense in the ancient dialect of the verb @ees accordingly 3 and is as follows Singular. Plural. gl 1st pers ‘@Q%fi o (F¢9 4 ¥ | 20) or @eefi Do (Fe¥ + 9T 4 20) or %%fi The ¥ %e%fi o (¥ + 9D 40), (E?\Qj R +0), and B %30\){5) (%eg) p[’OIlOlHl I hear +9B40) or TP 3 53) (TP 493 - 0 Vv Y, Yy 1 2%Y), we hear 2nd pers. TeS Fed 19T1-29035¢) Fe &34 20° (B¢¥ +921-a0%) or TP . TS I Of n v ;'D (z‘?%" O3 ( %8 ZG% ¥ +9% 490%), you hear o second JRH O G) ;\);é hou hearest. 5%, et 3rd pers o D 1l masc %e%fi o (¥ %3+@w+u0) or T3 T (@Q%f _}_@w_{_@Os) or Te% ho 0 %e%fi X (Ee%fi 4 I 1 ©0), (T 193 1 90%), they hear he hear% \ 1em0t fem FeP Do (Fe¥ 1 OV 09°) Fe e§ o° (v Ao e L OTLVT?) or FTeF T T Q fixing ¥ or FeF D ¢F (TP 40T 4 Fe¥ 0P 10T, they hear that-he ©¢%), she hears §v neut FeP R0 (T LT L9R) DB Y (TS + O34 ) or Fed forms 0F or ¥ ) T (TP 9D 3 53 (38 498+ 9I), they hear Q) it hears 418 a th Other instances in the first person singular are Fo83To (FoBB 4+ VT + oo ¢ 20) OF BIRTD o (RBTR+ ¥, + o, of T8, to drink), aae% 520 (aas%cs ? ;J th WT 4 20) OI gasfc’) ww o (gafé R @N 29, of ga?’ao to become abashed) ’5 T Do (ve)+aaw+oso) or o, N 0 (vo+aw+ 80, Of Fof, to learn), é’;sow ive P (§§+ 9%+ cQO) or 5 5,0 (5’§+ @54_@0 of 3of, to bring), %J@“'flo (%Jaes " heald + BT 4 00) Or fifl’fifi o (%fw+ 9T + o, of ToRy, to give), ©3 330 (a3+ i 1\) 18 BT+ o20) OF BB D0 (B4 8T + 20, of &, to give) Se(, § 366 sigul¥ 17 e 130 e The present tense of Fep or Fewo (see § 166), in the medieval dialect, femining A1 in which &, <of the being’, is nearly constantly used instead of &z or About bhi &9%, 1s as follows: 9 T Plural. the 3nd pe Singular. 1st pers. %Q%gaéo (occasionally ¢¥ 20), %egém, %e%afi%@. &g pAler g, or Fe9n®o (occasionally relative pa see §§ 171 Fe9330), FeLTBRY, TOPRT 2nd pers. ‘@eg% (or TERT). '-ée%goaob. 19, | 3rd pers. (Be$ Bos), Beg B0, presens e mase. F¢g Do, Fe¥f TR (Or 2e93 Do, etc.). cal struct fem. (%Q%&%fi‘), @Q%&“flés (0r FEPRTYF, (Bes ©o), Feg BT, changed t etc.) . the perso neut. ‘-@Q%{i’c‘éodo (Or TERTRB/OW). %ega@. to the ten Other instances in the first person singular are azrXo (of BT, to Its fon be), wgFo (of o7, to say), FDFBo (of ¥, to rush upon), FRET0 Or 3RBTo (of #a, to fall down), TR To (of Fomds or SR, to give), TR Ko (of SR, totake), X3 Bo (of mao3r, todie), wrdo (of &ns, to become), Ist pers, BReBBo (of Bweny, to go), BeePITo (or BeLPTRo, of Becdy, to tell). Regarding eado, etc. see § 201, 2. 2nd pers, Remarks. 3rd pers, 1mase, 1, . There is one irregularly formed present in the ancient language, namely that of eroes, to be, which changes its vowel e into 2o in that tense (except in the 3rd person singular neuter, ¢f. also § 180, remark after 6) and receives 1o fom, participial form to indicate the tense. As %9°is alsoa verbal noun, the personal terminations (§ 193) appear to have been attached to the genitive of this %%, ngut, | i. e. ¥, WO (W¥ 4 0), e. g. meaning ‘of the being-I’, i.e. T am. A peculiarity is that it uses the suffix ¥® (for X)) in the 3rd person plural neuter. Its paradigm is: Singular. Plural 1st pers. %o, WS WHOIE . WP ot The 2nd pers. 3rd pers. Which b, masc. W&o, WS O° A fo fem WEE, WHROE 8 tompg neut. AEDD &3 Wy L QU originally @V (i, e. V¥ 13, § 122), is a verbal noun (bhavavacana) 0easiops meaning literally ‘a being-it’, and as sach is used for the 3rd person masculine, thg of E— 131 [ — lialgt, feminine and neuter, singular and plural in the medieval and modern dialect. 4% 0L About bhavavaéanas see the paragraphs quoted in § 243. 2, The author of the Sabddnusisana, against Késava's sfitra 73, makes the 3rd person singular of the present tense a krit or krillinga and declines it, e. g 3RLABITo, IRABIOR, in his shtras 447, 448 ; Késava calls only the past relative participle and the present-future relative participle a declinable krit; see §§ 177. 185. 195, In § 190 it has been stated that modern Kannada has a peculiar 0, present tense. It has, however, not abandoned the use of the grammati- )W cal structure of the present tense as it appears in § 194, but bas changed the form of the tense-suffix e®, ¢of the being’, combined with the personal terminations (see § 201, 2), and given a different meaning to the tense. f, 10 Its forms of €938 combined with the personal terminations are as follows f:g or Singular. Plural. for @I ), Ist pers 2ER0 (D) Besy (0F) for Y (9B + ). (2T + IR)). ell). 2nd pers . &g (&) for ©& (¥3 4 ). &eD (8:0) for ©&0 (DF + 99). 3rd pers masc . O (TR) for B (¥ ToTy (¥TY) for ©BB (VR 4 &) mely + V). pt in fem. HaF (Y%) for 2% (93 &30 (380) for ©TVI (VT 4 ). onal + %), (3% neut. %030 (E1V) for an @30 HoY (w) for ¥IY (¥ 4 EIJ). ity (@3 + 33, which must JIE have been another form of @&)cfm). The initial &¢ of the forms of Regy, &e, TR, TP, %ey, etc., which have been formed by metathesis and lengthening the vowels (see the frequently used 52z for esxozy in § 201, 2, and compare the noun SPe for evgowo, and the adverbs &eR, won for a®A, ¥xA in § 212, 4), is commonly left out, so that the forms in parenthesis gy, 8, © 9, Y9, Sy, ete. are in general use, whereas those with z¢ are at present only 13) occasionally still employed for the verb =gy (©6.0%), to be, especially when 16y the o) of emphasis is added (see § 196). iLirfe L) S Let us give a paradigm of the present tense of @3y (acf), the wntingent J be' ar ¢ o past relative participle of which is fa% (=RF b see §§ 160, 7; 175, 1), 1 = ey7 ‘of the having been’. (0me ", ede Singular. Plural. In the o 1st pers. Q;w(?%ea’g (8B - Be), or racge\:s.g (a3 + 283, or 23, stance of th ©3), literally ¢of the having been-of which howey the being-1’ (see § 194). w03 (in | 2nd pers. [ "a%e, or age. 20, or @Heo. The 1des 3rd pers. masc. attached to 'acsz%m, or razs‘%fio. '8.83%50, or 5739 3. fem of the presg ’aaé%, Or 2. . B B, OF BTy To. About 11 neut, fa%ééo, or 2 e, 'aa-a(;@, or 2z ). 196, Other instances of the first person singular are ua;egio (originally present ten &)%Qm, of 23y, to come), Fo&BeIy (orig. Ro&3eRy, of 7oy, to speak), its own, SR (orig. &gdemy, of &y, to become, to be). For esgdexsy the rustic I, For dialect occasionally uses e3¢z in the sense of '3%650 (»% being used emphasis to for &z, see §§ 176. 196). (§195) / A peculiarity is that in the formation of the present tense under the presen consideration the suffix &3 is not added to the & of the past participle of 8 1t Was, themes ending in ev in the three dialects (see §§ 166. 168), oy, &, s1bl Dgular For the &%, ete. being annexed directly to o, in which case « occasionally disappears before them (see § 215). Thus =50ks, to make, forms this . g tense in the following manner: ind for th Singular. Plural. %3((90 st pers. a‘imz%qsggsg (SR 4+ 3 for afisacgqse&j), Or 5900, o TRRBL-IFI), OF 352BORY 2nd pers. Ssode (INE - 8 for IPRA ‘hape ( kr IR0, Even theg + ). The Vo) 3rd pers. 5350 R 035930, the relai mase. m@m@&, Or 350 BO3IDR. 5\)’@@@(8 0o, or uJ(\ w1 DOB03I5DTV. fem. S59zac%,0r S5&0E ;jsacsaé oo, or i neut. [PV, ;Ssaaaqs ), or SADIEles vl The phagg There can be no doubt whatever that we have here the ancient present tense in a somewhat altered form, although the meaning has undergone Iy pers, an essential change; for this form of the present tense is nowadays used to convey the idea of uncertainty or possibility, and may he called the ¢ "l o ;? = — 133 — L \0° ) the contingent present-future tense, as e.g. *azz ey or nacé) egy means ‘I may 175 d 1 be’ or ¢I shall perhaps be’; ufimegéo, ‘1 may come’ or ‘I shall perhaps come’; 355@3395650, ‘I may make’ or ¢I shall perhaps make’. In the medieeval dialect the author has met with only one clear in- { stance of this present, viz. 3Bwary (see under &38Ww, in the Dictionary, which however stands for IZRBZo without the meaffing of contingency. u%eéa (in Basavapurana 16, 28) may be a mistake for WR 2. The idea of uncertainty or possibility was, as it would appear, not D q attached to the present tense of this paragraph before the introduction of the present tense of § 196 into the modern Kannada dialect. ) W About instances see § 366, remark a. REY Q 7 196. The modern dialect having given a different meaning to the iginally present tense of the ancient and medieval one, formed a present tense of its own. speak) ¢ rustic 1 9 For this purpose, in the first instance, it suffixed the letter . of ng used emphasis to the personal terminations ending in eny combined with &5 (§ 195) in order to express the idea of certainty or to distinctly denote the present, leaving however the second person singular and plural o under ciple of as it was, but allowing to shorten the §0€ or & of the second person :‘FJ"}; éfl’ singular. sonally For the third person singular neuter it introduced the forms eso3), ns {his (4. €. 030, +, see § 199), B (i.e. @B+ o) and BB (4. & BB+ ); and for the third person plural neuter it introduced, as optional forms, O3 (¢ e ¥FY+ o) and A3 (4. €. BF+ ). ©0, a8, %3, B probably are the demonstrative pronouns of that shape (§§ 102, 8, 5; 122. 186)+», <even that’, ¢even this’, ¢even those’, ¢even these’. The verbs concerned here are two, véiz. iy, to be (to become), of which the relative past participles are efioj%, o3 (see §§ 166. 176. 199; ¢f ©nexy in § 195), and 48 (aTf), to be. The personal terminations combined with e to which.the o of emphasis is suffixed, and the additional forms are the following: Singular. Plural. resent 1st pers. R, DR (for eIy, NI 333, D3 (for BeD, V). orgone of § 195). 5 used 200, 0. o 2nd pers.. o€ 8 Or &), 134 Plural. 9, But | 3rd pers. Singular. mase. Hox, ¥ (for TV, &I %90, &3 (for BT, HITY). and ’&dv, f()f of § 195). (see § 173), fem dialect attach 08, 8 (for B3P, ¥ %00, &3 (for &30, &TY). The pres of § 195). neut. @03y, «B, (ad). T, 553 (for TI), BIJ), 833, ('3&3), is ag follows: ar AV Compare the forms of the Perfect zbés%g?, TP 33 in § 313, 4. 1t pers. ((‘ The verb esrso, to be, is conjugated in this present tense as follows: f Singulanr. Plural. Il (<] 5 Ind pers. @ 1st pers. 203 el (9o + oF) or ede’ (¥4 s o33 ¢33, 0573033, 3rd pers, ®3), literally ‘of the having been-of the being-I-indeed’, ¢. e. I am indeed, 1asce, el fom I am. A\ neut, Q 2nd pers. 802y, VB, 0T LR, O, ®OR D, BED. 3rd pers. masc. O3 R, VTR, efiom%é, 09739 0. fem efioa‘s'%%?, VIOY. 29035'%8, 9759 0. Other 1 1l neut. w03y, Or ©T; BB, &9033%5, B33, OF 8333 (of o, o s 3R or g he ) [a) 1), QW The verb g (avf), to be, a paradigm of the contingent present 01 RICIWNES tense of which has been given in § 195, is conjugated in this present tense as follows: I, @ Singular. Plural by themg)y f 1st pers. '&%93 (8% + Bed), literally ‘of the a8 63 Dlural of ¢ ) having been-of the being-I-indeed’, TN }& ] ¥ ¢. e. I am indeed, T am. adeo 2nd pers. 2HE, OF BY. Inf YR), ¢ 3rd pers. 0 Saz masc. Yok fazsga". fem @agfi, 259 B neut. 29030 2 or %3; BB. fazséfi, or e953; }ad. In the Southern Mahratta country there exist also the forms q;\céei, 8¢, etc., the initial &¢ of &es, e, etc. being omitted. P — 135 i . 2 ? But this way of conjugation is restricted to the present of ey and @3y; for, as stated in § 190, evd and evd,, two pronominal forms (see § 173), are the tense-suffixes to which, in all other cases, the modern dialect attaches 93, 8 or =, €33, etc. The present tense of m©d, to be, formed according to this method, 90), ( an H\J is as follows: Singular. Plural. 1st pers. @TIZER (834 W3+ D3I) or VIS N 2808033 Or 008,633 follows: (a8d 4 208 1 »J), literally ‘a being- this-I am indeed’, 7. e¢. being I am indeed, I am. 2nd pers. 2030 Or ATLEL, VTS or BTV, 23030 Or BT eV 3rd pers. masc. B TOTIN OF BTISY,R. B TI393 Or BTV3 i ® (D) : fem. B To39% or BTV, P BT3B Or VTS R o neut. Sl B00803, @3y, or |TLZ 03y, 280893, 2333, Oor 80038, 3. BT, AT, Other instances in the first person singular are 23.8ed or wTLZ e 3 ored (of w30, to come, literally ¢a coming-this-I am indeed’, I come), Bwen geR or Bweenad.en (of Rwery, to go), Feshded or Feshd eR (of Tewy, to hear), ©090208e8 or vePwwg e’ (of we®, to descend), I3coZeR present or g3 e’ (of 38, to walk). g present Remarks. 1, g, (¥3), 98, 93 are employed also in the medieval dialect, either by themselves or in union with 908, ¥v8, to form the third person singular and plural of the present tense, e.g. 3B 3F Vu J20%03 NARWD; FF(0) ACTIAI TER QR; TIIIR; SoRBYW; Bed 2, In the rustic modern dialect the present tense of the verb wgs (¥, ©3Y), to say, is as follows: Singular. Plural. Lst pers. ©3.¢3 (for VSR, VIV ). @ie;& 2nd pers. @@JQ or @g €9 €D 3rd pers. 3, 89 masc. W I @asgé fem. @ag@ @536 5 @%Qfiv neut. @rio&lp or @ifi VI E, ¥ 3. — 136 —— or 250, 3, In the modern dialect there is a form used for the third person singular neuter of the present tense which in reality is nothing but the present participle feo0oe or (with the emphatical or perhaps formative ») bearing its original meaning, véz. In the that of a verbal noun (see § 173), e.g. &3, it becomes, that literally means plural the “a becoming-this-indeed’, if the « be emphatical. Other instances are @338, it declinable b is, MR, it experiences, W33, it comes. Cf. No. 4. Paradig 4, Again in the modern dialect the form @5’39 of the verb ©3° (¥, @), to say, expresses ‘it (rumour) says’, ‘they say’, ‘on dit’ (see § 336). It is possible that this ©¥8, is corrupted from ©303 or ®3, the present participle of ©%€, used in its primitive sense of ‘a saying-this-indeed’, if the © be emphati- It pers. ) cal Another possibility see in § 198, 7, remark 2. Ind pers 199. In § 153 appellative verbs or conjugated appellatives have been 3nd pers mentioned. They have a present tense for words of the masculine and W feminine gender singular and plural, but, as it would appear, without Ist pers. Ind pers % a third person singular feminine. The personal terminations are those of the ancient dialect (§ 193). 3rd pors When they are suffixed to form the first person singular of Kannada nouns, Samskrita compound bases and Samskrita adjectives ending in Ist pers, ¢, the sonné (o, the sign of the nominative singular, § 117, ¢f. § 114) is Ind pers put between, e. g. 3oR%¢ =onRo, I (am) the son of the daughter, &3 3I‘d pers 21 2L R0, FoY FFRRIR0, TITEISo, TUPRR I3[0, T\ SVUT HOBTIVNO, m%ééo, © 33 000R0; this seems to be the rule also, if a Kannada 18t pers, attributive noun ends in 030 (4. e. euphonic o3¢ +e9+ 9, § 115), as the nd perg only instances given by the grammarian KéSava are o030, I (am) Bid pers a weak person, 2003030, (although he adduces for the plural both Other Kannada attributive nouns and Kannada 200833 and 2003:33). An exe appellative nouns of number (§ 90) ending in < wmay insert the sonné or 198, 1 may not, e. g. w% Vo or wP B0, I (am) a good person, wBro Or wHF R0 3 fOrmed by g The adverb SNER forms o \J:O, I (am) a bewildered person. Bast pari Kannada nouns and Saihskrita compound bases ending in « add oo preceded by a euphonic o3¢ for the first person singular, e. g. The 0 22 30320, I (am) a or the wife, FedooFDdv0. arg chiefi) tiona) ¢ For the formation of the first and second person plural Samskrita ot gy words suffix wgps (the sign of the nominative plural, §§ 119. 132) before lialegy it the personal terminations, e. g. m%éfi@, RSO3 DTERY); N 80T, 5,0 0o, i — Bt parti &3, 00°, ¥3wwdos; with regard to all Kannada words the insertion of es0f is optional, e. g. 00303 or 1VBITTY), ?»%3(3;@ or u%dfi@, CY v b e y &) e — 137 —— ) singular or £LIBF), WwRFRY) Or WwIFIsY; %% 00° 0F mz}csacé, TRODT or THOTROTF, panticiple 2009 oA 0T or Fe0ROT, of OF HEIDVTF, HIFTF O WTHFOOF, ning, viz. lly means In the second person singular and the third person singular and g ewe, | )3 f plural the personal terminations are attached immediately to the ® 00, W et declinable bases, e. g. emcépéomg, m%éo, emc%éc*?; &%630356, % ¢ % R, 8)) /) Paradigms given in KéSava's grammar are: 6), tis Plural. Singular. rticiple of b of em%é. emphati- 1st pers. em:gpsag. emccflpéfiq I (am) an elate person. 2nd pers em?péo&sg. engbéoos. ave heen 3rd pers. emagpé’o. em:é)éos. aline and 2. af u%d. . without 1st pers. 29,30 or w9,TI0, T (am) a good person &%&36{5) or &%da@. 2nd pers u%dofis‘f. zqe::basfi or u%mcfl are those 3rd pers u%do. u%dcfi‘ A 360 268 Kannada nding 1 1st pers. 2e’ or S»30, I (am) a stranger. &%) or JWOJ). f 311418 2nd pers Ses 0336 BT or JSdTE. Jeo. JeTE. O‘fi 20 é\J 3rd pers Baes) nNO 45 fok i eeet K annad 1st pers. W30 or '203%‘50, I (am) a single person. L35 or WIFII. e 2035 033°9. WAFT® or WwFOTC. 2nd pers o am) 3rd pers WwaIF 0. iz aral bath Jann (a An exceptional form is 5980 (for gy Ro). g 0! 198. The past or preterite tense (imperfect, perfect, aorist) is generally 00 b -jr formed by suffixing the personal terminations (§ 193) to any form of the relative i past participle (§§ 175. 176). 10 P add The exceptions relate only to the third person neuter singular, and [13,1 0 q are chiefly the following:— in the ancient and medieeval dialect it is optional to suffix the two terminations 3o and a3, directly to the skt short past participle ending in o (§§ 166. 168); and in the modern ore dialect it is necessary to suffix the termination o8> not only directly to ) bef 700 that participle, but also by means of a euphonic o35 to the short participle 561 0 ol ending in w and o (§ 165, @, 2; § 165, b, 1) which is identical with the ) "“‘No) Vv theme, and then to all the relative forms of the past participle formed 18 — (ther by the removal of its final en (§ 175, 1) which are treated of in §§ 158-164 (as far as they concern the modern dialect). i, b 1, end), 4 A paradigm of the past tense of @ew®, to hear, in the ancient dialect, is: Plural. TROAZY Singular. , 0F8 1st pers. i-?eego (i. e. Te¥ 4 w0), literally ¢of the %Qego or %e%i@. under No. having heard-I’ (see §§ 169. 179. The th 194), I have heard, I heard. 2nd pers. %e%ojsfl ‘v"e%c‘. 53y and T h; third 3rd pers. mase. %e%éo or %Q%?Jéc))o. %Q%C‘ or %”693%0“. Xpressing fem. '-@Q%é%?‘ or %’e%?u%%vé, %Qeécjs or %Q%?chs. : 254, em neut. '@e%figdo or %e%égg. %Q%%&j). which is', ’ If the relative past participle is formed by g, the termination 3y | it (s . g, would seem, is avoided; thus we find Zoora$o, 230, but not Sored 3y, ; 39 W0 { SoFrcd, but not 393r3y; X3y, @y, but not FZ By, Boorg L, PRIy, are allowable forms. In 2369%@ (§ 164, 6), the third person neuter plural n on ;f : A Dt of ?,3699&, to scratch, we have exceptionally e953) instead of eng). 2, A paradigm of the past tense of Fo&, to speak, in the ancient in shtras 1 Purthe dialect, 1s: Singular. Plural. 0 ong e Lst pers. F&Bo (i. e. SEB420), literally *of [RBo or AR, of 887 A, the having spoken-I’, T have spoken, In the I spoke. 2nd pers. ROBTOIF. [VRQTL. i\séim, 0 3rd pers. mase. FURT0 Or RABBRo. SRTo¢ or RRBPTE. 4 A diale i fem RBYE OF FRBRYE. [RJO or RBRRTE, 3 166), neut. [VRBIR OF VORTIBY,. BRI 3, A paradigm of the past tense of o0, tosing, in the ancient dialect, 18 Plural. Ist pors, Singular. 1st pers. ToRR0 (i. e. FIRT 4 20). Ta8B0 O TIRR). 2nd pers. SIRTBONE. TRATS. 3rd pers. masc. T9RTo or JadBWo, TORTT Or TIRBPTE. ot perg, fem TIRTE® Or TIBRVRS, ToRTTE Or THRTPTE, % 3l’d Dets, neut. DIRT Y. UG TIRRIB, O FHRHR,,0r TR (i. e. DR 4+ 93), or J[@IY, (. e DB 4 B9B), PRGNS 139 1 28-164 Other instances of the third person neuter in its four forms are .8 Bomd, WOBR, LA, Wady (of Wi, to read); B¥nsmy, BENRD, ancient W¥PN3Bo, BPNZy, (of ¥Ry, to shine); RRDARBIT), TRDARDY,, TROAIBY, £ROABy, (of BROR, to spread). That of =gf (or @3y, to be) is wdor 80, BABFI, In the ancient dialect, and B3, in the modern one (see under No. 7). See instances in § 366. The third person singular and plural, excepting its forms with @3 23, and 93y, is used also as a declinable krillinga (§ 102, s, e; § 177). The third person neuter singular ending in envgo is a bhavavaana expressing the action or state of the verb in the past (¢f. 200, 1; see § 254, remark 2). =@ory means either ¢that which has been’ and ¢that which is’, or ¢a having been’, ¢the having been’ and ‘a being’, ‘the being’ 3 N, (see e. g. § 313, under 4). ;J Remarks, A W82,0 is found in a Shsana of 866 A.D., D&ARL0 in one of 916 A.D., wIBe0 lural in one of 929 A. D.; 43%,0° in one of about 750 A. D., $4E8,0° in one of 929 A. D.;—the termination %0 occurs also in the éabdamanidarpax}a; %%° is found in sfitras 179 and 183 of the Sabdanusisana. 1C1 enb Further, 30839 occurs in a $isana of about 778 A. D.; F0d 0 is found in one between 680 and 696 A.D., 'v"’@émd@s is in one of 707 A. D. and in one of 887 A. D., ®&3,5° in one of 807 A. D., and SB®%° in one of about 750 A. D. In the later ancient dialect we meet with ?»3%50 in a ssana of 1123 A. D., TW0 8,00, DTy, 93,30 in one of 1182 A. D., and SPERD in one of 1187 A. D. \OQ 4, A paradigm of the past tense of Fe$ to hear, in the medizval 0 dialect in which it optionally takes the final e, 7. e. becomes Be%o (see § 166), is: Singular. Plural. Ject, Ist pers. e¢¥o (T€¥ + 20), or ved %@%@ or FePR). &, or Fed ; FePRo (3¢ 9T+ 0), or FEFWRY, or 093, A TS 2nd pers. ?}’eegi or R, %’e%@ or FeLDO. oy 3rd pers. mase. %e%{io or FeYTo0, %Qim (%efigc‘ or) %Q%g)do, or @Q%‘?ddo.' or TePTRY, @Q%é or ¥¢ 3, 18% 140 Plural. i Singular. 3rd pers. contr fem. (Fe¥ & or) Few &, or e (Teg of or) B¢ o, or FePTT. 0oy TP, oy; Q0 neut. ‘¢ 30 or FeTTT, Te %efig@ or TP, per g'égg or FePRY,; TY 30 (. e. Te9+33), or Fe past | 930, (i. . F¢9 4 330). 3, A paradigm of the past tense of #¢%0, to hear, in the modern dialect in which it always has the final e (see § 166), is: Singular. Plural. 1st pers. %Q?dfig (@Q@Cfi + ARV) or %Q F0e90T) or FePA. PT. 2nd pers eV Or Fed. FeoR0. 3rd pers masc In LT Or FePn. FeLB 3. fem FeL TP, TR0 Y ) neut BP0 (T 4 B). FePTJ). e, ig are, Other verbal themes with final e are e. g. Ae%y, ®eC, WX, IR, TOTR. v (er+ 6, A paradigm of the past tense of the theme &&, to seize, (the B short past participle of which is identical with the theme), in the modern dialect, is: of the Singular. Plural. o) 3 Ist pers. HBBI or LB, LRBY or LR, diaTect. 2nd pers. W& or &LAD. LARQD. Th my N 3rd pers. masc. HRT[ or LAT. HRTD. Hlvays fem HBTH. RT3, Ing neut. SHBOBY (1. e. B, the short past LRED). g gy participle that is identical with the 9 s;) theme, 4 033° 4- 83Y). fifld. 9 Other verbal themes with final ® are e.g. eve®, Fo&, W, S[ooN ) and 92, Themes with final o, e. 9. 38, 3@ and Xp%, form the past g tense in the same way, the third person neuter singular being FZo3y, DB, RRBIVV. b tongj I gl 141 —— In the third person neuter singular of themes with final « a (ol | contraction of vowels often takes place in the modern dialect, when, e. g N P30 RNV EN WEBN3 SwoAo3dy and I o030 appear as enuCI2030 [WEED WRESY , second Soonedy and x=eResy (¢f. § 205 pers. plural § 130, ¢) 7, A paradigm of the past tense of ey (), to say, the relative 1: past participle of which is e3 . in the modern dialect, is Singular Plural 1st pers. ©R g5 or ¥ R 5 or WY D 1 dialect 2nd pers. ©8 or @R © D 3rd pers masc IR R0 or ¥ B T fem EINE=S) 200 neut ©9 3 (. e. U3 + B3 8R Y In the same manner the past tense of the relative past participles 0983, VD, Y3 3, ¥0, T, 33, 3 B, OB Tae., Hee Doel . s ete. is formed in the modern dialect Also in the mediseval dialect there are, as occasional forms of the third person mneuter singular, oo d ), S Q30 (B, + ) WR3 (W +2a3), BB (AR +2aR), and QB (RS + a3y ) i, (the From the full forms eQ3), 23 RS 3 3, &)@ 3y and "’23 30 e modern of the third person neuter singular, by means of synCOpe 9., obaio 330 ER) wao and 3y are often formed and used in the modern dialect. HA0) The third person neuter singular of facfi Sy (of @dy), I was, is always 93y in the modern dialect, and that of udfio (of weesw), I fell, always 93, Instead of 2323 39 (of 3¢, to burn) the form 23eod03y (23+ m‘+"aéo) and instead of 3&@@@6 (of Bo¢, to graze) the form 35002080 (8304 030° 4 In the medieval one we 53y) may be used in the modern dialect. find, as an occasional form, 3e0203y, (= Be3) Remarks @ —Qafl 1 In § 172 it has been said that an explanation of ®¥g and o different , the P&b from that given there, would be offered here For this purpose it is required )zgw to consider the third person neuter singular of the past tense to be a krillinga or declinable base (§ 102, 8, letter ¢; § 177), as it in reality is; for like the et — 142 krillingas 2833 (23 + 0B, of the ancient and fnediaéval dialect) and co%do or It pers. VI B (8 4 VW or VT 4 ¥F, of the modern one) ¥ 3 and 2 8 are krillingas composed of the relative past participle ©% or =8 and @S> (another form of 9%, § 193, remarks), literally meaning ‘of the having said-this’, ‘a having said-this’, from which ©@89 and 239 are formed by syncope. The final ©® in ¥3 and 23, would be the sign of the accusative of bases with final @V (see § 121, letters & Ind pers, and ¢; § 122, letters & and c) governed by a following 3¢ or ¥ (¥:Y), V& (033); see §§ 381. 332, and some instances in § 286. ¥ and 239, would be ord pers. lengthened forms of the accusative (see § 121, letter ¢; 122, letter c). 1asc, 2, In remark 4 of § 196 the opinion has been expressed that it is mnot Another fem, impossible that @8 | ‘on dit’, is a form of the present participle. explanation is that it is the krillinga ©3 (i.e. ©23), by syncope) with the « of neut, emphasis, originally meaning ‘of the having said-this-indeed’, ‘a having said- i; this-indeed . (In Télugu ©3, appears as ©¥8, or ©&, probably other forms of The 008, ‘a saying’, the verbal noun of ©, to say). (5185 ‘of givin 199 In § 166 there are adduced the irregular past participles (here its 90308, Fpeods, BREE of @y, Jpeny, Bwery, which stand instead of § 100; the regular on, P¥pen, Joep, and in § 176 appear the irregular relative nstances past participles sz, Zpen, Bwer, which stand for sAT, IpeNT, BRENT, saying or &0, PEO3Y, 63@605% . From these irregular past and relative past ialects, participles the third person neuter singular is formed, viz. in the ancient Othey the flnci@ dialect either &zozy and 8x3y, XpemoRy and FperRdy, or GOy, 3¢ 030,5 in the medizeval one either eszomy and ©33), Jpedomy and Fped %@@'5), '| 3 b or 3030y, Sy, TR, PO TPEO3N,, VHEOIBY, TVREO ( of @‘\;@64 39 ‘) and in the modern one only e03)9, 023, BRI, TBRERVS. (of £V E‘: In § 166 it will be seen that there exists also the irregular past (of g participle e903o$ (for 30%°), used i1n the formation of the third person (9] ! neuter singular 03y, (§ 196, regarding the past meaning of which used Ingt A Ceg for the present see § 194), and in § 176 that the irregular relative past Bop tL participles are also ©0%) and eszs, used in @03%63, etc. and es3¢g, etc. W ang (§ 196; ¢f. eBemo in § 195). JLQ"\C ( 200. The future tense is formed by suffixing the personal terminations 2 4 formed relative i (§ 193) to the variously (present-) future participles Jm)), to (§§ 180-184. 191). (Remember the contingent present-future tense of § 195.) ers 1, A paradigm of the future tense of Fowo, to give, in the ancient dialect, is as follows: W pey 143 W g Singular. Plural. JT ingas 1st pers. TR0 (i e. TORIB + o), TIWI30 Or ToTWosdsy), We shall give f literally ¢of giving-1 & his (see §§185.186), Ishall o 1d O3 give (see § 316, 3). f ors 0 = 2nd pers. FOBITO3¢, thou wilt give FoRIDT®, you will give. ) AW (see § 3186, 12). ald be 3rd pefs. masc. FOWIT0 or FoBIZpo, he TORIRT® or ToROPT, they will 15 not will give (see § 316, 12). give. nother fem. TOBITE® or TORIPSE. BOBITT (or TIRIIPTF). e o of neut. FIRoJR0. BB ). - said- s of The whole third person (singular and plural) is a declinable krillinga (§ 185. 186). Its neuter singular, in the present case To@RoHYay, lit. ‘of giving-it’, is also used to express the notion (bhiva) of the verb (here its action) in the present, and is therefore a bhavavadana (cf. ciples ad of § 100; the §§ quoted in 243 ; § 254, remark 1) meaning ¢giving’. Other lative instances are &Yoo, giving, FRYrny, loving, e, being, Qfi‘éma U\ Al hd] saying, 355@633):55, making. Such bhévavatanas are used in the three ) oSt dialects. Their use in the imperative appears in § 205. jcient Other instances of the first person singular of the future tense in fJG the ancient dialect are: efi%o (of &%), ?fiewio (of FEees), %’@%o (of ) e TROF), FpraysSo (of ey, ), BEFPBo (of 8P), B30 (of 8&), ov £3,0 N B (of o), éfiwo (of &%°), 3Zro or éffc (of o), 3wesdro or éme%ro e (of é’u’ae&fis), £@e&fiio or Jwe@dBo (of S0ewy), ;S'Javéi)o or [PBIS0 (of SRy), ¥ o, wdo or wyte (of &Ry), Jpesdo or TpensSo (of ; past See )er3011 Qpenv), addo or faaio (of 2DRy), 2JTo or 2R 0 (of DRR). used instances in § 366. o past For the third person masculine singular ®@*3%0 is found in a $isana between 3, ofC. 597 and 608 A. D., and for the third person masculine plural ¥390° (of 3QRY), AOPT® (of BORY) oceur in a Shsana of about'750 A. D. 2 ) A paradigm of the future tense of $oz> (or occasionally also ations TR), to give, in the medimval dialect, is: ;ieiple% Singular. Plural. 1st pers. BRBI[o (FART + o), BRBIS). FRRBINRY, BRBII. mcieflt 2nd pers. FLTI. %u@ C:Z)u) s34 144 Singular. Plural. 3rd pers. Isf i mase. BRBITo, TRBITRY, TRRIS. (BRRIVTF), TRREIZT. fem (BRABITPS), TRBIZH. (BRBITTF), FLBIZTo. neut. FRBIFYRY, (TRBIRTY). BFRBITR). Avother instance of the first person singular in the medieval dialect ol | ard p is wQC@io, £Qw§;§o, 566&2, or $eC30, B[ELITRY, VeCS, or BeLdJo, 1l By, Bec:3 (of Beess, Becd, 220, to say). 3, A paradigm of the future tense of R0, to g'iire, in the modern fo dialect, 1s: Singular. Plural. I 1st pers. FRBINRO (TRBIT 4 I3, BRBII. FRRS. | SN} FRBIDD. 2nd pers. TRBI, TRTWID. 3rd pers. masc. TRRIDRY, TRBI. FRBIZTY Ist ik fem BRTBITF TRRBID T neut. BFRBOTZHS BRABISTY ()lld p1 3nd Other instances of the first person singular in the modern dialect it are ®ReCIINRY, 2eCS (of Betdy, to say), [HBWN[, SoR030033 (of fa S8, to speak), SBBNRRY, [BRa0s3 (of s, to Walk), The forms S» 1g BoS Y, BELNTHY, FVRBWTRY, SBWBI are bhavavatanas; see under Noi1: 6209, .8 0 201 In § 184 there appears & as a substitute of g in the relative In the present-future participle, viz. in @& of the ancient and medizval dialect, ¥l and in 2®, IV, W, SR, wom, Wem, HpeF of the medieval one. (¢ § In § 183, 7, remark, we have Sk and in §§ 189. 194 we find &z, v ialeg and «® as constituents of the present tense. In § 195 we have the Presg conjugated form of wx wviz. ¥®Bsy, etc. changed, by metathesis and lengthening of the vowels, into Reso, ete. Here follow the paradigms of the conjugation of ez or oo, (ej%), »®, 2%, and some other conjugated forms. 1St pe. 1, A paradigm of the conjugation of eo% or @3, (&) in the grammatical ancient dialect, is: Qnd I 145 Plural. Singular. st pers. W ©30 (see § 194) or &3 o, 950 Or ¥, 0, 5335y) Or @azaj) literally ¢ of the becoming J J0) or being-I’ (see § 186), I shall become, I shall be, (I am). lect 60 2nd pers T3¢ or 0‘9;:‘50356 ¥UT Or @33\)56, 3rd pers oV, masc o OF VT o, YIPo OF V0 Or VT T, BPO® Or @"@10‘, 2933{:@\10. @@”%)JUG. odern fem VTG OF OF ¢F, VP VLT Or B TF, (VTRTF Or eazfijoadv), or @%@6. emggo‘. neut WTHBY or ees%cfio. BYY or ¥PH ). 2 3 A paradigm of the conjugation of es&®, in the mediwval dialect, is: Singular. Plural. 1st pers. B0 BIRD). P wHZy, @®, literally ‘of the becoming or being-I’, I shall become, T shall be. 0530, Zlccte) 2nd pers. 3rd pers. alech masc. WBo, VBT, (V®). (¥®TF), ST, (OI fem (Bx%), VTN, (8B, @B, 88 neut. LIPITIV. BT). nder Of the above forms we have met with @xo, @¥x%* and @mizy also in the ancient dialect. at af1ve 9oy in the form of &®zo has remained in the modern dialect &lecti (¢f- § 195); Bewy, ete. and Lo, etc., other forms of ©® o, ete. in this one dialect, appear, as has been stated, in its conjugation of the contingent Bl present-future tense (§ 195); compare the modern present in § 196. o the fll}d 8, A paradigm of the conjugation of %a, in the me(?.iaeval dialect, is: dlo'mb Plural. other Singular. 1st pers. @®o, BRI, VX, literally of the BT being-1’, I shall be, (I am). y the =Yool 2nd pers. BX®, 19 146 Singular. Plural. Tr 0 3rd pers. PO oo mase. BTo, VBV, (BB). (BaBT*), AT 1% fem (BTE*), BT, (BRT*), 3T neut. BB, 0 Bag)e sasal Other instances of the first person singular of the future tense formed V from relative participles with final & in the medizval dialect are 8o, o, ‘of the bringing-I’, I shall bring, &0, ‘of the coming-I’, I shall come, A3 29&®o, ‘¢ of the coming-1’, I shall come. (of 3 The only form of these left in the modern dialect is the third person o, neuter singular of waxbo, viz. w&@Iw0, it will come, it comes. 202. According to note @ of § 181 the third person singular and the diale third person masculine and feminine plural of the future tense occur also with 2, and %, in the medieval and modern dialect, e. g. 83Rw .y (for douh 8TMISRY), &oRweh (for 8onexdh), &d’way (for 3omiyde or 8omy DL B0); BRERWERY (for BwensYdy or BwerRay), Hwenwedy (for Bwe ally Ros3dy); —and according to note b of the same paragraph the third I person neuter singular of the future tense occurs also with enp in those 18 101 two dialects, e. 9. ARG (for SPRIFYZs or IPRIVFY). ‘\ % PN 203. A particular third person is formed by the terminations mdo, Bo, 5 A ®5,0, and &>, >, It is used for the present, future and past tense (¢f. § 169) without regard to number and gender. U3 oo 1s suffixed to most verbal themes ending in consonants and 4D vowels, e. 9. w0, Royo, wogo, F9o0, SETIFo, ?.fgaew;)\ o, B[N0, GJ‘ Raeda o, RBENIFo, BRoreFo, RO, SR o, sjo:o’o%*ro\o, £ri&°);)\o, R, o '&3}0?’16&%0, O, FBTYo, RBNV0, TBNVO, BRIV, 16 D@0, FHey oo, WERIMV0, JwRINV0, AEINVMV0, JPNRINV0, BPBRoNI0, TaNRaNRI0, RPW Sonvo. According to the Sabdanusésana also enonve, Bperindoe, (see NI remark), 3penoro (for 2weesonio, and dwewsro, see Bvo), 3R o (for W {\3 FRBN0), 3\!@@&3;)\0 (for Jwezonoo), HREI2 0 (for ZowRoriyo) are in ln use ¥do, according to instances from the gabdamanidarpana, is suffixed A A OD_QG to 23eCd¢ (of Bery), Sweds (of Sww@y), 38 , B0f, 30f, {ef and wor, (fiééry ang ¥ and the forms are 23¢C9),o0, FPEOYo, 3ReTIF0, BBIF0, FTIFO, SEDE and e3oro; according to the Sabdanusasana it is optional to use Zwe W o R —— 147 - BoFo OF 3RENIFo, JVY,0 OF V0, RPETLO OF PRIV 0, 239CI )0 Or 239 3 L0, TIVE,0 OF VI 0, [5OCI 2,0 OF 359N 0, BRBoFo or VBBRMoFo <) 3 BRETIF0 Or ARENIFo From Jpeno Spedoo is formed, and from esny ©zvo (this form in a sasana between 597 and 608 A. D.), generally @va (¢f. § 176). med Verbs formed by means of the suffix @z (see § 149 seq.) may use %0, Joo, in which case they drop their final %, e. g. 22T00 (0f 2RV, THIO I, &30 (of PYToRAY), VPRLPTI0, IPBTI0 SI0E3T0, BJTo; FeYBo (of Fe®Ro, to play), TOROT0, HOPTI0, TPWTVo, PINTV0, T3 Foo, Tod 1500 FV0, DONTO0, ARWTV0 The forms with oo and Zvo are used in the ancient and medizval ] the dialect al80 . 0. in the ancient dialect, is an optional termination for Fyo, the (for doubling of the consonant being euphonic, e. g. KHTORBY,0, VPNRLEIPT,0 s DT, 0, TPWTF 3.0, 6% %o 0, JoRTY,0. o ¥ It is beautiful (mandhara) especi- i) ally in verbs that come from Samskrlta hird If a form is produced that is disagreeable to the ear (asravya), o0 hose is not used in Kannada verbs, so that it is improper to use e. g. ¥&39,0 DRTY RS #oa_ (%Uld FETV0. DBTo0. IRD Tuo O FTERINV0, DBRINV0 _&) #0, AR Jonvo would be right) (f B> (i. e. Too without the sdnné) of the ancient dialect is formed in @B, (in a Sasana of 1084 A. D.) and J‘e)r’\oi’)o%g (in a Sasana of 1123 and A. D.); in the medieval dialect it is in common use and we meet therein ) 14 LY e. g. with %0 3RETOF, WeeN In the modern dialect two forms with a9y 2. found also in the medizval one, have remained, viz. 23¢%o (for 23eC,, JfiJOf § 316, 4) and mewy (for mawY) 730 (i. e. Roo without the sénné) is a medieval suffix which we see e. g At in AJRONY, IRNY, WBNRY, BRTFNY, AN, [N, SSFROMY, S FRINY g §6v SEON) TOMOF, r\)@ no. o (for Instances see in § 366. e 10 Remark According to sttra 464 of the Sabdanusasana (¢f. §§ 472. 498) some savants fised (A8Aryas) have employed an additional 7o after the regular terminations oo | )0 and 00, dropping their final s0nns, e. g. ¥HoMIMO (for &0, L.3on0mv0, Foed "JJO nooo, AV 1Yo, SwsBnonvo, 3@&53 00, TBINITIO0, FPETIMITV0, LI 1Yo, BBROFTV0, SRR mmo BP0 oo, cahfoommo AR EMOFNV0; e:aafo 7o, @m#omo, SRERTN0, , 400 194 ——n P — 148 ARETOFNO0, ete. It will be observed that these savants knew the forms 70 and %9 without the sénnd, to which they suffixed their mo. R04. With regard to the terminations of § 203 the question arises, which of them are radical, oo, Byo or Ry, 3o ? From etymological reasons we are inclined to consider =5 and ) to be original, as they appear to be nominal suffixes R (=n) occurring e. 9. in eugorto (of ewd) and AEIRy (of 3e3¢=a ¢5e%, see 3 and FEs2 in Dictionary), and 3 (=%) e. g. in 9ue0F (of uEN), wBB (of wad), 228y (of e?). According to this our opinion that the verbal forms with 7> and %o are nouns (bhivavacanas), e. g. x> would originally mean ‘a shining’, 23ry, ‘an uttering’, £Q@3;)\, ‘a saying’, @3y, ‘a becoming’, 3Redor, ‘an appearing’, [$eCd,, ‘a requiring’. This explanation at once makes it clear, why the forms by themselves have no reference whatever to tense, number and gender. Compare in this respect the verbal nouns (bhavavalanas) enead in § 194, remark 1, and BoRoYay in § 200, 1, those ending in enzo and ey in § 205, and those ending in R and < in the same paragraph. But why have ancient grammarians added the sénné? If we take the forms with o and 3y to be nouns, we most probably have to regard the sonné as a conventional sign of the nominative singular (¢f. § 114). Thus 39,0, etc. would be the nominative with the suffix o. 3 205 The forms of the imperative (vidhi, etc., § 146) are based partly on the relative present-future participle, partly on verbal nouns, as will be seen from the paradigms. 1, Paradigm of the forms of the imperative in the ancient dialect: Singular. Plural. 1st pers. (The first person singular of the e9o (a short form of <o, we; 3I’d pe future tense ending in 0, see see §§ 137. 138) suffixed to § 200, 1, according to the Sabdé- the relative present-future nusasana’s stitra 491, 7. e. SN0 participle’ e.g. 3AINVJ0 (5371)?5 or IRRI0, I shall do, :. e. let me +990) or 3RO (39 4 ©0), do! ®pBRIS0, let me worship!— literally ‘of attacking-we!’, This rule is not in the Sabda- let us attack! %xFo! ficfi%o! manidarpana.) SRBIZ0 or $339¢) 0! 2nd pers. @) 2o (another form of Jeo or @) the verbal theme, which in this case is a verbal noun (bhava- S0, you; see §§ 137. 138), JRS— 149 ] and Singular. Plural. vaéana, see § 100) used with suffixed to the verbal theme emphasis or the sense of a sign considered as a verbal noun, 565, of exclamation, e.g. 8™, (thy) BED. &3 00 or ‘3:5’(503060 (@50336 becoming (is required or request- + 90y, literally ‘ searching-ye!’ 800! ROO or () ed)! ¢. e. become (thou)! 2@, search ye! rng (thy) blowing (is required or re- fodyo! 30R0! Pno! Feero! B —Mj quested)! blow (thou)! Sw@d! 20! JINGO! fi:fio#éfijo! NG ;‘s’oédgsz VR ! IB ! wBono! ufin:fio! )\ TPRAV! FTees ! R o6 ! QO ! g0° OIm§ or §oV! ally b) the theme with final e9 (P332 ©3.0), most probably a verbal noun (see § 188), e. g. TG, (thy) giving (is required or requested)! 31»'?3 g 10 i.e. give (thou)! T¥! |31 Rodd k1, or fioflofiz JReB! INB! ¥T03 or and efdojofi! 293! (for W3, see §§ 206. 210). the ¢) the third person neuter singular b) the third person neuter singu- | the of the present-future tense with lar of the present-future tense 114) V3D, it being a verbal noun with e, e.g. SR, (your) (krillinga and bhavavaéana, see giving (is required or request- rtly § 200, 1), e. g. DD, (thy) giving ed)! ¢.e. give (ye)! may (you) give! [1 be (is required or requested)! ¢.e. give (thou)! mayest (thou) give! BRROFIRY ! INRRIJB or FRe) B! BIFOPY®! TT HRo! e 3rd pers. ol a) R, & or &, the forms being a) R, & or optionally @8_, suffixed in the same as those of the uure the very same manner as the 13 terminations ™o, o, FY0, ete. singular, e.g. 803, (their) do- LWV (see $§ 203. 204. The forms ing (is required or request- ed)! 7.e. (they) shall do! let Wet.a thus produced are in reality verbal nouns like V@, o6, (them) do! may (they) do! fi;j%a! TR, sjpwi, ete.; %ae'%, a’de%, ) F, BGT, ete.; see § 243, 4, 10. 12), e.g. fi03~>“<fi0336+fi), (his, her, its) \QO 0 130) doing (is required or requested)! JU— 150 e Singular. Plural. i. e. (he, she, it) shall do! let (him, her, it) do! may (he, she, ity do! B! e (or wWAER)! ORARF! éfiwf\z 3RERF! mmefif‘! 2! ARR! IRR! LB FoRon! 3rd per &sogafi! SPRBMN! HABR! SREIN! ( e5230RIN ! pee RO ! 3 AN!; —. 9TF! 3BF! SneTr! AneFF (or ARF)! 20967 (or ?Y, (or 2Y)! WTr! T ZSJDCD?\) !;—Q*)"v';! PET!; DR (of JWrRY)! INRT (of INRRY)! IO VB! PRF! dé%!;-fi%&?"%! sgm?};! dé@fiz b) the third person neuter singular b) the third person neuter singu- of the present-future tense with lar of the present-future tense eVT, €. g. B, (his, her or with ez, e. g. I, (their) its) giving (is required or request- giving (is required or request- ed)! i. e. (they) shall give! ed)! 7. e. (he, she or it) shall give! let (him, her or it) give! may let (them) give! may (they) (he, she, it) give! give ! Further instances see in § 367. 1t por ( 2 9 Paradigm of the forms of the imperative in the medimval dialect: Singular. Plural. 1st pers. (The first person singular of the (e90), @ (i. e. ®o without the future tense ending in o, NI euphonic sonné, see §§ 137. and ), see § 200, 2, e. g. TWBIZ0, 138), e. g. @RWS, let us utter! TR REINTY, TRRID.) 2nd pers. @) the verbal theme, e. g. 9%° or @) (@o), R (i. e. 80 without the 0, rise (thou)! So@! Bp3! [o° euphoniec sonné, see §§ 137. q0° 4+ the or 90! &Mo! d@;fio!, in which 138), B0 e case also themes like T200, guard honorific @, see § 193, re- (thou)! (for ¥3) appear (see 3, marks), e.g. @5, be ye! ! 2nd person in this paragraph). D! FeP! @Ja%! 3@«%!_%%6! 3noNd! Berd! Bpend! b) the theme with final e, e.g. Bt speak (thou)! 253! — 51 — Singutar. Plural. ¢) the third person neuter singular b) the third person neuter singu- of the present-future tense with lar of the present-future tense VT, e.g. BRBIDIY, see (thou) ! with evmo, e g. B m, solicit (ye)! 3rd pers. a) R, F, e.g. 3N, let (him, her or it) @) R, ¥ (as in the singular), e. g. DORR, let (them) guard! give! wcé)@:’mfi!._ =3¢} ! (In medi- @val-modern works, e.g. in the the Ramayana, we find also forms like 0o, Ram. 1, 6, for 8. b) the third person neuter singular b) the third person neuter singu- of the present-future tense with lar of the present-future tense ingu- VT, e. g. YFNT, let (him, her with evmd, e. g. SEID, let or it) eat! tense (them) walk ! ther) ¢) @9, for which see § 207, 2, a. ¢) &Y (§207,2 a), quest- give ! (they) 3, Paradigm of the forms of the imperative in the modern dialect: Singular. Plural. 1st pers. @) (The first person singular of the @) ¢, €3, (i.e.¥o without the plect future tense ending in » and euphonic sonné, see §§ 137. DRI, e, g, SNBII, INFE[I); IR 138), 2930 (¢. e. ¥0 with a eu- it the 3003, BIRGNRR.) phonic @v), 93 (7. e. VI ¥), 13T, €9e9 (a form in which the of U5 dental & has been changed into the cerebral %°), e g %?Q%”QS, let us hear! BRRVS! SRBBNT 1 -390 ! IR eEITH ! b the DRBITV! FIRNVTV! —SREH V! ! 137, XRMBIB! (see § 202)—3Bs¢ § ,the MII! SRBRI ! BHREMHBI ! — 3, ¢ BRERITIH! BRRHED! 93He! | o Lintemr Sndween! (see § 181, 7 90! note a; § 202). (The forms BRMRe, ete. are used also as verbal nouns; see § 315, D 2, /5§ 316, 10) — 152 s Singular. Plural. b) e9®, for which see § 207, 2, 0. b) & (§ 207, 2,0). 2nd pers. @) the verbal theme, e. g. 303, see a) 2, 20, ©d (vulgarly for 49), (thou)! Feo! vy 1 SoB! IR, in e.g. @9, be ye! INR! —JRRO! which case also the lengthened SNARO! BHREAD! FRMO! IR MO or TEONO! BREMD or BT themes T00! (for ¥9), W00X! (for 2 030%), B! (for T 035°), FDOI! 030! or, by contraction, F@eo! (for m03F), BRAV! (for 0 0kF) J@e0! BRrD! (¢f. §198,6)— appear (c¢f. $§ 48. 54. 92. 93). FeF0! JReREO! mfoz - b) the theme with final eo (see Nudigattu page 78 seq.), e. g. W ? JNEB, see (thou)! wae! IRB! J &odd! F3030! > ¢) the third person neuter singular b) the third person neuter singu- of the present-future tense with lar of the present-future tense - 9530, e. g. DRBITWY, see (thou) ! with €930, e. g, SRWWTR, 23903N0SF! FIRBNIR! see (ye)! <> 3rd pers. @) the third person neuter singular @) the third person neuter singu- of the present-future tense with lar of the present-future tense 9530, . g. BRISW, let (him, with ez, e. g. IB3IR, her or it) go! let (them) walk! b) ¢, for which see § 207, 2, b. b) e, (§ 207, 2, b). PA 206. An alphabetical list of irregfilar forms of the imperative is as 2 follows : adduC a0, (for 20 of 93y, the doubling of the T° being euphonic), be ye!, in the ey modern dialect. TR (for TR or T0¥), take (thou)!, in the medizval and modern dialect (stty SUlry (¢f. the Bw¢in § 187 under 2). @ (for #wew)), swing (thou)!, in the modern dialect (Nudigattu, page 86). § abdj 8Q, (i.e. 33°49, =280, ¢. v.), bring ye!, in the medieval and modern dialect. actop 32,0 (i. e. 38740, for 800 of S0°, the ©° having arisen of the past participle tlle 1 83) and being euphonically doubled), bring ye! (not in the text of the Puryg] éabdamagidarpar_la, but) according to the Sabdanusisana (sttras 492, (%6, 520 and Candraprabhapurana 3, 46) in the ancient dialect. £e :4@%6 (i.e. 33°+90), bring ye!, in the (medizval and) modern dialect (¢f. ¥&09). 4oy 3\5) (for 30 of 39), the doubling of the ©° being ecuphonic), bring ye!, in the modern dialect. 39 (for 28 of 8T° or 23), bring (thou) !, in the medieval and modern dialect, and, according to the Sabdanusisana (satras 519. 520), also f in the ancient one. 130! 390°%, 390y (for 30° or 83)), bring (thou)!, in the mediseval and modern 3000 o QW dialect. (It is, however, probable that the instances require 33 for Tw@' 3I0° or BIVY; cf. WAT°.) 390 (for 83 of 80° or 23Y), bring (thou)!, in the medieval and modern f)— dialect. WY, (le. V4B, =W, ¢.v.), come ye!, in the medieval and modern dialect. wo (e WS+ 90, the &° having arisen of the past participle @3 and being euphonically doubled), come ye!, in the ancient dialeet according to the Sabdanusisana (sitras 470. 492). ingt- '“QL@ (4. e. W 4-90), come ye!, in the medieeval and modern dialect. tense 20, (for WO of W3, the doubling of the ©° being euphonic), come ye!, in AN the modern dialect. 239 (for W3 of WU° or W), come (thou)!, in the medieval and modern dialect, and, according to an instance in NAgavarma’s Karnataka- bhashabhtishana (under sttra 27) and according to the Sabdanusisana ingl- (stitras 41. 385. 400. 519. 520), also in the ancient one. fense D):fifl 2090, 25200 (for WO or W3Y), come (thou)!, in the medieeval and modern dialect. (It is, however, probable that the instances require 233 for WIT® and WaBY; ¢f. BTL,) 2590 (for W8 of WT°), come (thou)!, in the ancient, medizval (and modern) dialect. is 08 207. There are three forms connected with the imperative still to be adduced. They are produced by means of the suffixes e9¢)o, ¢ and in the g9 )¢ 1 9 According to one translation of a rulein Késava's Sabdamanidarpana dialect (stitra 284, praydga) which has been adopted by the author of the Sabdanuiasana (see further on under No. 1), e&o is used ‘when (the g 86) action of) the second person of the negative (see § 209) gets the sense of lialect: the imperative” (madhyamapurushapratishédhada vidhiydl or madhyama- ficiplo purushapratishédhada kriyé vidhyartham Aadalli). The Mo 1n &80 of the (¥<° + @0) indicates that the second person plural is to be understood 490 (see § 205, 1, plural, a). Let us take e. g. the verbal theme =a0°, to approach. Of this the second person plural of the negative is ma0T*, 120 i ) 20 154 —— you do not approach, and zs89o would mean ¢you shall not or must not 00ca approach!’ (Cf. the use of ees under No. 3 of this paragraph.) Kesar allow But when considering the meaning of ¢® under No. 2, ¢ and b, the aud | medieeval and modern form of e®o, it might appear as if Késava’s rule faet required another translation, viz. ©@®o is used «when a prohibition (prati- 109 shédha, given) concerning (the action of) the second person (plural, e.g. 3, Qeo T Wew, you must not approach!) becomes an order or permission your (vidhi)” in an indirect form, so that 9390 means ¢ they may approach!’ (4, “let them approach!’, the o of the second person plural in zedes (the meaning of which see in § 208, 2) being retained in an honorific sense (Bhar (¢f" the honorific German ¢Sie’, they, used for English ¢you?) in order to the su 0w show that now kind feelings prevail where previously more or less aversion had obtained; compare with regard to w0 the free use made of used the honorific 0 of the modern dialect (see the Dictionary). In order army | to make KéSava’s rule in this form fully correspond to No. 2, ¢ and b, we omtm must, by implication, take for granted that not only the second person (Naci of the plural is to be understood, but also that of the singular, and that Y g0 1n this case too is honorific, so that mo®o signifies also <he, she or In the it may approach’. dko 1 Késava’s instances, as they are taken and adduced by him out of the Wi fe! context, mostly allow the meaning of both translations; they are (sitra let 1t | 234 of the gabdamanidarpana)—— RIBO0 | — maT90 ! w%@:figofiaw 0381%23 Write! T, — 5900 - P06 fiofio(g@fis“ &BRes afiwé?‘!—@domgdoo =90 fiU%%@ Do! — o LIRS ey, WRCOZF @ne! (page 258); but his instance g?u’) ¢ WBRe, BT8O0 BEITEI B398, gFovo! (page 68, which occurs in the WE 97 Sabdanusisana under its siitra 44 that treats of nipatas, as LRLe, 303 e 2090 HEITEI 55@5@3@30!) seems to show clearly the meaning of the second translation, 4.e. ‘“oho, may also the greatness of other things remain!?” .E% ¢ 5J§ § dl The Sabdanusisana (sitra 529), however, plainly and exclusively loyy teaches the meaning of the first tramslation; it says ieédo SENOLY bl []gf‘ means «“you must not trust women!” «“do not you (in any way) trust women (sarvatrapi striyd ma Sraddhata)!”, and esscdorzie SEO0! sha) all | ‘“you must not commit an improper act!” «do not commit an improper act (akiryam mé kurudhvam)!” n lt he | 2, a) In the medieval (and medizval-modern) dialect the form of ithey w90 is @& (4. e. wo 49, see § 205, 2 and 3, 2nd pers. plural, a), or Ste e 155 S, b 10t occasionally esede, and is used only in the meaning of the second translation of Késava’s rule (or in the imperative, § 205, 2. 3), expressing request, permission, allowance, concession, and wish regarding a third person or thing, singular the rule and plural, e. 9. 2@BCLOT, JTULAENY® 270 VBB RLBD ! sir may your ratl feet continually preserve me! (Basavapurina 27, 72); — egd3eg® ®om0 289! he is a vile person; (but what is that to us?) let him be! 6d 88100 (39, 47);— JdDY, H00IRonte® &Yy SRS BTOe! ISonNSe8FE? let your excellencies always be among you! why should they concern us? \ch (46, 15); — BdAT IR «n®! let Yudhishthira become king (the 8ense (Bharata 1, 8, 5); — D) ;’)d@wa%:d.@om?as w;fi Do RBoNHeSe® ! may er 10 the sun of Pampa’s Vlrupaksha give us joy! (Cannabasavapurana 1,2);— [ess DOWLDTI Wont BRBEO! o BRETTY IR0 AoBIIB), & War-cry de of used by elephant-drivers with the object ‘may it discomfit the hostile order army !’ (Nagirajiya); — $o0dys BRFO! Ry, IR regn, (a pill or) an b, we ointment made with the object ¢ (people) may smear the body (with it)!’ £r300 (Nadirajiya) | that b) In the modern dialect 9o has the same forms and meaning as he or in the mediseval one, with the only difference that e, e9de are used also interrogatively for the first person, e. g. @3 2380309 ! let him he 9390 2080309 ! let her write! gy wdo® write! (or he may write) kautta let it (the child) write 300 Wi ! let them (the men or women) Q)(\JJ W write! 53 23030©! let them (the children) write! B 9NN RS oeQ O ! let the calf suck (its) mother’s breast! Bezag=cy & ) (‘a:)d ? 3D mfi@t fance 420 %3@' let those who want (them) take these ripe fruits! c%eafido QDY n the T %?fi FO0 =oa® ! may God grant welfare to your children! & 3030 835 @o®! let (him, her, it or them) hold this word in mind! L \y HRoF S8 wv®! let only (thy, your or their) courage remain! bBwe of the thin, 0 25 w3 SR,3, 2eeIO? o, how shall I (or we) tell how great the beauty is? VIT DWed YRR, 0099? how shall I (or we) tell how great his & annoyance i18? Q[o), &8 BRFT, 2O IoO? whence shall I (or we) & 1817 el d\ Ojo bring four annas? SR& oy, 38y, BTN HewOe? shall I (or we) bring the bread and give (it) to the cow? o BRENAGY (6 6. BRCND + &) ? | frust shall I g0? 4Rz, o< SerRO? shall (or may) I do this? JEAUY gri®! means ‘let (him, her, it or them) become!’, and then also ¢let prope! it be, be it!’, and when repeated it gets the meaning of the English ¢either — or’ (see § 317). See § 316, 14 i)y O 20% 156 e — Note. ) The Sabdénusisana (sitras 524. 525. 526. 527, 529) teaches another use ) 2 07 of the ancient 9o, saying that it may stand for the ©° and ¥ of the infinitive i (see § 187) before B¢B or B¢&o, it is not requested, it must not, ete. (see § 209, 3 210) note 1). Its instances (under stitra 529) show that it wants to express the L second person plural by the %o in @90, for it translates 3 To 3B Do He@ or appi Beddo IF)Vo We®o, “you must not (in any way) trust women’” (sarvatripi striyé ma sraddhata). has 1 The | 3, Instead of the w@®o of No. 1 of this paragraph Késava’s sttra 6. ) and vritti (234) have the form of esesf, that of ©®o appearing only and alone in the praydga, ¢.e. in his first instances, quoted under No. 1. He, no doubt, accepted 5e to be the leading form to which ©o was to a) Infing be suffixed. But as to the second instances in the prayboga under his with vritti he introduces eef again, saying «when there does not occur the appe sense of permission (vidhyartha) in the action of the negative (prati- shédhakriyé)”, ¢. e. when a prohibition is not changed into a permission or when there is a direct prohibition or interdiction, * eseys is used” 18 11§ (vidhyartham allada pratishédhakriyéyol al akkum). His two instances 18 (a1 \ enter) with e9eys are:——iwé’\@%zss ¥o WA ! AB, IR RT3 WBelIsvo 230693, do not (thou) consider any other thing! verily, thy good disposition P/ is different, (and so) am I different, (but the good disposition of both Iy su / of us is beyond doubt). wIRO PYReF Yol 3, Resy RWeNd, the male (See § cuckoo which said (or says) ¢do not enter, do not enter the woodl’. A v the ¢ similar instance is in the Candraprabhapurana (2, after 93), wviz. Sty A é@fi@rafia&fi@@@d%r, afioa@fi;éfb@@ég 33}0%‘;63 PP BT 3 8, -Egajrofi Negat Pie Yo'l 23300 ’fddofiofié rieoy Anendeds Bariss, the sounds of phur) the male cuckoo which was in the branches with young leaves, said ¢if he as before enters to-day, it will be improper’, and cried out to Singy| b()t]l ( Kandarpa as it were ¢do not enter, do not enter (the wood)!’ (¢f. the use made of @®o according to the first translation of KéSava’s rule W n the under No. 1) Presgy The Sabdanuiisana (sutra 528) has the following instances: — lu e3F B wRmvo PRl do not enter this wood! (yliyam étad vanam ma pravisata). AT SH BoRcSvo Swemer ! do not look at this house! lengt} (yiyam étad griham ma paSyata). o33N, Qe oJd — I\ 5 Bonws @é&%& e ! devotees, do not you engage in Angaja’s sport! (bhd yatayd bhavantd aCCOY( madanakriydyam ma pravartadhvam), G B —— 157 208. How are we to explain the possibility of the use made in 56 § 207 of 9o, 9O and eses? litive It rests on the meaning of the infinitive (see §§ 170. 171. 187. 188. 209 3 the 210) which in the present case ends in ey, B or 1, In the instance za389o (R20eF + B0), you shall not or must not fripi approach!, z9der means <to approach, yet to approach’, 7. e. approaching has not yet taken place (and shall not do so), and o means ¢you’. The primitive sense of zaT8o, therefore, is ¢you are yet to approach’, jutra and 4. e. you have not approached yet (and shall not do so0). \0, | 2, When =890 (F98% + Bo) Or Xl (mo0of 4+ ) means ‘they may approach!’ <¢<let him, her or it approach!’ the meaning of the as o r his infinitive zooes is that of a verbal noun, wiz. approaching, combined with the sense of a sign of exclamation and with the honorific o or (g} A r the ‘approaching!’ ¢ (his, her, its, or their) approach may take place!’ praf 3, When the infinitive with eses¢, without the honorific @0 and g, 5100 sed” is used prohibitively, as in Ynes, do not enter!, the primitive meaning 1068 is (analogously to that of maTef4 w0 under No. 1) ¢yet to enter’, 7. e. 70 entering has not yet happened (and shall not do so). sifion 209. The conjugated negative (pratishédha, § 146) of the verb is formed oth by suffixing the personal terminations of § 193 to the infinitive ending in € male (see §§ 170. 187, 2, and note 2 of this paragraph), with the exception of i the terminations «3s, w3y, ¥3,, 3. (4 A difference, however, regarding those terminations in the conjugated firofi negative is that, instead of evzo and ens3) of the neuter singular and ids of plural of the ancient dialect, eszs> and eag3) are used; enzmy, the neuter id ¢if singular in the medieval dialect, becomes eoz30; (in the modern dialect ut 0 both e9z0 and essy) remain). f the What has been stated in § 170 about the doubling of final consonants ; rule in the formation of the negative participle remains in effect also in the present case. Cf. 215, 1, f. g5~ In the three dialects the themes 8o, to bring, and 200%, to come, always gfl,llfim lengthen their s, changing it into e, in the conjugated negative. 10use | The conjugated negative is used for the present, past, and future tense, 1 )8 according to circumstances (¢f. § 170). yantl Concerning its original meaning see § 210. p— 158 — 1, Paradigms of the negative in the ancient dialect: 9 one of JLeRy, to see. diale Singular. Plural. Lst pers. RPewo (i. . IRE 4 0), T do not see, I did RRERBJ) Istp not see, I have not seen), I shall not see. 2nd pers. RLEEOISF. RReRTE fnd | 3rd pers. drd p mase. SOeEO0. SReBO° fem. SPeBEYS. RPeED° fe neut. JLCRTV. SREBY 1 one of evC®, to remain. Singular. Plural. st pers. euCPO300 (i. . QU0 4 »0), I do not remain, eESP 03053 o Vi I did not remain, (I have not remained), I shall not remain. g (v 2nd pers eI O30 03¢ . eGP R T* 3rd pers liale masc e300, e 03008 fem. enCI2030%¢ . L O30 0° Ist D neut. N C O30T, e 03053 one of Qe to stand. 2nd D Singular. Plural. 1st pers. 23920 (i.e. d2 for dV420), I do not stand, 23 . 3rdp I did not stand, (I have not stood), I shall not stand. 2nd pers QO of fo 83&30033‘. il 3rd pers masc 20 T° fem Qe . AV T° neut SR W ( @ec)odo. one of 3v¢, to hring. 1] Plural Singular. igleg 1st pers. 3980 (390 for 33+ 20), I do not bring, I did 3903 88con not bring, (I have not brought), I shall not fol » bring. Sm()‘u 2nd pers 39003, 3900° 3rd pers 13> masc 3900, 3200° Verhy fem S90%F. 3200° neut. etc.z 39030, Bleby) Sug N oo 159 e 2 L) A paradigm of the negative of Jseecdd, to see, in the medizval dialect : Singular. Plural. 1st pers. SReBo, BREBRY, e, I do no§ see, RPOB). ete., ete. 2nd pers. SReR. SRRV (4. €. RPLE+ AD). 3rd pers. mase. RPET0, BRCRRY, (806R). (RPETRTF), NPCBRT, fem (RReRY), BwerRyo. (RPeRT*), SWeRT. neut. SRR, NPT ). Other instances in the first person singular are e. g. 932030, euC® 0oy, wuerads (of ewer); Fdodo, TR, TAN (of FR); ASo, RS, 3G or Ao, ASRY, AS (of Ref); wedo, wadwY, 2wad (of woF). 3 9 A paradigm of the negative of Jeew>, to see, in the modern dialect: Singular. Plural. Ist pers. SReRF9, Swew, I do not RPEBT). see, ete., ete. 2nd pers. W0, RREBEO (i. e RReR + 90, see Nudi- gattn page 78). 3rd pers. mase. SRCERY, NRCR. PR T0. fem NPT H, SPERTV. neut. RLEBIV. RPCTB). Other instances in the first persofi singular are e. g. #0030, ©C° o3y (of wee); "By, IR (of 8R); 98wy, 393 (of ). The conjugated negative is somewhat seldom used in the modern colloquial dialect (except in proverbs and in the verb cef, see § 316, 12), and its second person plural 3we¢zRd is anomalous, its termination @9 standing for 20, The same dialect generally uses the third person neuter singular of the (present-)future tense which is a bhavavaana (§ 200, 1. 3), and the infinitive with ey (®ef) which too is a bhivavatana or verbal noun (§ 188), followed by = (see note 1), e. g. FRB[OY, TR @9, the first form for the present. and future (I, etc. do not give, I, ete. shall not give), and the second one for the past (I, etc. did not give). Bee 88 D08 8. 209, 1.'2; 816,'1.2; 368. — — 160 [} d\ When in the ancient dialect repetition of the conjugated negative dialec (§ 211, 6) is used, the first verb may drop its personal termination and o, the ¢ of the infinitive, e. g. 2590, 25980 (for 25980 25930, Sabdanusisana ’ the | stitra 39 8). Cf. ©3 ©EYB in § 170. they Notes. L It is a peculiarity of the only two defective verbs 2, to be fit, and 8&° perso 198 (another form of @%°), to be, that in the three dialects they have the forms v DELS0) and Qe for all persons in the singular and plural of the conjugated negative. third The formation is the following: the infinitives are ®® and @Y, to which ¥ is added with the regular doubling of the final ©° of the theme, this © represent- ) 2 % ing all the personal terminations (¢f. the suffix @Y in § 243, and see their use §2 in §§ 298; 316, 1. 9). The meaning. of ®® and ¥, depends on their nomina- appea tive or subject which is either expressly put or is to be supplied (see § 210). as we Occasionally a euphonic sdnné may be added to ¥¥ and @2, so that we get 80 | ©Q o, B o (see ¢.g. Sabdanu3isana sttra 523 ; § 298, 4; § 300), which (s0nné) may change into <% or o =6 when it meets with a following vowel. The same nd p Negat holds good with regard to 23ea3 of ¢@), to be required, and, with the sonng, Sed@o (see e. g. Sabdanushsana stira 524 seg.; $§ 207, note; 316, 5). In the I\ modern dialeet & of R (§ 316, 15), to be proper, is another instance of hased this kind. The Sabdinusisana (sitras 19. 584) introduces also €873 or 3779, 83 for @nw. 170 p The grammarian Késava calls 99 a particle (avyaya) that partakes of the of tin nature of a verb (kriydtmaka); see § 212, 7; 298. g i 2, When the author has stated at the beginning of this paragraph that in yeb £ the conjugation of the negative the personal terminations are attached to the infinitive with ¢, he seems to be at variance with what Ké&Sava in and under 1y g his stitra 216 writes, véz. that a verb’s theme (dhatu, according to his instances 10! b g a theme ending in 9V) appears when one removes the termination (vibhakti) ®o ATy of the conjugated negative (pratishédhakriy®), so that e. g. the themes 89, ‘T she SRBY, TR®E are formed from B8RO, SIPBo, TLBO; but because his ruale is 1t o superficial (see § 143) and therefore seems to give only a certain practical hint the to students, we must not lay too much stress on its wording, and not conclude Supph that SRR+ o, INWI 4 Wo, FRRI4 0 showed the exact final rule for the tO be formation of the negative; we have to take the infinitive with final ® and the termination ©0, i. ¢. 8%¢B . ¥0, INE - ¥, FHE + 0 in order to get BRWO, INF0, § 209 ¥»&0, and find the theme by removing the termination and by adding ¢V in 01‘ wi the instances given by Késava. Propg EXlgf) 210. In examining the origin of the conjugzated negative we have to (wil reject the thought, as if the change of the suffixes evz@o and evsg) into ot 161 ive o and 3 could help us to find -it, for already in the ancient and dialect we have, side by side with evzy, @3> (that is another form of yang 30, §193 under remarks) as a termination of the past tense, and the positive forms %53, they are (§ 194, remark 1) and 236%@ they scratched (§ 198, 1); then in the medieval one e53) in the third kL person neuter plural of the present, past and future tense (§§ 194; ) 198, 4; 200, 2; 201, 2. 3), and in the modern one ezo in the third person neuter singular of the future tense (§200,3) and w5 in the 1tivé: 1 third person neuter plural of the past and future tense (§§ 198, 360t~ 55 200, 3). Also the change of the vowel e into & in 3gf and wos [ Use (§ 209) cannot assist us to do so, as some other monosyllabic verbs ning- appear in their positive forms with long and short vowels (see §§ 52. 53), 10), as we have the positive forms sadef, 2900 for 8def, wder (§ 187, 1), 6 gof 3938 for 33 (§ 187, 4), 393, 2393, 39, wo for 33, wg, 3o¢, wos (§§ 205, 1, png) 2nd pers., b; 205, 2, 2nd pers., b; 2006), 250 for wm (§ 184), and the Same negative forms 333, w3V for 3937, wo3a (§ 170), onn, n the There can be no doubt that the origin of the conjugated negative is ee of based, as has been stated in § 209, on the so-called infinitive ending in 1o, es (§ 187) in the same manner as that of the negative participle is (see § 170). That infinitive originally was a verbal noun and only in course of the of time came to get its specific meanings (§ 188). Thus e. g. SweR at first ‘to see’, ‘about to see’, meant ¢seeing’, ‘a seeing’, and thereupon ot 10 ‘yet to see’. RRedo (RWER+ o), therefore, signifies ¢a yet to see-I’, 7. e. 0 1he my seeing (is or was) yet to be or (will be) yet be, or my seeing (is) ander 41065 not actually existing, (was) not so, or (will) not be so, whence we arrive at the meaning ‘I do not see’, «I did not see’, ¢ (I have not seen)’, ) 9 | é.), ] shall not see’.—Regarding the meaning of BO ey 3o and R e 18 it has been stated in note 1 of § 209 that their meaning depends on mf their nominative or subject which is either expressly put or is to be I clde supplied. Originally they denote ¢a yet to be fit—’, ‘a yet to be—’, ‘a yet r the to be required—’, ‘a yet to be proper—’, (the dashes denoting the & of d the § 209, note 1), . e. fitting (is, was or will be) yet to be, being (is, was R0 or will be) yet to be, requiring (is, was or will be) yet to be, being W proper (is, was or will be) yet to be, or being fit (is or was) not really existing or (will) not be so, being (is or was) not really existing or (will) not be so, requiring (is or was) not really existing or (will) (4 0 not be so, etc. Now if for instance 3o (¥33), he, becomes the | info 21 P — 162 —— subject, the translation is ¢he is not fit, he was not fit, he will not )y ‘he is not, he was not, he will not be latl e fit" ‘he is not required, he was not required, he will not be required’, etc. (f. the prohibitive forms 0né of the infinitive with ese 1n § 208 5 w\f That ego and e:3) are suffixed for engo and evs) is very probably 6 done to show off the use of the infinitive with es in the formation of of th the tense NDJol 211 In § 152 (¢f. § 165, b, 13 170) there is the statement that frequentative or iterative action of the verb is expressed by simple or triple first repetition Without respect to the various meanings created by that oh) process (see § 339) we give here a number of instances as they occur this in the three dialects:— 1, regarding doubling the verb without any alteration (in the parti present, future, past, imperative, infinitive, participle, and conjugated her negative) PUED LD, (20e9Y, BVERY); "309) Cfio@ (! (Qflog) ML) do) BRETYF R J BREHYF T, ogjaewo opeso, efi% (e.s%’a efivo), TOTY HOTY, VTWIBTIRY of th (BT VTOBY), TR H°WY; @dmadodo (dCSoCSJ SHITY), FEYo T o, PeTo BPeRo, zos 035° &)co 68T &m m@w - (2»3) 2 W :Sa) '@Joofns FR OIS, two 959 039, DVSEY ‘B 20, B8 BB, 1B 1B, IO JTF, TBECA BELN, TRE 16 3%¢, ©nwen® (UnO snY); sAd TRR, BN IR, wiRd (for wd wi) &S1039, N3, (eimaa Efim@a) BRWIE (YR BR), I8 I8, ¥ 3y, of th (283, ¥3y), YOERY EDY (WVEDY YVERY), m§o u;fio S8 G5, 2~§ uafi 23930 afte w5900, WeB WeR; 2 9 regarding tripling the verb without any alteration (in the imperative, past, and past participle) &z%mc&@ =) (W@ zozéo W), Wiy hefo, Wa); P3O fiJaoi)No (2020 R &m 0 B b No) %ozéo %gcéo BOR, 3@@650 &@ezéo SRR 209 239 239 zoaio NN Ee) ufio BROEDV £90 £ (emeao QVEDD YVED ) ; ;- a9 Il.), 9y regarding doubling the verb, dropping ees (or also @I+ (Wl i. e. »3) of the first one (in the infinitive) Rpen RLeNw, WO WIWO TRR TRBS 4, regarding doubling the verb, dropping the termination of the qu ) past participle of the first one, e. g. TR FRRY, TOB TR, FTCF* FTOWIN ¢ 230 (see § 165, b, 1), and also its vowel, e. g. 3% I, 31 3330 g (see § 165, b, 2), to which class may likewise be referred the doubled \45) negative participle dropping its e, viz. 33 3.3, dv VB, VB VBB Y § 170) Wou — 163 — not 5, regarding doubling the verb, dropping the termination of the , he relative present participle or that of the present participle of the first ity one, e.g. BReB FRERT, SR SRN;Y BT BT, WwT WG, Rwen BRERS, ; ably 6, regarding doubling the verb, dropping the personal termination 0 of of the first one, e. g. P[pexw Jpedo, B[pes Tpedo, W WF 03F, 39T 235980 (for 25980 25930 or 2393 wodo, see § 209); that 7, regarding doubling the verb, dropping the final syllable of the riple first one, e. g. 38 &3y, 3R® 3PN, B[ICI [Ny, B[R SBHNRY, that d 300 BenEe (see § 165, b, 3, and ¢f. § 183, 7 and remark 1 and 2 of 00U I this paragraph; ¢f. also § 253, 3; § 243, 4, 16); the 8, regarding tripling the verb, dropping the termination of the past ated participle of the two first ones, e. g. W& W& B3 (§ 165, b, 2, remark, where 2@ wi@d Swys is adduced as a peculiar form); FI 9, regarding tripling the verb, dropping the personal termination N e g of the two first ones, e. g. & e o (w3, ¥T, ¥l0), W W W o 10, regarding tripling the verb, dropping the last syllable of the oiF, two first ones, €. g. 30% 30% 3w, BF BF Vo (see § 165, b, 3, AN =N remark). Cf. also 33 83 I@onv. A 11, Observe also the curious repetition of verbs wherein the initial e of the second one is changed, e. g. 3wREy NBYRy, 338 NFT. Cf. § 303, 1 530 after e. Observe also the colloquial expression e 3 9 (for 33 29). Remarks. the 1 Also by setting a sort of adverb whieh is of the same root as the verb, before the verb and occasionally doubling it repetition is expressed, e. g. 3 ¥D0RY; 3B IRM, 3B IBINY; DOV JVBITY; MBI IBITI; NI QIQRY, AT I ¢ e 0 7Y, — 29806 2883° 28¢e; z&égj z%égj?‘é 23ee0; IR IB VRONY; 38 IBS IBONY; 33 T[oed 30 )i fio; 08 BB TOEOTY; TV TV SVEINY; N MBI VBTV, B MBI NBITY; ) o) DD DM D00W; DB B NOW. j@«, It is possible that some of the instances are connected with No. 7 above. 2, Of double nouns not seldom verbs are formed by means of 8% (§ 149 the seq.) which may be regarded as frequentative ones, e. g. @& SOV (of w8 Jod), R WARY, BB RBRY, TR TOR, TS FOR, F¢ TR, TE IR, To TR, 1B VAR, W, [AY) AR MR, fo ROR, MR TRRY, TR TARY, T Roray, 37 WaRY, 3¢ S9AY, 3¢ PIONR), 3¢ BYRY, BF BYRY, FIN JONRY, T ZE*RY, X3 BORY. led il A7 ) 10 1) R[pez and So@ might however be Swed® and JPBL (see § 181, note ¢) s0 that there would be no dropping. 21% —_— 164 0td VI. On adverbs, etc. (See’§ 281 seq.) 1gss; 212. In the present paragraph a class of words is introduced which the m are called indeclinables (avyaya) by Kannada grammarians; some of the o words they term also particles (nipata, see remark 1). Many of the words would be called adverbs by Europeans. f;‘,ir‘io long ¢ The expression of ‘indeclinables’ is not quite exact, as some admit (); ¢ of being declined, to which the letter d (declinable) in parenthesis will that t be added in the alphabetical lists given below. this £ These alphabetical lists are composed of the adverbs, etc. found in M= L IEWY, the Sabdamal}.idarpana and Sabdanu$isana. The adverbs, etc. contained med in these two works belong to the ancient dialect and are left unmarked ; i if they occur also in the medieval one, they are marked with med. .zg P § (medizeval) in parenthesis; and if they are used also in the modern fime one, with mod. (modern) in the same parenthesis; the additional words day in brackets have not been met with in the ancient one. Slight differences f0-mo of form in the three dialects have not been regarded. A few words and 2ol peculiar meanings rest on the Sabdanuiisana. “}f 1B Numeral adverbs T 1, (exceptionally arranged according to their natural order). DR beforg w3OF, once (med.); 9IF, twice; I0OBF, thrice; FOIF, sometimes; SONF, ayhy several times; @AJF, a thousand times. [%3, once, B3, twice, PRy, {his thrice, are other forms in the medieeval dialect; %) oceurs also in the mod. one.] See § 279. 1 {he and | 2, Adverbs of place. 1, ©8, ©8¢°, that direction; in that direction (d; med., mod.) ; ©S &, after, afterwards; ©9, there (d; med., mod.); 938, 93 &%, this direction ; in this direction (d; med., mod.); AWT°, the front; in the front (d; med., mod.; mod. also 283, (The 2B ; 99, here (d; med., mod.); VS, @v3 F, in this intermediate direction; © @9, in this intermediate place; ©3, 23 &°, what direction ? (d; med., mod.); 29, aby I where? (d; med., mod.) ; &3, together with (med., mod.) ; %908, in, within, into €S (med., mod.) ; 38, together (med., mod.); %R, below (med., mod.); S0, BoFeF, Slm; la the south; in the south (4; med., mod.); 883, in the middle (med., mod.) ? IR, EXcey S@TY, the west; in the west (d ; med., mod.) ; 3, behind (mod.) ; S&f, behind ; meg Zpen, outside (med., mod. Bwer); WAR, WIRS, the north ; in the north (d; med., VW0 mod.); @&, dee? B¢, separately, apart (med., med.); 78, in front; forward ll]gl\~ (med., mod.) ; ST, JoRBEF, the east; in the east (d; med., mod.); 39¢°, above G § (d; med., mod.); 39¢5, above (med., mod.); R8Y, around; that surrounds (d; med., mod.). (meg [%, that side; on that side (d), 8 this side; on this side (d), (8 X Ll 165 SRR 5900%3, in advanee, first, oceur in the med. and mod. dialeet ;—®&3, ©& 3, near- ness; near, close by (d) belong to the med. one, and appear as ®33, T3, in hich the mod. one.] the 3, Adverbs of time. ords ©8Y, that time ; then (d; med., mod.) ; ®80, at the time that, when; (so that); ¥R no=wgo (see § 365 ; until, in med.); ¥IF%o, WIISNo, until that time, so Imit long as; @SRB0, ¥SNBI=VF0 (§ 365; VSRBES, med.); 1B, that time; then (d); ©¥N%, that time; then (d; med.); ¥JINo, continually (med.); o, ¥3°, from yill that time, afterwards (med.); ¥S0=v30 (§ 365); WSno=vI0 (§ 365); B, 1 m this time; to-day (4; med., mod.); 8370, up to this time (in med.); a3 Co, 9], &8N0, until this day ; S1AE), this moment ; now (d.) ; HN%C, this time ; now (d; ined med.) ; &I, a little while ago (d); ¥VS), at this intermediate time; #v3,ITo, hed Q3 =8T0, up to this intermediate time; ©%), when? (4; med., mod.); ~§ o, med 23,380, 3, 7870, till what time?; &3, forthwith (med.); S©09203%, subsequent lern time ; subsequently, afterwards (d; med., mod.); 398v°, at dawn; RR, the ords 398 ? day after to-morrow; on the day after to-morrow (d; med., mod.); 16es to-morrow (d; med., mod.); 8, yesterday (d; med., mod.); pw B (Jpwe?, and pee, P e®, PBe?), daybreak; at dawn (d); W& (d), WWTo, WXT, WPT,0, 2063’61, w030, afterwards (W, W*F, med., mod.; WFo, &)6393;, 2«00395;0, med.); 2BMoe?, again (med.); S328°, that is before; before (4; med., mod.) SRR3R, SRIORD, some time ago (d); S8, the day before yesterday; on the day before yesterday (d; med., mod.); RS¥H, at daybreak; I3%%, daybreak; at F, daybreak (d). [¢7, that time; then (d); &7, this time; now (d); &, after 0 7‘3\)\, this, afterwards, are med. and mod.; %% % appears as 303 8 and B, (d) mod in the med. dialect, and as ®032&° (d) in the mod. one; FW&ES, forthwith, and @93, at dawn, are mod. words; BB, S, BHZH, (i ¢. BRI, BOWE 8 ¥), at daybreak, early (mod.); regarding %=y, still, ete. see Dictionary.] fter Adverbs of circumstance and manner. otion 4, (The meanings given are to be somewhat modified according to circumstances.) )@531 o8 &, abundantly, exceedingly; 0, soever: whatsoever; ©0ddo, Ho; abundantly, exceedingly; ©3, ¥R TP, VRTIRW® =V, ete. ¥, VI 29, nto (3% Sabdanusisana), 98, ©8 Ip0°, ©3 e, in that manner, in like manner; like ; similar to ; in the manner in which (¥8), ©3, med., mod.; ©334 med.) ©od) i) )% excessively, exceedingly (med.); ©383), ©3, &3 ever, g little, to some extent (¥ mda med.) ; ©Q 3e°, causelessly; ©BR = 9, ete. (med.); €00, soever: whatsover; @0, further; @338, ©dy3, vehemently, quickly; ¥2FSo, excessively, exceed- wd 1 ingly ; a3y, a8, (98,0 Sabdanusisana), 93, in this manner (932, med., mod. ; ard )07 32,8, med., also 9L ; 9333, in a proper manner; BN, in this manner (med.) ; 20 I3, greatly, much; ¥0SY, @03, in this intermediate manner; how ; (%0 Sabdanusasana); *0s &, how ? (¥%0 Sabdanusisana); “vd, silently (38& o @ — P — 166 in th Sabdanusisana); eUIFIo, excessively, exceedingly ATO, WATR, silently N [k (202TR, med.); T by degrees, slowly, irresolutely; N spamously, extensively; w32, O3, how? (9%, med., mod.); 232>, how? (FFo Sabdanusisana; med.); 23R, how? (med.); ©7o, most certainly; @0, certainly (dF 3FFO SabdAnush- ] sana); w33, clearly, evidently; ¥®, excessively ; swiftly (med.); I8, TR, () fragrantly, deliciously (med., mod.); T30, excessively, greatly (med), ?035 mod suddenly; 3&3) (0. r. $er®), closely, densely; T¥3, redly (med., mod.); §§O the excessively, exceedingly 803, Worvl, WS, in a shrill, piercing, rough one| manuer; 1@, [, certainly (13, med., 3> is used in emotion and command); 1@ e, quickly (med.; T9¥1%, mod.); AR, A S, spinningly, round and round (med.); § RoeIROSYR, inactively, silently ; D@3, quickly ; 88,3, quickly (med.) BB YB quickly (see & 307, a); ¥, quickly; 3¢ 0o, quickly ; 2% 5o, manifestly, clearly, conj 3OR, 3B certainly ; S¥Ws, with embarrassment (in speakin med., mod.) this coolly, refreshingly (med., mod.); 3¥=0¥0, decisively (REOF 0329 Sabdanusasana); 3¥8¥, 3686 ghttermg]y (med.); éé&z’ qé& 8esfi 29 ®, whirlingly, round and he round (2273, med.); (38,3, see § 307, a); ‘§ 5 thmly (med., mod.); $¢30, not firmly, irresolutely (¥ GEF®Fo Sabdanuba%ana), 3ed3¢t0, by degrees, siowly, §10 irresolutely ; $»8R, 8»83, vehemently (med.) (3933, see § 307, a); TR at th wearisomely (med mod.) nod certainly (med.); Nod, with consternation mod (med., mod.) ; 3%, excessively, greatly, further (med.); 2%, Jo, certainly ; dRFT° (med 2RF00, causelessly; @), @0, extensively, excessively; S0@T, 0T, softly S6¢ e (med., mod.); S2¥%, much, exceedingly; &7, SWR, clearly, distinctly, nicely wher (med., mod.) ; 3WR, BUT, vehemently (&drcfidr o Sabdanmana) : 8¢°, exceedingly ; Wher much (med.); (Kmv 3, see § 307, a); oo?fi 95,3, suddenly (med., mod.); w?fifi par greenly (med.); 3338, quickly; 20w, 96’300 extenswely, greatly, further (med 551 inter exo, profusely, much, further IR, IR (ISR, IDR), suddenly; WRYS (meg quickly ; '8, in vain (med., mod.); wd®o, much, further; WK, VI, silently, \rwfi inactively; @337, W3R, silently; ¥, firmly, tightly; 03?35 hotly, warmly AN (med., mod.); w‘23 3o, quickly; % 0o, c]early (%39,5F0 Sabdanusasana}, B3¢ ®o, hat &8¢ @o, timidly, trembhrmly7 ?umuéw swiftly, quickly (med.); #%¢0¥e*, swiftly, 107¢ quickly, without restraint; @®¢33, swiftly, quickly ; 3983, other, different; 21 ¢ excessively, much (med.); 3291, 3¢ 3, slowly (med., mod.); 8o, FV0, JL 0, H&0, of A8, perpetually, constantly (med.); most certainly; clearly; (33,8, see § 307, a); ® 2033, sweetly; BomoR, ROTYF, silently, inactively (med., mod.); Anedo, AR®o till ¢ 3 wDC‘éO, much, more, further fomcgo wd@0, causelessly; 30, how? TI3 (BHR), WA T suddenly (med., mod.) [@%fi Q3N appear also as oan, BIOR, %o, %ton in the Uf, It med. dialect, and always so in the mod. one; 2®R is also B, o, N in the AN} med. dialect, and always ©313, B30 in the modern one.] Regarding DBR TN BoN—JN, o’oDfi o‘SDfi o)fi\) _*Qfifi see S X200 (&3\65 a tadbhava of =3033F, may be adduced hele §00, ¢. g. S 3963 or B FOR, in this manner, thus; OFT BF B0 Wwhig 33638, according to his command. Samskrita 5,590 is similarly used, e. g. 8 $,533 Ong a—— 167 ntly in this manner; ®%e 530, according to that; V9T I,TICOF, in various ways. ely; Likewise ¥,5), 80, 0t2, 33 are used. C’f also 3%3)530536, 3&@5)@,) d ) 9 Conjunctions. (:; W) ®o, ®o, and (med.); w3, again, further, and; We*, again, further; =030, 03 . a ~57 again, further, and (med.; 393, mod. ) also the form =989 is used in the i\ mod. dialect); 39¢%°, farther, and, or (med.). [@vo appears also as @V, YW in the medieval dialect, and generally as ¥Ww, exceptionally as @ in the modern ]‘[c')’ one.] See §§ 284 seq.; 297. () 6, Postpositions. = W Several of the above-mentioned adverbs of place and time and of the tly conjunctions are used also as postpositions; they are adduced under o3, this heading again, but without their meaning. 1a); Postpositions, 4.e. words and letters (particles) placed after, or at and the end of, nouns, pronouns, participles, etc. (see § 282), are: 100 ¥, a particle of emphasis; a vocative particle; ¥o; @3 (¥38o, ete., see iy, " =< § 109, a, 5); ©3,0°; ©33; VY TIOT; B3 ; VI IPO°; VI ; W 0; VI To; WO, in; to; ol at the time that, when, whilst (med., mod.; see §§ 109, a, 5. 187, 1); ¥ (med., ion mod.; see §§ 109. 117 seq.); ¥=0; &, a particle of emphasis; a vocative particle fily (med., mod.); %, there (med., mod.); %o, from that place or time; thence (med.; see e. g. §§ 109. 120, a, 3); AQT°; 40; BIM0; YV; YVO; YVBO, at the time that, oly when (§ 286); ¥\¥; », by means of, from (see § 109, a, 3); », at the time that, Iy 38, when; so that (med.; see § 187, 4); », &, particles of emphasis; vocative particles; particles of interrogation (med., mod.); %, &, vocative particles; particles of d. interrogation (med., mod.); %®&, together with, along with (med., mod.); 3, if )0 (med.); 29, (0¥°), in, within; into (med.; see e.g. § 109); w¥8; 398; 28 ; iy nly Ppwr; WPFo, VT, WPT0, wers,, werodo; S8, as far as; till (med., mod.) 3 =008 5 39185 FT0, VMo, until; FPe®, IPew?, like; as; in the manner in which; so 20, that (med.; see § 242). [©&, if, another form of %%, appears in a SAsana of 1y, /Jfi 1076 A. D. (99 %), in one of 1123 A. D. (23 %, ¥3%), in one of 1181 A.D. (39,8 =Be @), and in one of 1182 A. D. (3¥3B); 23 occasionally has the form #0 W) of ©@ and ©3 in the med. dialect, and always that of ©3 in the med. one;—VIT, J) till (med., mod.); &7, at the time that, when (med., mod.); ©3 (see sub @), wed; ¥ WK, together with (mod.); &Rom, LAXS, &85, on account of (med.; o) %38 also mod.); 83%, till, until; as far as (med., mod.); 3989%, for, on account hie of, in order to (mod.); WA, Wik, on account of ; concerning; for, in order to (mod.); he #3023, previously, before ; 3203 ; B} ; BRSF, except (mod.). | Dfi' he 7, Some verbal forms, ete. o which are classed under the avyayas by the éabdénuéasana, but of which only oM one, Viz. AY, (see § 209, note 1), is called an avyaya b’y the Sabdamanidarpana. P 168 et T They are: the s W) (=an YR30 § 122 or VYRR, of ¥&°, § 209, note 1), a bhavavaéana of kb or verbal noun, (literally ‘a yet to be fit-it’, ‘a not actually being fit-it’, used soun( for all persons singular and plural, expressly put or not, in the three tenses, viz.) clang I am not fit or meant, thou art not fit or mednt, he, she or it is not fit or meant ; (in th we, you or they are not fit or meant; I was not fit or meant, ete., ete. (see (inb 88 301. 338); @3, (i. e. ¥V, 4+ ) am I not fit or meant? ete.; I am indeed not jhum fit or meant, ete. (§§ 301. 338); ©O (or ¥Y0; see § 209, note 1; § 210; med., with mod. ; § 300); ©28, except (see §§ 170. 171 ; med., mod.; §§ 301, 338); Y30 falatg — ¥00, either —or, § 293; AL, (or 9Y,0; see §209, note 1; § 2105 med., mod.; mod) mod. also QJ; see § 298, 1-4; § 316, 1.2); @YE, in absence of, without mod) / (see §§ 170. 171; med., mod.; § 338); 20, wholly (§ 301); ¥m0, what shall dm,@z I do? (med.; §301); ©8° what? how? why? (med., mod.; §301); 3o, mod) l what shall T do? (§ 301); @& (or ¥eBo; see § 209, note 1; § 210; med, nglk mod.; §§ 301. 318, 5). mod) patte 8, Interjections. of fl ©3 ah! (in admiration); alas! (in affliction or grief); T Y, ©T Wy, alas! (in Strea affliction or grief, med., mod.); ah! (in wonder or surprise, med.); [©39, ha! ah!, sou in surprise and in grief, med., mod.]; ©o3a;¢, alas! (in affliction or grief, med., (in ¢ mod.) ; ah! (in pity, med., mod.); ©®B, alas! (in grief); aha! ah! (in surprise, med., mod.) ; ®®B0, oh! alas! (in pain); ®BR¢, oh! (in pain); ho! stop!; ¥, alas! (in affliction or grief); &% ah! (in surprise, med., mod.); alas! (in affliction or grief, med., mod.); 93, fie! (med., mod.); @V, fie!; @v¢, ah! ha! (in pleasure); A fie!; alas! (in pain or sorrow); ¥, fie!; ¥\, alas! (in pain or sorrow); 23, well, all right! certainly!; 203, 20R0¢, 28, 088, 2S¢, ah! oh! (in recollection); let us l\%’\ ‘ see! (in deliberation or investigation); ho! halloo! (in ecalling, med., mod.); Kam 8.32¢, ho! stop! (med.); o! alas! (in pain); 233, fie! (med., mod.); ¢ fiel; Visi ®33, oh! woe to me!; Bre, Beg B2¢ ho!stop! (med., mod.); o! alas! (in & 9 pain, med.). Cf. § 308. Unfe 9, Imitative sounds. fi\m‘g; M (both Imitative sounds (anukarana, anukaranapada, anukriti), 4. e. sounds used in imitation of the effects of the operations of nature (as the rolling ano] Unfg of thunder, agitations of water, pattering of hail-stones, voices of birds, 10 &; bodily functions, falling, breaking and the like) are very frequent in bdox Kannada and essential parts of the language; in fact there is scarcely [ Such sounds are L any sound in nature that has not been imitated in it. Cong often idiomatical and therefore strange to the ear of foreigners. For ity the vast number of imitative sounds the Dictionary is to be consulted. 169 Those mentioned in the Sabdamanidarpana and Sabdinusisana are FITs, Cana the sound of kavakava (a particular sound of the cuckoo) ; 2*¥8 with the sound of khalil (in speaking) ; T®NI0, the sound of gahagaham (in laughing) ; TN, the used sound of galagala (in running water); ™0V ©° the sound of gulgul (e.g. in the liz) ant; clanging of bracelets); TMOPono®y, noenoe, the sound of gulugulu or gulugulu (in the gurgling of water, etc., med., mod.); @¥e&o, the sound of Shatadhatam (see (in breaking); ¢*od, with the sound of &halil; TN, with the sound of | not seee ned., jhum (in oozing); Gf&%fi, with the sound of darr (in belching, med., mod.); @I, with the sound of dhamm (in banging, mod.); 3¥3%, 303w, 30, the sound of 430 talatala or talatala or taltala (in boiling with a briskly bubbling noise, med., nod.; mod.); BoBIZR, with the sound of dudhumm (in plumping or plunging into water, hout mod.); d&‘)fid,j, with the sound of dhalamm (e. g. of a kettle-drum when beaten, med.); shall #9338, with the sound of dhumm (in jumping down suddenly from above, med., R0, mod.); VR, with the sound of nélil (in breaking); S¢3, with the sound of ned., nélk (in breaking); %093, with the sound of pathill (in banging or slapping, mod.) ; SOIO, IO\@S, with the sound of palapala or palpala (e. g. in the pattering of hail-stones, mod.); $on&°, the sound of bhugil (e.g. in the blazing of flames, med., mod.); ¥»«w®; the sound of bhdr (e.¢. in the running of ! (in streams, med., mod.); AT®, with the sound of sigg (in splitting) ; ®© 3, with the ah! sound of surr (e.g. in flowing or showering); %3, with the sound of hill ned., (in eracking). GF. § 309. )rise, alas Remarks. n or 1, The Sabdamanidarpana expressly calls only ©33), ©8, o, &8, 03¢, 9, 11e) %, & and %3®n¢ nipatas, to which the Sabdinudisana adds ©, ¥s, @869, Wdas, well, @98 que?, 93 ¥, VBB, ¥, W3, G, YW, NI, T, I, WO, TR, NEI (MB 4 Y), ¢t 08 oy (MNP &), ¥, W¥es, I, AR, Be?, B, J03, Bpe, B TR, Nagavarma’s 0d); Karpatakabhashabhtshana has the following nipatas: -—®o (used in bhéda and fie! vismaya), ©s, efio?uafi, 8:903»@%6’ @0, ©8, 98, ¥R, J, I8, ¢, », LI 9 | (in oy Regarding the formation of adverbs, ete. it may be stated that not unfrequently ©R or ®@% appears at their end, e.g. TR, WA, VIR, BJR; 338, 38R, WIF, DTS, R} may be the same as &8, ‘so that it becomes’ (both ®7> and &R0 appearing as Kannada verbal themes, § 176); ©3 may be unda another form of @R (§ 176), or belong (especially in anukaranas which not Jing unfrequently are written either with final ®3 or 98, e.g. @O or Grdd) ird.se to ©¥° and ~3°, to say, and mean ‘so that it says’. Cf. § 2755 § 281 note p 1 below the text. ely 3, Some of the adverbs of circumstance and some imitative sounds exhibit Wil consonants with strong aspiration or aspirates (mahiprana, § 29), e. g. QWR, (s PROY, PatoTF, BNIR, YR, BT (see § 218). Fos 4, There are no prepositions in true Kannada. { 22 P 170 e euph VII. Euphonic junction of letters. ana plac 213 Euphonic junction of letters (sandhi, samhité) has not unfre- It occurs in the quently been referred to in the preceding paragraphs. ancient, medizval and modern dialect, especially in poetry. The collo- of d We in the quial dialect and modern prose writings often disregard it. Tac { main follow the Sabdamanidarpana in describing it. elisi Generally speaking it takes place when a consonant with a final vowel Yo (svarayuktavyanjana) is followed by a vowel, e. g. 3R30F &0 becomes % TReFSo, WY, WO DF TR0, BNF, BLPHo SAMMEVEEY and when a & consonant without a final vowel (svararahitavyanjana) is followed by a (6] vowel or consonant, e. g. ©Eom° uERy, becomes 239200890, TITNY® TWoTFY 03y, B9 do%a&o%a 0392, 0r | It would, therefore, be wrong to use e. g. Aoy 232 (for WARRESR), Wor QRINT 8o (for QoRurIsEI0), 2’3@5@ efi&gfléo (for pF3 Fo). ne 214, According to the place where euphonic junction of letters takes D place, it is stated to be of two kinds, viz. @) the junction in the middle of words (padamadhyasandhi), <. e. elis either the junction of a declinable word and a case-termination (ndma- O vibhakti), or that of a verbal theme and a personal termination (kriya- (419 vibhakti), e. . 35930+ @0 becomes [»3o, 3930+ Bo SIWS0, I3+ BN ¢ 330R, W30+ BN [W3RE, SRS+ ¥Z B0 IWIRY o, TPST+ W AN = S508R8we* (see § 122); Ro@% 4 o becomes BoRTo, RIBT4 BT° VR, ) RIBT+ W03 RTOF, AT+ BT FVRDTS, RIAT+ 20 VBV, RBE+ AV O RV (see § 198, 2); b) the junction at the end of words (padantyasandhi), ¢. e. either ( the junction of a declinable word (ndmapada) and another declinable word, or that of a conjugated verb (kriyapada) and a declinable word, (§ el e. 9. ©33 ©¥,Fo becomes ¥TFaY, o, TR VRS 3@3535%%&3; RRTTE W ©30° becomes RoBRTRT?, BRABY wHo WRABZPY o. 215 Euphonic junction takes place by elision (16pa), the insertion of o356 and g¢, the permutation of consonants (uditiksharigama), and the doubling of final consonants. Y Sometimes it is optional whether elision happens or o3 and ¢ are 8 inserted, sometimes euphonic junction itself is optional, sometimes also fo 171 euphonic junction is forbidden, sometimes the permutation of consonants and sometimes their doubling arc necessary, and sometimes do not take fre place 1 9 Euphonic junction by elision {f @) When the final vowel of a case-termination (vibhaktisvara), either lo Jlt he of a Samskrita declinable base (samskritaprakriti) or of a Kannada (or is followed by a vowel, it suffers Tadbhava) one (karnitakaprakriti), elision, e. g. T 3083 BN becomes § Foma0W), DT, oR} 2o BT ofié el 595330, fi@ojoé c%fi BePBo NOGE, 95~ e to, 1) az%cfi@ BTFo RyBIY C5F'o nes 4 69565 W) éeefi d'?\rae)@ 3@63:3 90Eg 0 becomes 3@)@§o"ao Sedon ¥ 2B 0300 e‘)’er\)ofiv@z%ouoo 300883, 95;3 '3&59650 0883, m wcso z:-?e)zfi 5680 B, JPURY ABFo ogje)e)ci@f) BFo, POV I, S 0 c@feeflg@fl fio o b) The same happens when a case-termination, or a conJug&tetl verb 43 or the formative ==y (§§ 150. 151, remarks) is suffixed to a Samskrita ) word ending in the vowel &3, e. g. 233 + 5 becomes IR, VT S+ BTF emzfi 2o°; Q03 SO c%e;%:,so o° oo+ 23 tNA, Bon+ BaRY Wohmw ]\Eb a;aw+ DR PODAY (cf 2y €)1 ¢) Likewise a final @, %, o, or a euphonic ov (§§ 96. 98) suffers elision when it is followed by a vowel, e. g, ©0X % becomes 5TzDF* It 0903 SN RIOR 030 T30 20D 0, WRWE HHEo WRWEIRO N'@ij ')(L boONo TORRR. ON0, JRCRT+ Vo RLLRR0, IPRR 4 Vo [WRTo, TRRET 0l Lo BRBBo;— matP wlo matdP o0, R B0 B o, IZB B0 ¥ s388o (¢f 4);— AR B T 3o RNEATT0, S08N B zSo aSao@‘r\%cSo 0 3 3. V0o 3. o zfioofi BEPBo BNRLPFo (cf' % f i.) ;— ROy, ‘a@ 3 L R0BR, 03, B, 69, B3, ) , B8R Do SeR o, KRS WY N@sz%@m (¢ 1) Gf. §§ 218. 214 161 hle d) Also when the final vowel is that of a personal termination (§ 198) or of the participial suffixes @, 3 and @y (§§ 155. 156. 166), rd elision happens, e. g. SRBBY 2% o becomes IPRVIpE 0; TPB ATFo Db %&)@Cfir o FRBF RS0 TR3EFT0 B30 o -9 oJd Vv 09€9 0 2, Euphonic junction by the insertion of 03¢ ol @) 1If the & of the genitive is followed by the o of emphasis, o3 nd generally comes between (¢f: 6,4.), €. g B3+ becomes &30S, VTF+ 52030, WEEI+ o« BEEIo3, when, as the Sabdanusasana states (sutra 495) L for 33,03, 28,03 and 2,03 38,03, dF,0% and 73 may be put 50 S)2>F —— 172 s by If the final ¢ of imitative sounds (§ 212,9) is followed by a ) vowel, o35 is generally put between, e. g. 2C3Ze9 28y becomes TeITES o) 030 NEINLY Ry NEINCIRY (¢f: 5, d) m ¢) If to a class of Samskrita and Kannada themes with final ¢ the (if:3 formative wzy is suffixed (¢f. 1,6 and 3,a), o3¢ comes between, e.g. %9 5063-;— %0 becomes 5ozfi QURY, 39T+ BRI FoCREY, TPT+ DR TIPTONR, 0‘3%‘4\. i’me%fir b £oe%§o€>a~o 800+ BaY 3eT0NRY, 304+ Ry 30 RY RPN =] NJ N@fio&)m\) Cf. § 151, remarks d) If the letter ¢ is followed by a vowel, o3ss is often inserted 0 ment (¢f. 3,band 6, k), e.9. & warF 3596383, becomes =ZE 59093 & 2R betwe BRTT), & B 03B, T+ v’ Focews (§ 187, 1) WO+ WF* WIBRY* rema e) If the letter w of a declinable base is followed by a cases termi- ) nation beginning with a vowel, o3¢ always comes between (§ 130), e. g he WO 4 Yo becomes 09030, AD+ 093 233 NDOZ LI foll) \ J) If the letter = of a declinable base is followed by a vowel that y 1s not the initial of a case-termination (¢f. 1, ¢), or if a verb with final (0me o is followed by a vowel, o33 is generally put between, e. g. T &0° firvfl becomes TOOIIDT, ‘{sc,aa 20 BHF QAT,:0003093TF¢, 300 S3Bo T0eANRIZo & 80 W0 5&)033@0 3% 39 o635 d&o&aq Boe3R0, BOE BT BESPDTY 0\) [ 28,0 3N 0; JIB @fio 5&@033;50 e wof ¥LP0es (§ 187, 1) by a g) If the letter & is followed by a vowel, ¢3¢ is mostly inserted (T, (¢f. 3, ¢), e.g. 8¢ B becomes 5 e030m, 34 o 300300, A_C4 50 A G300 (§ 130) P 2. A oS Wfiuj QDI+ BAY LAY (§ 151, @ 5), &4 B9eF &o3eF (§ 187, 1) N Ry 1If the letter . of a declinable base is followed by a case-termi- nation beginning with a vowel, o35 is always put between (§ 130), e. g becg BRESR 4 o becomes 303300, FEB 400 BE33030 ¢) If the letter o of a declinable base is followed by a vowel that 1s not the initial of a case-termination (¢f: 1, ¢), or if a verb with final e’/ =) 1s followed by a vowel, ¢3¢ is mostly put between, e.g. 28 2.5 becomes 51 TROTY BN R SROILTY FRIB BB,0 BIBVS0TY.0 3 _5, b DA BRFo § TANTFo; BB am) SBORTY, BB+ vk Soe3ceer (§ 187, 1) ‘cfla W k) If the letter & is followed by a vowel, o3¢ comes between, e g ‘)N, 3¢+ vRy becomes Beozo 300+ aRY SoecRy (§ 151 a, b) 9] [N ad NO3IRY MFPC 2T 05Pe030T0, Be4 e’ Zeodows (§ 187, 1) ) N+ o R 173 7) If the letter % is followed by a vowel, o3 is inserted, e.g. Sé W Wiy, becomes 308RBNIY,, Ty o BO3IT o, By D Fo 2,‘393033;3335&:. ‘m) If the letter 2, is followed by a vowel, o3 is often put between the (¢f. 3, 9; 6, a-d), e. g. SR+ BR> becomes JLeRVRy (§ 151, a, 5), 3we+ v ) v 3weodoes (§ 187,1), ke 035% afifaeofiazs%, BAPRE DRSS VPR o 14 3, Euphonic junction by the insertion of 3¢, a) If to the class of Samskrita and Kannada themes with final e e d ) mentioned under 2, ¢, the formative =y is suffixed, ¢ comes frequently D See § 151, between, e. . 398I%, FHTIR, VFDRI, BoeFIRY, TITIR. remarks. ] by If ¢ is followed by a vowel, 5 does not unfrequently come J between (¢f. 2, d; 6, h), e. g. & suBTo becomes &[XTo, & ewElo Bptlo, % NRO® BPTT, & S FiPS, ¥ LS BJped, ab ¢) 1f &, which stands for 23> and %), is followed by a vowel, & al comes between (cf. 2, 9), e. g. & NVTIDS O becomes HJYmasSo, B B [ 1) RS0 &B BiSo, & B B8 ofie* &Y \?Sxaom,vs, in which case the r2 hlay be shorténed, e.g. & fa‘zf,o may become'raado. ) d) 1If a radical ev (see §§ 97. 128) or radically used ev is followed ) by a vowel, ¢ always comes between, e. g. Dt Q¥TTg0 becomes 363y od BeTITTEo, VF B PV, DY YT DFVY B, IR T D Q% J0 SR INLI B9 DFoVFBRF, RIBARI+ > RITAT I, 10T+ B THTIDR, DO+ AR ORIV, TR BY %odo&)‘%, 207 B3 ROBIAT, [oBI+ Do SNBIDC ; TOBI+ VT TOBI) 0. )i e) If e is followed by a vowel, 53¢ is always inserted, e. g. &R, 2 J becomes 230 D3, Fp+ 2R Fp2 (§ 129). S) If 23 and 3» are followed by a vowel, ¢ is always put between, o e. . %39);- 30 becomes %:ée)rssacso, 58\.@@5{))+03 %Jaeé@'fi, 0339)-{— Q0 33:%&)0 al 08 (§ 129); 93w QDFQ;O 3)3@:")?-%0, BR B30 BVPRIZ 0, WP+ A WRIF (§ 129). g) 1If the final & of a declinable base is followed by a vowel, ¢ always comes between, e.g. R®e+ ©o becomes RwesSo AReL R NRe D, AL+ '&Féo fi@e@%o (§ 129). | — hy If %3 is followed by a vowel y OJ s always comes between, e. g. 4] 7+ o becomes 330, 772 + @o M2 S0, M2 + A% WRDF (§ 129)- [— 174 p— ) 4, Cases wherein euphonic elision is optional. euphe If Kannada words end in (@), «, or a euphonically used eny, elision is sometimes optional (¢f. 1, ¢), é. e. in its stead o3 or may be inserted, e. g. w3, Btlo may become 2 8,E0 or 23 000, 3NN TP B SNSJP G or INB030TP B, BWB Yo Sw3o or IPIBY o, RPIBY 2»5% fi@afiz&@&g or fl@fidc@aa’% (¢f. § 97 and remark thereon), (52304 o) B its ot @RS Or BB, (VB + ) BHRIB OF BB, (VR + 2B SB[, OF BT ) ¢) 9 Jases in which euphonic junction itself is optional. optidr @) If eer is added to 33 (§187,1) and o to =g (§170), euphonic o; junction is optional, viz. 3 wWes or FHORN*, BT VW OF BT, ga 9 b) At the end of a half (kanda) verse (padyardha) euphonic junction is optional, e. g. either lo) wodoe‘?;jsjgoesrzi@ FS 0300530 eSJa%)zé’osmisz%:Soom#%o | () oagagacsmfo PO folloy 39 102o2pTR YR PeBIVTY0 || in the sense ‘there is this’ there occur everywhere the words V%, 2,803, ‘Si (§ 243, B, 20. 23, 36); where WOl comparison in any way takes place among excellent persons, W8, IPO° are used; N or ~ng W | WIBRPR Jpen PR P / DS RwodusT, 3N éfi@s’g:o S emph QA3N 5% 23eno 4 R,R0308 B, 3pPBFY "D 3R OnIJR0 | when the female 64 friend said “Sister, I will go into the garden and bring thee a bunch of nice flowers; (go) thou a little quick (and) remain in the dormitory of thy beloved one’’, and went away. ¢) In a quotation from Samskrita (v@?cyavésbtana) euphonic junction is optional, e. g. either T3 FPLF TRt BOB, HRBIZIRBIFI0 FFRO fi@wafiméédo, Wou or guuff T3 TSR B¢ BOB3 DOBITIQBITI0 FRIF WO (-'\’)Jaesafiu'a%, “who? why SCaxg a petitioner? who? a poor man’’: how much soever, Dharmaja gave (it) all away; (1&110 either Aad NWU( IHIF V0 zsg)asés’é@e NSAERDN JB o, or ) SBF IO 239585'3@6 78IS oo;ji) SB¥R0 0 p— 175 e— d) If a Kannada imitative sound (§ 212, 9) is followed by a vowel, euphonic junction is occasionally optional (¢f. 2, 0), e. g. li;ion either 7 he #sgys 3 'o.)eB eV W YRS JInos w\%’%zgsé m% Fw eAS03)00; V) A3 or AN e‘jédegéfis\;), P03, GIFYF,. T But if the imitative sound is from Samskrita, it has always to retain ALY its original form, e. g. i never becomes FRFrR=ss before a vowel. €) If 93> is preceded by a sonné or a vowel, euphonic junction is optional, e. g. Jonic either DA™ 930130, T8 ‘?\@fiofioso%fafi%dr zfio&'%fiéo; FO3IRT 2W3; R, ¢ 23030309 ; 10010 ii-’)éo a:bédz:fir; or #ad;’omo)m:sedfias% sdoeéosofidar-i’@io. 6, Cases in which euphonic junction is forbidden. @) If the nipatas ending in 3, 9, % and % (§ 212, remark 1) are followed by a vowel, they do not form junction with it, e. g. ©»33) ®ge this” here wodowa S8NT; ©3 Nt T2, 3T 9NWT £90°; 93 DBRRT; S SIS IS used; Q8¢ BRY, 5&80@%95@@:30339071:@5071?6? 2o®P (Or LWRPE) BTDo eI i fiS@o*aaééqgo! Cf. remark 1. b) If the vowels o, &, @ and %% are used as nipatas, o, o expressing emphasis (avadhirana) or doubt (visanke, or also simple question) and 2, %, doubt, and are followed by a vowel, there is no euphonic junction, malé ' pice e. g. ra%gsaéfi nBReR, 3T0dR @;Sog}i@edco!; PRGN TIJHYTRE TF JOved NREOT uafi;}é&gjd%% INEIHTRe | ction TORTR B F 030 B3 00w DRBT 35 o HonwwaEaosdodss || did he say he would certainly protect? Let not thy courage fail on account of Yama’s gruffness! Did he say he would certainly give? That seems to be But A scarcely possible. will what he said fail to occur, o best of the Gangas?; 8138¢ SJo; 0 TRDFRE BT 0; PISIe @%o;——"&@ojoa’ 23&0)0&‘% ROVREST w8 1VRETVFy, To IIIT 2¥e vZ¥o ZZco0; MTIDY FLOFAY MM PO ;’)orfibe(% 03‘53053 od ;{a‘(’bosoo TTWTV0wTo; efi‘é\%}a"se SR — SFO3R 2,038 7; du&@ae & 03we ?; D2, 03 2 BRBE orieS0e? e e 176 e ¢) If % is used in approval (mécéu) or abuse (dkshépa) and followed L happe by a vowel, there is no euphonic junction, e. g. LI IR e Ve %“a&)i.r;;% 39,0080 ! DReRRE WAB RO SeRo!;— AREPTIRE ¥IT IPIVT,TTo SRR avoide BoBT,0; 3008, BRRE faa"a %J&)Q"m; ZReo. may b d) If eodk.e and e3tyo express ‘sorrow, grief’ (khéda) and are (07§ followed by a vowel, there 1s no euphonic junction, e. g. e&o&%e efi%%ésa AR o BRATINS? of cor c0 e) If O30 (§ 212, 8) is used in the sense of ¢certainly, well’ their (angikara; ¢f. another 330 in 137, @, plural) and followed by a vowel, no euphonic junction takes place, e. g. 3301 () F, 39 efiggfi?fifi.fi%‘aatfiooo 300320l 3 hecon %ofifia%‘?&a’)o 290230 ! 3 (€] J) If e is used in the sense of <indeed’ (gada; § 212, 4. 6) and PAIR followed by a vowel, there is no euphonic junction, e. 9. ToOD WITIF eln DD NED ! ; B BAZFR35 gdwo&méofia afirfi:d%&g&ofiogaa! g) If the e of the genitive or its lengthened form ¢ is followed by e the vowel of a nipita, the Sabdanusisana says (stitra 45), there is 4t 08 exceptionally no euphonic junction (¢f. 2, a), e. g. B3R o SRLTRRBNSS; o TR, S &8 %ugb;’)ec)ogseéo 5008 Bo; 2T YV TIRHVo. Q:Cfi&o Iy If e is followed by e and e, there is not unfrequently no euphonic junction (¢f. 2, d; 3, b), and if followed by % and %3, there is i always none, the Sabdanusisana says (slitra 43), e. 9. & ©TRo, & WA, TBYBTO BREFRY, FI0PD VXY Fo;—Y @%ofioro, ¥ PO, 8 W0, gfa P W e TWro. Qhape 7)) If Jpea, v, e, ©eo and ¥ are followed by a vowel, there NYT ™ is no euphonic junction, e.g. TP &, w% SIVCH PR BRTF, T YN, a\vu ¢ w0k, Cf. §246,b; § 247,d, s. (’M k) 1If a protracted vowel (pluta, § 20) is followed by a vowel, no euphonic junction takes place, e.g. 3o Tp BFRe 2Ry, TRLF TRN?, . o) R ; @0 TN aFY, A3 et RLS,FF; e vmae, BE, wWa! b 3%&? ) =33 25! Remarks. o g L, With regard to 6, @« and & it is to be observed that when the » of WY emphasis loses its exact meaning, e. g. in ¥98 (§§ 170. 171), or when the (TS nipata ©3 (§ 212, 4; 212, remark 1) gets the meaning of ¢ half a thing’, there Y is euphonic junction, e. g. SRFOIYLE VY, becomes SPFTIY DY, SaANNF T ot uE 9y BN I VRV IY (see § 338 under VY B); — FIBOBI30 &)ai{ga U Be@Ro FBadadodo. (of. 10 Owed 2, If two répbas come together or in any other way cacophony (Srutikashta) LYl ei@ G happens, it is wrong to form sandhi, e.g. W3 Tor a0 ; BeIor g Aor; — QY ¢0dT°. 3 3, If a bad notion (dushpratiti) is likely to be produced, sandhi is to be avoided, as e. g. FPHIFRZ IS¢ (does he not tell to bring a bodice with flowers ?) may be read o3 Te 9T TIWI¢; PR 390300 PR 0¥, G930, iazétoaé’osg Sowd) 8oe3 . | ar ((f. § 241)) T AR 7, Euphonic junction of consonants: their permutation in the formation ell of compounds (samésa, see §§ 244. 246. 247. 248. 249. 251. 252) and in el their doubling when final. @) As a general rule it may be stated that the hard letters =z, 8, = fl become the soft ones i, ©, 2 (see § 28), e. g. I T @0 becomes eI R0, Te? B0 RePneRy, B Ty =Rl & J 1 sC9 O IO, e and =2 p03 Varig ToO Qgon®; T 3633 T L, S0 30BN ioe@%aéofi, NG SRS NRBATF, WP 38 RS, w¥ @ WIRRY; TH' TR TR, IF° o by PP e LreF, T WPV TR ©0; B0 Fa3o), AL=T A TSI LT T o re 1§ BReT0 VOBWBEFTER0; HIMIF T DTy 0RF; BT 3Wones® e @;’)o%?J(aDoflef; D30 TR DB 0NRES; 3RNV0 é@ééjef 3®m£~%€§3®6; S0 WPVO eficéo;&%e)o; AB®RNo 33 ?\:@omo;ée%, See § 243, B, 2. 10 Exceptions are e. g. ELEAN FRBRES, wITRF, VBT, WRD LE, 3 rg 18 Further specific exceptions are that after wo® (2r), one, and 5of 0 (aF), two, after a répha (7) that is a substitute (ddésa) of &5, and after 47’ %0 a €9 that is a substitute of ¢ or ¢¢ the letters &, 3, = retain their shape, e. g. u%mfio%, WBIFZY, WAFR; BBRFR, BIFS; TWIRNFTS th pre N &3, ss@%g%fi, Se3FS, Benrry, DDFEN; gdw%zsaé, FoLY 23?3, FHECI 3 3 JUIV, Oq\) Céofios%, aa@%fidwo, aa@figgdo; %wg%zg, 8—635_’3_653 (see under letter b). : (Vagl 234 ], 0 23 an ;T] ¢3 always remain as they are, e. g. BN, %%3%0’ 2%?&‘&3\@6 f &, wnio; %Céoéfi?%_, RPRBRYA, ?%@3%9@0 7 b) After vowels and radical consonants (sahajavyanjana) =, 2 and w0 are generally changed into &3, e.g.” % Py e We) o\ 3 becomes HP[EB, BB Rpo WeIpwo, TR BPy %Céoafi%fi&, T0T F0Ed FTIN, DY VB VUDH'; ] o of Re0° PRO® AeBpFROS, Wokd Deoo welHeae; ek wRo Fo0dy o, Resss p the ghere w0 Aecovn o8, Uv wd, 99d, dnees we, :%Jae%efié, 3e0s WORY eRF ol 0RY; H0f S 530@%30; ceiclafox W 33;@71'5?%; DRt e @}3%@@9 E (of. SoRTBy, BENTSs,, ete. see § 278, 1; SoRI®, ete. in § 280). 23 178 — This rule holds good also in sentences (vakya, i.e. cases of nouns or 0 the infinitive of verbs to which a relative participle or a conjugated verb Y is suffixed), e. g. 332BRRFFpexs (- TpeR) FowwpoNRWct; DFHO :C?E')Fffii} pol 18 SF (-wTF) BemoonoNTt; fiofi:fia;o (- W 0); RSnST o (-wgo); ST nor 1 vowel 336&20 (— i@&g 0). Exceptions are e. g. To3,658, Jpiheason, T, %%Qéfio, ROBIWOTY; WFRE, TS, ¥, 000, WRIBNG, WBLYNeF. ¥, 7 Further specific exceptions are that after wgs, two, the substitute of suffix 2 oJ 2 and =0 D0RY, and after &cos the substitute of B9rs, the letters 3 %c remain unchanged, e. g. 8237 s*; QRIFR; '&ujgfio)zg (see sub letter a). 7 ot g After final consonants the letter o ‘) ~ generally becomes 3 and 23, d oubl and when the numeral za%30 is concerned, ¢, e. g. Sum° ITo becomes i o W o, A’ ATo MotdTo; WpT* RodA Jpewrdn, [T RAT BR0WATS, 01} 007 AJory FovetdeIony, Bwf RRRTT ZoRNBTF; Vo HPATo BEIFATo nan, (§ 278, 1), R meATo SweyarAdo (§ 278, 1), RO mdATo VOB Ao (see § 218); further remark T+ o+ =0n %éjgjoug‘cfi, SRR+ 0+ AR B¢ BRNICLRTITS. doubi termy Exceptions are T 000, B¥D, FYD. ) ~ v Further specific exceptions are that after o3¢ and &f the letter retains its shape, e. g. 25903y D, Soodmwny, F033078; wdaes, TSEE, [ agoer)vdo. fn‘ th Another rule is that z after a short vowel sometimes becomes double 1 ) @ (¢ e. 2&) or 23, €. g. $330 X0 becomes ;Soozéc%, SMEEOIOY aflmwg@fi, 5399 N 0 | A VW ~ RIB dooa&;fi@, [0 AREd afiooz@@e’efio; B0 ARBT BIBIWRBOS. NN 3 £ ZonEp AT in § 278, 1. d) When the vowel of monosyllabic declinable bases ending in ¢, ®°, o, o%f and ¢ is short, and such bases are followed by a vowel, their final consonant is doubled, e. g. DBIZNE B335 ¢ ?.i%?‘fl becomes 2@y \ B0 BT X, Yo+ 2o BpR0, Ve + W FpRG TR, T+ W o b 3 fifiu@dw\), TR + Yo %8{’%0, 2+ ©o 35?@0, 2 + Yo 5’{%0, P + Vo sg)f%eo; T 4 & TY, TS 4290 %Q}qe{%o, PO+ ovo Yo, RO 4 N5 '-é\\o@ R©)0; 003+ Yo 39080, TOIF+ Vo FOg0; BT+ Vo QI T 0, RS ¥ 8oy gelo %)%?%éfioj WS - HGS WY, P+ B0 IF)0 (Cf. §§ 120, a; 247, d, 11.) W But if their vowel is long, that doubling does not take place, e.g. dng D33 H9NBAFRR DN eTaN 300 3a8Y 0, wWIRIG o, DRI, ; AY A WY, — e — 159 1§ OF 2I9£90, [ILP0, DEDILHN Feo0, Fewo, FREVO, [PV0; JBPRTFYS, WO verh SEYE; SPReP, 3reyatio, z:a%?Jao?:)o; nor if the declinable base is VAT 4w polysyllabic (anékdkshara), e. g. S8moof, RoSwo, émd%fio%, 313395&(%; ),vv nor if the final consonant of a monosyllabic avyaya having a short vowel meets with a vowel, e. g. 39 BZDTo (see § 212, 4). R, €) When to monosyllabic verbal themes with a short vowel ending in — &, &, of and ¢ the formatives wef, SRR (9.9@6+zozéo) and o are fe of suffixed (¢f. § 187, 1 and 4), there is no doubling, e.g. éa’e?@z%soo, QD d o SN BowdR edo, %@@%fizfio, TRYORFo, THAR,RTo; e SR Bo, 1) I FYSRBo; W, FRS, evs; when such verbal themes end in ogs¢, the omes doubling is optional, e, g. Ypcdhwoo (TPOIF 4 BF + evo) OF POy Vo, )006’ R0 Or FRGywdo, Awso or Rodyeso; — the verbal themes AUV VO3, o3¢, Rood and 2003, however, always double their final conso- ;553 nant, e. g. emojqfie)go, 505‘):8@‘)“ : A R 8035, which has a long initial and is dissyllabic, may or may not double the final consonant before ese¥, ©330&o0, », and before a personal termination, e.g. ©¥3ciwvo Or T wI0; GOy Or STy 000 Or o N 8603»){80. i In the negative form of the verb, either the conjugation (§ 209) 365, or the participle (§ 170), monosyllabic themes with a short vowel ending in g5, ®°, ©, o and ¢ always double their final, e. g. 0)§ o] ) ; O uble =i Vv enugg o, ems:%os; emodoqso, 81'0030606; 303060’ £o§o§c°"; 0-308(%0356, 33256; e Ro0395 035, R0V T w03 &, w0dx; %Ja%g‘, %@%@; WO3% B9, W03 1% Cb DR, 33T, emqac%, WY B, WD, 6.@@:3 g 10 The only exception forms %’2;6? e.g. YW wgo. el Remark. el When, in samasa, %° is followed by °, this o may take the form of ®°, e. g. Ry e e F5ab 3%° S0o° may become 3 W, Re0® Ted 0f, T Jwello FHY cble. (OF. § 222. LoV o vy 8, Rules concerning the final sénné (o) are the following:—If the AGQ+ sonné precedes a consonant, it may change into zs (in the singular), into i) 35¢ (in the plural) or retain its form, e. g. & TPD or Bo Tod, AT 3023 Or Qo 3028, 395 AWRo O Io RIWR0; VDS o&faefi%o& or o f /i o c3perof, B35 Rodnie or Co RDe’, IS Ress0f or 3wo Rew ;- 23% ——— 180 P— concerning the IRFTowso see § 220;—when the sdnné of the nominative singular of Kannada neuter nouns ending in e (§ 109) meets with a vowel, it often changes into &¢, e. g. F9To QRoFREy becomes FToTIFZorRY Roo PR SVABY, TPVo BRI MWOIRY, Swo W3 SOIRY D but may also become 3 e. g. [T RODIT SPVAITY fi@fiu@%&) 3 in Samskrita and Tadbhava nouns (which are neuter in Kannada) it uses to change into 355 or o€, e. g 359)%’ QT DT I RSN LAY NTITEIVNTIT BRERVDITY SANTFIB 0:;—when the sonné of the nomi- native singular of masculines and feminines ending in e (§ 117) is followed by a vowel, it becomes ¢, €. 9. IAe80, BRINRY Bo, BTRTOP BT, TP, VI 23@%;6 :—when the sonné of the pronouns &0, J¢o and zao (§ 137) is followed by a vowel, it becomes g¢ in the singular, e. g. S3 e30, DERTRo, ofi%éo and J5° in the plural, e. g. 93082°3pREe, 603, 393309 B0 ;—when the sonné of the accusative singular and plural is followed by a vowel, it changes into %, e. 9. 39T 3RAR, ITSRTRN 3.0°, DBEPRTRES, BIRINBIRWTR0 R o, fiofiofio DBINPRBRRA 9MoDTo;—when the s6nné of the third person singular meets with a vowel, it becomes &, e. 9. R dRTF DIFFo, NV T D ;—when Roo and o (§ 203) precede a vowel, their sdnné becomes =¥, e. ¢. WBIFI (WFIF o+ ), APNRINIS, SPeTITVSY* ;— when the o and wdHo of the imperative (§§ 205. 207), the adverbs of time and postpositions WCPTo, WLPT,0, WLPRvo, the postpositions gz o, ®3R0, wFo, Bdn0 28,00, koo, etc., the copulative conjunctions o, evo, and the 2zo in @3R®ro are followed by a vowel, their sonné becomes =53¢, e. g. 333 RTV0 TIWRBDoTON TITSTWRER .0f, RO oNSE WCE, D930 30 B BTF BPTRAR0, HSFNDEF0, wone TIIRISRSACIFIR IpT é)zz%oSJ@%fme) 3CIRRPo, BNRFIQTo, DY TIDP TEIFTR, B WaNies, Oma00mwg3, MoP WeRBSRBS #fiw@, fio@;fisasfii)aésfiflcésfiaea’o DS B G o. — GelgdtISomy may become GBS, (see § 215, 5, d) 216 In §§ 213-215 Kannada euphonic junction of letters has been introduced Now as many Samskrita compounds, joined together according to the rules of Samskrita grammar, have been borrowed by Kannada scholars and used in their writings, it becomes necessary to point out also some of the principal ways of Samskrita euphonic junction of letters Because there are no Samskrita rules of sandhi in the Sabdamanidarpana, ete we make the following alphabetical selection ourselves 181 it 176 1, Junetion of vowels (svarasandhi)) th a 4 = ¢3, g D8 4 IReTF = I PReF 0 My &4 & =63, e B¢ + 9003 = WBeTVR 8L g=—0, TR, + B, = T3, LN hut évg e | 38 ga 9 N+ K3 =nwed 5 Ot ==% A BROE + B3 = RRBW eF T 1) 1 é e+ e = &, I + RBF3 = NOBRLRFIS 3 5N 0! Bl D — e, 3¢S 4+ DA = BeIANF (i; &4 o=, 29, + DTFTS0F = fi%’;fior O+ V= ) 18 % B0 - mfi o3E — caa"oés o3F 9+ S =B, NN NNV L anE émi_ RIPF é:fio (The @+§» in ©88+ L3, ?.33& -+ ému and 90 m@ v+ %35 may become eltber % or B ) VN 9 83 L fced g?, @fi + B33 =aa7 o&d ) &+ :Qj’, EDCSB + O Ndé)mwan) 5 D DD - DB, + 2003) = VT, V3. al 18 &S 4 & ¥+ 9 :33’ [T + 9, = JoIe J!‘Jofi B4 HR=9 Qo + &3 = 9B8e3 % &3 - e ==ibs, [0 -+ U3 = FOBRE3 V th a g + W &, T + GBI = F0BH T o &+ &0 = P VT 4 KA = JOBAF )P (G o) =33, 3, B3R + VFIWI =3I cfia"afifizfi )0 Of 19 =§0, OB + :w 030F = ;Soéés odiF. &4 S =8, [0 + m—s = SOZVF® t008 er L 85 =0, BT+ W33, = BRI, 3 ol 99 -+ ¥ = ©3 + = o, Wlz0 g+ & = 0339, 9+ 93 =03 3.3 ) , d Q-+ B|= &K, T4+ 93 = T¢I 30 Q-+ HK= &, 2N+ K30 = S003¢3,8 8+ v o3 ©§+em5m_.efia’oé~o 0 éfi' g+ 4w = 030w, 98 + NP F_@m qS o Ve, QG -+ O = 08 DSk o wéefi ) QNJ 59O -+ LB = B, TS 8= GhRe g+ 8 = ods? fon b Bryodr —a0aY (plevhl B xR+ 9= K Hor-L a8 = o heen Do R = 30%e3 R+ K= 8 mfl’ tO o 9=3 080 -+ 9OF 8= NIIFTF 8 [‘afld P 4 & = I TR + FAS = S0P, A f the MW+ = P -+ BRI = P, 0] are & + YU = NN R + T = RLF p the ¢V 4 R = YN Eg Q%QQQQQ&:%«;%QQ%Q%QQQ%Q%QQ%Q%Q%%% AR + NNRJEF = ATB D P 182 —— f el R 4 0=, b MABY == §921039F = msés-a o3f N, A + YV = YW o B0 + U3 [ = BRI I NS85 —F) O3, + 9R’F3 = H3 RF 3 g ) + & = To, g 3393, + PR3 = IR IR0 N - RS = xR €. g O3, + WM = H3.0 & he al 2, Junction of consonants (vyanjanasandhi) 303F T = 3030FW°, 3,36 = 3° arises from 23° and 2° e. g RPOTE = PVW° 38.%3° DT = FI¢ DT = A and re- & he mains unaltered when no special rule is given & be B° before a vowel becomes T° g 2030F 36 1 KT = 303FNT, 3,35 + WoTIT = 3.10F98, o9 + &3 = DNeS, 1T + AP = ang 3% before the econsonants T, 3, B, QF W, B, (), mm«fiu——&mm -5 o3, B, ©, = beecomes M, e. g- 90T + MY = 230N 3, & 33 FTE + f—j: ?é ojorm , DTS + zsoi) — 2 an od, éojor LR — 9033Ffi 3, A58 + ¥ 6o = an R, CQ...O 8030FT® 4 70 = 3cFMAT (2T + Dot = M), BT + WO an.o, ¥ BT® 4 P30 = AN, 3089, (BF® + P V= Y # K0T + 0DWIFE = KON, WOR® arfs*a@) FTC + BRER = TR, B, DT® -+ TP = AN B, BT + 3B = POR,eB, 0T -+ APS = 33, BT + oI = AN, R0 8 & | g® before the consonants and 30 becomes also 5, e g 303FTE 4+ TR = J03F V), A (or S03)F T ) + o = dud R (or BM 71) TS - e‘h TR V=08V (or afisee)) b 50095 v [ 030 (or F071,0) after the vowels @, 9 and 0 becomes &0 R, 1B+ 98 =13 &g WA %nfizwfidfis e 36@’+@35=5€ zig, 3B + 33 43,30+ 9 = %;) ..‘ r;jl B0+ PR = 350 %3 83 o= % aoio W) 30+ @3 WY + 8565 2 BB T, WD+ ¢ o*éozs 3, SR+ \~°\ P8, = ™6 &= mqflozé 6 I°. B 8% arises from &° in [N = &S v and remains unaltexed when no special ifi] rule is given [N 23030 = /B, 3 %° before a vowel becomes T, e, g. M&F 4 Wort = dor, R&F e 183 &6 before the consonants T, & 8,0, 9 0 3 becomes & g I8¢ - Mos = IR 0, &° g, \AESF(\)’:ng 3 & =i ; :‘; @, e = o mfl M\JS—J d N = :i@;fl i%: S = = B &t before the consonants o~ and X0 becomes % ) g <8 4 I3 =R 38 (] becoming ), & + SN = W) 16 3% WRBE + 9. = BWNRRII,, W, BS° e3000,F = 2). B before a vowel becomes &° g le1s ©Y069.F, WNRS® + &3 noes ) before the consonants 7, & fij= 3, W, 8§, 63, T, I becomes & BN3° 4+ ROTY + BNRBY B BS -t RGN = 2N BT, RNAS® 4 3, = BN 3, BNSC + 200 = RBNB W, BWNSE + 2390 = WRW.C, WNSE 4 0308 = WNWR LR, WIS + TP = WD B, B, VAT 4 IBI = SFjalk 1\& ) before 23 becomes 2B° P yated 4—23#0 6 = BN T 0336 + 33 = )= D033 3, Ra6 + B3O8 = "B 03 4 = 36 before & becomes 235' BB 4 223 = W €D, W 56”1‘3%5& (S 1 R B, A0S + VU= ROBW © ) 36 before ® becomes & 3836 + BF980 = BEE =[98 W )= ) before S and = becomes ° RWNRS + P = BRI, B, TP + [0 YT = B0 A 30 38, W3 L Z90d) = By od EMet = m 00 = =iw o B33 L S = e = 336 + INNF = BIJ),NF 3¢ before © becomes 9° 2). B3 4 0l = 0. BV T, IR, + V= AR,V 3 A 56‘ before 3 becomes 8F° g SE AL s = %3?%-3_‘9 (3 becoming &), SR s’ i D) = ;Soa&iz%, R36 + dew = AW ¢V n before the consonants ¥ il o, 35f + TV = 8TV, IV + TV = AV, © v & becomes ° 35° + 2BPF = 33 ¢RF, 3W° + I = 383 T ? 30 + BV = 3830, 3 + A = 8 39 3 { DIRE -+ FINO = IVSAINO /< afi' before @ becomes %W° 3% + WIBIE = 3w B0030F o before % becomes «° + [ @J‘:’ 3BRF + WO = WO, W + B = 5% 383 e before & becomes 30¢ + 83 wE before S and 3 becomes ° 356 + 93 = 333 3, 30F + =N, = 3T 3 ial @ before 2 becomes W @ v 9 w9 306 + dew= :éz&ee) (3 becoming &), 3@ + DA = - < 2 W X . _) =9 W pe “Bamend = Gn + grend ‘shmops =% | 4 EopG ‘ea3cuUeR® = 30U + JORH ‘O3 o = O + s ‘oposcceE s = cpocee %) i mz@m@,% ‘R0 IUZRRMR = POSCIUR + g0 b2 ‘4o s0U029q 0 feo fey Soon m_@ pon fiww «3 .n afi nwu hw& \Ja) ‘g SJUBUOSUOD Y} OI0JOq (¢ ‘w ‘@ £q pepeosad) , ~ L 1 Ropsogn = Yoy + o (B o pege 10) Py = ger 4 Mo ,mnmn 2 8ee e {4 o WH\I oy + e ‘reRsta Mm. : ras peQ n IS ~ s =mag + e (Teepom 1o w 818 CRE? 10) TRegspe e e ® © sepeg {odgee 10) L e R Bl QIQEEE = (G + o M g ‘migeccpo 1 d [} ity M 80 000D ‘Ptsre =0 o+ e hpare = P cRE 4 suee hre Cag = he + o2 b 3 (4 o ¢ o) ¢ gep% = Sace 4 sopdh ‘@Y 23 e o g =g m..m% .wa.w 9 o i P ce *h 2 g soW009q p ‘@ -~ P © @fi o ‘e SJUBUOSUOD O} 010§0( S 09 pRITE 0 = 0@ + EECE ‘apaierpee = Qe + SEE0C ‘0EoRISPOE = 0000 + R0 ‘ho dergor = ho + sEcr ‘e TR = Udeo ‘eoch + Eere ‘gaemderge = @308 + 420¢ yopee =gk +roce ‘eritle =ar + wre ‘ogrper = 2R + mEcx ‘adverog = o + vog ‘stnee =pf + ee CGpieRe — G + oo ‘myepee =0 + e Py YOO = B U + R0 ‘QICUI e = 630U + Jome "0 9 ‘g 80009 o ‘e ‘n ‘o hflflo an)n h%«W 53 fin »n an 38 L2 ) JC SJueuosuod @Qa 910J9(q 4 . o5 ST el T ‘fe 2 @mm”&@ + ¥og .Bomanv oo = Bomona 4 sepce ‘peoomienpos = QeREE + HRRON ‘UERIROE = UCRE + sH R0 ‘heddieges = herdm 1 HRee ‘amienpe = e + 8ote o ‘cadzondefte = ceReRE 4 e (15 RTQ Aute =) & o + soe ‘Sreos = e + con b0 ey SOW009( @ [PMOA 01} 910J0( o ‘neacacRt = —pean+ aepd ‘oo BeBap = o e + o %o ‘vooelem =uot + maler ‘peo ‘0 SOW009( [9MOA B 940§09q o =0ee + em ‘Uopmn = uoe + wen b2 i N a pue g Kq pepeosead) 9= a—— L— 781 e 185 e BT + 308 = FRFFT, FRAE + W= FI =% WFY, W 4 Poant = WoPIFN, FIOA® + ,..J ) *o;fs?s = zf)mmr@%, BT° + 098 = F W< 0loF A, WA + v = BWOFY | Y 0300FS 4 SeB = PAIFFR, FIVAE + DR = BROIBFR, BREA° + 53995: fi@edr%, RPeR? = + WO = BRLWFV. 973 WUW, »JQ(. ol %€ before 23 and & becomes %°, e. g. 335° + 3% = 3 Jids‘a, B030F° + 23030 = T i:) I RNj] 3 o3, GVTA® + G9n = emd%cs, d3=° + e3¢ =6 1 as%m BA =6 (preceded by < and V) before the consonants 4 b Ny ) 30 often becomes 6, e, g. WA + T3 = whF, 3, FFA° + T3 T = RO fi%sé(fi, BOSAL + TR = E:FOS‘JJ?&D&;SJ, 3 N L= B0A° + TRt = BN, ¢t (or BRsTW ), BR07° 4 B8 = IR, Y (or BITY), B A BAFF L 3o = Radw 3::? + 39 = BTN 3, Hé 26t fiéss, RI0AE + 393 = z{)ém’éafi‘. 30 VIII. Particulars of some letters, also in prosody. Y} 217. That the vowels O, &, % and % are no real diphthongs, . e. compound vowels, in true Kannada has been stated in § 21. Kannada does never arise of « preceded by es, nor its % of eu preceded by e, ) ; i. e. they are never formed by Samskrita guna (§22); likewise its @ ; does never arise of «, & and o, nor its T of wv, ew and &, e z VA they are never formed by Samskrita vriddhi (§ 22). D, 9, b, W are A ) innate (sahaja) in Kannada or exist therein by nature (svabhava). Késava (o states that an esodss or eody may optionally be written 2, e.g. Fo3s9,To )d may be written F)7oTo, BREeTNAT0 %@Q%fivdo, 3¢T AT BeBATo, 3 7 30 Ao 3G 1 AT0, TPY WATo BpS W30 (see § 151, under remarks); and an @) B, e. 9. FYerty may be written Foony, FJoTulHF T0TILIH oYodTo Bodlo, vy Beay, IIYP 7%, 3Jovef FoBes, It is also customary to write ez for T, as 380 for &0, I3 for FP (see § 21). 218. In § 29 letters with strong aspiration or aspirates have been :fl mentioned, in § 212, remark 3 it has been stated that some Kannada adverbs of circumstance and some imitative sounds exhibit aspirates; f 24 R 186 E—— and in § 215, 7, ¢ the aspirate e has been introduced, for which there they an a 1s the instance TOR 53, ATo 93-@6350 d&u wa:%qsefi oNPIFATo TS0 BRNTLIABFE B, w)é?r‘%?é mesamoom Speoot3, SRTRISRDo the v 3 Aspirates, however, are rare in pure Kannada The grammarian Késava adduces the following probably for the greatest part uncommon Tadbhava terms (regarding the form of which MSS. disagree ¢f. § 370) in which aspirates are used — &Sfia (0 i '3@5@&)), C‘S’@saw (0.Ts CBdJU%?) N@fl%fi (§370), v ey (0. 1. efimzé) BRT S O, a5oes, ssabfi (§370), go (0. r. e;CD) i %J?JF‘NQ (0 /19" e;ioo NJ) i €39 i oSo (0. 1. OF asaodo) o), ©IED, O &8 k) mnay oD (0. r. 8% 1 RY), TOMRY, G, [OPF¥IG) 0 (9 70)’ N‘)a) 5 (0. I8, Noéffaofioo euém) Wit il —J e e afioésfle&fi( ), BHI03 (0. T. TG %033), » %30303@&*) N%?v@fl 2% (probably RO $t9), e (0. 1. o, 90d), PLPW, FALPA (0. 1. IOR), HRLFA fiwd{ oM V] (§370), 53R¢e7, 5794 (0. I. §FoA), §F9AT, 0 (§370), Bp¥T (0. r. TPLIT § 370), po ey (§370), dye9xo mo the § O (7)), TRFDR (0.1, TREIDAD) BNO, To0B, BROTR, BoBR. BRTF.0. B bl ) 0T, FIF, WEIY () 330T3000 [ %ol 369, Ga% (§370), GR% (2, §370 30 (?7), 338 (F=@), B (§370), nan mode gonT8, $ma B, OF0IF, PS030, §a3; TsIo, OF Tao, 2393 Or 2594 (§ 370) N leavi The true place of aspirates is in some Kannada adverbs of circumstance Onee (§ 212, + and remark s, that originally were imitative sounds), e.g BOR, VPV, WIS, Lo, DAVS, BREoT, BweoTer, BRETR; and and in some imitative sounds (§ 212, 9), e. 9. GBS0, TPIZR, FFR (31t BIaRR, BLITR, Gos,8, TP SToR (0. 1. PULNIRR), SePeR, FEPVR v T Neua? NS, BReoF, Sowd, efifio;fi 6329"505 zfiooae)owa" d).wi Vg wa" 3RT 8, AT R, YT (the fm m of a few of which is doubtfu]) Iifya 219 In § 33 it has been stated that the letters o, e, & are not 3o nasal and sometimes nasal Such is the case in some Kannada and 1'egy, Tadbhava (§370) words According to Késava o3y is not nasal in 2¢ WONT, VOB, VoY, BT, mONR, T3, woes, and nasal in 8 5306000AT0, BREMRVAT0, 003069, B39, Ssade; © is not nasal in IOR he( BOAR, IR, SoFw, and nasal in FRo IR, WO RR. I, VO 3 (asag 1s not nasal in B33, B3P, 339, 338, and nasal in Be3, Res3, S Vi) WIS, DIV, DIVDD,, BROTLD, TS, RSN, NP 220 In § 39 it has been shown how the upper nasals without a ang vowel may take the form of the circlet called sonng, and in § 40 how R — 187 ] there they also in connection with a vowel may take that form. We give here a0 an ancient Kanda verse quoted by Késava in which not the sdnné, but the vargapancéama letters (§ 28) themselves have been used: 220,539 B 3503 030 cSava ol h ava ’ém%}%fiafiooo 3000 AT BrFFPDTW0 | which ~ i) 7) J-J?,C?% uems% 0BT Bk :%’2;3&99 mfi?ofmmzfie;jg,jzcg.%%‘mm@@e? I His further instances refer to final ¢ or s6nné (see § 215, 8) which 1 [ may likewise take the form of the vargapanéama letters without and J o) ui"‘], within compounds, e. g. ¥$o FRoRO may be written 935,301, ©®To hably BWOTID 83&’)‘82;@;38@, T0o0 %0 %59%%8_0; ToRPT* %%%?UG, Fonom 3 9, £2 ot %"955\)&90 %u@oua‘{%o 2R [N 0, TPOTIDSS 33;95%63@5 Wiy 221 There are several words that in the ancient dialect always have _), the sonné or bindu (§ 34) or are nityabindugal, e. g. RB@ony, FBomM, Pl O, L&w), WROM), SRRFoW (SPB:3 (N ), ERBoB, INRcS (TWARY), ete. (see Sabda- manidarpana p. 48:; Sabdanusisana p. 69). In the medieval and i0) 310) modern dialect this rule is not found; there is rather the tendency of leaving out the so6nné, especially in the modern one wherein scarcely tance once the sonné is employed. 6.J Other words of the ancient dialect optionally appear with the bindu (O and without it or are sabinduka and abinduka words, e. 9. FIRow 3, (%csmfb), FRY; TNRBoT, INBTF; BCN0H (BLNDY)), BENT; PTowy, i) P Tee0. o Others of the same dialect appear always with double letters or are 1) nityadvitvangal, e. g. 5‘@&%, 22)%9’235, 33@@6, ur{i\, ;3\@7?\6, TRWIF, TCI3 o 10t 300, etc This rule holds good also in the other dialects and and regarding the same words as far as they occur in them. ] n 222. It has been remarked in § 215 (7, remark after f) that in | 0 samasas or compounds ¢ preceded by £° may become &, Such is also :)O\Jfii the case in the ancient dialect when there is no composition of words ) (asamasa, bhinnapada), e. g. T&° 5@;{533\3)530 may become %5%@);22@:33, 70 ;31 YH SOPIPLBIHRY @@%@@aed@m, WOH JVBPHRI zsaea{ificss@ddo. 223. The change of the letter 5 into & has been referred to in §§ 64 and 184. Késava teaches that in Kannada and Tadbhava words an initial it & o) oJ may optionally be changed into =, e. g. 5;206 may become 5;206, [ow 24% ;j — a——— 188 & DQ B PO T, TR BUA DR BOAY (see § 370), and says that e 2L + this change is (especially) beautiful (sundara, ¢élvu) in a provincial or o3 A - A v ol native dialect (dési) Q > § < But the change is bad (dushkara) and as a rule does not occur, if 52 - © 1s not initial and is a double letter (dvitva), e. g D 0o FH) To —s. & %9@0 3, VD90, [N, DN D, ARD, B the g Howbeit, as we have learned already from § 184 (¢f. § 194), the Wome present-future participle ¢35 exceptionally hbecomes eoa, also when it o (W stands at the end of es:30 rafix NAVISN) Sh) V2. 89R[ D being such as th&t '3;3 being such as this eSS ®, being such as this intermedi- ate one, O @, being like what?, which forms occur as well in the Fonl medieval dialect (except &g ) as in the ancient one PSDISS Besides, the medizeval dialect has changed BB, VR, B and O3 IR into es;é 2 and D, and, with a euphonic ¢ into eaaa adY and Sp which foxms exist also in the modern one; at the same time the moderu ac0us one has also the mutilated forms o5 . vs 10864, O, AR DN -—0 See § 224 224, Késava says that g &, 98 ®, wi. &, 8.3 (§ 223) 1n the ancient dialect become eo3g, A3, vy, I, (¢f: § 275), and, with the addition of e, he, and o, the sign of the nominative (§ 115), @g o, such a man as that, g0, such a man as this, evg o, such a man as this intermediate one, g0, what kind of man? and He gives the following instances in which the genitive precedes g o ete a8 Narasimha is a 01 Ji @e)fic{o mofizmo o@c%daio@#s‘a o@e [9CA0T0 | man like a thunder—bolt one like a hon one like the flaming eye of Siva. 2‘ SORAEIS ;)fi RT0Ea3, 03087 5?3@?5?0:{0@ @5%63@@5 o | what kind of ey person Kama is, such a one is this man; what kind of being the beloved Optio son of Aruna (Jatdyu) is, such a one is this man what kind of being 8 the sun is, such a one is this man. %9 ¢ The feminine of ©g 0 is P ¥ (B7+ 9%, she § 193 under remarks), also €. g. DRRRPF, such a woman as (is agreeable to) the heart, a dear 21 woman, which takes also the form of @3 e. . afimda" t iy The neuter is 9,30 (99'* - i BW), such a child, etc as that. lgn With reference to the terms @5 E) and g, etc. in § 223 it is to Worq be stated that the masculine toxms are 3;95 5309 (@ES 06, 4B \5§ + TR, ¥ & & p—— PR 189 that a§+d;jo), such a man as that, ras 80 (B8 <o), such a man as this, 1 Q)g s Foh) (,g(fi 30), what kind of man‘? the feminine e.eafi PRL=N) (efifiog%;*’) @;SSS%?& (@5:’)%;6) and the neutex ones ejgficjg %\5 $90 (faé =5%9), r, if sm @’3’ 3o ) 00 If ST m ‘ifi&; 3%, w3ty are added to another word, this is put in the 0'enltlve, B, 3@, S8, Such a man as thou, 506\%0&@ 3%0, such a the woman as a mother, ,\)% do.;os o, such a thing as sugar, (01 also QF,; §') 7l i such S350, aaOSJ’fiJESfiS% »J% OOSJESD B, ¢f. § 223). & edi 235. |The leute1 330 appears also as 3, as for 393038 there 1is likewise 5938, for zesoR.0 mes33 0, for 32vos 3dos, for 3pof 33of, and for the T9d) FOe See the datives plural »zoR and o=R, 3ZoR and 3R in § 137, b; § 304 )@5 226 Regarding the lengthening of the letter [ into es in the a@% ler accusative and genitive singular (see § 141) KéSava quotes the following 1instances 0 ? D3, 3 5300353 363 6359 the PRA,BoNY wenvo TT30359, | the ®3. 3.0 IFIRRG* SReWTo 31101 3830, WU IBRS, Femanvo. || (see § 303, 2, a) this S8 YOS IJpeOTBFE | and adds that such a lengthening occurs optionally within some words, 0, as one may use aR0¥ or v3Res¥ (Tadbhava of %3wew), ©dwNATo Or SBRENAT0, MNP0 O IFWRPeL0, NeSIoNno O REO3IDoN0o 5 & I\E! 227 In §§ 15. 17 (under ) and 31 the so-called ¥ ¥ (a grammatical d of invention) has been introduced. A few instances showing how it may be optionally used for Samskrita o, are the following RE Or W, 3% Of yved == 3L, PF Or PO, WY Or WO, D% Or VO, T o ¥ Or T, TP Or Joo lng 9P or 9 AP O RO, [o¥ Or O S0P OF [OTOV Cf. § 281 also §§ 239. 370 ks), Jeal 228. The so-called ®>¥ or the Kannada ¢ (that in fact is not different in form and sound from the so-called ¥ of § 227) has been 7:\\/ mentioned in §§ 15. 17 (under %) and 31. N CSAY a adduces a few of the words in which it has to occur, viz. ALTLR VYT DRBY, WP 5 10 Jd %”)%‘gpfi\), N%'!Qf)d SENTIP, WP, TP S9N, 3998, 39N, P )Wy . 190 Nt wIR, wHAR, 309, B9AT, BePAT, Fe9, whTEY, VIS, FYSY, Boa3ed, JOE, R, YR, BN, and t ol Rustics use ¢ erroneously (according to KéSava) in the Kannada words @WoeF, AT, Wi, BRTeF, RTeF, BT, BTV, FTeF, FTF, dw% ; 0 pronouncing them 3dy* (3T%), DTF (2TH), 2T (WTH), TRIYF, RO%e, 0%, RTP, F00%¢, I0%°. T often stands for T3, 0 K Dov %9 or Occasionally & is also represented by 3, e. 7. »9S or @S, %69, FTRE or BReo, IRERy or IRy, Nond or Rowed, A Or AP, o 080 99 YW TR, % SRF or R, ¥ or Sueeef, RY (the ancient neds) or nes, (the ancient %@i@:fi) or %,@_3_995, 5’%%} (the ancient é%w) or 5%89’ R¥Ry or Feemo. Cf. § 235. 4% i 54\) E?/ ¢ is frequently employed for the ancient €9 in the medieval and modern dialect (see §82) in which e. g. ©C3* appears as ©g¢ (¥), =10 WP as @Y, VLS a5 VY, VeI as eush, TCP as TP, J[pLR. as Vs 21 or ®e%, which peculiarity partly dates back about as far as 900 A. D. tha (see § 32, note). As stated in the same paragraph, the letter ¢o has ¢ or has been retained in the present grammar. e About the change of & into & see § 229, and about that of & into & oy § 230. For words in which ¢ or ¢9 may occur see § 232. w\ ; 229. Letter & is changed into & in the following words when they ) z: 0 Ne are in the apabhramsa state or are tadbhavas 4. e. words corrupted from Salhskrita—%@ifi, 2P, 0T, o8F, Jookl, TP, h‘%;éj, fiJaopGé}%, first, o 4, in which case their forms are 597, Se9R, JeonR, MR, Ty, ¥ 3nd, Y, BDRYR, SO Rae% and ot may once appear as :6 y Beecsd and oo, See § 370, Glgs 230. When the words mo@s, 3om9fl, m8, M@, TONd, DRof, 0Ay = Vo) and O®EE are in the apabhramsa state or are tadbhavas 4. e. words N P s corrupted from Saiskrita, their 3 is usually converted into &, and they M Qg appear as PR, WRAY, 1, M, SpRd (wnd), Ddon, and ¥, See § 370. (The change of @ into ¢ takes place also in Samskrita X0y itself; ¢f. § 15.) T 0 1) As there evidently are a few Tadbhavas (regarding which see § 370) among the words, T \40‘ it seems as if, at least in this case, such words on account of their ¥® (that was taken for the ¥o%¥) were considered to have become true Kannada words, losing their Tadbhava neon character. myeq VVJJ PR i 10 o4 231. In the apabhramsa or tadbhava state the letters &3, &, 3, o and the 3¢ (see § 227) of the words &R, Pwedl?, Tod, oo, @t PONT, TPNCIVTRG, ToTYE, =00F weéfi L8mR ESRCESDIANN %&@ g, o & A8 o5 Y, TP, s9¢¥ (39v), P (VIR), 95 J(fi@m) BNFe (enFo), FoR9g? ¥ (sfioa'%@ 0. T. 33979s¥), and &%?fiaucfi (&9@%@&)5) become €9 according to Késava, in which case the words appeal as 7163971 nReCPR, mIt, @90 ©9CIRRN, NEeCITadoe, BRECI?, TSR, e, TePRI . Dese 0r w@@fi TR o 6% 3oCS* 0@)6\59@6 70033, 1oC3° w»)fd €92 and g, i) B5CPRIT See § 370 E )9, The Sabdanusasana (under its sftra 140) adds Jw?\,j o 9] 63 ESFER 864 RN 2 eeo, ArYofe} SOCIL, TR =T efi%o\)au-—- 05.C sS'acs and wamé mwm (see § 370), o= 2wonots?, Jor¥3€3~ Wonld, Worads 4) = 'Bofluj wDfi'@(S 0&366 232, There are twelve words regarding which it is to be remarked that it is somewhat doubtful whether they ought to be written with has ¥ or 9; they are Tp®s or TpeIz (§ 370), BPPHRL or TPLFJR, Bwo @ or Bwonaee®, %i@&“)oo or BRI oJJQ &R EPTI0F Or HLITCI, BRI 0§ or 335009, ¥R or TE Qfl (§ 370, ufio@ Or wWRILP, worley or 2207962, 393 4 P or Hhg e (§ 370), Rwe® or Rwec? 9 B9 or B (0. . 6% or hey 2eC? ) § 370) Cf. Rnetiw and oS0 & in § 229 rom 233 ’(J% Késava saw the following words with ¢9 in the works of tl first great poets:— Y wness, NG, I e T (01 °n’§rfid°€) BRHLSOS, VIRLP R, ¥A 39 5P 06 N/ Se, el 9~ °d, 0503 53 dvfi g on@jz’; ; k.w,v /309 .J:jd (2C9%), e3¢ %) &35’ &> b BT, 3 2L, o %, (emw«) e CF (0. T Sof‘, 00D, Sl eut®, eulIPF, et n, wut®sY, euldony (0. . lPmo), ords enuee3 zx.)fvp 6 0)9 Rs‘ DCIBE, DCOY, 2CB 89 &8 10) o\)bq QP 09 NJ ) vjé they T W8I 2 2CI FWLI° FLITC FCITILI, FTEOY S fi TS JY 15 f =20 o3 B0 & 390890 6.8° Vo (I lt T, (FCLN), TR LA ), TEI S, T, FCD 3009 U»)Cu ch (BL3)), BRCI, TP (0. r. FLID), TLP yol‘d57 TROTIIF (0. I' TYPoTY), FNg P, TRCILS, TRLHB, aldef, nRLoned 0GRy, MLy, Mot i fOr feancos, fcoz. redodexy (see 3FCIPOIRY) ness3 phaté oG, e LI ARy, TCI2030, LI20T0RY (0. 1 RE° RIRY) 192 P, 3CI0, zé%?&@ja, 2390, P, Ry, WeBRFLID, Buld, I f 1 369, eo8LIR, SLief, BL¥, 3L, éw&osg% , 89, 20989, 30, 333% eos =) N =30 Q)] Cor, (503503636), BoCP, BCPTS, 292658 éfi@:;‘, 36C., 36CIF, 3RCY =297 3RCLP, TECPA, TLI, BLIMLY (0. T. BEIFLY), ALY, G e90, FoLI, MOLITORA, (RLN), Are, Aresk, A, Aerer, #I, Mmedls zeon TEIT), TCITCIN, TEIFY, TCINR, (TCIR), TIB, S, TN, heeom I 0 UNGe] W‘_‘&_, TP, TOILOS, WL, oL, HPLP, VLN, Yoo, LI, IS, Ro oW 2eF, PRLY, ek, (PoLr or Pav), P, WL, JpeCIF, RpeLoos, PLPeF, WOF, WP, Y Bpeoes, TPCBE, TPELB, BPE 3 309 WEPTo, WCPH, WL 3 o, u@fi‘v‘%&, 220300, WP SF (0. I. WEISF), WP [P Y A fl [4) (0. T. CTE), WAL 0TI, WAL, 2W5ACIT, WIRICIS, 259 e 3 e z:»co‘fl%, i 00 N-/VC DL, DVELPSF (0. IS. WEPLF, VEITF), VB L RBedef, BRECS, ¥R, =\ AR BRCIZT, VRSB, (Foratsr), [oelP, [l SOCOBICPE, - S [WVVOIY S0033, DL, (DAY, (FNTHLP), (F90ery), [383, 32009, 18, SoRC, I BXISfS S30LI, SREITICF, [REINY, TLFR (0. T. WLFR), ReP, RRCX, RSP ) @99 WA o700, ALY 3, (ARSN L), T N . o*oawéfimaw, 320, To these are to be added the tadbhava words of § 231, as far as they are : gl not repeated here, and under circumstances the words of § 232. In § 32, note 1 there are in the 3asanas also ®&° (to be), TR, mfi‘g H fiw% : &’cgo of, ¢*R¢F (for P, S0eF). See also § 234; Késava’s Dhatapatha (Sabdamanidarpana p p. 330. 331); and regarding the meaning of the terms with @ the Dictionary. and Concerning the anukarana words that have no aspirate (§§ 29. 218) at the fing) ¢ beginning, Késava observes that they may appear either with @ or appee The Sabdanusisana (under sitra 140) adduces nearly the same terms in which © has to be used, as the Sabdamanidarpana. Besides, it adds a small e namber of others ; but as their meaning is not given (the work does not give the % meaning of any term with © there) and thas the possibility of explaining them Tépha becomes difficult, as the reading of at least a few may be doubtful, and as the AN use of © in a few of them was seemingly wrong at Késava’s time, we mention them with diffidence. They are the following :— F @i (the act of weeping?), e’ (the act of diving?), T O° (?), NPT (?), 01l QUERR) (), PVEY, (= WVFY ?), WO (= PR ?), 2, (the act of rising?), 6 (?), WO, I (= 2%, 9), T (= THY), T, (9), Te) (7), TR (=T?), T (=TSP, TW® Comy (= BEE ?), TRV (P), NE® (=N ?), RIPTSE (), RAOR (=TRRDAI?), BT 00 (=WVJ,2 ), Pecy] Bew (=8P ?), BeB(?), BRWR (= BRI ?), 3B (?), 3O (=38¥7?), 3T06° (= 336°), 3R00TS’ (= 3A0OTO ?), 3Re® (=389 7, AW’ (= 3nees ?), B, (P), THO® (), 8 SZoeF (2), IOU(?), VLD (=8R8 ?), IREF (?), IO (=¥ ?), £ (? not in Wop( —t— 193 — :aj Mr. Rice’s Index), 09D (=3p¥D?), W& (the act of living?), WO S (=W S?), W, N, (7), Wy (=VPN; the Index has BwR), Ve? ( 38 ?2), o (?) ORI 4% (= S30T%F), [ (=INY, the state of being irritated ?), Jo* (=3097?), 306 (=30 $?), TAPT (?), AOI (= API?P), AVAY (= APA ?) 234 3 It is a rule of the ancient dialect (and to some extent of the medieval one too, but which uses o5 instead of c%) that a final @ ) becomes 3¢ when it euphonically joins a following consonant (see § 215, 7, W ; under a), e. g. TEITBY becomes T2, TPWITYT ToLI)T, TOBIBIEN J 0 TG Fo)BY %e%fio &30 _&Q%fio %’Jaecéu mda %’Jae 299, éjo BRHEBY $, OISR NONVER R mxéo%z% SOV aazéoéacéomsé TS ozéomsa [OBY s;fi 3RS FRR,S, TIRITNATN 9l 109, VBITORY aew DR, SBOBY 0ad fimo 909 mi’,‘? sao DORY TRGE mw&@ £, VERITOLD WECIZD, 89, RRBY TR I ~63 céo Ndcéo%’@ @dufi& DTBIST QJC €3, 3, D OBRIND3Y DTS Jaévo NYofeM &30@@0 DEEIRE C’f§58 'y oY) npod In the formation of the present-future participle a similar rule AVY exists, e. g. SB35 may become [EI,, RPEFT JPELI,, BRI eI VRBIS VR, WA wWney, (§§ 38 183 1). A similar change of @ into €3¢ we find also in 3@ T30 =3CS S, 0399 7 a1e & 32y AeTRFT = QT SRTo=golP B, HRAA (dative of HRB)=IRC? 7 (for 9235. The middle in the Kannada words ugef, @cef (¢f. § 228) pals nary and OTef may become o, viz. Svwed, Boos, soof, in which case the [ b the final &% may be changed into of V2. o O0° VOT?, (DVT?) appears also as =oeaef, and in the medieeval and modern dialect as s 1l DG or [P small he 236. Words in which it was customary at KéSava’s time to use a half them répha (F), are e. g. OB, DJoF, NAF (=NCE, ¢f. § 32 and § 233), etc S the SoRoF (RE), BMF (=383N), BNF (=883), TaF (=3T0R), ete yf100 RQF, DIYF, DRI, ete.;. BrFo, FaRFo, DPEEFo, ete.; LAnFF, TeNF e’ i Qdenres, ete ) 0\“ It will be observed that in some words s had been given up in the ) ‘% which common lancuage of that time and = had taken its place 397 peculiarity we found also in the participles o@or, wioF, v (§ 160 );cof) see also § 32, note; § 239 regarding a kind of prasa) The remaining f () words (faw etc.) present no irregularities of n 25 — 194 — 28 ol R37. It is a peculiarity of the modern dialect that it changes a middle O before a ¢ into ¥%, e.g. 3% may become @#g), TS e&‘%, TP TRTHY TRB 0P, N0TogL em%;’g), WOH aoeég), TR %efig), FOTOH %a%ig), ea), Furt gV oL m%, $0o50 89, RTBY Ry, Sadosh By, T @, BRTHY %Ja%?g). 238. In § 33 it has been stated that when two consonants are produced in (about) the same place or by (about) the same organs, they as 4 are called ékasthani in grammar. The ékasthani letters are o and &9, @ and €9, © and ¢ (see § 239). 239 Grammars of the Kannada language are based chiefly on poetical standard works, because almost every thing of its literature was composed in verse in the three periods; it is, therefore, to be expected that they £, e contain some terms connected with prosody (¢handas) and the way of poetical composition (kdvyaméarga). Such terms employed by Késava are z» =z (called also Qao3sasse or ) and 2003 by him), Imers 8, 330, and SwT. ©o,&8 in Kannada is an alliteration in which the second letter (generally a consonant with or without a vowel) of the first line of a stanza is set in the same place in every other line. ang SEELLEK R is an additional alliteration in which the prisa letter or a cognate one is set also 1n other places in the course of a stanza. odx0T is the repeating or setting in opposition alliteratively in the half same stanza of words or syllables different in meaning but similar in sound (paronomasia). appe 8R3%F is metaphorical diction. W Késava, when introducing the first three terms, does so in order to 0 show the proper use of the ékasthani letters and €3, © and ¢, g and | he €9 (§ 238) in them, presupposing that @ and @, €9 and €3, © and o, ¢ and ¢, S and g, €9 and &9 form regular prisas, etc. He states that =, and iafi (§§ 227. 228) form a right présa, e. g. “he 39652 Rooontys, Hedra be WEBIFoNy® neonys | Chn but that e and fifij cannot form a right one, e. g. LONBRBRDF I3ZT K na@%aé@aados%doq@@ 8@ To | bes —— 195 P— ldle as also © and Fo¥ cannot do, e. g. )Y Seodey IR YR Fedcd Fp d) SR Y '&3;-)%3_%3@9350 e 3¢ f Further g and &9 are wrong in prasa, e. g. PoBVRE TEP TIOR3 Al 3&9@5&@@@950 ] as also @ and €9 are wrong, e. g. W %@ecéfis&@%;?yoad (&) DOFCPPN3RS DeTTt | Sed Regarding varnavritti Késava says that it is-properly formed by o and ey 8. 4. of ROBNEPTBREINT WBITETB TOHo TRLEFRESR) FoBIPTIE, B0 BARG* | or and by @ and co, e. g. ter 2e°S3 FuBRCIS wh A, g PLPOR TBARY, BRB FTHWo | and also by e and ¥ (the kula), e. g. 0r RINYBRITIFRY ; ¥ &5 o ~ OB, WOBRY, FYRor Dpeowz, i | . (This he half Kanda verse bears various shapes in the MSS.; its purpose, however, n appears clearly in the present reading.) Concerning the vamaka KéSava says that the employment of @& and ¢9, » and ¢ (the kula), and g and 9 as letters of alliteration is wrong t0 in it (as in the prisa), and in order to show this brings forward only nd the following anomalous instance: Y, B803%0 88T0, 3030 remarking FE530390 @g;@@zfiég RoNTTNVVRT* | , “herein the application of words is spoiled, and if for 3&330300 T30 ¢ be read, no meaning is brought about; therefore there is not the characteristic_ (lakshana) of the yamaka”. With regard to the prasa with ¢9 it is to be added (according to Késava) that a double consonant formed by means of a half répha may be substituted for €3 (¢f. § 236), e. g. 2/b P — 196 ———— 20890 By ¥ o, 3698 DTV E TR0, 386N O\U\% W QT DITOIVIPD2TE | N and loub) RRIWET Jpees WAVHD & & 08 T3 BETR, PR MR | o R0 and Gl VA P o WIIE RSN, M) SFead U@ ol S0tPR derndo te | AN S [TEBNR z%ojw $50C° 8‘? Cs(' 0 d eI, DRB, T zfi@dfi BRecBo3BRETe? ¥ o] The Sabdanusasana remarks that also ¢3 and ¢ may be used as letters of alliteration in the prasa A \ Ripaka has been mentioned in § 104 with regard to nouns, e. g. S U8e ¢ which are of neuter gender, but receive another gender when they are 3 used metaphorically There is the following quotation concerning Feo short in the Sabdamanidarpana. 64 B OITDRR eafia’géem@éoaom 39,3 _&Q@w@\)?is & Ne 39, B030 TQF3TE dofi%;fidaa 02T UDT[VOWS? | (. S R 030300 mHA FWNoN JvJo R FLDT 0 Y 9,0 zc%'csfi@o wo'ja"évcaafiodoaowofl'v’ 3 BEINFTY30e? || cfi; and concerning wig SFes there are the instances efiéo WG TFe0 & heloy DH RWAB DE0 QflCSo PTate &0 240. Double consonants (§§ 20. 38) in prosody are sometimes “slack” tha (Sithila), 7. e. they have not the power of lengthening a preceding o syllable Such double consonants appear Y 1 9 in the nominative plural and dative singular of nouns ending in (S R g %, ¥, o, and £, e g. ©NCI$, HuICI & (\/\3%’5 'Qfi %35 enes3 Y/ emm(iud ..),;0 9530% *’rfiw% @m%fi%’g DRV G, YNOB ¥, TooNE &° undg; N o@fio%? mor‘b% _efie)fim" Ve atal=] URINFEYE, JONFSS PN nre* wfim-%?‘ FR &fir‘r?g taYatal=l S atated FoANFYS TOSNF S § atat > RBRONE s (Nl BENFY, IDINFSE 33onFe’ et~ wmfi?%?’ Whig) nees allo“ 3BNFSS; VORF, ete; —IBNFY (WBLIYF), FANFE (FTRCI ¥°) DENFEYS. WANESS leng BANFY . ORAF, etc 4660) U 197 — Exceptions are formed by words with a long initial, e. g. 239%00%, Aa%o%w 3P30,03¢, and by some words with final ¢5 e. g. B380%%, §Y3Tos*, TITO%E. Foonrys, though its initial is long, generally has a slack double consonant. 2, in the conjugation of verbs ending in %, f, of, and €3¢, e. g. Bue 0, WL o, BMOLY o, aTLY o, 8n¢Y o, é’fi@%o, BomoLg 0; W) To zsm@%o; éri@@i, a"fi@&i, @fiwf\; ufia@&%o, §fl&§%o, £r<@e%o, ?.ijariwfo\o;._ Bamo¥ o, BoRIF o, B%¥ 0; FoRIE To; so:so%o; mmg\, oA, sjo:sofi; RORIH o, gjaxo%*{a\o;wefiacfim, BPTBF0, DTFo, JANRFo, VOBFo; A BFEo; AADFo; VAAF, SRBAF; WZMIFo, JVIMNIF0;— SBTFO (NBEY o), ¥PRFo; JBNAF, BIRF. | as Exceptions are formed by verbs with a long intial, e. g. eos, Seof, RAwect; and by some verbs with final ¢¢ e g. 35%°, 3pcye, in which the oY, use of slackness is optional. are 35 in words ending in of and ¢ the first syllable of which i1s =0 Ny short and which form the first member of a compound (samésa), e. 9. VIRFS0, B RBReFTo0, zbazfiréi, zfyariaSFéi, BITFR, ¥ RAFDY 0, TORAFRp; Dwrien o3, ©Z¥Rone?, m%fi, SESLRE Cf. § 246, a. 4, in some words in which it is inherent (sahaja). They are BRTFY, WIOWF, HWF, ARFMY, WAFoo. (@@5\)&?—% seems to belong to No. 3.) 5, optionally in the dative plural of Samskrita and Kannada terms 9 ok ~ € that are masculine or feminine, e. g. wa%sfi%‘, WIRNF; TP, B0NF, fin RBRF; IBINRF; FRBGIINF. ‘When, however, in their dative plural no ““slackness’ (sithilatva) is to occur, gl it is customarily indicated by doubling the © of the dative in the ancient dialect, | 3 vz, waépwrfi\r, WA F; T3 0} F, &,0303 F; SBSR F; BRI F (see § 119, a, W) under dative). Cr. § 31, 1. A Remark. jvo N Some people have thought that in the elaborate prose composition called Ti% which belongs to prosody (¢handas) and frequently is found in poetry, it is 00 allowed to treat a double letter with répha, e. g. &, 8, &, as “slack 7’ . e. as not ¢ lengthening a preceding short syllable; but this their thought is quite wrong according to Késava. Cf. § 241. — 198 — 241 In writing stanzas (pada) it is bad to leave no space between rema the different words unless they fall under the rules of sandhi (§ 213 seq.). e Thus one has to write: 1t wa ik WR,03 3By cé%&fi R0 In 1¢ %\@?%Lo:io 33 témdmé& FOONRDTIFE | In tl 23@0(‘\03& 380 mamN whicl 53‘@?508 BoBIIBNA %’%560 ®OTOAD | U and not u;)otofioédodé =03 etc., in this case especially also because the Keésa obscene word 3doz®y might be thought of in four places (¢f. § 215, s, A remark 3). euph Likewise one has to write: K WOA gz‘sasdo ) gfe & ¥ DA ,00FIZOTIBFWIe JER Few | @)dmm;— g’))efio [B0 éd@qéfiomzsacfiaaéa‘ ; I and not WOAT, TORToTIF 6?\)3\3)033 etc., as the prosodical length of the short-vowelled syllables &, ¥ and o3v results at once from the following double letters B and ,ng' (see § 20) to an observing eye. Some use to write =) oJ, (9] 9 which is unnecessary. Cf. § 240, remark. "?’) ;{3) (p’ IX, On primitive nominal bases. 242. Nominal bases (nidmalingas) or crude nouns in general have been mentioned in § 68, 4. As slightly indicated there under No. b by Késava’s introducing the compounds (samisas) Zowed, BCLENO, etc., they finally include also all the other true declinable bases, wiz. taddhita, samésa, sarvanima, gunavacana, sankhyé and krit, which in fact are nothing but nominal bases or nouns in their crude state. In § 100 a number of crude nouns has been given that are identical with verbal themes (nijadhatu). Such are, therefore, primitive nominal W \\ bases without any suffixes (taddhitas or taddhitapratyayas) and also the i\ ju simplest bhavavacanas or verbal nouns (¢f. § 243). \Je\/ Another primitive nominal hase, that is a mere verbal theme, is still to be adduced, viz. the ancient Xpee®, which has also the forms S[pes, In the medieval dialect its § 9 Beeer, dwos, ‘likeness’, cequivalence’. 0 ¢ forms are [Jpeer, [Jper, Spoy, Lef, wef, woy; in the modern one it has i JI‘ — 199 R 661 remained as %o, ‘equivalence’: ¢bail’, ete Its original form was ) Lpee* (BRewF, Bweww); the change of = into 33 or w was done, because it was originally mostly used as the second member of a compound (see § 215, 7, a. b); for the omission of 33 see Dictionary under 2 1 and % 1 In rendering it into English its meaning often becomes ¢like’, <as t In the ancient dialect [pee or P[pes is frequently preceded by es which is nearly identical in meaning, so that the forms become = Spees the ¥R FJpe* «without the fault of tautology” (punarukti) according to Késava, its meaning remaining the same, viz. <as’, ‘like tc WBRees b 6, RBRes are used only in compounds, when they are always preceded by a euphonic sonné Késava quotes the following instances to elucidate the use of [pees etc ROINO 3pee NYeTo &3 \a‘a ue)débcw P BTN, ) > | TOONDIJPES® AR, S0 the WO, FPORTEIR TORIRRBET0 || ing 188 ONRIEIR, PEVDTHIR, [TDT N AoNTBR. 9peS* & $00Q03,0o J98,TRB TR wpeOBFo | Qw3ewo VF FIFN © 3P T | £\ N)owaee;*? 22353030080 PAL z§§ 023Rees TR, TR ao&ééoziraeo‘ | 0. 0 N@N S OTPeIr 3w Y, wex o3P’ RESYL T [TFIG0 || V12 | 10 The Sabdanusdsana has the following additional instances BOZPS, RVOSPEO; NBZJpeS, NOSpeS’; JFopo’ Qcfioafibee}‘ 23 G -4 ol Fpees, NE@) PO BPBoNT Fpewr; oD BpEST; 3,8 3pCes; PDFB inal PO ; — 369 0234'@6@36 RRESV0BRees; _.fa:d 3 ;3@@36 fazs ) 'Spefi fiaofiv he Speer, aé@ofio SPOF; DI BIPESF, TS ;3f0€ 23 wafipeos oaég)a’s P, 5““ Other bhavavatanas or verbal nouns formed, without taddhita suffixes (§ 243), by a mere change in the verbal theme are et modl, "WeE v 3eed, TP, WBedd, Sk, ete. (of @ 230, ete see § 58), &HBy, WERY its see § 101) has RRB (of uRo, etc see § 101), Fecdy, =Y (of 3Ry, etc — 200 i FRery, 3Lery (of ok, etc.; see § 101). These may perhaps be classed and with the primitive nominal bases; but others are apparently not found in Kannada. 0 z X. On secondary nominal hases. seeim 243, Taddhitalingas or taddhitas have been referred to in § 68, 2; from 99. 100. 102, s, /. They are secondary nominal bases or nouns, as they Slitra the are formed by means of suffixes (taddhita, taddhitapratyaya) from nouns and verbs. adde [ When neuters and derived from verbs, they express the abstract u Y notion (bhava) of a verb either as to state or action, 4. e. are bhavavacanas or verbal nouns; when neuters and formed from nouns, they have a (of similar character. [About bhivavacanas in general see §§ 100 (@éjifl’ #9008 etc.); 188 (wCief, weowo, ete.); 194, remark (2v899); 198 (WBzem, A 3 etc.); 200 1.8 (TR, RELNTGRY, ete.); 203. 204 (w¥30, wWew - v etc.); 205, 1, ¢ (&K, ete.); 205, 1, d (f{o&[)\, etc.); 242; 254, remarks W 1and 2 (SC3 B, SRR, efc.); 298, 3 (vRudY, BTITHY, etc.); Wy ¢f. 316, 2.] A. The chief suffixes for forming neuters are: This L W, e. g. Y, R, de¥, A, ALV (of the verbs ¥, ete.; see § 100). 2, D, 6. g. T8, T0S, 38 (of the verbs T, Tw o, IM; see § 100), and (by altering the vowel of the theme) F&?®, 3e% I3, B3 (of the verbs &°, ete.; (()f E see § 101). 5953 3, @;30, e. g. eac%;b, 2¢830 (of the verbs e, $€0F). 4, &), e. g. WOF, WO, TII, RV, dVY), WOI, WI, FVFH (of the verbs goe, W, TS5, ete.). Nror 5, fa'f?, e; . Q‘J’Oi)@%?, Qfl)%gfi, 55\2{%%‘ &)9{2\92@, SRIAT (of the nouns 038, Sab etc.). The Sabdanusisana has ©OT, BB, BR0F, BB, wedd (of BV, ete.), efe ) T, LETF, Foromed, WIM'S (of YV, ete.). In another place it 10Vm adduces Q*)o&@, ?»%?, ?%%, Efi@ag, c@g%g (of the verbs ®ow, ete.), WIRT, WO, TRRT, TIRT, SBET, 30:0F, ;30('%%"? ?3@8%@7 RSRT (of the verbs ®IJIB, ete.), of URT, WIRT, 3BIRT, PBIRT, WaTF (of the verbs BT, etc.). he 1 Késava says that T963% (of verb Tom°), RpBT (of RpE°), 09 (of 8¥°) in which 9% has been suffixed to verbs ending in consonants, are wrong (ddsha; % i see under ¥); consequently the Sabdanusisana’s $OF (of Fo°, under stitra 568) Y would also be wrong according to him. iy Instead of 4% also fa%”& occurs, e. g. in W 2T,, QT 3T, —— 201 sed 6, an, e g. W, TR, Be@R, SeeR, &R (of the verbs 39, ete.), Ind and BRER (of the verb 2Po%). This is only in Sabdanusbsana, sttra 565. 7, @R, €. g. WBR, 2875 (of the verbs ¥V&°, ete.; Sabdinusisana, sitra 578). 8 The Sabdanusisana’s sitra 572 0033y, e. g. 3793 (of the nmoun 3%). seems to refer to this saffix when it teaches that 385730 and WFOF3 are derived o)) from the verbs 80° and Wo° by means of @035 and the insertion of . This hey sitra might have taken mnotice of 3%>F, WFOF, verbal nouns which are used for s the third person (§§ 203. 204), to which the suffix @3> would have been added. ach 9, B, €. g. AT (of the verb wwR), SBoF (from the verb SRR, the final 128 70 having been dropped; cf. No. 16). 6 & 10, B, e, g. TF, PB, S0Fr, I8, (of the verbs %7, ete.), SAF, IaF N I (of the verbs &, @&). The Sabdinusisana has no S06¥F, B, but adds &3y, o) Qfi’do&% (()f the verbs Q:?Qfll!s, ete.), 853*, #J@E‘S&, 0'5‘)63%, ?.335;, %Qfi; (Of 36, ete.), Z'SQQ%’ a*."gaee%, Awed, fr”fie%, S0BS, (of e, ete.), VATF, JPpoFr, VATF, FTFF (of VAT, )0, ete.), emfiv, a’s—%”}, mae“%’%_ (of QV®*, ete.), 3T (of de0 = B&f), 3T (of 20 = 3&°)> ks PIT (of S‘ffie.‘).)z(?e’@ws), 6%, emcoi (of &6, etc.), ] mgfi; (of ¥9%, ete.), LD 3 o G 306 (of WIer, ete.). Compare the termination ¥ of the imperative in § 205. L1 Ro%s, e. g. P3N ¥° (beating, of the verb pods) 200300 97 (of W), This suffix is given only in the SabdAnusisana. 12, and R, e. g. RN, Seagefi, 8318, I8, DR (of the verbs 9@, ete.), S (of &%), to which the Sabddnusisana adds @R, IR (for W), @R, 4. 52901, 3281, BINR, WA, SRR (of BB, ete.), ¥, Bed, AS (of D, ete.). Compare the termination @ of the imperative in § 205. 13, = 3 Ll V®o3, W03 TRS (of the verbs @2, etc.), N3F (Of 8P = ), ohs SRIE (of @65)6:;3@%3)), 03 (= D3 of D), 350 (:éod&?% of é«ad\)), to which the $)2, Sabdinusasana adds &8, &3, T0d), T3y, R0, 3wod), T, R0, (of B, &F, ete.), ¥N8, T3, Foed3, 303, WNS, JB8, JIWN3, Jeed, A8, L3 (the act of £0.) loving, of &, which is different from Késava's &3). ; i 14, 3, €. g. 998 (of the verb or noun ¥¥%), 27 33, FOIT, IS, FET (of the nouns =7, ete.). The Sabdinusésana adduces BT, B,37, WY 3 (of the nouns ¥903, ete.), 18238, RR¥3T (of the tadbhavas 182, ete.). Késava adds that 38 is not suffixed to Samskrita nouns, and e. g. $¥32BF3R is wrong (PWR); the Sabdinusisana (sttras 430 seq.), however, expressly teaches how to form I | )0 8 YOI, NedSR, BATIT, Q0T 38R, 93,8388, R, 15, ~ 3 , €. g. ON?, N’ , FPprie, I (of the verbs &k, etc.), ¥orid3, BoZ, B (of V1, ete.), (223, of the verb Re9?). 26 — 202 e, 16, =, e g. 338, 303, 3033, 34T, Ien3, 3, 8L, P, I3, 3833, B, 9383, woT, w33 (of the verbs 38, ete.), TOBS, VI, 393 (of the verbs FB, ete.), pupe} o 2n¥3 (of the verb S#¢). This suffix and the instances (except @3 which is a9 that ha used also in the Sabdamanidarpana) are mentioned only in the Sabdanusisana. See § We adduce still (from the Dictionary) 233, &3 (of w3, w®*) in which the final » of the verbal theme has been dropped (cf.§ 60 and the S293 above), and 393 (of 3¥MI=23w¥My), 233 (of &0 in which the final 7™ is dropped 2 (bse (cf. § 211, 7; see under No. 18, a). 60 Compare the suffix @ 17 9 e. g. T, 392 (of the verbs T°, 30°). o, 184, 5, ¢ g. B8D (of the verb 3%), Sa¢Ir, INJF (of the verbs 3w ews, (of {] Sne®), 8D (of the verb 88), ¥ (of the noun TRo), 30, DY, WYY, Fow, verh: (of the nouns 3%, ete.), ¥, T, (of the nouns ¢, FIF), FHJ7, ST (of the nouns FHF, B¢F), 28, 39, (of the nouns w¥°, 39°), V¥, (of the noun W == B¥¥°), (bse 3R0TF (of the verb IRXT®), VAT (of the noun WAY), LD, 5T, 30D (of the The SabdanuShsana adds that verbs %, ete.). 839, comes from the noun 0. 29D is to be derived from the verb &p¥n0; likewise there are 399D, w3 (of the verbs 32%mMy, 2003, see under No. 16). Cf. § 185. Could R23% be a é formation of 8RWNY, the 1™ being dropped ? Compare the suffix . 18, (539, ¢. g PO, of the verb 03). i8¢, sty (8, e. g. 983, of a verb ©x° ?; 939, of the noun A=), 19, R, e g. w8, 38, w3 (of the verbs 2, etc.), FRIF (of the verb 1ot ¢ BR0%), S30F (of the noun ), FB:B, 3033, (of the nouns FB, ete.), @28 (of the i OB noun ), breg, Compare the use of this suffix for the numerals in § 279. The cuarious form ©®°0330 is found e. g. in Candraprabha 4, 2; Abhinava- pampa 7, after 11; 8, 455 11, 54. It is quite possible that its meaning is ‘ the The Thej not knowing’, ‘absence of knowledge’. If thus, it would have been formed from ©e203), yet to know, 7. ¢. not to know (see e. g. §§ 170. 171) and 39, so that it a-»x; would be a negative noun. Of. the noun 823 under No. 25. The meaning louy given to ©°03030 in the Dictionary is possibly wrong. (. 20, (33, e g. BT, BT, BORT; of the verbs ?TY, etc.; of. I). 21, (IR, e. g. Ju3B3%, Sabdamanidarpana pp. 219. 387, AR medieval and modern dialect, of the verbs 3¢° and S Regarding the et dropping of the = see under . Cf. IBN and ©BN under B). 22, =9, ¢ g. ALY (of the verb ALF), IBIP, &I (of 83, ete.). ey 23, D e g. 3663, WYY (of the verbs 38, W¢), V¥D. Observe that in 3ned, WY the final » of the verbal theme is dropped; ¢f. § 60 e satr 203 : 2 bl 2 [« 4, T, e g. SR, TR, WY, Y, I, VA, XY, RO (of the verbs gfc W, ete.); — I8, T, 30, 0, Fo), AP (of the verbs 3, ete.); — FEJ (?), leh 15 I (or BI? sce § 233); — ), IR, A (of the verbs 3¢, ete.). Observe Sana that in 083, F&, ete. the of the verbal theme has been dropped; cf. § 60. final See § 185. ove), A few nouns ending either in & or ® are given in § 96. pped 25, 3, e. g. 303, Jou3 (of the verbs €&, ete.), I¥S (?), V%3 (? 0. r. 2B=). Observe that in 23, See3 the final ® of the verbal theme has been dropped; cf. 8 60. 9¥3, the state of being not, may be compared with @033 under No. 19. e, 26, B9, 6. g. SNRRY, IN9A (of the verbs S0, ete.); TR, WERY; Jpord ?me (of the noun R%). Observe that in €¥3> (of the verb @%) the final » of the f the verbal theme has been dropped; ¢f. § 60. 27, ® (¢f. D), e. g. INB, YFL D, IEF, WOD (of the verbs I3, 93, 38, ). wy )1 f the Observe that in 883, 20X the » of the verbal theme has been dropped; cf. § 60. that Compare the suffix . 28, B, €. g. TIB, WD), 3@ (of the verbs I, etc.). 3 (of he a Compare the suffix © These and others are the suffixes for forming neuter nouns (Késava says). Remarks. a) Késava states that some taddhitalingas end also in e, and gives the instances emfig\, AT oom;\, IRy, Fow, mu%, Their suffixes (taddhitas) are verb not adduced by him. @ may belong to the primitive nominal bases (§ 242); A1) may be connected with A&, perplexity; =7y seems to be another form of f the 281, the quality of a simpleton; ¥3® may be 32 and W (=NE), ‘ear- breakage’; F023 is o and @ (= #o); fioas% is N’ (= %—”0&3)) and . 1874 b) Other taddhita nouns are »3 (JI°+) or %3 and Sfmfiga (DN 4-T). They optionally take the form of 239, (234 39) and 303, ([T 43, see § 122). i ‘the from Their final ¥0 may become =, in which case they appear as &3 (28), S0, 3, OO jat it The same change of final ¥V into « may take place also in the taddhita g nouns WHM (WHL M), FEMY (FS4M), Sor (Befn), Jpuno (FPonv), [ (33¢4+ 1), in which case they become 298, T¥R, Juri, Jpeark, JoeR. 5, B. The chief suffixes for forming masculines, feminines, (epicenes and neuters) are ; the 1 7 w8n (984 an, a player, a man who busies himself with, one who is oceupied with), e. g. TRQ VM, DeIWN, IRIWM. 2, WA (B4, = V8N, ¢, g, BeS&M, TISBN (0. r. BIIRT), PI&M, at 0 3, esedr} (Wt 1T, = VAT), e. g. 03BN, YPTBT. 26% 04 At 4, WONY (=POY), ¢, g. PRWWY, T¥ WY, 3B, This is only in the Sabdanusisana. See PRIV in Dictionary. Samsk 5, @os_gm e. g. @figfi@aofii, F@omd) Fon o, do,o%fmgoodgn, Reeod, It 13 LD oceurs also as ¥033, ¥03; see Dictionary. The Sabdanushsana adds BPNSSI), 13 ©J"0008), and says that the suffix means ‘superintendent’, ¢ controller’ (adhikrita). and N 6, SR (=LWY), e. g, BB WY, 802390000, PW DY, YMdF Y (o. T. Y cow), Beardddw, It has also the form of 03> (see Dictionary), and is used 1 1 for Kannada and Samskrita nouns. In the Sabdamanidarpana p. 30 PRt neu el 0® appears as tadbhava of HR¢&THTZ. I 7 &% (another form of ©&, ¢that moves, plays, performs’, ete.; see Sabd Dictionary), e.g. 9099, 2099, FEP, RREV, IVDIY, (0. r. IBIIV), [P, i PRARIERE Rm%@. It forms epicene nouns which occasicnally are used also as The § neuters, e. g. &W? 9T, LW VTYE, LwIP AB. BT 8, 5 (a feminine suffix added to 27, ete.), e. g. 3%oA (3IN), 03A, 1 ! WRBIN, ¥eBon, IRBN (¢f. Nos. 16, 17, 28); g)-césmoa;, ABIFTO, RTOFoNIBIY; TOID, nd) WS, TRT; BRIV, YIRTION,; ¥IA;-— (a masculine and neuter suffix) e. g. MY, YIMY, YOO, TIMS (see No. 26 b); — (an epicene suffix) e. g, TRMR, B TRIWIIN, BOIW, ARITINRA, AW 9, 0B, e. g. VAT, FOF, BAT (0. r. 0AF), 0¥, The Sabdinushsana has TOAF, AT, WIOF. It refers TOF to suffix ¥, teaching that it is formed of FoR> (&) ) (! which drops its final syllable; see No. 24. 10, an, e g. TOT, é"faes%zdfi, ROIR M, Aoron, Bk FON, FoF) oM, WrAT;— atter no T, BRAT, 3809 ON; —wEAN, W07, #dfi%fi (0. r. FSBEM); . VIUR, Ieon gy (0. r. SROT), JAM; —BPEDAN, ST, PO — BT, BoNn; — Reroon, w#%arf, Késa qsaz?a&fi; — W M — RO, m The Sabdanusasana has the following series:—332) Or, B3aT, Bear, FHOWR, Ssfi@fi;_—mc’%@fi, GEELI WedR, MIdR, Fedn;—BERWR, ©&IWN, JYAR, wITaAR, ROBIROT, 3,871; —2RRe0AT, TR, &mgpgfi, 33,1, 93,7, wamiséfl;_m%fi, 306931, D O ; W8T, TSN, WEIAN, éz%rf, w’asdfbfi;_%fmérf, ?o;’a%fi, @%i@rf, FIRIIEN; Sabd RO0BM, WIAOM, it %3,0M, %) OT; — TV O, FoTIRN, w$8,0M, 19T, :)égdeéfi, FR,&M. 11 a%, e. g. w00B, PO, The Sabdanushsana has FI&B. In. some instances a preceding vowel is shortened, e. g. TIV0W (for ToVWOW), The 5% Sabdanusasana adduces also %%3%)523 (for %%5%523), 3003023 (for Sdetwwdud), Wl Seo (for 25@&25), T3 (for "39@’?3), FToBR3 (for @d&aéa&). 12, 2& (a feminine suffix added to A7, ete.), e. g. WITOAL, SoBoN3, i ¥3BNY, #ai@fié, ReAN?, SeTIVNY, [oWN, 3O AL, WD N, ui@hé, RO 8. Wl o3ah The éa,bdé,nugé,sa,na has also ™3N8, WRANS, TROTMBAS, RIOFNY gfifi%flé, TR ne, SPRSIBNY, ,flds%fié, Ségdme‘mé, nRNg;—BPoNns, DTN, F032) 9N®;—TP3B) i W A8, WR3BNE, TTONS, WBeTONY, FIFINS (FWNE);—00wWN . Occasionally % is suffixed to simple Kannada nouns, . g. %% 98, 5"';‘83353:303, s 3000N8, TINFY, or to tadbhavas, e. g (’:95%}’33@3, 90RY, VRN, 3¥I0, VR, foll 205 e | the B80S, or to secondary forms of tadbhavas, e.g. TS0, To3)@%8, or also to N e Samskrita nouns, e. g. T & 008 H, WDEER wg)ssésfié. I 13 a, B, €. g. ;Sa?coaw, FEMY (?), TBWY, ™IV, TIV. (Cf. Yo D) &5 00O ?), g 135, 2o (a negative form of BT°), e.g. WAFo. Cr. § 209, note 1, 0, 1 and No. 14, used 14, 2© (a negative form of BY°, used for masculines, feminines and \W neuters), e. g. N0V, T3 O, TR0, TedS, WINL. 15, NT, e.g. efleagdé, #édgfi, TV, 3@333#, @sagj, z&am@#, w’mg@#. The §6e Sabdanusasana has also BT, ST, AT (=R F). 9, 16, N, e. g. RBOR, TN (Ta%aT), TIBOT, Recdor, edon, meagazf, %saeo@fl. ) 45 The Sabdanusisana has also SO @?sgueéofi, 3PN (3T), [OPON, T[IVOA, P37, Aeewn. Cf. No. 8. Mj 17, eovh (a feminine Svuflix)’ e. g. SVON (JN), TJTOA, WLRIIN, Weddn, 700 JR30A0. This is only in the Sabdanusasana. (7. No. 8. e f 18, el (of verb @v®°, a masculine, feminine and neuter suffix), e. g. i oA W TOWIFES, #%95, 3.830198. The Sabdinusisana adds ©8e08d, ©oBs, 200, DVTIES, FZ 63, TS, WY £3. ha 508 19, 09R (=ouwn), e. g. B9, 391, The Sabdanusisana has also VRIMIVN, FWHET, WV, TOTOYN. 20, evsd, which is the present participle of e¢v¥° (see § 180, remark = after 6; § 215, 5, ), and by adding the suffixes ©o, V%%, YWI, (VID), VI, VW) pin may be used to form masculines, feminines and neuters (see §§ 185. 186). Aill8 Késava's instances are all of the maseuline gender, viz. 8BV 0 (F& o4 YV¥)0), IR0, ms‘amo%o, L3¢, éeumae{)o. See § 273. o 21, f QUESN (= QU9R; ¢f. YW in Dietionary?), e. g. Beso . 29, QM’ > (a feminine suffix;ecf. § T4), e. g. WRB, #ned, =28, 238. The Sabdanusasana adds obri, ¥, T3, 335&5@, 3¢, z.)iji, 23%2), 23@9%, a’oos'i, 30023, e)e’a;, 3o, ai o%%;_fi@coaoii, WHRTI), ;— ToWI0W, FIBRW; —VoRTdN, R B3dR; A0S, TIETT. ome 23, w03y (a noun of the masculine gender preceded by the genitive), e. g. BRBRE, RRBRBD, WBHBD, JVReBI (Mdb., IVIRRERIY), S30F030 Bodd. The Seo § 215, 5, b. Its feminine is % &2. i 24, B, c.g. VT, wOT, IRIT, TRYF (BHOT?), IRIT, BT, WAETF, WT, B90F (0. r. ¥W¥F). The Sabdanudisana has FOF (see under 9F), FGF, 3£¢0F, WOT. i 9 25, BoLI, e. g. B3 T, %ofio%%aes, Re3zse, ST, TETIN, WRTH, WY T, N 9 The Sabdanusasana has ¢ 23eddToe, eBoTow, W) BT, IRNTVTI (0. r. SNRRTIW). Cf. No. 29. 2% @iz, INTH, JVRTE, 39269) T, 3R eRTI. 26a, TN, e. g. TOUVD, Fud T, QeTOFEN, FooT8n. The Sabdanu- i) v $hsana makes it TOBR (according to the sandhi rule in § 215, 7,a) in the Ja?/y following words:—-—§053%é3rf, 11630831, w0moedT. P — P 206 260, 309, It is used with the application of the sandhi rule in § 215, 7, a. See No. 8. Ac 27, To® (=19, a masculine, feminine and neuter suffix; probably of formec nomin TP = B0V, to seize, etc.), e. g. HBITOY, 0309, SeoToP, JREFOFY, [IITIY. WUR0 | The Sabdinusisana has also ©BIT9, B9, SRWY (see § 58), MVLY. el See 28, R, e. g. 230, FI 0, SIAT, VAR, Wedn, BaIN, Indn, BT 8.0, under No. 8. The Sabdanusasana adduces also YWHR, RABWOM, IJe3n, [IBM, 9+0), 301, 02310, Tt 29, vo%9 (= T, with the application of the sandhi rule in § 215, 7, a), of the e. g. weBMme, fi&imes, WML, BI3MIE, JRSMI, and & When ™® is preceded by @V, a euphonic sonné is put after the ¥V, e. g. Foh; BRI, HHIOMRE, BRBIOMRH, TIWIOMY, or the ¥V may be dropped, e. g. Toud & (for Tfozéonam) 4 suffixg ¥3), and T3 drop the T of Mo, so that they become Fad.®, Fomy e 4 1an 30, Ro® (=799, with the applieation of the sandhi rule in § 215, 7, a, what ; preceded by a euphonic sdnng), e. g. @MY, T8 oMY (0. r. FIBY,0MY), JL0rI?, ©oora?, @wond¥. The Sabdinusisana has also T9030 9, D)9, 31, & (a feminine suffix), ¢. g. VB, V3, 1Y, IV, FPv2 (with the elision of final ») ; 33&*%@, 7639, TISFS, fiégjé; é;fio@wé, #o;figowé (see under No. 29); IO MATIIF, INTISF, IVRTISF, WRTdF, BedTdF (of YT, ete., with the elision of final ¥); we’NIBF, FoWMISF, WIVTISF, BHRIMDIF, WEMSF, Jodmrer, SRSMSF, 89 s8¢ RoBMaSF (of we&To®, ete., with the elision of final ¥); ©@EIIY, PV, IBIY, H ST, A I9, (of ©BITY, ete., with the elision of final ¥). moder 32, (B, =2 e.g. T9B, BB, with the dropping of final »). ) VYV[ t 33, S8R, e g. NOSWN, NAIWE, 2eIFT. This suffix is only in the trude’ Sabdanusisana. (Regarding OS8R it says — 1S 88 WoHT HBens | 38 RA3NT 8 || 6} the OFT T 98 Fmra? B, SRIFWTVT 3,098t 833 NBeNs | 3T, ABNTR, ¢ 10migy ™ 1)) tpho 34, AN, e. g. Foow¥3eT, YYS&R. The Sabdanusisana has FowoIaT, i SRSIRN. 10mip 35, SeIR, e. g. DRQHN, NUBEM, VoSN, FOBN. T 36, =, ¢ g. WIS (0. r. WOHTY), A0S, BEFIT, (0. r. PAII). See § 215, 5, &. 37, 39, ¢. 9. ©BITY, ORIVY, TBIY, PATY, IPRAIY, AL I, (ARBTY). 38, se(gb) (= ;S%?), e. g- @dfio—j%{’, 8:953\);5%;), ete. A 102, These and others are the suffixes for forming masculine, feminine (and neuter) nouns (Késava says). for 4 The taddhita nouns mentioned under letters 4 and B are more or less used 153‘(\ in the three dialeets. l\exd\ 207 v—— 4,([ Remark, According to § 115 (¢f. § 249) masculine nominal bases are frequently y of formed by the addition of the suffixes %, he, and o, the grammatical sign of the V39, nominative, to the genitive. Késava addaces the following additional instances:— WVBO (WUBHY40), a man of the right, 0F0 (30Fe0 - 1.0), a man of the south, Se WAERL0, BBITWO, Joeriteo, FETE0, SBITMWO, w¥M0, Fpenieo, WS 03890 (VO 369 - A, ©t0, see § 139), QY 030890, N 0380, TR0 (see § 139, 3223 £90 (;imiea;l_ ©1.0), dT 00, WS 90, Q3 £90. The feminine forms in the ancient dialect are S0F0%° (30T - ©%%), a woman 1, 0) of the south, WBNHY?, SBITee, Ficdreave. In the modern dialect ¥ (¥I0) and ©3% are added to the genitive, e. g. 3059 ($080337), a man of the south, od 7o U ?’Cng.)fi, %%fiflfis, 503%53, @92’03)&5; 5@03.)33%50, a woman of the side’ ete. A strange form, however, appears, when in the ancient dialect &3 and o are suffixed to ¥Q, 49, W, and ~O, viz. ¥ORo, a man of that place, BT, a man of this place, ¥© 30, a man of this intermediate place, ¥ %o, a man of T, 0y what place, e. g. Qo %, 3 38R PFTe3 Ao | . [ %?e)dfie?fid&e‘ad&m 931)%50 08 B3R @) DR E [ision B8 3L BSY TWo R WATINTINO T &z:i o‘baé‘aefi 79 @ddfidrms&efigdfofi@ndfim VOBONTV PO ? | 1 I Jision A @ and o are found in the attributive nouns 9,30, Fd,Fo, TWOFo, 3930, mer, 30030, R3¢0t0, W B0, B Eo, 309 Bo (§§ 273. 274. 276). 330 How is the B0 in ®9 @0, ete. to be explained ? Let us take the corresponding modern form ©9 03I, a man of that place, as our guide. It is composed of ©9 | that place, %, a euphonic letter to connect the @ of the genitive with the crude base of the noun (§§ 109 under genitive; 130; 141, remark under dative), ) the T o =29 I ®, the termination of the genitive, ¥, he, and 39, the grammatical sign of the It is evident that the ®° in @9 To is a substitute for the )76, nominative (§ 114). euphonic 03° in ©@9 03330, which connects the @ of the genitive with ¥, so that 093 (for ©O o) is obtained, to which ©, he, and o, the grammatical sign of the e, nominative, are suffixed. (See under w970 in § 276.) The feminine forms of @9 o, ete. are WO B¢, VOB, YO BT, IO T, o 3R) § - XI. On compound bases. 244. Compound bases (samisalingas) have been mentioned in § 68, 3; 102. s, d; 215, 7, @ seq. « When (two or more) nominal bases (etc.) seek > (a.nd for a meaning (directly, without intermediate augments and terminations) as a calf does for the close union of its mother, a compound is produced”, : used Késava says. In such a case intervening augments (dgamas) and termi- — 208 — h nations (vibhaktis) are elided, e. g. 3w253a3 (2. €. SRERL 0 4+ ) By becomes 3REBRZ9Y, 3RBX BF, 3ABRR, LB VE OBINEG geLc0n homog PIPSER WO Vo TIPWL To SREILY TR, [RTI, (§ 278, 1), 30T Zwfi e £F%o BoFITo (¢f. § 215, 7, b), and also substitutes (AdéSas) are introduced, e. g. D09 s& becomes v s (§ 247, 1), IINT =~"Ja-<oo N T3 m (§ 246, b), PR ¥R Tz & (g 247, 13), awo SRBSE aoaflm- g 7 w o (5 248 1), 0B 39035 B330F 03 (§ 248, 2) or 3o Compounds are used more or less in the three dialects; about the [ extent of their use in each dialect the Dictionary is to be consulted 7 0 The rules about euphonic junction (sandhi) in § 215, 7,a seq. are RO " to be remembered 3 04 245 Vv First there are six compounds in Kannada which are also in (ZB Samskrita, viz. 530 TR, FROFHOTS, am FAYSATS) eao cfm & and @;5%0&@ 5593, About three other Kannada compounds see § 253 N\j fi\; 246, The first Kannada compound is 33080 It is called so R, N, § because the leading instance of this class in Samskrita is tatpurusha <the servant of him governs indicating that the last word ¢<purusha Ob the preceding one ¢tat’, requiring in this case (and in Kannada, it may a4 Yoy be said, generally) the genitive Cf. § 253, 2 @) Instances in which the first member of the compound is unaltered u “wher are: —3REPRI[wy, & mango of a river (¢.e. a mango grown near a river), (ki QB39Q, a word of inferiority, Ssos3080, a tree of the mango, 0O AR SeedTRs., FPNIFP, X% he 0 @@zfir% "563(735'8‘ FRIEIoNY, NBIRSS RESS @Q)C%JE)Q‘F&JO eae)z%@e;-deao, 3PRREF TR0 VABFE, PR e f Pecul; WBIDFR, BeBRF 3.0, %“N;Soroz’. SeRTOF 390, WBeARIFR, é&fif)rs‘io, Teang *Soom%fi o%°, omeéfi; efim%fi’n ofie;6 BN, "c:?’é eT*, %’m@ e&lo, NESBNRWRY, ) ?J\J@Cs)u@fi@c, TEBedd T@H o, 38T, B ’5’?@(’@‘ %”E'a\)o BORRFones 2) BEIpwo, BoTTS, IPeTprISs M) 388, 30083, 2PNE, TPFTYLDTI Qéfio 3P0WIDNR, FTHBR Cwo FEONR, 2390 0B, 39038 WM 20300 R Icg (r Opengg T D, T¥9 tlo, SReYatio, WIBRD 0 on) Lo In such compounds a double letter may appear after a répha (r) f TN FO° See W%’f e. g. QN F (for eNFEEY), YWREFD, VT FSK A\Qgy § 371, 4 oo Also where there is no compound such a doubling happens e. g b wen FEPRIRY 300 FORND) N3 FRTRIT Fed,rrgony (¢f §119,a arg dative). See § 371, 4 Wgs E— 209 P b) Instancesin which the first member loses its last syllable, or a homo- ) geneous letter (uéitdkshara) together with elision is introduced, or a go?% homogeneous letter without elision comes in, are—&%‘%@@% (=w¥ry or are wHNReD %@e%), WHTONE, wPTowo, z‘éja,J%Jae% (=037 or Jptinee—), (‘4‘)‘3\ TpLOTE, wdBeetlo, ReRwy® (=Rex® or wesd—), Bone?® (=3o0F or ,m? 80T0 —), BTSN (= VTR 0r WTAT—) ;— 853, 0T (4. e. 304 W+ VT = S0T or 30Te0 IOTF), TIOMIA (=T J, OF 39 ed 28 ToR), [POMIGK® (=[P f the Or BRIT TaRF), BoRIM (=8 or BIT TWIN), TSeNB (=T30), or TN TH), %&33\@%'33% (=79 or F¥new—), '8‘533_&&5636, 3¢ ) 3 5, 3 9,83 T . are %C’%zéef, QT (=39 or TIAee—), T V0;—2IPRONPNH (4. e 2R’ +Wo=waQR—), Z)Jaémgs@ja (2. & DRV +Bo=DPRT HED), ’1‘7’2?@?3%@@@ 50 11 T (¢ e. %%‘-}-9.90:%’55)@53 3RCI9), ® F o [°} Q WSIO) (z’.e i 3 -+ O::?fi?.&d 5&)&3@) 3 afié?dfi\majo%b (¢ e. fiééfr c;}-%da;jagy which finally is = B0 %Jam%)), éée‘c; d 0 3R, ;Ségaia, é%sus‘, fi'wi}?’éé (=ToRy Or T2RR %25&), a'aw&zg, T, ufi& €, T2, o, oG9y, Bortoed, 599 NTevo (see § 234). VoINS Observe that there is no sandhi when %% and D[ped are followed by b Ay a vowel, e. g. w¥ ©tlo, LY vQ; see § 215, 6, 4. 247. The second compound is ¥OFgadod. Késava says that I red “when the (two members of a) tatpurusha are in the same relationship Wel)l (ékasraya), it is a karmadhiraya . That is to say, in a karmadharaya Y Yy Ay the component words stand in the same case (as two nouns in apposition), é the first word being but the predicate of the second one or expressing a b | kojj peculiar quality of it. Késava elucidates this by saying that weoriFm* R0 means eoTy, D I, an eye that is like a flower. Cf. § 253, 2. (W A0 ;\4 a) Instances in which the first word remains unaltered, are:—=o@) o @Y, a burning-wild (a wild where corpses are burnt), »zorwe, boiling- "5’55*)1 rice (rice that has been boiled), ®@orizms, an opening-eye (an eye that is jJ) @fi‘ opened), DBOTE, WRITNIY,, WRITOF, fadmaé{; , SUBINRESS, S5 TR, BOBIRPRTE, LINRC3, BB, VYONRF® & SCERRAST, oM FrEITO ] (‘)- To%*, BRonw) TIYF, HTIF, ,&7 TRINYY,, fiefigojjs’ ge,,:)%jgdeoo, See RS, IANT*, 9B 0, RRBILIDBL. b) Instances in which a euphonic sonné is inserted after the first word, 6 19 (hy are :— 3, 0NRee*, T3y, 0Ne°, JPI, oNWLIRY, @éfig&ommc@o, ROBIF 0T 0%, BFonY o, aRBITIoNI 0, FRITOFE, WVTIFEL LS, 3RMIRR & e 27 —— 210 p— 13 IRIRR S, BRMIRN G, 08y,By 0300, WBYTALY, esé&gjas&‘o, ERIH Vo, the fin DoBITNCI, BWFR TFF, SHENBAB, TENZE, SRRVUATT, 14 Q‘)éie)dowfi%*o, %M&o&o@fi, %’éflgdo“cgfiegfio, K)&fioo&:%fio, 8&3&&%&33 (here: 5898) a hill-like load), CS%’J%Q S, ST 0P, WT [ e, %%ofizée')’, 3Bon ¢ (.18 et ¢) Instances in which an en is put before that soénng, are: k@ofiw% 3 D (A& + ov+0—), faw%iaoa‘b’%wi,. Of. 23&"323);3‘30%33 under d, No. 2s. 19 d) Instances in which substitutes (¢f. §§ 273. 277) are used. In them %4 L ey becomes I or JF0, e, g. BRI or BRoN e, I3RS or 36525@&3 domes (¢f. § 251); 16 2, 2% retains its form or becomes VU3 (c¢f. § 266), €. g. WV TI0FO Or VT d@% TIFO, WY TZ0 or NUYBE0, VVFIO or WTYFRFO, N YOORT® or DO YOIRT?, 17 D TR 0390° or DG Eai 03008 ; 18 3, B becomes SB, e, g. INUEF0, JRTIY, INWIR, INIPCFO, SRFIS 0, LEAND FRVTINY, IRT; 19 4, w3 becomes VB, ¢. g. WBIBY; BRI VT, ¢, g. VIRcw°SF, a kingly Eugenia 20 Jambolana tree (cf. § 246 under b about YTIR) ; 5, YO appears as PY, IR a5 I, PRI a5 P, VPR as VY, e. g. PY, ; 2 Serio, FONI, B0, PRI, H¥3e®; (if PR, 30 and ¥ are followed by a vowel, there eI is no sandhi; see § 215, 6, ¢); 2% & 6, w830 appears as Wi, DL as DY (¢f. No. 21), B3> as B ed? e g. Y W wEBed, S8R, @ 8.3 & @ A% it 1 é’%é) appears as 395, w93) as w9, 209.230 as WL, 3.)@23& as IO, e, g. bemg YTy, 3R, w¥FJFo, wHYAR, WM, 3RS, Yto, Jwyd, FVB (cr. No. Al 18 cal sankh 8, weg’);éo appears as W 58§a§.) as 3%°%, B30 g5 B, [IBY as 9° Mmey (A%, ete.), e. g. a&z‘a"@‘fi, ViR e, é’sag)cosw?, :«a’z‘%@udce, 88 B, :\Sasggdo, RSN faairaé@ QonBS®, Qoo (¢f. No. 10, 11) ; [SV) " 9 208, before consonants, appears as 307, VIR as B9° (¢f. Nos. 10. 11), fu e. g. 83078, 397 Co, IIRFy, B onie?, BN, B0, B 0der, ©§Y0; allciey 10 ? 28R, before vowels, appears as 0%, e, g. 3¢033, JeBRD, VST, O, Re38, JWwEO®; (regarding a3° of 9WY, see No. 8, it is to be remarked that Wiy before consonants it may appear also as 3%, e. g. S0wTo, Y, HoNEF, tm% é@fi%é\?); 2 i e, W, 3®°, (39°, see No. 23), 0B, W, B¥¢°, FoO° (see Nos. 7. 8.9) Q’cgé 3;, and ¥¥°, %° take dvirbhiva, i. e. double their final before a vowel, e. g. @383, Barg, W, 9, 2»%5*5;3 ¥ ), 38 007, 301 00, WP @rcdro, BeB, o B, VY w), T &; 0r ag 12, F&R), before vowels, appears as F&°, QR as &%, IR as I, the under < final &° being doubled, . g. ¥ 8,9 e 3’ #é&%ofibo, Efés%egé‘, &"&3&&)0&?6, %”éjgdz&;jo, &%Cg.}@s, 3 ) 2803, &%@r, 2B R YT, ségdc;:s, S8y, ¢o, F¥Te°; Mady — 211 P — XL e 13, %@, before vowels, appears as 33° and 303 (¢f. § 151, b, 2; No. 14), the final 3° being doubled, e. g. 38 8, 33 ¢, 33 Ro°, T3 @, T3 R¥E, B0 J0; oo, 1616 14, TRWY, before consonants, appears as F&, BW as ¥R, B as RV, 6980 ag 30 and Toe), e, g. TRMOBOT, FRMY, ARIRBA LY, RWIT30:0, RBINEO 19 o3 (0. r. SBITRF0), IBIRWoT, IBINRRY, IBIR, FLIIRT®, IewTS, TLIT23E, FoNBE, ARRRe ST, 38 TR0, #oesm;io, ?QGSQT{C&%’ TSR 03T; BW appears also as &, e. g. QR ONF Pl o~ © 15, 333, TS, B appear as To, Fo, Ho (¢f. § 251), e. g. RS IOM () iy them ES] e D, A 7 338, 3 90, Foneo, Tone®, Fomok, Fonwd, FoRla, @g%s, a?;j%égs, F W 365@ d Bone®, B 0°; 16, @‘bif) appears also as 230, e. g. t3oneBN e, W¥oRWRTS, ?365%&3, aSa;om, o) 90 ?33&0‘3%@6, B39, ¢30, 18307 ; R0, 17, 333, before vowels, appears as TR (F¢T), e, g. FRY,, FRAQ, TR, 18, "0‘3%23::3, 232%33 appear also as %7-30’ ‘&3?30’ e g. %fiofiefifie:fi, ITRINSS, '3"&307'{@326, 3380, FROIJPTE, TAIR0Y, WAINATT, VRIZ 0%, WAIRLO®, WRoMY; 19 3% 3, before vowels, appears also as B3 (82 ), e. g. T34 €9, B3 BT, B 1 20, e 8¢ $ appears also as 82 followed by a euphonic sdnnd, e. g. BRoT?; 21, W8,32 (see No. 6) appears also as X&), e, g, WP, WITHE, VeTY; ,f’é 22, F00F0 appears as FOBY, ¢, g. RIIF, FoBMRee’, FoRdIe?, Fodowad, FORINV023Y; there 23, @39°, 39° (see No. 11) may be followed by a euphonic ¥Vo, e. g. X% 64 %é{%’ éeéoe)s%fims i 948, The third compound is &0, é. e. (worth) two cows, this word J’eg being in Sarmskrita an example after which this whole class of compounds b@%@ is called. Késava says that «when (the last word of) a tatpurusha is sankhyaptrvaka, ¢. e. preceded by a numeral, it becomes a dvigu”. The , o numeral is the predicate of the noun which follows. Also Fos) and &m?;?v Lo are reckoned among the numerals (¢f. § 90; § 278, 4). Substitutive forms are often employed in dvigus, especially in the 0, 11) ancient dialect :— £U’01 1, w32 often appears as %0°, e, g. BRIFA (for w3 &), w3FS (for 23 39), { that WHFRO, WIRFROE, WHFER, ?»3.)?'59&, and as %0° before vowels, e. g. $.00m e, %00 dgp. See § 278, 1 and Dictionary under »3° 1 g 2 203 often appears as ~0&° (cf. §§ 215, 7, a; 234), e. g. VVORWT, ST ) cccaéso, DT & 206, &, 2T, T, o)dfb’DéCSO, or as @0° e. g. AV, 9373, fa%?réigd, ; ) 93IFR, FTRFR, 9IFS, BIOFodS, QIFYS, YIIFR, BEPF B0, BVFLI 07, GBI, | ‘:{ or as &0 before vowels, e. g. 8003, &0w3,. See § 278, 1 and Dictionary under AT°, 7, the 3 B0 often appears as =00, e, g. FORTROTY, FIRTFR), FIVTREY, SO Lo, J%gj‘;, S0 BRETo, FRTS, TR PF, FNBTR, SIWREE, SoRMYFo, FwwRWwee), TR, 20 212 or sometimes as = after which the consonants s°, n¢, &°, =°, 35° are doubled, 79 e. g. BOTLR, [0TW,3, a’mfi%cgfi, TNYEDT, BB TS, FNFPO, [TRE, or ol sometimes before & which then becomes %° and is doubled, e. g. 323235 cbd, G 30003 3@, 3023 B, [oes) ©°, or before vowels, when it gets an o3¢ between which nR is doubled, ¢. g. 0T, FNIRA, [cdye, FOINA. See § 278, 1 and Dictionary under 3%, and c¢f. 323,38 in § 278. o 4, S0y often appears as T, e, g, WYY, YR, IST, See § 278, 1 il and Dictionary under 2, EN 5 Q.*DOSSJ?D often appears as ’930336, e.g. @Ofi;)j@, 603%99%710, 3:905390&50, @0'33%02’)36. In See § 278, 1 and Dictionary under ®035° 5, forme 6, ©®) often appears as ©), e, g. @w)fiégfi, TR, PEIILW), WeIIROTSE. suffix See § 278, 1 and Dictionary under ©e> 3. 7, D often appears as V’, e, g. &’)ngéx_)&, 805%_63936, &)@3@1?@@3, 33@5@)5, &')G;D&O. EJJJ%S See § 278, 1 and Dictionary under 2&° 4, BSlD) 8, =% often appears as %%, e. g, 09,32, MW Ao, 2B See § 278, 1 ) 0 and Dictionary under &5 2 9, I3 appears as 38IF° before 33, wviz. o3, and as 2339, oo whic| before 30 and AT (FI0IIT, NT), viz. zus%osafa&es), u;figooispo:-bdo. See § 278, 1 and Dictionary under %=°. the 10, T3, appears as SOOI before AAZ, viz. JoWOIAT0, ag BF° (I, B, ferm; ®3%) before w& and ~0@), viz. 38,8, BZTE, as IV (BR) before F00®) and N J VY, vig. JDJVR®), Stbaw%, and as IF° (IRI) before V3N, EEI, DM, C\S’ J J 0f viz. 5@5030%, BRI, BRI e, fi@a‘s’m%. See § 278, 1. il Seed and ®AC appear also as IR®° (IRF) and A0S, ¢, g, IVIFA, SRINFS), IRGIFATO, MITIFR, TABF G0N0, FARWFFo, FIATFT®. See § 278, 1. | 12, ToD and SO appear also as TV and IV, . g, FOUSRo, VB0, sylla [ONTE, VOITTHE. 0f 3 249. The fourth compound is VI, 0. It is a predicate referring to some subject or other, or serves to qualify or define another word, The word com D sometimes being so to say an adjective (see § 102, s, d). Word bahuvrihi, ¢possessing much rice’ is, in Samskrita, the instance after which this class of compounds has been named. alwa.: 4 su Bahuvrihi compounds terminate in e (®o) and . C()ll]p Instances are: (©30) JZooR, (VTF) IDIOFG, (BRY) VBB, a gt (830) TARNTVO, (WIFF) TVARRTY, (Vo) BEBNIVo, (BTFF) B3 oo, FBNFN, BOTID, ;30@?3;5‘*95, FRIREB, TRoRLA, ARISPNRe, IR of Jv‘ ZoeN, @zsmsg)a, QBINTO, RBVIFomIB® (¢f. § 243, B, 8), 38590300, 6, 0 fio%figp@o, BEPZ S0, BONFe o ué&é@éofioo, FeRAW0, TRIVY o, “ Wy e s 213 lad, S8R e¥0, JRIMTIFo, JBIDTHO0 we Sadvo, ©NR e 8Go eRBB3NRRwo OF %QS 3radvo, DORBFOV0, RoBR @e3vo (¢f. § 115; § 243, B, remark), { j&, %afi%eméo TCITRR0, VPN, hich PAWID, u@omfl Ne')eD (anow) uNOO and (r’ido) TR (Fa@onwees), BINS (), aaeae‘) (“"—6 cf- § 243, B e, DWer®, ©eAM® (¢f. § 243, B, 8), to which the Sabdanusisana adds §,1 SR, 20RO, ToIyne®. Feminines with ¢ are e. g. 28 SHSBoys QBRIBRBOVGE, BEBIB30G* YWV dy In mutually fichting with swords, fists, etc. a kind of bahuvrihi is VY formed in which the same word occurs twice, the final one taking the ) suffix i and the preceding one taking the suffix &, e. 9. as9moa59&, Saotse ] 0 S8, Bop RY, HtArAL?, B dD (01 B BD), FFwIDOD (0- T- d—aafm) oyésuwoe& 203 3. "‘he Sabdanusasana has FU T, TRCOD 78, ] BREO, wamvmz% 250 It unites two or more words ol The fifth compound is 3,3 which, if uncompounded, would be in the same case and connected by §,1 the conjunction evo (ww) ‘and’ the last word frequently taking the 038N 0N e, 38 39030 &F, T 5’\1, terminations of the plural, e. g. 9OAPRY* and DNTINSS, TIZOOT ,£9T° STNRBIVP, HSR 60 Lo aterat=d el TRITR 3 o eorie*, but being also in the singular, e. g. So8ARY, T93WR To, WHNP TSR, T See § 354, 1I, 4 )F Wy When 83y, and gz3y are joined, the first 83, may drop its last 1 e Yy Syllable e. q quQ cus)é O@?LQSO 330,53, VPR3, B[99, W0, 339,39, AD Cf. § 137, a, genitive plural; § 304, a. b 1§ 251 The sixth compound is e9s3, 09025953 In Samskrita this ord, compound is formed by joining an indeclinable particle with another ord word, the resulting compound, in which the indeclinable particle forms fter always the first element, is again indeclinable In Kannada the first 1s a substituted form of a noun, which form by itself is indeclinable; but the compound is declinable, and may be said to be identical in quality with )9, a tatpurusha (¢f. Késava’s dc33n =0, ete. in § 246) 3 (s The substituted form of & is o of Svery Soeo, of B1 0 200 W ) DR Do, of FFR 36, of 269y 1o, of VAL Vo (¢f. § 247, d, 15 18) e. §. ©oNR03F, orDSF, 500 03® S3000TTDEF, 3000NI03F, Svonoer 5080 300, WRT, S[owoBIono AN A Lo SMNERAD! n, oY’ (0.1 &omo®) @l‘ P — 214 ——— DINB, DI, 3L, 8—65?%&33, %633%53, 0Q,F, WRRS, Woraes, d@fi% 0o WD N Cf. also the substitute 23 or £@o of Feary in § 247, d, 1. 5 0)) AN UT, * U Fmel 252, After the six compounds that occur in Kannada as well as in Samskrita, have been treated of, it remains to draw attention towards fifidmc the rules which exist in Kannada as to choosing words for them which bj are congruous. 4 T&(i B 1 The general rule is that Kannada words may form compounds with bl Kannada words, as will appear from §§ 240-251. 2, Another general rule is that Samasamskrita words (§ 70) are not to be compounded with Kannada words (see the few exceptions under No. 11, a). It b g.1 WG is therefore wrong to say ¥6,m0vo, $03TB, and to use such compounds as NAN e\ appear in the following part of a verse: eIBRITISNCI 970303 drvo, DI édfi@flsié’@ 30eR, TERRI0e30 | Jon33IN ofio%dro. (Regarding ©08R0FISR30 see under No. 7.) comh In such cases there occurs what is called an arisamésa or viruddhasamasa, 3 ¢. e. unsuitable, incongruous compound (¢f. No. 11). 3, The Tatsamas mentioned in § 71 may be compounded with Tatsama, oughi Samasamskrita, Tadbhava (No. 4), and Kannada words, e.g. ©0¥se3, ©oTH93, mean #éfiso#o, JReoF0, FYMoF0, FNI0F0; —BoNNFVWI0, VoI, Woneets, 7 30 %0, camorfs@o;_@égdfisef, VY[R, @%&afio;_flo%fioa’mo, TIBNoTF R0, IR, know FoT0, %oea%fio#sao;_.éoosfiuaee"g, zs.rae?fifaee'g, oaobfixaes’ad, B3 RReB, %csfifimfié,_ WRo a Tag neg n3Fo, 7 NS, Tieg Moevo, mgafiegof, neg $0w, fiagsfodai; — T NAY, YO, R IWM 0, MY R o, 3% 9o; — W@EMe¥o, Memeo, Ry mado; —Beonned, ReESTD Y30, Shwered; —FdBYo, FZ¥o, B3¢0, I¥Bo, IBe3wo; — ToOR I DO, (’g £ 39 R ¢F 3690, midmdeao, BTTEacTe00; — WPk o, aads%o, 5%11530?:’?, s%fifiwa, SYDobd, SYIB, IYIGFrI0, U300, IY RS, mTY0; — Wy TBWO, WY IR N, "\NJQ@, (z.):o@:s@do ma%zscmq)fimo), WO R TIWO; — &¥,00, GUFO, :Sqaeeojjoo, Su3wo, IIFVo (or JWFOO), FOBWWWO, PHWWO, INPIFVO (or INWFVO); —JWVFwo, WITTo, NOTS 7?\0;_—’—@0&355&0230, 3anBv00, T Foowdo, A80080; — WRRY, FoZB, ISR, No, ) FoTolR8, IR, B008; — Sy M¥o, FYVBNTIT Fo, BY Td; — @%édd:ae%, 5-’99@;5596, 52;3@3596, PINS, INSRHLTE, IIZINSG; — APV, ITVI, VIIR, véd%,_a’w#flmafimo, Yo, 2 RS Re3 0, ANINT B, RWIRRR,WoR. 1] 4, Two Tadbhavas (§ 370) may be compounded, e. g. ©OTIRATH, W& oy : B9, ©FFRYR, VIBRIVo, VWRSIT o, WT, 390, 0TI, 3—’#&%%&, #%dmado, %, #s%xdo, F3,J00, TIY TNOER, FomIA, %afifim‘g, TR R0, sfdaséas.&o, #Jac%m@, %o B9, 0, Foebydo, WT I, 2383 oeso, 1839, Mado, W) fiwfiu, zs‘-aafe% 0, WM, WIRT,0, i q 8 3% @e3tlo, ®WMNZY, WIIIT0, ump:s%%?, E5Y0) aQ & BRenToIn, RN, aamwégdo, 9 : 330, 838, 39, 2WTo, &R0, &ToTIS Fo, BRATO, Q8 Vo, do;fiégjfi, BoRTo, BITI 0, e0mp —— 215 — A o” cSJa;SéBfi mmo Nc%amo BeraIIN, Dactfla%éo $9030323930, uea;j)do we 30, WY ;Sméo 0¢3RO, ;Ssafirmwo :madreméfi IRV, IRVTI, smasao d# RoTFS, d# AZNTed0, dfifi;fio@ Gfiséofi Taodoni e ¢S, 30#6560 S0F w30, SO#wado R0F0 §1 303330 NOfiC§3§ £90, N('Sfiédmo N&)Q)%"JEQO eo&) ~a§9ao Ndodfi&fl?o Nd&f(fio 230 s ,m £90, Naéeao N@Oi)ddo Naosomado N@O.)).J‘wado mozsdsj% hich 5, The first word may be a Samasamskrita (§ 70) and the second one a Tadbhava, e. g. @S 3WReRo, FIWFIG, RPeBITo, WIRTS, BexTOIR0, TowRTo mith TTLR Y, 0, BCJA0, TIRTT,, TR0, DIRROTS, IR Y, FVONSIIB0, FIoNTaTL, D0NRLR, RITBR 6, 0 be The first word may be a Tadbhava and the second one a Samasamskrita, It e. g. ¥8 8o, WIRIMIMO, a# &3o, #mwuo MASYRo, fioudw& B33 ;5)(30 WIBR30, 5 a5 W3, IV 0, 3noeso, aogcasfio, gse; Bonaeso, C‘)Jaaéro cSroueD cSN;S:J 2031, ESPAEER a&rameao INTIP, IRBVITO, JPWIR, INRT0 ;S:awaééo SR PYTIT0, JITPF RR0, Sen0IN0, RonBwIPo, Be8TaT0, B30 9930, RTTTM0, FGTID, MBS0, TISIFLBFO TR, ADTINI0, BN PTIS 7, A Samasamskrita term of which a Tadbhava exists should not be 1480 combined with a Tadbhava term, e. g. the poet Hariraja’s 303¢® Zned¥, 3w 03 DBFNYo should be 3T’ TRBTeIHd 8z JYBBRS0 ©0RIT0=RTo (under No. 2) AL ought to be LIBRINIST0 3999 Remark by the author of the present grammar:—It seems that KéSava means a generally known and as such used Tadbhava, not one which is less m0i known and seldom used, as %303, for he himself (under No. 5) uses TIVTT, T3 f?fi/ J9R0, and PIRROFS instead of HI03TF, TI0VFB0, and DJINBIROTS (903> being a Tadbhava of T3%) h (35 8, It is allowed to compound a Tadbhava and a Kannada (d €81 A YA ya) term, 0690, e.g. ¥ONY, YOI, JOTAR0, PRI I $o, A8 I3, RonS3es NRDCSJDQE%O 68, 9, It is allowed to add a Kannada term to a Tadbhava compound, e. g 2 RWIVDR FRRONSE, BRI S,NM 95, 5900eARIPTY 0 10 It is allowed to add a Kannada term to a Tatsama compound (see WUR No. 3), e. g. TE,053 00, FPIPSBIBITY, RWENI, 93> ol 11 Of old a number of incongruous compounds (arisaméisas, see under 30, No. 2) were in use and may still be used, viz 2,80, @) eight compoands of Kannada and Samasamskrita words: — @e*F03%Fo, ¢ @erE3o (0. r, BORI0), THEF 0, FRIBIFO (0. r. FRIZT0), FHTR, MwFdd, 3007 B0, Jonese®; and Jaoof b) titles (birudu) or a string of titles (biradavali), e. g. FOSeB Moeso, N iéd NRTW), NINHT I N30, NeWoTBR B 00, ROSNAFIP0, RFNVINDINS,0, INASSZ 80 0 BIZ0BeBo, FVBRETFRV 090, ete In such titles or string of titles incongruous compounds may be used at pleasure (352 38) 480, 216 In the compounds under numbers 3. 4. 5. 6, 8. 9. 10 and 11 a change of an initial consonant of a compound member may occur according to § 215, 7, a. &. 253. As stated in § 245, there are three other samésas in Kannada, viz. % oeRBPRN, NZFABPReNT, and JemyIZeRens®. They y are found more or less in the three dialects. €g> 1 The kriyasamasa or verbal compound is formed ¢“when as the XY A compound’s first member a noun that has a certain relation to the verb W3 9 (karaka, § 344) and a verb are placed together (sannida), ¢. e. compounded, so as to give a distinct meaning (arthavyakti). is pr In forming such verbal compounds a sonné must be added to attrit Samskrita nouns ending in ¢ whereas concerning such Kannada (or (. tadbhava) nouns this is optional; Kannada and Samskrita nouns ending may in ey optionally insert a sdnné; in some cases the final syllable of the heca first member is elided. See the sandhi rules in § 215, 7, a. b. outiy @) Instances wherein the Kannada (or tadbhava) noun (ending either in «, and %, consonants, ©, or @V) has the meaning of the accusative, are e. g. W¥BRY 0 whicl (i. e. WB0 :3@%0), %fifi@%o (i. e. T¥00 @@%0), 3ePd80 (i. e, 3Pdr0 230), {l ;Soesafijaaio (7. e. Soe*cdr0 cfi;ar‘r;o), a’e‘)”wam%do, DBFRRPANI0; —ROARMY) ¥¢, BOFB 15— REMOFBR0 (4. e, Do Fod®o), I kWo, TOaEI0, FH o, TH«’do, I 0o, gojsg WD 8,0;—HITTIMBI 0 (7, e, FIBI0 TR 0), JIONRBO, WPIIRRo, JIVIRBO, FTWO may ] fiJaE%o or '@dfi@i‘%o, Fo3» ©oNIBo or @o&%emado, Sdofi@%o or s"odfi@éfido, Seno the ¢ 0BT or SLNRRRBO, 23,%33)&@630 or 23ISR, So8083 0 or mafifigo;m@doofiwfi 2enity AR0 or JYRINRLIRO, SEéoomégdo or a‘méomé@%cfio, %ac&oom%o or %acéme%o, A®Y0 are) n&®o or ABINRRO, wezso;%%go or wedoéfifiéo, @#oofi@%o or @f—dofi@%o, :Jdoom%o Seq $ or dFNEY 0; HOReF0 (HOW HT0) is an instance in which the initial of the verb is b a vowel (in which case the accusative is generally used ; see § 346). 65) If, however, distinctness of meaning (arthavyakti) is injured, the insertion of (833 the sonné after nouns with final @ is requisite (Késava says), e. g. 80300235, ¢do, & Vg ;‘m’dsgocgdo, n@onem o, Wa3ronad) o, #@fifi%%o, %fdfi;‘s’@ogo. Words As remarked above, Samskrita nouns with final © always require the y insertion of the sonué, e. s meaofiJaE‘%o, 3:))0300230@&50, fififi%fi?fio, Gofia"@wfifio, thlevale) B9y RR9az0, B3F,0R1% 6 0, J2,010E 0, B N B0, TeY OB 0. they b) Instances in which the noun has the meaning of the instrumental, are {0 be e. g. BHF o, Ty o, T ReSH 033 0, IR 0, %‘*mw%ééddodo, Benwg o, ) liveg Jo&Ro; an instance in which the noun has the meaning of the dative, is d\ Yo, Ho (= Yo DBpewo); and an instance in which the noun has the meaning of the locative, is 308202 0 or FOBIVE o g z a3 In the kriyAsamasa, as the instances show, an arisamasa (§ 252) is faultless ¥ i R (nirddsha). Késava’s special instance is: 10t e 217 o of [J0 WPTJoRR Y, T (b 99;33 zw@\eé’, WONBREY FR0RR ¢, WD | ada 330D ¥Fofn g, T ey S0 NRRR Y, JROTFMIZ0 dY,0? || (see § 271). ¢) Instances in which the final syllable of the first word is elided, are the e.q. oi’xpe:é?go (for Jpento 35@0), '@Ojii‘;o (for @ofloga 3:&0), TYHBFO (for FENY TBFO), FE¥R Bo (for F¥I0 R08 ©o), D3¢ L) pa3 3 verh DN s o (for ®I0 or I 5%&20), mgo (for ¥3TF w:jao); PIPeR0 (for D3 Tr Y " RRTO). ed, 2 “When a noun with the notion of a case (kiraka, ¢.e. the kartri) is preceded by a numeral (sankhyd), or a pronoun (sarvanima), or an | {0 attributive noun (so-called adjectives, gunavacana), or a krit (§§ 68; 177 or seq.; 185. 186), a gamakasamésa is formed ”, KéSava says. Gamakasamisa ding may be translated ¢consecutive compound’, having this name probably the because its members succeed one another without alteration. Conse- cutive compounds <“may be”, KéSava says, “a class of karmadharayas, n o and occasionally may be tatpurushas’; he does, however, not state )J’o‘wv which belong to which. o), w-),— a) Instances regarding numerals (c¢f. §§ 244. 248. 278, 1) are: — B3¢ DNV, $,03), BAWWTI), JAIIw) (VABy, I, UM being the karaka nouns). We Pt TR0 may perhaps say that such instances are tatpurushas, the first word expressing the connection which it has with the second one, ¢. e. the connection of the Jano genitive (§ 246), e. g. AVFS 0N (AYS), + B0N), of (i. e. above) twenty (there oad 30 are) five, ¢. e. twenty-five. (Would such compounds not be rather dvandvas? il 3T 0 See § 250.) arh 19 b) Instances regarding pronouns viz. ¥, (BPI), ¥, K, N (see §§ 264. 85 3 SIWMPS 265) are: — YITNI) ITIRF0, YITIR . Eonbvitcion P PTINNYE o0 Of (U UAN), I (YT ©¥°) WY ITTVHFSL AT, ifl%&fi@%’s? HWIFSC Here, we may say, the two ) Y HWITI® RRFIF T 8, g0, WPRec3) T WSTE. words are in the same relationship (ékasraya) and form karmadharayas (§ 247). ) ‘) Instances regarding artributive nouns are: — ©®A0DIR, TAHWD o0, 3080 WP0TIF, aRBITIDAR, LO0HToro. If we consider these instances to be compounds, they are karmadharayas; but they are in reality no compounds, and ought net to be written as such (¢/. § 241). They are genitives combined with nomina- 1, are o) tives, e. g. @30 is the genitive of VA (¢f. § 273). 7ty 18 d) Instances regarding verbal declinable bases (krillingas) are:—JBITBIN, - the FRBAIZres, ILMITILITE, a3, Boe, e RITWIFITo, PRSI0, JPT3N S0, DRITDY, @m%5@5>ru@ofi%’6 (see & 364); SRRIPVO, WARWPY, NBRBWITO, FEIRY (see § 363); YNETIFO, IREFFH° (see § 179). If we consider these RAGLE instances of compounds, they are karmadhérayas; but, as stated by us in §§ 178. 28 ] 218 —— 179. 185. 186, their first words are very probably genitives of the so-called present-future and past participles combined with nominatives See § 254. given As will be learned from the instances, an arisamasa is faultless in consecutwc compounds Remark ) somet Such instances as are adduced under number 2 letters &4, ¢, and d are she t] commonly, and we think quite justly, not considered to be compounds Jener 3, The has various hroug vipsasamasa Or repetition-compound (which meanings, vide §§ 303. 307. 308. 309) is formed by repeating adverbs, will 1 flj»\ o interjections, imitative sounds, and nouns, the final syllable of the first did e word being often dropped or also changed, e. g. 33 FHR (=TS 7 2,8, JRGER B30 i’f&i&d (——Ufio v&’)%fi) 39@ 3’)9@3 3&8) wu@) s, NN r\)o.) 8, RPD ;3‘@""03” Mod_) = 90 2 (1), 2 53, S0) o, 3333 23%*&—)6;;3 St %’éjvej _z%oasz%ow,—fiéjafiz% b (=38 38), ISR (=83 IBY), 398,38 (=300 D), SR, BATL* afflict (=RRBSF JIRBF); —TIFIR (=TI FIN), 330033001, DRBIPTS he wh alive (=RRBe* SRTe), CEvRCLe SO (= CERO ESN 5. Regarding the repetition wealt] of verbs see §§ 211 3%9 belong fi.eh XII. On verbal declinable bases (. §§363. 364) gold) 0rac 254. Verhal declinable bases (krits, krillingas 3§ 6 1; 102, 8, e), as they we have seen are formed from the so-called past relative participle lost } positive and negative (bhiitavatikrit, §§ 175-179) and from the so-called which present-future relative participle (bhavishyantikrit, §§ 180-186) by 0) %uffixmg the pronominal forms and pronouns @o, wo, (¥To), &30, VY o formg (@od%’s 8T, OB, WRY, BT, w s, ooy (¢f. § 193) in the ancient askeq dmlect or gy, ©, ¥Zo, VST, BT, B30, WIRY, €I, VI, BIL, 8T, eats | NI VT, BS0T° (0N b 1t 953 in the medizeval one, or #8333 b kmdb 198 3o ¥3, $38, ¥3, ¥SP, IF, ¥R, B30, ¥y in the modern one (see §§ under 3: 200, 1. 267 273; 316, 1: 330) ha Similarly any nouns (§§ 253, 2, d; 363; 364) and certain adverbs he ¢} dlqcer (postpositions) are suffixed to both kinds of participles. Instances are: —J&To, IZN 0, WNRWIBo, TIERRYS, TR 3:@ &, AR DT, TIRRIBY, he ths or ig B30 B, INRRO?, FTwEH,TT DTILRIY; 30, D) VY, emm 30, st 39, em;g FOD,ROJTVB0, YVPI B), YVPIL3F), HPTIIZ, BRI’ R’ 3P, um ? o.)og) ). am%# Cfio r]) (= QPYRY), HY,FTE, WRFTITIT, TRAIPF, BRIBI; FOR01TF0, 2ITRIRY ;Sofiocod;wo Went ¢S 33, TS 30?; 0B FR0: WIFIY, BREE S0 S04 o e — 219 lled An explanation of the structure of verbal declinable bases has been given in §§ 178. 179. 185. 186. Itive 1 If the participles are combined with pronominal forms or pronouns, @) the declinable bases may stand by themselves without reference to are something or somebody, e. g. ¥&R0, he that played, ¥&%0, he that sang, YRT¥C, she that sang, Y&BD, it that played, TIRDDB, it that sang; IJLWRRD (or generally 8:0e53), see remark 3), it that saw, 333 (or generally 333)), it that 10U brought ; #8J0, he that nourishes or will nourish, Zp3I0°, they that nourish or s, will nourish, ev¥)@, that which is; ®930, he that does not or did not stand, VoRBI¥Y, she who is not or was not afraid, @®°03:3030, that which does not or firs ) did not perish, 238w, they that do not or did not come, SPBBR> (or generally ) N SREEY , see remark 3), that which does not or did not make, 923w (or generally 2 my ¥ ™), that which does not or did not exist; ) ; b) they may be preceded by a nominative, e. g. T8 35 280230, he whose ':’:) affliction was removed, 1 3> #3395, she whose hasband died, Re3I® 2O, Wy o6 he whom God was or is pleased with; =0 €5 32IITH, she whose children are tion alive, Cfiaéwbfi% %ornoFIF, he whose firm mind fails, BI3° w0, he to whom wealth belongs (i. e. he who possesses wealth), &30 %0, he to whom neatness belongs (i. e. he who is neat), W SIS, he to whom nakedness belongs (z. e. he who is naked), 0=, %30, he to whom gold belongs (i. e. he who possesses gold) ; T99° 99 B30, he to whom feet do not belong (i. e. he who is without feet or a cripple), B%,3° ©VBT0, he that is not or was not a devotee, IZ D BIETI, ) they to whom a son is not or was not born, S9F,% WIOWRIPY, she who loses or ipl lost ber children by death, 3,933 (or generally O3, 2, see remark 3), it for | le d which there is no refuge; ¢) they may govern the accusative, as the verbs do from which they are ok fi: formed, e. g. ¥380 wWR@B0, he who intended two things, WedF00 Be@Wo, he that yl! asked a boon, 33),T¥R> TN I, he that killed enemies; TWOI® S, he that ¢ 3 eats boiled rice, SP0AI I T, he that eats flesh, ¥ Jo 33230, he that eats all kinds of food, &R8c303° 9©73, he who mounts an elephant, 38X Wazc30 FANYA A 3930, he that patiently endures the pain of austerities, N9 AReTNY?, females 19 %30, that scare away parrots, NoF3T° we{)s, he that possesses pride, SALROY ) he that possesses neatness, fiuafiewo%oiossfi ¥ T8, he that possesses acute ,elb‘ discernment (regarding the accusative see § 316, 1); H3,IPAFSTT L& BRI, he that does notor did not know devotedness, @%F 303y, ReCWS, he that does not or did not join bad men; ‘;::)"j)s d) they may be joined also to other cases just asthe verbs from which they 3 are formed, e. g. FORBYRFO, he that was in the field, BN BB@ID, they that :;i{ 3 g went to the hamlet, $3J0R or SoxVosw ¢s Do, he that sprang from a lotus, 308 on YB3, he that was born of a female servant, P05 FHONBIY, he that 28* is emaciated by sickness, 331 3938 B2t JW, that which grows by its own force a oup a calf (é. e. spontancously), YWIZ WS I, he that came from the village, AF0333 o Do, he that sprang from a good family; 3903y Fotd Hed INBITII), he that i) loves (his) mother; To9NTL IS FomowRI8d, they that do not or did not recede FOF from a fight, 908%,0xBIT, they that are not afraid of death, FVAT, WIVIIY, siner he that is not serviceable. made ¢) they may be preceded by an infinitive, e. g. PR WIBRR, that which il WV NG o - cannot be gone to (or reached), ©e°03> W3 W, that which came to one’s knowledge. d, 2, If the participles are combined with nouns, the rules regarding the thus follow formed declinable bases are similar to those of number 1, a. 4. g o) ol F0we’, rice that was or is boiled, & S3%), penance that was or Conce is bad, 2¢68 a0, wind that blew ; (32830 ) 933 2392, a well that is (in the garden), 399,mo%R0, a chair on which ono sits, @03 3%&", a stream that runs, BHBS M9, wind that is violent; A¢0F 718 35, a husband that is not or was not in Iy harmony (with his wife). Observe also d9II> (for WPI) W;@B2, a room in which (kyillif (one) bathes, and S@32, in the place where (one) walks (or in walking), ZpeDR also 59, in the place where (one) compares (or in comparing), DB R, to the place vacan; where (one) has fallen, ¥¢,9R, to the place where (one) falls (or to his falling). or il Regarding the ‘one’ in parenthesis see § 358. makin Re by T 30083, an ox whose horns were or are broken, @ BT TBy, a jungle in which wild fire broke out, 33 23 %, a house to which the father & M)L\ came, or a house from which the father came, 3% 28 0370, the business for subjec which he came, ®330 BRE T33%, the reason for which he went; 3303° IO i, ¢ ¥#®, a child which the mother brings up, $82)9,%, a place where there is mud; body | FoeneS FHNE 3wedl, a garden in which the cuckoo does not or did not ery, deceiy e ®Bea) 19aNER0, a village in which ripe fruits do not grow, §93980 Boreraddd IF o, AN ) a case in which the conventional meaning of a word is not or was not damaged, VOwe( BRTONY B Wonado, gold that is not of use (. e. is valueless), BFTY BANT TN, take 5 a jungle which people do not or did not enter, %3, O0 300, a village in which Qi) il there are no tenants. 0 It is to be remarked that if a nominative (a subject) does not precede the T krillinga and the verb used in its formation is transitive, the subject is somehow Contmy to be supplied mentally (¢f. § 315, 2, k), e. g. T8I 30ed, the young bull that See Y0 (people) tied, Rpod) e, the place that (somebody) struck, ZpBR ¢3¢0, the kettle- i 1 fy, drum that (warriors) struck, $203) S0, the foot that (somebody) cut off, B3, I3, (the t; he the room in which (a woman) has given birth to (a child); FoRI%, a place % where (somebody) gives; S»EB T3¢, a piece of land that (people) do not or did not cultivate. Aciey See § 358. formy ¢) Fom803)3° 0B 0930, a horseman that mounted a horse; ©@DONY diflle(fl Br®3 A8 Y, a whip with which (people) beat horses ete., BRI TORT Wi, Usgq { P — 221 — force a cup from which (people) drink spirituous liquor; $303) Wer0dIF® V0B Fe), 5%?53 a calf that does not or did not leave (its) mother’s place. that yoede d) 33@’ wdSE O, an affair that does not suit to one’s wish, ST < D7, a black colour that (people) apply to grey hair, ITFRO DVeews =2, a VW, sinner that falls into hell, S0B8%® "R WoFIB, a decorated seat that was made of wood, WIoN9o WHARLNF %S, villages that are surrounded by gardens, vhich VYB3 euBoY, TV N¥F, stones that roll down from a mountain. elge. 3, Regarding krillingas formed by suffixing declinable postpositions the thas following instances may be adduced : —02%3> WAV (TIWFY WAFR ¥3), 3§ 2o B0¢S (33 WI HWOI BF), ¥ITI WSHE [ooowd (VIF WITH Fwows AIod). 48 0 Concerning the general use of postpositions after krits see § 282, 1. n the Remarks. DS, 10t 10 1 As seen from the remark in § 200 under 1 the verbal declinable base vhich (krillinga) formed from the so-called present-future relative participle is used o) also as the third person singular neuter of the future tense and as a bhava- vacana (§ 243). Thus =%6) 8, SREJRY, =PFIST means ‘that which makes place ling). or will make’; ‘it will make’; and ‘a making’, ‘the making’, ‘the act of making ’, ‘to make’. ) W ) ! Regarding its use as a bhavavaéana we adduce the following instances:— SeRd F300) B, the making or to make beautiful, 330 SRBJIB, the act of making ather 58 101 subjeet, &R0 20W INBIIRY, to make large what is small, @230 FPpE INE DAty ®®), to honour a guest, 33 TAMES B0tSRd0 T, INFTR, to embellish the body by means of sandal ete., 3%, SRBIZR), to sleep, SRR INFITI) VIR, to mud; deceive is injustice, HIB FearoR ABBO, giving (was) an innate quality of Karna, o) 70, 9,30 ACHR FroR wIF,30, to grant the wish (of another) was Karna’s vowed observance from birth, 28 Fwi) wg FATNW, to give one thing and 1309d Kw N %) take another thing (in its stead), 3 WHFHY, to eome after (i. e. to follow), TF teR) o ¥F0y 2W3RRY, their eoming, which BREMISTRY, our going, M) TREISRY, your givin VAR YRBISR, to play incessantly, YowW BAITW, to be fearless. The bhavavagana may be declined, e. g. 3cho dY BIFYTFYTIITI0 TINRO, o the contrive ye a means to stop the boat, 39,33 3RDITE W B¢, T am come to ehow | the ha see you, ©¥=0) IR A INBISTer3 TOR AWM S, because they assist me, the business advances, 3 WIIT L ¥R BERWBIATY, let dinner be ready within coftle (the time of) my coming. ) 30, 2, Likewise the third person neuter singular of the past tense in the plaefl ancient and medieval dialect ending in v@> (see § 198 under 3), the krillingas o did formed from the relative past participle by means of the suffix ®@> in the modern dialect, and the krillingas formed from the relative negative participle when 01 ) Q)) used for the past (§ 209) by means of the suffix 9@ in the ancient and medi®val g e e 222 R 269) dialect and @3 in the modern one, have been used as bhavavacanas expressing the action or state of the verb in the past E. g. w0008 30, lit. a liberal person TONY a having given-it (i. e. a liberal person’s gift), 0onBY BRWD, lit. the king a nitial QD) W3 WD having gone-it (¢. e. the king’s departure), your having come (i. e 00=<e v ) your arrival), 330% 83, the mother’s having died (i. e. the mother’s death), moder A 305035089 B0, the child’s having drunk milk, ©T0) SRR, their having ls01 seen; ©D0° TIHRIW, their having not seen, WFTTY WITIRY, their having not come, &30 IPBBRY, their having not done See &% ¢HABR in the portion of a verse il in § 258 0, ¢ Also this kind of bhavavaéana is declined, e. g. 3200 RTers TR VI himsel T8ATDOIBY, because (their) mother died, the children grieved very much 33 0r1g10 03832 SRAT By B BT, FoMFY N 3, because the father gave (him) two ripe 0 2 AL In mangoes, (his) little boy rejoiced; BOBoNBo 85y T8 FTOBIED IPARBIY, because the boys had not learned or did not learn their lesson, the the ye schoolmaster became angry; &% TR 30¢S 02 DZ B I FHY 9030, 8330 IIN Kesav: A8, IRAT, the schoolmaster saw the having fallen of ink (. e. that ink bad [ ah 0 fallen) on my book and became angry with me knoy 3, It is a peculiarity of the modern dialect to double, almost generally, LY Nloliy the ©o in ¢35y, when it is the suffix of a bhAvavadana of the past, ¢. g. WI W (for w8 Ci)) TR TR (for o*"’omdcfio), 3 D Ve B 28, ©93®0; if such a W gnem bhavavaéana is formed from verbal themes with final 9v (§§ 166. 175, 2) or W from the so-called negative (§ 175, 3), the suffix esz30 almost generally becomes 30 (¢f+ § 122), e. g. SNRTY (for INATR), B@AT), VWP, INFD) (for IPFTRY), g % wadm aflo@oflodo also forms like g@m (for é@dm or é@cflda) ;scsm (for SRAR), . th Qj’CS») (for fi:?dfio)’ %ue%fio (for é\!afiddd) a,le used. This peculiarity ho]ds good, of course, also with refl'atd to the similarly formed krillingas, e. ¢. in No. 1, a. b The 10up It may be remarked here too that in adding ©® to the genitive of neuter Yo nouns ending in ®, its initial ¥ is generally elided, e. g. TVRRY (for FURRAY), DIOBY, TBD s)r\‘“ 0 VWY Hw T o XIII. On pronouns. m‘ 3 255 The pronouns are declinable bases (§ 90). o, &30, T20, FIRY by 9, Qeo, ReRy, e are called (by KEuropeans) personal pronouns, and seo Nodgy, 3989, 3o 1s called (by them) the reflexive (reciprocal) pronoun (see § 102, s, @) &4 B39, BT, udy (see § 122 93 0939 3y §272), £E93, TG e\pl [ D T 30, BF0, YUTo, VTR, BRRY, 93, BN, CJ0; WIFE, AIE gy IS WRFY, BN, DEIPS 330, T30, NW3o, S3R), IR, &3, &3 A}SO I (§ 260); &%, &F, vwe are demounstrative pronouns; and eIy (§§ 265 NC\JJ‘ ~ —————e 223 — sing 269), 035050y, ISRy ; @0, ©5, 0VNRY, B[INIV; YN, IIRNY, 1S0n GoSPY; O, D0 are interrogative pronouns (see § 102, 8, b). The 0% & initials o3o and z» are dialectical forms of later time; =38y, BH, (ive @sjsfio, BRL, &30, B3R, CWODRY, TONRY, OVINEY, TSP, WY are ath), wing modern forms with a euphonic final e (§ 112); e85, wgP appear also in the medizeval dialect. ome, YCrse 256 The declension of the personal pronouns &o, w0, TRV, 9, L, ¥ ¢ Qeo, RV, e, thou, and of the reflexive pronoun zvo, 3930, 39, he, he 3 himself, she, she herself, it, it itself, is given in § 137, and their prob@ble origin appears in § 138. ) ripe hw) In § 138, remark, their connection with the personal terminations of They express, ) thz the verb is alluded to (¢f. § 193 and remarks thereon). 3R Késava says, the meaning of the three persons of the verb (§ 193), e. g. ( bad =i~y 0925230, URs’ WLPPETS WATVBYTE I 118, though we know, we cannot tell the state of the king.—Zco@ 2345'2’3 Qe (Or QeRF) 1ally, 20002853035, thou wentst before me to the battle. Qoo (Or QXK AW ] 38&%66.—3@&6 ob%io @zfi;fio%dbaaaogsofioo, he threw arrows at the ich 4 enemy’s army (or river) which was no river. o (0r IonF) AT AW 3 o 030% 3RRDFEPoS, they met even Arjuna, (but) did not pierce.— S0MES e3s @Q%go, S0 %ei@; DTS FEY 0¥, Q¢ %egcfi; 390° BBFo, 3RS BRFTS fad), i W) (¢f. the remarks on the final sénné in § 215, 8). ()d, of Their gender is shown in § 102, 7.8 to be depending on that of the noun to which they refer, ¢. e. viSéshyadhina, e. g. &o (Or &g¥) 3330, jeuter Yo 7?0, Yo TR ; Vo (OF JET) T, Jto TS, o NY; 39Q° ®To, ) R BIP, TIT® VR, F9F® Ve BWRITo, Fan® VNP BWRIT, Fox' VI 203y (see § 357, 3); wo (or ¥SF) TonYI T, Ao EDITTF, IO 2053 Fof: Yo RPEINTT, Vo :-32’;7\%;6, 590 239B000°; BDF USRS, Veo TRB Nes, 3955° VONS, AR 257 d0:3 (the plural) is generally used for T (the singular) in | 390 modern Kannada when people of some standing speak of themselves, 8 f) €. 9. TRVY T DR B3RO, what will you do without me? This way of expression occasionally appears also in the medieval dialect, e. g zuL‘jJ, g RPISREe) 3533,5?% 230533, I will send this one to the world of mortals. 0047 9 Also in the oblique cases this holds good in the modern dialect, e. g. ] 853y, $o8AR w, come to my house!, and in the mediseval one wherein Q%D B e. g. a girl says: HDoZBRRY 20BN, and: BRI (¢ e & lura BSRE TRLBVTR) IR BRRITTY o003 38 ZoRNREY RN In and: 3R (253, ©SD, lit. <of us they i. e. our people, my parents) oy (J\(W S aafi%? DY RBBRITo TSI, In the last three sentences the girl plura 1ntends to honour her master and parents by using the plural of the verh pronoun (Z. e. 33, for g) before them, a practice that obtains also in the modern d1a1ect €. g- 83y IW0TY FeH, ask my mother! (Is of Loy § 354, II, 1 to be compared?). B to sa In the Southern Mahratta country =038y (839, 957300, = 2539,5309 expec our people, he that is mine) is often used by native women when speak- sister ing of their husbands, while the husband when speaking of his wife says ~SEMAD) % (839, 3, of us she, she that is mine). ) th to an 258 In the ancient dialect Qeo, thou, is used, without the least savour such of disrespect, in addressing a person of respectability, e. g. ¢ &0() NORTA; [T Sones? AIIBR dom (op) 3,05 D honor QRSN B éd =38 S JePR3NH,; the o QL BR zsom 23 5@ Qs the § 2R BBV 39 » mfa‘i IS08IRWI? || (See translation in § 360) and W 0r on FRHIF NI S0 F ®3 JIF0 AFY OY SesIdro | NJ\ m.raa:‘s’os' WOII fioéns, GO OS[F 306°S3 033 233 oo BRANRD 0 (I the king having seen W\“O@ that Muni and said “ A venerable man (?) thou art, nothing else!”, lovingly \\)n-/ moved three times round (him) with the right side turned towards (him), praised GV (him), bowed several times, and worshipped (him) with devotion bag Regarding @deo, thou, such is often the case also in the medieval dialect, e. g they TR Tews ! R, wae;fie%a odod;fido L, JB, /T eéb:b:fic?;jo 3 £9) TR P Sentey OB, AOTIRI® FHPAW and Sy RV WARTALI ! 3,909 Ngd RER Bn) B and TABIHI, 3, TH I ! 1113“ Ay BR), ¢ ITIION! i . 225 o ) & But the medieval dialect, in accosting a single person, uses also the WV plural e, €. g. 3 Weodoona3sw, even thou having gone ont ) In the modern colloquial dialect the following distinction is made between 203y and ew): — when addressing a person of some respectability, the it the plural ey (also in its oblique cases) is always used, followed by a 30 11 verb in the plural (¢f. zos3 in § 261); and when addressing a person of low rank, or a child. the singular L (ls 30 1s always used Further, in the modern dialect of conversation it is considered uncivil 204, to say even to a little child e. g. 335 Q‘)?{, T, ¥y, R, B3 and 1t 1s eak expected to say ;3;’» T, QT 8 s @u\) @m) et beuause the elder §ays sister, the father, the mother, etc. require to be honomed by the pronoun in the plural; it becomes particularly uncivil, even abusive, if one says It is not unfrequent 1in Avour to another {7, ®e9 &, instead of {3y Hows. such polite languave to add 533 to the words esg | o3, 90, ¥, e uUNO 3o etc. (see §§ 119, ¢, 1; 131, ¢, 1), e. g. ¥R, &, ;s‘ficfio Q3 31033 0330y, ete. (Plurals that are formed with @gm are in themsdves honorific, €. g. ©03.8=380. Similar plural forms are met with also in the ancient dialect, e. g. ©&¢293cs, he of the spear, literally ¢they of the spear’.) 2 360) Qe e When addressing a deity (or God) in prayer, the singular 2¢o or one of its oblique cases is always used in the three dialects, e. g. R3eF3, ¥, Mo BREN! — 08, SoTeReTY, [WF V. DIV, — Foodows w3 (Vishnu), de Boms o) ! — 3030 A3 e IR A &){5 5500 g eel RR09Wd! The pronoun may also be omitted, e. g. 3, Wex (o vingly w&fi(fi.fl\)@o RSOy A dofieég{ss B9T0TD! Cf. 8t 9 , where & dda raised bas its verb in the smgulax 259 In the three dialects s90. 3980, 39, he, he himself, etc., and diva their plural so0 (3935), 39, they, they themselves, are used 1, when they, in the nominative, refer to the subject mentioned in a sentence, €. 9. S[IRVT0 Sonvo N2F OZT° AAVE NVTOHDE 0, of Udayaditya it is said “« Manu and he (are) virtuous people”. — ?»E:)‘FO B3ToErTo I3 IR [90Wwo 3RV éw@%edgjfau $30 3BonNHEedeyInrA. — w9 T DT &io‘\’ou STV, DRV ? 9 i-J, when they, in the nominative, refer to a noun that is not mentioned in a sentence, but understood to be the subject, e. g. 39T %W o.— I &) m) NJDW\)'}JOJN") — ) fidos‘) cw\)p@j (d?@(\) ) 033 ooJe)QDGO 80('\1 Ufl'&vrsgja N K)(, — — 226 il 0ne FRRTY NIART BFpRy 2B, — T FF BT dbfi ESOJJ — QO WOT 39 WO CJ:FSNO 202, ONPL, . CRo0TORIBV0. — I3 BE°. — 395y Wy 9 fo su RBITE NYSFD IPRBET. — T3 DIRDI RFOFTNHmISER K03 20300 GO 3 oug! 9 when they, in the nominative, accompany the subject of a sentence hestow and may occasionally be translated ¢indeed’, ‘in fact’, ete., e. 9. WBo03 033 "*:4 BRY ToR )8, 39 v, for Samskrita (words used in Kannada) % DALLIC thew is with regard to (the euphonic insertion of) o3 and & in fact part the me no muchness (é. e- o3 and ¢ are always inserted, sog® referring to EY 3o’ & 3980 (3o In VRO 3) —~r:aw6w:mm§m;6 e)%%afi ruler referring to VT, 50)- — ZSQQD%FESU- 30 39Q° BIARTOo. — N:‘S{SNJG D00 F90. — 3 M) & Q0Jo RTJ)o . 9B LT3 "533@* 3 S, g SReRTEE wEho. ’~_ 3T 00 3953 " 7 ZSFC 33 2 SReRS we! 4 % Instances by which the use of 390, etec. is shown when these are in iy oblique cases, are:— ¢ ) 3R, ¥TYR), BRBOIWSY &, he beats his cow.— In | 2T NP0 33, NRBINERY, Teb birds build their nests. — 3g SRR SRETEZ AW, 3 read R B¢ Seevs Fx, his own joy (is) the world’s joy, his own trouble (is) the world’s trouble. — Feo BYLE SINRY DTN NONG brothe BRI & DBDFRBRYE that ruler became famous on earth when that Derge] true speech of Karna became his (3zR) property. — 38N 3=z STOReRD %’J\é:a 9, who has nothlng himself, what should he give to others? — §ay f] Ndbfi FeR) DB BN FeRo Ted FRPI, to cause evil to others and & 3 Own to cause welfare to himself. —3=), FomE 39y 03T, TIT TURT (om) A [ SREI 03y, Ty, for their own quarrel (there are) they five, for the quarrel of others (there are) one hundred and five. — 33, BF9, 3x0 ToEI TR {0 h 18 BB R 3003 BRI e, he broke his tooth himself, and blamed another how person (for it).— 38, wBw BLTTe3:0, he who nourishes (only) his ow (}'Ou ] belly.— 38, Soni® 2, one’s daughter’s husband. — 33,035 oo n 9ed Oc play at which one’s own wife is not present.— 3z & ¢, one’s own wife. — 3 0 3;5 fa?:@ one’s own will, — :ég 223 599, he who follows his own likings. — & it 3;3 d@, one’s state. — égs ;S of one’s own accord. '—3@(\) HOCFY, 2 \«.Q/Qj (sister) older than omne’s self -—-55 ;36* Se 33R Gf\)s«aa Russ 22)@3 fear that they | arises 1n himself (3=1) even from hlS very own peOpl(, —-—%’5 B [ Th 0O 393, wof D) 35 ;’)Jaezmg eI A %J&)S@d mowde, is 16 not enoug,h &0 if one learns (the way to beatltude) in the Kannada language, and [ 1 5 1l (thereby) acquires his beatitude in himself? 38, 3¢ P33 R SN — P 221 D) if one knows himself, he (is) 2 wise person.—3g, 3980 %33 svTow 2 89, 8, 3980 FCIBE 3Ry XRemary, if one knows himself, he is likely AW Y to succeed; if one forgets himself, he is likely to go (without gain). f 0% 30N 03 [PRET piofiomafi 0esdy 8x8R &% [wrosas, (he ce ought to know that) if he bestows benefits on others, God will certainly 4\ bestow benefits on him. WY J ada) 260. To 5o, o0, FIRY, R0, VR, 9o, 3oge and their plural the fact particles o or & (§ 212, 6) are often added in order to give them either 2 t0 the meaning of emphasis or also to express the ‘self’ quite distinctly (¢f. § 282). Instances of the first kind are e.g. enndwBs T, I (am) the G20 ruler of the town!— eS¢ 8389, verily, thou (art) Siva! — & 207 Jede )0,— 3&, it is thou who hast done this business! — 338 SReTRH$S @ai\ ) 03%o, he (is) a distinguished teacher in the world!— o3¢ v.3 B¢, it is 16 10 we!— 30TTR ease, thou (art) Sar’lkara!——:%;g 39020030 Qe ! zoé% AL 1Y es! Wi Instances of the second kind are e. g. gose £ RER,RE ¢8R, I shall )2)a3¢ 3 TOR read the letter myself. SR Sadsy, I made (it) myself. ] 01, n SoRe Rweryd ed, 1 shall see to this business myself. 8w, 2030 SReTRY, Y brother, see thou thyself. 38, BEN FTRRS e emgcase;o, she ate (it) lflct 10 herself without giving (anything) to her children. zo8 figeéfio&m, to n say that one’s self (is) superior (to others). s 28, RLIOR Fod TRJ3, S g3, I° »e030, he (the mad elephant) being angry himself at his 3 AN (own) shadow, (and) not knowing himself (any longer). g, F9ONR IIRC Vb RO B3Pk ROA TR on, (it is) as if one himself gave protection aLre to his own feet and blessed himself (this ‘himself’ being expressed some- LN, how by the verb Twes, see § 341). eaoj/o\%é’e, e.sod{o\%?e, %Ofig)@;fio’g e3¢ jothet (you yourself) w3833 &7 . g OWD Occasionally so® or soe denotes also ‘of itself’, ‘spontaneously’, and 009, 953 or zasde, ¢ of themselves’, ¢spontaneously’, e. g. 03095 LEAGF THIW ife.~ gade ¢y, no thing whatsoever comes of itself into existence. PoSIN ngs:— WORNBRRBE 3o TR z‘sa;\figomfi, plants which die of themselves after ), they have had fruit and have become ripe (2.RYN%Y). b th t Hl The same meaning is not unfrequently expressed e. g. by 38, 398, 33n g v 3%, QYT IR, 3R, 053¢, 5‘50&5\&% zos3¢, as shown by the follow- 00 100, , and ing instances: — 3g IR I3, FoR BRT TR To STV T B30 Vv, DI éfifi%sfio BRBRRY S, TR, saying: «of those (ten) sons one who D90 — 228 — T has of himself (i. e. accidentally) been found, a genuine son (1s) this one to me (351)», he lifted (him) up with joy. 331 IR %oé&o@m that pronc B BN fem which grows of itself. %% 2,8, Fone BRB Y, this creamon is not something that has come into existence of 1tseli g 38 0% VRO femin TN é’ébofi F9530 WHR, those eggs having opened of thcmselves (z e. galiv SoSBRER 3D | having been h atched) by the heat of the sun. g DJ\) SIS TR0 WRSNEY POERY; 29'3@ 3§)o§ 3953¢ @(\'303@@7 in )Our (5. s house there are cooking Vessels, stools and other things; have they all a dul i come into existence of themselves? BoZodRwo 3’53@@ 395¢ QAT st the horses will stop of themselves. which Further, by suffixing esA (§ 166), ‘having become to Sop¢ CORM Slngu 3953), they express ‘of one’s own accord’, ‘of their own accord’, ‘spontaneously’, (§27 e. 9. soxon (of his own accord) W B, —FFN WE V3B — 398 ZOQ9N In RBRBR mdod%mojaas Ws o %@u&@v&% when he hlmself of his own accord at onue gave a feo to (his) guru. —FRRY 035908 OR W 233 sooen (of itself, spontaneously) 38030053 Ofiou $8,. —sogan (of her own accord) %@ BREBF. —39TD VLN D0TF, FRBOC T TON.— u3n% zamen (of their own accord) o3PdRR MNWIBT TRBISDY .— 4eCo1 -So;iméda S350 ), 53903 NHos.0 3FY FRY, 239030 A tray Many 261 In the modern dialect, when speaking to a superior $953) and and by its oblique cases are often used as a term of great respect (¢f. ResY in Uda § 258) being equivalent to ¢your honour’, ¢your lordship’, etc., e.g. e50359 RSN EN % 305y VT wm%’&)omio N') QJ®, Iy HaT APIEN) 39 203D proxy o3l B0l SRR (2. e. “when did your honour come?). BN TR FePS TSR B3 BB 3AYR 3.8 BRI 23@'60 Na 239, man L6 She | OB TR 3N 3O Be& BRedy, BREE 300 %@efiaéeafi 3 39, %fé;a she: _ B3 WRIBTBER. 953 BReND! 597 33N, 0! .sf) 9262. The declension of the singular of the masculine demonstrative Wfepy Ten ¢ pronouns ending in « appears ‘in § 117, and that of their plaral in § 119 The declension of the singular of the feminine demonstrative t} 8sp pronouns ending in e and ¥y appears in §§ 120. 121, and that of ! their plural in § 134 the singular of &%, &% owd is declined in I\ § 130, and their plural in § 131 132 The declension of the singulax lia] of the neuter demonstrative pronouns is given in § 122, and that of be their plural in § 136 tS\ PSS, 229 PE—— one The declension of the singular of the masculine interrogative that pronouns with final e is given in § 117, that of the singular of their 108 feminines in §§ 120, 121, and that of the plural of both masculines and 103 feminines in § 135; the declension of the singular of the neuter interro- (.0 gative pronouns appears in' § 122, and that of their plural in § 136. e F° (DY) is declined in § 125. [Regarding o the Sabdamanidarpana your (s. stitra 112) says that its nominative is also ;:)éfijfi (sicl), and gives v all a dubious instance.] The gender of the demonstrative and interrogative pronouns is (:jb.)}) viséshyadhina (§ 102, 8) with the exception of ©z¢ when it is not declined, ), which in that case is added to masculines, feminines and neuters in the Bsly’, singular and plural, e. g. ©o3Rens, VTV, VRO, 83, D moweTonTen® (§ 271). ® Yol In the following verse own W, D 03;5;5 5:3% ! FIRJo 39300 B3 0B0F, WJIVFORTI0 F9IV0 | f her DANSS, 35@ e300 N— 32390 TIVRTT® RVI® wdofia@éfio, I v, — o) according to Késava ©3° means O3 BINFY® (IF), WB WINF¥°), what persons! A translation, therefore, would be: —A greatness which speaks of what persons! Manu and he (are) virtous men, the celestial tree and he (are) donors, the ocean and he (are) deep. (Thus) Udayaditya causes himself to be called (i. e. such is | and @ il Udayaditya’s fame). ‘Ofiuc, 2638. The demonstrative pronouns are remote, intermediate, and 3o proximate, viz. @30 (830, ©3), that man, he; envsSo, this intermediate 0572, man, he; w30 (BI, B), this man, he; — 3¢ (©3349)), that woman, % she; ou3%s, this intermediate woman, she; @=¢¢ (@s39y), this woman, D) she; — w30 (@3, ©3), that man, he; ew3o, this intermediate man, he; 3o (B3, &), this man, he; -3, that woman, she; ewd, this intermediate woman, she; &%, this woman, she; —eZo¢ (¥3D), those ative men or women; evs3of, these intermediate men or women; a3t (B530Y), gl 10 these men or women; — the neuters esg3o, that, it; evzgo, this intermediate; rafive @Ry, this;—and their plurals &g, «vs), BJ). Of. § 262. i of The interrfiediate forms have mostly disappeared in the medizval dialect except evzo for the third person singular of the verb (see § 193); ]glll?br the modern one has abandoned them altogether, if one does not consider b of its 573y, which stands for exzo (§ 201). 230 e Remark. AL Regarding the occasional forms ©30, ©¥8y, 85, 8y, @), ¥v3d ete. see §§ 122. Fan)] 272, 2, remark. WY Case 264. When oo, w3, soy become demonstrative adjective pronouns, (see their forms (without the final o and with the demonstrative vowels W lengthened) are &, &, enn (this in the ancient dialect). Such adjective N vowel-pronouns are used before masculine, feminine and neuter nouns Z in the singular and plural. The following are some instances:—es 3%, far 8 23, vw 37, v TWIRo; U BoneF, B TN, v I’ 303208, (a5 8 PS, ¥ wo, B wWRo, AW WFo; ¥ WPLIOBT, & FINTS, & fi)%ofi%", havi 8 FOanR, B BRean®, 8 Bon&DY (see § 253, 2, ). i 265. may Késava says that the demostrative pronouns @0, @50, @00, has VNP, BN, VT, WITS, VS0, MRS, ¥30, 30, Yw3o, YT, &I, and epd (see § 263) and the interrogative pronouns &zZo (933), ST, ! 9o (¢f. §§ 270. 271) come from wzEo, AR, YRy, SJHTo. (om This statement is rather unsa,tisfé,ctory. Let it be said that the it W pronominal forms evo, he, es, she, o, they, which especially in the a4 8 ancient dialect were used in krillingas (§§ 177. 185. 254) and only in F3hJa course of time were superseded by the demonstrative pronouns (wso, (A 7 etc.) and which appear as the personal terminations of the verb (§ 193), i are, together with the demonstrative vowels @ < ev and their lengthened forms e &, enn, the elements of the remote, proximate and intermediate odj pronouns. Thus e330 is 94 euphonic 4 Bo, BTPS 94 o+ B, VS0 it D4 T4 Vo, BTY B+ 4+ W, VT PV T 4 Vo, VTS YU+ T + VP, AP 930 G4 T°1 08, AT0F B 4 5L B0, DTS Y04 50 4 vrt, Wy 9730 18 4z (the primitive sign which in a general way points to 9 v an object, see § 122) + euphonic e, BB B4+ 0, NBY SV 4 ¥V, AN ©5y) @4 4o (see § 137, @ under nominative plural), @) @+ = + o, 0 &0+ 5+ e, e VW &30 18 &4 3y (or zF4+ euphonic )4 wo (see § 122; § 138, d, 3), ) 830 B4 30+ Wo, NBZo YW+ 30+ Bo. Regarding &%, &%, «wd so much may be stated tha they are e, lig ( &, enn either with the suffix @ mentioned in § 109, a, 4, or perhaps with =g Ny the suffix it [®) T, in § 243, 4, No. 10 it g [ 231 . The interrogative pronouns 3o (O\J\SBM(\)J TOSRY), UNF (09N, 29 TOBEY), BBy (0IRHTL TRERY), YT¢ (5D, Galh), WYY (CRNRDTY [SN 9:353) rest on the interrogative o that becomes o3so in the oblique cases of the mediseval and modern dialect which is another form of 11§, (see §§ 41. 125. 138. 269) Thus 350 is H4 euphonic 3¢ 4+ %o, oI els 210 e TR AT o Ta i e TR B, JEBE |5 0ITDRDEY D4 F S0, PRI QR 1v6 N30 GIREY DL o 09739 0° D 806 03500 Q4 85 0o, B33 DLt i ) gUY), OVDDEY) O+ 5+ WY The modern forms with initial 3 are in so Iy far interesting as they show that initial o3® may become ¢ in Kannada 0%, (as in Tulu, wherein o3sez0 occurs as e, and also as ¢39], initial o3s° ¥, having become 3¢; ¢f. e. g. the Kannada tadbhava terms ©=Z3=cos33 BeeN=0odren, and see § 141 , remark under dative) Fhe remark [SN may be made that in o® vhere? which comes from Q4 o9, the oJ ; 3 has become short (¢f. § 138, ¢); 29 appears also as &:3© in the ancient f and medizeval dialect )?’, The forms &3, o353, wmos3 which appear in the so-called gamaka compounds (§ 253, 2, b, only before consonants in the ancient dialect, as the it would seem according to the instances given there), are nothing but the —-J a substitute of & (§ 269) Some additional instances are:— oJ w300 m TOOROE PeT0I ? g weg 3D90Y ! Do B, oot S D w0, WBFNYo (see § 203, remark)? Qo) [ee® Bendo! 035953 TO® 3 BITP 3), FOOSNE TOY 3T BV. — A 03993 NROISZT? 03393 YWORR WA D? ned ate AT 03593 NPT ? BT 00T (VPTD IF) TOTeD) 0359 RoBan 200 3037 AR BOO3) B3 009 BRTY TR SIPRIZ,B7 — I, 0395953 937 37 RPLTITT). — 03593 oS8R BRee ? BI,BZoSR. — oo Ae? 3 BR3? &3 RV 7 — 23900F 3L, T R ? ¥R 8 TP R Bes! WS TN — (AIYNFY) 0T THT BSReRo? (’&&’)di’)) D3I A @ 10 N =08 0?7 Regarding the meaning see § 271 ) 266 In §§ 102, 8, b; 255 it has been stated that Nvu 033 wfifi \9\) 22980 and o o are classed with the (demonstmtlve) p1onouns by the 3), grammarians KéSava and Nagavarma 2890 is £ (the being on the outer side or foreign) -+ eo, another ¢ he or another man N9 W04 s another she or another woman ¥y 8980 £+ w3y (see remark under § 263) or 2T BEI+ VT another ith it or another thing, £¢9cs B9 4+ eos, other men or women, LI TSI+ PN P 232 ) w3y, other things, e. g. FI[9 B0 I vYedn® ©nGelIyo, he who is W called Arjuna, is no stranger; he (lit. this man) must become (the 2;:) W leader?). 3o fi&fi%&@\eéo, that man (is) one who is attached to a foreign (or another) woman. Oh! P8R ToaRBdToerTY,0, £6fifi?%’c%£o, it (the victory?) will be Rama’s who has no equal in the world; will it W\ be other persons’? £233¢5 FRorondsd T o By, having mannerly 3[6] introduced even laws of other things.— 3290 (with an initial gf) 1s 30 ancient; the same form and ®e90 occur in the medieval dialect; éfifi; is the only modern form. E g SISYa8 (which is classed also with the nouns that express indefinite quantity, §§ 90. 278, 3.4) is o e, it all, DO ¥ e ok, they all 1 (men or women), DOT DY+ B, all the things, etc. In o)e(gjfizf rels (=29 70) of the ancient dialect the &3¢ is euphonic like the o3¢ in thes Occ Jowr, ete. (see § 278, 4). Hoo (nominative of o) is used also whi adverbially (see § 212, 7). 3 | SR all (here without suffixes, see it with suffixes at the close of the N nig| present paragraph when it stands at the end of nouns), is used in karmadharaya compounds wherein it may take also the form l(a( QDQTQ) a (§247, d, 9)V, €. 9. DY TIWIFO; VVPYURT'; DV FIR,000, I oNISF (f- e 0o oy, in all ways) oo ZRBFo HGRERTHF 20 ILI BDRFo FoBRINRT! Exp SRS SO SR Isvtdarisn., DY TIBINE. hec BeINE. — 23 FoONFo. O FIF BFS PR, I TFoo SRS dia oSo;joecho. DY SeBHTE LOTIB. DOY DReS B B9 TOZIT. LU (Y Wy DA JoNBn duy RN Fewrs wwrEy. —The modern dialect ele uses also @@?Ocjo and @e:gdo for o:ie%ds and f,aeo)odo. B In the modern dialect DO by itself is used for the nominative and LW accusative, and then, at least often, conveys an emphatical meaning, eneg e.g. o9 (¢ e. the whole earth) ZBex=lc wrORR3 36%@ (=20 ) Vo RESO?. Qo D&y won FY,. wop (the whole body) RRE B, WU 033 Wh4 535@% L2022 3. aéew%gesg) ]0. faafieszgq Fo¢ w’%dz@ E‘ifidfi@g, AR, I8 — DO D, as accusative of 2O, 0CCULs also in that dialect. A Concerning the use of DY, DU, etc. at the end of nouns observe lo the following instances: — 33535¢ 2 0. ?@afiofiuv Q})?;So. csafii%as s S SR 1) The compound-rule 1*eg;11;ding DY ha;]d eo&?gnhas l)eéh regained onlym Kéa‘t\ak the instances. — 233 — 018 abe) To. wddeéfi%?fie) one33R. VIS’ SULH FOENWOINRW o FEPRITS (the ai@éi)ofie:v &)?.J(\.ae efidwafl-——ws@@ddo "’8' 2ednSe R TR Jon ) & 303 Qfiwoio;fifi@ofi (see § 124 after No. 6). D3 [e T59930,0 BN e N\ ) O T30 TIWBT 0. — DI RPIFRF DO TS e3.To0 afiosjwofi@@ o} P303 ~ Il DBy (3,) FTNS PRI TS 3R [IT0w 0 WR FoTP Nqssjo;ie erly DRBTS SRR T RFoNS® T XL T NREBI ) 1§ 38w9. The Nudigattu has 230w, BRIZ,©, VWIOI afi@fiu 5 23(\35 © 3, BIVO TR, BRI OR, wIJ® ON nife 267 In § 174 it has been stated that there are no relative pronouns all in Kannada and their place is somehow supplied by the so-called b from the translation of the instances concerning relative participles 1 these in §§ 179, 186 and 254 this peculiarity has already become evident also Occasionally, however there occur sentences in the three dialects which might suggest the thought as if the interrogative pronouns were used as reiative omes, e. ¢ B WOT YA S® YD the ¢350 who (is) a very righteous man, he indeed (is) venerable But this translation 1s mis- 11 Wp) leading; the correct literal translation is ¢<who (is) a very righteous man? he indeed is venerable’ 0N That the meaning of the above and similar sentences is thus to be g " explained by the interrogative pronoun followed by a demonstrative one WY becomes plainer in instances taken from the modern dialect, in which -JJM dialect the vowel % of questioning (§ 212, 6) is often used, e 3R 03 )99 BT esTRe? w5y BR,PIN, what (is) the fore-part of an lec elepha,nt(’s head)? it (is) the dantabhaga. 035935V (¢- e 03593 &9 ) %fiofio;fi»fio Roo = CSET Node wRFToN BREIBIFY, BR6? (\) ;5§J '353)‘28 and N8, 5, who does often mar(,h out with the very object of vanqmshmg an enemy? such a one (is) an abbyamitrya. OISR TOA SRBIZRRE? lnga MJ) 953890 ST 389, who does work? he shall have a dinner. NHM 2553 @% AP 3500 3T SSSJ«JQ‘? @N SO qfid eooéo@fi es0Ry, who (are) the p60p10 whom thou canst trust‘? such pe0ple choose for thy friends! é OJJéfix) e DOBROTTY 03993 @eéo&@ SR fimfi uefifso 839, WDeF BT3B BRe? BT 03D 39 TRRWIFTRY FRA —’mf @%- &,\fi) in what manner 'O do they WlSh that other people should tleat them‘? in that very manner tfi’ they should treat other people Of. § 271 (053 HDWRY ete.) v In § 0 this paragraph will be adverted to again 30 e 234 e 268 VL In the present dialect of the Southern Mahratta country the singular of R, ASI), VP, @Y is not used in speaking of grown up persons Do whom one considers respectable; the plural of the pronouns (@30, @zd vall with the verb in the plural) or the singular of 3z, &3, ©¥F, &T 20 being used instead (¢f. § 354, II, and about ems § 258) In writing wif about such persons this custom is generally observed only (as it would NE] appear), if they are still alive at the writer's time (see e. g Bombay e Fourth Book, Mangalore, Basel Mission Press, 1884, lessons 2. 4. 36. 38.105) In the modern dialect of the Mysore country (according to the Rev. Th Hodson’s Grammar § 209) «“the singular 33 93¢y is used when Y speaking of an equal or an inferior The plural esz3co is used as an Kés honorific singular when speaking of a superior 533, BB, 530, ST fat are used of an equal or superior when respect is intended” In the ancient dialect the use of the singular of the pronouns 3o by w30, YuIo0 Sef. wRes. susy’ was apparently not connected in any way with disrespect, e. g. ¥Zo DFowR, B0 LOWo, VT WY, 93P’ DVOTY, TP zzéfifi‘ 5355 B350; LmePdTo, BeRT 'asfio 2P ONTYE, BDY* r%;fid 3L, Regarding a rather disrespectful use of ¢330 observe the sentence TR0 WRTIZRV0 ITIRRE® B w@fieo fi)(\) O:SQO? o) The medieval dialect does not seem to differ in this respect from the dey ancient one (see e. g. the use of 530 in Basavapurana 47, 33 and that pre of 3% in Jaimini 80, 1); @30, &30 may be used therein also with a aug certain degree of disrespect, e. g. D98 ToBoTIZ0. NARITIZIV. BT 18 t 2RY BRTTIZRY. BRIV NEPRREY 1. BIF0,? 30 BToD thy Likewise &2, @z3%y are found promiscuously in passages Ut that smell of dishonour, e. g. 33,38 =)~ Hoo TREoT. WRITT RBGWT. of B2 D030 DRBIEY. NTNRR 3»@665&530 TRBIF. When in Basavapurana th six fimes 5, 48-50 women speak to one a,nothe1 of Basava and use wh 233 (for v ) regarding him, they may or may not do so on account 8 of respect; they perhaps thought the term to be more expressive on account of the fullness of its sound (ar 269 Wi In § 265 it has been stated that the origin of &3 18 o4 &° + T Concerning this we remark that the Sabdanusasana says 8ay that «333F optionally appears as 2% and 3FF and SJYZo as ! R4 ¢ (sttras 177 178); (the Sabdamanidarpana derives T, Q3FF o1 3 235 P lar 032 directly from D¢, sttras 112. 114), O is used €353, €. 9. D 3 00§ &o for 3 38900 (Sabdamanidarpana); D Zwds for v Sy (Naga- 0 el varma’s Chandas); Qo for ey (Abhinavapampa); O ©003wes for e3:3 1y £003%%¢ (see Dictionary) The accusative s is used for &3k or dFo - e g. 03B for ¥Yh@do or VF/o BB o the dative od for eZyndr Id )3y DIBE or VF, €. g. VT30 for 8¥IRFr, IFF or DF W o About the ) meaning of Q¢ see § 271 [ R70. The interrogative pronoun es0°¢ (€98, 0359T0) the plural of @il an S530, B3P (0IODRY, 009=%0), has been mentioned in § 265 wherein Késava derives it from &30 as does also Bhattakalanka we have it stated there that eof 1s Q4 5°+wof (Cf. § 272 under No. 2) It is used for the masculine and feminine gender singular and plural )0, e. g. 803590°, who is a poet? wzm® @of, who (is) this man? 0y J0 ga%?o&ra SORBP Fowd Yy 2CPR[o SN IRFBrcnvoe (§ 203) 38m° So¢ O | 1l =9 e?@ezéofiojoézfi a8 0 239G3 R0 23693y werossrierRadyo (| what shall I do to people who do not reflect ¢will he of the inroad of Kala swallow and he devour (us) to-morrow or the day after to-morrow? who (will be our) ab preserver?”, say “destined life (there is for us) and are conceited and elated? agg® @o° 35 o, who brought this? sao3 ©of {81, who ) is thy mother? et &ot? @fifi Se e ¥of, who (art) thou? who (is) thy husband? éeaaz% oo we s wof, who knows Siva’s command? Qegs e &0 3PS, whose daughte1 (art) thou? &3¢ SoToro (=BTHR 308ono), g of whom (is) this horse (i. e. whose horse is this)? e xS &o° ARNR? 10 9553 o3590f 7 VIR €T, who (is) my father? who (my) mother? D who (my) grandfather? =onSe, som 035200, (my) son, who (am) I? b DBRE, VT CIDTY O, who (art) thou? PR 09T =Ny, whose son ) (art) thou? =8y 03590y, who (are) these men (or women)? & 2P0 who WD BRSB; VA WRRY, 033980 P Sy, this knife is very nice =3 gave it to you? 2w R ¢ HIWST HBOR WEY, JWRY CPTW? IT /0 Le95Ry, somebody met the Brahmana and asked «who (art) thou, sir?” 15 BRRIFIRY, SRATTTY 03vady, who made the sun? @€ o598y BLENY )l 39 8, who goes there? 53 o590 Sweeint - aéoé&gdg_, 3. in whose (in what 50 % —— 236 e people’s) gardens do they (the mangoes) grow? e =08 035930, of whom seze se1ze (is) that house (7. e. whose house is that)? & RN a3y, who (is) seize this man? ©3: %3TT0 VR FoREN afla;)@fi:?@%fifi? 59003067 39TIER03R? (1) WOIRRE Adodwe, which of (these) three people (is) thy friend (23580, my | honorific plural)? (is it) woman? (or) land? (or) the beauty of great what riches? D 0N, Bert 0098y RPeNoITy, which (what one) will go faster than all? & RRIRTO 0353 35T 73,5 8, which of these boys Gl @&j}c were swimming? «S0%0°% $3Re? ARdRPA BB, Boror’ ©38%, which what (are) Siva’s attendants? (and) which of these (is) my lover? From the instances given above it will be seen that the interrogative pronoun es0¢ (€30, Qfoadq) means ‘who’ and occasionally ¢which’, In a2 note under No. 8, b of N S 102 it has been stated that the demonstrative prosoun esg3y is occasionally used in combination with masculine terms. This occurs when e9z3d pleonastically precedes the 00D interrogatives €330 and e30° (e300), €. g. VTIDS "ae:)nfi ua’g)o? — QeaF call WBwTo FRBTTY VTS ? — B3 e VIO %@ezsasw?_aq{ FRODO® then SRIDRY VPO Fo* ©3eTe? In the modern dialect the question eszo The Le o%ady, who is that? (who is there?) is now and then heard. 030 Nudigattu has: zgobmy w3 BBR wmeds ne? Bemdng, A e(¥] fiafi?'cfmm BTONRY ? (thi 271 Regarding the interrogatives esss, 03953, wass in the so-called 0% gamaka compounds some instances have been adduced in §§ 253, 2, b; 265. From those instances it appears that their meaning is ‘what’, ¢ what dog kind’, and ¢whieh’ according to circumstances. buj The use of e3530, &ITYE, e3Hz30; WVITT0, T, 03I YD (0TT, 0z TORH), 0DITE, TITI; By, XY (PeN) has been alluded thy to in § 267 where instances are given that might be supposed to be 0f § relative ones, Here follows a number of various instances :— 530 ) 1§ FwTR0 TRFo! BTo wIFoRTEIAYT® wr3tide, who killed Mura? who ) overwhelmed and disgraced Baka, Kamsa, (and) Kési? gsea’eo)oaa;jaé by VOTF VPR, W¥IH, except thee, Arhat, who (is) excellent on earth? R3290 WHTONRS, 1T (an o £ D VSR ¥, WUNBRED JwoRwY, T | () RR 350 W8 ofed, (ar 090 NRNRS -~ 2P when a Jama : BEMDS0 g)%O? I g e [ — 237 0m seizes (his) pot-stone pencil, when Arjuna seizes (his) bow, when Indra (1) seizes (his) thunderbolt, when Krishna seizes (his) discus, when Bhima W seizes (his) club, who will stand to fight? 3m?,Q003593%¢, what woman (is) free from desire? @ s3dwss o) 2B,R009R° ¢RRWP, which of these (is) 64 my lover? mpw HeaRs OB TR wR T YJIB? wZo WY Boeos fer vhat (is) the colour of sin (and) virtue? who know it? WR FTOONFISF 0yS g53)c3o, what (is) the business (you) have come (for)? 39, RoEIHRs30 S ict &3:3)30, what (is) the substance of your qualities? ¢33 efuzfiu@fisefi 0DRRY what (is) his profession? &30 RoFélo JmA, what (is) thy distress? 176 53 2O, prerecle) X EP IR . DRID e3¢0 QTN | the ) DT TCI,E ¢ itl VD RE 30390, ¥RRY 355 IR 8308,300500 || «“if (one) the considers those (pearls are) large and these make themselves to be called (é.e. are) small; even this (is) the difference Which do suit you? o them choose with pleasure?”, (thus) saying (he exhibited) all the nine TN precious gems RTYY ey BREN3,N, which of you goes? =3P he 05979T (Or CWRBTY) DPYT 2) which of these (is) your elder sister? JN B[TRPNR 033 e %e%ei on which (person) of these didst thou fix (thine) eye? & [oRoR09 oHax3Ry, which of these men? & =l gd A, FRFO led O399 VN, oSA N 20803 .83, which of these books doest thou like? J8R l WTTR WIIRNRI? FToFs9S oIDRY? AT SRRV, AB 3PRNZA 3pe, i doest thou even not know which (is) the palace (and) which (is) the building erected for the accommodation of travellers? 38, HBROS %, O3T9XTE? WORKS 09T which (is) thy left hand? (and) which (is ed thy) right hand? & RweRIn¥® ‘@p& S 030938y, which of these pairs he of shoes (is) thine? & ZRIYY R, SR 3=y, which of these houses 30 (is) thy house? A, TEIRFRYY SAREDY SR FReENTy oISy ? ) 9, 233008, eud ?N%raed m@w%@eej which (are) the three principal = v branohes of created things? the animal branch, the vegetable branch h’l (and) the mineral branch. Qf\)g 0% QND 55@ S50 DLTINNSY ) 039353, in North India (there are) six d1v1smns what (are) they? FONTEE wRITHES SRS Wi B8 9T DO FINFY 353y, what (are) the chief rules for forming the plural of nouns?-—- _From the na instances quoted above it will be seen that the meaning of €330, etc pr— e 238 is ‘who ‘what person’, ‘which person’, and that of esgcsd, etc. ‘what Ther “which’ About esgf, etc., the plural of «30, ete., see § 270 SUpp (D S 269) 9o, DI mean ¢ what’, ‘what kind or manner of’; ¢ why’, pron ‘how’, when they might be taken also as exclamatory words (¢f. § 262). dem 00 ~§ 03so, what doubt (is there)? 3BnS eo TaTeo, what (is) the reason so that (thou) delayest (i.e. of thy delay). e300, what (is) that? adpe $30 SRR PR RS 9o, what (is) the fault he has done? ILZF Vo ) To0e00, (your) religious austerity (for) what reason (2. e. why are you 0urs ascetics)? @=3¢o, what manner of man (is) he? w3deo, what manner of woman (is) she? 33 dwgawemorivdeo, what (do) the discourses of those attendants (mean)‘> OO TIOR3 BeorIR. Beo 3anNes, how (could) all (be) liberal persons like Karna? RETOTTI00R 203089 VB [TlaloN of o bfatatizgate) éwma o3wes, O, how that mass of bright f00* shines on b) O\ the western mountfun' Do BIENNARIFIp JaRweBRY JZone, O, how our the birds crowd on the highest branch! ®oJ) 3@38¢o, why many words? 28I PFSeRy, What (is) the meaning of this? & ewds BR3¢y, what thy (is) the name of that town? dezy DTy Sse@og,e, what doest thou make? IR OFo Bedo, what doest thou want? ezZ OF) FeR3 3. what does 4= he ask? ©33R on¥AR R 39 ddefio what (is) his monthly pay? @ 3 \./’\Jq AR QI n)% 3o, what did he “find there? BB VN VR YU, vJazéuaa s, W what answer does he give thee?—The genitive of Do, LT (03I, 0ISLI) is frequently used in the sense of ‘of what’, ‘of what kind’, ‘of what fidp substance, caste, etc.’, ‘what kind’, ‘what’, e. g. H3C9 Se8Re FRIFRPFS what kind of word on earth! $3ess933¢, of what caste (is) he? »oi3p, W nes’ 03T owonidw, O, what kind of paramour thou art! ef3e3ed 33 Rot9o, what quality of devotion (is) that? en€d3 $50,RoRewe BRINPITe3CI ol 530, what greatness (is) the excessive killing of beasts? 0329 A what kind of country? £3e9 S58o, what kind of word? & Tw®E 352 95, of what (is) this pitcher (made)? @) c3598¢9 wosy, What kind of ey snake (is) this? w=Ro 03093953y, of what caste (or profession is) he?— The dative (&)3€¢ D3P, V3T, 0TF; 03533%’ o30e3F, 035eT) means ‘for sty what’, ‘wherefore’, ‘why’, e. g. D3FF F0JR o why passion? QFZEPRvo, o I do not know why DIB, BROR T 270, Why do you beat me? T3 dRe* ABOny' wSe3®, wherefore these various (high) ranks? o3g BoRrdwes wdoded, for what (is) the staying in this man’s fort? = g 308 o3a¥, why this word (or speech)? vz o5e3%, Rewo, why (or for sv what) is this required? o3se¥ 2 0, why did you come? (o 239 s 272, In § 102, 8, b, remark possessive pronouns have been mentioned. There are no distinct possessive pronouns in Kannada, but their place is supplied 1, by the genitive case of the personal pronouns, of the reflexive rhy ’) 62) pronoun and of the demonstrative pronouns, and 2, by the addition of the the demoxstrative pronouns to the genitive case of the mentioned ones. The first class corresponds to the KEnglish possessive pronominal at ¢ adjectives — my, thy, his, her, its, our, your, their; the second one 3o} Jou represents the English possessive pronouns—mine, thine, his, hers, its, ours, yours, theirs. NEr of 1, The possessive pronominal adjectives are formed by the genitives. 1) O, IF, T, 8B, 2, 3y, T3, I3, and a following noun, e. g. { =6 DR DR, T, S8, 88 =98, 55:& 308, the house of me, ¢.e. my house; on DB BT, 23, FRB, §T0 FoTes, [ T3S, the horse of us, . e 10§ our horse; ds? RF, ¥, A, Y and a following noun, e. g. ?3 308, ¥, FR, hat thy house; 230 BoR93, Q3, FIBT, your horse; H S, 8§, 839, 23y, (reflexive) and a following noun, e. g. 38 =R bl 068 ol 23, =8, his house; 3z0 ToR3, 339, TOWT, their horse; 0 BSR, 983, BN, BIR, SR, YWIR, VT, B3onE, BT, SN, 2030, swdont® (demonstrative masculine) and a following noun, e. g. ¥3 hat $IR, H3F [N, VBT TR, B3I ToR, VSR [N, YW 2o, his house; ¥ O¥ST DR, S3ond TS, BST Fores, H3ond %’t)zfioé’), VFIT TIRIT, j Pw3one ToRT, their horse; 3% B3P, ¥, AIY, ST, WBY, VIR, B8, YEIT, ST, KT )W y T, 3T, emsfi%gd (demonstrative feminine) and a following noun, e.g. @é 3¢ [o8, BFWP FoF, S I, STCH B, LVIY BoR, LWFR JoA, her house; ©=3 Foro3, etc., their horse; BT, BRI, \urey, BRI, B, eI, vYnS, aPne (demon- ) or strative neuter) and a following noun, e. g. &ged 308, etc., its house; 0, LY BoRoB, etc., their horse. s W Remark. d Occasionally a possessive pronoun of the second class (i.e. one of No. 2) is used for the first class, ¢.g. in the following instance of the ancient dialect:— Or I3e2800 B33Y, (his) WO I° @RS &S 3¢RM0, the forester thus scraped his bow (¢f. No. 2). — B0 2, The possessive pronouns are formed by the genitives adduced above a1 a8 under No. 1 and a following demonstrative pronoun, e. g. AP (DT W waY), [IZDY ([ + 2, of me it, 4.e. mine (referring to a neuter singular), @§5° ('nbéa:y&fio“io), 5;30@0 (ZSS{{- ¥30), ESQL‘OSES& (ééfi-&fiafim), of me he, ¢. e. mine (referring to a masculine singular), DR[Y (I + 3 ¥3%), DY (I +839°), IFB9 (F+ w39), of me she, 4. e. mine o (referring to a feminine singular); DRD) (DR +¥T), I (FF+ D), ':(; 10 SRRJN (V- +wynsh), of me they, 7. e. mine (referring to a neuter R plural), o8 Bcf (W7 + ¥R0F), IZFT* ([{+93F), BGTD (8 +83W), mine (referring to a masculine or feminine plural), etc., etc. The following and instances may show the use: — & 03030330, & =08 550553’ this house afli (is) mine; sorfié{so, & Sonto IFFo, & IR I, this son 1s (¢ ming; & Songe DB, Y D[R 55055%36, g SoRY R"FYJH, this §6Te e "~ 5 daughter (is) mine; es PO IR, BT, ) 3of I3, @ BT I, by We those sons (are) mine; B009Y ¢ ITIT[T, HORY ¢ BHY[T, & SN Ch n¥ 78533530, these servants (are) mine; o309y Nvs 3], (reflexive), & 239,150 SZYnFe, these oxen (are) his; & TRBRY ¥[8, & Tom 3n¥s 38, those horses (are) theirs. SSpRIBRIR, PpAS the pre 3o38c, that ornament (is) hers. 2330y &3¢ Qafimééo, of these men this man _(is) ours. o) xifi%zge;g 23,3¢, all mine (¢.e. all that is mine, is) WA thine indeed. hay The possessive pronouns Q);izjo, ;3\:3%533, mine, gs&\cso, thine, 33);633, his, appear, in the ancient dialect, also as IS (DS+930), S8R ([3+932), dRD (AT+93), 3T (38+v2), Oor a8 IR, (AT + ¥3Y), (U3 BR2Y, (SR+93Y,), dFL, (JW+¥3Y), 383, (3W+v,), ey, fing (v, VR WOTF, IR0 F2CG0F o, 30D RFTIFGHFTSF BBJXIAT | when (he) said are “ Firmness of character (is) thine, valour (is) mine, to the king (belongs) oy his great courage” (¢f. No. 1, remark), or fid BRRAR DR, FO3,WBFSy,, THON 3T, :3?3@#0:35%0, (& passion (is) thine, patience (is) mine, to the female companion (belongs) her conciliatory appearance. by. Also QR0 (28°+3), see § 122), mine, R, (™R +3), thine, 3o, By (3¢ +23), his, are occasional, though undesirable, forms in that dialect, of ¢ — 241 . hove MV as in the modern one FZIZo may appear as éfig, QRT3 as aag, 3330 as 3§%. The plural of OF3, BBy, IRy, I3 is g;jgégg, ;s;joééo, uter Qa3y,20, BTB0 Or I 9,39 O 3 9,30 &= QD ¢ 3 -9 oY) 839,39, ), There is, however, the rule in the ancient dialect that g—fiéég, §;$oé:a’o, N ‘{F mine 2393, 3380 may take the forms of DTBY (DB A0B), BT, 09,30 and 355.)oé53 before the appellative nouns of number (see § 278, UWJ) 4, except, of course, wro, etc.) and before the numerals from two to uter nine, e. g. @;Soaééosjjcs (@moé:a'wr@ojjjofl, @afiao@g@%c‘, Qfiooéée%c‘, J ) @;Sgoéé.@;’sgbadgbcs, QB3 IFTF, 235\)@&39%06, 5500&0333 of, 3333&53&%;306, Wing and 280 BT, DRI MO, IRoyZody FoRNE. The 101 156 affix ev3y is the intermediate demonstrative pronoun used for enco N 1§ (¢f. § 173). The meaning of the instances is ‘we five (persons)’, ‘we thlS seven (persons)’, etc., and ‘us eight children’, etc The same meaning 30 may be expressed by the genitive, e. g. @;Soéojéc*? (@;Soé+ 25039, 0°) &)é@, 4% we five came, @;Soéofi%cs opedos, you five went, or by the nominative, e.g. (17 ) URS B0 WD), VeIF @03‘%06 TpeDT. Instances with the suffixes 3y and ev3dy do not seem to occur in TN = the mediceval dialect in which the forms with the genitive and nominative / IOICEY) men prevail, e. g. TV (T4 BY,T°), TV T, IV DIRTT, BB, TRTEF T , 18) Regarding the declension we find therein e. g. SE S BWF TR, SIS 'a%do, 353_)&;36 'aa%do, @;Soéfla%)bfi, In the modern dialect we P have e. g. TODY Ty, BAYW, Ty, D, Ty, Q1Y To. ) (AN PPl It may be remarked that regarding the appellative nouns of indefinite Y )%) quantity es2of, adwos (§ 278, 4) a similar practice is observed; we ) find e. g. in the medizval dialect des3RwTo0 (e + BAWTI0); VDYRWDE (VD4 BRNT*) ; 00T, ;);Soé § ARWTR. «Whose’, in questions like ‘whose horse is this’, ¢‘whose ripe fruits qid are those’, is expressed by &30 (T4 ©7), WRTHY, YT (YT+ ¥), ngs) 030RTIYNSY, €. 9. & TIBIBOWITRY, & TRV 0RWsRY! TEQ ° 333, es 562@5337%%,33 ova0yn$o? In the ancient dialect 535y becomes also e380F ($T°430), e g. ©53¢F SoToric? (See § 270.) A0, Remark with regard to 3 (see § 263, remark):— i 08 ‘Of what, or in what, direction (is) it?’ ‘where (is) it?’ may be rendered by 308 (23,684 ¥B), which appears also as W), (W5 - 8)), €. g. ADS, 3 BYNAZE 23 8 3 ) DFodIRA, IVFRR 3300, “in what direction (are) the points of the compass? where (is) the sky? where (is) the earth?’’ (thus) making flefit 31 . 242 P — (people) say (é. e. in such a manner that people uttered the above questions) f darkness spread about. 23 1 is the genitive of ©3,, a declinable adverb of place v &r (§ 212, 2; § 123). (et XIV. On adjectives. il 273 In § 90 adjectives or attributive nouns (gunavacanas) are intro- duced as declinable bases, and their gender has been stated, in § 102, are s, ¢, to be vitya or viséshyadhina, in which place it has also been remarked that they are formed from nouns by means of pronominal 30 suffixes (see § 276). §We In ancient Kannada and other books thirty-three attributive nouns 0 are usually employed; they are, in their singular neuter forms, the flan following : — WS 30 Or %P 30 -1 ) -0 %Qo&éo or o, wRO or endy, wWH or NP, T 9,390 & =9 TR or IR, msééo or fiaeééfi, 59%53 or 3%:;3&’ 3%3& bia or 393, 3R¢0 Or 3RO g3 or pis, Bea or BRQ 2, AN 8330 sfios{ééo or a"osgé_gg, Se030 or 3003y, u%éo or w e wo e or w3y, b z‘bs:éa:a’a or z‘:;s;%}a’g&, d%éo or 23%3&, 309 30 or 293y, xeéaéo or fie{%@a’g 1my (see their declension in § 122);— A, ARG, (BIIWM), DFRY (ERY), ) IR, OB, SEPRY, JARY, REIBY (XCBERY), OBy (&DW), TPRT doi (2pRD0), WEPR), WA, WYY (see their declension in § 122), of which ¥ four are tadbhavas (§ 370), viz. w3, W3, FY 3, Re3 2. afte As will be seen, they form two classes according to their finals. o | The neuter plural of the first class is e. g. &;%m@, FRTTD), é%dog‘, lha 30080y, B HI), Se0mRy, Wi, fi%do:@, 20 (see § 136); aho that of the second class is e. g. BAGT), VR, TROT), FOWRITF), LIF° §1 B0, DB, VAT, VIR (see § 136). to The masculine singular of the first class is e. g. %9 B0, FIYWo, 10§ Ten, FROT0, é%zfio, 3Red%0, NedRo, WY do, 23%130, 9o (see § 117); that of the second class e. g. ©Ao0, BRWI0, HFWo0, FRWo, B0, FE2°0300, R0, TeBvo, wDWIo, 33;9:3;5%)0 (¢f. the formation of the 80y appellative nouns of number in § 278, 4« and the modern ®WEow), wEFRo or wEATo, WA, VP (see § 117). Vj)\ ; X The feminine singular of the first class is e. g. u%cflgy‘, TAYT, FROTFS, SeOTFF, afi%,édcjegfi, ;?meazjg;é (see § 120); that of the second class day —e 243 — ons) e. g. VAP, BIRFS, (faaoéd%vg), DB0I0%°, TOONY, IEE0ToeF, lace RBO3F, BLBFF, DDOTE, TpRDY ¥¢, W[, WP%* (see § 120). The epicene plural of the first class is e. g. W B, Re00Te, W 3ok (see § 119); that of the second class e. g. BR300, HBTE, ISCPRIT’, 110 DO3VTF, ;3;3:3;3%)56, WEDT, 2:3%?03&%;06 (see §§ 119. 134). 10 ) Some instances regarding their use in the ancient and medieval dialect are the following (¢f. § 276):— Jeen inal B, Zoro? (W82 vorta®), a severe disease of the uvula. m@éjm@’ BRABY T, 308 (for SeSRys, see§ 354, I, 8, b), round breasts. sweet milk. )Uns TOWs 39,0, black musk. DPB [y, a white pearl. »0meR, great desire. 2030 eFenc, great liberality. 205300, a large the flame. 3€2°%y BWelo, a small quantity. &dRY x%o, great vigour. 3%e ) 01 00y wprRo (for wppRonis®), big buttocks. RedBoI) W¥ges (for a?)de{)\e;é), A straight fingers. @GP TGS, a sweet paramour. BT DR 3), 2o (for DRRWoNE) Tords RAVJpees, the sweet pleasures of the ? i objects of sense (are) like the sweetness of poison. 4, But though such instances in which the so-called adjectives are immediately connected with nouns, not unfrequently occur in the c@‘w} mentioned two dialects, there is also another more common way of 0 hich doing so, viz. by putting 0T, O, es® and eszs between them. @%, »®, = are the present relative participles of ero (§§ 183, remark after No. 7. 184. 223), ‘becoming’, ‘being’ (literally ‘¢of the becoming or being’, § 186), and & is the past relative participle of esro (§ 176), N Q’) ‘having become’, ¢being’ (literally ¢of the having become or being’; 30); about the possibility of ez being used also for the present tense see s § 169). The translation of the participles into English is, according to circumstances, ‘that 18 b ‘who 1is’, «which are’, ‘who are’, \ao instead of which (the so-called Kannada) adjectives alone may be used in é ) 1) rendering. o Instances in the ancient and medieval dialect are:——fi%é&; c;dg, a sound that is harsh or a harsh sound. ;"30@650;532) Fo® BP0 TR the fi%ms% R, 3o, soft soles of the feet and very rough hands. @B, oo 3.2, a melodious tone. .,gg,?cs#.s,o T3y, a young cow. &)ad% a%;fig@ great o) supremacy. 00RD, Vwae, large fishes. DP0FT, To[O, @ youns Jas daughter. w®ITH dfifi:scs’ powerful demons. &,%35 CEXNE precious Sk — 244 i I pearl. 2$3R Ay, a good cow. 1OBD B, great desire. 5%@90 parti FHOBY, TS ¥B g3 398, the small and sharp point of corn. % ¥FIR the oo, an excellent gift. FH039, B 1R o, a sharp smell. %@aamago&?o, extreme astonishment. Z=PZc %53 Ry BNy, various verses addu ston in which compounds are extensive. 307 It is to be remarked that also words which do not belong to the [ above-mentioned thirty-three so-called adjectives (as Samskrita adjectives, etc.), may be made such in Kannada by the addition of @z, oz, g, or 4 fhe f e. 9. JRFOZNT, IRy, VRTT, FHIF, HETY DB, BIZRPY) $TT, 0o, 63#339 S0RBTo, BFTIB® SRR, aégfisazs O W, DPF S0 DT o, : 3 | Instead of ez, wx and &3 also esP, ‘having become’, together with % a form of @UF, to be, is used, e. g. IRARIW ABFTY (4. €. IRORSBY, &N (foz BBFaEY), that is brown; dSemenzgroy, that is excellent; DR oo (for 35097330333556 eATFS%, she who is shrewd and clever; ZRTmoN® e (fm uég,l a long desolate road. D39.3Fs* VNI TOWHIRTIT, Vo, the cele- form brated capital of Kuntala. oézwh Sch@en amyds, he who is stout and fine. Also em%;), ‘being’, possessing’ (literally ¢of the being’, etc., § 186), w%’( the present relative participle of eyt (§ 180, remark after No. 6), = 3 which has been mentioned as one of the taddhita suffixes (§ 243, B, W0 No. 20), may be introduced here again, as similar adjectives or attributive nouns are formed by means of it, in which it signifies ¢ who has’, etc. b ufiu( e. g. cfizssfioosi)o, a man who has riches or a rich man; %gdg%g)o, a studying V man; mz@aiggeg)o, a man endowed with good qualities; z‘saesqsfioo%g)o, (o a man well supplied with grain; FewnosSe*, a charming woman; by 1 BEPIF o, wise men (see § 316 under 1; ev$ in combination with the accusative see ibid.). The contrary may be expressed by 2R, ‘1ot that being’ (§ 175, 8), ‘not having’, e. g. %,Qaec)azjo, a man in whom there is no they studying, 7. e. a not-studying man; &gfiafi?)e&do, a stupid man; %039(8% ), WY (X 8389, a crook-armed man; B3V B Formado, worthless gold. Hg33, 4ppa oog® werury, that which has no terminations (see § 316 under 1). § 2 wFOOT TN FTFIV B [IROI w%&efigd Yo B POTERY, el the though there be a village in which there are no tenants, a house in Bhfir which there are no children, one’s own people who have no love, what v (is their) worth? (see § 275). 3 a—— s 245 o 0 Prominently in the medieval dialect =&, ¢being’, present relative R participle of 5o (§ 184), is used like We}fn when it is suffixed to one of NFO, the original forms of the thirty-three attributive nouns which will be IS8 adduced presently, e. g. fi@@%afi 23y, & large ox; 53@%65 o b large stones; 2.9 ® So®, good speech; 300 %‘agef, swelling udders; u%m’ the 321y, round leprosy. 7S, It remains to be stated that the above-mentioned thirty-three adjectives or attributive noans possess what we may call original forms. Those of 3 the first class are oF wie (for ¥neszy), NG (for NP ), wH* (for &’%éQ)’ w3y, (for T893 ¢f. § 102, 9), sRes (for 3RORQ), (Roeay,, for fiozéég), g (for with a’s{?}aéo), 3¢ (for 393y), 3wea (for 30¢03y), &Y, (for 32, ded g (for d@%ée), Suome (for ;Soz:é)éa), Reo (for 8ed), ué\od (for w@éjéo), ALY W (for 29 3y), e (for m%@éo), e (for 23363330), B0 (for 209 3v), ey o (for ;:j{éaég), (z%fifi is also ancient, though it would seem, as if its longer cele form did no longer exist.) 0 18 Those of the second class are wh (for ©ARY), vg’, 1R (for vdRY), B3F (v, for BIR), DY, 86), 2% (for 29R0), B, TRy (for FA), Fo° (for TORY), 3&2°, 3N, 3, B), g, ete. (for 3P0, d, ¥R, ¥Ry (for dBR), =ey (for TeIDy), B tive 20, 0¢, 2¢u¢ (for 12m), Bpx (fpr WPRRY), WeP, W (for we°m), b Gy wa (for 2Am), 0P, Be¢ (for VID). We have already met with these original forms in karmadharaya Jin %0, compounds, in § 247, d, 5 seq., where they are regarded as substitutes by native grammarians. nal Cf. also § 244 (Ses, T0FF). Regarding oA, a®, 20, ®¢9 there is the ancient rule (§ 253, 2, ¢) the ‘ot that where they form so-called consecutive compounds (gamakasaméasas) g 10 they insert o3), viz. WACTREY, PRWRITIOR, WDMBTZN0 (0. I'. FEIP°z0N0), V) 2WPoTIYF, to which Késava adds also mAodoeee o, though there is ) &j apparently no AR (but =XY). It has been remarked already in Z;) § 253 that this o3y is o4 w, 4. e. the genitive. Instead of 5203080 the Jaimini Bharata and the modern dialect have esAg@y; the Jaimini ; i, Bharata has also es3:330c¢ for esdiody Boes. The same Bharata uses ¢ 1 d&nuToes for B e, and BABRTe’ for TAcd 3R[eF. For 2 hat o3ono the modern dialect uses %0:30n, and for RYTIHF 1t has ¥ — — 246 FWI, or VP BATEY AT DABRTO ENLTatAN, i) W RNITIY® it would be regular karmadhiraya compounds like the ancient &9RR% ey 39e0’; ¢f. TN in the Nacirajia CD\LJ 2%, W%, (both medieeval and modern) and =233 (ancient?, medizval 40, and modern) often follow the ancient rule regarding 54 etc., that is to say suffix the ¢ of the genitive by means of a euphonic o3¢ (§ 130, &, ¢), ol e. g. PR (O DFE) RPN, a young she-elephant; ?»230»«) (or %% e) Hiap) Fox, a good business; ®CBo (or =eBe) AeS, the old garment of a female W 274 If attributive nouns do not precede the nouns or pronouns with N % which they are connected, but follow them, they appear e.g. as follows: T35 w§zo0dw,, the poetry became good. e=:pe w¥Ho, he (is a) good Y (man) 3% w® 3%, she (is a) good (woman). efi@ 2005y, they e (the pearls are) large 8305 wd o, they (are) able (persons) v 0 It will be observed that in such a case the attributive noun agrees 0 in gender with the nominative to which it is added I6ma Samskrita adjectives are used similarly, e. 9. Bwo 3exmo BIE woul 908,300, BT DR, ¥ TZ0, VBT WERT, & A eT* 3 030F 3R, O alone 995, Grammars and other books of the modern dialect adduce various 0n i form adjectives or attributive nouns, e. g. ©o20WITT, WG, 28,7, 0B, WP, Td ag, oY, therg 3B, %aw FOTOB, B3, 2%% Bz (WSRE), zsase 3;333 53065 o@)éj W3R, mo@wifi ;fioomv, BaRT, Ry, AL, 56033 a'éaza’o etc (Nudlgattu p. 58; Anglo—Kanalese Translation Serles 1.pp. 30 41 42 DA OO etc.), of which several are known to be ordinary nouns (¢f. § 277) DA Their use may be learned from the following instances (¢f. § 316, 2):— W BRBRRT (BRRBT W) MO, 2 large bunch. ZRZIZRS[y S W SOR.— T FRTW 233 NR. T R NP BSRC SOIR BVEAS NS % o S ‘3\05\ RBP TORINDY. /B, NNBY. WD, WD BJREEB, 3D, TORY c?.mé saREsnsicy, &razé ’*%3 AN W) DL, PBIRO. 55099 DOIBF). ; 98, [onv. WG @3& VP 9O, NS_‘@ fic’s’fi%‘?o a?oeéo FoLSe ;So‘“\“ dozao it 0 DIBRINR (The instances are taken from South- \lahratta school-books bo(}k\ hat were composed by natives.) ¥Ry ©33TSG, that is necessary o) &3 sSoa‘;ossi{S ) .03.0 Boss FOBIBRFY D Ree 38, DD NBEY) 500590 TR ITBIST K\m BRI DB, TNTZ B, T, CS 23 FTF3. S3nP TP, BRZ D, TOI nY QM P — 2417 P — T aSeaso@m?o TRT BB F. %9@5)8?%% T BEF. W %’eaio@ BITVR., BN (5 Ao M8 o3, 23,19 Teerons nE} Bt . TR0 RRLUPTITSA. BB BBRZ . ROBINCNTY BFeBTy BrR s wWots BWERED val 18 £0 o3, © DoTRY) BARE ©3. oI BWERE DB, VI BT 25T ajbcsaofi. %wgv) BROTD 3 b o) ] ;so;smé;so dofioo&o%fi@aaa@a". o3 égeododo 838 8D BRoFe? TN 33, 3. SRty BEomy 3. Qesd 303 3 {JS) ¥ 23:3'%3. BES 550 d@z:%do 933, TEA% TAEY. € O T B3R BB, Nede we e BAe BOT W TAG. NRYY Fo with QNGB ), T :392%;5) 0008,%. ©Te3Y 0% (cloudless) wd. Famo lows wcfifi@%efi. VRRY WY ucéai;)csaoé’. I 3% SO0 WBTOZ . 000d A aNe 'zb%?edo 73, & %e)(g’r{%fo 0BY DTV, ejdzb::%aid FOTBNH they 3o, WIS 3023 ":)szavam. BoNT BMIRRENS {SQUS WRY T A VANF) ®RT WD, BRE BOTOWTNTY ATISRI. 3,3 (see § 355, 3). rees BV B3 B. (Instances from S.-Mhr. school-books. It 18 1o he remarked that there are instances among them in which other authors o) would perhaps prefer to use =A and a form of 3y, instead of w3y 80 alone, after the attributive nouns, e. 9. &5933 ATy)=aNG; see further on in this paragraph, and ¢f. the forms with & suffixed to the original 11008 forms of attributive nouns in § 273. In the medieval Basavapurana ) there occurs once wWBIRIFIY), 29, 28.) ol &j, efc vRoSIR RwerRnYy, broad walls. @;fi\sad TERFRYY. 8RITHD s £ SIEl; efigazpad%”aacs RESTR. PLIDIB WD, BRI T voN. emé_&@ ed D98 R0, D TTR NBNK. 3 28,0590 Y. STROWT a0 fif% o)f- 03590 waNwuniFy, wEY zé%;:azfi é@e‘ej@‘. :%os%zsadaflm. do&égad V) DE,0RT. HETTIT BORITR. TIRCRTIOMWIE BRINRY. §HB,DO3 % 9 FReBNRBY. [ZReDBITG @%fi%fi), DT, B BONH. 3 sjaogqu sam&@xg ’dpfl. ToB0E. SuRWFOIBRT). BUE BTN ga:@ SEUIB DR, ). T m;gdnad 31{5\. gzggssad@m?o. 23%&23 BEIVE YUNITINE., JRFB T, (Instances from S.-Mhr. school- fmw HORBTE TIZIR. a@aagcs BRI, o0ks books.) %;3@35‘5)% R &%, a false friend. BRIY AyBBR. HOFIF 2355 MBI, AoRB Doy woRYR G, g, R, B8 oBorg, B, TUYR. oD, w&msfio._'flm@%cfi sa3nW, 208 P — 248 s had treeless deserts DONVT TN 2000 BRI 239030 2OV T and ¢ Smo03ox. (Instances from the same.) <having become i) Instead of esz3 also e together with a relative participle of @3,, to be, is used, e.g. WRY VPTTeNTo=RY (for WHTFT may 343 Gc0), (it is) excessive. e3230e0m39NTos3 gorvaT, ornamental gold d.ea0 1ng ¢ 8. 5aNTIDITY illustrious persons (Instances from the same and from a Mysore book.) YLy “quit With reference to the remark made above in this paragraph that appe some authors would perhaps prefer to use =n and a form of ©3o instead of 3y alone, after attributive nouns, the following instances, taken from F,%0 S.-Mhr. school-books may be given: —ag Kosrrdd dwRendI [ 3 21 2EPRETY, CNA BRFI SEY Do DR wsa;smam% 5330 BB TS the 3 QIS N0, TY0n SISy S0 Sen Ry =SB0 383 208 o3enNd efe FJ) BIRINTY BINBRER @93,0@@ 3%,30eNm3 C. BIY T RIT) WRY fido;sahda%@ 22, ©9TWR uaé%fi wcé‘%zsafldeio (A o e§g) WX 38 a;iga luce JoBTOIP SNTIST JORY AB IINTIRDRY TR, o]y v@&fi aériocafiosm 6\)»‘(5 FIENTONIR oS NP SR WY &daafidowdo Ptim Oud‘ Occasionally SIS (4. e. &R, + R, § 223) is suflixed to &3 and ene 0n g €. 9. AT T390 (beautlful) éeujfim V~C§ rfi%?& (Instance from a Jrop S.-Mhr. school-book ) SIngy Frequently this ®g appears as eg, (cf- 8§ 223. 224) and 3 without e or e in the formatlon of so- called adjectives, e. ¢g. N3 T, FTRTOV, L suffiy long hair 39 R, YUKW 398, 3N, BUR TN, TSI &flwga‘s’ d#é RN, :’mérd 53?.3633 or emcfizs IR, ete. (Instances from S. Mhr I ang school—books) @g occurs also 58 mR e . cfr*’fi ué3 and @8, e g. DHIR DRF 136 thery Lastly also forms with R (§ 212, remark 2) have been used as so- mineral coals are {8 1 called adjectives, e. g. SQZONYs IR BTE,B, T black. & RoMAR FTRIW ifff:? na. N@é‘) 0399 msaflfi %og) SNBE S mloh N SoenS. B2 BBNTS B w% ne Ci?% r{%*o 393, mfioa’ ~ 4 %oe)o latyg 2 NT3 B NAYRYY wRY 3TN méfi 72\ CSJ el (Instances from I S.-Mhr. school-books.) dFOp Also so-called relative participles have been called adjectives in to {} modern grammars, e. g. RRFE 3T 3.n%, bright stars, T Re=TOL Wy —_— 249 — 0f bad servants (Anglo-Kanarese Translation Series, Book I, pp. 39. 40) and even plain genitives, as @3(\,, fi@%%co 239,030 (Nudigattu, p. 58) tive To express ‘very’ before an adjective, 83, weo w®e and RO i) may be used, e. 9. ¥& B very thick; weo 3989, very clever WRY % o RBR@, very great; wxy 303, very clean About another way of render- from g ‘very’ see § 305, a In the case of inferiority also &eg is used for ‘very’, e.g. 3¢0 ®ep, very small, which 8¢d is employed also to express ha quite ‘wholly’, e. 9. Soonin®y 3¢09 OToTes TN T3, 53, monkeys tead : appear quite like men from On comparison see §§ 343. 348, 7. 349, s 4 1 276. Looking back at § 273 we find that the so-called adjectives in ,JJw the ancient and medizval dialect consist of original forms (as WP, TP N etc., ®¥A, D&, ete.) combined with certain suffixes What are these? 28 They are the pronominal forms 3o, 30, @0 of the neuter singular intro- oy duced in § 122, so that e. g. w9 30 or 2,3y, would be the original form 030 w4+ D430 or 3o, the g being a euphonic addition (¢f. § 168), and the primitive form being 2% To assume that the 5 is not euphonic, and B30, B3 (for anY) are the suffixes added to 2%, seems to be excluded 0, on account of the absence of analogy, as 3, ®3y, would have been the m & proper suffixes and the neuter plural w9 zosy and the masculine singular 2.9 o would raise insuperable difficulties hout In ®Az, wdR, ete. there is no euphonic letter, but the pronominal ool suffix @ is immediately joined to the original forms ea, @, etc o In the masculine form 290 (originally, we believe, w$o) the = Mhr and ¢ are euphonic (about the euphonic z¢ see § 119, a, §§ 132. 134. 6] 136, and ¢f. 2% do@ further on in the present paragraph); &)@ Qo, therefore, is u@6+a+56+@o (or @), the ¥o (or o) meaning ‘he’ (sue g 80 §§ 115. 177. 193, under remarks). The feminine form 29 E%° 1S WS + A are + ¢ +%¢, the ¢99¢ meaning *she (see ‘e.\q § 1TT) (¥ o In § 243 R0 might be explained similarly as ©® .+ @4+ %0, but the given expla- N0) nation seems to recommend itself.) 10m In the masculines ©X03v0, BR300, etc. the neuter suffix 3o has been dropped, and o has been joined, by means of the genitive (see § 130), The feminine forms ¢~ n to the original forms &, «Qd, etc. (see § 115) o3ogs. ete. are 9203 58 etc ) o 32 250 e 3 o The neuter plural e. g. of 2930 or %P3, is 29Ty, and this consists of wef+euphonic v+ euphonic ¢ 4 euy) (see § 136, a); the neuter plural ort) e. g. of AR is VAT, ¢ e. A3 (the genitive of i)+ e (see ibid.), § 53 having taken the place of eng) (¢f. evs)) and 33 in §§ 209. 210). [:9) The epicene plural is e. g. %® BTF, 4. €. w4 B+ 4+ »0° and BT, (i é. e. aQ3 (the genitive of =mY)4esvs, the 0L 7= A2 @) ¢ meaning ‘they’ (see e. g. (1,0 § 177). and Thus the pronominal suffixes of the mentioned so-called adjectives in it-dig the ancient and partly in the medieval dialect are 3o, 3y, BV, 8o, WP, a gl V), W), BTE. 1n8f0 In the modern dialect the suffixes are partly the pronouns e§c5§, 0530, the a It ©3P), WY (or BIYNL), WIB, €. g. c%@zgm (5@%+@cso), d\rac%assg, d@%sfl%, C&@zcéa@ (or C?)@Zé@fi%), z&@%;fida; RE9 Ty (Reg 4-u8), ete.; z%%&cio (W83, +9R), ete. (see § 124, 4), the pronouns being added to the othe Gbou short original forms (see § 273); partly the pronominal forms o, egs (=90), B (=0%), W3 (=8T), €. 9. FEPW, ICPRR, ICP WL, FEP O30T, a0 § 277. The so-called adjectives or attributive nouns in Kannada are dist partly ordinary nouns and partly pronominal nouns. The first are represented by their short original forms (§ 273), e. g. VNO; VA, At least some of the forms of the first class mentioned in 1ou § 273 are declined, e. 9. vno?, vRwy, wrond; w3 T, g E, NETD; 300030, 3ReTHRY; ReniFe’; and some of the second class too, for The instance @03, 363203, AR, VY. 1nd; The pronominal nouns are represented by the forms composed of the short original forms and the suffixes 3y, 3y, etc. They are used also (0] Just like ordinary nouns, as will be seen from the following instances:— W —0.08 (NOWag T3¢ SCPACERY 2OBSFFon® (for 20BuSFFones’) sePTes Con &30 w90, he who brings about to make known great things even in an( short ($£°3E230%, 4. e. in a few words, is) wiser than that man. $¢03 o SPBIFRY, to make right. e Io B Fo, a man who causes welfare. Wil BRGo 8RS, & man who utters pleasantness (4. e. pleasing words). zo%z)ecfis T5% good (and) bad. 0030, 2 Brahmana. wc%ofiao%é % D303, si eminent persons who have (or wear) the jaté. &903:0R BOTIN NEIYT., b rising (from a sitting posture) before elders. FCPTo VDT WRBIYI, to make a small thing an extensive one. ¥ BRR 23%&%230330, g e 261 e 1815ts DIV WO T3S N a paramour (is) indeed a man sweeter than jaggory. lura] SODF3 MoYVT® can rustics become persons of (greater) ability than I? hid) Such compounds as 2.8 837, BR,BR0 (§247,d, 11), VBRI, Bor 10) @ (ibid. 8) are, therefore, to be translated literally:—a goodness-food ) (¢.e. a good food), a sweetness-meal (.e. a sweet meal), a largeness-bunch b (é.e. a large bunch), the sweetness-sea (¢.e. the sweet or milk sea); and such as 383 2omo® 0T 3R0030y) werRo (§ 273), a severity- S 10 it-disease (é.e. a severe disease) of the eyes, a greatness-it-desire (¢.e D%}’J‘ All these a great desire), bigness-they-buttocks (¢. e. big buttocks) instances bear the character of karmadharaya compounds, as do also 33 W, the compounds of the three dialects: okl z%@ez:%fl C%J@cs*@ 8, NE’o)fl )%> 22 VW) a littleness-wonder, a greatness-elephant, a bmallness-fishmg hook. 6 In §275 it has been remarked that modern Kannada grammars and the other books adduce and use several ordinary nouns as adjectives, e. g U 09022020000%F, timid 3.0, B, ToB, BT, 33N FRBTF, AL, TIWY n}\), Occasionally a so-called adjective in its neutral form is used as an adverb, e. g 20D, to burn greatly; &0dzmo 232 8o, to be greatly disturbed in thought are f XV. On numerals. 1 278. Numerals are declinable bases, and comprise also appellative ¢ nouns of number and words that express indefinite quantity (§ 90). for Their declension is given in §§ 122. 131 (¢f. § 354, I, 5), their gender 18 indicated in § 102, 8, g, and their figures appear in § 44 he 1, The not compounded cardinal numbers up to ten are:—2mQ Q0B 2, [oREN INPA) 9, 4, @Ofioo 6 50 o) 3 (3, also medlseval) 51 e3e9 oD 1, D€, 8, wfio éo ) 18 (%'a’o also medieyv al) 10. =0 compounded caldmal number consisting of 25 (another form of aodo) and g, or ®3y, (see further on in the present paragraph). 1 | When, up to nineteen, the mentioned cardinal numbers are compounded with a preceding ©So, or ®ID 10. this =32 or =3y takes the forms | 56 or fi-(GG D or B, SO or BAF® (§ 248, 10), except before ?»;50 30 No also mediseval) 11, %) Thus we get w3y (¢f. §215,7,d; BRIR N SR, dcéo (®R,0B, also medlaeval) 12, S0S0REN (5@ w&%) 13, SOTY S e s e o ) 7) The numbers in parenthesis are such as occur, partly as additional forms, in the 0 modern dialect alone, if ‘also medisval’ is not added 32* s 252 e — AV umfl.fi (fiam@%) 14, “a;fiojo% (&’@sojg%; also medieval) 15, TdTED (BB ©9¢9; also medieval) 16, naReess (DR, also mediwval) 17, o oy N ?\imgj (aé&)zi’ (,Oai, also medizval) 18, £38,33y, (B38,3,8,) 19. | From twenty up to twenty-nine the compounds (a kind of gamaka for 1 Al compounds or tatpurushas, § 253, 2, @) have as their first member 0% (§ 248, 2) or xS, which are other forms of »3®s. Thus: vz, WY (S (a3, also mediwval) 20, wmFaRy) (B8x,3R,d) 21, wxnFg,0@ (“a";%dcéo) 22, BTFZY,TIREN (fa";gggdgd@&flg, a*;é@é@‘)» occasionally kffll‘ ?a?.g)_éjfio@&fio) 23, W) BTEA,TOVY, (BHLTIOY, B IYVY, B, So0y) 24, BmFgohy (BPZEN) 25, wnFEth (aXERN) 26 RE) = BIFELN, BARFGLF (B Be) 27, vxFgmy (aF,de0) 28, anF (023 ~J AL BR,32,89, (BT BR,T 35 South-Mahratta also EERCT R 2 e =2 N '&8333 VIO ‘3:?31@5&3&) 29. P £80.0 From thirty up to ninety-nine the compounds have as their first members Vo 500 (§ 248, 3), o0 (¢f. 248, 3, other forms of SoR), ToeF (§ 248, 9), dia 1€ Seo (other forms of ga@o&), 03¢ (§ 248, 5), e0od (other forms of il 16 1 ©03% ), L (§ 248, 6), 989, e3¢ (other forms of es&9), HCIF (§ 248, 7), DC¥, d@ (other forms of DES), HEE (§ 248, 8), > (other forms I0m these of D), and 3e&5¢ (§ 248, 9, about which see further on); their second member is ©3y, or X3y, joined according to the rules of euphony Wl (see '§ 215, 7,a. b). The forms produced are the following:— Sow=3s, ADLS; (593%339) 30, aa%é_og (fie)osj'é_og) 40, @0333539 (BNITZY, also mediaeval) LYV 50, w0, (8LITD, also medieval, ©3ry) 60, DCI L, »CI By N (f(n ( -Hé e moq P 3,) 70, 2833y, (03239, also medieval) 80, 303y, 90, to which the cardinal numbers from one to nine are added in the same way as to 008 | BTFEBY, BT B, € g FRTIRR) 31, RTZR, T8, (FRTBR, D02, 200¢ D 39, 3R BRF By, (BT8R, [y B, S0 Z,EE0 2 3v,, the BP9 8,69 ud) being the genitive, see further on under ZL) 99. 6,00 100 is Zwe9y, to which the other cardinal numbers are suffixed in W N the manner indicated above, e. g. ;SJ@C‘;??»J@;S% 101, 3R&B0Rs 102, SRE3 0 3y, 110, wEI3y3y, 150; but this manner has been generally given vy Q up in the modern dialect, wherein Zwe€3 becomes FpCI=> (the short the 1 genitive of RREQ, § 120, a, 6, instead of FLEII 4 ), e. g. IREID 2 100 101, gRt5» TOVY 104, S»EI59 afi@afi% 141 antos 'a%é—% 120, (i — 253 [US— BREID ToRTEY oY, 134, SWEI 2903;)3 3, 150, 8RC%9 é@dgfi@afi%&égs 3 j 0 R~ (gl 5@5&%@33.@5%339 190. If 3»e9 is preceded by not compounded numbers, these numbers naka for the greatest part appear in another form. The other forms are mber DTS¢ (§ 248, 2), @t (for HTRY), e (§ 248, 3), Fog® (for ZoREN), 78 Do (§ 248, 4), o9 (for azw%), €9 03¢ (fox: @ofigg, § 248, 5), @D (248, s), e eots¢ (for &), HLI (for e, § 248, 1), z.,w%)odo‘ (§ 248, 9), &:a:%o&o ally (for 2055:33339), 6. g. zoéé SRE, one 100, 2 TLIR,E0 (’353‘%&%) 200, é.'fi SORTRCR (BoBRLN, also medixval) 300, 53@\33_5@&“)0 (SouRLN, -Ei sa;i@@r)o) 400, @Oj)v%@\) 500, «CORREN (BIRFLN) 600, :363@&630 A (DCN[RE, also mediseval) 700, @m&fi@@fio 800, aogj\gsojo@ifif}o (?»;3&033 359 SRE) 900, =3y, 8Red 10,00. Observe also e. g. ARRLTD zsa%:fiz'agi 248, fioofi%fifl (for 53&0&"%’293@, Basavapural’_la,) 938y, 360, @Cfio\.@&@sa nhers 2529330, 560. 8,4, The Kannada language has no own special word for 1,000; the ancient ng of dialect uses moAT and oW, the medieval one zAT and zJT, and the modern one z»N3, mox30 and =zpITy. All these terms are corrupted 8,7) Orms from Samskrita :.3555, When not compounded numbers precede it, their these numbers (mostly) change their form in the ancient dialect, wiz. hony %0° (for ua’g)), DTCF, BT (for osdzé.)), 3399 (for SR, see § 248, 3), NEY oo (for DoY), CoIF (for Bwa), (B, only mediaval), ¢ (for CN), o (for SO P 23, 035° (for 20;5%53_%), Dge (for £3y), BRCF oy ch) 98 (for Jwes, § 248, 11). Thus we have, together with the (medizval and) fhi Ci modern forms, the following:—~uega+‘?\>d (see § 215, 7, ¢), (&)sg) pIee)) 08 ¢ one 1000, aesorAg (§ 215, 7, 0), @)6633'%206 (ITRIFIDT, also medieval) 2000, 80039 AT (¢f. § 215, 7, ¢; SoREFNT) 3,000, oo AT (mm&m J{N \: 28) 4,000, ¥oisn AT (8032 mT) 5,000, (smor 28, medizval, SE30F00) g% 6,000, aws%%d (2%0F00) 7,000, @522\;6 (§ 215,71, ¢; E20,mONT) 8,000, u:f%bodsg)?od (uafi%é&e'&aed, also mediaevél) 9,000, 50%0e50AT (aéé_o_oxa&’)d) ol 11 AR9 10,000, (5\@3:353_%:5@;’)6, also mediseval) 90,000, gResorad (§ 215, 7, ¢; 1760 SR FDDT) 100,000. Some instances of the modern dialect regarding the use of the genitive of z»d3 will prove useful:——-&;fi% TOVTR aué% hort 1,0015 %m0 AINTT WS BRESD B3Ry 1,115 BoeeNmaNTmD DTBISP ) 190, €959 BoRTIY LY, 3,234 ; aa%_%dda FoNTTD BB Eo"D aa%_%?@& 42,548, B — e 254 18 € 100,000 is very frequently expressed in Kannada by Samskrita ow, 4 01 e.q. cm&oe)'gj\cj eflo*o% FoVTTo PR, EN 7,05,036, or by its tadbha?& W 0T, 0. g TPVQORT ¢S 3R F,LNEINT nedonst, 4,96,000 songs; ‘o e)%%_;jooo é@fi&é&aa@dde&wéfiéofiofi%fi, 4,90,000 immoveable Sivalingas. each As shown above, the short forms for afi%, TR, [IREN, oY, W30y, e8I, DL, W9y, Ty, (BS,) and FRE are W, wof; BT, oy BB°, w00 ), D[ILF, [T, [P} T, TV 903, BA; geni Rdb eSS, B9, BEIY, HGXF; OB, 0K, VF; IFHE, ITF; ;a (®0), =ow gan (BOTF), T (BT), TOIF, T, abl abhi wo® hefore a vowel gets its vowel lengthened, e. g. %Sfaaig, each, aboy %BR o, each man, as does QD% e. g. = el AN 10, o9t 12, 83363 Siml 14, 69829& 16; 5500 hefore a vowel becomes 3000355, €. g. Zo00%W T, al §0 200080, 6, Foo0dyecss 21 (see § 248, 1. 2. 3). Such compounds do of not occur in the modern dialect. 2 53D 3y, 9, literally means ‘one-ten’, ¢. e. one to ten or one before ten Regarding 305 3, ancient grammars state that 30535 i8 @ plur substitute (3désa) of 2.x3 (Sabdmanidarpana siitra 190; Sabdanusasana sitras 90. 361; Nagavarma sfitra 166, formed in order to distinguish 90 nstg ~ A from 9; see § 248, 9); according to them Zwss¢ probably signifies ‘the N ninth’, and 393,38y, ¢the ninth ten’. But one may think that 3ezs° is another form of 308 or 23, (§ 253, 3, which appears also as 23mF), rem; meaning ¢point’, ‘upper’, first’, ¢prior’, so that sz g,, would signify 0% ‘the upper ten’, or ‘the ten that is foregoing’ (one hundred). A The compounded numbers from 11 to 19, having @3, (B3y,) at their beginning, might be called dvandva compounds (§ 250), as they are oy formed by means of addition, requiring an ‘and’ between; but Késava Voy In those from 20 to 100,000 the 10 terms them dvigu compounds (§ 248, 10). first member of the compounds denotes that the second member is to be added to itself as many times as it (the first member) indicates. This ; 7 too is a sort of addition which in course of time was called multiplication. Késava classes the numerals from 20 to 100,000 also with the dvigu T8 Iyl compounds. dugy The mentioned multiplication is used likewise e. g. in TRTREY 4, T ), 36 (see Bo3 (=T ) 10, o028 6, w03) 3R 10, 23, Tow 3 oW, etc. above); TR, however, in an additional way, means also 7 (245) and WM 11 (5+6), Further when the meaning of ‘or’ 25 O% N is expressed, o30C3»,E9 denotes also 2 or 3, HTRSw 2 or 5, TS0 J hava 4 or 8, & 8¢9 6 or T wg o0 10 or 8 Besides compounds like JIHY 2 B DTBTRY, SR T[ORE, B3 mean also ‘one and one gas ‘two and two ¢three and three ‘ten and ten in a distributive sense )"JJ each one, etc. (§ 306 a; ¢f. § 303, 3) AWy A—( If a number is added to Zwedy, it may be done by means of the 500; genitive in the ancient dialect too, as would appear from Késava’s instance )W )R"b SPL9LY =3y, (110) that forms the compound ZFeeIsx3, (§ 244), gamakasaméasa (§ 253, 2, a); instead of this full form of the genitive its abbreviated form F®»g95n (4. 6. B0EI 4+ ) came into use, as we have seen acl above under [REN The . genitive zpooH o =ZedUges of zDT is ) similarly used; see above under zad3. That the genitive may be used Vo 0’ also when a number is added to =3y (aééo) follows from the instances S do of the modern dialect quoted above:— @5 3 E580530.30 Q% é@ T8 29, 3RTZ.LBRRZZ), 3N ;30 éJa 0B \ o) 30 15 & That cardinal numbers were optionally used in the singular and plural (§ 131) in the ancient dialect appears from the following Sand InStances: — w ) TOWY, OF 2R IO, NY* DTBC3 OF DTBTNNYS ESICN) h 90 3 RPN Or T3 RGNS the fi (3N In connection with nouns of any gender the cardinal numbers 0T remain unchanged, e. g. Zo03 ficacg o0 N€5C§‘, FOOT S[IRNY*; ) yolly OCRY WA: wngx)N_@;)d 303 O aSm“:Jo SReTo, [ DR su B i f DOT 3 0T adnons (¢f § 102,8,9) their Concerning the occasional place of cardinal numbers observe e.g are ORSps @, for one day, (daily, ¢f. § 303, 1, a, foot-note), BRIpILID AL in one day, 3T0® 8#C, & hundred years ) the o he The modes of expressing ‘times’ in the multiplication-table (303 NE S® This N T, ;Sof\?‘{%fi THe ¢57) nowadays are two. The first mode, used in el 100 Mysore, 1s done by puttmg the multiplicand in the nominative and the lflg I multiplier in the locative formed from the short genitive (without the augment €9) by means of & (see e.g. §109,a, 7) for instance 20 NOBHRT OB 2X1= 2 (see Nelr]of< 1N SRR 2XK2= 4 DO SRISISMEM:cN 2>/4:.4—- 8 als0 ed’ e DV zswédca’o 6 7 =42 for 256 The second mode, used in South-Mahratta, is done by giving a final e (4. e. the form of the short genitive instead of e22) to the multiplicand and putting the multiplier in the locative formed by «d or & i.e. 03 BRI+ o, ©04 o, exceptionally in its fuller form of e€IS3, 4. e. ¥E2O4+ YY) For instance: TR wdfiméeee% 13 adéd@n RB) Q)Q& a0~ e WiV el m,rawi, el asae%e% o) £99 & N33 B3 S CEEY origl FOR sylla SRR ‘?35 3 afio.raessdqi e or he STIRE 39H esi &,;5:30593 RANAL) e;mai &afim%' 0 (V1N NN aae%dé’ & E15) @03% IR 393 (tow epice DE moi aa%ég ;53353» aa%é:)s from 039% ejo?% i w%g @o&%m aa%:is’ooh%. It is to be remarked that in South-Mahratta also such forms as mucl §ense BoREI7e 208, oo, SU8, T 99, ORS, SO TOVY, VYOI T[T, % e W03 m%% are used. suhst 2, The ordinal numbers are formed by suffixing esdox tyo the cardinal ()) c/ numbers in the three dialects, e. g. &%fiofio, first, >3RI, second, (uenf there RoReI863y, third, aae)&é’om, TOPALINOD (FOTAHIRCKR), SHLIRY, @050%6@3033, In the modern dialect Swzesc3s, of the noun B[Behw., 5&8&1} 1s frequently used instead of 2;0__&;))(:3030. Instances are:-—ga%a"cfio%&do, S oA Froro, HRM IRFo, BFI TR (VR BoF), SHTY instafir 030 239n. 1ygh termg In the ancient dialect ‘he’, <she’, <it’, <they’, expressed by suffixing Vi @o (4o, €. g. § 115), we (e. 9. § 177), & (e. 9. § 122), wof (e.g. §177), N*‘Ci w9 of (§134), & (§136), e.g. 20%530330, the first man, HTRIWC00, the Ay | second man; ao%a"ojgg;@, the first woman, HS@ESc30ys the second woman, > . Plur SIRCIRNK0%e, T R030%° ; ua‘g‘aéojgcsg, the first thing, etc., HTBIDITY d (1} 1 2OBRO300F, the second persons, =3 Ic3oTF; obdcéiofio%‘éc‘, the second u’\,@ women, FoRCIRCRP o°, £3,3c3P 0°; 8 R, the first things, ete. W hat — 2567 P fimg] In the (medizeval and) modern dialect the pronouns 53, @33, w9 cand SF, 8530 370, @) are used as suffixes, e.g. ToREIVCIT, RIS (A o ;’mo the third man fidfiwfiw\) NQ; SOREIJ 0T SOREIRTS T o) SIREIR T T 50@&930&)@ (s&@&fifi“us‘fi\ro The modern dialect often changes the suffix @303 into ege (ef. ] COIN T o % § 130, ¢, genitive), e. g. Wi ¢ TOR, SJPTUNe T T, OB )N Ty EIRNET, ¢ ij) R‘)Gfiv, 0353\(53 Examining the meaning of @803 we come to the conclusion that the original form was ©g, 4.e. g (of eno §176) and the formative taddhita ~ syllable oJ (§ 243, A, 2), originally meaning ‘a state of having become or being to which e, the sign of the genitive (§ 130), was suffixed 9, The declension, in the singular, of the nouns @3> D, BRBY, YRS, Q80 which express indefinite quantity or are ©=coo New @:)Ffieouéu ongs (to which .o & also belongs, see §§ 90. 266), appears in § 122, See the epicene plmal of the appellative nouns of indefinite quantity derived from them. under No. 4 ©Q8y, that much, so much as that (z933sf) REN this much, so much as this (faojags), uQ3o, so much as this (in an intermediate 5 a8 sense, DIT3F), HVIV how much (—3-03355) occur in the ancient and T, medieval dialect in the medieval one (ChS) BN AR are often substituted for them, as is generally done in the modern one (§122 b, ¢) The substitutional forms @Oju\) SR BEE Oy are also fre- rdinal cofld, quently used in the two last mentioned dialects In the modern one < o, there are likewise &) 6, dvjo e3839; DR, BHedy; D8 The Sabdanu- N sasana introduces (under its sutras 238. 441) efiom faow PONY,, 0J Y 0% 90300, SR, AR, A0 as belonging to the ancient dlalect Some )U& 0o, 1nstances are: — Q3 TIVO so much time as that: DB how A0Y much land: axkyo BHR3 so much time as this BORY, 32 oNnY® SO many terms as those DR, B[R OF OV, Somni%y, how many houses fixing WY, B3, etc., like the cardinal numbers (see No. 2), also suffix 177), 9R03), €. - BABNRY, B3I c)&égfioi) %,3030, and to this (besides ., the any noun) the same pronominal forms and pronouns in the singular and A, plural, e. g CHEReo ) a man of that or such a place, or state, or degree 22380300, a man of this or such a place, or state, or degree wfi" ) QSR Go, a man of this intermediate place, etc DJZI0300, @ man of ec()nd what place, or state, or degree TR oW 25ABR O30 R, 803030 33 258 B R,Z0503), ON,N3TRY: 0353;3 0B%y; wF A0dny or Q%fiedo; SR No 0N and 4, Ancient appellative nouns of number of which a few instances in nar their epicene nominative plural have been given in § 119, are e. g wWFo Oor ZQQJFO one man WWFP® O WDFP*, one womanj; DWFD* Or 'ao,Fc‘ two men or women; 50T OF [0R ?5?%36 three men or women; wor J[OVTS OF T TFEYS four men or women: 09030, 0° five men or women: CTTL, S1X men or women 8 o8 or €I of seven men or women : » 3. 0°; ero mfio o wam o or Noi’)rfio [ RRDFTE; TOADETY: — PP A A % d o 3 SFTF, ;SoJa:,Séo TP TOE, efi“f)oséo DB aics€ (¢f § 272, 2) The medieval dmlect uses e. ¢. wwro, WWFes, and also 2 0 0L H2RONEDS J 2wrof and % 0°; T30 0°; D) ucg 9039, C°%; Q)ou —3 06 w::s LR, 0° (fm 10 202, 8,20, BV oggu’afida or el o) The modern dialect has 220 o ] See also TOs [T 290303y Or 03030, T 3300 DEEEE T Cd T 3 00§ 88 310; 1: 811, remark Frequently the modern dialect, and occasionally also the medieval one, express such appellative nouns of number by adding =08 (or wgEW) persons, to cardinal numbers, e. g. [oREI [0 three persons oY 300, W30 T0Q, (2830, WRTY) (]t Other ancient appellative nouns of number are Fowo T T TOWT', BT, T oot (of D, T (Of To3y), Some men oL, women E‘(pl | of. § 90; § 248, 12, and as to form P[pRZo of in § 273), many or several STV men oOr women In the medieval dialect they are Fewos B30T Q BOTE nd in the modern one u@éd‘ [ADK F TS W LTS BOWTE SISTAIOM BT, In the modern dialect Fo =9 or FoF) BWI DO a“m@ or oy w3t may be used instead of : @‘Sdo ete. Ised | % The ancient appellative nouns of indefinite guantity in their epicen 4 plural, derived from 235, @RI, M), 2V, 2o B (see under No. 3), N \)fs) are 2o, SO many men or women as those, ©Qwgof, sO many men oOr R women as these (0QTF) WD, how many men or women OO D0° (the” = being eupbonic, see § 266), Qvof all men or women, all of which are found also in the medizval dialect with the exception of in the forms of DT 203 (¢f. § 272 under No. 2) Only oo of and He» B, appears in the modern one 259 H The epicene nominative plural of efi;fi% and fafié (see above under No. 8) in the modern dialect is @%do, sO many men or women as those, €S 10 and fa;%m, so many men or women as these. Instead of & oo, how b many persons, 03;3’& o—jo‘% or @@’gj a0 18 used. 01 279. By suffixing 3o to the short form of a cardinal number (§ 278, 1) men words are formed in the ancient dialect that express ‘time’ or ‘times’, e. g. men %W330F, one time or turn, once; =x.30r, two times, twice; SoRSor, ToR3y, . men, aiaoafioé, fiooo&)é, three times, thrice; gaeBé; 29039 b I aoajgbofi’oé 3302)0?330&; [PPF; meANer. For instance 6‘3\)%@6%\@&330? $F9 d:fiofigo, for the letter =35 once the letter 3 is used. A In the medieeval dialect we find 23or, 2»530& (for &,33?) and @ (for 3yF), and in the modern one &”'5%; (See § 212, 1; ¢f. § 306, b.) ) In the ancient dialect there are formed also @e0¢ (from sogt of _;g also Fo5y, see 278, 4), some times, and Zodor (from Boo® of Zoy), many or several times, e. g. FRZVFONIT &9 T30 F &va 55%;53?0 SRMIEAD) £ea§§)de’o’o I N Uv) y FIRIBFT u@;ié%, 28R, I OR0F Boed A3, 4T, o fififi@%o I (See translation in § 258.) N\)j The 3 is one of the taddhita suffixes (§ 243, 4, 19), and only in course of time got the meaning of time or turn. =0 WY In the ancient and mediseval dialect ¢time’ or ¢times’ used to be JJJSJ’ expressed also by Zpes (FeC%) or w90, €. g. W) BRLK, TR RRLYF, pal )\efi Wy W90, 20 2390; in the modern one the terms used are ©33F, 66 0J \ ) 290, 803, Rod, R&F, Y, T, AT, etc., e g. WP BEF, HTRI A3F. )V <7 N 280. To form words expressing ‘fold’ the ancient dialect frequently 0, used s0&, a fold, suffixed to the short forms of cardinal numbers (§ 278, 1), e. g. vz3or®, two-fold, twice as much, ZoRT[ord or JoRZH 1060 (e SoR+B), three-fold, three times as much, Tew,& (4.6 TS + 0.9 S0&), 25053355 (6. e BOIF+TR), VENTR (4. 6. ©E+ 0\, § 215, 7, by, en OF DRDFB, TIADFE. Y A Instances are:— A PSR ¥ WWBR TNV a’da%mm, WTIO R0 FORIB, W | DL, idmé R0 TIY,R, DT B OR od),® drie:3 0BT Pevo || a terrible man of the heroes §3%* 260 of fame on earth (he was): twice as much as Arjuna of eminent valour, thrice 0Jv as much as Bhima, four times as much as Karna, five times as much as Krishnpa. (ar (Cf. § 343, 3.) () e we [IIFR WOR, BReWNR WE SRR, WeFRITBIoNo, WROIHE, | [CN: BRIFR, dAno BY =d ¢ ATIFE QOAST JIR WA BHPS S, 88r0m0 || Nripatunga (was) in & ral liberality on earth surpassing Bali two times, Dadhiéi three times, also Indra, if cor one considers, a hundred times, (and) indeed also Sibi a thousand times. (Cf. § 343, 1.) (M In the medieeval and modern dialect we find BB (for s30F &), 0| ARESSEA (for [opTZor@), in the medieval one FHZFR, SRENFE, abu @9@&35053, and in the modern one 53_39;50@, 5 (=4 To form multiplication numbers in the modern dialect =) and ux &3 807 (§ 278, 8) are frequently used, e.g. 350_3&&& (3032, + ORY), again so J At much as that, 508 =y, again so much as this, or afi&;&’& (2R + o= 2> ‘e B ) @dfi;figj (NTBI+ @z;&‘&), twice as much as that, W@figy four times as much as that; e. g. 308 ]y, ene or raaisé »nw, as broad again, Ly afigda&f);\i& o3, thrice as long (¢f. § 310, 1). (ui XVI. On adverbs. W 281. In § 212 lists of adverbs (particles, avyaya and nipata) have bl been given, and in § 102, 9 their so-called gender has been adverted to. s Késava calls such as are particularly used to modify the action of a verb Exp <kriyaviséshanas’, and gives the instance 3w0 =e&%0, explaining it by é%fioaéflaégcjg OBN DwlGo. In § 277 it has been remarked that some ady adjectives or attributive nouns in their neuter forms are used as adverbs. thaf It remains to be stated that in the ancient, medieval and modern of - dialect adverbs are frequently formed by adding es™, ¢having become’?), e. g. BOTZIDN or ABwerx =N, faultlessly; ;’%dsisah %fia)o sg-@cg\) vert 1) The author thinks that this @A originally was, at least often, @73, ‘so that it becomes or became or is’ (¢f. § 212, remark 2). This, certainly, is the case in our present Sabda- gen NS manidarpana’s W3T 3TN JPRTo, he made (a thing) level (by crushing), and Rgd TN ko NF 300wo, he trampled (a thing) into a mass of small particles, wherein the forms wimsmfi W and *‘si%fi:afi only give the required meaning. Observe also the modern instance THX F E: @B BATRY WHY ?fj?épsafi ’aédz)d %Ja% 23030, in which only ?Czéj;:arfi can give the meaning °% intended, viz. it is proper to keep the books and clothes so that they be (or remain) very the clean. 1t 0 — 261 Pe— hrice 5380, one who loves constantly; ST, =N R 0EP3med, one who shna, cannot speak distinctly; H0man 2eBRoF)R, to distress greatly; ABAS zéga&fi FORE, 3, the trees bear fruit abundantly; fiéoé 28 030RY §55{z§3¢ WBY aéga&fi ,;—J@%og@gfi, our master fosters us very well; »%9330 Z39 TN S B3R, to speak properly; s ), WPIDN SPAR, he beat him soundly; \ e 2s) in fi@%ofis‘af\ 3eNERY, he cried out loudly; desy 3e3,men SBWw L, thou I, if walkest quickly; 2= BBy dogd e wdWza,E, your boy writes (0. correctly; :i)g%j;;afl %3 ¢3¢0, (you) must read distinctly; ofljaefi'g;saf\ sergy, she walked becomingly. Others are $50¢53a3s9n, covertly; Sooa) F@), =5on, chiefly; 313 d5on, exceedingly; mogadeemen, generally; RedHman, o) )3 abundantly; etc From the foot-note of § 166 it appears that in the ancient dialect e9o3ss Y (=9h) and & (=) were once suffixed to nouns of direction, e. g. 3o0%y and oWy, in order to make them adverbs, became Bo0TaF, 0T ] S0 A o3¢, meaning ‘southward, toward the south’, and ToRBIF, TIREIR, J) i ceastward, toward the east’. T Adverbs are expressed in the three dialects also by the instrumental, 6. §. DTFY Do, optionally; I8 8o, xfi@sem;fiu, gladly, willingly; 2¥erido, quickly; eme‘sgxb;g, merrily; SopE3<HT, foolishly; :doguc‘:)g, happily. To express ‘very’, ‘in a high degree’ before adverbs 3, wwJ, WXY, 2o may be used (¢f. § 275), e. 9. ©& BZHTTeN, very far; e 30320TT have =of, in a very formidable manner; w=% TR, BTN, very cruelly; w0 Boedsyen, very nimbly. About the use of repetition of adverbs to ed 10 yerd express ‘very’ see § 307, a. D y Kesava calls adverbs also avyayalingas (§ 90, likewise avyayapadas), §0me adverbial declinable bases, his reason for doing so being the circumstance »mb“ that in a few instances adverbs show case-terminations, as S08 g (genitive odern of 508), ©g,65% (ablative of wg &), me 1) When adverbs are in connection with verbs, they generally precede the ol J verh immediately or the subject and its predicate, undergoing no change of 000168 gender and number, e. g. 3.0 SPRZo; BRENTLIo BeLJo (see § 327); Sabda dRFTo W 0; %% To FodTo; DR WYY o, R WY ¥, R WEII T; Pl zfi;j Ll ar $03, RReRBo, T3, INCABYS, TG, INCRRITV; BSRCOTRPTF O w;éo; 9 = 500 QTFTF BORTT; efi‘e&fie&doo Specos. If something is put between "e'mlfla the subject and predicate, it is to be done so that the adverb stands where fl) yory it clearly modifies the sense of the predicate, as in the following instance: -- P 262 e I 23Pe0TR fiefiiageojocs ¥ T3S, VTG SIE 5%333\}3_963%'66. In a stanza, are however, the position may be sometimes chosen at the convenience of its an al author, as Snu¥ho FTFTY BonenTRy BZOIZF wRYodwo IFeoF more JgeNo, homogeneousness takes place faultlessly everywhere in those ef De1or well-known couples (of vowels, e. g. & ¥). ;fiaz DF0F, ®To0o BNJ suffl TWEho J¥Y Do, instead of the generally known letter = the letter = | may be optionally used. 10D 282. Regarding the adverbs which have been called postpositions by 1nst i us and regarding the adverbs of place and time (§ 212, 2. 3. 6) the following (lt. instances may be given in which they govern the genitive:——a‘oddé:%o 30 ¢ (3083 ©3,ed0), from the tree; 8398, 0° (9, @8 o), to their side; jump TOFRR,B (TooFs 9.9908), like Karna; A0ods, (ndo3y 8, like a hill; knoy 3908, (398 ©a,), like young shoots; RS, like me; w90IE Jper, uadg like Bali; wgrger, in the meaning; 0339, in the tree; »zFY, in him {rom soang=n, like (one’s) words; ewde (w3 o), from the village; 37 | 300, in front of him; 230308 (P03 »), from fear; P3RS, with a prong parrot; JZR,EN, with thee; Z[ocdnye, in the house; JedH¥n, in the infini water; Keoowr T¥A, under a large banyan tree; =F &a;, after him; Telat] owd BREIA, outside the village; eTzZoRess =g, before the palace; { 28030 30¢93, on an elephant; keQBO Fpeer, like the ocean; &I &N, <= VYNT like him; 3@es3035oe3, on the other side of a stream; aéef)ad 5080, round of 1] a ripe fruit; FvzY DOONNE [ooced, some years ago; fléfiéd@;z)fi, with (15 the army; ege9 308508, on account of that; @z Zw®d, with him; Y al 3’;);)303’3 Rona, with the father; ©es33 &)fifg, concerning God; 2369 JR3oF, 6\ except this; SO ®3,J, near me, about me; 2pNeo X T, near the door; that Ton,8 3,0, near a lover; fagsas =00, till to-day; ra%é 3x7T, till to- S0t day; FoF DIRAF 32903, after some days. See § Instances in which some of them govern the dative, are: — z‘bég@ofl g Ingy oo, in front of a bindu; %0a3o0R =&oen, before elder people; &7, ( 6365% w2800 Be3, the country beyond his country; =8=eqas ge3on ap) 2003, 1infront of the theme of the negative; Fog SToRAPR To00%, some years ago; émiaofid% 3o0ed, before bringing forth; menmsp Cf ¢ osRweRIn, on account of washing the feet; zodrndwn,es T, on account / of battle; ORTR 3 exorio, on account of that; sgjr;g-sg_ ®3,3, near the (10 i mountain. fally r— 263 —— i, Instances in which some of them govern the instrumental (. e. ablative), [ it are:— Q08 53060 VDR BRI [oeg wo, & province beyond the province of NLOR an ally; PRWRT #9013, below the waist; w03 SANS from that (time), ho:e more remote than that; esze%o SN from that (time); 3 9o BN, ol before that time; aaafiwgsaqgéb’afi?_rgfi?o ?gfio, behind the noun- and verb- Yl suffixes. See § 352, 4 a. Instances in which one of them is used with the dative of verbal nouns combined with g, (another form of g, the termination of the 5 i instrumental ¢. e. ablative; ¢f. 343, 2), are: — e=F0 WIIRRE,T, [ooE, ‘)g (lit. he of the coming-to it-from before), before he comes. zagy maLN 7 LUV afid%&g 390023, (lit. he of the jumping-to it-from before), before he \ldG, jumps. o3593wR é%?cfid%&a_io w0023, (lit. any one of the having known or hill; hil knowing-to it-from before), before anybody knew or knows. 93383 e, zsadcé)%#_ug 5300023, (lit. he of the not having come or not coming-to it- him from before), as long as he did not or does not come. " Instances in which they are used immediately in connection with nouns, tha pronouns, so-called adjectives, adverbs, inflected forms of the verh, imperatives, the infinitives (§§ 187. 188), past participles (§ 154 seq.), and the so-called il relative participles (§§ 175-186), are: — ace SRR @) ag ;3\@&@@6’ like Indra. vR,3380, up to this time. gl 333, for three days. ZoRFH0E, as far as the sea. 33199, O directions jund of the compass! a3, O Rima! $3w,, grandeur indeed! 5303w, with (is it) an elephant? o 3 zous3e, even that manner. See § 287, 3 regarding numerals. him A\ b) 338, even he. e3¢, even you! e3z803y, even of him. T3¢, Joor that very thing. 23¢30e, what (could) this (be)? 283 odse3dwe, why 990 ] to sorrowful thoughts? Cf. §§ 260. 283. 312. About o, wvo, &V pJ see §§ 284. 285. ¢) %?.fgi), (is it) black? ©9Z, (it is) even white! R®e3¢, difficult o 4 indeed! ev233:3¢, (could it be) proper? o d) one, just so; (or could it be) thus? &enRadse, in this very o JO?,g manner; (or could it be) thus? ws ¢=mone. %%56@0, am not I ruined? & 29D 1.2.5: § 300 3.4, = 5 () ) 2BoNe0REIToNS, could this poverty have befallen you ? Fe¥3, ouib the do you not ask? wz@E°33%, did he behave dishonestly ? @5 Swe, did he fall? BeBdDSwe, did I beat? W T, have you come (in questioning e 264 ———— politely)? Lerud ege, do you go?. YERTIORE TR FeoSwem,, would 3 (one) ask for a tale at the time of churning? =[oRB WO R WY IR 11 01¢ 538,339, does a fool know the firm devotion of wisdom? T&A LpedeR? (bey) BT BHT eLP Moy, should I go to the fold? that remained {ar behind. findin %, come to see! FKecyBwe, shall I say? zeOAR, not fo j) fif)QC% ?.Qg) ®e3, protect, lord ot the universe! Fedn FASND) SRV hear hear Ak N0 O man'! LT gBudenozome, Fwne, O elder sister, give me a drop of 8 lon honey (the & being here used in addressing a female, ¢f. 283) 2oNe, 2® e5ode, O younger sister, come here! he), i (e g) To® (DoWy+w), when (he, she, it) sings or sang, when (they) f Jess sing or sang mo&03y, when (he, she, it) speaks or spoke, when (they) or speak or spoke e (w4 wer), when (he, she, it) eats or ate, when (they) eat or ate SRS wadny, it is not allowed to speak at all Regai Al TRSERBo, when (it) was destroyed BReBR@o, when (he) spoke 10 an wISRRER, directly when (he) came (see § 365) 0 esA\030¢. having indeed k) ®D2,A03s, having even caused to confide dialec become. Qo e, Dot standing (or waiting) at all. SweRz e, not seeing About eve and NNJV at all (about the ees see the end of this paragraph). negat enp see §§ 286. 287, s. “g §) $0030 30LIRenRweRR B, (lit. pearls and pepper corns of the of en having been tbxeaded thus) as if pearls and pepper corns were threaded fie) 20832 T, o) mode (together) (lit. of the having won or of the winning after), alter after having won or after winning T Al (@%%Fwd—{— 80) wWeI e (lit. of the having worshipped-from after), after (he, etc.) had worshipped. % the g EAR W mon, (lit. of the having been or of the being fit thus), as was or is fit (about =R, ¢f. §§ 298, 5; 300, 2). zos 308, (lit. of the Wy having come or of the coming after), atter coming. ooxaezs 3S.ed, after (uant going; of the having seen then), when (he, etc.) saw. fem&h p) n,. (Lt eTaT~ ) 9, (llt “of the having become or of the coming then), when (he, etc.) What became or when (he, etc.) becomes S08% Spees, as if (he, ete.) made or makes HROORO T8YRoo, when (it, etc.) dispersed (see § 365) dre when (he etc.) enters or when (we you they) enter (see § 365) W SooN030Ton s no, till (or so that he, etc.) might give (see § 365) 0 Wh( asw?m e TITSON. WTITIN, when (he, etc.) when (it) is finished g comes or when (we, you, they) come. %é&o BRRS Tt BTEY,R, (ogg , he is likely to be ruined. Sog=300,30=8,, so that (it) enters the mind. A3 A\ 573033 sR=xd, till (he, she, it) obtains or till (we, you, they) obtain L)) P — e 265 ould 33z, till (he, etc.) becomes or till (we, etc.) become B3N WA W ) ; in order to drink ooORIS gpewf, so that (he, etc.) listens or so that <9 { (they) listen NE,3 i, (lit. of the not having found or of the not 1na finding thus), so that (he, etc.) was not found or so that (we, etc.) were B not found. [ReVEZS so that (it) did not or does not pain 92 ®O Eal 259003 wQSE3, at the time that Aja and Hari had not been born ] of 30028, as long as (he, etc.) does not come or (we, etc.) do not come or A ALY as long as (he, etc., we, etc.) did not come en$R 3, if (he, ete.) is (or be), if (we, etc.) are (or be) 903, if (he, etc.) measures (or measure), if (we, etc.) measure,. BedR Rw3Ior, unless (he, ete.) prays (or pray) hey hey | unless (we, etc.) pray SRE Beor, unless (he, etc.) does or makes (or do or make), unless (we, etc.) do or make Cf. §§ 363. 364 a e al Regarding the subjunctive see §§ 287, 5; 314 About the different meanings of the adverbs of question as specified iOke in ancient grammars see Dictionary, and also § 283 Occasionally a euphonic e is used in the mediseval and modern Jeed dialect to suffix the o or & of emphasis, . g. WCPFS, RIS, T 30 S ¢ing In the and IT03S, BRRS, BRARBe (¢f. the o before enp in §§ 285. 286) negative participle of the modern dialect this & appears also as eves® e. 9. RRERRS (4. €. JNTT 4 wd), TRARRSE (4. €. TRRT + VL) The '3 the aled of emphasis in combination with euphonic e may take the form of 3 in modern poetry, e. g. W T O, wBEDBISO (¢f. § 109, b, ¢, instr.; § 362, ter) Y after c). E ) )Gd 283. Some peculiar instances of the modern dialect regarding the use of the adverbial suffixes » and %, added to the interrogative pronouns Qg as z the WRIPNT, GIONRY, odve=sey and the interrogative noun of indefinite giter quantity o)fio (§ 278, 3), are:—x e, what? eh? (used in calling to a female or askmg a female, e. g. HIJe, ¥o9,? 0Re, 3oNe? ¢f. § 282, f); oW et what, eh? i. e. whatsoever (e. g. S, V3¢ BTD); SH3we, what? (used in asking males contemptuously); O! (used in pade addressing males, e. g. DRRe, fl@e&’)é‘?) O what? what could it be? (e. g- IO 365) Wiy z&@cs Be3pe? Zwe? esmas TR o SR S8 ToKRIBA); 0 Wha,t‘? I do not know (e. 9. question: ReCPR FORToNSHE? answer: mfi, DRRe? or question: FHAR Hudwe? answer: HZ0e?); O what? one eft) does not know what? é.e. something one does not know (e. g. Q8we &N 5'\/" R R0; & FToRT TORAINFNR ARWE BREBA FREN DRINC WwRY FToORR ulfld e .—oe)omf\) 34 oo e 266 e | o3sa383we, O what? 4. e. something one does not know, a certain (object, with or without a.,m e.g. o3a30Pe &3, a certain play; o300 2,.;-53 and BeTeOtd); ofisafi&@e RresFwee, O who? 2. e. a certain man, a certam ¢ woman (generally with 2. 8, 2.9, €. ¢. (3ITDRe W2 RIDTBRE 1nfo W Po; see remark under § 292); I o3sodwe, O who? 4.e. a certain person, somebody (with or without Anur 2023V, €. §. B SWoRIRY, 0300Re THY TR R580e ¥, TN, 03D W Bee 200 B3R WRY Reo TREA 00Ry, TR BY); o ddwu QRWe, O how many? how very many! very many! (e. 9. Fog Soon e B3 RPN DRRW,C quee ngy SAREe TN ORW,0 FORRALRY, SRIZ.S BEPBNTH BT, 3 ). mms 30083 @&@e wRTY BT B 3,8); O how stone and much or many! one does not know how much or many (e g. 8 IBEFIN au\ra ¢ D3IB T %?&) 0. TR BRBVTIN TR TONINTY TN IRR,C b and EB'fm emwaafqadoé 3) Concerning questions in general in the same dialect it may be stated \ here that in such questions as vy IR 3R¢, is this thine? vy dFRexd &0 the ¢ may be used. The suffixed 9z may also become JZwe, e. g TOOY; AWy S0 Redwe, did he give four Annas? ?3%?735 o5 Sedwe, did she rise early in the morning? At the same time, in common conversation, the sign of then ‘EMQ)H question is sometimes entirely omitted and the question shown by the tone of the voice, e. g. é@eefi? Rwenoss, R, does he go to the garden? Mags e FPR0Z, T, does he give the (promised) money? ¥ wgoxTv, Will I 9 they come to-morrow? If there is an interrogative in the question, the A question simply is e.g. RBozgn, D3I IR s P& w3 B3, O Hutéa z g what play do you like? See w®zo in § 243, remark regarding 3 I o353, ete. §§ 265. 271 regarding questions in general § 356, 1I, 12 y W 284. Of the conjunctions mentioned in § 21 5, four, viz. €90, Vo 0% ev, e, are postpositions (§ 212, 6) ang- First they serve to unite words, which uniting is called samuélaya dw The way of doing so is called also umuvidhi (4. e. um + vidhi, the u after Spey um being euphonic), ¢the copulative method or rule (¢ § In this respect e9o and evo are suffixed to case-terminations of words C()mp except in' the genitive (see § 351, remark) In the nominative and instrumental evo alone is used; and again eno alone is suffixed to the accusative, in which case it is inserted before the case-termination In oig Jasmy e ] 267 These rules about ¢so Jock the locative o is generally preferred to evo i and evo apply to the ancient and mediseval dialect fain o and eve express ‘and’, the first o or evo being not translated %00 into English Instances regarding the nominative are:—gIoRvo STRI SRv0 MTIF)o hout 200 B®TBmvo, Hari and Hara Arjuna and Abhimanyu and Drona. ) 236w, Boo fimefi doo, Jinéndras and Ganéndras. FeZONFoo 30.3Fe3O r’»%fioc, Kévalis and Srutakévalis. WIS B@vo, that and this TR W Bomy ©8ANTI0 FRE B wRo, a pleasure ground where king and 30 queen are together SOFTO @QS&J B RPLTTN0 PABRG Do, hail how stones and fire-flies showered from the sky 3oe303000 FENRB0, above and below IO 3306@3050\)0 HR03) 530083030053 =8 S0eSodvoe i TOTIBRS Nwo RZFoesome, on the elephants and on the soldiers .0.;; ¢ and on the horses rushed the one elephant of Bhuvanaikarama atel Instances regarding the accusative are: —wld B3R’ TeH,HR HDX AN O350 D3030000, must one tie a large tiger and a brown cow in the same place? ¥ZFoT0Ss® TS0, him and her PODWD0 P % 20=00. fruit and flower BB TIRSS YBRFo=vo, them (the males) and i) 1 of them (the females) Occasionally the first o is omitted, as in ®OJP % WORORITV0 TIWRRNN0 FORIS =peF, like the ocean containing a the mass of water and a mass of pearls den? vill Instances regarding the instrumental are:— O 3ovo '603\)?3;3 oS0 & 2 A%o, he struck with his feet and hands. PODR B[N0 PPN DT Fo0 the o —-:-)) Spe3acso, he worshipped with fruits and flowers Gy ¥3, Instances regarding the dative are:— 3@ etoonio RFMo WO 0¥ 3 1‘) =08, are Drona and you quite equal in the skill of archery? (cf § 521) $0WRIFP BTN 00 ARNC3V0 BBWo, cheating naturally belongs to him o, and you S3onF 90AN0 DAz 30NJo T To TwTo WWF0 PRIV BRy 8RrSy ©dBo, Vikhyatiyasa was born to him and the queen, Aayd superior to all in the world as to family and firmness of character nlter (cf- § 343, 1, D). T é% o ~o~ 3350 RBWRNY, (generally there) is no composition for (¢. e. of) Kannada, and g‘tmskmta words. ()ldb An instance regarding the ablative is:— 2380308, i%a" Bao FeBRWE, and he 33 cdiv0 TR, wRR9, fragrance proceeded from the great-flowered Ja,smme and the screw-pine. In 34* oo 268 e ot ¢ Instances regarding the locative are:—:3oldRP=s Gwodtidwdo TOIF BWYo, in firmness of character, and in good behaviour, and in valour cattl DV ONRF DO BIBNTT S BBRBIF o 3B9BRFo ToBINRZ, 0, in kind| every wise may he give (us) all kinds of riches in all places and every 0 (1 manmner. To Qfi@ (also when case-termination in the locative), 'ae‘) a@ abun The Sabdan u- envo uses to be suffixed as 9o, BYaC0, Yo, must §asana has ¥330%0 and @afi;&@%fio i e0o 1s sometimes omitted in the nominative of the ancient dialect 08 ¢ ] (see §§ 348, 8; 354, 11, ¢ foot-note; 357, 2, d) and in its instrumental or P ablative (see the verse quoted in § 352 a 303 ®ANS etc.); and (ac- and cording to Nudigattu, p. 185) likewise enn in the locative of the modern that ha dialect, e. ¢ OB EIRSO TRASO MIBIV RO VI,RY, 3300 TSNS, Nine (according to the same), at the end of past participles, e. g. 3083 59N B = i SN BePRITR. Wk (¢f. § 286), and in the nominative, when a series the { of nouns is introduced, which last practice appears also in the other two U\ dialects (see § 354, 11, remarks a. b) 1nto 285, ©wo and eno appear, as stated in § 284, only in the ancient W and medigeval dialect = Wi In addition to them the medieval dialect uses ev and enn, €. g. &3 030 née DB BB SRSJe3, when embarrassment and shame were arising med; PURNRYY 330N, they have nothing to eat and to put on TOOD li FHARBIDIR oD BRZVZW, a lender of money and a borrower of mod money. See the close of this paragraph ) In the modern dialect eno alone is generally used. As the two other dialects it does not suffix it to the genitive to the other cases it Dart] ok immediately (sometimes with the application of euphonic elision, § 215) adds it, except to the instrumental and ablative in which it puts a erah euphonic &% between (¢f. the close of § 282, and oz ow in § 286). m\ Instances are: — gas3u5Re @ a§§Ja W8T, 3, Rama and Krishna come. ARVE &)cfié FORIIIIN efié %’J@Cé&fiw;fi@ m c&mfir\ F903033:W, he who Suceg teaches knowledge, and he who glves food, and he who saves from Sang trouble BRENZER W3R R, going and coming BaT I96°ReYN - ! ha,y AR WIS, SVMRINER Tt dRISER Bewy, to walk and jump about Apab at pleasure is the desire of young goats. QRT T %“N@a'}dda that (is) 390 large and powerful BRoR B 0e¥w, day and nlght Ja DN, -v“agse Sanig SN oD DY, 11 that way and in this way the chlldren of Kunti do (I ctmm s 269 k! not get a kingdom. #ZZP, BSRABEZN 3930033, .63 FPIZH 3VR3.3 lour cattle know when they are beaten and know when they are treated ), in kindly. 3900 5£fi# SoeS3a3oR u;floafi Soe3adon 55 2.)) £030 WIS, ery N on (my) parents and relatives my love (is) abundant (i. e. I love them abundantly). — 298 B0eS 2030308, WTTIT[IN, [wd ey, (We) ant must show love and kinduness to others 3wePnSy a%zs fle;ain [ alect nesw, umgoéfiq), wolves use to carry off pigs and dogs. ——weéoam OR B3, o&ofi O c%e;jdéo neaRy, serve God with love and devotxon 66%? al ot Neg oo emadofi%?fi oR wFd W 3y, (there) came people from villages (ac and towns—-&:;&) 2y d%‘\ra e3 beofi&) S%033, between Hindusthidn and dern that island. gsofi @fl@ e.eaSN 30T @ma BRERT SeRABRY, he gave 30,0 Ningappa and his children to eat. S Ao WROR BPeLER TRAW TIP3 W ol TRAR ToRNRY 0% (DT3,3, the attention of dogs is (directed) towards 361168 the face and towalds the words of (their) master. SORNBRPR WTOTH, ' two BREIN BReROBR z;af\e)omfizo &aéosfido doors are put for coming into a house and for going out. —-m‘é&‘)d@ B0 TTaRRT030Q 0300 13e3T cient O, T30, R, God preserves thee i in wa,kmg and deep sleep B8, B0R (=38R,09c3ow) WX 3ok, in the teeth and lips DIFRFRIR® D597, 000 APRYNR wRITToN RF,8 Hmos, 8, they frequently put sugar into 15108 medicines and dishes O] Instances of the conjunction e being exceptionally used also in the ve[ flf modern dialect will be drawn attention to in § 295 286 evo and enp are in a copulative sense suffixed, also to past her participles, the first ¢and’ disappearing in an English translation, e. g og 1t DIDTINWNTF DZBRIINBNRSF VFNB0e 398 o, he is a fish and a 915) crab and all (whateverit may be). 3eomoMi0 IR 030R2 0 TOTIRF V20 ifs & 786) ABIVRTF IR 0 30 DF IR T B39, 3DF IR 0 FBIHF) B WTL)03Ts SRV 535° @—56&0556 DRI BF T BW DRDIERBRGS D TTEIDF 69,T,0, 10 pome who successive order there are eight topics in the Sabdamanidarpana (viz.) from sandhi (literally ¢‘and sandhi a having said’), and nadma (lit. ‘and nama a having said’), land samésa, and taddhita, and adkhyéta, and dhatu and 3 ihou apabhramsa, and avyaya. RoR, 1303 g OWTIT Dononys 93 S0 IWRVo WRD0 OonRS VT 9,0 3% ; (i9) @éo zSda)ché 00 TRRISSF O rfid‘m $300 300F° Uv(c‘) Q Samserta, nomma,l themes ending in consonants become declinable bases (in Kannada) when they receive an e and when they receive an ey i do RN 920 - . with doubling of the final consonant, and, further, when they receive g end-dropping (i. e. when their final is dropped). TFd fi@&fl@)&’)@ad BRI ‘553§Q8§$ IR Cfi?—qmfifi 0BW eueay, the names of the guards of champions follos 1 are savydshtha and dakshinastha. ego 35 D) 3039, thus and further. nega Soziipssafiojoua ’i%aaf\ofio@ TePRoS, Wrd, read so that thou canst be simil; heard in a pure manner and in an intelligible manner. &3 TING 55333) is 80 l .‘ NO30R ToTIWTTINR BTIZ, 3, that paper is thick and rough. e¢xo parti WRE WTTTIN0R 3PRBINBIN B, thou art very little and it stupid. 779903 BLoSIA0R PP BLITINR SRR $e3NIRY aézézos frien S0y, they use to furnish a house with windows on account of air and I on account of light. & acémmeg na%?o&o:’g) TOMNT BRNMC IT, 00 VN oceut o8 meroE RAMY F 0w (in the modern dialect e is suffixed to &, by means of a euphonic ¢f, ¢f. the ¢ of the instrumental and ablative 8. more in § 285 and the of in § 362 after ¢; about 3 see § 198, remark 1) with 0@y don%eay, of these vessels there are two kinds (viz.) vessels that move forwards by wind and vessels that move forwards by steam. o mode 9 oceur B 8 DRINFFY VWG DBA BRLIR TeT WeFF o FoIdh BT 2 dedc REB3HEN faégdé u%ecfige)\@ BeeRdy, some said «it is necessary to (som remove the boy from the village and cast (him) out”, and some «it is Exces good, if one puts him into prison”. a%eas%d%&fi TN ITR riz?afi wOIYN thing o)a&% 08,37, 3, they call a female cat kimi and a male one bavuga. (are) In the ancient dialect this copulative sense holds good also when evo 5\)‘@\ ¢ is added to the infinitive with final » (§ 187, 4), e. 9. ZFSPFFo Xl leve Iift B0 &), 8003aGFo 3REEBEWNTF ¥ zs% BRT TRy BTIF o, when the AW sense of the nominative appears and when the sense of the accusative SIeep appears, the genitive may be used there (instead; see § 352, 1 a. 1 b). e, T, SR BST BoWNTSF woE, 2380300 RNRTIF,A @3 305BoRo KTo, when (in a sentence) they (the three pronouns) are enumerated together Bos | in their order (as &80, deo, o) and when they are (enumerated together) Iemy ad libitum (as Qeo, ©8c, o), the first person follows (them, sce § 355, 11, 1), if the The same meaning obtains also when evo is suffixed to the postposition the W %@, ¢if’, this being at the end of a relative participle, e. g. Jp=FoepF of the D BBRBSE efifiqgosoajsf (STaNol- FaAY @Sefaidfif SRRBo %:éds‘ 2, T if there is a preceding long (letter), and if the word is an avyaya, and ey if it is polysyllabic, there is no doubling (of the final consonant). =& tern —— P 271 Celve RFRFFBRY oBooR DY, RTIS WBABo FwIFowd,0ades =8 ) REFTF® WASF 9553\030:50&50 D03 SRRBo 8 9 © 0N PR %’% 1008 3,8, 3,0, if in the very sense of the negative a personal termination ther, follows the verbal theme, and if es23 which in the past participle expresses it he negation, follows, (the letters) I e o oo & are always doubled. A AN similar way of expression we meet with in the modern dialect when enn il is suffized to 38 (=2, »®) and this stands at the end of a relative and participle, e. g. £020300 BRIV AR [ 0% fieafi%é%d@ ReIT RPN 3%6@ 5@%5&30, dogs are well known as faithful servants and as true “ friends of man. and o It may be remarked here that if eso in the last-mentioned connection occurs but once, it may occasionally be translated ¢furthermore’, cand’, R ative e. . RRLRTS AREBRF DTIRIISF em%?\@a)céo 2)0380 3BIFFHRY, further- tk 1) more if (there) is any mistake in this (Sabdamanidarpana), correct (it) that with friendly disposition. The same takes place sometimes when in the 70 modern dialect eTH (wd+ enp) s added to a relative participle and i) occurs but once, the meaning being ‘and’, <also’, e.g. Ke@Bo3e %’%, WBeRBTR B BRYHEY efié%%, begging (is) affliction indeed; and if \y t()v (somebody) begs, to say “no (I do or can not give you anything” is) an it 18 excessive affliction. SRNIRTR wie Bedy, also I want the very same A thing. @9 IO VTIRTR WPe zosg%zfi@, cotton (and) milk also these (are) of a white colour. & FRAFTPEIN WY T ReENT FI8T uozéz"% o Sey DEPA Somade me3d, 0, also in this district intelligent gardeners piec? lift up the soil at the bottom of mango trees and put seasoning drugs. ) the B8RS, 3 Nvance BoR ¥B, Swedeg, 3, like horses also donkeys at I\ sleep (but) little. (About the general meaning of %w®@o and 3% in the 10) mentioned combination see § 287, 5, b; ¢f. also § 287, 6. 7. 8). 200, Also when in such a case eso is suffixed to ¢z by the insertion of o] 16! o' (Wof42Ro) to the verbal theme, the meaning of ‘and’ seems to ther) 6! remain in force, e. 9. TR FRBSRR0 JeTT YRS (0. T. 3PTTY), and 1,1) if the duck-weed is destroyed (lit. and if the duck-weed a being destroyed), the water becomes clear, though Késava says that ¢Snz@Eo is a substitute ition of the o of satisaptami and means ¢when’ (§§ 187, 4; 188; see § 365). 3 %9, The conjunction ewwsso which KéSava adduces as a suffix with the meaning of the above ©s3%@o, ‘at the time that’, is in fact the personal and termination of the present-future in the neuter singular and evo, ‘and’. Y <UL 272 — Pl This third person neuter singular, as we have seen in § 200, 1, is used as a krillinga or bhavavacana Késava’s instances are the following (see becor A § 365):— 2T TN FORF BORTIBOT POF THR N, WRFD,BRET and OR0, and a saying (i. e. and when he said) ¢tell Vishnu to come (him) who appears and is coming (there) like the Anjanacala!” b%ene w3 up b ot el SReR3P, IpT,0, and the assembly a dispersing (4. e. and when Wi th the assembly dispersed), he began to consider R, OV £33 03RS 10b ad! I50 5D 3woniIBoe, and the female companion a going away FH0 N ) (¢. e. and when the female companion went away) having said ¢remain hut near thy sweatheart” Similar instances are frequently met with in e ancient narration ende 287 If e0, ervo, ev and enn do not join two or more words, they have Inean ¥ the following meanings 1, c‘also’, ‘likewise’, ‘too’, ‘and’, e. 9. VITZT VR, T WOFOD what 8D AnerRws, when Yama all at once tasted also them eDonBwFo 1§ 81 D DRE P o 39 oo all the seven case-terminations RO oRBIINA NON are joined also in the feminine gender in the same manner as in the Zeb 0 ge ) masculine gender Nm 8 IR fi%’e‘)ofide‘) 03220 ~ oY 5,058, N¥ 0 PHANvo, %y also in (originally) neuter terms when they are used as mascuhnes, all §0me the seven case-terminations join (in the same manner as in the masculine gender) 3083 To23 IRR B 339);33 ony 9O sodfism 332,00, rékhé and £ven 2933R0 el raji denote likewise the middle of a row of trees and other things NW'JJ‘ W 0, also he came WRR B3R Sedy, I want that too ARH IBeR e 99 33,33w5¢, are you also fit to go? 38 2RY B J5OLY TR, OP LA OO wind, it is also written therein (in the book) ¢one must not dap transgress the words of one’s parents RdoR$w T 033 3R, T folloy To.R 0205300, if religious teachers too do not fear sin, how shall (their) ang disciples fear it? HTRRSTO IZA fied&dd TP DCBRRBIZON R N VRO S0, if others are not agr eeable to us, we too are not agreeable to others. lept S 5o 2558 mz N0 é% when all without exception laughed, the s fool t0o laughed zsaéo.aoe) CS@‘) oo, also where (there) are mo collective §e= VA nouns. *‘éfiedsfio@ cS@ oi)oo also where (there) is no negatlve sense. (see | g 0, and thus. "353 35° @@6 in this manner and further. N e)zS D3R dtmy oo, thus and further and besides, e. g. 303R, 033 omad fido? efiwm 75998 3edy, and besides whose commands have (we) to obey? Gomyy fio 3% also other, e. 9. BPTTIBIRD TTIFFTY) WRY ALPIR WTT Pady — — 273 used Torl BB T FBR, TOFY PN TR VBT LI 2069, if anything (st becomes too much for one ant, also some other ants join, drag it, etc. N 208w, and still, e. g. 230, SwE®, [o8w, o3, he sold even (his) oxen, (i) and still (there was only) rice gruel. monw, and likewise. faaiodo, also 309 when up to the present time, e. g. 9330 paggcko 3350%%70, he is fighting with them also up to the present time. ©z% ags, wody, they did Wil not come also up to the present time. Sod BRIA 0B BIREY avay THIRABRY, Br3 VR, STAMVC R 2899, I sent him two letters, main but up to the present time indeed no answer was received by me. th 1 B8R, and yet, e. g. BZW, 3%7% oNQo, (they had made various endeavours), and yet he had not become better. Occasionally the have meaning of ‘and’ disappears, and o8w, may be translated °still’, e. g. BT a%g&afl*%% 8, 93N 8RR a?azi’;fi R0 & 3y, he knew still more than )roh) what he said. e300 ud@%& BRR, NePR ATRY NEPR ¥IF3IR, there A6do is still (one) galigé, or two galigés, of time till he comes. QR B, tions RomdUNE) FoFeRANouRING wall Been 3BT, thou hast still to n the get over the ocean of mundane affairs. o333, %, BN Q&%Qfi»@@? Ao, VY, BRR, TOY QUEDY, Are these all the arguments? No, there are still g, all some (or some more). ulie 2, ‘even’, ‘indeed’, e. g. SBRRSTBEY P BWFo ?{’;fidw}\m‘ S, s and even in the two first cases @e* is used (SonBer, etc.). & TR BZ0R L) BHFDF DFOSFE By, even regarding these two compound words (2. e. el Doedc3uesado and %eéojowado, there) is no option (allowed). RoR, )3 Gl F,0 @ Y Twor NTDS* 20BEBRT0 :gd;js‘ 2000 BT JPFAT 3 3 4 not SReTRSF ¥3,0, when even in both, Samskrita and Karnataka, a vowel 5@563 follows, elision takes place regarding the vowels of the case-terminations ;their) and regarding the vowels of uninflected words. & -flewf’s £99,35° 8%, 835° Fic) QOB TS ©3usy), (the throat, the palate, etc., § 33) even these mentioned eight are the places where the letters originate. thers: 2339 89,5357 w3nFo, even nine (letters are) not classified. ©@s Tewyo FPERST ], the [ecti\’e W€ TFo, it (the karma or objective noun) is (first) even of four kinds (see § 346). Bpew ToVyo TOSFE HADTFo TRWeRTon, even four sense' arms appear nicely on V;shr_m. BRF PUDTE DD BOBIRS WTorvFo 39 (a0 fidoofiofisaq#&@?‘, ©o oo, even these two are used in the sense of obey ! conjunction. T B¢ Py, BT & TR0 TRT FROIRF TpWIRBTO, pada, déva, bhattaraka, even these three, are titles of respect at the end b 35 — —n 274 véda of names 2ePRT) (= woRRerRRp, medieval) g B0Rs BT RBoD00 TR IBROFRE, BIT how is it possible to perform together a (hea Whu king’s service and devotion (to a deity), thus even two? OTRITOT &A L3300 tigh TR £, having taken even the two (cadjan leaves). med; 20339, o$oo (= 239,030, medieval) de JRe30T, do not even once look on )] the w1fe of another. F3TF Do sfiozc 0% ToTANTS 2»;30 0300 RREORI ;7oR, the oath of even at once defeatmg contloversmhsts who show Nt (their) enmity by sophistry. D3P, IV, F03R, Mo, he sold even 23) z&'éaaflefirfim 3@9% dire (his) oxen, and still (there was only) rice gruel. RRRNRAT FIF Too VFPFNF) ToO,T R ?»3@ BRI, caturva”ga is the D 3 one name for moksha, dharma, ka,ma, and artha even (these) four. BPEORIIPA 2OFITV03eDFToo, Bala (and) Nariyana, even both MW SFdoo 3%,0°, if (one) compares (them), even both (are) good men even to both of them awa) esubzo oW, even both of them. &,asmo ONw, the Qe dJa even both of you. 2»3@ 33 GRISIAN dJa even both of us. ) N, ) 5{ mm%m 3pedny BFBR.EN ,\;m;smm sometimes it happens tha,t DY even men get into the power of wolves SBnw, to the very end. with %Jas@'a@ B3 %Jazé&’@fin do&) o3omy, if (ome) praises and solicits o B (them), they do not give even one ruvvi. 730309 e%?moao aofin 2Y, fran] (there) is not even one thing that God does not know. (oam ;Sowo&ra%fifi let ¢ BRI, $08 @9 wRIH VR Y, I entered the house, but (there) was all g not even one person 1n31de §&’) Wy d@ W §Ja maaazé@e) not even 3P} one of us two spoke Cnf3 3, the meaning of a peculiar emphasis namely emphasis to express Vinfa that the whole of a definite number of things which either naturally belong WAy together or are considered to belong together, is understood, e. g. ®= oni% 8o, both arms, the two arms (that a person has; if we say BF, 0N il SWeg Sa@v, it means ¢ two arms’, ‘two of the arms’, for instance of Caturbhuja DTRIO %9@&;6 both Came or Vlshnu who is considered to have four arms). eyes, the two eyes (that a man or animal has; if we say @dzég T B, toget it means ‘two eyes’, for instance of Caturnana or Brahma who is ghee 8, considered to have eight eyes). ®@n$czIS0 8% B&Ry, having cut off the two feet (he had). ®3 gk 38WazRvo Jewarny®, when (he) cut off Mo the tenth head (of Dagasira or Ravana, who is considered to have had g ten heads) ENTaRIBRBo RO 3D TRy 3003 o, 1 shall utter Wy instances of them (of tadbhavas and their compounds) with regard to PAY SOREN Sedonwoo, the three the two forms (Samskrita and Kannada) afr, al macsa — 275 33 SoR0 Bwedone?, the three worlds védas (omitting the atharva véda) ler a (heaven, earth and the lower region) e&58900 To3uonys, the six seasons BA (which Hindus accept) D00, BANSSE %0300y, the guardians for the Wiy eight cardinal points of the compass TR TF (for JTBW TS, 0k on medizeval), the two hands (he had) 8 BRONRY, NTBER I & @!\JN 0359 B> TR, having firmly seized the branch with both (his) hands show DTBR 39, 39, bring the two oxen (which are in the shed, etc OB gve 230, 1¥RY, 39 would mean. <bring two oxen’) So0W, B, the four Wi directions (north, south, east, west) or the four sides (of a thing) 5 the Do), TRNW, to or on the four sides (of a country, etc.) four J 3’)3 4, ‘together’, ‘without exception’, ¢in concert’, e.g. V303 30300 PSoFwo AREBRWEe, how much soever, Dharmaja gave (it) altogether el away (¢f. § 321) FRD.OANTY ©30300 38 BeLN tell to bring all them the boilers without exception. Foz, \38 wa33RIoNF® S0 IZTFST® AR 3 raf 3?303\);503 o3 ) having chosen Sarmskrita abstract verbal nouns (e. g ha end yes, o, pen) and having added even the suffix «=s to all (of them) without exception PP RANYY 823y (for 2300, medieval) R $30 olicits 101 2BNSRRESE, when the Gaula religious mendicants put away all the ‘\’\\), frankincense without exception WAWTIFT® TN TNMIT0 PV BIRG ol let us altogether in union attack Phalguna! QESJWTI0 TECAFHTY, as all of you without exception tell! R3BTRINYIWTITo0 T2 RV ) WWFR gven TogFo, Arjuna overcame alone all the gathered kings w.e. in fight. BRFo FOBFo WPETFo ARR Bo INJB00 RSN IR, furthermore xpress YRFo JOBFOo 3PERF o all these w. e. have a long penultimate AR helong WBYo ey, all you here w. e. O, Frodoo, to all (of the abstract verbal 7 offé nouns) without exception. fiefioéow R, ID oy, all honey w.e. is NOf} sweet 09530 950&@ e, all that w. e. is wanted. ©RdH w3, they phu) came all w. e. efideaqsfif DO B0 FVRDWBIN Jo, till the whole forest hoth together became level with the ground BRRTY DRTUIBI &3P, 241 ?6’ ghee, curds, and all the other things (made of milk) w. e DU RERIN0 ho 18 O Too P 38%03)3y, a moving forward of the whole army together gt of oot all of them w.e. went DO BoRF & THFIJ, Beo NN, are all Jut Ofi w. e. liberal persons like that Karna? DO TR To0EFe) TRV BREE3.2e 0 jad 8o 03593, if all w. e. sit in a palanquin, who will be the bearers? 3 att er © 0%, all of you w. e. ""@33% WoRTTTY DY Onw ©022039,3, Who are not i e afrald of sin (2. e. to commlt sin) are afrald of all persons w.e. e335¢ 35% —— 276 — i r{éfig 1) %@& aézzi s AP s, health indeed (is) happiness that exceeds all the W. e o FRNFY B, on all sides w. e. bt 9, ‘though’, ‘although’ (§ 314), when they are suffixed a, to past participles, e. g. @55§%®§S%Ofi?€ @esazéfi*fiss BN0300 13y wRIY SReTIW oNte PYTIRTBToriwaNc3o SYoRTo, though the terms 93556, %@% are feminine nouns (and) the terms =g, Swew are masculine £0 8 nouns, (they are used as) neuters. T9To Je¥R . . . @,3‘5@5%98_ 8 03000 fen FoFeny® 3033, though Z9Fo, JevnR . . . have arisen of the letter & (= they are terms with the o% (§§ 15, 229). 33;3@71;935%) SRTVD DePERF wha sNodwo 3POTS &3y, though the initial of the term Fvzwrres med o is long, ¢slackness’ occurs (§ 240, 1). 1300 T30 0 BRQ,e0° FoR RBT, though hot water gets however so hot, a house does not take fire (on who account of it). STo WALy o CS@CS%OSQJO %930, although the king leas T\ol = D followed and the female messenger pursued, he did not come. “v”?,&ig =S¢ WCIACN (=WEIARW0, medisval) F9ee73, not seeing the tuck, though he sought (it). 30¢33Y wIAerDV OB 23T APaynsh ABR VLT TR Wi =0, if (there) is no health in the body, though (there) are other comforts, D) it is in fact so as if they did not exist. 1 ¢ b, to relative past participles in connection with 2., @@ and esd, Al e. g. ¥8, $Fpeos osfigvbdcéoasoaff W ADIE) flew%%cso PYNTT BRERIS* B, though the very two (words) =3 (and) v;fipeef are uttered together, degt (there) is not the fault of tautology. PITT A0VEIBRBo WeDZR P U S90) FBR o BRRIW, though (one) repeatedly drops (or drop) ear honey (thereon), could the fibres in the neem become sweet at last? & FRBVID,BRVBRY (=333, B3RB R, medieval) ABRRRBTRBY BT at | oS0, though (he) gives (or gave) riches and eats (or ate) together (with hog you). FITNRAR SR WRTIEOWRN (=wx33dow, medieval) %Jao&%%j&ée fart 33933, though the middle of a saw is weak, does it not cut a tree? F9N TReNSod FINGEBR onaY ed3DdysSe, though the crow is like the Jas cuckoo, is there no difference in (their) sound? fisjoé}s’gi‘&iomfiéds OIS oy DE B8R B3eSB0 FRYRy, ITENOR BweRsd $on, s, though men do not e see us, God sees us always. HDemo 39BITOBTH SR 22)3,33@5@, though am he knows the védas, does pain leave him? 0= S3WeEB03PETR JED the T, 3@%*030&%8 Speslal] “3«%638, though it is (or be) a Brahmana’s face, 3 does it not stink, if it is not washed with water. eoozcH ;joz,z R, T an JO— e—— 277 5 all $oRTH ey, though diluted, (it is) buttermilk, though stupid, (it is) the mother RO R TH T VRO though the corpse is burned debts are not burned At VN /] Regarding the meaning of ‘furthermore’, ‘and’, ¢also’ which ©o, 0o, ¥\d Erms may have in the same combination, see § 286 6, ‘at least’, ‘at any rate’ in combination with 2.3, &z and 3 added il 106 to a relative past participle, e. 9. 2Ry 3898 SonweBeRo Bewy, (of the ) ~Febraworsielonts s ten kinds of sons) at least a son of one kind is required I d’ ol t] (= 8083w, medieval) Feoo i3 oo PBewy, at least us (you) must tell o what you have seen (i. e. the truth) BIYBBRY (=D TYBRRIR &) neet medi@val) 0@ o, hence at any rate give up (your) obstinacy am ¢ 239303 8 BRTTOROR BeeB30.S, it is as if (somebody) said to one ) (on who does not know a & (the first letters of the alphabet), «repeat at ki ng least the Amarakosa” (as you certainly know still more) e TIRTR ik bV TyBo3oR@y Wert, B3, thou at least be merciful quickly, O Hari! h he 7, ‘even’, ‘so much as’, ‘as was not to be expected’ in connection with i wes, @i, @B suffixed to a relative past participle, e. g. w= F3§o 20003 0rts, APuR? TRIDMIBEY (= 8RR, medizeval) 3¢, RIFNY, is it not enough‘ if one utters «Basava”? even a beast will (thereby) obtain devotion. 0, FINONVARIFTS BOFINA THOS Nazjsafls SNAGY WRRRES BeSonaldR 3 o) @o, it is impossible in the world to remove by scorn what is called pre- fher, destination, even for a king (or a god). e:\@zur’x%fi TN WTIRTR RO W O¢SONT 9, 83N em?‘.iOSJaefi% B3, 53, hke plants even they (stones, STTIRTR 10p) earth, water etc.) are useful in various ways to living beings. BNTR. 0300 TODINER TRZY TR BRCIIBORY, wodd Wesorod, 30 even a5t ! ) at that time, just as nowadays, it was necessary to cross the river 1n a with boat VIR JRIN WY TIFIRTN FRROw, he did not give me even one farthing (see remark under No. s) v 8, ‘whether—or’ in combination with ¢, »@, 3 suffixed to a relative i o past participle, e. g. & wé%’dofie?@%?g obdzgdzs 2 =a F3h e,;f IR0 SPWEI o s BRF BBRFREo 96@65063@%;5 '853@?—"550 fiaflwrméofloo 2BnRYo, those pob ten letters (© & a2 3 oo ene 3 B8R % &3’ 7)), whether they two by two mgh among themselves are in regular order or out of the usual order, bear the sign of the same class (§ 21). wen T QHORY A TH =0, zfir%ai@ ¢0 'aCS S RO, (it is) the same whether a useless man is in a town or in 30Es A an army. T, FRINI B8R WROR B3P 3D wae, whether - 278 e (one) eats sugar-cane from the top or eats (it) from the bottom, (its) ) nea sweetness is the very same. S»RoZmeRcR K00dse, VRVSTITEH I3, mal (it will) be right whether you do it or let it alone (Hodson). Cf. § 319. e | Remark. It seems to be a grammatical anomaly, if e3EBRBWo, 3WHo, BSWEDY, e353%30, €3:309, literally ‘a having become or a being if and’, are combined of ¢ with the accusative; but there are sentences like the following:— TOBIJIM 3 THFIFNO FSWY W FRB I 3n° ¥RHR0, (one) has to give whatsover to a ver) woman whom (one) respects deceitlessly (Sabdamanidarpana Mdb. Ms.), S3° ot UEBo T 0T, (he) taking not even a haga (from the devotees; in a Sisana of about A. D.1200). OIFBRN (= HITRBR) 3N, TRRIZI, B¢, hereafter varl we shall give (thee) whatsoever; pray! (Basavapurina). ~33° ©o@ #3380, ww? givi 3, IRV wRe@Zo 37 IR IIJVY, except always upon me, he does Y not think even upon (my) high rank (Bp.). RERSEESL AL pRarel ?Soéd% VR BB, Nofy I must burn up even Poona (South-Mahratta schoolbook). RPN Sed;madddxa ] YoeeFTY W% LBAY, I have not read either Véda or Purina (Hodson’s Grammar; 0 about either—or see § 292. 317). (A similar seeming anomaly is found in the use of ®2, §300, 1, remark b, in that of ¥71O, § 317, and in that of ®0 ¥, § 338 Gan under ©9 %), In No. 7 of the present paragraph there is, however, the instance ®=35 33 23 TIWWOR FHBOY, he did not give me even one farthing, and a similar “whe 80 f¢ instance is;__mo@ 3¢ HIPON 3393 @fiei 033973 H B¢SB0 IIN RV JROFR ¢330, FunEe, SENEIR, ATV 033N %Jaé,jdagpa", though at times the desire arises to eat whatsoever, God has abundantly given me roots and fruits and leaves of of t} the jungle. The first instance no doubt requires the accusative, which may be stud TR or TR (see § 122, ¢); the second instance one might translate ‘though at instg times the desire arises to eat — whatsoever it may —, God ete., the ¢ whatsoever it may be’ being not governed by ‘to eat’, but being an insertion standing by itself. beco But ©39%0% may be, and most probably is, 9% or ®F (accusative, see § 125, ¢) + v, 10n¢ One is, therefore, constrained to think that when ¥8»%o, ete. are preceded PR by an accusative, they have lost their original meaning and become mere adverbs. ente e W 288. When in the modern dialect esr3,, then, receives the suffix enn and oWy is added to a relative past participle, it gets the meaning of ¢though’, Whoy “although’, e. ¢. mfi%&z}do é;fioé SRWVTIVY aéz?i Efioaa% 0308, IPARFD Wony Ry & BRES Bty though they one by one put their knee to %@g (the bundle of sticks) and with (all their) strength made effort, that lot bundle did not break. =23 5'35303\)(2 déc{;)csgfifié fi&’)safi@& S\ pleXs) Seey PRSS e 279 ( 9 Bwerdy, though there be a pearl in the hood of the cobra, nobody goes c&e near TOTODTD NRe FANNRNT ey, though the sectarian (Vaishnava) 319 mark be (put to the forehead), faithfulness is necessary (¢.e. is not to be put away by the bearer) ¢f. § 314 o), 289 If eszsori@, and eszsoe are used by themselves at the beginning hined of a sentence, they mean ‘however’, ‘but’, ‘notwithstandin yet’, e. g AW fo a PFY T3y, BuRY, YT, WY edcmefié@ the milk of cows is little, but very Wholesome aflowasiqsiio 38300 mdffl%fié@ %53 fi#fio SRR WY [, iy Sand BRTR WIYNPNR VeSTLCNRY, HOT 3 R 33,0800 efl&i‘éme) man can make 3 after various things and (draw various) pictures, but he has not the power of ul giving them life. BIT BRNT, [eRed DIV 5&:% % fifio fam;'s’ does SRR VI[) WY ?»%3 0%03RY, he is three or fou1 years younwer than I, A notwithstanding he is very good. & RNBINRY & QTR TTVIOZ. BoN I i) A d d mar; FORNSY, BTN, SBCR VIIN BIN, V 303y, W AIJNTRY & ROTF, WIISDY that boy is learning ¥nglish these two years, yet he n the 3 cannot pronounce v and w well Cf. §§ 296. 314 38 ) 388 290. 90, evo, ew and ev, when suffixed to the interrogatives ¢ who ¢what ‘where ‘whither’, ¢<when’, <how express ‘soever’, and are used milar il so to say to form also indefinite pronouns (see § 102, 8, b, remark) The translation into English of such pronouns, etc. in the instances 11868 768 of of this paragraph and the next four paragraphs is quite literal, but the The ay be student will be able to turn it into proper English for himself 1gh o instances of this paragraph are:— ever WRDODTS WoR? TSRS SRBATE WR[ITIRF B have you ogb become poor, O king? you walk on foot, whosoever is not with you (¢. e o, 560 none is with you) $B0R00 PRSF oS TEdTIRSS aRIBT, Bwers SRR IS B,FRIISF AQRony, if it does not allow whomsoever to Iceded orhs enter and is fit to be the gyneceum, that garden is called pramadavana PR3uBRe BNF3® wHTo, (he is) superior to whomsoever in the world BRTR B G YWOR NRRT Isevode $ws, 03 for a village in which ; and whosoever is not (4. e. nobody is), the washermen’s Malé is the respectable 3ugh ) woman. "adfio aTR ©?030TY, whosoever does not know this. AL, BREHBOSPPR 035930 Elap 37 o35esH BY, who is in the room? (there) is 66 t0 not whosoever (i. e. none at all). mm 03a3RR, RRBROY, I have not that seen whomsoever (¢. e. I have seen nobody). ofiabfla %océo 20308 e RS 280 g ¢ 3020, do not entertain malice against whomsoever. afi@fiéeé T, BYTA 03080 BRERIERVITOJ® B9 BPRBDY, O king, your queen has commltted (ar here no fault whatsoever D) efi@ 33380, one who does not know 10t whatsoever BFAR ©ReI ORVT, VR "W o, he has no knowledge 5 BRBOIW VR TulE o, this umbrella is whatsoever regarding that pas of no use whatsoever WBIR B BRI DR NIV in his health ad there is to-day no improvement whatever TRR) B BRI V36 a2 ! SR o the child will not eat whatsoever to-day NPT, T SV 0| Fo0 5933w, e, pickles absent at dinner are not good for whatso- ever. Red 8 NANSRIR ARy ded Po wHBY [y, WTIp BY, 0 among frult—trees there are none whatsoever which bear fruits so qulckly eve wh (as plantain trees) VIR B RR WSETR, ®ex, he who has nothing whatsoever, does not feel aversion to whatsoever o DRZ00 TG 0 WD FoR RodRy, though hot water gets hot how whe much soever, a house does not take fire (on account of it) TR B8 §0e DRV 0 WD S &9 0. there is no disaster in what manner soever to a poet FoMC 3P0 30, we have not seen whensoever such a wonderful thing IR DR RO3T 3B, & plece of land that is not cultivated at what time pat soever ARR VIB T3 TomBe DRy [T N P, a horseman 00 who did not mount (a horse) at what time soever, mounted the horse in a reversed way D NP X ToNRE FTE DI waTRy, one must not 1 T — transgress the word of (one’s) parents at what time soever 330 RO ¢ % yo o 8, a piece of land that is not cultivated at what time soever tan e San$oe. whensoever ;’)c?)o 393 Bon=R 383, fis'a IIN, F,PZN, 0VSD (he) NOPd RN e maDsgy. a fema,le who has 1earned science, will at what $66s time soever make her hushand and children happy 230D SRR, 05T g0 T NP B.ORSNR 90300 Row &egs3e, a miser’s mind is whensoever base e 533 598 wde3d® . howsoever on the feast there will be no school for five NN days SZIRTFE (4. 6. oRF+ov medieval + wIFd) 20 W SNTE Says 000N TOORY AESONRS HVE,BDEY %asaqgom‘@ QQRoNY, whatsoever a ARY female is somewhat old and has put on a cloth dyed with red ochre, 1 ) 096 O30SF B C30TF DO WBWo =J0, there and here called katyayani foll()“ (and) wheresoever (is) Arjuna ST 0300 (=9 oo, medieval) Jeo & it does not stand wheresoever AR, DOV RIZ T8 I R, Torw B 2331w @@ 030 %fie’ae‘)@ wheresoever I have not seen such a bea,umful bird as “thee up to this very time. NS @O?)JQS%‘ AR AT 281 n ] 7 88 208 30 FOIFTE AR, PITFF, with lifted hands he attacked, there fed (and) here (and) in the intermediate places wheresoever the enemies 10V not waiting approached. Ige 291. ‘Soever’ is likewise expressed by suffixing w0 and enm to the a18 past relative participle ez (of &riy) combined with 2z and &3, and alt adding the thus obtained forms »3n@o and ©x€cw to interrogatives, 8 Y e. 9. So0R B0, whosoever. DR, BR&Eo, in what manner soever. o1 b oS39lw@o, howsoever. SONIBOR TPSFTFSIF WEE, actions done in a 18 former state of existence do not leave whomsoever (Dasapada). 035909 av, %0, whosoever. 0359 Oner SR, to whomsoever. 09T IIWTW, Whoso- ever, whichsoever. CM‘; 0N Han0w, whatsoever, whichsoever. SSIplateNsH hing whatsoever. DT BIR, however so much. DT BTN, whensoever. o3 nazcw, up to what time soever, at what time soever. o&a;:afie:acfid@b, whensoever. how B TORTH, howsoever. 29 0XPROW, VU TBW, Where- soever. 20 QYNOBTH, whithersoever. Qogo‘)a%csd\@, whencesoever, DR/ B398,70050W, whatsoever, or to whatsoever, extent. o352 0e300ER BB, )Sg 0 in whatsoever manner. ing. fime The same meaning is obtained also by adding any past relative mal participle combined with e3 and enn (7. e. ©Tw), % and o (i. €. %B0), e 1 o and eo (4. e w@o), »@ and ew or ey (4. e. vrR or &), to 100 interrogatives, e. g. To%® TIRINF WRY 3¢33,39N WRITY, VR SRBROR o %03‘9\ ?\)fi})\ $0Y, jungle dogs run very fast; whatsoever one does, they S99 Yol cannot be caught. @x.&. SRBTTR 3% Sonte WRGY, how much soever o (he) does, loss will never fail. N9 JPCRRTH TRy, wheresoever one phat sees, (is) a wilderness. 0, RVRETTR F39,3% DBE, whithersoever (he) 99 goes, death does not leave (him), &3 IPBZTH =R 666030330%3515@,\ W&, whatsoever (they) may do, (their) son does not leave to say ¢<Hari’. ) five F° 0332)553 (mediceval) @fi%fi&%o DB 3605\2;3 Q028 oo, whatsoever one says (and) however so much, a vile man does not give up his ways. )T o DI, BWBRTBo, howsoever one reads.? ]! ) g, b 1) Instances in which the conjunction ®o is not suffixed in such a case, occur in the following verse of the Jaimini Bhéirata (16, 43):— here ESi Yot DO BJeeBBRE Nome ) TOLTE, 0O JRBNA Y59 3, J0z0ddeBonvE, )% PO BpeARAB JAVRERY, TP 03T FIRIFOTRVNP, | ;flfi 2O JeeannRd 33?&%@:0&.@6%&7&&:‘, ch P BeeRBAT A TTS wR [YNRTITS, ,/..e NG BRABAR ToROT TITRISUINTE IRT[wIFSS 78 || 36 ES—— 282 P Also if evo is suffixed to the infinitive with o and this form is added afo to an interrogative, the meaning of ‘soever’ is produced, e.g. BRBRP* ‘508 % Sonle® &35y 8030, when whatsoever vowels stand in front bW 292. Another way of expressing ¢soever is to suffix esZoo or esge ab 5 to interrogatives This suffix is composed of e3x (see § 176) and evo will ATV v 90 (=%vo), and literally means ‘having become though’, <though having become E. g. 809500, whosoever QTORvo, Whatsoever DTIR 9P 00 25930, whatsoever a state QTR (= VJOR20 medieval), whatsoever N DT, 800, howsoever S 239, 300, in what place soever, occasionally stan 8o, whensoever. @@O&Samo wheresoever. $Jwony, Whatsoever, e. g. §eN8 SYRRT P o 3@@)7‘0@5& the removal from whatsoever a thing; &5 will z:;a;&ram mdd 30ee3, on whatsoever a (piece of) wood. @379, whosoever, fo d i, efismaa‘iraao 89, whosoever a man. aboy When e300, @330 are not suffixed to interrogatives, they signify <a little’, ‘moderate e. . BRAFIRV0 VeNBRGs in this much little or moderate haste; —or ¢a certain’, e. g. 225980, & certain one, in 2259, 3W ¢ J WY, & certain one man (¢.e. some one man, some man); 223 afi@z&%fio a certain woman; 2259 R0, W%, ORRy, a certain husbandman; g i a certain one (neuter), in wFd RPRTY [ePoY, at a certain one time Y (4. e. at some time or other); —in repetition ¢either—or’ (¢f. § 317), e. g Bflt [ SoRBoUIRV0 WBNwIR0, either east or north »E 03TIRITF B IRV0, AN i either there or here; 939 0= BT oo, either then or now; Fd FIs* %, 20TORVe, either one or two; T39,800 SREI=9RVo, either ten or hundred;— <about’ in DT, Efie% (59, Sk E 2) about eight. also ] Remark wGQ ‘ In the modern dialect ‘a certain’ is expressed also by the interrogative suffix 0553 % (see § 283), e. g. @F 0dOTRBe W, VLI B3 8, she (is) the wife of a certain boatman 0 (f. also § 310, 2 at the end o i | 9 293. The e300 of § 292 appears also as esedo, ¢. €. o (for e23)4 o and this esesc again appears with a short e (see § 176) as eg90, 2. € of ‘b| weo (for o) 4o es£90, Beo0 mean ‘soever’, ‘whatsoever’, elliptically gwm for HT00, VMo, €. . NS $HSF Bw, (there) is no merit whatso- APpe: O303S° ever. ToO3F S YNDS BY, (there) is no business whatsoever dng VEdo IIQY, (there) is no doubt whatsoever, C(]mm RO 283 ———— lded 294 If the interrogatives 33, 035953, R, etc. are connected with oYt a following noun, eno, ene are suffixed to this noun in order to express 300238 S[oeS ‘goever’, e. g. &3 d#ofio@ofiago in whatsoever direction. oI T IR, TP Y, (there) is not whatsoever book (s. e. there is no book SO at all) on the ta,ble R0 O35 @daéséofio;dfl R& & zfieeafi@% v, you JU% will not have to suffer whatsoever distress. é%e&%odmdo o:&:a—s T Vg pSENO) mmm foolish boys are not good for whatsoever business RN A= 3 Q o9 O %ad&m VR VY, not in whatsoever manner (¢.e. 1n no way) Vel @m afisaé TR T%’ to whatsoever extent Also if the genitive o388 (%3) o stands before a noun, ew (¥vo) I8 suffixed to this noun in the same 6.4 sense, e g. AR, 0B 03593 TollPp Xenicy, annoyance of whomsoever s % will not come upon you BB SIREITHY GHT - DRATRE: WTS g 3 er to do this will not suit the mind of whomsoever (About o see § 298 about we § 300) ‘@ | If 90 is used instead of o393, the enn is commonly suffixed to Do g e. g. & BRRWW VIR FoRg o, this umbrella is of no use whatsoever 1) BRE ®3.0 DN B0 o, (there) was no money whatsoever about him ;j RN DIN NTR, D SPRO 90 VEW 3. SRBOY. JLRCIH VTTIGP ,'ij il [PES DReTH Ro3030 NeFDe & IBRINFO VIR BREROW 6.f But on the other hand there is e.g. ¥30,0AC0TY BReRS[eI[ow® BY SRRV your queen has committed here no fault whatsoever )filo A aGE, RodoSesw o, about this there is no doubt whatsoever .- 295 In § 285 it has been stated that besides in the medizval dialect also in the modern one erv is used instead of enn Thus we find e. g. J» 30y (for DFeBTR), cloTaRy (for 3PTaRTR), JaaEdy (for oFy Boe), ® suffix ®5907aRTy (for c3390maRTR), IT[HIRTY (for ISTIRTR), T & )rtalll B8 (for QmDRIW), O WRWPHH (for IO WPEIW) wsesseriey (for o3 Tonow), 0wesmEandesy (for cwesnmerte wiy), Ry, (for HEw BY) 296 In § 289 e5w8P (i- . BB+ &34 ow) appears in the meaning L90 of <but’. It may get also that of ‘also’, e. 9. Fo, Jwed IPd JRERTT 1 b DIMITTR anoe 3weeedy, if (thou) reflectest a little, it is likely to eally appear also to thee in that very manner TODIRCR BVAR DIN BTN AL A IPBE 3T NS, BBy, till now also I put up with the faults committed by him R AR T 36* eSS 284 [— A remark is here to be made regarding eswd3 (i. e. &84 @3), which literally means ‘if becomes or is’, ¢if become or are’, e. 9. FS00 B3 B e R330 B AT B if (there is) a wife, (there is) sorrowful thought when (there is) no wife (there is) sorrowful thought 3P 030 <RB catl F9 R esnde, if it is silver, is it not agreeable to the thief? 303,938 3 3 § e TR, 207,90 83 X, if (there) are children, (it is) trouble; when (there) 3 30’_1 (WY are no children, (it is) trouble BTH THI BT Howd TR e, if the cow is black, (is its) milk black? momand, if (it) is so Rezord, if (it) is Rk required ? 333, however, is often used somewhat like eszcw, ¢but’, if it stands i at the head of a sentence, e.g. eF0 TR TBFSBRER Bwend, =TT USEC 50 AIW N o JPE WeRd go all of you into the veranda, but you N must not make any noise there. FOY NERP T BT 2RES =o0s %’J@%fioé;fi =38 ©neR waeémfifi Us3 Bund ezEde, some plants as soon as they are touched close, but do not experience joy and ‘j, krly. of 4 sorrow like living beings. = deéd@ FOT N%?fi%@ BWOWFTONRR NBNRL Wil £99, 908 VYR TR T @Tb;fi&e) S country there are in some W places nutmeg trees, but (their) nuts do not become like (those) of that place Cf. § 314 and see the use of 8x33 in § 334 ol 297. The conjunctions €3 | e, (WP o, ete. § 212, 3), 08,0, 03 “9 soes®, again, further, and, are used in adducing something additional :0F €. g. SUZ, (VF° DT RV) "59)304(3 ERBRY VR0 WTBIDE IIFFaNI® YRS T 3 TS TOIEBRY’ B8T00R (¢. € esoafizsod) 3003 BIAINTTTF ) 3 el TAE IPAT ST BN, T3, BER, BRB [oTTanosdw 3pe? 03 0 I is composed of 53038 4+ eso, so that it originally means ‘and further’ like 0y SOE o3ovo AT VIR . DBVIOD GOUJl 00D PPNV I, D WRIPY | R SToNSI), 2R RI° V) VI ReTIVON S¢S0 ITTJIVO |y 18 gh mé o} of t} A FoFed BU 3,8 I, 9D S0 i 3,03 o, ete. o | * 308 TR &R B30, RISMS I3Rk» 904, PW,TAR WIS 3,T0 WY A0, S9tH° WITVIN | 983038 NBHRROARHBFY, JINBR D the V ®0&, ete Uin? PER, 285 pe— hlch An instance in which s3.em¢ means ¢or’ is the following:— Qsdcé%%do i S30em° 5@56&60 33085 es;gJaQSesiQS;fisah FRABIJR x%ofi’oafiomo. oht In the modern dialect 303y, (which we met with already in multipli- <ol cative and additional numbers at the close of § 280) is used like 03,0, 43 g, (¢ § 810), e g. 3, BHRATAY B, Doy d; waB Iy, BT 161’@) 3%& o&@fi@a BY, FB, T &)%Q WREISH VY. I, 3038 ao%%@fido COW 0300BLETE RIHIDAT DL, B3, WY %J@%@%fi_ BEP030TY, 0By, WE I ) 18 39300 I, BRYR FLNVS, 008y, WORF,B. See an instance in § 289 (V 208, w). ds In the same dialect mon® (moonw), so also, likewise also, has been Sole jou used in the sense of ‘and’, e. g. B % (PeRIY)) WIS BIRNBOL, FHaNR WRY :\‘éeérieée?o 23%903003363%. iesz;’_ Jyilly 298, The Sabdamanidarpar}a states that 2 (of B = B0°) is a kriyatmakavyaya, . e. a particle (avyaya) that partakes of the nature and of a verb. i) Its formation has been shown in § 209, note 1 (see also Uity § 210). ©Q appears also with a final euphonic s6nné as Lo, e g. B3B3, ARACRRS® BY o, and in the modern dialect with a euphonic that J (¢ e 0+ V) as faeo)o@ (§ 209, note 1;.§ 212, 7). When followed by a vowel, the final letter of -] either disappears, 29 e. 9. vo9ny, adw (¢f. § 215, 1), or a euphonic ¥ is inserted, e. g. 0!]3:]1 B oM, B 8¢ (¢ § 215, 3). MES& B is used either by itself, or in combination with nouns, pronouns, 7 ete In combination with bhavavadanas, ¢. e. verbal nouns ending e. g. W .;; in evzdy and ey (§ 200, 1. 3, once also in 3o, see § 194, remark 1) or in e (§§ 187, 1; 188. 209, 3), it forms so to say a third person in the conjugation of the negative. In the modern dialect bhavavatanas with eey (the nominative) and g conventionally convey the meaning of the past (§ 209, 3). If esen is changed into the dative (esej%_, efie‘)%) and 25 is suffixed, the meaning of the past disappears. In the same dialect B is joined also to past participles. 1, 15} by itself. RewN,ESIF ¥SFot? @Y, and is (king) Nilagriva able (to gain the victory)? (No), he is not. Qe DTYHEOH B onBe Teay é\@e&% o359 7? av, ever having seen a ripe water-melon art thou? I am not pm— 286 pe— (¢. e. hast thou ever seen a ripe water-melon? No, I have not). 9530 inds I3 Zodc wnSedee? ww, baving become (i.e. have become and ) kno thor are all those (things in the house) of themselves? (No), they are not. fo ¢ IOBAIN AERY VTR %’é& DN efi@%e? VY, F9,, having spoken whatever bad words to him wast thou? I was not, sir (i.e. hadst thou mot abused him in any way? No, I had not, sir). LRegoRRconss 3003{0\ DT, o ——— 180 g1éd Bow TRRFERV? B, did the bees sting (you) anywhere on the body? N They were not (i. e. no, they did not). SoNg ZTE [ Towy BATE, Bedwe? DR, 3Re8RR FePro. ‘&%3&@3@ BCI°T udogeé’%fia, hat «is (there) grass upon the cocoa-nut tree?” asked the gardener. « (There) pure W} is not, (thus) saying indeed (to myself), I come down”, replied he (¢. . no, there is not; and for that very reason I come down, replied he). wor hut 2, e in combination with nouns and pronouns (¢f. § 316, 1). o TRTET 0 NoF )30 RRwANY, (generally there) is not a composition 3 are (i. e. generally there is no composition) of Kannada and Sarnskrita words. ) R0, yETT0 ;35%@%(5*@3@550 dwesdve, also if a Samskrita word follows iy t (the terms o and D), a fault it is not (4. e. it is no fault). esg, B8, havi ooy, O, doubt (there) is not (i.e. O, there is no doubt). roToDe —— ) TOFRY MTIAT JRY, Drona is not (present), Karna is not (present), (ther the son of Drona is not (present). 2BTTIY, (there) is not whosoever with (you, 4.e. nobody is with you). $&dow, (there)is not a pot (7. e. parti there is no pot). sveew B 3B, an eating and a putting on (there) is not for them (¢. e. they have nothing to eat and to put on). Qan B TOORARTS B8R, for me great trouble still (there) is not (i.e. there is 4 hay no longer great trouble for me). ZonzR Soed 5330%, (there) is not a the | fault on Madana (é.e. there is no fault on Madana). ¥E, IS BRION F0233y, BoDY, in Yama’s messengers whatever mercy (there) is not (¢- e. Yama’s messengers bave no mercy at all). =8 223 3¢S @eo BPE, BIVY, after the period (of life) has expired, for a moment a stay (there) is not (¢. e. —there is no stay for a moment). S8, %30 R 9%, %30 @, near me whatsoever book (there) is not (. e. I have no lot ( book at all with me). & 2R3y, VDS T3, POL) 2Y, to-day (is) Sunday, 4 at school (there) is not (. e. — there is no school). 08 B @ISR A3 vY, of fea for those who have no understanding, fortune (there) is not (i. e. — there is no fortune). 881 Besode v, for me (the sun, there) is not fatigue e 287 P 30 BT IRA RWIY, bQ, that to me indeed (4. e. I never suffer fatigue) 1| knowledge is not (i. e. I do not know that). DRy bR %e@do:fl FoRDY, 10f thou whatever saying a business (there) is not (i. e. thou doest not V\d!lt kep to say anything) 9NE, D3IV, N'O' 3ng, AWy, greater than a hou mother benefactors (there) are not greater than sugar sweetness (there) V) 18 not (i. e. there are no greater benefactors than a mother, there is no id) { greater sweetness than that of sugar) Z,INT, [ WOMITIV ST,9NS. Soeew 3039w, better than pure gold (there) is not, better | W) than children lisping (there) is not (i. e. there is no gold better than ore) pure gold, there is no lisping better than that of children) PV, IP 7,8 OB TNR & FORT) B & WIS, to-day it is not, but to-morrow that work will be accomplished (7. e. to-day it is not likely to be accomplished but to-morrow that work will be accomplished) QRN 3R FNRLIHBH f1on 035900 B, to thee father and mother are (there)? Whosoever (there) are not (. e. hast thou still thy parents? No, I have nobody) R & 1ds WRDVORY, 03593y %’Jaéj 327 CPBR BY; TR BHERY TOTRIET ’19@0 Jows wa% é’@d’gb_sn 89, who gave thee this knife? Whosoever not (. e nobody) havmg opened the bundle of Nariyana I took it to myself. QDY ®E,8 ; ;f 300 3R? ORW B, is (there) ghee near you (¢. e. have you some ghee) ent) (there) is not any (¢. e. I have none) evel 3, @e in combination with verbal nouns (¢f. § 316, 2.12) and past (&e participles (which are finally also verbal nouns, see § 169) 6re) 08,300 MUSPOIIRIBY FeRVBTIRNT, 2300 &R, till now (he) is not | oV e 18 a having become an object of aim to a stroke of an arrow discharged by the hand of Kama (é. e. till now he has not become an object etc.) ot @ FRENS TP SPTTBRES \?Dfi FON03) BRB LSRN QTBOF PENLITF BTuBo ot ) BFRNRVTF D0DEBAT, VISSF st 4y 831%030?3@3555 BFOY WIBRS o | the young cuckoo WOl in a mango tree among a flock of crows in the wood a having been able not (z. e. was not able) to rise and go away, and also at night to cry, s 10 1dfljy, and to open and shut (its) eyelids, (in short) to do anything on account of fear Y, TRREPT BPEBRY DRI [ere AR a¢ BEREDRDFe,[0 T | mduf e i ) 288 oz R TR Fre 9% SEENFA U (t SORNTIFT afisar{ =N ”@3 0903®% || the month Mage W ma grandly made its appearance so that in the covering cold the points of 1§ | the compass, the sky, the earth, mountains (and) forests, howsoever, a 200 W baving been able not to be seen (¢.e. could not be seen) on the earth xeq which is known for (its) misty heat when fruits are growing fully ripe st 16 ©BACT) BRERSEI[T BY SedRo0Y, the queen a having made Wit not any fault here (4. e. the queen has not commltted any fault here).— {03 Fo) [VoNNENR VY BBV to some monkeys a tail a being W (there) is not (. e. some monkeys have no tail) YRV D0 S8 ink | wdvssde, if (there) is mo knowledge, honour a comin (there) is not (i (¢. e —honour is not obtained) 2PRCBTVORBINTY 093 TORTR, WIIID stupid boys a coming (there) is not for whatsoever work (¢.e. stupid boys are good for nothing) 09 Bo PRe? FENTOY, where is she? fut (she) an appearing is not (. e. she does not appear). B aée@o mw PN n9gy wde 303 SRy men IR wrimdy, so that (I) ha,vmg sat § (th down eat such (good) ripe fruits alone is not a being pleasant to me (3. (¢. e. to sit down and eat such good ripe fruits alone is not pleasant to 2 me).— TS TOR TIROV FOIBF TROO (he) a having abandoned not deceit (and other) sin, (and) a having obtained not the e ey ok o desired object (é.e. he has not abandoned deceit and other sin, and has ['pl not obtained the desired object) 538 90 WeTIRRVY, SPA BCPZTH 4] FeFO® though his mother having made clear (and) told (him) so (Mo much as was necessary, (he) a hearing was not (¢.e. though his mother clearly told him all that was necessary, he did not hear) T NPT sta) he having trodden on iy P 30°Ty WeR3B. SROH Td ANV the stones (and) thorns grew fatigued, but the way a being found was | not (¢. e. he trod on stones and thorns and grew fatigued, but the LA} way was not found).—ezZ RReNOT, he to a going is not (¢. e d § he does not intend to go or probably will not go) SR S[R3 of h W3S A T IOV N Entad) ARNR 23, WeFOE, if (you) do so, his anger will be assuaged, and blows to a falling on thee are not (¢.e.—and blows will not fall on thee). 28 gy, 0390w B3,T WIRABO 3 ) whosoever are not to an allowing thee to come near (¢.e. nobody will Intg allow thee to come near).— u3H, JZ, TONE [OT WIT® S0 [pe yet writing on thy board a having been finished (see §§ 168. 169) is not? gy s 289 s (¢. e. has writing on thy board not yet been finished £ :3@033?55%& 0 g ALV SPRy, men a having made the sun are not (4. e. man has not of made the sun). de;fid@i 330 0R ;Sh@e@e()q, whosoever a having seen God is not (i. e. nobody has seen God). & a\a)f)\ofio aésae%mfo TP @53, &3 A/ £2-09 ith S | 2 &3n fiefiafi%, these grapes are sour, therefore these a requiring for me having become are not (¢. e.—therefore these are not required for me, that is to say: I do not want these). &SN MBOTIBNA ade wRd N8 F). o ! oNE 3[SBRIR Fod B Y, mégmfi g3, ‘ 230300 TINRTp 28 ©, then Gurupada was beaten (by his schoolmaster). ing Why? In his inkstand ink a having been was not (4. e.—there was no o) ink—), (and) in his bundle a pen and paper a having been were not 1ot (¢. e.—there was not a pen or paper). A9 o' 4, about AL IJ. pid Swgaie N8 7egsdw sy, a means (there) is not for (obtaining) he? future happiness (é. e. there is no means for obtaining future happiness). W D) BNy WA OITDE, 0 Y, however so much (the fox) jumped 3 sl (the bunches of grapes) a coming in reach for (his) mouth were not e See also Dasapadas (¢. e.—could not be reached with his mouth). b 0 93, iL; 48, 2; 148, 7. g 5, about the combination of g1} with BoR. the 69, BT, 28 u%@ Rezy; oy FREY! AR, BTAT) KIeTReE, has Tomo? Bwotd Y oe Te@! IeeeRdE, RS TNy, mother, mother, 00 a basin is required; give (it) quickly! Why so much hurry, Rama? | 80 (Mother) give (me) first a basin! a staying thus (quite literally: of the her staying in this wise, see § 186) talking (there) is not (4. e. there is no “n time for me to stay and talk now). Be3< S %03?\ QUUTT TNY, on the millet-stalks a reaching thus for my hands (there) is not (i.e. the was millet-stalks cannot be reached with my hands). S, SWoEY TBIR the DL BREWBRYFE N e «also my prime of life has passed” b6 a saying thus (there) is not (¢.e. you cannot say that also my prime 30 of life has passed). s R99. About the combination of », », %, & with Be. nob V) b 'aegqa’i or faeg“sSe. a ("1’ In these two forms @e is combined with o and &, two particles of will interrogation (§ 212, ), “suffixed by means of a euphonic 5. The y ¢ meaning of CO and CORBE first «is (there) not?” “are (there) not?”, ot! 37 b R 290 B 15 e.9. P IRYNRM e 3¢, is there no oil in the gingely-oil seed? (answer yes, there is) PR, SRR WIveF F\onB, Jpdw 3, if one flower fades to cuf are there no flowers for the black humble bee? (answer: yes, there T are) 5 for This meaning, however, often changes into ¢or’, literally ¢is it not d, (this)?”, 4. e. if this is not the case, then it may be also this, e. g In DJIRTR VP Bnon Bvw D WBed wIdn 390 INP Fed TWIST ofa ¢ when thou getst any pain, is it not (this? is it not pain? then also ‘oerta ¢. e. or) when sickness happens (to thee), thy parents will grieve 0L “Cf sgéofiéfi FIRRY VST FBWE B S SRS 89030033, man’s mind is In known by his words, is it not (this? is it not by his words? then also witho i. e. or) by (his) conduct R0NBRSNT 83,00 N33 IR LRI Not ¢ PO BE & MICVTTY, TRY,ME AT INT) NeBdw, if (one) removes here the blood out of the wound (made by the teeth of a snake), the poison i 10 un will take no effect, is it not (this? is it not the removal of the blood? Bl then also 4.e. or) if that wound is cauterised, the poison will take no and 1 effect theme 2, B Fp Or B JFpe efc,, ¢ When the interrogative particles 2, and & (§212,6) are suffixed to ‘18 110 e by means of a euphonic ¢, it conveys first the meaning of a question, akeg occasionally one of more or less displeasure, e. 9. J=R ;302371 (A D) Qr 3p¢, does buttermilk not agree with thee? =3 e °9ojo® WO fywe, rang is there no sack near him? & mowo ©CPwIpe, has tha.t milk not got [re-gn cool? WRR WIOS e3pe, will he not come? 2830, AR, BONRE B0 (thi) WIB 00w 3pe, has writing on thy board not been finished yet (é.e T, doest thou still write on thy board)? 9T aRe, BReROVZpe, has he e e S T s A SRR Fo not yet gone? R0 WDHY Fpe, wilt thou not come? the PY But then v ;’JJ, 'ae)i’yae frequently mean ¢is it not?’, ¢will it not be?’, ¢was it not‘P’, ¢.e. ‘or not?’, e.g. 33 ea“{ 3830390 3ReRATIDY Fp, Apea a having strained the water of Siva, or not? (5. e. Siva’s water was In strained, or not?) FAC IPRT [T BN, 03, W 3RR3 30 L DIMSTOV 3p0? BTPACNE FBRIQ T S .3 B3 3R IprorganoSdY 3pe, N a pruned tree will sprout and grow, (and) become a large tree, or not? tO (l The moon that lost its splendour on the day of new moon, will become begay full on the day of full moon, or not? 335, VRE FRE BN IVBIZIR3Re? thlS 18 o Ppe? J0eB BeTRY, TR FHIIV TR ®S,B, he (the boy) said tO&t D 291 ] SWer «“is my (literally: his) new axe sharp? or not? let (me) see”, and began ales, to cut down all he saw. there To 25} the % may also be added without a euphonic %, and then its form is faei@oe. t not 3, 'aeg,a%e [ or 'aeie - UR it 30, In BR3¢ BY Al D of emphasis has been suffixed to 1) by means of a euphonic ¥, and e has been repeated; its literal meaning is also ¢ certainly it is not, it is not’ (or ¢certainly it will not be, it will not be?, reve. or <certainly it was not, it was not”), by which ¢not at all’ is expressed. nd 18 In cae(:joe B the © of emphasis has been joined to the first R | also without a euphonic ¢, e. g. BB ra%om? 'aeie v, art thou tired? Sfi)g, 10VeS Not at all. xg);’%joioe?o ©03ReNR. TR B e B, in the universe there are unsuitable things not at all (4. e. in the universe there are )0IS00 : no unsuitable things, none at all). lood? 800. In § 212, 7 ee is introduced as an avyaya. In § 209, note 1 ke 10 and in § 210 we have seen that it is a form of the negative of the verbal theme ese, meaning ‘fits not’, <is not fit’, <are not fit’, ‘was not fit’, etc., ‘is not corresponding to’, ¢is not becoming’, ‘does not answer to’, ed 10 ¢is not equivalent’, ¢is not according to facts’, ‘is opposite to’, etc. It ostion, takes also the form of @e o (¢f. w0 in § 298), e. g. W VeNF SEIZYo el BonFBoo TS PRYReT0wTo PEORe[o, now came Bhimaséna, a stranger he did not answer to (¢. e. he was no stranger), invincible, op of gob pre-eminent in the lotus-pond of the Kaurava race. (amv) 230390, (ar) 3008 (this) does not correspond to justice (z. e. this is no justice). SEISF ¥o, (this) does not answer to silk (. e. this is no silk). (ve jas he For the existence of ®e ) in the modern dialect (¢f. a3y in § 298, 4 the author is unable to cite an instance. When followed immediately by a vowel, the final of ese either dis- it not g appears, e. ¢. 8¢, or a euphonic -] is put after it, e. 9. weTaM. 0 H) Instances are: T was 1, regarding ©e . } 0 8083330 2LoORQe3TanS e009,0, Arjuna a stranger does not answer ::c)q @"3‘83 ! got? to (i. e. Arjuna is no stranger), he to become is required (¢. e. he must become ) (BRY) B, (this) does not correspond to a pot (7. e. 6C0Me this is 00 pot). (BW) NWTY, BRDWIBIT, (this) does not correspond e to a town (é. e. is no town), it is a wild. FIoFIYIRY, this is opposite ) S&ida ST s 292 PES— to virtue (2. e this 1s no virtue) HBRRPRT,OD, BRY 2390 B3NN fac ) TORRRY SREBRRFNY, 930.© 3wensss s, a teacher is not corres- it 1 ponding to a farmer (¢. e. is no farmer), a goglet is not fit (to be ranked) in the class of pots (. e. is no pot), glass is not fit amongst metals (i. e this is no metal), indeed porridge is not fit (for) a dinner (¢.e. certainly is )| no proper dinner) W, ONRPREBY, BB, BWLOWY, SFHN NBY) WS ¥ S0; Y FoREN SF,30¥NRY, a peasant’s reading is not proper, a cat two is not corresponding to a royal tiger (¢.e. is no royal tiger), a swallow Y 0011 wort shrub is not corresponding to a garden (4. e. is no garden); these three are not fit in account (¢. e. are unworthy of much notice) BT B 3 OB 3RedTe: 30 F.Oo0) =o3030e. wherein there are no birds, is not ) b8 LTS answering to a garden; wherein there are no children, is not answering I to a house (4. e. a garden wherein there are no birds, is no garden; a are house wherein there are no children, is no house) NOTINOT B 9ok H00d0T o803, wherein there is no guru 1s not answering to a matha; wherein there are no elders, is not answering to a house (i. e. a matha without a guru is no matha, a house without elders is no house) T — ] BSRSROL, IFRENITO n ay DBV TSV, Vithala’s name ) a fair wheresover a putting and selling is not equal to (é.e. Vithalas name is not such a thing as is put and sold somewhere in a fair) 39 form 38,39, (man’s) body his is not according to facts (¢.e. man’s body is 108ty not his own). BTTY, VI ey, this man is not fit (4. e. not this fray man, but) that man is wanted. X¥oe wey By BRTEBNTBY WoraBY, o) all that shines (with) yellow colour gold does not answer to (¢. e. is not BRI L BN IRnBRE? @R? wey, hast thou perhaps gold) put stolen this? Stolen property ? certainly it is not answering to (¢. e. cer- book tainly it 1s not) 23030 Towd BTFY TIORRY, BRI, buffalo’s AR A K N S S BT milk so much wholesome as cow’s milk is not fit (4. e. buffalo’s milk is not so wholesome as cow’s milk). opYSpLe el "’ejs'a ST ~e§mfie‘) b RT 328 3 Bo30Ry, BWIF,T, BBV WE WRE WSWRY, they manufacture sugar emph (also) at Rajapura, Pattana and other places, but its great goodness is cally not according to facts (é.e. but it is not very good) FPIT AR dan WRF TR WELI RSN IV .8 AR YO B, BB DTS, 0 L addiction to opium is a very bad thing; on account of it they do harm lndee lllsta] to (their) property, this much is not corresponding (é. e.-not only this, ha but) also to (their) life 9 R,e ©e, this much is not corresponding to TN N 293 s My facts (i. e. this is not all). 5=, BReeoridy wR eB0e? BY, BRY 68 FOT) VA b are these all the arguments? (this much) is not fit (. e. no, el it is not so), there are still some others. ) BRoF 7980309, ¥TFIR®BW, (A this a poor-asylum is not corresponding to facts (4. e. this is not a poor- J s asylum, but) a palace. & RBRY WY, HTBY, BFRLN FedRTRY, ©NOTF, 3, one is not fit, two are not fit (4. e. not only one, not only Cat two, but) three hundred mines they have dug in this hill. eRY &R low BRBIZDH 8F,59, thou in this way a making a proper thing it is not 3 hese corresponding to (¢.e. it is not right for thee to do so; ¢f. § 316, 9). 8 BRrdod VFW FoRG o, (is) this umbrella of any use (see remark b)? ;nog it'is not fit (¢. e. this umbrella is good for nothing). <3593 %,3900F 0N g ¥y, in whatever manner it is not fit (i. e. in no way). Other instances Ny & are: — 45y Sowy, BELNL. BT DBRRY, THID. BID By 39, 30309, 59003, BBT YT, TY, ZHONe. fo 8 Remarks. g, & 186) a) Regarding the practical difference in the use of 92 (§ 298) and ¥ it may be said that 9% expresses positive non-existence and positive denial, and 10 ©e relative negation and negation of quality, nature or character. ala’s b) It is not impossible that ©© when following a noun, ete., originally 3w formed an answer to a question. Let us take a few of the above-mentioned instances to show this. [y 18 SodznBo B30 might be translated ¢(is) Arjuna a this stranger? No (he is not)’. Likewise (%) 8300 ¢(is this) a pot? No (it is 339, not)’. (AR NNBY, BRICIIBIW ¢ (is this) a town? No, it is a wilderness’. 5 10t To give this meaning to ¥ would recommend itself, when ¥® is sometimes put after an accusative, ¢. g. SFI) VY, II, 3B IIy, BeBWEI (Bombay school- »haps cel book 3, 6), ‘me (i. e. did I beat me)? No, I beat my younger brother’. QI Y, 333y T8 (Rev. F. Ziegler in his Practical Key, page 27), ¢(shall I call) this 108 man? No, call that man’. Cf. the accusative after ®2® in § 338, and see | § 287, remark. : 7 Sttra 47 of the Sabdamanidarpana teaches that ©® @, when it denotes — e ¥, + o, or is the so- ;ugfif emphasis (nirdharanArtha, and is composed of @9 &, called negative participle, see § 171 and ¥2® in § 338), occasionally drops its g5 18 %, and gives the instance R#833w Friw’o which stands for RLIITY @ Jprico, o A translation would be ¢Gorava a being not fit indeed (or a being not meant 39 85 Thus the indeed) I do not praise (i. e. I do mot praise anybody but Gorava)’. i instanece appears in LingAyta manuseripts; a Jaina manuseript of Madabidaru sy has @300 Pre’o which stands for Be30s3w 8 Jprie’o, putting the accusative ReSTBo before ¥V X, but NBeS0%, the nominative, before ©Q. The Mtdabidaru ]g tO e 294 e MS.’s writing in this case may be wrong, or may be not, so far as the accusative is concerned has Il 2, regarding e9e in combination with &ar} (or e3,). §2 oy, thus (as you think) it is not fit (. e. thus it is not). 3T 566 FREVNRY %‘odoé’oio BRINT manY, Ae9ses,d, the hoof of cows so as the hoof of horses is not correspondmg to facts (¢.e. the hoof of cows 1is unlike the hoof of horses), it is split. D3onBRER BRI3% TIN zéai reg( P riéSovoJa ®o, amongst beasts like the horse beautiful and stronor (any) are not fit (é- e. amongst beasts there are none so beautiful and «f strong as the horse). DIRINH VT Ve aangr‘i WRIBSICITIPE, TONRCR Sivg v (3R N9Y) vy, as fishes cannot leave water and live, so anyhow these (frogs) are not according to facts (¢. e. — so these frogs are in no 03, the way) 3, regarding ese> 53, e9e) 3¢ or e3¢ SIxb These forms bear the suffixes of question o and ©, expecting an ny answer in the affirmative the first two insert a euphonic ¢, the last i one adds £ immediately to so. E. g. Qoanse doansvons neansvoe o, Q D20 08 ©s, wos3, instead of the augments &of and Dof the ee augment nes is used ad libitum, is it not fit? (4. e.—is it not so? or not ?). ad;)odw fi;fio e WD ‘aojoe) 3?7 IVTFHES LIS zacé:‘)zsa& nam 0300 3?7 a hvmg bemg that says «this (life) is unstable”, (is) a wise Part person, or not? an apathetic man that forgets the fear of hell, (is) an this unwise person, or not? | A SN ATI QESENRe B, W 5¢? to-day Pass six days (or six days hence is) the illumination-festival, or not? g,3® B3; e Tod, o Se? and thine (is) the same road, or not? ©xks R, ¥Se dieg how that (is) a sparrow, or not? 4, i regarding e&o3p, Yo3pe, O BSH e In these three forms the suffixes of question 2, % appear, the answer oy being in the affirmative; in e_ee&fae the % is joined immediately to o, W) E. 9. $3pqe30 w590528 0889530 Vyoma (is) a well-behaved man, is it not got fit? (¢. e.—is it not so‘> or not?). TR R0mORERTYRpe? we are mortals, or not? Jpcesd %22 803, 88% ¢7 — 9903@66, 53 SNnRe, TB Tay 39¢08 VR T T "Iy, BPEME, D, @@J\Q? 301 Do, g, 3@)53 cae)c% and 3¢z which are classed under the avyayas by the Sabdanusasana (§ 212, 7), will be treated of in another b place (§§ 338. 316, 5) 5 o — 295 ative In the Sabdanusdsana’s wo o (§ 212, 7) the nominative of Jo (§ 266) has been used adverbially (see the verse quoted under No. 17 in § 348); in its Oz the same has happened regarding this interrogative pronoun (§ 255) 53¢ Its drv30 and D330 are compounds of %, what? (the accusative the see § 125) and curtailed 303y 0, I shall do i§ 18 302. Here follow some peculiarities (chiefly) of the modern dialect % Q regarding the way of expressing certain English adverbs:— 10ng 1, Since (with regard to time) and This is expressed by means of the instrumental (i. e. ablative, § 352, 1), s e. 9. B 33 O afiafiomadrfiéa"we, since how many days has this how Siva not dined? aoaio R0 FRARREN IO Roowen BNy By, n 10 LB DIROR 9D since many days there existed in the mind of a fox the haughty desire to become like a tiger. 298995330 SIS0 since sixty years ~®e§osad®§ [0 éfi oo ééo seede , I have not seen ¢ a0 my brother since Monday. S8 QT ¥ 2T HeSRw By e IR ) as ©3, 033y, since (or from) that fime they began to love each other SEN) o 3;3 since (my or thy or his or her or its or their) youth (or from my, he etc youth). )7 o But there is another way of expressing ¢since (in the modern dialect), 1500 namely by means of the verb esr/> in combination with a so-called past 16 participle, e. 9. & ewOR BRI WY SN OFF Yoy, literally: to )&Il this town the gentleman a having come (§ 169) how many days have o418 passed, 4. e. how many days is it since the gentleman came to this town? goé B[ [, BB 5,83, SToWTNBY, it is twenty years since he died (or he died twenty years ago). DY FSBA e%@efi@% 23, SESECTAL-DIVMEA 68!, how many months is it since you began to go to school‘? D5, TRTIY e.eaéo T/OTIT BN, RPN &N RSI3 SPVREN JToRAPRY, 1t 18 now about 400 years since the art of printing became known B pgwer DB WBY BRI, My, much time has passed since he got up (or he ) it nof got up long ago) Also the past participle of SemenrReY), may be used in a similar , 410 manner, e.g. ¥ 3 OIR SPTIRPEY, since that day 38 The Samskrita ©Tz3s 1s used 50 too, €. g. ¥R & © 0%, since that time ) the 2, Hence (with regard to time). This may be rendered in the following manner: B8R, N &t SR deS other one 52.) to-day six days (will be) the illumination festlva,l or six days —— PR 296 e 5 SoneN &% Jonyy, Six hence (will be) the illumination festival months this month. Cf. § 348, 29 T 3, 29 Before (previous to) e In § 282, as will be seen, some instances in which this adverb is ¥ It is to be remarked here that not expressed by =002, have been given it is rendered also by SpBoo, €. 9. NS, JRTY BY 0T AT teac 3 09, before you who were living here? ¥33,8, SRFwY, prior to that. (we) as I afioa‘i B 3TE ai BPBO WIYN P RReR Bezorug B, before building a house it is necessary to clear the foundation properly. A0 Thus also: IP IR SRBL OB, NWEF, SRTLI YOV ITIN, previous 10t to words a proverb (is fit), previous to dinner pickles (are fit) In connection with =m0, =ws, before, previous to, the negative it participle is also used, e. g. $93F RPELP I BR FINRNRT TGO before | the neighing sound of the mares entered the ear; ¥g, FRTYNA T 5003 Gon SRR, before the black colour came to thy throat. The same 1s done 90 in connectlon with 300023, €. g. ¥To 2393E Savoed, before they came (¢f. clos 2938 za'adcs g S Soveed, ete. in § 282). 3o 4, As ¢ As usual’, ‘as on previous occasions’ may be expressed by QRGZR, or Uy R TN, e 9 ToRR) OIBR, JS,VCRORTH TICR, [IRT WIIW DI IR WwET of as usual Sama may have annoyed thee somehow <) 2R3y BReY wWoBTRy W3Ry, as usual the servant came at dinner-time 9T\ Also: SH3OR3., as before; and in the mediseval dialect O V., QS TP, D JRND, 2 B TN 9 W ¢As to’, ‘as for’ may be rendered by means of =zd, if becomes, if o become, e. g. FoooR3 S3 FHRRY (Hodson’s grammar), as for us we BT FR3 Bwenuss,. 3 (Ziegler’s Practical Key), as to cannot do (s0) him he will go;—or, as in the South-Mahratta country, by means of W11 WRR, (¥RY), € J- SHE wAING ©sR, I[N 3er, as for toys they are Say not required for me;—or by means of Samskrita D= a3y, regard, concern ™ €. . DT IN0NT, GolH VIR, IR ) DEPEBTTT PO TRBRD & 11})1 as to ghee it is impossible to say how much it will still rise i price. in) 33@6#53 &)mo&%’ WQ,RIZI, R, he is anxious concerning (his) moksha. En Thi ;30&0305593 as to him. 39 ORBuzeN, as for that. (Cf. § 348, 17). Use R 297 o ), SIX ‘As if’ is rendered by means of the relative past participle with AR nedoney TR (or wy), € 9. TSR RPeRB, FRITRF, D FePmon, JN, w0 WA B B[ RCPTT RoPy, BeCFR HonoMey; R2ISZT th 1§ B, T B0, BYNYRY T6) Teead ¥R AT IRE ®ereod, it (we) do tha not go to school, stay (at home) to play, and when on the next day the A0t teacher asks (the reason), say that a fever had befallen (us), it is as if that (we) had told a lie; if (we) steal the books etc. of others, it is (the same) lding as if (we) acted feloniously ¢As long as’ is expressed in the ancient dialect as follows: 033 3350 Y1008 A0 émm'@;fi S0 AR08, w¥do, as long as they possess riches, will not also scoundlels be honourable persons? ¢As soon as’ is rendered by means of the relative participle combined {178 with an adverb of time to which the » or & of emphasis is joined, e. g yefore BDRY W R O 93 WINSe 38 RBREI[ as soon as he had 00 come, his father started. MoBoRPY ¥R WSS Or WTITINSE TR lone See also the 2OBZ Ty, as soon as the guru came inside, all rose 6 (4 close of § 349 5, At least (with regard to a sum) This is expressed by 532335&!@ if (one) says it is nothing, e. g w30y wfl%rfle@n@fi;fi sa‘ad% Ngéscfi 282 ©F CRJTINVING 39 0l Ei W BREIRB, B, out of all those mmes sxlvel is put at least to the amount Wid of one lac of rupees a week TR0 B DBAR VIS Z TR HDRY TRTIN 330,50 3x0, I shall get at least five rupees for this box fime 6, Just, precisely, exactly (as to a standard or fact) wm These terms may occasionally be rendered by 033,43 &R (% e BHEGY Bd ®an), to (i e corresponding to) its belng being thus, 03, If e. g ”au% C$ Tl U938 Seard S0, you have described him exactly. 7 For. l\ We 25 f0 If a person wants to adduce the reason (or cause) of something he 18 Of writes or speaks about, ‘for’, ‘because’ are expressed by o3e®R 8, if say (or if one says) why? e.g. o) & NBG FoF SPIT B RFRY i are %fiosfiqgef’a@@? 3ed! 30938 3 W) mHyHY, shall we cut some (of the) certly o) ripe mangoes of this tree? It is not fit, for they are not ours. ;jv’aefl) aplestelt O&azfi&@sflo TORGY wRY 208 Bezon3, 3, o&a%*é 9, 95#3@ prlce 330R SReRan mdcflm WB Y oszc@flas 8 3989,3, deceltful men must ksha , 1) use much shrewdness in any affair, for all beings are watchful, lest they 38 o, 298 — be deceived for SR TEY) SR 25908, ONOTI O WY 90% COMEANEAIS whic R SPeROT 5 Be30 IBYRY 030NN JNeRI, T3 N, we must not (or should not) steal, for though men do perhaps not see us, God sees AN addi us always Cf. § 322, and see further e. g. Bombay school-books, 2, 1 10. 48¢ 3,.38. .105; 4, 10..16.,20, 52. 98, 111. 141 A, 0 = A ‘For’, ‘on account’, ‘because of’ In § 282 we have %=z0n, WRONT, %R,0 (Cpr to b with the genitive to express these adverbs; similarly are used also Ze 9N, lit. the reason a becoming or a having become, e.g. ¥z FwTN a th on that account; 30z, (reason?) e. g. ¥R 30807, on that account H and BdxR0g, lit. from the side, e. 9. 933 B[, on account of him of al The same is expressed also simply by the dative, e. 9. ©3%,, on that BT because T8 account; FoXF, on account of (a) work or (a) business of the feast; 3e®@y33%,, for requesting or begging; %zo3RF,, for read- ing; 0¥ OF,, for buying; —or by adding esP, a having become, to the diale dative, e. 9. A=, lit. for thee a having become, ¢.e. on thy account 3 RBe8303y BRedwe,n, for search (or in search) of game 33 0 Iwenadd [ihit on account of the father’s word: = Fox59,n. for that business BRBY 1§ V¢ 339,0, in order to buy 3 (Regarding the use of the dative see § 348.) W) «For ‘therefore ‘on account’ are frequently to be rendered by the hook instrumental (¢.e. ablative § 352, 4a) of &, e. g. Soonns ISy, TN DTBE TIOIR [IRWIB 53, wEtrs @) e Ingf om@éé TON T3 monkeys walk like us even on two feet; therefore they appear quite plac like man. QERY JF, Fo0 3371%?8 39 ?S ADIEAE W3PS JRN ¥ST B3eTF T WO, RaS3, honour thy mother and father; for it (on 1its account) their blessmg will come upon you. «Therefore’ is often rendered 4 | also by &33e9°g S (BR4 93PS and sometimes also by Samskrita eud for him g (with the genitive), 3203 (with the genitive), 5930, ¥@ T30, VR (Or &) ToTLOY, BB FToTD (Cf. § 322) ‘For’, ¢in order ‘for the purpose Above it has been stated that 03 hese adverbs are partly expressed by the dative or by the dative with ay edrlo; but there is still another way to express them, namely first by adding DD, 2 having said, to the dative (see § 332), e. 9. To¥NT 25N fmcsafiofi by 233360?1&&)&5& 3% z%ofio@ B 0RIXsY, to place the army tbat is ready for battle, in the proper place 035371% Ry SRR wid, an altar prepared for sacrifice; m B2 3300 me):%o LR having bought a sheep l&lg E—— e 299 W for the purpose of killing; dé;fiéfifi% deo WO 3] T, the sheep nust which you have bought and brought for the deity; e_egjgez égcseja?fix% % & 2) §e€s 556%)%:’30, there was a pupil with him for reading; —and secondly by 21 adding DS to the infinitive ending in e9e® (§§ 187. 188), e. g. ¥TAR0 ?«":vai 0335623@’_,39%0, in order to comfort the queen he spoke in this manner Ny (Cpr. 3, after 63); 3,37 RBSTy w¥ s¥R, wood piled up in order . - ) 50 to burn a dead man 9 0oJ 303 TSR TYRY sS4, oY, a post fixed in o, a threshing-floor for the purpose of binding cattle to; ReSRIR [0 0%, unt ;35?5@“"303&;5@71@3;%, IWBT wn), a prayer muttered for the removal of all sins when one has immersed himself into water. that ‘For’ (with regard to exchange or price), e. 9. ®3), TRZTIWA 'acfiefigi AUSE %Jas—r‘%ém, I bought this for ten rupees (see § 348, 19). read ‘For’, ‘instead of’. These adverbs used to be rendered, in the ancient o the dialect, by the dative, e. 9. Doanr=v &’)Uari;ioom}’\ Rgansio DTY OF ©nd unt 030, instead of the augments dzf and Do the augment Res is used ad libitum. (See § 348, 15.) b, ) In the modern dialect the Hindusthani og3e* (WBW), change, with ep 8) is very frequently used, e. 9. ©zI8 HERe YR IE wRUN TS BIIN y the WY BRR PF,TRTY %u’a%m, instead of his old book I gave him a new book; ©@?, wroan, instead of that (in its stead); wdEwITF, wRN, unll instead of writing. The Samskrita %3 (Tadbhava m&, o), in the 3 3, place of, in combination with espy is used in the same manner. quite ‘For’, expressing time, e.g. O33Ry IxFF, for two years. Cf. § 348, 2. T ‘For’, when it denotes privilege, duty or assigning, may be rendered ) 1S Jored as follows: — Bsee0mod, 00 W9 Hro THWD (0F TR IZHDY), it 1s for the poet to sit in the principal row. =330 & o8 S@ BBy, it is for ) him to do that work. & ZeT REDY Tos0RGY, this mango (is) for Rama. [T ‘For’, denoting that in view of which anything is done, e. 9. ZBRIICIT® mfi%@&go&mfi %@%o, he gave a plot of ground for a rentfree grant. that B.J935N %@é&éo, he gave for (or as) a present. fith ¢For’ when it expresses that in the character of which anything is regarded, jding e. g. VT caafiofid% 8980, I took him for Rama. ;)m 8, Enough, e. g. eady 8 FoS03%0 fie%adxg& (3-6. WBe BT BXY) CSJozécSrB, this house 1s )Med large enough. IzoR BesanRY, 8@% 23, we have bread enough. 889 heep 38* e — 300 s dgaad;&’& R0 98, I have money enough. See Dictionary under zpzo3 and 23e3o. 400! the disc XVII. On the repetition of nouns, pronouns, adjectives, sou numerals, adverbs, interjections, and imitative sounds [ 89 (¢f. § 253, 3). £vel P 303. In §§ 152 and 211 it has been stated that repetition of verbs % 0r ( is used in Kannada (see § 339); such a repetition (vipsa) obtains in the three dialects also (1. ¢ 1, regarding common nouns when it is intended you and @) to express simple regular succession (vipsi, &nupfrvya), ‘one after the other’, that occasionally signifies totality, ¢all’, ‘every’, e. g. T¢D Fed af te 3R%* 306330, he appeared with pomp in street after street (or in A §0n every street); o8 Solne* &3&53@, house after house shone; enpcH 3RYS ©3303TToRY, 80 that one could say (there was) auspiciousness 5ee in town after town; TOFRREFRY BN FORNARTROR oY RIT z‘s&éj (the ONT® W8S FORT Jpew IR00305O, when Karikilatola went from house A to house, from village to village for the purpose of ordering all people lar to perform press-service; %@@\gfi BNE VI, RDR T VD VeDRG, dail I will just now sow gold coins in all these streets; 3% ZIR TBone ©T95sy), in direction after direction (¢. e. in all directions) lotuses oy Ay began to flower; &% BXNYs® e K08, looking at one point of the dlSp\ compass after the other (i. e. at all points of the compass); @=8 dedF &ont 3% 338¥o =00x0F, when his renown covered region after region; breg 0000 . . . BOH, IB SRR 3008, Kalamégha . . . began to rage, von and whilst spark after spark (of anger) was emitted (from his eyes), looked. ever oy, 3% 3%&3@?‘ @g)’fieg) DoowaNnsAS ever T, %33“303& HONS BWIFANYR, Jear W, u?.g%?asao:ro\%fio TIRPFORY, WY B BRTRER; WCPT | Ume i@fi\gj fi.@@&mfi 308 BoenFo AREIS, g 3% 382)53 30 3Ton%¥o é’fic%zag 303, 305 3 ZyR SyRendo FRHA TIRRAR. HBeeLI? ||, ) S0me} on table-land after table-land (as to the Kannada form see § 253, 3) there and there (. e. everywhere) the host of Sabaras came like a Mo} B} 8l — 301 ——— W3 spreading out of very black hills on which fog appeared, holding the accompanying and accompanying (¢. e. the many accompanying) dogs by the collars then beating bush after bush of abundant foliage they discharged, never failing to hit, arrow after arrow, and with the repeated 5, sound of falling blows felled all sorts of game in the wood What shall I say? Bo¢ 339730, he made obeisance to stone after stone (i. e. to %o, having eaten mouthful after mouthful every stone); 302y 30371 oPCS3 JPLBRY e, the beauty of river after river (¢.e. of all rivers eths or of every river); S Jo (ejze e5%3 do) afié’o R9, greet elder after elder the %&3901, %C@%oodo zS*’r’%m;‘ (é. e. every elder)! ask young man after young man (4. e. all young men or every young man)! SIoNel9) there and there (here and there or everywhere, also @ ©); vaR&RA, step after %00 after step (i. e. repeatedly or again and again); Ro& SVBNRPBRFBoF L 10 333 Z0oma B30 0, once and once (4. e. once) at every word taking (his WO son to his breast) and caressing (him); 303 SHRSR%* (as to form Sness see § 253, 3) BRQ 3, 300 30DRBRY* eus“o in every one of (its) roots | A% i (the tree is) stout, in every one of (1ts) tops (it is) small; ed3 g3 10186 S5000 SPNT ISND BRez0E28,838,:3, all around the stem (of the »eopl plantain tree there) wave leaves every one of which (is) a fathom long; 9 Do BNy, BRA (FeSR) BwWerhd 8 Bey, (you) must go (to school) U daily time after time (i. e. at all the definite points of time); &%) 2w J 11158 Ry 30N TR, BRJN Towd FNR0Y 3y, the cow was very mild in pf the disposition, and used to give milk at the proper times; SoNg S0ONEN £08F 3o} o9 (as to form see § 253, 3) NI VBRI %33, cocoa-nut 1g10fl ) trees get new flowers month after month (i.e. every month, monthly); 1age goR 3on¥R BRCIRVS IZoeeFeCIYS, ¥, a magazine that is published e) eS)» every month (. e. a monthly magazine); sa=o 39AR, hour after hour, hourly; QS DI or BR DRT,, dHD = O35 or RS aafi“@ day by day, every day, daily; [0ow &Sdosfi or 300X éd\m# year by year, every year, yearly ; 2590 2590 Or 2390 23900, repea,tedly, orvon, that time-that time, e. g. repeatedlyV; (also with regard to the interrogative o3& S8 30, what time-what time-soever, .e. at all times, ever contmually), Remark 1) As to the repetition of nouns of time it is to be observed that the intended meaning 1s s somehow also obtained in the following way:—®Snt 3oni®¥r} I WSexd, what is his ] monthly pay? 2.595 Fodh TRABOJI® 960 éofifififidafia 73 0A®o, he cut the hair of the tuft once 53, 9) in six months. #e):é) faf~Yessrlefatilal @3#@ 53) -fiv@mflr& :)ad'a’-Ja 9. , FOIYNYH Boflfihfimefia ke — et 302 s b) to express a distributive sense (pratyékartha), e. g. & c3a9R030%s 1 BNAF ZPRo BpFe TR, & méda's’m;‘ BRAF ZPFo BpFo T, give pl each of these persons a gold coin out of this purse! give each of these i persons a gold coin out of this bag!; an which takes place with regard to 2%y and Soero also in close proximity (sdmipya, pratyasatti; as to form ¢f. § 253, 3), e. g. 3% FSR S0T0wone’, the pits of hell (are) lower and lower, 4. e. each at a small g distance below the other; P[o¢ SoeR 5 RrZtiwonies, the (various) regions Y of heaven (are) higher and higher, ¢. e. each at a small distance above the other; &% J3¢R CSJ'Z;)FE\O, times of famine (were) preceding and fir preceding, . e. preceded each other at small intervals; 30e SoeR :fioz‘p?\)\o, times of plenty (were) following and following, ¢. e. followed each other at small intervals; ha let ¢) to express previousness (anyatdtiSaya), e. g. wES B3R BRIR ST i SRRSRY (as to form ¢f. § 253, 3) T[p3omy, the Asdka tree flowered e first of all; BooBRY VST SRR SPTSRF ngg o¢, these shot first of all in the battle; Vel d) to express high degree, excellence, intensity or emphasis (atisaya, 03 L] visésha, adhikya, prakarsha), e. g. 30¢9°¢f 2oe°eF, great valour; oSexo the Sexo, excessive pleasantness, etc.; ao%csg;‘ u%mg a very good woman; (RonRo) BIRFRRYNY SIw& 3W¥o3, taking (his son) completely inside into himself (from love); %¥RweR Sos® w13, when the soil burnt cat deeply inside; o3y $PeROF w D %e3R &eay 8B, in order to see Vaj Val that people assembled in large crowds; ;jazéfiodo 8es Tyl B Tow ®oP w0083, what is the taste of buttermilk? it (the buttermilk) is the very sour; Aen g’;gggiez) ;soag;%fifi, the sigé is full of thorns; (%@&dd) the ’N"%@ W TN TILIDNTIZY, the elementary substance (of camphor) kin is white and consists of many small grains; o8 R0%8 BRBET Fwy N Qf wBTRY BHTO WRoEMZ 3, if (one) beats (them) with a hammer, stones a8 break and become bits and pieces; SwBewr SeBws [F, By, T, ¥F, 08 TOIDT, TAWY FRA Wewanod, sy, at the very first it used to be dig] Ay #¢Og 380 eI B, some clocks are to be wound up every day, some once a week, some (o once a month, 3@20??@53% TR B3 T AR [WIY, if she bears a child every hour, (there is) the same amount of kisses. &afipgi ®BIZ 30, (instead of I, ®IY) '3&:)&23% EpTele] hig &0 TINBRASTY [, %033, B, every day they print from ten to twenty thousand papers. (U o8 &afi% is expressed also by dFowI, a contraction of AIFMLY, ¢ when a day becomes’ brg i. e. every day. this S —— 303 ] A necessary to pay postage according to the measured distance of the ive place to which letters had to go; 8®@> 8z033, in the very middle; EScH] 1686 30‘@5@@?\ 3, 0h, having cut (the sugar-cane) into very small bits; 58?3; %% R, more and more, excessively ;— lose 39 ¥R (as to form see § 253, 3) Lperko, he went down and down; 41l nall X3 Rono, great calamity or sin; 3% B39y, excessive lustre; 3¢ 3¥B, great shine; 32¢ 3oeny, (as to form see § 251 and § 253, 3), up and up; 01§ 076 FoR Zowry, great dumbness; SHeR FPRITREPR B3 SR Fo SR BCBe wRT TRA Q&@ec;@fi%fi WK, by doing so at the very and first, for a while, quarrels with old people may arise;— st I3 (as to form see §253,3) SN %dofi@z@%, even at last having taken the high-road; Wiy WD %'e%%’z%ofio SEA the very last 9 letter of a word; #ééd Zwn, at the very end, at last; S0&%Son$ 5% SR red Ny, the very centre of energies; fiégj s8®yss, in the very middle; 73 b of D0 SReTH deg 208, Sotcdio, thou rosest to the world’s far-stretched very point; & 233D «:Sé\zaéeca@’odom?%w& uxs:mm;\ SR JRT X @333355_33 SRS, IPReF eafififid@%fioo, .. 9O¢ew938, there always shone A Lilavati at the very first, as the chief (town) for the inhabited countries that were situated on the south bank of the Sitd river; 131§ side ¢) to express variety, e.g. 38 338 wea B 2350&71% 008,33, there are irnb cats of various colour ; OSRY 3T 3TH BETRT) BTN, leaves are of §ee various form; Y Forneg wil wic Fe@und wrng 3, by bad deeds 79 various evils are produced; 3weRBRER wR WRR m%mfifigfl_ JRERTT, )is they saw various creepers in the garden; SR ZJyNonFo FBLTTF, they felled all sorts of game; ©$¢3 X383 VoY 30X WwRHSNYY, many i hor) kinds of things of various countries; Boea) B0e9y BRI TR do£9) 1 A &) %fig TRRARCs, the various petty chieftains came together and assembled an army that formed a miscellaneous mass; BPO Fo03203330 1nes o, U A curious way of expressing No. d is found in the following instances of the modern ) be dialect in which the action of the verb is intensified by the repetition of nouns, viz. =3 RIWDS & NTPNR0 OB % WE %@s‘%fio, because the buffalo died, the cowherd repeatedly some (or vehemently) beat (his) breast; “S zo0dy, Sort aao&osgoa’asc%, OB W WR TRE) B3 T, fiere his mother saying ‘‘my son dies’, began repeatedly (or vehemently) to beat (her) breast; a0 0, ATFY IDY FTHYNSE AR IF, Soce® e wARZ S & IR TR 0309% WT3,B B, O mother, if thou hadst repeatedly (or soundly) beat my head at the very time when I brought and gave (thee) the chain (that had been stolen by me), why should I have got into 168" this (miserable) lot? P 304 e il L B oSt L0, wk wdRMF wadd, they who watched the oJT corn-land . .. seized this cow, and beat (it) with various clubs; ESTORPSIS TmeFnRivy, things of various sweetness (z. e. various sweet things). In addressing a person repetition of nouns may convey the following meanings:— A envy (astiyd), e. g. BeIRI, BeITI, ATRIID FY ; ¢ approval (sammati), e. g. SonS, FONT, AT 29,3 Rody 037! br anger (kdpa), e.g. WONAT, wWorAn, ez’ QUFBIRe? AZ03R¢F (0 reproach (kutsana, nindg), . g. R0, 8205, a3, B, IF0 RBM ! it (&4 £ W ™ [ menace (bhartsana), e.g. 0¥, B3¢, &3, FeFZo! FAIIo! 1t Instead of repeating the same noun for the sake of intensity, variety, W and comprehensiveness also duplication and reiteration are used more or [t} less in the three dialects. 1 G Duplication denotes the use of a couple of nouns that are not the same as to form and often also as to meaning, e.g. 8% ®TY, excessive tickling; e85°d o, all sorts of cloth; e&sxe9y Bext, great fi weariness; zrodor, abundance; zo® Xpew, a very profligate fellow 4 to TN T, pod and leaf vegetable; Nz@ned (_%%), all kinds of small trees and thorny shrubs; g 3¢9, cattle and calves; ;sazéz,; 0e9°, frag- & : ments and bits; wmy ¥n, all sorts of kinsmen; [T, TS, 3 children and grandchildren; D53 33, words and speech; = fi@?g), 3 narrow ways and nooks; =03y, 03y, the state of being all around (roundabout). 2 Reiteration denotes the use of a couple of nouns to @) the first of which is meaningless by itself, forming a sort of ‘0 alliteration, e.g. @3.& 33,&, fraud in weighing; VTP B, prodigality; ©eP moe?, great tumult; £330 $edy, considerable unevenness in scales; 0r 3UTE (-=04), great fraud; v al b) the second of which is meaningless by itself, being a mere tf alliterative formation, e. g. 1) RO, opposition; ?,.;%3_&9)3 3%, tenants; 2ox Bena, all sorts of work; Bwosy BPRD, great crookedness; T3es3 (oM al] g3, all kinds of deities (or idols); c&rac;%) zbcg , inarticulate, stammer- i ing speech; 3¢90 mowoo, trade of different kinds; ;S?,g :dzg, various B eXpense; WY B3OV, all sorts of fruits.—In this second kind of reiteration the syllables A and ¥ are often used, being put instead of the f [— 305 P the first syllable of the first noun, e. 9. 3%y Aedy, T AD, 3D NN ?»%%w 7 W DT, 30% T8, ST, F,, BN T 2 ? regarding nouns of indefinite quantity (§ 278, 8) when it is intended g @) to express intensity or abundance, e. g. N‘gé @é’ =39 zea?ee" 0300 P SNy’ WERoo TTO30I5D ©3 V3.0 TIRIBREE d;@eacdo 383y, DU RF ¥OR* @S TeRonvo, how much, how much (4. e. the more) the plump breasts of the lotus-eyed Kirita woman increased, so much, so much (¢. e. the more) the forester in the wood thus scraped that his bow BRSVZINET 3 FRBB® VN B SOFI0TING if (one) cuts sugar-cane be 1t (ever) so much, so much, is it not very sweet? TBALRY VN TREA, ey, eRY 3o e, so large, so large (are) the cakes how many, how many 6 Or canst thou eat? b) to express a not specially mentioned amount, e. g. “5\;3 'a;s 2R3 R not CEY S %\mmfim TR zfle%a’m TN w3y, SRR ;Soeéfi <) %emfl%fim u‘g 7Y, when it has been %c%nae% ISBF, NRWIT) u%%fi D RRER TR I'e&t fixed that in such and such a time so and so many (various) works are low to be done, a watch is of great use to finish those (various) works within nall that limit.—This "aoa fio is similarly rendered by =, fio e. g. 3Re¥NY 84 5\) '"5»@93 Py} 236""0260 @@030 W), BOR &, 'aibou 5 3@@@71%3 33N¥RY éso (A & %, %JaéJ afida A, m a&ra:;)oomw Sy D& %mfi fie%fi O, fasi fas 3@ A, ;Ssa@zssjco AR, m 3Re¥ne 5937*%3 8, :—Sm %Jaejfi msmz%o:uamaficx @J@ and TP SRITI 3, regarding appellative nouns of number (§ 278, 4) when it is intended to express a distributive sense as to persons: ‘each’, ‘every’, ‘each severally’, b of Bone. by one’; etc., ¢. g. WS FOR avsfisargcé%'ééofiov BRPDFLE T, DR lm ) WATo FRBI&Tey, when Basava with unparalleled affection granted every Jes one numbers of things desired; 2.23%» RBOBINY 2»;3@ gSo maafisfio ARA) VUL YRFN[Y, RSy, Bwen 3edy, each boy must rea,d every term jere and tell its meaning; 33 3F wBRW, ROBININ & T, mfim Fed WeB, the teacher must put these questions to each boy; uz&o ZS*-@BN@@O:SJ Iltb7 9, ®3,T m&r@ oA, near each lady (there is) a servant ma,ld RBeRTO )0 ficéu@wé@u@ czj SN&X Fodooewy, when each (or every one) of the 16! 0us Bédas rose w1th commotlon and spoke arrogantly; Q‘é&cu@é#v ogjaz?afiz% Qo° . mm of 28wy FRA, they (two) fell headlong on the ground .. each one to a 31de 20 2309, 2 the w WRY 3 éo&efi 98¢ B©TY39. 8, each one 39 — 306 p— remains for himself: 2,230 DR OTRTEY CRTIN FRREZ e, I shall ) give them two Rupees each;— 2,23 By, one by one, by ones; %) 2.8 two and two, two by two, by twos [T TS 3. three and three, three orig by three, by threes; IR VZTRY DLW cah THOHA wé&m he sent them away two by iwo; z953 @33 ¢ 9fi oo?3fi 2T B d.) 35035 9 ab | [0 ;I $,T90 BweN 3,0, we are to go to h1m by ones by twos, (and) 1 sely by threes in this manner — Fo Fowdy means ‘some here and there’. whe Remarks on No. 3 a) Samskrita © & is also used to express distributiveness, e. g. W §2 BIBINR 3R, 8,3 8 W 118 PR, T3y, 30 WY, each boy must bring his own book i I, 3O &5355»@ @JE)OZ}J '3503 (] every man has his failines hel b) ‘One another’, ‘each other’ in a reciprocal relation is rendered by the all declension of %383, w3F WWE, or W in the p]ura,] e, g (@Z\) 03.)06) 33 3R FOR) FTRH) VPN BUORYT® L.BHIFOF L3308 Soed3 320 BOTOINRYS, when (the t0 § females) went to some distance from one another, and besprinkled one another all with various kinds of scented water; 237 2IFRF J00WJIW, (to try) to surpass one another VF0) %W T J0tdeW B0 @ INBIITB, they love one another (or EhY each other); ®I0> %2 0w 8y #tIZBY, they are not in peace with one another ; oy 22, 0 TRT 2%, 3 D 2,68 oboé I} zSe*u'-’o 22, 0%, 2,00 WO, they left one another; D —— othe (they) must be on friendly terms with one another The nominative plural 2WFBLWFTY wWBHWTY expresses ‘these and the others’, ¢.e. all, e.g. 888 WONIT® LWFBHWFTY TR, B I, when the of | assembled Jangamas all clapped (their) hands and laughed; 2 3HWTO WD Iecl F09,0 2¢), come you all and sit down! perf ¢) %W, in connection with BW3V, 7. e, W W 39, denotes ‘one or two’, e. g the 2,29, 28 RoM=ED, one or two women BIR, W WO RBew 23¢39, one or two are still to be invited CF. § 278, 1 (V00RE), ete.) d) 22 BRW I, wWRRW P, as we have seen in § 292, mean ‘a certain man’ ‘a certain woman’ About another way to express the indeterminate thre ‘certain see § 283 W 304. Repetition of pronouns is used in the three dialects 10y @) to express ‘respective’, ‘several’, e.g. RITO T 3 e M erleIat=lo) ey SowN BRI G Ty, the people were sleeping in their several tents; 9302 3 OR 00, 353y, 83y, FReBRAPWENR KPeETy, even they two rose, and went (i into their respective rooms: es0% Zof 330 839, $o3n9R, they went to their oY several houses; 3535¢ 33y, (a dvandva compound, § 250) G950, their Tow, respective kingdom; 353s¢ égjg FoR803) Tode L0308, 3, they take the very o 307 s hal] way to their several houses; es559 (Or €0309) AR BB INGVToo 3H,08 V0 BRY 32 O NTI D d e e Mg the excellent goddess Speech who ree originates the respective objects of sense in the ear by words & 0359 sent BD030T, Yoo FORSTY SPRIZ, BREN WeTo, (one) must do every work AN at (1ts) respective time; &@35’3 A& F BB %VS DoINTF aw epleronl nd) in the assembled mass of demes who are those each severally by them- ! selves that stand just opposite? o590 598 W B TOF 3wy, of whom when severally mentioned have (I) to obey the command? 33 3I3R W (§ 225) o3 WRABRT TIVIBTINRIIFKSF when they respectively Wl raised the loud cry <the victory (is) theirs (i.e. ours), the victory (is) theirs (4. e. ours)’ DO OIR ‘e’;fiqé 330, RB3 . ®BBRBY T9W3 B, even to fhe all their respective behaviour appears to be nice Al b) to express reciprocality, e. g. 330 3Z0R B R0 Bweay, having gone (the to some distance from one another 39y 3D SN Too SJoRSpes her ass all of them having taken pleasure in one another YORIIV.Boo 33 330R Voo, all the towns-people looking astonished at one another (or 11 DT/ 3 3:‘3@ IR wRPaRLS, zs 39, daily they used to fight with each () other; =30, 5&50, 338,91 weéobois faaaé they love one another; ¢) to express emphasis, e. 9. &53rx dm‘ nBesems, what does this cry the of pain mean? QReINe, A8 TO SRy SeRo O what! the way of the D reciting is very excellent! DVEBR BN SHBISOY, (they) do not perform the least work; I3z QFexsp @& wo, as for me there is not the least hinderance (or objection) a1e 305 Repetition of so-called adjectives (§ 273) takes place in the alll three dialects ot @) to express excess, intensity or emphasis (adhikya), e. 9. 30e8 3%0eT S03). Nes, very large pearls 2083, & (see § 247, d, 6) SeSne* very round female breasts; NP0 VP30’ NP, very white swans; z&razé i) A z&@d g3n*, very big elephants (these four instances according to sutra 391 of the Sabdanusasana), 3R¢0 30eTr 303y, 1%, very large morsels n nb (in which 3»ed appears as a noun); 0 20, that is very large; z&@cé 311’ z?mzé wodw 1o, very extensive plains; zfi@d fiJazé =Y rish, very lalge tow ns 2»%% 8%, ®BNY, a very small vessel (a boat), e_abcfibcfio that is 1! he very wonderful (also thrice repeated: ©0z05303)); B3 BRIR IR JGE 395 e 308 [E— % psfol=] 35395 IRGFSBOYFT0 [0 seeing that chiefs after chiefs had fainted pierced by many long arrows; Zwg 3»T, very far RBSRe 9 2 w3we, very fine; w3 wai, very poor or feeble; Reo Rea, very small; £ac b) to express variety, e.g. @Ry, (N%’ 3030 ) "SJa"fisaéJcfi IS Ferotal % off BRT BRT B3e3F, T9R39,38, they send that (sugar) to various distant Qo countries in order to sell (it); BT BNT BIRIR T TH&LE Bezard i) w3dF SRHTI, ;Sofia%oo 3RTIN, &)50 du@o\) JouN 3;3% DeFaSR, if (in by-gone times one) had to send letters to various distant places, the postage was half a rupee, three-fourth of a rupee, up to one rupee SR Fj RV NED R 3 NPR), I0BIZ9,8, at first (before they commit great e crimes) people use to commit various small faults ORIN B [0 AR a0 ) 393,59, he has six little children of various size; F3003,839 @&f@e AD) ) N?@ =9 §zéor1z3 NER LRIV a£ $%¥H 933, how many small 1s1ands and il AN sandbanks of various size there are in the sea! (but also e.g. 289 the BZR%NR wI0T B0 BPB Be3n%o 0303 53, to a division of the terrestmal fru globe belong many small and large countries); ©edg SSJJ@JS $08)y AT (th 0 w908y, the various chief officers of the army; @;Soéécas fi@QQ§ TORTOP ST, BTTRY, cfioaf. QRB an,zfuaéem Ty S9&, having made Amrltarava £a Govmdaravakale and othels various eminent officials. (All the instances A - under letter & are from South-Mahratta school-books.) an ¢) to express separateness, otherness, e.g. 3ee53 Secs3 separate gl different, several; Ko FINPY LGN BRT BRT ATy, the tiger’s ears are small and far from one another @n PR3 WD TN BHAD DR O3 of OB DORY WP BN BREMNIB.ORDBY S0 RECPR ««according to o each occasion I steal away by another trick”, said the fox [9y DT i DRI BRE INRNRNPRY, mPeRS 53, daily we see new strange things | of Remarks 1, 3 The meaning of ‘very’ (Adhikya) may likewise be expressed by W®% §0) ete., as shown in § 275 o 2, Also reiteration (§ 303, 1, after e, 2, &) of so-called adjectives takes place, e. g. W8 W, (a) very poor (male person) 0e 306 Repetition of numerals takes place in the three dialects CCE a) in a distributive sense, ‘each’, ‘every’, ‘each severally’ (cf. § 278, 1), B i e. dg. 5@%0“#@%}7‘@&03@ 5 3@(33 0 w?bm.)é searching the vegetables :'O (and) separating each one; &)N@O&-@fif)fi"@ ?.ué)J“ 53 [0eSAT DononFo il — 309 . 16k 38 0, he brought one excellent linga to every basti 230858 23eCITTINRF 3a - 3§Qw56 zo;'s’Ja ;io m%fi BT, PYTo0 e%éj o, he gave one balla of pearls to each of the dlfferent persons separately, B2, aSo‘@ o a)cfi"’a'\'{m%; 57 MY =3 230 B3 [N TE A e Y et el obzec‘ then the ten renowned chief tan officers discharged each ten arrows; awfym‘@ ®3,3), (¢- 6. By, BBY,) 0 Y (2. e BB 3y, BB 3Y) FINT FTINRNTRY [0B,RZ,B, every (10 day they print from ten to twenty thousand papers 3RnoxOn u;&e ) &Sg% ngy TOVY 313208 NG %008,:3, each wing of the flying fox tage AN is four spans long, S aéu@‘“’%:io u?w'\) SEEBERENT WRR T N fiodo:;;\ reat 230832 236823 S8 E32039 %ew%gfia he made (them) untie that bundle, by and told (them) to make each (piece of) wood separate and break (it); o vl\ 239033030 RN RAJBRIR B3, BOTY TARRP BTITT), LI and BOAR B, B®S,0RY FToMNRF B335, on each bunch of the plantain 6D there are from ten to fifteen clusters, each cluster has from ten to twelve 1l fruits BORRY 3003 wRRF) BB I3IN, 238, write even each letter on »)C (thy) board; ®»TII3dR wIR I SWTIMY BRREY, give a rupee to each % 9030 0300 SIIFONPE WRN T INF SN SIRFST® oSy, 0, as five letters v, each form a class, there are five classes DTRTRY S9Ke TRABRT 1068 wNES Nes, SRF 305° RETIR, 338 O e36900 T30 Ne* ©B,0, 1f two and two months are taken together, the six seasons, namely vasanta e grishma, varsha, Sarad, hémanta, (and) SiSira are formed; 330,13 T9OR 7ol S ©03 300 untody B8y, there are five claws on each foot of the cat; (WY z3e:$da DV OMR HTBIRD Tea) 119y, %flfiaaa" God has given two eyes 1 §0 @dzi%dzso :3@&365 ©5,08 3063 Fow to every man; Rex3s% ?’lé’sfi%fim A SR a‘éeéosa 3, they plant the bulbs of saffron in rows at the distance of two cubits each; aomn w9, each separately; (Zog8xo) ®o& SOBNRW SeFSor (§ 279) 3RR Nwmazégg’o o, once at every word taking (his 79, son to his breast) and caressmg (him); sanARBRIL ) LR 3803 DR 38, 50 WY BAIRRRBIS NONRYS, mountains wlnch thus without e ceasing again and again once at each galige sounded loudly; b) in indicating a thing, etc. as not known more specifically, ‘some’, ‘certain’, e. g. GB’ F 0 BT efifio o &8@;3 B30 (Commentator: 2»3.@ 8) Zo0TY; see '§ 248, 1), and © becomes © or ¢ in some places; w35 ] 1)’ e ?»3@ z3ea§ onVP e e,wrfi ee2° 2 330303, when the minister valiantly hles WRH T DINT TOLS %o mounted some excellent elephant and followed G Gl 310 [nen 3&03%&3 TRDOY WA T3 33, on the body of certain cobras hair has grown o WRR B TR MY BB TRECFe DEPRYTY, o3 33 some frogs are sald to swallow whole chickens WL R0 3e¢, at some time, at times occasionally; Feo FoF) (¢f. § 248, 12) HBw Frumy nys, diverse (Kannada thus words) have an optional bindu; 2y To Fo O3, some few days hence how To TOY) "%3?1%9@ WIT ofisae)% fieé RANYRY, ®28o 39,8, in one place or other (or somewhere) people plant seedlings of cardamom; Fo TJ) the B TORY ARBI N 30603 5 53, some few fruits had become ripe and looked fine sometimes also 20803307 (§ 279), sometimes 2% 534,539, 3 the 2%:30FRWs30F, occasionally. Compare the instance (R03R80) S SRS SPESoF ete. above under ¢ shor ¢) in multiplication, e. 9. HTBTRY, four (§ 278, 1) N\DQ R Remarks Of f( 1, Distributiveness is also expressed by Samskrita 0,8, eg IT,803H0 & e o3, each village 3030 ) TR WD, the people of each country 2, reciprocal relation is expressed by declension, e. g. @09 23J &Vdohw 3NONVAY B TVY WA 3 T, 200IF NI, &irilli, timi, timingila, timingilagila these four are fishes of which the one is larger than the other & O NLO %8 TR 30 BRYCIZ S, those divisions of the terrestrial globe join one another ?»5 @JB Rfo 53 (efwpia] 3.3\)('3?1%3\) houses that are near each other’ & (2»33033() Q8N 555503 ndc&e#fié 2«:5 & ?:ofi-fa 50 BRI Vo> D3 3, between those (planta,m) leaves (there) rise still folded leaves one after the other out of the tree nent There is the following curious instance in the Sabdamanidarpana, called an the instance of itarétara or anydnya L3RS e 303200303 LBNTY TBR MY SNBISB3R 6 U where one (party) takes up and performs the same action of another (party, in T, mutual fightin 0‘) 3, Also %D SATY uses to express ‘a certain’, as wIRATBY 3@%3, a certain I time, at some time or other WM IRI) B3, a certain country (see § 292 and g I f . § 283) Worq 307. Repetition of adverbs (§§ 212.253, 5. 281) in the three dialec Stang expresses a) ‘very’ (atiSayatara), e.g. %, ¥ 8, very blackly; TR TR W or I3y Fo98, very fragrantly; 808 3o or 59@ 39@3 very coolly, agai; ool oo or Do Do, very gently, ete.; ) r-Jw n)w aqa ;3 very insipidly, [\ etc.; 309 3Co8, brightly, ete.; B BN, dazzhngly, 83, 3z ;3, very g quickly; ney $E9 8, very qmekly, BERY YRK, rapidly; é%’ %3 vehe- AN o oo 311 e — Wi mently (as to form ¢f. § 303, 1,e, reiteration); DoR R, very abundantly: are ony ony, very quickly; e, b) variousness, e. 9. 2,3y, IHe@Z0 w3, when (he) was seeing thus- ada thus (¢, e. these various objects); 106 ¢) mental excitement, e. g. OF 3 ©Ip, Sortatdy Heess 9 how-how (2. e. 6 0r how is that? how is that?); Oh, tell (it) again' v 308. Repetition of interjections (see § 212, 8) happens in intensity in and the three dialects, e. g. 93T, ¥TD0, VOBV, IS IS, HSS, s s, als0 309. Repetition of imitative sounds (§§ 212, 9; 253, 8) takes place in W the three dialects, when the sounds occur more than once or repeatedly at short intervals, or also continually, e. g. MR, 2o Wos® ©RYEN; 3% B0 [wgoiy ¥R 3,B; fizi Nof Nof BFy8 3; NEO RIS Rty Ratd S830 TOTZIPRS® BRNRNRINV0; 3ng, 33 R (with the repeated sound of falling blows). Such a repetition may be used also thrice, e. g. ¢ 5\)@ Ny oo’ Roes mgg. \Oh@ gils o) XVIII, On the expression of ‘other’, on the article, her, and on the expression of ‘only’, ‘alone’. gy aves 310. The pronoun e9 (a?;&‘)), other, in its masculine, feminine and neuter forms, has been introduced in § 266; another way of expressing j an the English ¢other’ we find in the reciprocal use of appellative nouns of a¥, number (§ 303, 3, remark b), of reflexive pronouns (§ 304, ), and of m numerals (§ 306, remark ¢). Cf. also § 305, c. It is necessary to bring in the manner of rendering ‘other’ here fall again, viz. 1, in the sense of ‘additional’, and 2, in that of ‘different’. As and in English ¢other’ is used in both of the said senses, so also the Kannada words to be given below admit both of them, according as the circum- stances require, in the three dialects. acts 1 9 The meaning of ‘additional’ is expressed by prefixing the adverbs 48 BRY (&), afterwards, further, @3¢cc8, separate, and 5333, (23y,,§ 297), again, to appellative nouns of number (§ 278, 4) and to the numeral dly, &;a{%, one, e. g. fa'?ire)dfiro, (lit. afterwards-a-man), another man; fafi\@ia:)bo, another man; aflg.z%)#g, another woman; 23®» 2 %’%;fig, another thief; ! Bl'y ehe 'afifiisg, another thing; afi@g@% fox, another business;-—de&‘}&@z&m, oo, 312 o (lit. separate-a-man), another man; 333&23@%%, another woman; ¢3¢ and 633\@55‘% , another thing; dewgfiaé s, another place; 8@&33.@5% &g, another artl day; fiefigfific% o0, another dog; 3¢632 BoFoy, some other persons;— 3088, o, (lit. again-a-man), another man; Z038, I ¢F, another woman ; SVCRORSAR another thing; ;Su"é\@s%zg, another place; 88,8 =0, another | gar manner; S08R,8) DAY, another thing, a substitute; fio:&@ofig) 33, P another country; ;jeé’@ogs% Fo3s¢, another (or the other) hand; =08, Toof, of some other persons. (About =93y ¢f. § 280.) W@ The same is expressed (especially in South-Mahratta) by o@RE03e feac (DTEIC), second (§278,2), e.9. HTBEICDZY, another man; HTRJRIT, ol another woman; 3BSc30300, other people; HTBRIC30Ro, another thing; 0 | QTR %e), another place. 4 K) oy The meaning of different’ is, as remarked above, also expressed (o by prefixing the same adverbs to the same appellative nouns of number ) and to %R . o3, separate, different, may be prefixed immediately to gatl a following noun, e.g. 3¢G9%»os, another or a different village; 23eC3® fox 2ox, different work. s Both numbers, 1 and 2, are expressed also without the mentioned pre- % & fixes, e. 9. w3 %’J@éfi& W BRB B, to give one thing and take another il (i. e. bartering). w2 RTBRIR TR T 2B, W) %sfagga, Wi 3 fie@% , a gentleman had two children, the one (was) a girl (and) the other a4y a boy. 35 s;’)oéz&d SoeBc3R FOo3vaN zofioéommc{ SRR, u%sa j i 13 fi@;fig u%fi@fl@fig) $9®Ig, 3, they (the parents) do not equally love tha us two, (but do one thing to the one and another thing to the other. Jen AN BReN SBT3 AN @3wen, if one (is) a sensualist, the other (is) an hog ascetic. WY ©3,¢ TV, még XeRe sow, the mother-in-law’s time (is) A 35 one, and the daughter-in-law’s time (is) another (¢.e. different). s W) FOR, ¥R ?»5% fox, this (is) one business, (and) that (is) another d ] one (i.e. a different one). R To this belongs also the expression u@aég’afi% (uafig) ) &);5%), lit. one it is not, one, 4. e. if it is not this, it is another, some or other, e. g. ele; WY ;Ssagacéosjcscfi?’% 2»23@@3@,5% 308 WRoIFTIND DBR BTTY, by talking much some kind of offence or other always happens. ao%a Q@Qfioioa 2.0@093-@)5% a8 “&I-)Ofid@%’r}e 3¢z, a born living being must die some day or other. W) boe - —— 313 , B 311 There are no articles in Kannada that are perceivable by the ear her and eye; both the English definite article ¢the’ and the English indefinite 1§ — article ¢a’ (‘an’) are mentally to be supplied, e. g man Feordney &, the sensible speech of Karna 329 3208 ReREIF Toed other Bozsy, the sun rose brightly wIRRPR Jpen, having gone into the \4 garden. T, BRI, V3, the poetry has become good. S fefatc) %) ;)639550 he descended from the tree. ~MO) %a%d?‘fiméfio I am the son BT, of Mallikarjuna. TORINTY WRIZI, B, the boy reads 9.9&560 R N%L AV 3203 w0303 8. he beats the ox 33 TF0 RoBINJIN TORZo, RN, the teacher teaches the boy 933y Ao®P, wWowyzs 8, they fear the lion TS O Wi nRAY. the bird’s nest 3303 TRZY. the hair of the head FITVTO3 hing; R W, «r, the child is weeping DL, the horse is white FRR 3900030 SRV 30063 TREYE,B, the child sits on the lap of the essed (or its) mother. DR Tede é@e&ffi SN zfiegfi I am showing the way. mber BRe8NR SNy IR FR093,T3 &9, the daughter of the gardener was ] yto gathering flowers. TINIT0R xboswa Wy e SAFEY, the dog and the N 002 TRE fox are of one genus. e 8RB ;55)50 the word you spoke. 59X, the Kannada language 30?502::&53 the Hindus. *’d@ewfabmatfi | pre Feor ), the philanthropic Karna. K809 én)%s Oy, Alexander the great. 30308, 80, the rich. Rorvogd, the river Ganges esnR=ed, the gem of other ot the sky (¢. e. the sun). — 3STel, a head-tie. nRBRBA3V0, other 3@?&,@@9@ a fort with a choultry. a village- chlef WP RTo, thls (is) a learned man. 0953%° mzfifi )&) 50‘ that (is) a respectable woman e wOoR BRIRNF BRF T30, & garden Jove that is at a distance from a town. ©=3 33,0 83 980300809, he has a other pen RE, ®S8 T230300eay, you have an mkstand ~9'a afiozfi a small 15) an house. o NN & BBINTY PR, TSFY WRISTYE, the boy reads a book IO ¢ (1 F0503_ 08 I hear a noise. B0 BPIF AeSTINY, TPRVTY,, the master I sends a servant. DL 55557?5;&) SReBeS 33, we see a ship. KRR YR F other 7Y, a new book. m?e TR, 4 good child. c%d'azé *"’&fi a big box. BoRono, a bad boy DT Z3Jazé DEN DY, what a grea,t storm! oac,u ) e )’ Jif emNO&QQfifieé SleviNintwl how useful an instrument! faa") &, such an 0 elephant. ) by Remark M e The appellative nouns of number 37, %W, %, (§ 278, 4) and the numeral f dle s 28 (§ 278, 1) in its different forms (3%, %%, ?'055 23, W7, WU, WIF, WO, 黑3"') when used so to say as adjectives, cannot be used as articles; they denote 40 — PUEEN 314 “a certain’, ‘a particular kind’, ‘single’, ‘one’ (nearly equivalent to the indefinite 1m0 the article ‘a’ or ‘an’) %WFSdT0, a certain king. R INRIF NIFFP) 300 SR odanief awo FSR YT 33y JTe, and when one proud king treats an excellent (} poet stingily, will not continually liberal persons be born on earth? 33 OF)Z=0 20, 03 SBRE BBINAZ D, (there) was a certain hoy of five years called Sivu. 184 ROR, T3 W) IWY0RI) W) WVRI wewrn FeeN, a certain bad scholar having gone to a certain king. fioscgpflsfiodga 2»:5% 23330, multaga is a certain tree. 23 T, the a certain crow. %3y IR0, one day, on a certain day. %3 039, one mnight, 3 in a certain night. &:é% a3 2, mfiomfim Be0RON BRENITIN WBEIBLEN W) 3083 8RN zox?b B¢ Jercd JowAB), when one day a certain man went to a foreign town, there was the young of a certain tiger lying under a certain tree. a, ©FOR 2w IR @uesy, they had one boy. 22), 13,3 09 AL 23 FFP 930, 51 in the house of a certain Brahmana there was one cow. VO %Ry FT 568803 5, there a single tree appears. 23 DIRBR®® W30, he came in one day- 2039 G SHFBFO, he stayed one year. 22, fiéé 2 P an zé%mcfifis% 2y JoNIH ROP@I) ) DT, W DM ‘3%50, a certain gentleman had a certain son called Candranitha, and a certain daughter called Subhadra. P\ B 312, ‘Only’, ‘alone’ are expressed by suffixing the postpositions he 2 0T 010 WIF, WWF, W, WY, € J- wFd NeasY, wrid3uness, is he are not the only powerful man in the world? wWrS 3309 33883, “0, is he not my only son?” (thus he, the father) not saying. &%fie FHIJ, he rgs sat down alone. ?»2%)[3@ SMNMURENIA) %@9%50, he lay down alone in st the house. IR ep%pfig & B0 B5 %@%@%&2, I alone cannot manage ¥y that horse. @38@%6@ WE 8, they came alone. TR &%fle Etaga) g &g{ %‘séfio, I saw the king was alone. 380 3@3®%£Q A %"eé 30T 0 1tp wxd I eFosy, if he alone has to build the house, great toil will Iem come to pass. FoRY BEC1T AN $5930 @5359233(38 Fe9R0, he alone IIBR took to heart the advice I gave. ‘3303.@&5?%3, the mother alone. Mot W% (A , she alone. @6@%8 SseniF, this is the only way. 3R afififi%fie let =ongv, this is his only son. wR ¢ ;jéga, a single town. (See § 212, ¢, and ¢f. § 282.) i Le XIX, On additional tense-forms of the verh. hap 313 Ancient Kannada grammarians enumerate three tenses (kalatraya, fo § 145): the present (§194), the future (§ 200), and the past (§ 198). Why We have seen that both the two forms of the present tense of the M pE— 315 UER— inite modern dialect differ from the form of the ancient one (§ 196) Besides, O\l 30 the contingent present-future of the modern dialect has been introduced llent R \ ~ < (§ 195) On examination it will be found that the ancient form of the present VL is a compound-tense, and that the two forms of the present and the form of o008 'Jfi the contingent present-future of the modern dialect are also compound-tenses Analogously also other compound-tenses are formed in Kannada (¢f. ight, WY § 362), although they are not specified in ancient grammars, viz. t0a A sort of continuative Present, e. g. w33, 'az3 e, writing 1 1, e am, 4. e. I am writing (see §§ 172; 196, 1), or uéofioosa 2803, 98), (§ 196, 2). ¥F SBR[, BT 3, VTR TOVY ToEO3NE, ap) St et I 63, 9,3 fisoéaio 0S50TOR VR FRERIG TSR, TR onw WP &is@zéoé 3 23e3. dm) 8P IRBoNTTR _&_QN 3 a%m mzb o35 flocéo mzb o3RO 83,050 e f ha, %Jacéo ERAER pNoY~TaL=N Ndmfl ;Sm&ficaei% uzfio;fi SOR wYNYIY dsarflo-j %a~€ zf%efam:ds; afio;} BRA,TY 033@5 i?em%’da Bezond, o (L NI} till ueedles become 1eady and can be sold, (there) bemg are not, 1008 i. e. (there) are not, required for any other work so many persons as s h 16 are required for the work of making them 18 It is to be remarked that this continuation is also used, when the he present participle is combined with the infinitive or with the imperative, e. g ) 10 REspE o alole] @@adr'fiogf 3%38 SR, VIPFRT AT d Ino 336 ) 330 Rod3000, when &3 Wthh as a particle (or adverb) has the e meanmd of ¢a little’, expressing is, ¢. e. expresses, <the half of a thing’. e it partakes of (the rules regarding) euphonic combination (see § 215, 6 yill remark 1) 8ro8d 3e®, (you) must not (continually) laugh. Sorde, one 93 SPu TR NEQRVS TY O daughter, (continually) serve (your) 80 mother-in-law and (your) mother’s brother SO 3RCHUBY BB BRE e let us play in the garden ), 6 e e A sort of contingent present is likewise formed, e. g. @SR SN W0 Fistl SX~DY 2, writing he may be now, ¢. e. he may be writing now. {) H, The continuative Imperfect, e. g. PrIdoontro, entering he was, i. e. he was entering 228,20 P, JSSFRZY, T, when the monkey- banner rose to its full height and repelling was, 2. e. was repelling, (the 1a, foe, the idea of the past arising from the past participle ¥%)). SonoF &3, whilst he crush d (them, see § 362, 2, b). EANOIIR cflesfiw 0030T* VFYTS 9) o30R¢ emmyofi\ow»omm 3;3 3,8, BFTF, then the Apsaras, sa,ymg “huzza, the 40%* = P 316 — | huzza”, quickly brought waving-platters and holding (them) up were, 2 i. e. were holding (them) up BNRRDY P3RS WNR0E Iy, the ¥ washerman washing was, 4. e. was washing, clothes RERY wLWTIN 3 33 %Dmfi;’fio 23,87 B AT, ITPGeS SwES 3 3o, when thou (as of little child) weptest, (thy) father laid his work aside, and comforting art was, ¢. e. was comforting (or used to comfort) thee SO0 BReTIN wh 09353 w0e2) 3 B3 89, When I went, dining he was, 4. e. he was dining ol 10 SRTVZe YR.T WRITIN ST ONF IUNR VWS DO BREPR RN e 38 T W08 &, when reading the first book, the letters being known well were not, ¢. e. were not known (to thee) well therefore reading thou 4] 08° WA wast, 4. e. thou wast reading (or usedst to read), even each letter separately [ URIBOR BNTS. 0300 TIVIREN TR0 BN aé@@&godomo{ 1§ oo Wezarvd 8y, also then just as now becoming it was, 4. e. it became g (or used to become) necessary to sit in a boat and cross the river Wa 3, The continuative (or habitual) Future, G- 9 DO3RARSTDETS (Sabdamanidarpana siitra 14) employing they will be, i. e. they will anc employ (or use to employ; vritti BRENRIFTF) Noaoéo&ra%;‘ 80&%3 (ser TeoWIDF WY VODLF DR VBN YTy (Smd. s 59), in euphonic % combination of letters consonants without a vowel uniting will be with a1 ¢. e. will unite with (or use to unite with), a following letter (vritti g 050390 5353)) R B3 NBN WIS TR0 BN WRIZTTIN D39, w3030 whi 00238y, if thou comest at five o’clock, most probably writing I shall be, i) i. e. I shall most probably be writing, a letter. RoNRTY efiajdeom?:o (an Wew@o @ 0038y, women asking for will be, 4. e. use to ask for, ornaments Cf. § 366, c. by 4, The Perfect, e. 9. ©FerzonFo 3 ReNToFo B3, darkness having quite swallowed is (see § 203), 4. e. has quite swallowed, sun and the moon SNFET fiomfig‘ L% RUTOATD odoo 3¥BTrFo. know the last b€C| letters of the (five) classes; having got they are, 4. e. they have got, the oy name of nasals. %30%?;5 o RRF WRABFTA, having been born is a son, 2. e. has a son been born to Kulinda. Wi TOOTIRI Ndn)fia;fin fl%};fi; X809, N, Kalidasa having composed is, 4. e. has composed chatmlng the poetry. TBINT moSR BReNma e, having gone are the boys, 3. e. S have the boys gone, to school ? faile Q:?cé@m ooeF widy? «F 8, RRPEBTHOID RN ;)a” %Joef\m 8.3 afia"‘% uso B39 2, &:dd docfioe Al JDwe 3 TP, — ZRES™, @efio O BOH T ori@e Ssoo 08 bg i 317 —— 6r6 the Reown? —on[ SRRy 2328 (1. e zb'ejgs o, see § 196). — o330 5] ) l vy 4 wBiB, BRIT (i. ¢. 383 ©8). (f. § 315, In the ancient dialect this so-called Perfect may convey the meaning as & of the present, e. 9. 305 FTowYyo FIRF HRDTFO Sfi@éfiddofi, four ting arms having nicely appeared are, 7. e. nicely appear, on Vishnu. Also o when the common future of ¢ is used (1ike BFIFO), this meaning LI 15 A holds good, e. g. 303835 HRBWYYFR) BoednetdT. . . . Neagade3ons* 00 gneoon®, nicely having appeared and having shone will be, 7. e. nicely well appear and shine, even the numberless shops of jewellers, etc. aRFXs* thou ot er WLPOYFRON H3pef 8B¢Z0, a substitute having destroyed will be, i. e. destroys, like a foe, that which is (§ 198 under 3). If the final verb o) is in the infinitive, the meaning of the imperfect too is produced, ome ¢. 9. TRYTo W¥SX0Y, when the ear-ornament having shone beautifully was, ¢. e. when the ear-ornament shone beautifully. N Fo If this Perfect is formed by the combination of the past participle Wl Il and a verbal noun of the past, again the present may be represented \d,‘pé (see § 169 and § 198 under 3), e. g. £,7)3 T,F0HTF WBIB VRWBNNRB 010 WXOF WBeRTBoF 3P0 ""CS&fiQC;SQSo xddgqso &’)Cfiri@o ?5‘{3)@833030;35‘ DTRTY,0, W1 i a union of two words which consist of a base (and) a suffix, having ittt desired by having been (or by being), 4. e. when a union of two words dou) which consist of a base and a suffix, is desired (or is to take place), two | be, euphonic combinations are formed by the learned, (viz.) the internal & (and) final one (§ 214). 2PICDIABIFTY DOFIDA 'v"%?ofioé& SRIaEAY ents SNRY WRBRY® BeSonaBdWRoe, it is impossible also for a king to remove by slight what having been called has been, 4. e. what is called, destiny. It may still be mentioned that this kind of Perfect may be used in (11688 and the imperative, e. g. goRd wESREBHBIR wdA ©ng®, dinner having Jash become be, ¢. e. dinner be ready, within my arrival! RodoRgs wT=H e3R8 Ty RweNdeeed, having gone let us be, 4. e. let us be gone, the §00, within the guru’s arrival. i It is scarcely necessary to state that this Perfect is used also when ming the participle is a negative one, e. g. & 335° VR DIBOFY 0 BHF BIWE, 5. 0 since how many days has this Siva not dined ? % 5, The future Perfect, e.g. gos> ¥, TR WIAR R VY BFNFRY 7308 28838020, when I come to thee how many letters having written thou shalt 08 be, 4. e. how many letters shalt thou have written? @ofiag waR Soedd - 318 s TIRY BREAN BRENT3RY, when it has struck five o’clock, having gone it cal out I shall be, 4. e. I shall have gone out AB, BeDIIWFR SROSREBR ¥R 33 ©anR 8AZusRy, whilst thy worship of the gods takes place wa ha my cooking having become will be, 4. e. will have been done 6, The contingent future Perfect, e. 9. Regs wman &7, BORG SOD 63@33 when thou comest, my work having been fimshed may be, d.e. kar ex may have been finished. 035900 & T, w@baa o, who having written this letter may be, ¢. e. who can have wrxtten thls letter? @ma P31 de it weR @ndedy, at that time dinner having become may be 7, e. may have become ready 7, 'The Pluperfect, e. g. 9= WTISET, D, S00W TR B39, WIOR I e having written I was, ¢.e. I had written, the letter, before he came B3> RoBNE. Fovotd [ o3 0l 3 <o, having left he was, ¢. e. he had left. the house before ten o’clock BTT WIIBE, B, Do TR Ik 30, w0303, TR Xy, having sat writing letters I was, . e. I had been before he came. 83 writing letters, Seny B8R SRR 63&)@?\53;53 333 R PRR SRRRENB W, having gone I was, é.e. I had gone (or went), to ho his house, but he was not at home. -3@3 AR ZoSR 059F W QW Tl why having come thou wast not, . e. why hadst thou not come (or didst thou not come), to school the day before yesterday? 8 SDNZTI oIN of DT BOW BREAD 030e? DB, BREND R0, having gone thou wast ever Having gone 1 00 i. e. didst thou ever go, to the house of this old man? was, 4 e. I did go, the day before yesterday WA STB FHNR W) BOE I S89° o3 under a certain tree a certain tiger-cub having lain down was, 4. e. had lain down BAR ToOR WR TIRY A, TOT 1 0 a certain snake having coiled itself was, 4. e. had coiled itself, round the foot of a kite the female sparrow i 38 ¥ Sued a%e@omz:) TR, having sat was, ¢. e. sat, on the eggs. 09230 303030(\40 ir#\ou To00NT, a8 N S0 [oTeR %Jazs 63830 king Adyuta having died was, 4. e had died, one leaf Ul before king Kr1shna bBos DR ICHINIBRR DY BEIDD, within the reading book having been torn was, . e. had been torn (i & TRTION OO T BRHB? 33, 30O DA where did you find Y this rupee? Having fallen it was, ¢. e. it had fallen (or was lying) 1n my house. ea;:a 839, &3, SRENT SOOI 08 Seed ey **aé.» W O mother, in our back- yard on the mango tree (bees) honey havmg put f§ was, . e. honey had been put (by bees). 22, ADTIMRN ToENRT, BREN it ot 319 — 0ne 236%53) 2»5% WRY VIIIT #iwoa’i ;3:@&?\)653553, a native soldier having 39 caused was, 4. e. had caused, a certain very sharp sword for going to war 108, »33 8, afie&fi ua%fi [ mc?;%%, when he came to see me, having dined I was not, ¢. e. I had not dined. Ao Already from the instances quoted above it will appear that this b kind of Pluperfect, though in form a pluperfect, does not always clearly fen express the meaning of it. Thus in the ancient dialect it may simply 3 denote the aorist, e.g. S» FToRABoFZy =R, the month Migé grandly 10y made its appearance (see § 298 under 3), or the present in the instance @eo*oadaio%wfisg VRO DROTIFRR 333;35@@)03@@6? and in the instance oY Qo BLNTFRp DRRBRT IRorto? (see § 271 under do), Compare 16 § 315, 2, I (about the passive). 14 Remark. Also relative compound-participles may be formed, e. g. the continuative % el present one:— ©XI W33 BT XL3Y; the continuative imperfect one : — T30 @;5?65& efimcéoim%r{ 033933R ¢ mg)m fflams% m’%do; the perfect one:— TG ] OmaF ¥ onody 28> BB, (let the wood of) that Cénnangi tree ornamented with to bosses (be taken) for a elub (§ 241); MW, 23 Se¥R WOTIT Toe) FAMEIY ©OA V) ) BR 89, 839,33, st 314. Here may also be introduced, especially if the compound-forms of the modern dialect given in the remark on this paragraph are 1, 1 considered, what is called the Conditional or Subjunctive by Europeans. Does it exist in Kannada ? Il 1 There is no subjunctive mode (mood) or particular form of the verb in Kannada, which is used to express condition, hypothesis and )y contingency; the Kannada conditional is formed simply by certain e suffixes added to such parts of the verb in its indicative tense (see § 144) W as we do already know, 4. e. to the present-future relative participle ) (§ 180 seq.) and past relative participle (§ 175 seq.) in the ancient and medieval dialect, and to the latter participle in the modern dialect. The suffixes or postpositions for expressing ‘if’ (§ 212, 6) are %z I (in the ancient and medieval dialect), @ (in the medieval one), and %3 (in the medieval and modern one), ¢ being the original form. %8 very probably is 2.z¢ (which we believe to be another form of 9 %%¢, euys, to be, see § 194, remark 1) and the o of the infinitive (§8 187, 4; 188, which ) means ¢at the time that’, <when?’), e.g. JpedRa, at the time that, or when, (I)'go (=the English ¢if I go”). et 320 ety About %@ (=»a®, »8) the grammarian Késava says the following: — V) «The word 23 which expresses a case (or supposition, paksha) and ends in (the vowel) o, is added to the end of verbs (dhatu), it being B0l connected with the three genders, the three numbers (and) the three persons”, e.g. SPELIHEN BI§¢ FCIP° o, if (she) sees (or inquires, ¢.e. part for inquiring), she (is) the junior; ®zo J0BZJpITo LORe, if (he) speaks bug 2eBIRP properly (é.e. for, or in, speaking properly), he (is) the senior; thes 3O FB308 edono, if (it) blows, a fragrant breeze blows there;— "53 am;fipz&@;fi?fi w9 o, if (he) fights (i. e. in fighting), he alone (is) ove i) who possesses skill; wfiQ@NJ@a@fiFdoo 3% o, if (they) compare (é. e. for diale comparing), even both (are) fit pexsons, SoBi3pwe Too Ss035003a0f, if (they) speak, all of them do not know (proper) words; — DRTFIPBRS are se% 3o, if he approaches, he (is) a good one; 3BorRpAETTEYTT, if it (they) correct, they (are) good ones; 230239 @ Jew W, B3, 1f (thou) solicitest, thou (art) a good one; RIPRB S am?&)u‘ if (you) give, ton you are good ones; gANVRTIT® W¥ C3o, if (I) consuier I am a good one; I]egc 100 RO BROTODS w® 53@, if (we) serve, we are good ones. (It will be observed that 2@ may Sometlmes be translated into English by <for’, ¢to’, <in’, as wel also e¢3. @3 may get that meaning in the medieval dialect.) 49 (oY «Also for the three tenses 2.7 is used”, Késava adds, e.g. YARAE zl’)éio if (he) lied, he ceased; RHoIRIPR TR o, if (he) opposes, he Ex]! kllls 238 2T 3R FFWR0 S0RIT0, if (he) will pamt he will have a brush the brought Another instance of Késava’s is the following verse:— 010 to 1] @em%‘m RoeY, TRWLO; @Q;So%&.@ e weq Soaz’a wee?fiOde %5 | adde ‘peéo@n z?mm 2393@ z% Wi QXY a;fie) o.;J@%fi;S m@éaé*@m? ) (See its translation in § 360.) Acg Instances fiom other sources: — @33 VONY FLeLUS3oT DEIRIIPR 18e( 390 [3D3R RBow. — zeIpRo (if he protects and) Snosspn (if he kills, 4.e. for protecting and killing) 3083 desdAWE F3F30 B T Slal ang SpBo BRLIPRABT Lo 23r8e? — VRONRIBPRIBSS0TY, TFF3B Stat 359RFo.— BRRISR=eAY (if we shall give, 4. e. to give etc.). — 3 ¢ é\faw [] fiO:SOQ d)“ In§ ang 1) It may be remarked that the Tulu 3 in the so- -called subjunctive, e. g. in SIPPY, S-3, if T make, seems to have originated from ®® (=®u®) by the euphonic elision of mltxal ) after a preceding vowel. by ; — 321 e ATZTODNT B, FRVIST TISTZTIIE Birde? LN & EDY e 1 500N BRI B. — BRI NJES&?’J% THE WPRE 09,003 QRN — 13 B BB BBF, ®3.0 AR 3 B 00 w® and g are suffixed also immediately to the negative relative L]\\ participle (§ 175), e.g. 30399, CBNB, B BRB, V0 BRB, B BB, FLIEH P but they are chiefly suffixed to a following amF, as vBeF® and B3R these being joined to a preceding so-called negative gerund ending in 0e 83 (§170), e.9. ¥UDBRFR (VVB+BBRFR), VO DBRFE (VL B+ In the modern for BRHFAR), T3, 0RDBHFR, 3LBOBAFR, TRBOBRFE ", dialect wherein 53 is employed and mzg takes the place of wziF, there col are e. g D3, VOOET, IRKOEB, SRRIB I instead of ©© 3 if it uses also BReS (VRET+ ¥I), €. 9. INABB RREIT, ReL3IT BRETT. o1 Also Samskrita 5% has been used by Késava in the so-called condi- tional instead of 2, (@z% and 3), his three instances referring to the 06, negative relative participle, viz. 5930805036238 BT o, if the conven- ved tional meaning of a word is not destroyed. aafiow r\)& IRE D Nvo if the a8 well-known meaning of a word is not destroyed (gagjgw AR OVAN @Céd =T D,3RCFPIPOITS wRIB BT 0 (sutra 235). 39 commentator) rfvé calthough’ are In § 287, 5, a. b it has been seen that ¢though’ he expressed by 2.3, o2 and 3 in connection with &o, evo, ew joined to ush the past relative participle, and without those postpositions by evo, e joined to the so-called gerund (§ 154 seq.), and in § 288 by &nwg joined to the past relative participle According to § 287, 8 %@, ®r and &3 1n connection with o, enn added to past relative participles express ‘whether —or’. In§286 we see that %z and 3 in connection with e, enn are used also in a copulative sense 0) According to § 287, 6.7 w3, &3 and e3 in connection with eo, evo are te According to § 289 5fl used to express ‘at least’, cat any rate’, ‘even SE0R O &ane, express ‘however’, ¢but tc According to § 291 23 79 and 3 in connection with e5o, e mean ‘soever’ and in § 296 1t 18 e stated that es3 joined to the past relative participle &3, expresses * but’. X In § 338 it will be stated that 2@, etc., when added to a past participle and followed by wo 3, get the meaning of ‘except’. Gy In the modern dla,lect ‘unless’, ‘except’ are frequently expressed 1&1 @ by Rw3F (a&fafifiéo\ following a relative past participle (§ 282,%),e.9, 41 e 322 ——— 101 DT BPRE BRIJF mev wIdd o, unless (the guru) initiates, final beatltude does not come. mfi) é“:fldfio @% AT BRZF BEIZTY 83 4% (i Loy 3 BTN ©& 8B unless (you) take notice of other persons, other I persons certainly do not take notice of you DOTIFD IPBRT BRIF Tookel Fe¥, except (one) makes a legal complaint, the kinsman does U] not hear 211 (0 ‘Lest’ 1s to be expressed in a particular way, viz. by monR (or @8) in connection with the relative negative participle, e.g. QY FoON TR (1. bec ARew) 3980 xoR BReFwing, take care lest your foot is (or be) hit by the sickle. gar Q30R afi@fia"fae@ Un8 TR WP T8 &3, wWIsHY, do not eat many pungent substances lest your stomach pains (or pain). the BREINDVON 035'@5:3@;50 FORRY WD woR) ReTong, 3, 035@556 wfi@% gral N 330R Swesen mdfim WY 2B was 2.0059, 8, deceitful men must use much shrewdness in any affair, for all beings are watchful lest they be Lsh deceived Remark dfi Some pertinent instances from the modern dialect of South-Mahratta (S.-Mhr. school-books) with regard to the use of «3 in the so-called i conditional are the following: — 88 u8mg®§ W30S, 538 DORY JF, TRA a3 23030383 §o (literally) coming if it was (or 1s) to me to write, wrltlng or I was in company with thee, 4. e. if I could write, I should write (here) J3b) in company with thee SRR ¥R T, Yo Se? WS 33 [oPe w! TRR BP9, is mine not the same road (to school)? Coming if (you) are (4. e. if you come), come even to-morrow! Let us go together. v Kar RROFRY BY 63:38 S} %5303093 30w 2BY WL By, T, TOWNS, B, AB WP RS b@f\ %oé&oé v, zsaja wHTE v, the sun not being if was (. e. if there were not the sun), on all suies coldness falling was is 160 (¢. e. it would be cold everywhere), darkness would cover, trees and creepers would not grow at all, and we should not live RVRANSY B hag &58 ""Soocsc&faems aosa cSea’@N SATCNON aio deé% RRNROFH, WIOTR 1ty Pra 233367% &)doé 9, Sh1ps not bemg if were (z e. if ShlpS had not existed), coming not was to men (¢. e. it would have been impossible for men) to Ouy Blity go to and to come from one country to another country. T3 zIo0® 203 TG 3 & ©0R,T) S’N 09T W03, 3y, my mother’s word having heard if (I) was (é¢. e. if 1 had listened to my mother’s word), this Sl misfortune why befalling me was (¢. e. why should this misfortune have e R befallen me)? I3, SoNRe, TR [OT VAT 3 [Zy, TWwervd Q, my son - e 323 nal from the tree having fallen if (thou) wast, having died going thou wast, (¢. e. my son, if thou hadst fallen from the tree, thou wouldst have died). z’N her 9.90333339 SR TR %Ja%éjcgd@ & NBITY, 9%y 0P0NW TRRG, B o, fifty 3) rupees (one) having given was though (i. e. though one had given fifty Jges rupees), this tree to whomsoever giving I was not (. e. I should not have given this tree to anybody). & 300w 3§, 390R SPI Fe9g S enT N TR @floi%%, the young one its mother’s word having heard if was N (i. e. if the young one had listened to its mother’s word), to it disaster hit becoming was not (é. e. no disaster would have happened to it), Re- do garding B Y see § 316, 2. n) The author of the present grammar has not met with similar instances in the ancient and medieval dialect. The Rev. Mr. Hodson writes in his elementary 200 grammar of the Kannada language (second edition, Bangalore, 1864):— ust ¢ ReR0 3od BeerdB 3, WOINIY, if you had told me the day before yesterday, v )6 I should have come yesterday.’’ “This sentence may with equal propriety be expressed by: 30 3wd e’ %6 S, m&éom, or R BRF, ée@’%fi RS, W BIFFY, or AW S0 éecos%d CIERALN it 33 30, or A J0eF, BT AF, W0 TIII. ! Jled el “The negative is similarly expressed by the use of the negative mood, as: ] 2eS0 99, famfac‘s’ S, BB BIR0 IR, or RO 9L, famg%é o, RBR TBBRY TR, g 1ng or R Y AP 3 B AVBHWIR FIBNBD Y, or R BY, BBV T, AR WO pre m03@ 9BIRY, if thou hadst been here, my brother would not have died.” ! 815, Also what hz;s been called the Passive (§ 148), named karmani- jou) vidya in Samskrita, may be classed with the compound verbal forms of her Kannada. s! % 1, The term of karmaniprayoga, or the use of the passive voice, was 10 11 distinctly used in Kannada grammar first by Bhattdkalanka in the year was 1604 A.D. (§ 8, note); long before his time both Nagavarma and Késava and had not yet given that name to the peculiar compouund-verbal form and %9 its use which he designated by that term. Sttra 2510 about karmani- i ) praydga that has got into KéSava’s Sabdamanidarpana, is not found in d), our best MSS., and in those wherein it is found, it is called an anukta- 1) t0 sfitra or interpolation; it is based on Bhattakalarka’s Sabdanusasana. i Bhattakalanka’s instances regarding the karmaniprayoga under his o, stitras 443 seq. are the following:— 11 393° ATY* fi'egjo, 393 ATSE xéésc‘; AT BTSE 33%0356, e WAL g0l A TF 33%0‘; SR AT s%o, B35 AT x%@;_msrw 298%0 41% — — 324 9,3953%0 zSecéef H RREIFRR BoF (=3,) Tovo FEEes By T; get SRESRISDIeVL 50—3’660 5%5&0 WBRARTF wwo; WeRoTolIT® VTR0 R are oo FePOF ?dégjo;_éowofie;‘ NPT @03%:3@6 xu&;@ AReSERo; 1T per; NPSS BORo FIIFZ0RS WEPRNIRS® ;:égo,o; BTRAIY Bo DWBFRSF z:éé’jo;- Bx] under his sttra 530: —3»BE* BT el T EIR0; ROED® T4 {n BTRF® Bonyodo; WA [Y 30083 TRo; [RRS' DRMSR Was 330,Bo BIRN0; IRV RRINRHY, BosWRT, & 238%0; — under his sttra (i ex] 5D R Séejdo or IR ?'.Ségjo; NPT ?Jééo or NS T to; TR & :-.jéjgjcsg or IR 5&3&5\); — and under his Sttra 209:— @#&maéofioo all TBTo fiOZ')J?SQJ‘ 5&3&53; ¥BFRo IRANJT® ¥Fo SPARS Séfig&do; ®D ull 00F FRR0 TEFO IR Fef 5%0. Iy Now let us see how Nigavarma and Késava introduced the form of (1 the verb which Bhattikalanka says that it belongs to the karmaniprayoga fog or the use of the passive. kin Néagavarma introduces it under his stitra 80 when he writes, the agent to Ar (kartri) may be expressed by the instrumental (tritiys), e. g- B3B3 o SRR 5&3&5\); ofiow@dgao 2eCIed ajéjgscso. 1§ Ké3ava introduces it under his stitras 126 and 128 saying: also when gt the agent has the meaning of the instrumental (¢f. § 347, 9) the nomina- T tive (prathamé) occurs, e. g. for ®¥=Zo IWBE (0. r. IPBF) afléi&z:fio fi there may be used @30 IPAF; VRITIS® ¥F,FSWo TPBS (0. IS, B Soen and F9B) ;:és&m; 6@';563356 Q0 2ees 23&333550. B £X In other places of the éabdamanidarpana we find: Z[eede* Trrde (sttras 51 and 128, where the commentator has £eC9sf TRJ)s, TeLoes tu RWYT)); o3y of 2RIy (vrittl to stitra 127); & Do TBF 3y one* i (vritti to sttra 272); and zodwens mwnrvo (sttra 110, commentator 1 :’N)o&@efl:fi@‘ TRIFRY). . From the above instances it is learned that what is termed karmani- i prayoga by Bhattakalanka, is the use of the infinitive ending in @ef, o Ui and & (§187) followed by the verbs =z or 3. Instead of ese the medizval dialect frequently has eeo (see Dictionary sub @ 1), e. g. ®en a ne 5&3&60. The initial £ of %Ry may be changed into 2, e. g. eveoes mu&éo (¢f. § 215, 7, a). According to § 188 the said infinitives are verbal i nouns. i o e 325 Both ©zs and =@ mean ‘to experience’, ‘to suffer’; ‘to acquire’, <to 0 get or obtain Nagavarma’s instances under his sfitra 80 (see above) 0) are therefore to be translated literally: by Dévadatta a making it ex- perienced (. e. it was made by Dévadatta); by Yajiadatta a saying it experienced (¢.e. it was said by Yajiadatta);—and KéSava’s instances o under his stitras 126 and 128: by him a making it experienced (¢. e. it was made by him); a padaka by the goldsmith a making experienced 1% (¢.e. a padaka was made by the goldsmith); poem by me a saying experienced (¢. e. a poem was said or told by me) NO Let also some of Bhattakalanka’s above instances be translated liter- 20 ally: by a Brahmana the king a village a begging (the begging of a village) experienced (3. e. the king was asked for a village by a Brahmana); by the cowherd a buffalo milk a milking (the milking of milk) experienced of (¢. e. a buffalo was milked by the cowherd);—by the king by the cook o food a causing to prepare experienced (i.e. food was ordered by the king to be prepared by the cook); by Hari by Arjuna Karna a causing nb to kill experienced (7. e. Karna was ordered by Hari to be killed by Arjuna) The so-called passive, especially in the instances of Bhattikalaika, is rather queer and clumsy in character to a European’s idea; but as en stated, it was used in the literature of the ancient and medizval period t) That it has been used also in the modern written dialect will appear e. g o from the following instance met with in a South-Mahratta school-book I§ 30003S) RIPSBRT. WRGSY RN BB B, VRO BBREN TR 8, RIS 2@038. 8, if (there) is no sickness of any kind in the body, that a saying experiences (i. e. that is called) health;— but it is rare in modern litera- 0 g ture, and in colloquial language it is avoided, and if used, is generally not understood by the populace ¢ A peculiar way of expression is found in Bhattakalanka’s first ) etc., which are to be instances gogf BT To, FTF VIV [ translated <he a being experienced’ (. e. he was), ‘they a being experi- Il enced’ (¢. e. they were), etc This may be called periphrastic, as in the present case the simple verb woF, to be, is expressed by =o¢ and =@y he A similar expression presents itself in the following instance from an N ancient classical work:— 593, 30 F03NRTe Now’ TROVTD IBTLSF fiaowwfio 203230, Cupido will lose his wits, not an overcoming obtain- al ing (4. e. “not overcoming) that Nayakirti, the chief of those who strive after mukti. 326 s 2, Other modes of expressing the idea or force of the passive in Kannada are the following: — 1nal a) the mode of joining the verbs =z> or T to nouns, e. g. 23 OZBEy (on A (-@), lit. to get surprise, 7. e. to be surprised; ©833) (-zQv), lit. to & get a fit state, 4. e. to be made ready; Z&o Tz, to be bound; ;’\g)eaaizgg (-=a@2), to be loved; Tow¥ m@y, to be ashamed; 350 2Ry, to be wearied; qui ang FOSA (-n@), to be cut off; HAEIR (-x@), to be powdered; &I (-x@), to be struck; s300e9°=3@ (-x@), to be broken or defeated. Cf. letter . n b) that of joining the verh 3896 (3€99), to get, to receive, to nouns; I in the ancient and medizeval dialect, e. g. 9327€2¢, lit. to get a wound or wounds, ¢. e. to be wounded; 2%.23322¢ (-3&), to be arranged in proper pla sal order; TR (-3€¥), to be cut. Cf. letter n. mn ¢) that of joining the verb pero to nouns, e. g. F&Jperdd (-3peny), lit. to .go a cutting off, 4. e. to be cut off. (Y. letter o. b ¢ car d) that of joining a&eer> to the past participle or gerund of verbs Car that are commonly used as transitives, e. 9. P30 BReBRY, that is past, that is lost; 933 QTBR TowIRB TRRY BReRT), his two legs were ha o cut off. fim%usgm %’@9%8 38 Rwened 3, if (I) buy sweetmeats, they will be eaten. (Ui e) that of using the causative verb QR0 (®d=0), to make say or (i f o call, to cause (one’s self) to be called (see Dictionary sub wvoce), very frequently in the three dialects, e. g. 8030 *i%&dafiooo SESAOI I ST Ronrvo, and the first ten letters are called monophthongs; 833 390 Ve] P B305323v0, the mother of the Dinavas is called Danu; s@r@e®35° 2 B0 R8s, the wife that is called the half body (of her husband). SoRIYo IR0 fi?fi@éfié ST emdo:baaééo, of Udayaditya it is said th “ Manu and he (are) virtuous people”. In the ancient, and especially in the medieval and modern dialect, 13 any causative verb in the past participle followed by the verb 3¢ (TR, d]a & %Jaeéga)) also expresses the force of the passive, e. g. T, aafifi;s% @aa;&@gfig) DR, ZIA TR =9, T9Y)0, any object which is called a recipient, (is) a saying sampradina (é. e, is what one calls sampradana); 330d5° ©dA FRFS % & L 3%,3=0, one who is fit (or deserves) to be beheaded; %%?\’ %’Jaag;flm, one who is fettered; FwdA S =FZy, one who is pushed away; 200 (3 Feg I, one who is calumniated; BIBRANET BRRA FRF 3 B, SR, 3 one who is fit (or deserves) to be whipped; 3359 7,008 YRTIBTo Al 32 1t SRBA FRPITSRY, one who is respectfully saluted according to the manner of the Sastras WONT FTRCH W FHRZE 38.Oe, though &) (one) gives the desired object, (one) does not go without being abused; o T DN 033530 RRRITZTR NJSJ&@"Q BREA %-J)”@o mmgmfi n)éjo pafet e accaomgsa@ however so much (one) beats (the doo) one has reared it i quietly allows itself to be beaten and does also not become inwardly angry. Cf. § 341. 3), /) that of adding the verb esm> to a verbal noun used more or less 1§ in all dialects, e. g. T 3weNRSZBoR, lit. it becomes a using, 4. e. it is or used; JpeORIZS o8 3pee® dZwBv0, lit., where comparison takes er place a saying ed (and) Fpeef becomes, 4. e. @3 and [peer are said (or used); wmy) ZAZWER D0y, FIVT 39 B, RPN B in one hour four thousand sheets (of paper) a printing it becomes o) 3). ¢. e. are printed; ©ZJZ AR, PITS BDREBRedTINGY, lit. by him a hs carrying such a burden it does not become, ¢. e. by him no such burden can be carried ~ %m#éo 30weaTeNG, lit. a bringing the books i 6 having become it is, ¢. e. the books have been brought; '@é& ~Q)C$® ly SRR wfie Bonngy 83 %’éj FoRnSe HIZTINIRY), also good deeds one performs in an improper place, a considering bad deeds it becomes z. e. are considered had deeds BBy WECBREDTINI) OF VTR ! e3PPI 30 that was said; ToOTIRIZ ‘TR, VonoNTR) TR i ooN0dy, the drama Sakuntala was composed by Kalidasa (About verbal nouns see § 243; about verbal nouns like Zwd Sweed, etc. see § 205, 8,1 pers. plural.) In the ancient dialect there is found the following sentence in which )Z the infinitive or verbal noun ending in esef stands in the dative:— D3 ORI, BWTNRT DT MBI TRE VR0 _3_17\)0 the term o3 eoz0 3 is (or may be) contracted, and uttered o3 90 ;—and in the same dialect esny is joined to a verbal noun in the past, e. 9. ¥383 SHR® 7,00 y 3 émsmdm o, the writing on his forehead will be wiped out. 9 that of using the verb 8¢ (2%, ) with the noun ooéSJ e. g. VIR igj *’é&o 35 he was beaten, lit. he ate blows or the verb ?De&‘)‘ (2e2) Wlth the noun WRZ (or ©3)), e g. MBTIBN WEZ (or wi) VBT, Gurupada was beaten, lit. to (or on) Gurupada blows fell k) that of using such transitive verbs as are more or less commonly also intransitives, in the three dialects, e. g. w@@ozy, that is broken JR— 328 PRSI IENARI T8 3 =94, a cow that has been covered by the bull; 3e3& z‘ga $83%, a window that is opened; Fed,nR%o EPTBOY the ties were torn (the NYBS [os Kot 3, the Gauda’s house was burnt ‘e ¢) that of using such transitive verbs as do commonly not allow an ? { intransitive sense, e. g. B QEBRY fia%’@éruofi DecotZe* Wea, (you) (on( must not say that thus in this (section) all signs (or letters) are mnot (i.¢ call mentioned (Sabdamanidarpana stitra 51); wcfifio BIPFRY RRZ BRE weu&) 3, the nominative and dative are mentloned in the rule (s 140, vrlttl), 288530030559 %éSé’o Teorzed, the arbour was built in a mnen wonderful manner. ) k) that of using transitive verbs which are not accompanied by an skil agent, but to which the agent has to be supplied mentally (¢f. § 254, 2 are under b), very frequently used in the three dialects, e. g. 2¢C3 P NRF* ups the mentioned terminations lit. the terminations which (I) have hou mentioned (see another ancient instance in § 351, remark); 3387 530300 mill 3RedATIB Sp, was Siva’s offering of water not filtered? lit. Siva’s offering of water (I) a having filtered was it not? 85 B39A8 HTBEIR o u3,, 4 revised and enlarged second edition, lit. a second edition which b o (the author) has revised and enlarged; NCS S[PIT TRY), a prepared fluid, lit, a fluid that (people) have prepaled, BRONT SRPRF, cast dan Rén types, lit. types that (workmen) have cast; e.m{o TOTH YA, Fn%y, printed books, lit. books that (people) have printed; aodcf) -t ) PR, ¥, a written book, 1f 19 lit. a book that (somebody) has written; Re2PBY modo, what was (or (i EX XNt (4 has been) said is sufficient, lit. what (the man) said is sufficient; SRTOIRITEPo SPBRT 93303, a palace made (or built) of bricks and he i other things, lit. a palace which (they) have made of bricks etc WwRIBR0 TR 3233, one who deserves to be killed with a club, lit one who deserves (people) killing (him) ith a club; =m0 TR 37,3, 0 one who deserves to be slain so that (he) dies, lit. one who deserves als (people) slaying (him) etc ¢f. § 358 tows to say Very often the present-future relative participle of ¢ (8 lit, to call, is met with as an instance of this rule, e.g. FTaR002 MoEw NP BRY* ¥R BT, a@%- S e, the goddess who is called speech and is Wan{ endowed with the quahty which is called splendour, lit. the goddess whom h&pI (people) call speech etc.; e @ ev 83y oy 228 23, these (vowels) called a i u 1 ri lri, lit. these (vowels) which (they) ca,ll a, etc.; FIOTTQ® DD 3R, the chief called Kulindaka, lit. the chief whom (they) call Kuhndaka (%a U8 i 329 e A fiaaée-u Ry AT HBRY, & grihasta is called a snétaka, lit. a grihasta )i} (they) a calling it (é. e. they call) a snataka; m%’woo %39, what is called cenough’, lit. what (they) call ¢ enough’; »g@o0 3 oufia’ma %3 DRODRE: all TR0 Iwd, 033:533 %o, a matré is called that length of tnne in which ou) (one) pronounces even two consonants, lit. a matré (they) a calling it 10t (¢. e. they call) etc.; d@d* w% obdo "5\2.) 3y $30%,%, two children J Y called, lit. whom (they) call Doddappa (and) Cikkappa, See § 332, 40, l) that of using the compound perfect (¢f. § 313, 4), the agent heing mentally supplied to the participle, as under letter %, e. 9. RwzRRF B0 B ol BoIRe Wz, Twen RBDTZ S, lit. nests (birds) having all skllfully knit (them) Wlth hair, wool, threads and grass are, i. e. nests L 2 are skilfully knit etc.; WINO [PRTF, 3O HTR (-ad), lit. to the ¢, upstair house the key (the owner) having put (it) is, 4. e. the upstair PALS house is locked; moen 3§ @3, lit. milk (people) having brought (it) is, é.e 000 milk has been brought ész PF,TRY OR 218 AReRSNRE Rondny wW3HT 7o 3 33, lit- how many wonderful thlngs (somebody) having written in this J jich book are, ¢. e. how many wonderful things are written in this book DT SoNPRy, T3 oR™R Fwe,B, lit. (they) having given Bhima's ed cash daughter to Rama’s son it is, 4.e. Bhima’s daughter has been given to Rama’s son; ted PR, INYRY, 7 &, lit. (somebody) having brought the books it is, 4. e. the books have heen brought; —or also the compound pluperfect 00k, (or (¢f. § 313, 1), e. 9. RRARY FoRE: 83 NP oG Y, in the nest three eggs (a bird) having laid (them) were, ¢. e. three eggs had been laid in bl and he nest (by a bird); Ae3c3oRy, TazoanR SWed,3,, lit. (they) having given A Sité to Rama it was, ¢. e. Sité had been given to Rama it m) a curious way in which the verb 3ezo with an infinitive is used P to express a sort of passive in the ancient and mediseval dialect, may IV also be mentioned here, e.g. ¥Ry SRR BeRRIR), VRN FvFo, that toward which an activity is directed, is the object (of a transitive verb) say lit. that which desires a doing (concerning itself) is the object SS9 f B8 won&o® i Lo AT 6356@ a substance that is to be sold (lit. that 1 wants a selling) and is spread out in a shop; &Rey Bedrozy, what will happen, what is about to be, lil. what begs to become jom 10 n) then the frequent use (in the three dialects) of the verb HR¥* A0, (3w%y), to take, to get, in combination with nouns is also to be adduced ka (¢f letters a and b), e. g. 2303003 P%* (-3R%F), to become or be alarmed 42 vmemanrern. 330 S lit. to get alarm; &3 ojorfi@e;g), to become surprised, to begin to be ) surprised, lit. to get surprise; &@é 83@@&’2} to get or become embarrassed; hes 23@;3“3:32%@%3% to get or become wearied. 0) lastly the verb Zpero (¢f. letter ¢) in the sense of ¢to become’ Ch remains to be mentioned, e. g. & Eodpens (-R¥peB) T, a stalk that has by become dry. hin All the modes of expressing, somehow, the force of the passive, men- tioned under Nos. 1 and 2, go to show that the Kannada language is 253 destitute of a passive which as to form and idea corresponds to the o Samskrita and English one. A8 i XX. On so-called auxiliary verbs. Ly b 316. In English there are some verbs that are called auxiliaries, as has have, be, shall, will; such, in a strict sense of the word, are not in lit, Kannada. It is, however, not only instructive, but necessary to learn how Kannada does express them. 30 1, The English auxiliary verb ¢have’, e.¢g. in ‘I have seen’, 1is A breg expressed by the aorist (imperfect, perfect), e. g. o (Fe9B0, TEIRRV, § 198, 1 seq.), I have heard (I heard), or by the compound perfect, e.g. s %Jaehcs%a", he has (or is) gone (§ 3813, 4; ¢f. § 815, 2, I),—and ‘had’ by hun the compound pluperfect, e.g. 9233, 309030T0 30Ted a%@‘(’bm% 29, king Atyuta had died (§ 313, 7; ¢f. § 315, 2, 1). Cf. also § 314, remark; and § 155 (¢ seq. about the past participles. hag The English verb ¢to have’, ‘to possess’ is expressed by the verbs hag evy® (§ 194, remark 1), to be, or @0f (ady), to be, or &, is, 933, are 0 (§ 196) preceded by the dative case, etc., e. g. 2RSS woededon, lit. renown is to him, ¢. e. he has or possesses renown. eeemrsas%g% e3on, lit. flower- ny like eyes are to him, 4. e. he has flower-like eyes. @ZoR ToBIBNT® 2wF), Ly lit. to him horses are, i. e. he possesses horses. W3R B v o9 d’ 3t he has money. ©IFY wody 889oe0, lit. with him five cows are, i. e. he has five cows. ®IJZ X3, 0 F°3 wurey, lit. near him an inkstand 3& hag is, 4. e. he has (or has got) an inkstand. g WP TALI0ER), lit. in my vicinity corn is, 4. e. I have (or have got) corn. 3R B2, T SJ%& g 9530, he had two soms. g RTBSIR 2Ty DFEI Y, a certain undg gentleman had two children. AN R=3ens u&%ofioeg) zoag @fisé a3, a certain cowherd had one she-buffalo. maIRER TR FRLT ;3;3#% Way asacre 331 e — be By B33 3, snakes have two pointed hollow teeth 8, 3.0 d B3Re Fans 3, I have fine paper 6393 33Jwey @B, she has headache 337 esdF =NG, 1 have got thirst. 23§ 53 o o)i'\) 59@\) 16’ 28 933, thou hast eight ripe fruits Also: SN ®3,0 R0 o8, 1 have money by (or about) me ODR WEPNO fi@ossad PO, he has a watch with )it him Cf. § 360 18 Regarding the so-called relative participles (§§ 175 seq.; 180 seq.; 253, 2, d; 254. 267.273.330. 364) the following instances may be given: — he B335 ev$o, he who has riches PR, B 530 he who possesses gold RPWNRYY %, she who has beauty. egrz=s¢ evg) o, that has meaning %39 of, they who have knowledge Be9:3)%,3x2, he who has money 0530303308 3%, she who has love. ©z933¢ FoRIRgR, & man who a8 has authority. €53% 03009 ®oc3, an insect that has wings W3 S aIBIRY, 1 lit. he who has nakedness, ¢. e. he who is naked I If the negative is to be expressed, me, @ o (§ 209, note 15 § 298) or 2RO or ¥3de (§ 209, under No. 3) are used, e. g. Be3EZ,, dSNe 18 3¢ oo, Dévadatta, thou possessest nothing. & ARF, 28nPe, that tree has no leaves 938 X3 T BRRRYL she has no needles IS ! WEROE 28ewDe, he has no sack. =39} ved BTI=d, cows have no by hump ©Z) 3R ReaNTDew, at that time he had no money i1} As to so-called negative relative participles the following are instances g (¢f. § 273):— 33980 Bo, he who has no knowledge F99 B30, he who has no feet B3 Do B30, he who has no sickness v 33%, she who rbs has nothing. 60w B FAHY, soil destitute of water. 308 v 338 NS 16 B, those who have no understanding, have no happiness. wi "It is a very curious fact that, in the ancient and medieval dialect, 7} em%f the present participle of e (§ 180, remark), may be used transitive, 3, e. g CRLoRS em%}o he who possesses gentleness (instead of Foeso e;o) 30003 @z&’ Sh em%:’ g%, a cow which has swelling udders (mstead of B, u 16, 3RO %?:afl e)oeé @?%}o) There is also D, 00T B W, that which vIld has no texmlmtlons (Sabdamanidarpana stitra 72 and vritti; see § 338 1 under ge 13) For ¢to have’ followed by an infinitive, e. g. he has to learn, see M under No. 4 of this paragraph ) )1 2, The English verb ‘to be’ is auxiliary in the passive, the by way of expressing it therein in Kannada has been treated of in § 315. 42% [— 332 P — whi . When ¢to be’ is no auxiliary, it is eroes (w%°) and 20¢ (Bdy) (BT, in the negative, frequently forms 0¢°) in Kannada; e (003y,), BB, is, £ase and 33, 333, are, being also used (§ 196), e. g. RO YZ® wWEIZO post are oSwy* sfioaasfio% nef, (there) are also swallowing fishes in the ocean. I0F YOOTS® WP WoRcRTLRPE, are (there) any protectors in the Y it base world? es3%% w%o, he is (present or he exists). ¥8s¢ anFo, he W was (present or he existed). o See some sentences in § 275, and regarding BT (BD) being omitted when a mere copula see § 359. §§ - If evy®, etc. are connected with a dative, etc., they express the futy English <to have’, ¢to possess’; see No. 1 of this paragraph. About the negative 29, (I) am not, (thou) art not, (he, she, it) is not & etc. (of ver=20%) see §§ 209, note 1; 298. 1t has been stated in § 298 not’ that it i1s used by itself, in connection with nouns and pronouns, and i in combination with verbal nouns (see § 243) with which also the whi so-called past participles or gerunds are classed by the author of the und present grammar (§§ 154 seq.; 169). In paragraph 298, 3 there are given as instances the forms ooy, PEFRY, SPRAIBVY; AWNIDY, sha WOIBRY, TONBOY, FRINNY ; TRy, TR, TPy, ANdY ; 30 %@efi@%&%, z‘:)ew@%%e%, %@d@%_&%; 3009, [IPAY, JNRY, YN, 'a%e%. 0 Forms like VDY, BPFRY, IPHEDY, in the ancient and Shal medieval dialect, stand for the simple form of the negative (§ 209) to ) express the past tense of the negative in a clear manner (though there T\ occur rare exceptions, as Tog* ©tPdoby, I did not know, has been once ady used for ¢I do not know’). Forms like BADVTRY, WAITIL, TN 1edg| B, 8roxDe, in the modern dialect, take the place of the simple &y negative to express the present tense of the negative in a clear way; FIDIe , SR, Fe¥de, Arde are used in the modern dialect e to express clearly the past tense of the simple negative, which use however Jou is conventional (see § 298 just before No. 1), because verbal nouns ending in ©eo originally rather denote the present tense, as 3Scden, an shoy We g abandoning, #®odoew, an obtaining. This their primitive meaning bOur appears in their dative, when e. g. it is, as in the instances quoted in § 298, 8 (¢f. No. 12 in the present §), followed by EOP Forms like 8¢dey, SRR, SRR, eNe), ade of the modern requ dialect are such in which BY has been suffixed to short past participles e}{pr . g 333 v, which we know also to be verbal nouns from §§ (168). 169, in the present I case 360, &, PR, 9N, By their use it is intended to express the oA Other instances past tense of the negative in a very conspicuous manner all are: — B3R, oo wdde, I have not written (or did not write) this the AR, ¥BZ0 evrg e, he has not yet eaten (or did not eat yet) »38 he SOOI Ry BRITVWE By 2O © 3pe, was not his turban of a green colour? Ing BT TP Y he was not happy See the instances quoted in § 298, 3; 313, 7; 314, remark the 3, The English auxiliary verb ¢shall’, when it implies a simple futurity, as in ¢I shall give’, is expressed by the future tense in Kannada, no €. g. TOBIJ0 OF FRBEISRY, I shall give (§ 200 ¢f. No. 12 of this §) ¢Shall 98 not’ as in the future I shall not give is expressed by the negative nd e. g. F0Bo O FRRBRY shall not give (§ 209), or by a verbal noun to which v is added, e. g. o8 BRRSDe, I shall not give (see also t he under No. 2 of this §) are When ¢shall’ indicates a duty or necess1ty, as in ‘he shall go’, <you ) shall go’, it may be expressed by (e3¢coy,0, w)) BeBo, € g. TRV e Be e R WeT ¢f. No. ¢ 0; ] In a question ‘shall’ is expressed by the suffix e or e9de (§ 207, 2 a. b; ¢of. No. 10), e. 9. 93¢ SPRO? FRenOoe? what shall I do? Shall T go? 3823?\ 3,680 ¢, what shall I say more? egb 833 CEp! nd {0 %éS mae 53&/303 eo35a? 0N SEYRT TORY BT &@%a 80@030@6‘7 pre 'ado 'c"omm 3268 TR YRISDe f’epe? doest thou give me such a bad i advice? Shall I take away the money of (my) mother without her know- 0 ledge? Would this not be the same as stealing ? ; —or also by a verbal noun, €. J. om0 VY IRWe? Rwerntossidiwe? shall 1 stand? (or) go? plé | The way of expressing ¢should’, the imperfect of ¢shall’, by (23ec9o,0 ech 236299,), ¥ewo will be seen from the following instances; Z0eR %@ BeTd ver you should read carefully PR & BRI, TRRS BRA Be, you g should pay this money immediately 59 Oy Sser Bedy, what should an we do? I3:BoRT SoeBd 2,08 Serd Sedy, (we) should love (our) neigh- n§ bours. See Nos. 4. 9; § 314, remark. m About ‘should not’ see Nos. 5. 6. 8. 9. 4, The English auxiliary ¢must’ (‘is solicited’, ‘is desu*ed’ ‘18 )m required’, ¢is mecessary’, ¢ought’, ¢should’, ‘is probable or evident’) is expressed by ’afiewoo 3eCD les Y, WeB0 (§ 203), e. g. Rmegd ZToOTITHI U, 334 e DEornodve IR e8, 7oBodReY XSRS 0 (-Beedyo), in (4. e for) exer the verb which expresses the growing of corn etc. and that of trees and creepers, ¢3¢ (and not e¥) must (or is to be) uttered 8 3 0 TR &“éf B33y, you must (or please) put up with this mistake. if th @;S;So sa(sir"dm Fol S TO3 BTy, he must (or has to) learn grammar zba)ossazfio (S vty i 3 3¢y, you should make cool what is hot [ Lwdn a&@er{ oD, we must go to town (or abroad), F9R0 Oessan W W¥esy, when must % th jJ I (or am I to) come? w330 BweNT 33, he must have gone &=n fo 00O WRY @Y VYT Kedo, it must be very cold now at (the town of) Puné 0ITIBTR BRAIN & IRWRY I3r3wa 3PAT ¥eso, somebody Al (it) must have communicated these tidings to him ms It will be seen from the above instances that infinitives ending in #al o or ¢ are used before 23e09,0, 23663y, and Jezy; the infinitive ending A in e9e) and its dative may also precede 23e3y, €. g. VIV WEP By WeT I must learn to know this man BABY WR S0 B3R WeT0 ng Fals 08 TRER PIoF fai ROy 0o e, ”a?;eemam’) SPBROT WeT (by 1 BRING T, 30302, A 35, B3, I5RY 38O B, e 3 RPeTR, Qe J0u Roke 332 833 aiaa"oioe’)oSoe fade.’)%’ e IR RRENOF,e Ve (any) [ R TRBOFe LeT ‘Must’ is also expressed by 23¢€3,z30, a verbal noun of 3@y, e. g 01 g D093 RI.NE AT 030300 BRTE3C BTRoN D9y §2 ‘Must’, when denoting obligation, has been expressed in the modern i) dialect also by the infinitive ending in ese, esex, followed by ev,, being A (§ 180, remark), and a demonstrative pronoun, e. g. F930 FTRBLIE TI? lo 10 Forms (¢f. %’Jazé@'v? RS ®), I must give, lit. I to give a being-he. (t hoy as %J@%fi e)o%? Qo%DR 0, occur also occasionally in the medisval dialect thoy (e. g. of the vaekacmtamam), and may denote the simple relative present- Sho) future participle, as they do likewise in the modern dialect, e. g. T3 ==y i RBEOWRT, %e0TRY e)ge; %Ry, @ worm that sucks (or abstracts) blood lOgue without causing pam zéaafi %Ja(if)e)oeé T3, a horse which carries Qece i\ nicely 10t | To 23¢30 the verb esro, to become, is frequently added, (when 3¢z is 8 ; considered a verbal ‘noun, see § 204), e. g. B ¢ TIWNAF WO fimafi ey 8‘3% DR FRDY ITRY Boni®y Bezeonod B, about two months are requlred $ D fov* cotton pods to become full-grown and ripe Y ARy, TR BW 0; ni e 335 [ fo) 3,30 Eo"@fia_eag FO®R Bewanosry, it is necessary for you henceforth to and exert yourself to learn. B WF), TowTd Werd, IPIRTT, TN W ?d#@ifl éé—)‘ % Bezorosry, thou must not (or shalt not) utter falsehood, ot if thou utterest, I shall be obliged to punish thee. TRy Qy On® e 008 v w N Fo83, Rama was (or is) wanted by all. emy, 2008 8 Bwy BeFo N3y, brother, a little grass was required for the calf. BDRTY SRTO $, s 5':%) ;mééf 37 5@%3:5 90308 [P[DeR TIAW TRT Wewaned 3y, at 3 o) Vi the very first it was (or used to be) necessary to pay postage according to the measured distance of the place to which letters had to go. o) hody QR e ZonFong IPR FRB WBesondy,, you ought to have given (it) six months ago. N w303y WesoNdy,, how was it to be written? wIRY Reen WezoRaSy, he had to go. Besorory, that is needed. e3¢ ¢ 10 ding FIBRZ) I I° 3,0, he gave as much money as was desired. A Wy 3R, as much as is needed or required. o ;SQJ;S%)OSJR RPN Xeze % NG, I must go to Bombay. & aésago@fi%fio BVIPA0E3, efla\;‘t}gzg DY) " e o o) FaNg, these fruits are sour, therefore these have not become desired (by me), %. e. therefore I do not want these. 3, Bedwe? Wezone, do e you want (some) rice? It has not become wanted, i.e. 1 do not want ) (any). eF wTOFe WezserosBy, you need not come. Cf. No. s. 5 9 ‘Must not’ (‘is not fit’, ¢shall not’, ‘should not’, ¢is not desired 6.f or wanted’, ¢f. Bezarvzdie, ete. under No.4) is commonly expressed by 23¢z (§§ 209, note 1; 212, 7; 301; and ¢f. No. 6), e. g. DATY0 SRTY0 AR, dern B VB0 (-23ew), one must not (or should not) say L&TY0 FRF0 yeIng R Fyo (§203). w8 wo Bed! dope, BRery, (thou) must not (or 5553 do not (¢f. No. 13) come this side! O, go away! %%és SN[y, ¥R e, orms (thou) must not (or shalt not) use bad words. Qegy m#% S03E Wi, alect thou must not (or shalt not) lie. Rogy Be¢Lo WBewd, you must not (or sente should not) utter falsehood. o3y =[P =B B¢, 3@36%2}53%2% BRen o))-<’\ R3¢, (thou) shalt not utter perverse words, (and) shalt not learn from rogues. plood BYeotdzen &don Be®, (thou) shalt not wander about as a deceiver. B0 &R By Bed, womoRcH BT Bed, (you) should ;,rries not be behind a horse (and) should not be before a royal mansion. 28y 8~ e, I do not want this. 23w B3¢, (1) do not want anything. O & NRZ FOJ SIS %ms%fifia‘%t @Jaofi‘@q%eo‘%em? 30! 035@%;28 J@%f\ el O 8BYNY, shall we cut some (of the) ripe mango fruits? (No) it is not right, fqr they are not ours. B8 e 336 pe—— ez is also preceded by the infinitive with final ese® or esen, e. g AP 2R, TLIINE SRR wRBY BRI ¥eR 2B 030N L2, 0 W the St 303, BPT3IF wIan T ALY BeR The idea of 23ez can also he expressed by the negative participle and the verb @, to be, e.g. Fwe D) SRRDTY, TIDH, NN INAT 1§ 10 See under No. ¢ and 13 i As frequently to 23¢@y (No.4) so also occasionally to 25ezs the verb esrd is added, e.g. [oRWFRY RO BeEINIZI.R. SBRCTIDTORON % il BWION BeEIBIR. BeBSIRT BRRAGT @aeée? 6, The English auxiliary ¢ought not’ (‘is not becoming’, ‘must not’, «should not’, etc.; ¢f. Nos. 5.7.8.9.11) is expressed by 2093z (the negative or o of wef, W), e.g. BTo (W3, TRTYF) BTH 2RTZZ0.S. eed OF 239000 (fo (one) ought not to pronounce (or should not pronounce) these (233 %Jadof) B33%y, TRTL BRB 3T 0 SPINEI), TeF 25900y, eminent 4 9 persons ought not to listen to insignificant words $OR wWotl FTOR, a G0 B 88, 98Ky, (one) should i business that (one) ought not to do il not steal and (thus) eat oty 390308 Ssez9R wedre, without know- ing propriety (one) ought not to speak 33 3001Y 35930 D3PI Wl Dy %o, (one) ought not to (or should not) transgress the word of (one’s) parents BoRNY IR 598, (you) ought not to (or should not) commit I theft 9 29,0308 %R, VeRE 5Ty, (one) ought not to (or should not) e torment little creatures Qe ¥OR Been 298Ky, thou shouldst not go See 8 ® T 23903 there SN W3 239070, you are not permitted to come b Do) BYR) PR 290Ky, we must not (or (you) must not remain here, o should not) steal. cS:’o 3R Wi 23903Y, WRosven WSRO SVTB WITRY, o wBY N3N z:afido wBF G e 3953, (you) must not drawl ho in readmg, when reading (you) should not hurry, (you) must not read too loud, (you) must not read too low. %é& 'é’e)forfl#ao DOB WTRY, e (you) ought not to do evil deeds IOR ;flsacédsfido S) w90%y, those do that will not work (or have not worked) shall not eat c,%de%om FOR 33 By PR [IPB WBR0 TNNOR O TRJY, SFLS 30eeI zsadcfio thy 2R BREANLYE O BBINPEA. 3R 2390RY; WRS W R 39,0 WoN g0 R0 239030 Zo08 A0 3900 33NY UDFOIIY, [AEB03) 23ITI 3 SRy (930 BexORYy) TNV TR QAR FaEBE0H weThE 29533, Bade ele D9 WA®RY WITRY Jor . 337 . The idea of 2598z30 may also be expressed by the negative participle and ¥ the verb =3, to be, e.g. 395 raecsa SPBNERY, $RDY, you ought not to speak such words. See under Nos. 5 and 1s. nd 7, The English auxiliary ‘must not’ (‘ought not’, ¢is not fit’) further is sometimes expressed by BRWM, €.J. LRFY TWY THRZ, (one) must not kill that. ARy RPN FRBTY, you must not go. RN ésav eS80 erh RPRT FRTB AT YR BREAARRIDT), VBC Je T3 3@ FPB WT R [0} TRARY, I shall allow thee to go to play with thy play-fellows, but thou must not loiter and come at night. 8, The Englishauxiliary ‘must not’ (‘ought not’, ¢is unfit’, <improper ot 176 or forbidden’) is not unfrequently expressed by esr<z, e.yg. ?.?gjaéi efzg P35 o SISEEA 5%03&0 $aRwangy, (one) must not spoil euphonic combination o, (for instance) by using Jpg, s3d0 (for Fpgs o). RBFOING 7B, ent a word that is unfit to be uttered. ®Ro3 5—39[@\%3;‘ 9TINBRE PNR BROTD 14 wencdy, (one) must not allow inimical women to enter palaces. N33y, alas, (you) ought not to kill (it). AR a&@er{efi)@& iy, you uld 0F: must not go. cdPdR Y wIweNG:, nobody must come here. (Cf. No. 11.) iy 9 The English auxiliary ‘ought’ (‘should’; ¢f. Nos. 3.4) is also s expressed by 3,00 (ST, fit, etc.), e.g. e &eR [PR ITF,R, thou il ought to do so. =) BOR WO 3,3, they should come here. & Qe ot E n¥sy, & B3e3RY 0, ’”fieé-)\:i 3%,30m0 8, they should sow and try those 80 seeds in this country. ol égjoé%dg 2,3 30&3»@2,3363 2,88 RPR 3,00, <gj), brothers ought to love each other. ¥R BREN 3T, 1S, he should have (OF gone. 03 BIIR deR} Rec 3¥,030,, you ought to have told him so. @, QR € PR TIFy V¢ 30N TRa 5#_&255:\0, thou shouldst have returned gl that book to him long ago. ead ‘Ought not’ (‘should not’) is, in this case, expressed by suffixing @e or ol ©Q), €.4. 3oNE, R TN BNB 3T Y, sister, thou shouldst not have 1056 done so (see § 298, 3 about @9, and No. 2 of this §). @y, ws0e T 0007 & 3 40 & TSRy VeI '@@9@% %Ja:g) S 7,009, you ought not to have hought 3 s this almira at so high a price.— ez ®ReR 35,30, thou ought not to 3 NY go (see § 300, 1 about SORE See Nos. 5. 6. 7. 8. 15 (39). y3 10, The English auxiliary ‘may’ (‘is allowed’, ¢is possible’, ¢is fit’, )3 etc.) is expressed by 223om0 (of wof), to come, e.g. Ve WHNR WT W, you may (or are allowed to) come in. T VR WY, thou mayest 43 B 338 e 8w (or art allowed to) go. $9,9 8 w®ory, you may stay with us. &N wxago, it may be so. oI JF, BeS3 AP BT WK, he may be thy true friend. ©38 339,83 V0w RN,T0 wRry, his tale may (al (more or less) be known to all. =z 210) %o%d wRaT), you may sit here. TP VBIY WOBT WKy, he may have written this. razj%_&gg %zé; TRR wBIDIZY, you might have given more than this. =33 Bwex I he 869 w8 WwRomaN3y,, they might have come last year. m Another way of expressing ‘may’ (in desire, wish, permission, expect- ation, or possibility) is by using the imperative (§ 205, 1; ¢f. No. 14; § 367), e.g. SeTBRY* &%maofioo {’\mfi%&, may the age which prevails in the véda 03 (¢.e. one hundred years), become thine! =0 ForoR, may he give! wzo i (AR] J59e%3,, may they make! &30 SRIFBo or &30 SN 3o, may he make!—or by using the suffix e9& (§ 207, 2, a.b), e.g. IR Fogeomend, may you become happy! &5 33r=3wsy) 53(8;3'@71@, may that news prove Rl true! 9938y WO, may he come! Hp A, TR BRENDWID, may I go, sir? this TR0 WIAIR &en BecIDoxse, may I tell him s0? arte wr®, may (it) 19 become so (i.e. so be it, very well)! sn®, may (it) become (i.e. be it, of ¢ very well)! @g®, may it be (be it, very well)!—or by using the contingent st i present-future tense (§ 195), e.g. &n VT, she may (¢.e. is likely to) a g come now. M3 9SS BT WAL, if (he) learned to know this, father tel] might beat (us). =pSooToWF, 00 &)%Qéo, it may rain this evening. il TR ufioé wR e, if T come, I may come, 4.e. I may come (perhaps D) I come). 1o (, ‘May’ in a question has also been expressed by a verbal moun, e. g. & TROBAING Ty BReRReresy, may we (i e. are we allowed to) cross W this field? (regarding the form BneRwess see § 205, 3). cang 11, The English auxiliary ‘can’ is expressed by 230, 283,58 s AW and other forms of the verb 200¢ (w8, ¢f. No. 10), to come, preceded by Stap the infinitive ending in & or esey, this last termination being put in the Cann dative (95@%8-)’ €. g. s90 Bk, what can be seen. eomaOR 39,2908 3 wore¥d, BRen wBnd), if (there) is power in (one’s) sole of the foot, 00cas (one) can go to Bengal. &@Cfia% %géojozfiaa\ BRLY ToT WTBE, can the (one) throw out darkness with the bamboo fan? ©Z3z0 BuRZ SPB VR &3, he can do work. BERY, U0TY [PAT wRry, who can have done this? &N é»tfi@??& woga, 1 can read. RIR $ROT, wthg d, 1 can Ny PSS 339 ] \0 swim. 3R B30 w3y, he can write. BRITE, R ao&t)@% 00V be 3,3 S0 0 Hanumanta could jump. 3 m@mems IZN BRENOF zo:s e3e, ay can we cross this field (é. e. is there a road for us to cross this field) Iy ATB uBOSQQ'D% 03590R wR §e3ds, who can have written this? 23?; ‘Can’ is also expressed by the verb es30, e. 9. & FuE BSZII ©N3. B he can do this work. 23 «rvd dwe, canst thou do it? T HEIST R, TOI B SR XRR. ¢R TR Bedy, we should make happy others as ot much as we can 1) ‘Cannot’ is expressed by the negative of 0% (W), e g. 8 BoRA™NA a WB0NOF, 23933 ened DR 2390 3 (or wBBHY), that boy cannot write DY ¥F,TSF Ben such as cannot be uttered, are no letters S 3 he 200000, that cannot be counted (Cf. No. s.) 0, ‘Cannot’ is expressed also by the negative of esro, e. g. & FOIJ VD ove Sonay, I cannot do this work. =& ©33 %0336@ %o, he cannot do ! this STatal] 9.903@6@, 33, %’0‘50'23@ alas, you cannot do it. "825 DASD 89 8 (1 QB BRenomao (or 3&@@&@@9@@) ngy, I cannot go in such a heat 1, of the sun (see also § 315, 2, /). Q5 B ev5onRy, thou canst not ont stay (or stand) Sy [RY NPT Y o FRAY N, (one) cannot cut f0) 953 a diamond with anything R0, 0R TR, BeCITINRY, (one) cannot ey tell his joy. #3383 & Fo5 oSO (or &nzy), he cannot do this work ng R0 59030, 2 business that cannot be effected. BezoR 390T TN )8 DRBIST 033 n» fii)aéaa nay, w1th0ut the knowledge of God we can never do (a,nythmg) (Cf. No. s.) ‘Cannot’ may further be cxpressed by s> (¢f. No. 7), e. g. wed 3OB 088 B wBoBy, dde SoRARB FWRD, (one) can break a rock, (but) cannot break the mind of a whore 2B B0 © 23963 WRITY, BEC T R0%0,8 FRBGY, (one) can live where familiar intercourse is, (but) cannot : stand the trouble of cold b BELO BRBIRY, B e339Ne, s0 much pain as cannot be told has befallen (me) f 3 For ‘cannot’ eszo (see Dictionary) in combination with e is also occasionally used, e. g. @ S0RTT RRewatl TeLIwsRY, (one) cannot tell the lamentation of those three (an There are some special terms in Kannada which directly denote ‘to can’, viz A one @) €982 e. 9. IR0 BEPCNT FEHUF BEPNT BRFR VBZORTE® Q2R0RY, if (& man) cannot speak (and) cannot hear, he is called dumb cal 43* — 340 —_— and deaf SORWVFTY Fe3FONRY, NEPReF t2030Ty, fools cannot gain M fame 3 b) e5836, e. 9. BN WO BT* Bief ¥TFS nIDwTE, can rustics become abler than I? RoBiRTy WFFSRY, R,0Re ©LIovy, the boys cannot under- ale stand the meaning. BHFY B2, IR, moeF &3, I have gold I (and other) property, I cannot die DR BReRe23RY, 1 cannot go 3 BEEY DROVT, TORY DN BWY RELIVIE3R I cannot tell you more 00t about it. 3Ief ¥ (= ¥nFI) Rwmadseny, if (thou) canst pay, become ) a surety. 3WIR ToERS IwRVeTIo, a valiant man can fight 30308 038030859 8 o) VRCRH B 0B, we cannot hide anything from God (se E9RS3 J FTIRNNNIND, T3, he who cannot write is inferior to one who feeds sheep g 0) WO, e §. TR WV D JeRTINED RORwF, can the male buffalo recite the védas? oz & WS I can swim. @33 W30 WO I N he can write FINP SR, NFRY, S3FR we Ty, poets can depict objects 12, The English auxiliary verb ‘will’ when it implies a simple Th Cor futurity (¢f. No 3), is expressed by the future tense in Kannada, e. g. FoBIT0 Or %@zéoafl;io he will give. FIRIDTE Or FRRIND, you will give. he 90,0 OF 53, O 03Ky, it will become (§§ 200. 203). The future ‘will log 3 A, = not’ is expressed by the negative, e.g. @0 or FRAERF., he will not give;— or by a verbal noun to which 4o is suffixed, e. g. Q¢ FRBISOY, you e will not give (§§ 209. 298, 3) 001 Regarding the suffix e in its connection with the dative of a verbal 3 noun ending in ee) (Bwf, § 298) it is to be remarked that South-Mahratta he: people, at least sometimes, attach the idea of doubt (samSaya, Nudigattu Wh P. 155) to lt e.g. @d?&) NN&. 230300 &,o, he is not to invite me (to dinner), §ee 3o 4. e. he will (probably) not invite me. Efi? ey e‘)% o, she is not to eat, 4. e. W Other mstances chosen at random from she will (probably) not eat. (0 S.-Mhr shool-books, may, or may not, express doubt:—e9z380 WIS &, 3 29530 9300 WRTIROE,© 3% BRCBONSY FEWTRY, SRR J%—e) it FOR SRROFT,© AERMEREARS 0TI F¢ TN 08,0, aefio BI8VTO) 1¢) 093, © 330 B mzéd@%fifi 90 An® & See also some instances in 3 § 298, 3, and ¢f. No. 2 in the present paragraph atl The English verb ¢‘to will?, ‘to be pleased’, ¢to desire’ is expressed by § 2ef, of which (w80), w3, »d, vulgarly 38, I will not, and other 4 persons of the negative are in every body’s mouth, e.g. eves SRS or Wa 341 [e— Al SOEY ;Se?o, I will not eat. m@sme&m or BN ;seo)o, he will not give FedSRe 3o or Fe¥ I B, they will not hear. me el 13, The English auxiliary verbal forms ‘does not’, ‘do not’, ‘did not w3350, ld are expressed by the negative or a verbal noun with 2, e g I do (or did) not write. g 669030, I do (or did) not know. 9530 20 e 3Ro, he does (or did) not make. ARy wBiShy, Soma does not come. me asazéofio‘gaeafieéi} %5980, why does Balayya not come here? ; BoBINTY ejcée‘)%-& 09T w3, why did the boys not come to play? w9 B¢, do not cry (¢f. No. 5).—Also the following way of expression o} e (see under Nos. 5 and 6) is to be paid attention to: &8 LRy, FFH D0; g 33 Se@ROT, do not spend (your) time idly! do not desire 110 great things! (V) The English ‘does’, ‘do’, ‘did’ in questions is expressed as follows: — LAREPRRNE? 833 RRZwF,0o 3RBRIBTY,0, did he become dishonest? fs The writ on his forehead will be wiped out. 3R W, Jee, does he ple J come? e3Fd W AR, did he come? =R DR Bwervz,Semy, does [ he go abroad? TRE WRBWD, 8, O brother, didst thou break the il looking-glass? 38Fr Fpedso, why did he go? SEANES BB QAN RS ARID 0¥ DARRDZp dOFNE,Bo, alas, why did the mad black bees become inimical to campaka trees? 0l 350F wg 3y, Why did they come? o35p¥ BWeRogedn, father, why do you go? Ae3, 09T LN bal 8.¢? o35eTedH wandwe, Sité, why doest thou weep? Did somebody tta beat thee? ose?o;g W&o, whence did he come? BP0 BWTR0 %Jo){go, it who did kill Mura? e fioz:z)dodofio& eR0 oo RPedd, when did you 1) see that sparrow? e3z BeeRISRY S A, whither does he go? ey wZ oo odse¥, why did you come? ey wg F900:3¢xy, why did you i come? V) The English ¢do’ in connection with the imperative, as ‘do write!’, may be expressed in Kannada by the simple imperative or by its M {J) repetition, e. g. 238! or wd w3!, w0Wd! or 23oND WIWD! 10 14, When the English ¢let’ is used as an auxiliary in the imper- ative, denoting ‘exhortation’, etc., it is expressed simply by the imperative (§ 205; ¢f. No. 10; see § 367), e.g. oS, let (him) do! Bpe, let (him) by go! soruo, let us attack! evzodos, let us utter! S@o3ws, let us [ ) walk; Bwereeso, let us go! - 342 —saa Compare also the forms with e9¢ of the mediseval and modern dialect in § 207, 2, a. b On The English verb ¢to let’, <. e. ‘to allow’, ‘to permit’, is expressed by the verbs gy, to give, etc TR, to give, ete and by their causatives § 151) &y and FRARO The first syllable of &=o is exceptionally shortened by some writers so that it becomes @&> (in imitation of Télugu =23y, to permit, of its &, to give; ¢f. § 151, b, 3) The medieval dialect has, e. g. R¢3 Zowoe® &H%B YR 38, 53 he i DQRoNY, a structure which does not allow water to flow, is called adhara (dam); and 3gories ) *—3033 Fo Deodoe RGPy, the trees oW <= there do not let (their) ripe frults a,nd nuts fail. &&=y occasionally occurs also in the modern dialect, e. g. RooBToN TV TEE33OLRIS then =3y, a cow that allows itself to be milked with ease BT BR,RY, BT the ©ex, he does not allow me to come Thus also does w5y, 6. 9. ©I=S 0] X githy ReoO=Zy, he does not let him enter N The modern dialect generally uses 30y and THRARY, 6. g. WISSY BRenRRRY (-3wRY), let him go (or allow him to go)! e3Z 8, wo [ RRBR, he does not let me come 3R89, 99 duRPERY, let me stay ol here! & B8 o33R0R, 3R, BT WINRRRINDY. (0r WIRRRITHV ) DRy that horse lets no one come near it BonSROD 1O 3 0oINRE VHURY (BE DBRPRR w8y, one ought not to let filth lie either in front of a house Gom or in (its) back-yard. See an instance under No. 7 ¢ Also the verb 9. to let loose, has been used in the medisval and R modern dialect for ¢to let’ in instances like the following: —E3on$o e mRen O&, let the cattle go! IR D), BRer DR, let me go! 3IR/N FTo& thep 030, BoRRHANG OR, he neither drinks himself nor lets him who will v drink (do so) d 15 It is still to be mentioned that the English ¢ought not’ (*is im- Ht proper’, ¢f. 32,83o under No. 9) is also expressed by Ze (§ 209, note 1) hayi preceded by an infinitive generally ending in e, e. 9. N8y HDONTIT fl“len 20 BB Re; FRWS TBIRIR S0BHIIN BY; BABRBY A LRI (Al ® 39 xo (Dasapada 157), (one) ought not to abuse those that are githe (one’s) guru and elders; a very handsome woman ought not to become i 2& the wife of a blind man (one) ought not to court the friendship of ngy enemies the | 343 gt XXI, On either—or (§ 317); neither —nor (§ 318); Whether —or (§ 319); by the — the (§ 320); as—as (§ 321); for (§ 322); namely, as ves follows (§ 323); what is that? (§ 324); what happened? lly (§325); in this manner (§ 326); as —so (§ 327); how much ol — 80 much, how many —so many (§ 328); when? (§ 329); who —he, etec. (§ 330). 0 317. In the ancient dialect ¢either — or’ is expressed by ea??&—- 693"_&, lit Jed be it—be it (§ 205, 1; ¢f. § 316, Nos. 10. 14), €. g. BEIReD [oodRe S LT £es SRBSINGE Cfiwfioefié’emgfi?% efiofiofi%_—sao% nes 93%%, Soem* lly BIRFMIT NT0SF F,— 3DUIFE ©F )0, Wwhen (there) are nominal 3 themes that end in 1, 1, r or r and have their first (syllable) short in M the back part (. e. in the beginning), slackness (§ 240) takes place i 2 ) either before Re¢ or further before the R of the dative;—or also by e300 — e300, as appears in § 292, As has been remarked in § 207, 2, b, the modern dialect uses ese® — 00 est®, lit. be it—be it, to express ¢either—or’, e. g. BOTY ATIND &I {4y oon® IR Wed, either thou or he must do this. éaga’ad SnO 3 v), o0 9n® HWEIHIeTdy, they may start either on Friday or Saturday. JAY wPsan® FRTIND /N D, ¥ ;B3¢ [T ), either good or bad your 156 command is agreeable to me. FINBHINY RN VesoRBY [03,eTB TR end Fwey Bwe, buy either paper or whatever thou wantest. @gos ®) 2 nd 236%}71%7%@ 23 3y 8 SEPRPIND ?0'3'6(58 aNoTafal=N Teyy B3, OJYNF 4o @@@%smwo, if at night either cats or the young of cats are met (by JJ& them), owls will peck (their) eyes and kill them. e nad9 23 39,RO ill mo® §,030 Tx203) BaBe, 8, either for vomiting or for bile they drink a decoction of cinnamon, 908,53000300F AeS INAFEPIYN Y il 30e83 euTFTT SHACEPTI N BRTFR BT[N, 2 present got either by having done service in an excellent manner or by having afforded )1) friendly aid to others. oo FBRW®IFIRY BorBeH FedFYNO BY I o Jw u:éoja 3303@6’%71@ 33;,@5 555@55\)@_0%63, they used to travel abroad either on foot or on horseback or also by means of carriages. A& 3T e me 5"@6 SANWI] Ko %@figfi@ (4. e %@2@% nY) %03 71639%”030(5%71@3 of BTV TIF® ZONROSTY, such people will subsist either having entered th'e house (4. e. by living in the house) of relations or by what has been e 344 P acquired by (their) fathers AN =oone RVRBIEIATUI NSO TN v RReAR DTNRToI RO ARBy 3, 3wy 088, parrots build their ( nests and live either in tufts of trees or fissures of dilapidated walls 2603 FF, 300, B0 TNSRENING WeonSRFnand éoa:ioa 39,05, then 101 @? they fill the sugar either into boxes or sacks. ofioocs afisat‘é $ETF9,N 0 m@ atel a%ee)zéosmrij FReBTR3I, F £oeoz§ofisafi® U\)w R0y %) ne 035371@‘) %é?) da;fl 398, a building that has been erected elther on an open ne1 W) hall or on a bastion of a fort or behind a palace for the purpose of UL DBE, ToB0HING MY HBeoINYO BeZTR Ry 88 fall warring praise God either before (thou) eatest or after (thou) hast eaten As will be learned from the instance quoted above (TanZmon® VA ‘ ]f9 103 BeTIBRR B8, 0THTR BN TR THE) BNRO—unO (be it —be it) 1s constructed as might appear, with the nominative after a transitive verb: but sentences in which the accusative occurs in such a case, are 0 =( not rare, e. g. w33, VWAYYNEY BVBIKNG SeeNT afiomoxqsdaaf\ 2e0nex9 RO RoonosSsy, occasionally boas will swallow either people that have reclined in the jungle or calves R0 IR BELIV /R SFYNY TNBDTYRY 3T, T R RIBYR ABIDARE, if I, without telling thee, take away either thy book or paper, shalt thou remain quiet? Regarding this see what has been stated in § 287, remark The Rev. Mr. Hodson, according to § 287, remark, has used @30w — s305H also in the sense of ¢either — or’. He has the following additional “y sentence: & N#Ea BT0 & ~%§aa 38n Bwer Beid, do not go to either - hig this place or 'rhat 10y 318. The English ¢neither — nor’ may be expressed by the copulatives (. evo, o and e (§ 284 seq.) followed by a negative, e. g. R 3 DTN S BNDF B, for the worship of idols (there) is meither fruit nor o flower &93363;50&555 BS30IB0 BOFDRR, he disrespects neither those nor I~ b these persons “FNR e)fi Bwo FIRTWWRT B, she has neither a sense hay of shame nor modesty. eazds m%;fiweéfi LN :5%‘030@ NG 28Y, (o in his bundle (there) was nelther pen nor pa,per B3R, VRN ‘v“oae 397, 9R oot . neither in that nor in this manner (there) is a kingdom for the children of Kunti RPN BB, FoBWNIIINR DR, he neither 1y drinks himself nor lets him who will drink (do so) BXR BOONR BV 29530, TIANMR BRI, he fears neither tigers nor snakes VIR BRIR Joy 345 O — )NU PRy he will do neither this no: that DRBIIDY, VI[P casatédfiae) 11 (Hodson). LH: 23w DRSF B, 5% 58 do:a;fioo;fisg vo, 9303, it is neither a hill hen nor the headless body of a demon, (but) an elephant. fifi 5P CON A TOP VY, zoé30.»., T 0309 it is meither a rope nor a snake (but) - 1% long piece of cloth radg N;jg,)tj;j@ ¥y, IDR VY, $e53030¢, this is pel neither a sea nor a river, (but) a lake (Hodson). 'a@ BPET 8&0@@ ol By, BEdn By, sOTSe, these are neither balls of white sugar nor A fallen out teeth, (but) hail-stones. 819. The English ¢whether — or’ may be expressed by 2.c, €9¢s and €93 f if’, in combination with the copulatives e90 and ery. for which see the b instances in § 287, 8 five In the verse quoted below the five times repeated “ZRBRIN (=uBW e @o3ow, ©@Tw) may be translated < though’ (see § 287, 5, b), but ¢ whether 79 —or’ would also not be wrong DD, BRTO30 RS0 ple Iy RWESROTH BPBONY 30055 A3 out 223030039, BRTBR00 WCP =) e=meade | 1l 305 RBTAG BRRBRON SN 3RNET RIRTIRPRBRN OF - BWIDERY T3 FCI. Bo¥ IV 79 3TE ] nal “whether he gives (you) riches, or eats together (with you), or also gives ther his own daughters, or follows and joins (you) without weariness, or utters novel wisdom, it is proper to keep down a hostile king” said that Sakuni 118 Cf. § 334 occurs in the following WY Another way of rendering ¢whether—or modern sentence wherein 93¢ — 58, be it — be it, is used:— T N0 10! 3 . SATO IPRATY IRIBS ¥ fiofiom AR .q@% 3¢wo, whether I onse have committed, or have not commltted, a fault I have to honour the command of Badasaha 0Y, M 320, The English ‘the— the’ before comparatives can be expressed only s Jom by paraphrasing, see e. g. the ancient instance quoted in § 303, 2,0 South- Mahratta school-book instances are e.g. the following:—Qe3) ¥ya® her SRBIZY, DHCE BRCT TON %?32&) (. e a%aéo %%aéo) 293000, the more you study, the more you will 1ea1n Na#&@e}fis 385y 3R 3R3 TN f 44 G — 346 wif 23,8 3@y B¥nerSns, the more (they) remove the impurities of the syrup, the whiter the sugar will become BRANRJ) 300, WS WR TN (pr ),BRT 37 TR BEPTR, T3 3, the more a ship approaches the south, the more the polar star seems to go down ] 321 The English ‘as —as’ may be expressed as follows: — es3che3o E& g Ny 33,0, this man (is) as deserving as that man (§ 348, 14). Bw.eo0no DR Ro VU B3F0NT 88,3703, doest thou know archery as well as Drona? hro (¢f. § 284 under dative) QRBIT[IF BRABoDoo FPIFWo IREBRWE 0 Yudhishthira lavished as much as he had Intt QQ@O&)&)E‘; @N@éfig a3 having given betel as much as possible B [VZ BABS00 TPpA, having wha applied as much ashes as a (forehead) circlet AR,B B, TRR,0 AODOVR can do I not pour out gold as high as thou art? —esx o0 w3 0TI §im aéséaifio BB worya), poppy pods become by degrees, as large as ¥ balls %’Jaaomad @afio :’m J) BRELPE 33 03 #FFERY, ©r, the diamond chil called Cohinor is as large as the half of a hen’s egg. SPBFTIY Be3T ipe hon WORRY Wi c&:azs =B, =0, esd&?aio Z?)JS)CS B, Ng)a By 3088 9 BoR 2S8R a%e@&aaa 8 W1th the king of Portugal there is a large d1amond A0 people say there is no diamond on the whole earth as large as that a7 S c;fi &) WRSRY, he (is) as poor as I B SOOR D ffi%doiofi 9 23 (o2 =, this r1pe mango is as sweet as sugar.—a©3xF, as far as this §€e place AT, FoRe 33F wdod. e, I come as far as your house.— 58F 30083, as far as the ocean Son S008d, w3 R, he came as far as the sald house.— 3359 8 o3 R, as much as possible SO0 WAt Tud Dotdn expr as long as I live.— 2003co, as far as the end. — 233K, as far as Jron the ear.— ¢35y wgo nde RPEITH as soon as the king came, they WY { Q started &3 O [ e3. as soon as that news arrived 09T Qfiwifid}i 0y 2o IHRS. as soon as it saw him. — DR, DR Zo RTTONS. WU ury B d OV o8, nDedo, (he is) as big as a hill, as strong as an elephant B ) of the gods, as deep as the ocean WO, e wHTTY, he (is) as W th liberal as Bali.— 303030%R w0038 8o, as many persons as are in the said house SoatiB, 33 ’fiaw;ixo %Jaeav %@mm he bought as much 13 (Nt grain as was brought for sale. esdfio @So sta ON@QDNJ@Q, em 733630 Rl z’amfiaefi dama;fi he is as virtuous as he is learned See an mstance 1n ity § 327 (CSJ@ZS 2308-0305"%) gy ele.). N thig ‘Such-—as’ 18 expressed as follows: ——fize 80 WONRID SIS ’ such a A PENUIEY 347 [ —— the wife as a husband desires [RNF WO I BIDNRY, such as know the >'Jfi (proper) way §3E$5 Z90%, such a mother as thou the ‘Not so—as’ is expressed by adding the negative 8 (see § 300, 1), e & ¥330 I8N, wBSIw, he (18) not so poor as I easao SNFE WO & S @379, he (is) not such a one as knows the (proper) way. am:b ;)J éwoéém 2IRE0RY, the elder brother (is) not so clever as (his) younger 1./ brother. o 322 In § 302, 7 o3y9ws 8, why if I say, 4. e. for, because, has been J ) ) i} introduced It may be added that s93¢a3e3I3 3, the reason (or cause) ing what, if I say (or one says), and FToosesSega008I3, the reason (or R, cause) what has it become (or what is it), if I say (or one says), are )32, similarly used, e.g. 3909 3ZR 32y, FTIN WHA Y w¥)¢ SBSRTY ) 4§ FOR BeB, TOTLORR O, parents must teach good conduct to their ond children from (their) youth, for — DPIVO T WP IN, FoY SRR o BRESAT R F90003¢Rs 8, death appears preferable to a life without honour, for — & DR DCIOTF, ToTSe 5o B099YTS8 B 3RTH nwdy nd; ~o3s 8, Tuldpura means the town of weight [lit. Tulapura, if (one) hat says, is town of weight]; what was the cause that it got this name? Jo, (or why did it get this name?)— Regarding the verbs eg® and ¢ this see § 331 seq i3 323 If a writer or speaker wants to adduce something that is or was the said or that happens or happened, the English ‘namely’, ‘as follows’ are i expressed by adding 9330 @, HII 3, if I say (or one says) what, to the vs ) r as pronoun €9z3>, or to a conjugated verh, or to a verbal noun, e.g T3 TBOBINTY BB BB, ;3;3;38 the they SR B or =r3¢33 8, that is to say. boy speaks as follows— oonsy 3N T, .J_')-—? IS® @aflé ;)658 the LD guru has given me the following command— %W Neao's’m 33N a0 Zf)&oga%‘ 2L TR, a-esa a certain friend gave (lit. told) him courage with the following words— e3 98 RITINRY RT3 e;fié 8, what that prince ) the said was this (or that prince spoke as follows)—. @9 da‘amj&a’b ST yuch 558 Mr. Dvaranatha spoke as follows—. N85 @sfi@fi Ut 63(’5 55353636 25) ;gg 3, the guru instructed him as follows —. £330 aasozbabeamfi DS AW g I RT3 e 3, what the mendicant represented respectfully to the judge was this — SlaleviM @fio‘idg;flafl8 thereby happens the following — 3 2903 SRR 8 afterwards (there) happened the following—. Cf. §325. h 8 44+ ————— P 348 To this class belong also 0332 IT B, which (thing, etc.) if I say (or one says)—. ) @;3;33%@, which (things, efe.) if 1 say—. 03535%9%8, which woman if I say — $8RRE or o3wedg 8, who if I say—. 3383 the 4% Yol %ee?% Tmc% TRE B T 7,900, ©30) a3 3, Dasaratha had 3 five children including females and males, they are the following —. Siva 324. ‘What is that?’ may be expressed by ea% dey, if 1 say (or one cioy says) what, e.g. 3359, ¥SA 3R @%8@;30 Rw3g dodwe, brother, do you A 80 b know what cattle are? 53 eme Tl ea#%aem, St they (are) hail- W) stones (the father says). What is that, father? Awexyd @%8@3, what thee 18 a gopura? 325. ‘What happened?’ (¢f. § 323), if followed by an answer of the writer @ or speaker himself, may be expressed by Hzo00ZowS, if I say (or one says) i what happened, e. g. da%&‘;fi&% bmo&aé’%é, what happened through bad can oy luck‘?——f @%@figfi%fieg@o&oég& what happened meanwhile? —. 326. If a writer or speaker wants to tell the manner in which something i is or was done or how something is or was, the English ¢in this manner’, f a1 ‘in the following mamner’ is expressed by 3,803, Ben3, BRI G, how if I say (or one says), e. g. aie%a%a_@ome%dozfig) 5,303 6L & ©3S, ;'3"% @, he told (7. e. wrote) the treatise called Vivékaéintimani in [L] b the following manner — ARVNFRY, BerRm RS, needles are b made in this manner —. o) WS B @-@ér{% 8, we came in this manner—. up fi»#o&ri%fio ;)érgcfle?n TOW ;Sfafidofie?#g) WHITE, S éefi;gfi, cats live con- hur tinually (by stealth) on milk and curds in this manner—. wF, 30 of Ryt O a-@(gfi% 3, the way of refining gold is the following —. ra%&éés vioh RRENT T90HB TN 3, they got out of (their) strait in this manner—. L & ORRBY Wiy %éofiaom& %N 3, regarding this (there) is a story 0 (I shall tell) in the following manner —. 1 ¢ Instead of suffixing e, if, to %Y, how, the ancient and medizeval 80 ¢ dialect frequently suffixes .3, when I say (one says), to it, e.g. & 33 oo, &, that story (is told) in the following manner —-. w8 S, it is thus—. Preg & A ;R o8 R, that dogma is as follows —. Sue 327 The English ¢as-—so’ is expressed in Kannada by an interrogative elep of manner followed by a demonstrative of manner, e. g. 3o 35 DBRBITBN Sl Se&To0, as (lit. how) is rash, so he made (= 5%‘7 SPEB0). BReR3TL B 33T HBRBIBIA gfie(&%c) as is‘ faultless, so he spoke (=ZpeRTHI0 haC JRSPNRT, 349 Je— (or BeLI o). W, RBonBidRon, as is according to fitness, so (:030&58%0). 0 Toi BB TooR, as is fit, 50 (=R o). 387 s BARENA, as : : the remembrance (is), so. QBN FT,0 PIIAI, T, YBN T & CRY had fi@%%?‘)afiéado ?»&9655,530, is it a wonder that as the devotee thinks, so Siva will graciously assume that form (i.e. such a form Siva will gra- One ciously assume)? ¥g Ronad 533 BeA B3FR Bedwe, TR BT Ronad fou QeRY 8B Fwe, as thou wouldst that others should behave towards thee, A all so behave thou towards others. :Sofioé iR e wRB3 JIN TR A hat WBITTRE, TR STINW w3033, as thou becomest angry, if (one) beats thee quite causelessly, so does a cow too. IR waqsfi RRET) BRITTRE, ter Tt & SReeTH, 8oz @, as thou feelest pain, so does this fly too. D 7s) Rty DT WY @R wTOLIFpe, TRy FH AT Yy, as fishes ad cannot leave the water and live, so are frogs not at all. &é&%& ;Soe)@g% OB, 8T 003 FTOR Bwony* [YHIITTF NDITIRTITTIE FRYBF, ing €PJR, as clay (is the material cause) for a pot, so (one) must consider oI (1t) to be a substance which is the material cause for the origin of sounds 8 as represented by letters. Z 230%030?3%§% & T zbcé@ z&.@% n‘océd N zoi%zs 03530302 Wi i} @diwd\@e}fi m'aéfi :doéj& WRAOIINISZBRE, smanodoe ?»\2%5 HOBY IR L &:5% xs;% %"e):fi@% zasézj ;.3"3@%3;3@% So3oenosny, as a stack that is piled up as high as a big hill, if one spark flies from a fire and falls (upon it), o burns and is reduced to ashes in half a moment, even so all happiness B of (one’s) life is destroyed by a small act done (lit. that one does) in .’ 4 violent passion. 33 9e &’925;5 3008 $ToeBIZ, 003 VPR BedR FHR WS BA HRR BtP DEPITHY Fpe, TR 5@%0'50 0008 ToRNg )y TR TP VeLNTOY, as an ant that walks about on an orange, though it comes from above to the bottom, does not roll down (from it), even il so does also a man on the earth not roll down. 4 328. The English ‘how much — so much’, ‘how many — so many’ is ex- pressed by an interrogative noun of indefinite quantity (§ 278, 3) followed by such a demonstrative noun, e.g. X003 TB FTDBRT TORSISILBRT, elephants how many, even in so many (places there occurs) a number of \; ) suras in union (3. e. seven times VLU Chandas under kusumagara). %o < &0 @-afio%sfieia‘ DRITIT, 030, @so%mv & BB TonBRTS FORABT; é & WOBHRD O %ofiogfigfi wé’fezsm‘s;jcmgo %m%fifigzfiao 3BRABI; VXS o~ 350 o - St FoBIBRPS TS %03 0 meeé ¢ QR0 300° NTIIRS e.eoi)c'flcsejo S Al Be%; QR JJANPE eru&szbécxo =0 BRI o, how many arrows the warriors shot, so many arrows he caused to appear in the body of those valiant men; how many weapons entered that force, so many weapons he stopped 1t i altogether by cutting (them down); how many elephants (and) horses has attacked, so many he split; how many chariots came on with impetuosity, the vehemence of so many he broke; how many people rushed on, even 1§ an so many he killed. =) Bon%* ey, RN & B0, how many horses pro (thou) wantest, so many I shall give thee. BRI WIFRETW 3 BIROFRBeR09, [ JRPEPoD Wi IF I30%0wy, when he was offering are add sandalwood, (and) his capital how much it was, (so much, &=, which foll is to be supplied) was spent all in succession for the sandalwood 0 W) OIBO BRI0 AR, BRT T00RY, SRV UT[HRRE, VR, ZHIB rich w90, how much far (7. e. how far) a horse can journey in a day, so much has (. e. 80) distant a road (= déefi_) B30 Tk A, 3 2BT,B wWID o 830950399) WRERPA %Ja%fio'j ;Széé’r’s aa@ omw érfioée 3pe, Q.Jo&@ ;S;i: 03359 Wwho fisa R3, ToN=RTY 3&3 WRLP A %ne?o;ficséo SRes "’dcfleé do ;5710538 thre how much we laugh at the custom of the Egyptians to have (thelr) whole stea body shaved, if a dog dies in the house, even so much foreigners laugh doea when they see that in our country a woman whose hushand has died, of I has (her) head shaved 8399 IRy, 8T, suidRe, 8339 ST e?% LD, g} how much money we have, so much calculation we have Chy 329 Where a relative participle with a demonstrative adverb of W2 actic time, as woTen (wooS+en), when I come when thou ' comest, when he, she, it comes, when we, you, they come (§ 282, ¢), is commonly used N3 ~QN the ‘when’ is occasionally expressed by an interrogative adverb of time followed What by a demonstrative ome, €. g. JeY) 0T PYHBOWR 30N wWToATRE, G Pogg] 530 2383 3¥%,9 0, when you come back from Puné, visit him. 8 =3 Nfigr) T ROTAN [WNDCITTEE, SN STIMIROT, BREN BRI when thou pufp< hast prepared thy lesson, thou mayest go out for a walk. This is, so to ¢ say, an imitation of Samskrita odoze, when, and its correlative 3o acy then Cf. the close of § 330 V:( 330. Regarding the translation into English of the relative past d@cg participle followed by nouns and demonstrative pronouns see §§ 179. 254 bElng and regarding that of the relative present-future participle followed by (fory 351 . i such terms §§ 186. 254. (f. §§ 363. 364 In § 282 the use of those i participles in connection with adverbs has been adduced 0t It remains to refer to § 267 in which it has been stated that o it might appear, as if there existed relative pronouns and their correla- o tives in Kannada (just as in Samskrita) That such an appearance is not by, based upon idiom, has been indicated in that place, though in English the (g} instances given there, would naturally suggest the existence of relatives §ES and their correlatives, e.g ¢who —he ¢who— she etc However the N pronouns resembling relative ones are interrogatives, and the correlatives are demonstratives, and therefore the instances quoted in § 267 and some ng ich additional ones in this paragraph are literally to be translated as follows: — 383008 &° ¥=33¢? ©¥3I8 B3 o, who (is) a rich man? he indeed od (1s) a prince (in English: who is a rich man, he indeed is a prince, or a o rich man is a prince indeed) FRoTT wa;g e 3ona3o %r”otéa;’)@o who 1ch has an (always) bent bow? he (is) Kama wfiz’)fi o%déo,o;fia WA 233 B3RP Wa30F 03030 P ARITF® ¥B? ¥R afidzsn@dfi):'fi RSN F T 4 who (is) the man that only once contemplates joyfully in (his) mind the ) three syllables Ba-sa-va ? the lotus of his countenance indeed will remain ol steady. QRBRY BT FITDE SN R Zvo WRT9cJo, Who 1gh does think of us in his heart? (Siva d,Skb) that one (or he) even is a part 16(], of Basava. U39 B33,30303% N@a"é, who is a wife faithful to her husband? she indeed is a venerable woman. RBIOZR TOR SPRITIRe? ‘31 B3S0 e 5389, who does work? he shall have a dinner. 3TN0 "3 of osormfiefo :;Ssacéo;’)&@e? BTR0 R TR, Who does perform virtuous actions ? he is happy. el 3593 -js)(v\)e& Do B8R %@@Swsafi 23eFR WORY 39,80¢7 9ZTo T 3 SR ofisa;fié@ RRIT 3008 NTTIT TPR Wed, ol what man does desire welfare? he must be kind to all men as much as el i possible. foutr Tefofat) fifiofio:fldfio ‘%@gdzfla@ NS WIFTON BREIRISY, 730 e? VT B V0G4, Who does frequently march out with the very purpose of overcoming an enemy? such a one is an abhyamitrya. ot BB BRB WeRTBBTRO F3oFo, what is that towards which an )tO A0 activity is directed ? even that is the object (see § 315, 2, m) &R0 TR @O.aoe&)%io 3o? @303 Sexy, what is in customary usage? even that is fit. BT '23@3@ B030? ¥R B33Fec3r0, what is beautiful? that is worthy of st being seen Ereto I BYT? BBy BHTTeeo, What is location? that '047 (form%) the sense of the locative case 2300308, 009R0BVIXI* VI SO by 352 — sl SIRO 08, wRoD, e 3nu¥yo, what is a combination of mutual action? are there also a bahuvrihi compound (§ 249) is formed 28030 FIW NN oo dwe? @y ©I.wen, what is an elephant’s forepart? that (is) the (oc §a) antabhiga 03093 Be33Y R Dk FOWNTOY 3pe? & Be3BY APa) % DBoRde . in what country do people not study science? in that country (there) is no happy state B3N R), DOBRWTT 030953 083000 [BA i FRE BeBR 3D, 92T w03, B303Re? e 33RO 395y HTRIWITTSY 382 BRIOF, Bedy, in what manner do they desire that others should treat them ? in that very manner they should treat others. 00! B SIRZINS ST T, o eaoédo:@gj S el &5’563 DRI B, who are gl some friends of the bridegroom? they are called janyas. QR aido @% Wi 3593 3F 56@67 &95 63553 ‘('363 oleaoécafi e20=0, who (are) fit for thee to i trust? such people choose for thy friends! qu ARTIIRY ORFENIT)? BLILP T B3 8030, 9RHP, 0, which (pearls) flo do suit you? them choose with pleasure! (See § 271.) Such sentences appear to have originally been formed in imitation of Samskrita ones with the relatives o3zf. o35z, oom» and their cor- Qfi ( he relatives 3o, 3a=3nf, 3@» (¢f. § 329) Their translation, as given above, hi can be easily changed into proper English ut] XXTI. On the verbs »¢ and eog* | 1 331 In §§ 302, 7; 322. 323. 324. 325. 326 the peculiar use of the verbs o8 =56 he DT (I, OF), ¥ (¥R, ©8y), to say, when their past relative W, participle (in the sense of the present) is in combination with %, (VE), 7 \ and 3 and an interrogative (0359¥3 0 FOTSCRI T, DRRR B, VIR T O $330 D, etc.; 88 3eR0; TON3IT; RPN B, BN asasflfii) has been introduced v (8 It appears from those paragraphs that if a person wants to state the ¥ reason (or cause) of something he writes or speaks about, if a writer or speaker adduces something that is or was said or that happens or (] de happened, if a writer or speaker is going to answer a question put by himself, and if a speaker or writer wants to tell the manner in which 1t N’ something is or was done or how something is or was, those verbs in the mentioned combination are employed. 332. Before expatlatmg on the other use made of the verbs 3¢ and 1 L e9¢ we have to give their past participles aa’;o eaa’n (§ 155) and their ~ ) 0! substitutes o, and e0g, (§ 172 and § 198, 7, remark 1), as the said verbs i are often followed by ¢ %, eVADE (NFITF), [0, BeLI or Becsk, the (occasionally also 2,8) combined with their past participles, for we may say either FRB IS0 TR II Do FHBII I or also BRI 20, ) mé iy TREID B3 FRBIZ0 MATFo: FRB IR FRTo; FRBIZY [ o an BRR T VELPRRY, TR IS, Be2PRRY, THE BDeCP TS, all meaning ¢he said I gave’ or <he said I will giv % uld It may be said about the use of >3® and e3¢ in their simple and combined form that they generally introduce a statement by words or on paper (or on cadjan leaves, copper plates and stone tablets), this being are ) either a statement made by somebody regarding himself or another, or one of what another has said or written, or one of command, or one of message, {0 when it may be said to answer to the English conjunction <that’ or the quotation marks in English, e.g. 3pn¥o 38 25° 3 ¢, she said «I bring 1s) flowers”’ B BR0 35933 5 30, he said «I shall do this” B3P SF w2 DT o3 0f, they said «if (you) give, you (are) good ones 0f 0r B39, 395Y DTIT DINHY, C3TPONR WoRBITY IRY, EBIRY BANLPITY he said «sir, you (are) a great hero and fear nobody”, and (thus) praised M him SR RORTY) — BB B, TV, IRN $0o3,30 W 3v, then the lion said «“this (is) my share, it fell to me” 308 83, 18 Gemededs, ¥N 8], P enY widy, 1t did not come to my mind at that time that hereafter my fate would become thus TRV 8 NBOR BREN WTS eRR,, BREIURY 89T, $030 =& ths he said «I go to that town and return”, and started 176 WY 3T ReRoowmy, Fwze! Be=To AN %@aésa BRTYRDO T, BB ) '@@2533 “elder 31s‘cer » prayed she, «kindly give me a drop of honey' 26 God w111 make thee happy?”. £33 30eS IPAD NTTITY QNP FeBF 16 TN BATLBOG Y, PRYJLIA dZ 03 IPB TRy, he svivedian 4l certain decmon that help afi’orded to others Would never be in vain. the ¥SR— 2338, VO ZRD0H SEBR FTRB B, SWENZT IR, or BRNGR, “ha, what is this?” cried he, «in this straw there appears a or deer to be hidden?. SPIdL 3 23902 TN, =D éofim BREEIIZTY by it appears that death is pleferable to a dishonorable life. “pseno BT ch TPWIBFT BORTIN0 RO I® éez% BF OR0,00303AT Sowne TR he o © Ze RURY O3 goo, when they told (the king) that the florist, say- ing “she tasted the flower (and) fragrance with which Hara should be nd SEY AR el worshipped 7, cut off the nose of this queen at that moment. P 4 ) Oy - ) PSR Tell S300T) VIR TPTD STRZ0 DR, uewfiufio&o% @g =0, he said hastily “the meaning of your word is perfectly known to me’ & $3RTR030 efi%a 0290¢ MW Smotic, having said even ¢this worldly 0 ¢ EST AN DIehoE existence-removing-story (shall become) a cause of pleasure for the ear 3 WOu I endeavoured to tell (it) DO RVIDRY, BV TR BRETIRY aé\ca%seéo she said “he took all the money and went away” AR TREB YT (AN BT IR [IN B30, they told me that the decision thou madest L was not proper 03, V3N TSR FNT VR TITN BRENDILS 3R I} ®ec 3y, the ox said «thou canst not be saved from his hand”. ‘3»@&30 %JaéS’ ;3#;& n)oaseé’efi o Su&To, I shall certainly give’” king Simhala sald o\ ‘fisam @Qa’o fi@afiéa S , BEed30 Becn Ry, Phakira said «uncle, thou didst call me” (‘aJ mdme; B8 DRV! T AINFRY, W3R TIRWIS 4 10 %3.0 ToP33 eX ¥x oy, when it (the wolf) said (to the wild hog) «give ez up anxious thought as to those (your) little ones! I shall sit near (them) i3p)] guarding them with care” SR DPBOS, RN, BeL1BRY, he said « 1 will o L” he Whe 3 32 RONBR, ;:mosm méoofimr%@ 8, 33n mae ReLP ¢ gu?gfid S3INRY 505!“?‘ 553 SR NENIY T A 22)&3 <9, the son took to % ; heart that (his) father had given him the advxce that it was much fitter to bear with than to punish, and pardoned the boy DD NR 30 33N1% By Weg $3393) D 23T LR OB d F NB BHD SBT3 KPOIF BWE [NV.BINPR, 0 RewsSe Bl ABRR, 0P HEEIO wiHRA, 1t is written wh in it (viz. in the old or former book) that (you) should never transgress the word of (your) parents and that God created man, beasts, birds, trees ver| the earth, the sky, the sun, the moon, and all the other things Srlo o (pe SOVNNTRY, R NBTF, T8, ToF BREND S u(\)(v 3, he said « tie the dogs to a tree and go!” SEVE) Bo3 RR3 WY %éj m BnRY, BayN I8 e 6@ N QDR , W e PO TR, he exhorted him “the habit of using im- NG, g, proper language (1%) very bad; remember this well!”, exRdNeEIR e ng R ¢ QWRR VoD %fi?fi o 2L o, that Kulinda told his son “do not become subject to envy!™ asa sér 33, m%s o..UN — o =D o9 SRV TR aSe%’*b 10y B NONR ex :Me wsacfécflm, the klng commanded the boatmen that they hould first transport all his soldiers over (the river) e33R0 RREBII SFw, when he said «let us see!” Ve BRETBL D, 239 IR BV, he said «let us see, come!” by »RAINRR, Be2IO? FIOR 2 3e€Rs, Re2°0, whatam I to tell him? W [r— S 355 tly Tell (him) he must come to me. BREN, FpOVoTIVREY 3T TudR ew 30 &3, W3 EAGTY %e2%, 2o, and tell (him) that I will come to his house dly to dinner this evening. o3, Ha 2052089 33, =i waedv wT3, e I 89, éewu% o)ed 8y, FFRATTY, the gentlenmn sent me to say that he ol W, would come to your house to dinner this evening. BR300 aé%’ SSFO0Y 3 A SIP DB FTITIWRE, FBHEN BNy IXoR fim%%oasafi est, %woéon)dosa 883 &0, the messenger went to the ruler and said «O king, o, my master has sent you these things as a present” WO 8 The verbs 3¢ and e are also used in questions, ¢. g. oF =uBT id 3003 DEPY 035 &9, he said « why hast thou ascended the tree?” & %va 10 29, ¥, fuoovovofi T WTO DT, W3, Ty, when the cripple said V3 “«how shall I come to thy help‘?” and was sorrowful. 03593 385 S: ife weTo 0y, 3¢, what doest thou say that (we) shall play? & Zoo38y 8 g} TOBRY [WBTTTY RITY ORI, BRCUBRSNR SN % F3539 %@?d;fio vl he called the servants that were in the garden and asked “ who are they a3 who have treated this tree in this manner?”. I3ZoR TN LNV IR FeP3Ty, they asked «“how did you know (that)?” 0T BT IEY fo Fewowo, he asked «when wilt thou bring (it)?” R 0T ©203 D e DRY, TITWR VR, TEET he asked Ramacandra <«why doest thou ¥ weep?”’ W fen Further the caid verbs are used to express ‘for the purpose’, regarding which some instances have been given in 302 under No. 7 () Then the said verbs are also used to give an explanation of nouns, 36\, verbs or adverbs, e. g. TCB, 033;@ Roree, kalté means an ass [lit. kalté (people) having said (is) an ass] 04»\)\/3 fi-(\f O)gfil N\) OJ\)dO multaga the means a certain tree FRCORZS3 o, kiilla means a rude man. J EgNJ 49 TCPGo, tégaldan means <he reviled’. efifiofi S0 eIFSBY B, aguldan |1 means ‘he sank in water’. kalkané means suddenly. FCI 50305& efi%’n) %o v fiwrfi&&;fiofiam 3eno, gdlaoalane means qUILk]y — Also when a series of me nouns is given Ogf or ©x¢ is used, e. g. NG T, TEOL T, [ ) 3 %933, WA ¢ T, wIRBIT9Y), WO, o) BuR) 3TH TIYNFE &) Also when imitative sounds, feeling, etc. are to be expressed, the said verbs are used, e.g ¢o 3 TEOLINTOTL ¥ VATF ) ~ihialel us hailstones fell down from the sky with the sound of palapala palpala BRLe) N0y MooMe IR Tomu3.83, the fly sings gumyi guiyl S8 m‘) 45% PN 356 e 80035 203 989,33, the palm of my hand has the sensation of jum fifi( fak (from cold) kn The relative participles of the said verbs are used similarly (¢f. the use of O3, in the passive, § 315, 2, k) Regarding »530, when forming B! of : a verbal noun in combination with evzio or e, the following instances may be given: — JTISTAZ Fo00300[N BT wBodTy, do not say 9] «this investiture with the sacred thread is sapless to me” TR, zoe)o o il B T DR @aflood o, does the cat know (the d1fi’e1ence between I common) milk (and) tha,t which is vowed ? ga30 & RRZY, BHRITIN WY FO3II0.BR 2. 308 20eR3. 3 Besv, he must daily examine «how much more have I learned to-day?” TE.P09, WBIIDDRARY TORT, TONE ToTV m bir SBE,R. 300W3TIN VBRI, INRINRERT ITONRCTITTN BT3P ENSR03Re B 3P ITABRY, IPLIFTON DwFoC Iod Rwe&d, children, before you W apply (your) hand to anything, examine thoroughly whether it is in any Sa way useful to you or not DO RSN N WT TN DRIIRB W RDBVR.RBF, Wi BRB T9TLI0 there is an eminent reason, why we 1€ should not vainly (and) inconsiderately speak. & T[Y=E FZO 3R T3 e nYoeey;: w) OINTF), WD Wd VIV, TR BREIZ, IB TR, VeFDY TN (239,39 + 8N) w3xd. in that book there are ethic rules; it is 3 written (therein) that you should read and remember them carefully and 0 walk accordingly edg)ééaso F383 Hen ::Ssaz?ris woN w3y, 1R, calling a8 (one’s) servant and ordering “do thus”. deom eflma BREN W, 6R, ol SReEITO 82, w3 B¢ (past relative participle) %fiw&éo the fox said ab with emphasis (to the fowl) «elder brother, I go (now) and shall return. (Your) favour remain (on me)!”, and started 333. I8 or eI B are frequently used after a conjugated verb to express ad the meaning which that verb would give, if its relative participle in comhi- U Y nation with €8 were used, €. . 2QRT R ®D, TSR DTS WIVE, 20 R 8 W 0BV 2oNBRFNRE RN F3,8. wBOF, wl €8y, if hence thou daily lef come [lit. «daily come” if (one) says] to our school, you will probably D become able to write like me even in one or two months BRB WSTR B the if master has come [lit. if (one) says «master has come”] OR300 o3 38,030 3008 TR 3S3Z 3 WREY [o0%59,008 S eenes, B, if the sparrow (i sits on that egg [lit. «sat” if (one) says), a young will be born by the [] warmth of its body. 353 303 SERY, WRTT ToITVOT PR Wesv ¥R 3 13 357 i i Be38 3308 B0 IPRITRY, if you take care of the poor [(lit. ¢ you must take care of the poor” if (one) says] as much as you can, God will be the kind towards you. FoONEY aSsm difia DRONN nePnw 438 w¥NS Lng 23, RECLIR w83 B, if the pods are ripe, they will open by the effect 1668 of sunshine and wind, and the cotton that is inside, will come out. DO sy PYoB= Y NROR BRERY @55 ABVNR TR aN1 ) fiffio 30N TN BRBOSN AN S 1f thou goest to the town called Rbmmdpura thou wilt get a cocoa- £e1 nut for two duddus 29 B3 90383 3N & B BRSN T ANDE © if darkness sets in here, I shall not find the way in this hilly country ) 11Cd B TooI0IRY, FODWTN BoW BRMY DRIT WA 3 BWRD BTOB, 2 R,T JOTY o3, if we two divide this costly pearl among us, (our) poverty of birth will cease WAy Observe also the following instance — 3R3R%s 33793 you 30; B 32559038% ¥ 3 W) o0 8wy, the gentleman came last any Saturday; (from that time) till this Saturday, if one says, it is a week o) It is to be remarked here that >33 or 9338 is also used to express y We the English ¢that is to say’, e. 9. 88, OYECORe VRDNT NLeeFe BRI ROl 3T @33 DRVTY BRR,ED RFn$ 28R, from A. D. 1490 till A. D 3 1687, that is to say for about 200 years R DR RNoWBNT CEZLQSCS 1t s %e:a’ 0 3080 T2 0%63530 NOBOD TRV, B3 3 98 [T zéw"a%a”o&e» and guezy, the area of the united kingdom of Great Britain is about as great Iling as that of Ceylon, that is to say 25000 square miles B O S0nod g\fi 58 FRT, TY BWOST B3 ©RY, BRRB Doy, if this fish moves said about, the sea swells and increases, that is to say such a big fish tur 334. With regard to the use of >J3 or @68 after a conjugated verb adduced in § 833 the remark is to be made that 033003, e3T3T8 or 33T pres (¢/. the verse in § 319) are similarly used, e. g. ROZFTe ot evidaleu\D) omhl 3073, if thou knowest Siva’s mantra ATIRLPNRTE 3D ~d§@&@:€ if he D left your service undone BRI DG oardRB, If they escaped R A8 dail oor@, if they touch. Also exy 7998 YRR RPeNSERT, if to-morrow abl thou goest to Puné Cf. § 296 930 R 335 In the modern dialect ¢intentionally’ is expressed by 3e¥s,, il (lit. having said «it must”), e. g. omo ReFT, TFRONTY, wRBOY I have not broken the looking-glass intentionally; (and ¢unintentionally ) the may be translated zo% or 23eBT)) #a 0 0 ) 336 In the same dialect ‘they say’, ‘on dit’ is expressed by adding iy 0. (§ 196, remark 4; § 198, 7, remark 2) to a sentence, e. g. 239O & BATOTOR WER BREN, BRI By (see § 337) — 5p00T3e, 3ZBeRdRe Sal T 53533 ;Sc?).rawo c?mcé 559@ 2913033;3 the Brahmana went to that s1| money-changex and sald “su they (people) say you have a certain large metal vessel into which water uses to be filled ” LR WSO TP wBe FREUPE FOTPRRY, RIoTVF ST they say that a sort of frogs swallows a whole chicken WTIS?. O «they are coming” they say (or I am told) wa 83, «“they are come”, I am told a8 337 From the instances in § 332 it appears that 3¢ or esg® are generally placed at the end of a statement, etc.; it is, however, allowed to put them also before it in order to introduce it, e. g 38 0000 VW 0Ry, TR (un 53 30OR Qe LS €5F§ cSo L DE %?ce, Qe SR DTV TR, e RPTBIBY, orig 20, etc., the fathel called both (hls chlldren), told them to stand before §Cie thes h1m and said (lit. a having said) «children, daily look on the looking- glass” WR) OF 2, SWRITRY BT RIBINONR 88 B — [0F,909 TRV w8 SR SIoen WeTR) ©ed 203,08, on a certain day an old man said not to some boys ¢ children, I desire your welfare”. 5368535 N fiw») (o'l sile S’aofi 930 wXISeRSe mod, the god said to Namblyanna-—“always (are) even the manifold védas the road”. ‘“éufl’oa')’ o BR0300N— 9P 030 0r ng RE°030 38 ovo, the wife told the beloved one “I do not know, I do § 29, not know devotion” 0 m In such a case D% or €% may be preceded by I (of. § 326 & 9K 35\.@@.), e. g. WOPRNS ®TABo R 3SR 8o, thereupon, in order the | to appease the queen, he spoke thus—. =03 =5 »3=s* @8 T e, again ?”N\)t the king spoke thus —. =03 3 ©3,8%°, again she spoke thus—. e3¢ (i 23 & ¢, she spoke thus— 530 B3 8 of, they spoke thus—. 3ZAR '3,('1)0 2368 ]88 80N TIBRELTI RS BF, % o, he spoke thus to (his) father— ol to the son of the king the son of Patimohi spoke thus—. Also: =& &@dm Posg having spoken thus (with reference to preceding words) 0r Or @amo, this, may be put after SP% € 9. ¥TI* I3 BHo, he i spoke this— algo There is still to be mentioned the use of a relative participle in the Who | form of a verbal noun to introduce a statement, etc., without >5° or esgé e. g. 9380 BSRCWAR) — ST, TOL VEWH WEDDTY, BELNTE DT Tay has i Sataa 359 PREUR, g ) edew33), he reflected «what she says is a bag of black seed, (is) the bag of gunpowder”. RQox53) 58633925%._;)63%6@ X dabaiol 8¢9, the lion e said «all of you certainly know”. In such a case Dfiéi is to be 14 supplied, for which see § 323. A o ol XXIII. On B, e, s, 16y 338. In §212, No. 7 e @, @e a8 (¢/. §§ 170. 361) and esen, appear as clagsed with the adverbs by the Sabdanusasna. are ’ae(g)cS. to In that case B 3 has the meaning of ¢in absence of’, ‘without’ o) (vindrtham), e. g. ©%,055° B8 3% 0° @%{%_33, do distinguished people %, originate without letters (i. e. without the knowledge of letters or 016 science) ? Q0RF VR OBY DS w¥E, yIRoZteesd, without thee are all ng these (valuable things) in existence (for me), O Karna? g e d TE, R ®0ed, without devotion thou wilt be ruined. 3Ieode e SER shall I a&ld not come even without delay? éwaoe&cfig, even without intermission. wleTndon B8, Dy B 2R ez, many men like to live without labour, xJOi 3,8 But originally e a3 is the negative participle of e, not being present o) or not having been present, not being, not having been (see § 170; ¢f. vy [ do §298), e.g. €RIVDB TIWgo RBWFOTF HRFyo, a kingdom in which Z30R so much (viz. a strong king, etc.) is not existing, is called weak. G P WE,Foo, B¢ BT BYBRP, 2 son generated by one’s self (is) 1del the best; and if not being he is (7. e if he did not exist). =g 2,3;})\:3@‘ yIll WEIFYo mogad%acfi,@%-z%, thereafter not being anything to eat here if is o) %”l (¢. e. if thereafter there were nothing to eat here). AN 20033 A0S Yy B0B0Y, if (there) is no understanding, (there) is no right behaviour. ] | N <0 B o3RRS 9 Be B,0070N BWerodF Soh3E dRRAE, to a useful pur- 50 e pose even not being a spending a going (i. e. spending even for no use or without use) is called vyaya. - he 293 being thus originally a negative participle or gerund, forms also the relative participle AR (see § 273), e. g. $ysde tioe, those e who have no sorrow. OR339 'a?od ooy, a line that has no break. %@D&eg’d 239, an ox that has no horns. ) BYTIIF, & man who 2955‘5 Neg has no understanding. B BT, that is not existing. —It is to he e 60 pe—— remarked that me . like sv®, may govern also the accusative, e.g Y D23 00w TR (see § 316 under No. 1) 8L wed (¢ §300,1, remark a) AQ ¥ 2 when considered as an adverb (§ 212, 7) means ‘excepting’, ‘except’ g: i efie)c% & | (vnmrtha,m Sabdanu$isana), and occasionally ¢but’, e.g. 101 Beso’ w¥de, are (there any) gods except Jina? Qe v 93¢ @&%”5‘ ad03ne’ 389, except thee, Jinapa, who is an excellent person on has hay earth? DU Qéofi%? Bo¥ Q) DFF IS 2 OBRY* ;3&03.@6#9'0303;‘ HBIFID, EX( except at night fire-files (ha,ve not the ability to shme), let the sun he shine in front, what ability (to shine) have they? BORITPRBNG, ¥, WY wsa%’ PR ¥ Y, Kama, except among females, thou hast no wh power. %o%‘ffi 3035@:5053@@;‘ omo '6%3@ e:e%d;’)ve) 3 BY; DTY 0 o g vegla*f B0 DY, in an alliteration Wherem the kula (the Kannada ¥°) 18, kn the optlonal use of the letter e for the kshala (the Samskrita %) does & never occur; an optional use, excepting (that of) the kshala, is not to eO3F RO3E RO 2035° aaémi‘h@%" &3635‘ me occur (in such a case). By DY DTV, in the verbal themes uy ndy suy Oy (there) is no other use e\cept the doubling (of their final letter when eo¢ is suffixed). bea BTDTOR, 0 ) 3P R dafi%o&.mfi ofi%? 2303 BBFH fiofias B0 %0, o excepting the terms that end in e, (there) is (the suffix) 7§ for the datlve (i when it (é. e. its suffix) follows the rest (viz.) those that end in (other) o vowels and in consonants PR SO0 uw%‘d@c% 3035° BSOS w3y, WIHFRY, it is possible to offer (one’s) riches, “but how will it be hes possible to offer (one’s) body ? SDIBET, o SoBIBgy' BRID To N 10y o3 T v Te Boddcvo FOR R0, except I reverently marry (her) to Y a devotee of Adigiva, I do not give this (my) daughter to a worldling. BeRT TYHOWR QT D[ ir’ TOTmITDY, except through the grace of God stil (there) is no forngeness for (i. e. of) sin. By SRRTIMSHY R SRRT Wh\ sowatede, except that milk becomes curds, could curds become milk ? Y Occasionally 223 or e9z§ (or ©3) may precede e, e. g Q3 %03%3@ 4 | BoRBRBY B, FITDBRLF TN, except he “die by your ha,nd I 1ot shall get no delnelance from my curse. SEANESE TPVABRY T FT, 33 3( o3oRv, except one adores me, devotion will not be obtained. eff e sometimes loses so much of its originally verbal character § 167 be that 1t is added to a relative past participle (unless the rule in the RS 361 PEEECN + applied), e.g. dgo VPRRL T (=FPABT wed, or perhaps FpeRR ve %), except I see thee. 23%3F\c$e)z3 except it become bright. 33 3,y 208,0 RoR éécfimef e atetalo N i ov 3’%363&)23 (Commentary: dbdde)fi) %szé b 09 donsSwniy dwdo, a term W1th final e3¢ may well form a w01d in E o a Samskrita compound, but in (true) Kannada does not become a i nominal theme by itself LWON W S0 wvre o B¢ BReny, Mari that 0n has come to a town, does never go away except she eats.— On the other hand we have also 2, 38 dNAGOD (=3dNATY €5@)Z3) 200 25903 sun except he knock (his) head (against something), understanding will not be obtained (by him) ) Likewise this disappearance of its original character seems to occur 4n0 when e 8 is followed by an accusative (see § 300, 1, remark 0), e. g 390 BB BT ¥ D8R3 9EP=8rRY), except devotees of Siva we ) 15, know and love nobody does AP VB R0 WePFR, TEIRIT SBW w930 (see § 287, remark) 38, FIDNH IIF0 except always upon it 0 o) me, he does not think even upon my (high) rank i Ll ther e9e &3 may also get the meaning of ‘besides’ (&3¢ $08,), € 9 o 3. besides that ane . besides this BRIV 3, FOSTY WR T ced besides him some others came. SRNSY mrar{rass TOLITIRIZ, BRI, ne U\g_oy B cfide)fi 55& 038 FORDS QSJ@ S8 %‘J@%fioé&e) the flies spent i 176 (their) tlme by JOyfully flying about besides (that) they did not do any ther) ork useful to themselves Re3ToRI0 BT 0T, 3 oo D), WPATB © B WU ORBORY, ST, 09 Dévaraja 1t he NS TR JWOPYTBRHT BRRFREIC besides enlarging his kingdom much towards the south, took, in the ) north, the district of Hosakdté of the Vijapura people. Y NI 1) {0 Q8 FAFI mflmfia" besides a rich man he is a very liberal man. ling The or1g1na1 verbal character of e9e>z$ as a gerund (¢f. § 300) appears (God still in the following instances: ——,\)G;S’S VT A &\Q% 5003 3Ry, @ man 0 who, (his love) not being steady, loves, (¢. e. & man unsteady in hls affection). Ik? SRFV0T B Do, a mango tree not being it is not (4. e. it certainly 1s o0 a4 mango tree) AN B 0O RKvw e, a jasmine of rich fragrance flds ] not being it is not (i.e. it certainly is a jasmine of rich fragrance). 400 O $,0308, 300 DRF Ru88 BRS*, in r espectability that requires no (particular) effort (to acknowledge) The relative participle of eveyc3 is @3, €. 9. VXY 303, if it be not goter that (or thus). VO BT that is improper. aaa‘ B cfifiso another )| he 46 RN e 362 — who is not he. 1?’%5‘)%5 o8&, speech that is not distinct. VO B FIFO fol nes, acts that are not proper. m;s%aor‘% WRBVE JWIHYF FTT, such an 35° as does not stand for the bindu. géfiec’;;fls‘ @ég’dezofiooc, (d also where there is no negative sense. b o e, St In § 212, 7 e9exn, is classed with the adverbs that are verbal forms; it is a bhavavacana of the verb esey¥ and another form of D) otk dbie t 0F used, like ee (which see in § 300), in pratishédha, negativing, etc., e. g. WBT3T Y% ORF 250000 BTITS’ B, (sounds) that are written (but) cannot be read (except in an inarticulate manuer, as sounds for 01 0w thunder, etc.), are no letters (lit. letters a being not). ¥3J0y,, not he! ¥3¢¥ey, not she! ©gZey, not that! IF,@ey, it is not fit. =PRSS nodR%y®, we have no (such a thing as can be called) anger against him. Qess, 20065%3@% o 2830 DS AT YO, O king, Simhaléndra is one who has never paid tribute. T e9¢e3,, @. e. @, to which the . of inferential interrogation (§ 212, ¢) is suffixed, is used as follows: — 2S¢, BRS, 30305@@}\@’3%55333;7&5’@@ lea lan i8Ry 232008 usg) mofio% 5o SRemezednomamee, O look, is not this the water of the celestial Ganges that runs swiftly down on the table- an lands of the snowy mountain? ZpR0 IZRRAIT ©E, ésagoao RLONCH leg hea are not women and lands acquired by means of gold? (Gf. vy § 300, 3). fing [ XXIV. On the repetition of verbs, and on the combination Wer of certain verbs. (S 339. The repetition of nouns, pronouns, adjectives, numerals, adverbs, to | he interjections and imitative sounds has been treated of in §§ 303 — 309. la In § 152 it has been stated that there are no true frequentative or iterative verbs in Kannada, but that a kind of iterative verbs may be EY AVY he formed by simple repetition (yugal 0ccaran a, dvihprayoga) or triple repe- tition (triprayoga). he] Instances of such iterative verbs elucidating their forms are given in he‘ aliy § 165, b, 1—4, where short participles are concerned, and in § 211, 1—11, where all the various repetitions are given, but without the respective 0 various meanings conveyed by them. (G- § 361.) U 363 RS FO In the present paragraph the meanings are adduced. They are the o following : — 1 directing the attention of others to a distant object or affair Ne (diira, Sabdamanidarpana), e. g BROYF IO SRCYFRY 259RPS* G % wtdo, there in the sky (lit. in that — that sky) appears, appears the banner! 2, directing the attention of others to a near object or affair (samipa m§ Smd.), e. 9. A8 28 FFF ZoTF NLeTISE DL SNIRRSFo, lo, lo! let b5 (them) approach, let (them) approach! (it is) the time told by the assem._ . blage of astrologers tten 3, repeatedly directing one’s own face or attention towards an object for or affair (abhikshana, abhikshna, pratimukhavalokana, Smd.), a person’s own repetition of action or experiencing (abhikshanya, SabdanuSasana), e. g he! } 3 AYBLBIRCOOTRED VBN, SITIVRTIWTVOR 1nst £ YOSRNBTIRRVR VBN, FUINNFILNI0 [0 | \dra RRS 883 08 IRed B3’ IeB3 B TOINVEIO PV CIPSR PVIRRRY PISTONT' WEST* JTF, TJo || having 9.6 read and read (¢.e. having repeatedly read) with parrots and (thus) O learned speech, having played and played with the assemblage of flamingoes languid with passion and (thus) learned walking, having inquisitively s able and carefully seen and seen the dance of peacocks and (thus) having learned to dance well, the females with (their innate) taste for the w) 0, beautiful contmually grew up to the development of the excellence of 0,9 fine arts (Smd.). —@&&wowdo, he lowered (the pot) after continual boiling (its contents). eN0ERY £33 Jpero, he repeatedly ate and (then) went. i) 308 IR ;S% o, he looked on and looked on and (then) laughed (Sabdanusasana) emm)%aazfieo 9080, he was and was (. e. continued to be) silent; what (is) the cause‘> (Basavapurana). 03000 X083 R, erbsf he read and read, and became tired SEo® F&30, he played and 309 played, and (at last) was ruined (Nudigattu). M TRONY TPy T 76 Of 30 TN WBS WeREI wd, Q¢3y, having sat and U5E in onis place you will ] he be much wearied. (a8 chSo §3,®, he fell and fell and laughed (. e. pepe he rolled with laughtel) o3 zS 3030;5 R3y, Ry, MLIPTRY, of that disease he died and died (i.e. was on the brink of death) and (still) remained o 10 alive -1 %‘" 4, enjoining on others the repetition of an act in order to encourage yotive or incite them (Kriyasamabhihira, Smd.), e. g. 38 SRy FRIT* 46% —_— 364 JR— “walk, walk!” they said. «@&wWrodrs wte0dw, when Jatayu said 1e¢ « withstand, withstand!?” o)t 5, (c ordering with ‘agitation, or hurrying an action expressing anxiety, (Capalaté, Smd. ; sambhrama, Sabddnusisana), e. g. 23 A0y, A an A Ro3803s0, deliver, dehver the woman with handsome teeth! eseo £y, & be manly, be maniy! (Smd.). BRENY %J\Qfiojoqs, go, go, sir! D@ D@ ,.ga"ea-sgj give up, give up (your) doubt! o8 w3, B 2RR FA XFalowM) et é@a"@afi O Basava, give, give all the gold of the box! (Basavapurina) 1t Vel ?»zgnz&@zgés 3R BTRTY® F0TIRTOD ToD VA P ¢, the female buffoon saying ¢ resist, resist, resist!’ resisted, gathered saffron water It and threw (it, Smd.) 28, w9, B3 W, B, wo, come this way, come ol this way, come this way! &8 wR)moR 2R mad W Ro, an elephant has ) come! an elephant has come! an elephant has come! CSQ’\) &)53 36C., 0 csz@a ufia ReC, dz@g um B3¢eco¢, the army has come, arise! the army has Ve come arxse' the army ha,s come, arise! (Sabdinusasana). let 6, continuous, unceasing action (satatya, Sabdanusasana), e. g s w0 W o, he came and came. ?i‘ao CX( BpeTio Bpeto, he went and went. %pflo he saw and saw. =3 & ué) when (it) came and came (Rsv) il W, BREMZ, WTL3 a%@efloé 29N, he is coming and going, coming and going (Nudigattu) WTITD, WTITD, TI0NT ToRIB T3 &sNu3v, the for foy kmgs horse coming and coming (nearer) was (but) a donkey. e 3% ab 3F I ey e,é3 '&@ro BRerozy, BRENIZY, BIT Be33 aflocfiqsqsafifiej a&@@h BB, that emperor pursued the foes, and going and going Ol (¢. e. marching on) arrived in the midst of their country. Fo&923 WBIBR RIS, B WRY IPeRRS 80e¥ ww, when all the shepherds 10 running and running came there and looked, (there) was no wolf 10 BEITLPNT BD[OR Jwcor RuPmeney w3 W, (see § 172) Booneg 3, though the ribfaced deer at first are afraid of men, coming ; and coming (¢. e. in course of time) become attached (to them) (SE v: 200 WT WD, WRIIRY, BRB TonV=3y. the pods of opium become in n course of time as big as balls VRN BPENT, HoD3RSER ©30W. TP 3S30e¥AT esord, proceeding and proceeding on the road both of them ll]g reflected as follows [N 7, completeness of an action (kriyasakalya, Sabdanusisana), e. g THW® TRWF o) Fe0o, he said (to himself and another) «reap he [E—— 365 e aid reap!” and (thus) reaped (the whole harvest) TP VPR, 03 Py o, saying (to himself and another) «beat, beat!” he (thus) beat g (consummately) 239 2390003, WA o, saying (to himself) « come, come!” ). A and (thus) came. The Nudigattu has the following instances:— =35 NZSC:‘)ES) wad FoB TR BRI LRI DR DEINR % fef) 8, intensity, emphasis, high degree (Adhikya, Sabdanusisana), e. g. ol S0y5e 880, it has been done, it has been done! Bl te) cfiafiofi@) 30, m) it must become ours, it must become ours! 39 uda#fidociv, it shone ale very much. ¢3¢ BNz, it became very bright §399C3) RICNTR, fer it sank rapidly. BRI BRLSNTIT, it roared very much (Sabdanusisana). e BRVIZROGY, it will become, it will become! VABIREZ R IRTF $BRENA has BorTRY e, Siva drank poison, it is (s0), it is (s0)! wE=w & DLSH P3¢ msaos@@?{) SR e®@Dw, the unborn one (Rudra) is, is in this earthen has vessel' (there) is not the least doubt gnoen®, may it become (so, or let it be s0), may it become (s0)! HBRoo3W eT03BRF 338 3rery ) Res® 3wewy, having dipped well, having dipped well in the ocean of BEP3INS BIRSe BB &I T 00 excellent joy (Basavapuréna) ) #0383, ants work and work and exert themselves the whole day. o3e&3 ing B3 %em@ Dodunsh Bede Wed, dogs are absolutely required for the chase. the %"a" 00 & n)@e ana8 3, a red water-lily will certainly be found. zga‘(’bfiéo Qafiofiomm;fi zt)é‘s’e NBYZ, 3, the wise will decidedly 3% 30 abandon sensual enjoyment, f‘az:)e 20938.38, it certainly is. QBI 2 ing SPBE SWBEINO, you will certainly do this 0% LPFF wne o, this is not, is not the proper way e Wew, 1t 1s s not required, it is not required. Be@ WReRTy VRATo, he said «it is olf. not fit, it is not fit!” and loosened (him) VTR BT VDY) SRon Wede 7) Xew, we absolutely do not want money of (i. e. acquired by) injustice ?»e3 OIS 3 &, I will not, I will not Zo%0 medv, enough, enough! ) 9 Y g ed 1 ofioe‘) eflo&@e SORISVILS S e v, certainly (there) are no useless things n creatmn ) 11 4 3n. 300 30 30on%Po 3nDw. 3, taking arrow after arrow and shoot- DR e ing without ever failing. 2o 2o @3, without waiting in the least VBT B 33, Dedngy, waves that came incessantly In intensity, etc. triple repetition also occurs, e. g. w3 WS WRo, AP he came, he came, he came R0 £0 £30 opeRo, he ate and ate and 366 PR ate, and (then) went. 3nY 3n¥ 3RENBy, it shone excessively. 3 kit 0 X¢ WPN3y, it became excessively bright (Sabdanusisana). G th SBong,, trembling excessively.) 9, pain or trouble (abadha, pide, Sabdanuéasana), e.g. Jper Tpe Go, alas, he went. ‘g% u;gow?, alas, thou hast come. 2390° 259380, Oh, ¢0 I do not come. 2pen BJpeSo, oh, I shall go. \i 10, succession (one after the other): totality, e.g. 33030 TEY %sg WSt B8 ¥d8o¢, the women who one after the other happened to see the child, called (it near). Ty Fry=OAwY Wy S0HTW Ny R, B %fi BRECPIBe @D, though the widow whose husband has died, grins at all she sees, they do not let her be unshaved. SIRRNENE :s‘%%)dé’ la ) nee X3, 3oz wéjfj swedede, if all who come revile (her), will the grief caused by (her) husband’s death leave (her)? %t'% %’eg*déle% SO DY DL Wa SPRRBIZBTN ¥ SNBTFI TRAB 03T %?033@\35@@30, the endeavour 861 made by the old man to please all he saw, was unsuccessful. T TEY Cfifi‘&e(g0 %&0:500%9% =9, he was cutting down every thing he saw. &R @z=c) &3 %%fifi#fii 200 (see § 181, note ¢; § 211, 5, foot-note) fiwedofia’;‘@fl@) [EPRY e R, then (after the bundle of sticks had been untied) :\) they broke the sticks one after the other as they saw them. 11, variety, e. g. (3¢308,80) 33 RPeT BRERY WRTY caza;)afi@ S1§ g 0WE SRAT SrveER T, WBE fio?;icsdo, he (the Prince of Wales) was much pleased with the courteous hospitality which the people, from a1 attachment to the ruler, showed in the various places to which he went. W VTR (TITTIWRY) DR RRERY 03e0NRIRY FRABKY, be (Rimaraja) destroyed the mosques in the various places to which he went. u%e e b 303 mmsém 2® ON% BeTeBTRY; BRET a'?’..raezsea WRITIOR a&@zfig o} S0, a man of good conduct is welcome to all; in the Y‘arious places to an which he goes, he is respected. Y ¥ HIP0EY BT BeTa TIN TREBH FRIE FZR FoT,IINTRY SeRaT30, that sheet of glass they cut according to the various require- il ments, and make window-panes, etc. (of it). w&RBIZTZ 5%%@5& BFH Na 623030 T, Wedo Wewel Ton BRRA BR¥ 3evy, the carpenter has to Vo cut the pieces of wood, to plane (them) and to join (them) according to ol the various requirements. Fgese K338 aé%g)ofloafido SRRENATRY Tped R208,380; SINeR Lewo 23663556:)? B "D wHI0nERy womy H3eds Say . 367 P TRBIS, 3 0o, the villagers near Karaci used to worship alligators; they 1o took, according to the various circumstances, different sweet eatables to them and presented them as offerings. )f* 340. Certain verbs are often (especially in the colloquial dialect) h combined with others, being placed after their past participle (gerund). They are principally the following: — (44 oM 1 ey, to play, which gives the preceding verb the meaning of 66 @) playful motion or action, e. 9. BTy BodmORIZ, S, WREFD W B3, 3, e @RIz, 3, boys dance, cry and scream. 2eoNT OS WTBITY 1§ Sofy BA0WS Fere8 B, when the dry leaves drop, the green leaves 10 laugh. RORERTRAY SwS0r® FODF BwCWTeRRTF, the women ief joyfully immersed themselves in the pond. =3 RLTyeRIZ,3, the ass wallows. O] i b) moving here and there or about, e. g. Toy BOBIBIZ, B, t‘he 14 serpent creeps about. SEISYORE- SRR &:fi@dzsa Bont¥n Wy WHeR ®39,3,53, young dogs begin to run about well in one or two months, 4 ¢ w3 &0nMarysy, 3, those people wander (or walk) about. %%do ; )d) AP moBes, 3, thieves roam about. B, TaCSTeBYE, 3, birds fly aboat. 3 ¢) moving backward and forward, moving to and fro as a body suspended, oscillation, waving, e. g. BRez08 3eneRIgB, the swing R 148 moves to and fro. 33N wSwerog [, the ears of corn move. BNRTR ) ] cf% 3.@.‘\'@6&@’@ does that which is poised, oscillate? TRTFY Rez0 B0z w@3, a pendulous ornament depending from the neck. b d) reciprocal motion done by one (or each) to the other: mutuality, ) e.g. @WRB3BAY BoA Jpownaccf, they met in the van and beat each other. 2 Q TORY 093ed) BRREIBF,S, Rama and Ravana beat one {0 another. 302280 WO B33, 8, they revile each other. (Peculiar is 30C9=9Ry, to exchange one thing for another; to sell). It may be remarked here that eszo is also suffixed to the infinitive ) e ending in ®wef and o, e. g. SER LRV cawéafimc{ RRENUIRTR, Nala made (his) kingdom to go (é.e. lost his kingdom) by gambling. f0 SBRY soTwaRnsy), the chariots struck one against the other. TSR ST to BPeN@%30, he made to go (é. e. lost his) honour. % i A-J’ 5z, to put, which makes the idea of the preceding verb, so to @ say, complete, e. g. &flgaamfio DT Ry, a’mz@-&i @033, 8, stupid persons === e 368 . o completely hide learning from sight. WV B VEOTFY, RRLFRIF,T, B greedy persons bury (their) money. sz %%d&r’l{ %e?c{fiax\@d FOTAT, s w8, he wrote down with deliberation what he saw and heard. ot 3, B, TR, to give, which occasionally, to some extent, complete the idea of the preceding verb, e.g. S3RRY ABFFFToo B3, ByHorad | RSN DaNA DRIDELo JPE, NBdRoN0, from separating the meaning which is in a word, into species according to their various c purposes, the vibhaktis (inflections) have got their name (Sabdamani- po darpana, vritti to siitra 35; in this case 0@y is superfluous, as is shown di by Késava’s stitra which has only Smogrzie JpenRsmtd@y D%3,). 00 T 3N SRZ,ToNSoSTo B IRWA %“@%035‘, thou indicatedst the he arrival of spring to me very nicely. wazogy %fii@afi efia}fi 39 "@Je)égjéo, Rama made known arithmetic to Krishna. B[ TN VL FRBIFI,S, 3 he tells thee. Fomodods egdedoy, &o"&’@_&%éo (for 2R3> Bwed ), the (te horse threw the double bag off (from its back). @@ (& @) 3073 AT 39, wagy ®Y %Jaég&;so, he thought that it (the piece of jaggory was) for small, and threw it away. ¢l 4, B (W), to come, which sometimes is used to complete the the a8 idea of the preceding verb, e. g. 233 ©€233, a&:”& BB R PR, a soil in which barley ripens in sixty days. SOTITINTR B TOR il £X FRONY D3y, Bo03y BB E, Feay W WE,T, it has appeared that the depth of the ocean in some places is nine miles. ;Soa.sanafiddQZOSJ 23% e ddReyanngy wI$ ‘%%fid% A3 3[oeS Tea) 2398,3, the tops of 1t mountains in the ocean in ‘many places appear above the water. oy It may be remarked that to say e. g. @35, BRero3 s, is unidiomatic in colloquial language, it is to be ©z=w,, 2N 20303 ¢, mother, I go W and come (back). 5 ¥ ? 9>, to leave, which also makes the idea of the preceding verb th somehow complete, e. g. 3R 532?33050§0°L z‘:)éj% z‘séejfig, he left (his) wife. 09R0RY TR TTERFRY 3O W, Rima learned grammar. &gy £V) TR 2R3 ¢, I shall kill it. ez SHeH méédgsg, he went away. W Fo3)80398y S WY, he sold the horse. 6, ovo, to put, to throw, which also makes the idea of the I preceding verb somehow complete, e. . BZISy sfirc&ra%}h;g 3RT T W i %%, they removed him out of the class. mos%)cg-em @5,55 SR, NTRY ] 369 e ) v 23 TOBTD, 3, great talkers remove the things of others by stealing TR : DI TPORORY, TN HoeRR), Bhima killed the Kauravas nY= °5%y ey, they broke the pieces of wood gaofsm?ssod ete w0 NBT, T8, Tedrdy, they tied the dogs to a tree 7, Beertd, to go, which likewise makes the idea of the preceding R verb somehow complete, e. g. 3% Q) 393 BReON 3y, the account is wrong. the FR3 2»;&) 1N QoR,By TN BRENIT, T, bad people will be ruined. 3~@3€3®%‘3h§ i OB BRes), the duddus fell out of a hole in (hlS) 1l Wi pocket BoT08 TR B3NSR DB 8By, BReecdwdv, the horse fell into a ditch and died SP30 WIAR ARe3 BRERISZRe were, when a dispute comes on, even he is a wise man who submits 2830, BRENVS TINGTIR the he is likely to be ruined i@’ 341 In order to form what may be called a sort of reflexive verb ), Bov¢ (Bn¥y), to take, is added to the past participle of a preceding verb the (to that of B3¢ itself too), also if this participle is a short ome (see )W § 165, @, 1—1, and ¢f. § 169) We have already met with this kind of 1) This so-called formation in the passive (see § 315, 2, e; ¢f. also § 260) reflexive verb is used to denote that the action takes place in behalf of the the subject (agent), regarding the subject’s good or damage, and so on \QJ, as circumstances require it will be seen that ¢to take the original 9 meaning of B®¢f, will not unfrequently offer a sufficiently clear the explanation of its meaning The following instances taken from the three dialects will elucidate 4 1ts use: — ® T 850@33‘ ey 20¢, in this order one may learn to know (the termmatlons of the instrumental). —3Zoo[ole, 893 %”Ja%‘b B33 208 e ®o, O wife, understand (the dandaka metre) even through my rule. gO FORTTY BRERMILIVTITY, Bm a%zédo 89R0z9,B; wrtId e 303, SRTR 3% %Jaea g9, foolish people think that the dumb are tricksters; oth thus also this mald-servant thought. neRnSy IHNET %’ezsamafidfio i W8 SoeRT 3% 'é’&-)eao B0E39,8, foolish persons think that if owls cry, o) evil Wlll happen, and are afraid. DESHBR Tod IBRY, B3R, JTRA, 1Ay 2020, 239 BT Wy TR DTT LR BREN, ToPI) TR, 3D Ro3ne NS T TR0 VY BR); VTRY DORRe ToOFTIEITy RRER, B TITIDR the a%z%a FIB032039 a"m 3% %’Jaeao m.oz?m}fi ofibe 20233, a Brahmana 0"\% who had travelled in the hot sun, felt fatlgued and had become thirsty, 2 417 e ——— 370 went to the shade of a wild date tree, sat down and began to drink the A milk that was in (his) copper vessel other travellers saw it, thought E “this Brahmana drinks toddy”, and spread the news in the town.—s9s3 8! %awaém§68§g QA TR, even they blamed themselves that they (! (were) destitute of pity.—£ooR @ IR 3IZIR Se0 SRR FHH B causing damage to others and causing welfare to one’s self. [98 %J&sa ;Se'a 29, a friend that one has acquired. 28 T S[OB @J@ea 89, he made hlmself a knife. B¥BP SRR FoRe FPeRY ;Ssac% 309 8,538, B hurting I even himself. o359, IR, F99R W P& 2eed Rama what hast thou W done to thy foot? w330 caned,BRomy, RS I8 BPe Ry, he married th a king’s daughter. o3 mzb 29 TR SR BR0) D008 3? 65% o0 e a———— RPPNR %osfioe 30083 fifezéo %8 %’@wo B3, where has that sparrow n made (its) house‘? it has bullt (its) nest on the balustrade of the flat roof of our house WBINTRY, Tet3° B SWE TR T, he sold (his) Jewels and (thus) made money. & BoRon3 Feo BoBRTZ L RSRTR J 3 hi S8 %Jaeé 236%‘50 I 93T VR Z R, this boy felt great desire to st make all the boys he saw his friends. —3ax 09)3 300508 INTYY T %&3 ‘3@2@0 z‘t)dc? SRE 32978 =D, the 11ver which became a hundred th branches When the son of Vasishtha, from sorrow, tied a stone to (his) -.J-.J neck and fell (into it). onvo %&3 %Jas@o having made the seven il divisions of the terrestrial world his own —*oo»aozéa‘ KR %J@flao BATF I\ 389, he who has lifted up (his) face. — 95y Bw®, grasping (t01 one’s [ self). 2oy TONTIORY 39 TOORRSR D) Do T ??J*msio a certain 1) merchant lost all (his) money in trade. ‘@e@ %) &;fi oSofio ] "vch)S"a’s b 3weed 3, it seems as if you had lost a camel. —--"dzjzsrs '”eé‘do -cJaNo the A $93%330, the sin of robbing the things of others. dedn RAVT RT3 do —@@m o, he who confesses his being overcome. —oafio§a DR, IS 3 %8 I 'v”@e}oa') %, RAma reads a book (for his own benefit). — gomy & zé@bcfia the z R mmoflomfi neey, W} 3%w,Mmo, I opened the bundle of Nardyana % and took his knife (to myself). - & mows IeeP TR ©3P DY i 2023, Fweay, he sold that milk and (thus) satisfied the wants of (his) 0 stomach —%éj %5303393 VIR R L SRl %’J@m R, at last he sold even he hunself—-—z@a‘# %"Jaeao WTIIRY, I shall buy a “book (for myself) and a return. -—&@E@ @J@é&) IR HeR FRARS IJone Berdy, if you thus 3 wastefully spend money (in your own behalf), it will be even our ruin. — 4k P 371 — I ATIN SRy SR 03 BBRTIE T, 03080, FFH,E0 S BB OF, BREN bt 28, WRE, FHRZY BRML D the native soldier’s son took the sharp ol sword of his father, went to mince vegetables (with it) and (in doing so) oy cut off one of his fingers.— ez o8 W@ @Jaeao w3, SwaE B¥eR, you must not (thus) beat your chest and grieve. ——a3%?r§ TP NAERY BRA %Jae@o 2eeN BRDBRYNS AR fie% ne8y, a’meoswzsm at dawn he drove ;% (his) sheep to the jungle and made them eat the shrubs therein. — Jo= 0§ NBER TONFR BR,[), TR 353, 33, NAINSRIR BRSL FowN FNRF3 3 ou when lions and tigers see me (the sun), they lie down the whole day in od their respective dens SPDFT3.0300) Wen Sown TR WER Werd LN [B wXP &Y, 1t 1s very salutary to lie down (to sleep) quickly (early) oW in the first part of the night and to rise quickly (early) at dawn.— lat BRTBY TP, 4ed, a garment that is wrapped round one’s self BBAIN RRZ TRFOF, 9393 ®oRd® wd e, he had no cloth whatever to cover 1s) % himself with. — c30RSPII BO3T® T 3RF TR e‘)é& 3 30, the master 0 stood up to wash (his) hands and feet. — 335 0035° SoeS ejmfi WIS 30 035eF WR %Krae;o 3,837 SPmo WRA ‘éJa%;b 3,83, why does the cow aow and red then beat (w1th its) tail on (its) body? It drives the flies away. — =068° 1IS) BodNY Fg Do FHB FRBBZ00F wSy B, the breeze joined a flock of ven young black bees and came along (with them). — 399R Swexy) SRREF S DY), DXR TORY FBR BRENRUILID SN0 0308 IR, TR, because 168 I had got pain in (my) feet, I could not go to school for eight days and Al remained at home.— 553y cgafi = 3o BC3 ‘v’&)s‘b 83(5%"@ g *83&3 3 C§€50F€§3 3, that is a house built with the ObJeCt that travellms may ahght (or lodge b A N therein). — ma 8.8 wI N 2VEN BRH T BoWBNRFY LFIRTR RN Ry, ? e do you know any means by which one may escape when danger ap- proaches. — gaoRY wRy HRe S0eS TP BR JIRBI[INTT, WR I e ooy the king took a seat on an elephant and came to Vijayanagara 3088 [ PR BREN TR FRw v, he went to the shadow of a tree and sat down.— and WBeRWT Beow B0 3, he who is exhausted by sickness. — 280 33, SN ok his) 029 ®), he had a knife made (for himself). — 33,8y s8¢ TRA TR he ruined himself. — 333 Recra BH¥®, obtaining permission. »JB% 76l RELPA %Jas'a 29, he got evidence (in his own interest). — 2.8y zsaéofio and s 23230F N;SQJCSd 652'3030@‘3 32 %Jaeao FRCIZ [IVOR T[T, €$§0 35503% a kind of leopard hves on the sea—coast and eats decayed flesh and other g 47* — comaniris 312 things. — ooy SR, THH TR, adééiea"éé&e R0 TEy FRCB, g R SR udfifieifi*e% #d% ‘@Jas'a%, oW @@%afid%& 29353303@%??\&3@55% B Benvond Tode HRRBD, four thieves united, made a hole (in the wall) of the bouse of the chief merchant, stole all the valuable things that were (there), and took the road to a dilapidated temple in the jungle in order ¢ to divide (them among themselves). — 33 €9 SNT,BINEEY ROOIIDN ORI TIWY 508 Rod %@%Ba’g S3ET[ éfid 30850 ;So"% ;fio%&?fi Ree®, Ry, BReRRY, the merchant told his three children to make three w equal parts of the cattle etc. and divide them (among themselves), and il died. — & BB 33y Boed F XWYY, TRy WTF,¥, what does that woman carry on (her) head and comes (here)?—-a?,g?3 30308y, BIR0 | %@m&, RO BRI Rwendy, he called (his) wife and went abroad (with her).—%ozo8 @rey Fwegdwe, did they find the horse? — wzdQ | faéjgj '&raege;g, where did she hoard it? & o503 faéjgs %@?&é e3eR9, are you going to keep this horse? — dngd R BRU)Y BP0 woh, the jacket which the big boy had put on. — Q¢ 0&@60&@6? aégaézo: ;saobgmigdg& 1l g &3 %Jas'a‘% 29 R Rperad,¢0? who are you, sir? where do you go having N seized (i.e. with) the mad dogs? Fnge &7 %"J@S’a% ¢ é&)eé.i%; W8 3, he It seized the axe, and went to the garden. &z %@e}%sm, seizing (laying R} hold of). — zpSeY 8ediIIT BT BRI, 83 0¥, 8wy, at school (one) must conduct one’s self according to the command of the master. [ di S0 é% efl%’_a_ 3oN STl 3;30@36 TRRB éeéo&o% 3 %Ja%é) BeFy, we must 1t converse in love with (our) parents, sisters and brothers. ©38Y 3 Hoed wWRE VTR ¥FH3 Tp,; VFINR BTTY FENAT LRTIONTND BFT e a PO HT,E I3 %@% Xed, over them all rules one king; they must obey him and the officers appointed by him with fear and devotion. 1§ S22 TRRWREY BRI R SNg VB3, Brt) ZeBRINE, Wy TB 3N 83 -‘3@#2);3@, a chief horse is in front of the herd, all the horses ¥ follow its guidance. — QonRzyRo 20, FTE TORN BREN, BRT FO* T n DVBY — TP, F, SNHRRWR SR fiefio&o;{fia aioemcsa@a"; edi‘?&_ 18; B BB RSFT wWRY, ¥SITY Xeed, BRP %@%8 DR WP T iy SR I3, BoxEa3 3306:33030@%&% DY, VLS TR, Ningappa went s to the house of a physician, fell at his hands and feet, and spoke ¢sir, for a son of mine lies prostrate in the house from sickness; if therefore you Wit please to come to (my) house, examine him and give (him) medicine, wh U— 373 o 0 I shall not forget your kindness as long as I live”. RRFR — 3, ) Nosoéfle i@afizfifi@@o 0359F 30R0&,e07 TIRY BTRY, aama 3%’2@ wdae) of Ere DR, &’)2%54;5@?\ RELPTRY. &1 :393 ) 05T a’fir@ %fio afiae) N3 %ee}m_- CSOSJ [PR 8 T30 FeF WFerd! TR %Qfi@@%figm oafio NJES%ESBCSZ&) Jor 05, FFI— VFoPe? VENITF, s@heh? R wHe IUIPWO ol FTOLNS L 9,00, PRRR— TODID, BN =B TN 393, 3903 Werd! ¢ B9, AROT Becs® FR Iy, “doctor”, Honna (Ningappa’s son who ree was not sick, but nearly starved, as he refused to take any food himself nd in order that his poor father, brothers and sisters might have something 08 to eat) said positively, ¢“why do you send for medicines (on my account)? ) I shall never take them? Then the physician asked “why will you not d I cannot tell take (them)?” Honna answered «please, do not ask so 39 (you)”, and became silent Thereupon the physician said ¢sir, what are obstacle is there to telling (me)? You seem to be a perfect obstinate fellow?” the Then Honna entreated (him) with humility, saying «O sir please only do not think so!” ORON DeCP FRY B3edy, you should 1) ('i speak to him. =Reco? %ne,} e‘}-@ 35938, I have something to say (to you).— ing he Red %‘fam 37, WA, %cfio 'v“.ram 3%, Wosm, one may solicit (and ing receive alms) and (thus) eat (but) by stealing one should not eat.— SR 33030 et 300 Tod TR (the sun says) «I having put a \ne) diadem on (my) head” 8030 S VBRI F0 P33 3P BRBBASH o ust Tod Bwe, please, put his fault in your belly (¢.e. conceal and forgive v\3 it) this one time.— &3 effio.,ofio Y3 B, @d’e)i"\) 30N Uéfio@fi RREBRY, he mounted that elephant and returned to Anegund1 ——NJaecéa's’;fiJ 343 30 030, 38R I 8 30p% 363, (the sun says) «I put a muslin cloth, that st 00 is to say clouds round (my) head” Y For comparison’s sake the following instances which contain verbs without 568 ¥29° (and of which some show at first sight a not easily perceivable difference in meaning from the above-given ones) may here be introduced: — 0 0% IR, PIF0T3J9¢ 5 ™S00 Soenesr, @l (commentator 297), those ¥ ready nouns are of three kinds, v:z. ridha, anvartha, ankita know!—3e ¢ oAl 3T =[O )3 ¥, TR0, 89, O beloved woman, I seize thy feet; kmow! ent #3330, 3080 2980, Madana perceived that this man (was) a suitable husband sit, for (his) younger sister 30053 0RF, 3R, 3 PT,039[0 9T the woman with tremulous eyes understood it differently, ©22t335° B 38T 3 RB), 39 yOfl whilst yet living learn the marked peculiarities of final liberation! — 308030 Do “ ave i S»&30, he made a house. &3 ) T éméf @%;30(2550 3»R30, let all of us now make a horse-sacrifice! M3 SeRde ®EGFIO, bathe in the sacred water of knowledge! A ?ééi fififid), VRN IR dR¢®), build a house and (then) see, marry (. e. unite in wedlock) and (then) see! 28 Bo3n¥® FYIA 1303 g YO0 FHL03090, must (one) tie a royal tiger and a brown cow in one place? ©¥ TH I3 woRs, Tww) 9 BEIt 598, one who has enlisted soldiers (is) a king, ) one who has distributed boiled rice (is) a donor.— SPII FRILET Bo 3T, @ 880350, I shall not lift up (my) head and walk in my uncle’s house.— 3%, B<3 TRRA, &")C;Sfi SRAY, B oS3 Fe$odRy FH3IB, they will have proper medicine e given, have diet prescribed, and quickly remove their sickness.~— w830 3¢50, Ju having pulled an arrow (out of his quiver).—®ZToo &, speak the truth! al A0S R0RIID, he who acknowledges that (he) has been overcome.— StBIT° it L.0%9339, he who has read the védas. — 3RB03® 30T & w¥odvo, thou tookest the road of final liberation.— B3#° TS0 B>BI AIPFF, power which fills IR life into a corpse.— ¥, SP®)3 1B, a house in which toddy is sold. & YL 3307w =we Be@d, you should not sell these elephants to anybody.— %9 he FH32S39, he who borrows. %S e B, a place where spirits are bought. P D uéga FOWIS %mf_) $3¢3, T must buy a horse. ~IRE do% S oW @Jaea 39, he wh bought milk for two duddus, — TIRIR, N¥0 FoBIJW, granting the things desired. e Told), FEaY, 308 WHIBIRY, (there) is none who has given (alms, etc.) and 1ng) (thus) been ruined, (there) is none who has (idly) roamed about (in quest of alms) kng and (thus) lived (happily).—-—%’daoi% TV, T éa%éczio? o) éajafiem? what eat does it matter whether a dog eats the leg that has been cut off, or whether a ¥ jackal eats (it)? TIRTY T VBB JRAD ‘%ae{) Y ? @aé N, as if (one) said and “though (one’s) nose be cut off, do not the nostrils remain?”’ — 2%, FROTII doeg 35, @69 20diRy, Wl WRENID, a day-labourer used to beat his (quarrelsome) () Y wife repeatedly. — #33 S8y, B I BeEIC Swtcdrde, if (one’s) parents apply (the the blows with a cane, do they not pain? — $993veradiid S0t anIRA FONT €N Sont), an infant that cannot (yet) sit up and lies with (its) face turned upwards. g B 9B NIR BN ?»5% 388 FER 20533 DI 39620329 50&”\3&, a young tiger la,y in the ) i jungle under a tree,— @ornde Snee, fwon@t Bw3, he sold (his) shop and put on W a blanket.— ©33 ééboi)o OIN OFIB3R i?ma% 33y, ozfiga VY md% @Jaé.gdso, @ his father gave him six duddus, saying “buy something to eat!” — @83 o ¥ B30 3,233, SANARERD, S0FYado, Candrahisa quitted sleep, washed (his) al] lnl face, and rinsed his mouth. — ¥33 33t BoeN¥RY WWRAEI, I dusted away the WY insects of his head (i. e. I beat him soundly). — ¥ReNLLBEI FRRB B, a Wil | night united with moonlight. BTIVRRYE TRET o.’n%ad#*o Qj%d 2TV e.-a#o*o, #MQ: and the letter 3° combined with & becomes ®°.— 333 @3FS, a man who ) ; » stands. 30, a man who stands. — 300%58,88 °do, he came down from the tree. %3 Beay 5e*®3 B ©, a place where an army is encamped. -— T 3903 WeraRP® evey e o33, a calf does not leave the company of (its) mother. TR R NVFIIe hand PRSI, JUST— 375 § 3@, even he who has remained alive, is the chief officer of the ruined village. — i VRS8R ¥ T, 370, he sat down in the basket-boat. & T3, W3 0N #odo d B, N¥o FUTF ever® IR, 3eAS ¢°, the wife sat in distress, performed several W meritorious acts of devotion, and became dispirited (as these proved useless) Y Bdo 003 FIR TRB ¥¢ Foad TR, as if (one) sits under a wild date tree and drinks buttermilk N R Fed BTN, Don 2da B89 the male sat (1dly) B and (thus) was ruined, the female roamed about and (thus) was rained & WRTY 3Bt TR Y BT RISy By Fovezdy, they thought that even 16 both of them should take this property to themselves, and sat (there in the o jungle).— &8 && @t Eeddds 3JX 223 @3¢ Y, though the boy ran and ran h! and became tired, (his) father did not care at all. — %, ATINEN TYNT, Baen BeFIY &ado WB) BINE T, INRAP 35, a native soldxer having said “I must go he to war’ had had a very sharp sword made. — 8330 BB BRWY, FVABNLIY | @@Ndm wherever he went, he destroyed the mosques 33 TRAROR TR o) SPEIT, (one) ecausing ruin to the man who has ruined him.— Fa3cd0 Jeweddo O3 |3 Soney he had a poetic composition told. — W3 BWRFSI¥Y, she who is naked bt 331 939, give me the stale-food (thou) hast. — T3 %3 I03) WZ T ©&ES ©I he what is it, if a thief’s word (once) become true ?— ® 3T TIRIN Jed) oy ol 9892 338, even brothers divide a ripe fruit and eat. — B3 BHBY, WHTITIT, a nd man who lives by carrying loads. ¥3 woy @ Br3 F& 00 wfi&m’fi does a donkey 1) know the fragrance of the musk it carries?-— ?555 ovedd | if (one) invites (thee), hat eat QU OF, JToQ e FTV03 23 (you) should invite people to dinner 33, &%) P & FOR), 230 3D RBRER T B2, BRI WD DT, BEPIEY she called her servant PIZOTo TRITR TaHY We aid and said “fill waterinto a brass vessel and bring (it) ”’ 53 does an owl see the sun?— 33 28 Fe#oIR), to apply the mind to and listen me) TV B AFF JW, ARFIoo AomdR, having put on trowsers and embellished (their) helmets, — 33, 3FF S 300 éiaé.b TIVYLI Py 3,8395° 98y, having invested n@ themselves with shining golden coats of mail and put on trowsers 3u&noda0 rds 8080, he put on (his) ornaments Ragonodoo 30 Y, he put on a green coat.— [ynioni¥o QT WS, a net with which wild animals are caught, — SoRMmPTRToo the 8®d0, he walked three leagues. ;Soaioqu 0 WRIT [T ;Soé? At zge,?e msa?ofifi :)c% #@36 ;g SBod 8BeF, g person should walk very properly as long as he lives. 0 % ©FT RS AT IBNFD, if (they) learn knowledge, they will walk properly See (hxs) an instance in this paragraph under ‘to fear’.— Soedcdhmedn Bz e Beewosd TN ST, W Re, if (he) tells the maniyagira (his) bad and good eircumstances 31 he will he not count the mounds? B30, REIIRTR ?»fio BoWT B oo#m 23l i), & 5 ?odo,oéosgo 7,0 FL0 P, she requested mother, tell even you a means (to me)!”’— BN wt@do §803080350, Vishnu asked the half of the land of the lord of the Kuarus wiho 8 INDT VY, Fe@ o) 830833, this old man solicits alms and (thus) brings tree e grain (to his house) — A 03@%#8 Foi® T 80 @B BATIB &, when (he) put (his) hand into (his) pocket and examined, (there) was no money.— To¥ng wed cdoo o ¥ e 376 P Fo e 030 8y 30, I shall 288 BrBBo, he who mounts a war-chariot and drives ascend the fort 30AS =8 0339% X302, why doest thou ascend the cocoa-nut L tree? ToR3033), ®3) S BT, a horseman who mounts a horse. — ¥903 ed I° wn, 80930, Agni surrounded the women of that place The terms that express ‘to fear’ generally appear without TRV, e. g 3 RBOBINRY o3, 3ReF TORT oMo 3z 3° 3,0, a worthy person fears sin. o WA, S 3% WY Qéo 2355, the boy feared, and cried «the wolf é has come, O the wolf has come!”’ BoG0S BRTT, BT B, the horse is afraid of the bridle o 303y BOEPCY.. that servant-maid was afraid. On the other hand there are also instances like the following one: — 30301 $023 TR®Y RIOTINOR wsi'?e 003007 3383 ¥3) FPNR VT [IVRI J =5, it (we) fear God and always behave properly, He will help us. Cf. 1 § 348, 6 342. For the sake of emphasis evesd,, is, is occasionally added to the end of a verb which appears in the form of a verbal noun, e. 9. o3 N&ER also of the bark of some trees (! L= éfeéfifi@fi BR FTING SRBIDTIEN,, I B TP WA m;m@ 3& 5 Seenean® n)% o3 nen (they) make paper. ney %s'ao %a% WJINTRY %@@osdomo if at night cats or young cats 1l are met (by them) owls will peck (thew) eyes and kill them. Ro3oDRR, 11 éfi N umssms*a (they) use to say «the pupil (is) like (his) spiritual udo;ScSosfao tea.cher 4 aoocso,,,m% *’daeéfi@é 38 38B DOTINE a‘o’é fr various objects of commerce come flom foreign countries to India. Il S0033. S7930 T BTR IR DRINBIoW, does it ever happen that a 0 metal pot brings forth young? W BRI PRWY WIE WI 3T RRIWBE, i will the writing that Brahmé has written on the forehead, fail? k 4 XXV. On comparison. 343 In Kannada the comparative and superlative degrees are expressed I in the following way:— ( 1, by the simple dative (¢f. § 348, 7), e. . by 0) Spegdedn’ whTo, this man (is) excellent to the world, ¢. e. this man (is) most excellent in the world. 2oATDNSE @c3®§%43 ;So 20 fi 33, D39, the timingila and so on are fishes of which the one 1s large to the one, 4. e. of which one is larger than the other. ‘zna’s S0 63 2D0% : 232 D39, fishes of which one is larger than the other. P — 377 Il \ b) [BoetodSoNe3s® wnFFo, this man (is) great (or high) to Méru, <. e higher than Méru FOTo BOTo HRIPBNRY wNF=s® $PTo, superior ] to all in the world as to family and firmness of character (see § 284) RRO A BeR3 93P3RR FE°C0 397° O© OR HOC3y, the small one, if (he) speaks discriminately, (is) great to all, . e. (is) greater than all (or If the greatest of all) FNN Ve XV TH the ripe fruit of the Eugenia jambolana (is) black to, 7. e. blacker than, the crow 3% FIT e 3R ¥, Tomo8 Bw@ Ry, thy horse (is) larger than mine. (Cf. the second I verse 1n § 280.) ¢) 3IIR BTN, wRY Vo WeFI v, he said he wanted much more Jaggory than even this, JIONT TR 8 20 TIW, F&,3, the poison of RREDE 3R, o BR, S0eTarRcy, wheaten the cobra (is) the worst of all bread (is) the best of all 1d 2, by the dative combined with a3, (@3 or) ug, (vwp,), ‘from 1y (8%, being another form of w3, ¢f. § 282), suffixes of the ablative (or instrumental, see §§ 109 seq.; 352, 4,a), e. g @) TENWT BBH Ffiri FOBR 9 3, a jungle (is) good to-from a town W in which (there) are envmus people, 4. e. a jungle (is) better than a town 4 in which envious people are. b)) ©T33R, D30IV, BRANN, 8RO (there) is no height to- f from the sky, (there) is no breadth to-from the earth, ¢.e. (there) is nothing higher than the sky, (there) is nothing broader than the earth. : C)CS‘S%afl W iefi wWIB NE, @Nolgeo& intellect (is) far better than | b science, food (is) far better than intellect. ;’)zfiéogoa a3 ;So% S, c%@cé 89, knowledge (is) greater than wealth. 39 53 .3._9 ) uofiad@ 30&3 'adgécg Ao EE, 2IOWBN wRY FH,TY, the tiger (is) gold is dearer than copper much fiercer than the lion. '&Zfi% 5 2739 dsfiasgeo@oasacsm that (is) more ed beautiful than this VR "f)%i.fid 23,8 8,8, %3, he who knows nothing 'azfl-cfi 09539 é’w@cé CSJ that (is) larger than this, (is) viler than a dog. mg% S, aazég fas SRR ojgagjcsg What (is) more dear than knowledge? 118 ¢) 3@050?\* %380, AFONG, 8D @29, (there) are none more bene- '55‘*;3&’)@55 )0 ficial than a mother, (there) is nothing sweetel than sugar. m@&-"%fifi =0y Semy, death (is) better than a life without honour. ge 0y T3, 05\) T TARIBON TINT, emm the ears of the donkey (are) longer than the ears of the horse. DPe %d&mfio ¥oYels wmd FORNRENT, 63,@63 48 — . 378 D08 53, white bears are bigger than bears of brown colour (A IR IS NS, SO, SVRF 87,3319, he (is) four years younger than I & 23900 ot B 239000 &CITNT3B.33, this well is deeper than that well & IBN mo NS, QY BIBNC3 2398, your girl (is) more clever than that girl. tha THEOF) NT, FouNINg, wIY mxfifiefi@%}m iron (is) much more useful than the other metals. BT WeBR) %’u%fue FILPNE, WD N?@ 3, old the seed of the Banian tree (is) much smaller than poppy-seed. a%zsa tha Wit INFY NPT TIYNPNS, wR¥ Be@ ), boas (are) much larger than the other snakes Fé], ToINSE. FINC TN A, WBY cobras have firs more wrath than the (so-called) vicious snakes Po0RENT, 3RePn R0 BRB@Y, wolves (are) a little larger than dogs TP TIONS 0 OR H8TY HIONT VN BAT TV =0 TN D 0033, the milk of goats 40 is thicker and sweeter than the milk of sheep and the milk of cows (ir DI ENT, SEVOWMTITNY, FF,PNT, S0ee3REOe, (there) is no gold better than pure gold, (there) is no lisping-nicer than (that of) children. le AN ROMOWWIR IO DY ~o§ d;sadé B"Qza@%fiai WBININT, 300993 ~u§ of D) §Qua§)%fi PR (ARG \Faaz:)) 5@;3@, of all the beautiful and brilliant thmgs e 3NT, on earth even I (the sun, am) the most beautiful and brilliant. thay ;Soeoadsjdeio ~'071é3 %Jae;? fiefia’)o WX, the vain pride that wants Jam to make equal to one 8 self those who are greater than one’s self. Jo D3oneR ©30 LINENT, %aéo uo& 8008 3, some animals have more ic) understanding than other ammals SIREN FRINYNR. 223y, more than (or three hours. R CRTINT, TBB, less than a hundred rupees. an ¢ QoBOD eRTY BRI ésfioéebf\ii aaaéa the rainy season (is) more (abundant) in Ceylon than with us. mw z&:a#fis OR "5&) aaboaoa R appe m% BRI, %’Jam BRen Besand %adoz%rfis?hfi %3 3,n%e aSeéo if (1t) is ( necessary to ca1ry burdens over mountains and stony roads, donkeys Jouy are more desirable (or useful) than horses. hee d) woreB3,R oW IR 552,% 839, knowledge (is) something greater %%’ than even gold. DY ONE, R zflesdo 303 3, God (is) greater than all, V g 3, by the ablatlve and its substitute the instrumental (§ 352, 4, a), e. g a) TN I 80 WO 0 HBo, Balabhadra (is) old from Krishna N { 53 1 It is to be remarked that uneducated people occasionally use such sentences as S9O¢ orYa WOTT, R, aaaem-s-s ETN) ey, m.mz&d% 5 2:559 A, aao:s..Ja 8 TRTIWNRTE afl TS, T3 M z&m a&faeéufi-fi =, QB azoZ =, They evidently thmk that e S, or Qfl-&§ are horg separate suffixes which 1equ1re the trenmve case, ! — 379 JE—— i.e. older than Krishna. Z3o0z3 o RBBexo 3600, Sahadéva (is) ; younger than Nakula. eenrsSRgdo sorotdess® wago, Visudéva (is) N more excellent than Arjuna. @55%95%@30 $edy, this man (is) more clever than that man. See § 349, s. [0 b) %Q)o'si’xeélo 203 woito, Balabhadra (is) old from Krishna, i. e. J, older than Krishna. ©oo3wergdzsdo 369°030%* CSQ%QB, Dussalé (is) younger than Duryodhana. EISVY T 590305y HeldWwT maRbo TR, a body )i without knowledge (is) even worse than a village in ruins. (Cf. the 6 first verse in § 280.) ) €) B®W 23%@%330300 (—23%630 B00), & (or my) paramour y (is) indeed a man sweet from jaggory, 4. e. sweeter than jaggory. ofank-7 ;)ia; Qo [V0e3R03sF, thou art more excelling than I in respect of war (¢. e. thou excellest me in war). i d) HNF I BFBRFL Qe edD, you (are) mean from us indeed, 7. e. indeed meaner than we, on earth. 0 ¢) IO [oeSDo, a man who says «I am better from others” ga i. e. “better than others”. QI0G, (O BT aoegf)ecso, death (is) better W, than poverty. aafio&)% St ey %3%{), the ripe fruit of the Fugenia 18] Jambolana (is) blacker than the crow. B0 DIPR YRIDIEY w3 AT 3 33, a man who utters low words (is) worse than a fool. ) J) 233 Zp %0, a male older from him, 4.e. older than him ll (or an elder brother). BB 0P 2D, a female older than her (or S an elder sister). (In these two instances the Jp andhe)\ra, ‘also’, ‘even’, 16 appear to be redundant.) ) 4, by the locative (¢f. § 350, 2), e. g. 1 a) SRRWORFS 2%%’&;30, in (or among) sons the young ome, %.e. the Iys youngest son. Be3BRY ARREF A0 H,0, the fit one among princes (is) the guiltless one, ¢. e. the guiltless one (is) the fittest of princes. déohofi or FO%F S8 S wug,Boo, the ruby (is) the best of precious stones. 265 1) N8Re ToooBY Zoendy iy, of cows the black cow has most milk. f SR 3R 23%%03@%3’39, white cloth (is) the best cloth. e=38we* Lr@Te 14, fia%eh, he who runs (is) the quickest of them. ¢ D) O FTeRNY PBBATRIR vTRm R ForBA% Dewy, Arabian horses (are) the best horses of all countries. are ¢) SINFY FHS @u3 3, the brown cow (is) the best of cows. Boro 48% PRSI, Y 380 r{de;)o Tom0R 39eRy, Rama (is) the most clever of the boys. ;fi@@ 038, e ée%saddg, the diamond (is) the most excellent of precious stones. NoBRY) 2O ZQTENTY WO FR0TIY) 808,83, the lion (is) by far the ex most formidable of all wild beasts. DY §53°r{e§e2 B3 FOOTRRY, 11( the diamond (is) the hardest of all things. & 3300300 DY msmg Beo3eRy, that house (is) the oldest of all houses. 5, by the genitive as a substitute of the locative (see § 352, 1, ¢), e. g. FNNRY 2w Do, the best of liberal persons. &30 3¢30, the most emi- Te nent of donors. TATT BT 387, the most splendid of the witty. bl XXVI. On Syntax. ikl 344 The ancient Kannada grammars which the author of the present grammar has consulted, do not use a particular word to express syntax or the construction of sentences; however the Samskrita term vakyavinyéasa o which expresses it, may be adopted. Regarding the construction of a sentence (vakya) karaka, ¢.e. the by relation of the noun to the verb, is to be considered. Késava says that N karaka is on account of the verb (kriyAnimitta), and that the case th terminations (n&dmavibhaktis) are suffixed by the power of karaka &) (karakavaSadim). (Regarding karaka see §§ 253, 2; 357, 1.2, a). Cf. N also § 354, 3, a. tw There are six such kirakas or relations, viz. , he 1, kartri, the doer of an action, the active noun, the agent (¢f. i § 150), used in connection with a transitive or active verb (sakarmaka) or if expressing the agent’s circumstances or state, in connection with 1t an intransitive (akarmaka, see § 148). It stands in the nominative case Vel and is the subject of the verb (¢f. §§ 347, 9; 357, 2). & 2, karma, the object on which the action of the kartri falls, 4. e. the [ idea expressed by the accusative case. 3, karana, the instrument, 4. e. the idea expressed by the instrumental case. Z,Q 4, sampradana, the recipient of the object of giving or of the gift, of 7. e. the idea expressed by the dative case. 5, apaddna, ablation, 4. e. departure or removal from a fixed point, coming from, 4. e. the idea expressed by the ablative case. 1 po———l 381 mosvn 6, adhikarana, location, place of the action or state of the agent i. e. the idea expressed by the locative case The idea of the genitive case is not considered a karaka, because it expresses the relation of two nouns to each other (sambandhartha), but % ) not the relation of a noun and verb (§ 351) 345. The nominative (¢f. 352, 6, a. 6, b) considered by itself expresses 1, linga, é. e. specification, e. g. aéfi o, AR 0, FWITVINLO RREJR, I TN, ¥, FORT, 20To, NAY, w% ;’)ofio 2 9 artha, bhava, 7. e. sort or kmd state of being, e. g. R0, Moo Fo2o, FOOV0, A0, BRB0 3, vacana, vacanamatra anang, i. e. (mere grammatical) number numeration, e. g. w ), TR, 2PN, WSFo, BTFTF, PIATTF nt 4, sambddhang, abhimukhikarana, i. e. addressing (see § 140), e. g S Rex3! B3er3! BB er! §o When it becomes the agent or subject (kartri), simple sentences formed he by it are e. g. the following: — e w9, o, the king (is) good. soof 198 293, milk (is) white. W&o JIFUT, he (is) pure-minded. o ToTVo, 156 thou (art) Kama &0 §§3 I (am) Nandi. gog° ¥3o, it (is) he. B30° ka PHooNof, these (are) males. w30° Bedof, those (are) females. ReREHe BIFT VR0 (f SRR, the sun rose. W3F0 ?.o~ o, one man came. 930 %Ja;o two persons spoke weso 398 e, the king was pleased. he killed ©930° F9L3B let them make! =3er3, Fewe, hear, O para,- ¢ (o mount lord! ka) It is to be remarked that when the subject is a personal pronoun h it is often omitted, as it is contained in the personal terminations of the 280 verb (see § 193 seq.), e. g. wmsFSo, an €8, BBIZEE, I am; wg o, WO thou wentest; 6306355?‘ ) 393, he comes; TPETOIF, BPeT 5@@@ 3. she uttered; 8330, BRI, they walked the 346 In sentences in which the accusative or object (karm&a ¢f. § 352 otal 2, seq.; 5,b. 6,b), 4. e. the case of things (vastu), etc. on which the action of the verb falls, occurs, the things, etc. may be said to be:i— ift, 1, ishta, 4. e. wished for, e. g. Res3=00 8R%o, he took the necklace 38R0 30k, he put on the ornament; TpzSo So@To, he set flowers int in the hair 332 e— al In such a case also a double accusative (dvikarma) uses to take place, W] e. 9. MBYTo 32 IS0 ?Bfifi.:asgo, he asked wisdom of the guru; mododvo GoR Y0 WeBo, he begged a gift of the liberal man; Todozdcioo @&t% BeaBo B303u3d80, Vishnu asked the king of the Kurus for the half of ol (his) land; Z3s=Z0 Towe 55380, he extracted milk from the cow; es53 : nF¥o 3%, Jo S&30, he made them devotees. ac Regarding a double accusative with causal verbs the following sentences may be adduced: — s550 )& R Wi ©0d) Ao, the king caused (his) servant to go to the town; RBeZBo B08NRYo =00 PYNATo, (¢} the cowherd caused the cows to enter the house; Bners® ¥R ©8 (A 0sf VEPARo, the driver caused the king to mount the elephant; Rydy m d%, S0 D TTL[F® WBARo, the teacher caused (his) disciple to read ga the grammar (see § 149 seq.). 13 2, anishta, ¢ e. not wished for, e.g. moz0 msé&do, he crossed a snake. Con 3, nivartya, i.e. to be produced (as something new), e.g. 203030 by S9&%o0, he built a house; T30 300 £Q@go, he told a poem. 0: 4, vikirya, . e. to be transformed, e.g. £€3=0 F&R0, he cut down Cen the forest; sa03v0 RPeeI 0, he split the fruit. Un 5, prapya, ¢.e. to be reached or arrived at, e.g. enndx® o) o, he reached the town; =0880 merFo, he approached the tree. i oy 6, vaishayika, 4. e. to be observed by the senses, e.g. Se=C90 Swed GQo, he saw the sun; Ae3=vo ¥ o, he heard a song; Fpz=o S0wARo, A he smelt a flower; =0 Swedno, he saw him, an 7, Kkila, 4. e. relating to time (¢f. § 348, 29), e. 9. ©ENBoRFo 32 Fo, §6as Qo he lingered six months; 3,098 30n° BRFo, he remained three nights; 29T g‘@w%“ he wandered about a night-watch; S3=00 (;3@73%699 (Sa $08°) Lanroe, he studied (grammar) for a month. 8, adhva, 4, e. relating to space, e.g. @3maBZ00 ©ORZo, he ran Vi 0 half a league; SIRNIYBR0o JBRo, he walked three leagues. m| 3 347. In sentences in which the instrumental case (karana, ¢f. § 352, 2,b. 3. 4,a. 4, b) is used, the following specific meanings are considered to be 8o expressed by it: — 1, karana, 7. e an instrument, e.g. 30RO FRGo, he cut with gy 383 e an axe; N0 BWeAZo, he struck with a club; Bedo 2R:&Z0. he saw with (his) eyes; ForBoR®eDo BB 0, the cut off with a sickle ) 2, hétu, 4. e. cause, instrumentality, means, e. g. bonR®o =3g0. he f obtained through service; 3r&o 49,50, he was impeded by an obstacle c?)ésjao w30, he lived by fate; @g®o Bowo, by wealth high station (is acqmred), 22)@ Mo Ro, by learning fame (is acquired); 33&.@ Qo 8 3R¢¥ o, by the knowledge of truth final liberation (is obtained). i To this class of sentences may be added the following instances with causative verbs taken from the SabdanuSisana:— 5dwes3as WTR0 o PR30 FoRARo, the-domestic priest had a gift given by the king; 550 N NYBA0 WPORT® NCIPAZo the king had the field ploughed by the gavuda; 7030 88,0 ;saqg'v”dsa;i)a‘ WOATo, the teacher had the gram- ar read by (his) pupil 3, samyoga, ¢. e. association, e. g. Ron®@Edo &)5 o, he came in company (Sabdamamdarpana), SN0 TR am o, he came accompanied )0 by (his) son; @8- oago 30A BORD CSESQ Hari shone joined by Lakshmi; eV 0 ~ofi@~ 530“3630 e °3c$3moo, he on whose forehead is a cres- 1 cent (. e. Siva) assumed an ostentatious appearance accompanied by Ume (Sabdanusasan a). 4, upadana, ¢.e. material cause (¢f. § 350, 9), e. 9. So3do IWED 280300, make an elephant of wood! 5, siddhi, . e. accomplishment (within a time, within a distance), e. g O, SPAD0 [ TTEo0 FpearSwo0aZy, the grammar became complete within a month; 20200 9% 0 SVNZT the treaty was finished in the rainy season; ¥H,0300 ST LDZ0, he read the véda within a cos ot 0 Qo Jox oo ROARo, he recited the treatise in the course of a league 5 ) (SabdanuSasana) 6, bhéda, prakira, ¢. e. speciality, particular sign or mark, e.g ed o BoBoRo, he (is) blind of (both his) eyes; mo®o Bo9,0, he (is) lame 1l in (his) legs %05‘){8(7 Swetdo, he (is) deprived of a forearm; ezp&odo %ox3Fo, he (is) a Brahmana as to (his) caste F) 300 ¥ 3o, he (is) ) e good as to (his) nature (Sabdinusasana) 7, (vidhi, Z. e. manner, e. 9. 3309038 SBZ=0, he walked in a quick manner B O WOBR, he read in a beautiful manner; ;o8 MR =W h — 384 s 52888y, he spoke in a clever manner) Cf. adverbs expressed by the instrumental in § 281 8, itthambhiutalakshana, a so circumstanced characteristic mark characterised in such manner, characterised by, e.g. %a’m:@ 50 esaé e %’zao he discerned the pupil by the (characteristic) water- pot z?;fi% @o&oo ;Sédo;jgf ©e°50, he knew the boy by the tuft of hair (Sabdanuba.sa,na) i 9, kartri (¢f. § 344), i.e. the efficient cause of a thing (in the so- called passive, § 315), e. g. RRFRS &S0 IPE YR, the It breast-ornament was made by the goldsmith CED VNI Decd T %o, the poem was told by me K In such a case also instances with a double instrumental case occur, e. g. ©¥ORYo WIRANRIY ©Fo IRRRY’ "‘éfio %o, by the king rice was FTLIFO ?fJ‘D ReF %So b caused to be made by the cook RO uo%@» ¥ by Hari Karna was caused to be killed by Arjuna. 348 In sentences in which the dative case (sampradana, ¢f. § 352, 2¢ We 5, a. 5, b. 5,¢) is used, the following specific meanings are considered to be 40 expressed by it:— ofi RPe30 @Jaé.i o, 1, sampradéna, . e. (simple) bestowing, e. g. 239 10 he gave a cow to the Brihmana; o3R DT B0’ f“a% Zo, he gave alms [ to the religious mendicant; wxan ogaajwéo&a a3, o he gave a garland of fiOWGlS to the temple. a 9, ruéi, i. e. being pleasurable or palatable, e. g. AR e)cés 3ot sweet-meat balls (are) agreeable to the taste of a child; dfi%oms@ on 0b1 odoCe? rice-cakes (are) agreeable to the taste of Ganésa AN TN ¥ B39ro BuesodBo,0, alms-giving is a pleasure to the pious man 3 3, 1irshe, 4. e. jealousy, e.g. BOR ¥D Swd[o, a poet uses to be Or displeased with a poet; Bowgo Kool AOW,Ro, & bad man cannot bear a good man : B 4, matsara, i. e. envy, e. §. IS3R RIS PRI, a rival wife uses the to envy a rival wife; DIBRF WIIRTE 2e3=130°, men of distinction use 1e to envy men of distinction (7 5, hita, 4. e. suitableness, etc. (the Sabdanusisana has ishta, <. e. Wy desirableness), e. g. T3oDon N %30, grass (is) good for cows; 3HeN y PR30 %30, medicine (is) fit for a sick person; 033@23 Fon Nfie;-;jf fa;g o, heaven (is) an object of desire for the sacrificer. 385 — 16 6, bhiti, 7. e. fear (¢f. § 349, 2), e. 9. [ITT, cWINV0 3F, .0, a good person fears sin; [PHORY 0,0 &, a female elephant fears thELb 3 7, 4 unnati, adhikya, (gurutva), ¢. e. greatness, superiority (age, in com- parison, ¢f. §§ 343, 1. 2; 349, 8; 352, 2,¢), e. 9. SREFEEIT WOTo, this 0 man (is) greater than all (or the greatest of all); B.ecoDoNeds wRrYo 30 this man (is) higher than Méru; 20N VTS WPTo, Hara (is) greater than Hari [wRER,R oM Bouoi)ww S50, (various) fishes of which one is 0 larger than the other; afl.@d on 233, évam oe;azzrgug Brahmanas (are) more he respectable than Stdras: vflfifi eI ®eay B, the ripe fruit of ) f Fugenia jambolana (is) blacker than a crow; ooz302R -v“@ T T220%0 b I, Krishna (is) younger than Rama] 8, a8 svasti, ¢. e. well-wish, e. g VRNR wWNF, D RBTTE wPeR 0, T T™ o, wme)e FJVo, WagTo (Ngv 3““?30)7 fieofioo 330, 35%30, m) FaeNn¥o, %Jefieao (a quotation of KéSava from Nagavarma’s nwhantu our MS. p. 105), may everywhere accrue to the world desired objects, a state of 20 well-being, happiness, ‘prosperity, bliss, luck, joy, auspiciousness (and) he good fortune 9, svabhava, 4.e. natural disposition, nature, e. 9. Ao®Z a’ao.m"o oqfi JJ'N the ho, to the lion (is) valour (4.e. the lion possesses valour); it} monkey possesses agility. nd 10, + hétu, i.e. cause (¢f. § 349, ¢), e. g. Nufiadfifggfio by wealth offices (are obtained); [oeBA Soones, clouds (are the cause) of rain. ) 49 i A namaskara, 2. €. obeisance, e. g. BOSAF oJatgo_SdejO he made o ~Q)f‘< obeisance to the king; mo31DoR%9N%0, he made obeisance to the guru; 200 R0 DR = DAZc. he made obeisance to the Jina 3 12 pranyanadarasmarana ¢. e. contemptuous thought concerning, be or contemptuons mentioning of, beings, e. 9. 3PIXTo HS [SHn &8 el So, when misery happens (to him), he will count men (but) straw; 297 TR SR @30, when misery happens (to him), he will speak against %, SR, 1568 the goddess of fortune (Sabdamanidarpana); ©=3z° ©3o 8)e9 3 1se he counted him (but) straw; ege TP, Y13 TSBN wiko, Saumitrl {¢. e. AN Lakshmana) counted the rogue (but) a worm-eaten cowrie; U3TY° wIBTA wiRBow, thou countedst him (but) an areca nut (Sabda- % b nusasana) He0 o8 5,0y In such sentences also a double accusative may be used, e. g 3 (o] R 49 — 386 — ¢ SELRERCRAR wiR3o, he counted him (but) straw; ®=Eo Yoo 8980, he regarded him as (mere) straw. Ve 13, anishta, ¢.e. hatred, dislike, undesirableness, e. g. =30} DR fo 20w 28,00, he poisoned him; 3R T3, 0300 [aATo, he whetted (his) f 3 sword against him; m%"fi m%ée)_og 32,5309 N &35 the vajramushti-weapon 04 (is) noxious to wrestlers; 6@9%%@@%0 w90, famine (is) disagreefiable to the world. W 14 sadriSya, ¢. e. similarity, e.g. ©8oNego 3%,0, this man (is) as deserving as that man; DoONBE, T, BeFn’ oM, the (elephant) (s Supratika (is) equal to the (elephant) Airdvata; Reedon Mo xcfiéefio, 08 the (ox) Gayal likens a cow; ?moJofi A3580 Swwoe, a face (is) like vl the moon. th 15, pratinidhi, ¢.e. substitution, the being put or coming in the LV place of another, e.g. 23 éo?”.&'@% 5%8 Ry iy, for honey sugar may MK be used; ) W AR € TS 003y, for that poetical composition this poetical composition has been substituted; @S%d%&ed% ot 95%’9& o, for costus is used instead of Ricinus. Jilk 16, ishta, é.e. love, e. g. 83 o3 [IE® 3,0, he gave a boon to the devotee; B¥03oort BT RS0 SPBFEo, he made (his) friend glad. b 175 prati, 4. e. regard, with regard to, as to, e. g. (0 Al sjo@fie(%o SOt = RBBRT 2:32,8053000 WHR 0TS AR ¢ | trg nas dniesd o 'fi‘&éfi@?‘ 13 WEDY Bo BIWRTT PHoossFRe* || that in Kannada which hay (according to the opinion of some) is wholly insufficient with regard to (its) words, (there is) jattana and bédandé, the ancient poets have proved ey by (their) renowned poetical works that now still exist. See § 284 (under dative FooTo fi@z‘r&o); § 287, under 2 (TR ’és:afi*’cjfia_o‘); § 287, ¥ N under 3 (@5553 :‘goj;)\o . (f. §302, 4. v % 18, (gamana, i.e. going to, the point toward which movement is directed, e. g. #3850 YWONR BReERY, he went to the town; sanR¥, =0 (Sal ES)%% R0®wg, 3, rivers flow into the sea; 00 fié-@% S&8®, Rama walked to the forest). i 19, [arghya, é. e. price or exchange, e. g. ®Z, TRTHOWA BRI fr()g BR %;fig> I gave this for ten rupees; m%fi To2sedy, five sérs for a duddu; flag ——— 387 — GeT30 WRP B0, NCFE BRTIONAR WY Redy IENF,B, opium (is) e very dear, one sér is sold for seven or eight rupees OR T, THRBEVS 0D \ for how much will you give (it)? QTR THTINNA FLRES e, I will give (it) for two rupees] Cf. § 802, 7 20, (métra, 7. e. mereness, the one thing and no more, e. 9. 301 [ 0UR, a king only as to name SER PR, @ wise man only as to words ¢k § 3524, ) N 21, (dikku, 4. e. direction, e.g. modz»RS, ¥$ned w3 g, Belgaum ) @s) to the north of Dharwar ¢f. § 352, 4, a. 3) 29 vy -l.i’ [diira, . e. distance, e. g. HITTIRT, RPOD IDTLI BTHIO (8 973, Belgaum is sixteen haradaris from Dharwar B3R 0N S$IpT0 RTmed WBoNBRORN DR ONRR that village (is) three miles from this village 18 R, BP0, what (is) the distance between Bangalore and Mysore? ¢f. | 9332 4,a. 4] 18 23 Sakti, . e. power, e. ¢g. Sowof Tow o 3T, 0, a wrestler (is) a match 0, for a wrestler $30Ne30 BoBFo, this man is able to mate with that man (Sabdanusisana) 24 t0 asliyé, ¢. e. detraction, e. g. BSoFoR TOUIF® BALONRY 0, the TOTVON D9S8R0 Kaurava takes away from the reputation of Dharma; REEITT UBPeLATo, Ravana ascribes vice to Rama (Sabdanusisana). 25 droha, 4. e. mischief, e. ¢ % BXoNe30 TR S this man (is) a traitor to the king; %@cSconims20 woXeTce, the servant does ill to (his) master (Sabdanusasana) ch 26, svaha, svadha, vashatkara, i. e. the three ritual invocations of to hail and prayer, e. g. @fifi %2,8959C0, hail to Agni! wé *1%3 Nawaam el benison to the manes! B3 oft = &2, Jo, vashat to Indra! (Sabdanusasana) 84 217, tadarthya, <. e. sake purpose, material cause, e. g. ;3@6%3 3@ Jl , for final liberation knowledge of the truth (is necessary), vos'a % a\ ’ for an earring gold (is taken); 3987 =030, for a chariot wood 1\ (is required); &:"?Démfl (\a—'g for pounding a pestle (is required) 9 (Sabdanusisana). né 28, utpata, 7. e. portents, e. g 292, (lit. regarding famme) 39,0230 SReFTIST, OSJ @3 2, white flashes of lightning (portend) famine 'd‘ <y frogs’ tufts (portend) the ruin of the world; d %), EOR :\)\.{%\ %QUO%J re flashes of lightning (portend) excessive heat of the sun (Sabdanusasana) lu 49% — PO 388 29, [®29, 4. e time (¢f. § 302, 2.7; 303, 1,a; § 346, 7; § 352, 4,4 of 5. 6,0), &-9- 3R R, to-day; ?:)aojowae)é in the evening; 0By SIRFT,, % for two years; 203053 aom?fi next month DB fimfi at seven o'clock]. 30 ( owaerfié e. deserving state e. g ;35@5 33,332, he who deserves honour; 3gROZIIBTE 20T9F, T3 %, she who cannot bear k3 (0 A patiently deserves death) VTR WY %259 FRIY, 3 (23¢3, i.e. difference, e. 9. 23TH (there is) a great difference betwixt this and that; ¢f. § 352, 4,a. 2) 3_9 32, (900, ¢.e. cause, purpose end, see §§ 302, 7; 352, 4,a. 115 ¢. ¢ E 03393F, W why didst thou come? FoxF, w30, I came on business SRCBDRY, VRV went to see) (Al Remarks d ( L, In § 316 it is stated that ¢to have ‘to possess is expressed by ¥v®° 0 etc. preceded by the dative case 2, Regarding adverbs used with the dative see § 282 under dative 3 Some verbs are often used with the dative, e.g. RR0DFRT IR BEF DAy BeB3N3 &, from the sun we get light and heat 33, ¥FP I w3 e 0N WRIIBRPI IR BRES, 3030, [ BRTFVSAY XY Ierd), the tame cow o)) said “because my master is poor, I do not get sufficient food to fill my I3R A3 33N &9030R, I know not O3 BOWY the stomach”’ I found (it) 208 N3 he went mad %{ 349. & In sentences in which the ablative case (apadara, ¢f. § 352, 2 2,d. 4,a) is used, the followmo' specific meanings are considered to be expressed by it : — 0 2 1, apadana, ¢.e. (simple) separation from, coming from, going away 3 from, e.g. SoTB3 90 Teew DRIFY, ripe fruits fell from the tree; AD 0303 890 T TRV ), stones rolled down from the mountain; F2530303 20 283 0. he came from the tank; %zE03 o083 BP0 O o. he fell from 83 (his) horse which was running; =83 2030303, £380 oo, he rolled from GXI the cart which was moving rapidly m“am030m§9 do 30293035950, he 0N hid himself from the teacher; rogoR®s o) %uwfifio he went out of fat the way of the guru; Swhes 230 Doty woo?,ség a flash of lightning the flashed from the cloud [y 2, bhaya, <. e. fear (¢f. § 348, 6; § a. 6), e.9. BTRT3, Ao IS? N g 2Ry B, an inroad arose from the king; 3H)©03g 3 8 030 , he was afraid Q hoy e 389 — ! of the tiger; g©033 3o zpeé, fear (proceeding) from a tiger; mo=z3, o ; $¥69, anxiety (coming) from sin. 3, svikéra, i.e. adoption, making one’s own, (acquiring for one’s self), 10 e.g. 73@&30030_3{9950 ATIF BRI ¥Ry, from (his) king the achievement Al (of hisobject) was got; mmqsaéososgs%o DT 0T BTIFPINE 0, he acquired knowledge from (his) teacher. 0 Ny 4, ishta, ¢. e. agreeableness, pleasure (¢f. § 352, 4,a. 7), €. g. BT:30,030 3,530 Roalo 09,2, A%, from Rambhé pleasure was obtained; TOTRY, Mo g 88 Ao, he saved from sin; 2£983 30 Bo&Go, he saved from famine. M 5, anishta, 4. e. disagreeableness (¢f. § 852, 4,a. 8), e. 9. TRV, 3o w—-é e 8o &)'*%Cso, imprisonment came from the enemy; z» 5:5%250 SR A zfio; he suffered bewilderment from sin. 6, hétu, ¢.e. cause, means, e.g. mzfi@qggfirjisfio 20 u?flg)do, wealth came from office. Cf. § 348, 10;.§ 352; 4,a. 9. 7, udaya, ¢.e. springing from, originating (¢f. § 352, 4,a. 10), e. g. ) #%05‘55_33950 3o, he sprang from a good family; 03N BFITE, 30 3 RoR 33y, the Ganges rose from the Himavat mountain; Dewn3, 883 0 0w FoTSSF SR, the sprout arose from the seed; %ofidé?fio 302 ST, g the water proceeded from the top of the mountain. ) 8, gurutva, pérmé, i.e. dignity, age (in comparison), e.g. TF S gé_'gz%o aoe)a;go 00300, Balabhadra (is) older than Krishna; ergss, 30 TORIBEN T wHTo, Vasudéva (is) more excellent than Arjuna; 3o ) S sed o330 IBBeZo 81030, Sahadéva (is) younger than Nakula; 2533@63’0 e, this man (is) smarter than that man. Of. §§ 343, 2, a; 343, 8; 348, 7; 350, 2, a—ec. i) [V a8 350, In sentences in which the locative case (adhikarana, adhara, ¢f. 190 § 852, . 5, . 6, @) is used, the following specific meanings are considered to be il expressed by it:— onl 1, adhikarana, adhara, 7. e. (simple) relation to site, place, e.g. he ‘i;; TOARRYS géfios%o, he slept on the bed; =zCRReSRP* ‘5&%5?0, he 0L sat down in the basket-boat; ;joaadz&fa%?‘ 3o0ne¢, the cows (are) in 10 the house; [o0x BdoTeceBRYS VEg 0, he ate from a plate of wood; DB BR* Bewo, (there is) splendour in the disk of the sun; ©o3H%* ) W 23%333, (there is) white colour in the flower; so=33030%* 5\;%50, he was aid born in a lotus (or sprung from a lotus); [;53“"03&@3:3%;3, he is in the P — 390 — 1( house; eeaéé:;ojge;o ®§§§4%6°= they cooked rice in the jungle; ;3o0$o§§ TR0, (there) is strength in (his) body]. > 9, nirdbarana, i. e. specifying one out of many (comparison, see § 343, 4.5; § 352, 1, ¢). -1 h a) as to quality (guna), e.g. BeF3RY JAVREF(BIWIT,0, 2 fit one among princes (or the fittest one of princes is) the guiltless one; d%yofi PR 535@95%’93555 003, 300, among jewels the ruby (is) precious; L3N SR FT20ITY [OWIP),RY, AMONZ COWS the black cow (is) that which has (most) milk; afigd@g;fi z%%éédos@%gi’ among cloth white cloth (is) good ; T b) as to action or being (kriyd), e.g. R0TLICRY B30 TV,Y To, among the runners this man (is) a strong-footed one (or this man is the most strong-footed one of the runners); W FoS3RY B30 3305;\@ among those who fight this man (is) a strong-bodied one; 9 3BRP* 0B 1 So 393 en, among them he who runs (is) a swift-footed one; ajs?f?-.@egé DL 3 303, among ripe fruits that which drops (from the tree 1s) of a mature fruit (or the most mature fruit of ripe fruits is that which drops from the tree); ¢) as to race (jati), e g. SS[ZRY PYToNT' ¥, T[oo’, among y men males (are) chiefs (or males are the most eminent of men); I fo 3ee* T 30dn* 3RTT, among males Kshatriyas (are) valiant men. 3, dravya, i. e a fit object (considered by itself), e.g. w=3ZLe* th S35 DT Zo, among these persons this one (is) ours; ©IBRY*® Yo 29®, among those persons this one (is) the hero (Sabdanuiasana). W 4, phjyasadhunipuna, . e. the' introduction of persons who are Q good to praiseworthy people or are skilful in praiseworthy things, e. g. I 39030%° w9 o, (he is) 39030%° magy, (he is) kind to (his) mother; ¥ Al good to (his) mother; RododBdRy RIwo, (he is) true to (his) guru;" Tp303Ry* t3oeo, (he is) proficient in adoration; WIRRY TuIwo, (he is) expert in (drawing) pictures (Sabdanusasana). oy 5, vishaya, i.e. a peculiar province or place, e. g. FJRXRF* TEF Go, he whispered in the ear; SRR3R Bewo, he was suspended by by (his) mouth [o. r.———fio% o, he chewed with (his) mouth]. 6, vyapaka, 4. e. inherent property or substance (¢f. No. 1), e. g. % TPARRT TR, (there is) fragrance in flowers; FTIFIRF® TRo, (there fa PUGEIE 391 —— S is) juice in the sugar-cane; 03"3@%;6 o:,s;‘)%, (there is) oil in thé oil-plant; T8RS [oZoTo, (there is) sweetness in milk. 19 ly vyavahara, i.e. engaging in, conduct or action in, e.g. 3TBRY fifi&g}o, he engaged in austerities; DeTWRE DRBo, he distinguished 16 himself in (the department of) valour. ) 8, Kkila, i.e. time (¢f. §§ 348, 29; 352, 6, a. 6,¢), e.g. SRR, BRY S 7 wR By, mangoes appeared in spring; I0BRY° DAWRITSE @ 3o, ch universal conquest (is) proper in autumn; (u;fig} 301’?%392) 9, TIED W0 5) %R0, he read through the grammar in one month; 2055% DI, FORT n93, %, in one day the work will be done). 0 9, upadana, 7.e. material cause (¢f. § 347, 4), e.9. SHTBH%* ‘R0 he 3 LG0T cY 0V PTo, he ascended the decorated seat that was made of Y wood; [3ARTS I&TR, that which (they) have made even of curdled i milk]. (yd 10, [karana, 4. e. means, e. g. sa@% 5@0333_5963, we walk by means 18) of (our) feet; %99%&2 RPeRa3 e:3, we see with (our) eyes]. ich 351 The genitive case that is not classed with the six karakas (see i § 344), expresses the connection (sambandha) of nouns to nouns (¢f. § 352, NN 5, a; for adverbs with the genitive see § 282), which connection is of the following kinds: — 1, svimisambandha, 4. e. connection of ownership, e. g. enndRBE®I o, the chief of the town; J ; SoBwRco, the chief of the district; (efiofisfi%fi Rewod, the house of the king; 000308 Toad, the horse of the rija; are BOBONT PA, ¥, the books of the boys; ERSRNSSI a%szaaé, the wife of the potter). 6§ 2 18) 2. kulasambandha, i. e. connection of family or caste, e. g. &, 1ruy ) i@mo@ the property of us (i.e. our property); 39, Sweess, our face; 50, 339,830, our son-in-law ; 2233, B3y0, OUT younger brother; (mgbg SN, a Stdra’s son; 20303 Sonwy, a merchant’s daughter). iid 3, jatisambandha, i.e. connection of genus, class or kind, e.g. 98 | by o3y 8, a troop of elephants; Bomedods C;Sé,’«:)d, a multitude of horses; NP edy, a flock of parrots; egw %’sfiog\),\the fragrance of flowers; %z‘% 2:3%33‘), the white of the eye; (5&:@7«;053 ®¢a0, the ripe fruit of the 0. tamarind ; 23993030 Taody, the fruit of the plantcain; ;’)Q%{S«'fié, the leaf here — 392 — of the betel plant [0S Boese, a dog’s puppy; FRELEGN TRNY the cry of cocks) 4, avayavasambandha, ¢.e. connection of membership, e. g. F0TE FRT the branch of a tree Ipon=e®, the petal of a flower; FRBDH Ty, the stick of an umbrella ( lakshanasambandha ? 4 connection of distinctive marks D, g BRN 03 IR0, a man with a cap; 33 93 vey3o, a horseman of per- (( plexity (i.e. a perplexed horseman, o.r. ¥3¢% or 33 $3 0980); AR 0! ©3e38 ToWIT, & horse of Sindb; (FR9DT9FY, a person of power, a power- ful person; Z=ZF3 Weg Y, A proud soldier; %33 svxi3es, friendly advice) 6, sanmdhanasambandha, i.e. connection of proximity or vicinity, e.9. BBy Twed, an outlet (in the proximity) of a tank NPT DR the place in front of a town; Y feo, the vicinity of that (s.e. 1 vicinity) [F sarhsparsasambandha, . e. connection of close contact, e.g. IFQ Ir 39o¢, young foliage on a threshing floor; Jed ma3=, duck-weed on water a 3RS wd. an ornamental tie on the arm fa 8, sambandhasambandha, 7. e. connection of connection (occurring 4L when two genitives precede a noun), e.g. SRV %’S’a Bdez0, the god of an eye of the forehead (i.e. the god who has an eye on the for enead) 3nesd (0 3. the wo¥ T, the lustre of the sword of the arm; oo TpBY,C = v lotus of the navel of Hari 0 9, $éshasambandha, ¢.e. connection of remainder or rest, e. g. W CralimBie® neo?, the substance that remains in a balla; the young one (which was left) to it 10 9 o vikdrasambandha, ¢.e. connection of change of form, e.g. Lps 8 B TS staff of gold; ( Zoonio, a ring of gold) il (sthalasambandha, . e. connection of place, e.g. ®BIS) TTTR fo sojourning in the forest; 803y =9 , dwelling in Kasi; Sonody s u,;e dinner at one’s house) Remark () It may be stated here that several genitives, one after the other, in ka connection with only one noun, are sometimes used in the following manner (from which use will also appear that the conjunctions evo, etc. are never suffixed to the genitive, see § 284): — N\( pu— 393 —— 3¢08 BoRR JFH B3 TR BT, ,0088, SPERE NBIBR | BB [NS S VB %608 INBTR PES WeFwFedNTo || 125 | 330 ISR B %Ja:as oa:ozsn’é BPOMRT® wIFBHTFORIFT 3¢S AR ROTINS® (Candraprabhapurana vi). They dxscharged the shining syringes of emeralds, pearls, sapphires, diamonds (and) rubies which (artificers) had made (i.e. which had been made, see § 315, 2, under k) like parrots swans, cuckoos, partridges (and) ruddy geese, against themselves, and besprinkled one another with water of various fragrance. SIRIVIE330 #éus amudfi 33 JRININ S 030 zfieéfifi@ IMN3s IR ARSI 3¢PFrRoNSI RS FRLHIT S0 FOEBIFI | DATZFR IR 0300 INWEII I RIBO3RPE NI, FFRIPSF O3 INE I WHBD DBFFIFoNTo TRINT FoFBe 9’ ¥R 3 WBR IVATFER || 67 in Jaimini v || The goddess of fortune continually remains in the house of him who utters friendly words, is grateful, is intent upon giving, is kind to others’ wives, is not addicted to chase, is rich is honour, associates with worthy persons, never utters false witness, does proper works, does not hide (his) doings, engages in abundant )¢ agreeable things on earth (and) performs various virtuous acts 1! Compare also %0333 Fo0 oo, the bone of the arm (and) of the leg 0 (i.e. the radius of the arm and the skin-bone, Halayudha) oo rSPT] TS e 8 307,98, 30et=y, show (me) the children of Rama (and) Krishna DFD, VTTD BeR530, there is enmity between thee (and) him (Nudigattu) ¢ 352. The seven cases sometimes change places (¢f. also § 253, 1,a.0), viz ‘é , @) the genitive stands for the nominative, e. g. 23, 0B Mo ST ) g 3 and %8 23:3?'{9)6563 RRoF stand for 3 0FN%0 dq) o0 ooy cj’» and ¢33 ¢3 I Do JRoT ) The author of the present grammar considers this statement of Késava )My to be erroneous, as the genitives T and et stand before the nouns 2ecs3 and ZRoF see §§ 188. (369) '\by The SabdanuSisana has the instance R g 03¢ for Qeo wa okf, thou camest, the proof for the correctness of which must be left to Bhatta- kalafika déva 1 b) the genitive stands for the accusative, e 9. DVIP, E° I (3 %Jafio.& and 3o0Fzo3 a’m&‘godoefi Sao 3080 wders3y stand for el yer ‘ae;f DF,0 -@Ja,o o, O thou kllledst me, and 3o0TTIRo c‘duwgojo@ 80 50 —— — 394 oo wHIFs3y, does it ever come to (my) mind to forget the southern country? The author of the present grammar thinks that .3 and @ are ) 123 o accusatives with final ¢ as he has indicated in § 117 & s raa) c) the genitive stands for the locative (In comparison), e.g. 3FINNT wu o stands for 3ANRBRY weo Ko, a supreme one among liberal persons Un &338 Bess for &38Ry BesSe, a prince among donors ¥0 wT S 3F for CATSRY @37 337, a king among the witty. See § 343, 5 and ¢f. § 350, 2, 2, a) the accusative stands for the nominative (¢f. No. s, b), e.9. Toed, éfifio stands for goes, %fio (resting on evy® meaning also <to possess’), | one who possesses fineness The Sabdanusisana has also the instance: BeSB3, B wGFo, instead of Bes3Z D vBFo. Cf §§O46 348, 12 b) | the accusative stands for the instrumental, e.g. D[pdas weira Go, he worshipped with flowers, stands for geags ©w-Ace, he presented t flowers in worship. See § 347 0) the accusative stands for the dative (¢f. No. 5 0), e. g. wfiéfio m &)@ S0 ’o-sffl e& o stands for FpFo u@fi %“J\jo he lent gold coins on 1nterest SReFTor vdTo for e‘i@g%é ago the greatest of all (this second sentence is from the Sabdinusasana; ¢f. § 348, 7); (BexTRY = i R e for e Cuta) :do@ 3,08; DeRSRy, Oe8rd 68 for TRRS otony 3 0:: “OURIR ‘Sowg 5@ R0 for xR Foes3 68@? =93 ;mey IV l B, R for JwezF B Ro; thus also Ndd msj'*o °*5~ 303 ; 3&303350 (t VROTP; TTTRY, NEPIR.; "3, uofiqugafi emadm SJslalo8) d) the accusative stands for the ablative €9 PTFR0 FIF fl S0 WRRWe o, he demanded business of the lad, for SRR TIS 0 FTOWIF oo WRRPD 0 See § 349 o 3, the locative stands for the instrumental e.g. TRRBOBRY BETs 11 stands for FRREO®Ie B&Zo. he cut with the axe RBo3R%* P03y o for nAB30%o ogfe)Oi) Q; FOIR S %e%fio for QMoo FeLo; FOBIRL SR (3 %J@Ofioo for zuBIRWEDo %Jaoua c. See § 350. he 4, a) the instrumental stands for the ablative (¢f. § 117, a, 5; see§349 § 343 ablative and instrumental in comparison; § 302, 1 instrumental § for ¢since’ ; § 282 adverbs with the instrumental). i 395 — 1 in simple apidana, e. g. 33800 wIo stands for 803038 o WA 0 he came from the tank T08TQ0 [oodR, 3,3 for 303833 830 S0TOI S $003R,79,5y, from the head of the elephant pearls dropped; DESY & for 30333, @3&3 RE3Y z3o, a leaf fell from the tree. astw %#awsg AR NPT [0 N\nfimofiw &o é%‘?fi@%fiéfi 2P TIY) m"o’é%{)%‘}o i I (NROR WIR; OT DR BEPBRY; nonR aoaisae)ofioafi ®OBWE R.) F03. BANE T0= FDo DODo Tede 20 03, IWeNAF WNRIDFS TR 0 TR, Do | 30,08 flavaojo&@g;g WT %fisooé 3,09 cfioa 3, &’)owr Swd&’)w 00T ;’)o‘@ofio%’;?o || by the beloved women of the Sabaxas who were gathermg the fine pearls which were loosened from the heads of the mad elephants, from the bamboos, from the heads of the cobras (and) from the tusks of the formidable hogs, and dropped on the massy rocks. 2 [in bhéda, <. e. dxfference (¢f. § 348, 81), e.g. ©TPT AT 236623, Al this (is) different from that]. 3 (in dikku, ¢.e. direction, quarter, e.g. F37oBOI VI WA v neoy, Belgaum (is) to the north of Dharwar; ¢f. § 348, 21) 01 4 (in ddra, 4.e. distance, e.g. © LN VOI LB Sy ©B 115 that village is five miles from this place RO VBRI WY TRANTS e i 2@ the jungle is a loud cry distant from the town cf. § 348, 22) J 5 [in kila, ¢. e. time, e.9. wRzo»OR 33, BIFIToNI, it is long since you visited (me); BT A WS[ BOR,R0, he (is) poor from ") (his) youth; ¢f. § 302, 1; § 348, 29]. 6 (in bhaya, é.e. fear, e.g. BT ©o233R, he was afraid of the tiger; cf. § 349, 2). i ¢ ~ Qq 7 (in ishta, 4.e. agreeableness, pleasure, e.g. 83,3 TonOI TF 90 %R0, he saved me from sin of. § 349, 4) 8 (in anishta . € disagreeableness, e. g. 3,008 WA ST g imprisonment came from the enemy; c¢f. § 349, 3). for 9 (in hétu, <. e. cause, means, e.g. BRLENAT AD WY, wealth t‘fl came from office DTIOWT DTS 20938, 3, from xearnlng comes good behaviour; ¢f. § 349, 6). 10 [in udaya, .e. springing from, originating (¢f. § 349, 7), e. g 49 ©F ,003 TOTOR DeBROT BoTTToNN3.3, the sprout arises from seed tal 2o B33y, Kama was born of Lakshmi] 50% — 396 — 11 [in FoTe9, cause, reason, see §§ 302, 7; 348, 32; c¢f. also:— gafi&a"g) =3 8, on account of (his) wisdom (he is already) a full-grown 3 person; fj%éad&);g I8 Ry, on account of (his) right conduct (he is) a th good person]. pa b) [the instrumental stands for the dative, e.g. 685635’& ©3xRy for %R0 ©TRRY, a king (only) in name; ¢f. § 348, 2. Observe also: R 3 o008 0, TRy, (he is) a Brahmana (only) for (his) sacrificial thread; he 2:830007 29xAR, (he is) an ascetic (only) for (his) matted hair; I8 =X QF ga%%m, (he is) a gentle person (only) in (his) words]. 110 5, @) the dative stands for the genitive, e.g. 7923%,80300 stands for th SORPBWY0, the chief of the district; ZRBRRBNRV0 for FHBS3RBR0, al the lord of the umbrella; .Brmacae for OBrFossecgoe, a heart’s ruler; 2:71%@&@0300 for wRdwBoo, the lord of the world; (6@53-’%% £ for 110 SReT3 5;{3’3). 3 b) the dative stands for the accusative (¢f. No. 2, ¢), e. g. 88508 B9, 2o stands for 3x.30 9, Ao, he ordered the pupil; 23R 3910 for ( ¥Foo 391Ro, he informed her; (BeoR ;S‘%mieafi for ©e=TRY, ;5% he Ro8,0R; @ad%a_ QEIMZ e for TOBTRY AEINVB,ER; thus also ©gxR J Soess %J«)%&a’a; 5&365\%& ¥R, R; "’dgm%& 838 XerE; 3SR VBRVBY; of STT, AEPTRY; ]IIN wo:ioo%a@si; PRONR NeOBRY; SONIBTR PBFFOF 3 ol VBRI, see § 291). a ‘) the dative stands for the locative (¢f. § 350, 1. 6), e.g. 333N Je ?@%do stands for sa=3030es 0@%50, he sprang from a lotus; 7555;33%& Wi Bewo for WD Bwe* Bewo, (there is) splendour in the disk of the sun; vonr B¢y for wodee’ 3¢y, (there is) white colour in the flower; 01 J =8 for @@%g;é »8, (there is) oil in the oil-plant; (& wwdR Foo 3 %‘f%fi?rfieéoeaé for & ewsd SEES FEERoeay; SBoRFOR w@@o&oe% for ax SIRWFTS uo%o&og). da 6, @) the nominative stands for the locative (¢f. No. 6, ¢), e. g. 2»53) In| BZRo &)%o for 2,05% DSIRBRYE waéo, he came in one day. al b) the nominative stands for the accusative (¢f. No, 2,¢), e g of mdg IRFIF vrFo stands for u;fig SRFI* BBFo, he stayed one T £ year; o Sn&%To for Do Sw@Bo he made a water-vessel (the first instance is from the Sabdamanidarpana, the second one from the Sabdénuéasana). 1y — 397 — There may be adduced the following ancient additional instances (see § 120, a, 2): — RuRPBL Too Bw32°due®, if (they) speak, all of them do not know (proper) words [Sabdamanidarpana sub sfitra 250 where the Mudabidar MS. has YT Boo SAMMEVEAo if (they) grow passionate, they do not know what is to come]. sjafifi 318, [0S W, 3 Ra3) 037, O son, O son, thou didst what is good (Sabdinus$asana s. sutla ; 399) $30 FERR* aax o, he came to milk the cow; 33063 BReRBSF WA o, he came to see the woman (Sabdanusasana). TPURGPRT JFEPNT (a person) who did FORILPCNT DoNT [P IPSEP3T (Fogo8g0) not know the direction, who did not know the place, who did not know See the side, who did not know the three ways of beasts (Smd. p. 127) also § 339, 5 (TP T 9A), 362, 2,0 (e@o&@éo ;i) In the modern dialect it is very common to use the crude base of a I noun for the accusative, e. g. Tz DR, nnd) SIWREY; WD ReCI; B0 SPRY; T30 FORY; NPRY T ; obsfa %’JDNJ =98 SRR, ) I ¢) [the nominative is used to express time instead of the dative, etc (¢f- §§ 348, 29; 350, s, etc.; and No. 6, @), e. g. BReT 3TV WA R he came last Saturday; 2 W B §T90 BHRINF YR IRYFY, BATORN TR % SBF, W0039,3, on Thursday the gentleman will come to make a present of books £29, OF IR TN BRENTWIB ToI030S 0308 DR, TP & eight days (or for eight days) I could not go to school and remained even at home ¥R S ITBY IR AG I, he lived here two (or for two) BN.3 O3 f years 200023930 RIS, early on the day of the feast he will come; 3 ZR3Iy,, to-day ; 289, to-day; mn93.%, by day and night [y & HSR, on this day, RRCTTT & i ~, on Monday; Ry 0SS, one day, [y on a certain day] Ny 353. The instances in § 345 seq., as far as they are not in parenthesw, L are taken chiefly from the ancient dialect (as it appears in the Sabdamani- darpana, Sabdanusasana, etc.), which regarding the meaning, use and interchange of the cases does not materially differ from the medieeval T and modern one That there is some difference concerning the form of the seven cases in the three dialects, has been shown in 109 seq J The instances of the modern dialect in parenthesis belong mostly to a small )6 Kannada grammar of the Southern Mahratta country, called Nudigattu 16 354. Some special rules regarding the use of the singular and plural of it nouns, ete. in or without sentences are to be given, viz 398 I The singular stands or may stand for the plural in nouns Gf. § 133 1 For the plural that conveys the meaning of a pair (yugala) the singular is used, e. g. for Zgc3oriorie’ there occurs Tmodwrio, a couple of verse-lines W 2, Further, the singular is used instead of the plural in avishta- linga, 4. e. when the base of a noun (in an inflected state) refers to a noun in the plural which comprises more things than a pair, e. g. Seco ne* ©,35ecco (for Besony® = 2,390 0N ), the (four) védas (are) proof;— {] or when 1t refers to a number of nouns which are connected by the :b' conjunction eno e.g. éafiofioo SIS NG DT, 3 5303000 TIT B0 BoFR20 FDEN TTe0 (for T900Mny), genius, exercise, the service of the learned and the acquaintance with poems (are) the means for poetical composition (That the interrogative pronoun & which has no form of the plural, may get the meaning of the plural, appears in § 262.) (1 3, An optional use of the'singular for the plural occurs regarding nouns of race, species or kind (jati), such as saeess, =3, 338, W3S o@@g 28I, (o)éd) N®, ®oR, AREN, TRENS, 30&)\) BRELY, Tk (55\)\)) W FCI:3, Tp, etc., e g. TOUeYF Or FTowoR &F foot- soldlexs, B3 or e3res A% elephants; similarly also = © or Fpee®, the pupil of the eye See ] § 900, L84 But a) If a jati noun in the singular is pleceded by an adjective which is, so to say, its karaka (i. e. determinating the case and number of the noun, c¢f.§ 355, IV, 5), it always has the meaning of the singular, e. g B89 898, such an elephant; w8y €0 Fuz0d, such a horse (R03y oo’ cC a straight finger BSReRy Swets3, a beautiful face) I b) If jati nouns stand.in the singular and are preceded by an adjec- U tive in the plural, they always convey the meaning of the plural, e. g Re0mY WTof, straight fingers 3Re0RT wRo, big buttocks; AARAD ) =R stout breasts § 0] ¢) Observe the following sentences in which, either by a preceding noun in the plural or by a following demonstrative pronoun in the plural the plural number of a jati noun is indicated: — RRABHER Ty 3 N%H DGR, VLAY, 3¢ (4. 6 3ZATRY) Wik, VRN P BREWEN. SRR BT B R — TREHBOZATR TPOT B (6. €. BPIT LN TIERY) o 399 P — r&é@% 5@\@\55‘) BRTE, S8 U DR — IR £ (¢ e TPV B n$0)? ©F) /R QOR WY 4, An optional use of the singular for the plural further takes place when objects are to be counted (sankhyéya, sankhyavastu), e. g. 83, 33 or 35 BAN*, the ten points of the compass; SoH22) BweTo Or AR ReForie®, the (mentioned) three worlds; Zont9) Dorlo or ZoRE Oont ns*, the (mentioned) three genders PN BhTa R ey ) odoonones the (mentioned) four ages of the world; &:3ecds Swedo or &3¢ SHe Foniys, the fourteen worlds; e%dow ;’s or & GO\«Q fi%;‘ the ten states or conditions (.:@e)o&_ Songs or ;33@0 éomfiméo tour months; TV, Somne B Or F900, Sonsonsy 3553;5), it is four months) 3 9, An optional use of the singular for the plural further takes place when numerals are counted (sankhyina, sankhyéya), e. g. %) g9, or 280 mowunet, one fours (i.e. four); &ooswy or B:ToBuReF, two fives (i- e. ten); B3>, FRE or T3y, SRR, ten hundreds (. e. one thousand) g 02181 6, An optional use of the singular for the plural further takes place with regard to nouns of quality (bhava), such as BRZYF, TJHF, €. g. T ¢ FRJF or F ¥ THZPYFNAeE, the penetrating looks of the eyes PN @B or Zpnd BF) nee TIODVE @ TYF Or TITIX ¥ TRHFNS® II The plural of nouns stands for the singular 1, in spontaneous respect (i.e. in respect that proceeds alone from natural feeling, ayatnakritagurutva, prayatnam alladirpa gurutva), e.g 0355)6 dew o our deity 030, 33 nef. our father 2oy, SO0 F° our mother:; o530 ojogofiegé our master; (r?)eajfi;' 200 o. he made obeisance to the king). Cf. §§ 257. 258. 261. 268. The modern dialect when referring to ‘God’ uses 3@V (see § 355, I, 1) ) in (considering) the excellence of gurus, muniSvaras, etc. (an speaking or writing of them), e.g. Rugone®, guru; =3 doriys, master (lord or guru); “o’ esfis%fioiap ® - ~® 63& T)‘n =N3 NC ~d O\ T oJdov o3 | > ~ on w'&-\ C\)-acs ~ z aneg DoGonE BN T 235*53 o0 || may the feet of 25 ) — — 400 [ the illustrious svami Samantabhadra, of the world-famed poet svami Paraméshthi (and) of svami Pajyapada give perpetual protection 3, Instead of the singular 32305330, the three worlds, its plural & 23, S3xonys has been used in Kannada 4, If two or more nouns in the singular connected by eno (ew), g ‘and’ (§ 284) are formed into a dvandva compound (§ 250), the plural is generally used, e.g. 08800 NGB0 become ZooNRone*, trees and shrubs 3 0S000 3903200 become 38 3930 v¢, father and mother, ca=oRi0 © 3,900 become vozow® roof, Rama and Lakshmana, =0ogi0 AR0Jo 20903000 Y20 IPTREII0 £F,0000 Anove become JooNBoWPTHSH BED LSO Tate! 3 ne*, trees, shrubs, creepers, grass, bushes, birds and antelopes WFRI0 \ oo TedR0o become wIBoRIeINY e.9. ©30 )FToRTINTo BT 3o, who subdued Baka, Karmsa and Kési? Likewise in the modern dialect there {requently are sentences like the following: — 2820080 NI, BB T SIW3, B2 03039, 3, only stupid persons revile knowledge (and) wisdom; 3930903020 TORT R 33) 3T 8o Ned | d 207,90, Kasiraja (had) two sons, Rama (and) Krishna; %03 20400, o old (and) young persons; §;So 3@7‘1@&3% ORES, N?efii‘figfi‘i%}éa W3 n)?.é { <o 'aéb ??Ja%:? 33,039, it is proper to keep (our) paper, pens, bOOkb (and) & clothes so tha,t they remain very clean; 3303038 MoT.030R SORTY BT TOADRY, TRRSe SE Wewy, (we) must do at once the work which (our) ¢ mother, father, teacher (and) master order (us to do); ToZod03.3y I FRELANHY W 0303003, 33, horses, oxen (and) buffaloes draw carriages : 539, 0359THINBY ooy e 3.3, female buffaloes (and) cows give milk g Exceptionally also the singular is used instead of the plural, as i appears from § 250; thus there occurs in the modern dialect e. g. Zo@oricy 3D, S9ONBRNeTY BELPR [0 Bes edewy, boys must listen to the words { (t told (them) by their mothers, fathers (and) teachers® 1) It may be stated here that occasionally Vo (¥w) is omitted, see end of § 284; § 355 III, 2; § 3855, IV, 5; § 857, 2, d, and compare also the following verse:— SPINW BTIPE, IF 030 TP T OS5, TIFPITRIFIQV T TN, | THOWL BB IR IYBRC WIFOV W R1F, RO, 3530635909 ? || will a night without the moon, a play without one’'s own wife, a flower without sweet nectar, a meal without curds (and) a congregation without intelligent persons be pleasant Sarasvatimanihara? —The moder 1 — 401 Remarks. a) If in the modern dialect two or more nouns occur one after the other without enn in the singular or promiscuously in both numbers, their plural is indicated by a demonstrative pronoun in the plural added to them with the proper inflection, e.g. ©»0%® mowo @) e msg@d@, dressed cotton (and) milk (are) of a white colour; o3, wwdh SWee DD, AIYNER T ¥y 33,8, oxen, cows, male buffaloes (and) female 0 buffaloes are called cattle. FOODI VST odonSe 3:53&:3 3 &)o%do 3 QFT 2IBR T @58@336;3& 969 ST WOR AT, the Pandavas overcame the Kaurava, his gurus, (his) younger brothers, (his) friends (and) them who desired the welfare of those friends. Similarly the medizeval dialect .j has e.g. T3 fiedzfifi%d% & FoRto TRBRF JpesesERoe (see § 287 under 2). 0 b) 1If (especially in the ancient and medizval dialect) two or more nouns are enumerated without enyo or enp as mere terms, and SHRZoE, <having become the first’, cand so forth’, cetc.’, is placed at the end, a : demonstrative pronoun in the plural (always neuter also when masculine or feminine terms are concerned) follows the nouns and another one in i; the plural is suffixed to SwRwez (the first pronoun being sometimes omitted), e.g. 33 30F3 TERY e VIR BT (FW ) SABVIRD), Siva, Saikara, Rama, Bhima, king, etc.; 2088 €erSs $erdsd 2g) 303 ) Srlabhe) 5afia§5m‘a§3%62®ofi§5, khaliléné, ¢haliléné, ghaliléné, etc. (are) % imitative sounds with hard breathing; enz@or RS RN RRETIS BREM SRBTRIT TS 'a%% @% Bne9, food prepared of urdu, kadalg, togari, goduve, hésaru, etc.; $BF Ty DPITY 5@53@3@63;3%)00 fl&%aflsg DRI, 1D dialect has e. g. 2030300028 3¥oNBWSIRe TJusy), he who does not know justice (and) injustice "W (is) a beast. oa?.t-s;sefld@m ?fi?flffi@?fl nazgs&@o:bez &5&5& BT T30, 3, God protects thee in &) (thy) waking, dreaming (and) soundly sleeping. The following additional verses may be quoted from the Sabdamanidarpana:— SeBIWo F2OZ 00 )) 2ed WBLZ, I wFESrTOZwo S0P | Bpemodg® g [oTt wae SIFBBTo ITIFo PYBRLRITTYO Il TIRONT BIRNFo ROTMIVTY QDR s:sjmmx@&ma%od:a 3 | aifimfisia TLOFRRTY R IZNWo AT I T2 OPoNBo3n%s ll. See also the half verse ) q in § 272, 2 (dTTY WOTUS ete.) and the verse in § 364 (TIFIFT 0D 0, ete.). % )\ 51 40 DS T SRTSIRTo PR milk of cows, curds, etc. are called, gavya. 592 FoARRY, leaves, fruits, etc. mixed with curdled milk. In the modern dialect =0om9,® is more generally used instead of SRBwd in such a case, in the following manner:—orod &3, % Bend BOT,BING; B, 23% 39539 T SNT,BIYNB; mmfi’qg 23 *‘é\ ¥ ) BR ET23 TRWF zéa;) fi?}\% domgd@fi#fi& BeST asaéé?\)csfio; Regmo0 B59309ema8 Snwp, BT BeRd BT RRFY B0 BRFYT SEXIoN @%fiodofi&#& ST, B30, If a noun follows 3RBeeT or =BT, B, the way is as follows : —2:3 nan 0590 SRR asa%fi%?o; e 93%8_ RReE BT, B TN, Occasionally the pronoun suffixed to R[eTwerd (or [Fy,r) may stand in the singular, e. g. ©2:2R3RTS WI[eT ST, BRV. g Sometimes only a single noun precedes Z00T9,3, €. g- 2R RS0 23205 BNRCIT J90X sjooa"_@gzégs\zi \%aiggégzfi, a kind of leopard eats decayed t flesh (and) other things. ReSIT PYI,F SNTLBINERY, FBY TR T. b III The plural of pronouns stands for the singular. I, Where two words are connected by the conjunction eno, ¢and’, and (i I both are demonstrative pronouns, if they are referred to and are to be expressed by one demonstrative pronoun, the second one has to stand (Q in the plural, preponderating as to form and gender, e. g. ©3R035° &3 R0 become 2R, BIRo0 NWIR0 MSTF, YBWWRSE SHBRWo BRNT?, BT o;oo;fisg ©$3m00 VN0, U300 BRI)o ¥, VRIYDS® PTO300 BITh. i 2, When two words are connected by the conjunction envo, and one W is a noun and the other a demonstrative pronoun, if they are referred to and are to be expressed by one word, the plural of the pronoun has st to occur, preponderating as to gender, e. g. FoBoB0300 ©3Zvo become @305, WR0 TBIGOSN0 BT, D3RR BT BTTE, TpYSS® NBe Y S i 3, When two words are connected by the conjunction eno, and are personal or reflexive pronouns, if they are referred to and are to be T expressed by one word, the second pronoun has to be in the plural, e. g. fo 3900 [0 become JETHF, VERIDS® Yoo WIS, Where two words are connected by the conjunction wvo, and the first one is a noun and the second one a personal or reflexive pronoun, if they are referred to and are to be expressed by one word, the pronoun — — 403 has to be in the plural, e. g P03 B0y ©R0o become 333 03022 B3 R0 QRO VR, D/ N RV0 FIRV0 ST 355 Peculiarities regarding the use of the singular and plural of verbs in a sentence are the following:— I On the use of the singular or plural of verbs in connection with nouns 1, If @dexdo, “God’, the honorific plural of w3ess (see § 354,11, 1), is used by people of the present day (¢f. § 2568 where instances of prayer are given), they put the verb in the singular, e.g. fleabzflfi (there) is God; Bes30 AV Y0ERY, BRI, 8, God causes it to rain; ©es3 SReFTTY DY AT, God created the world; Qe300 JBR Boaee =™ Wy God may make thee happy; De=cy BeBS, God (is) great TOY BTT HFHTorY OTRY, TIPABTI de33e, DO BR,ND SER Se N | SA; [RERY, zfieasdo DT 553 NI, @aa RIBFRY, DT ao%?o,oaiao even God has made the terr estmal globe on whlch we are; all thmgs have become even through Him; look, how wise, how powerful how good God (is)! Regarding the use of the singular of a demonstrative pronoun referring to Z¢s30y, observe also the following instance DeSONR @023 I TREY) OITOTONVR 2P e DEANT [RBET ST ITIN BHI03 SRBITE (see § 341 under ¢to fear) | ¢ Exceptionally, however, a person says 3¢=30w9 3 = If Bes300 is used instead of B33, as is occasionally done in vulgar speech, the verb is also put in the singular, e. g. @3S 530039 O 3e3T 16 w33, 3, an evil spirit enters his body Al 2, If a person is addressed in the vocative singular, the verb may 18 stand in the plural, e. g. BemeRod=oo (0. I+ DTRITT0) FeEB, T3 16 O king, did you (or do you) not ask the kingly Asura? e£5°00:5° QeR0Ts° J0 IRNTS WEILLRBBT B, wep (0. I. o), O elder brother, do you not know that you and we ran together‘? 16 Such is especially the case in disgustful conduct, ¢.e. in order to he ridicule a person for such conduct, when the personal pronouns relating to him also stand in the plural, e. g WRSIDTE 30R! ISR st SRBAT’; LRTITUST BY; TLISNTEeo Q | S[N,BBRFNR? BOS DO if un BBcreth? BoRG d=un=e &odaeIvecdye? || O king, bl — 404 — you have become poor; you walk on foor; nobody is with you; why (are) small thorny twigs in your pouch? what (is) the place of the temple where you repose? Could have befallen even you who do not give (alms), this indigency ? [It seems as if the small grammar called Nudigattu, wants to express a similar thing, when it says that if an act of the subject is improper (holla), the verb may stand in the third person plural instead of the second person Its instances are the following— 2 @OROE 30¢3 TP S 33omOTT, after you have become king, should they (¢. e. you) roam about ad libitum? 37, AR JTPINITB O king, should they (¢. e. shouldst) thou become bewildered? ¢ %ot} $RBIZIB do they (¢. e. doest) thou make thus?] 3, If a noun of race, species or kmd, . e. a jati noun (see § 354, I, 3) as subject is in the singular, it conveys the meaning of the plural, whenever it is connected with a verb in the plural, e. g. &8 8R03TIY (= BI0F° SRoTTR)) the elephants pushed; k08030832053, the horses ascended; zmawo%® DB, the foot-soldiers attacked; 290, wPETY), the oxen went; 30es 38e03.:, the fingers (are) big; Fu& XRTHP ¥*, the ; 9% W ); AL L=M words (are) imprecating; T zozéd@, %‘e)o WOLNT, RS euitate) 0¥ IBN 3@6@(’58 Q fi)v) 3,33; _also When preceded by e or & (§ 264), e.g. 0333 ogjaecfio@, those deer went; 503283 W30 ), these antelopes came It is not uncommon in the modern dialect to use the singular of some jati nouns which seem to allow no plural meaning in the respective sentences, with the verb in the plural, e. g. Dedo ¥uTY,39, ¥33, the water is boiling BTPY, SREATT 2500000 QeTy WIS, if (one) sees that, water comes BB0RY BReRITN 1735 03 to the mouth (¢.e. one’s mouth waters); w83 53, when (I) see them, eye-water comes (z.e. I shed tears); ‘@QU& ROo30w3 3. the water runs 3oNT DPTISRBNT ETO WIBY 3D AT, o the water in a young cocoanut is very sweet;—ed, 3ot c35ars]), rice became dear; > ra@ 9%, €953, g, Ssory, here is rice, cook (it);—FaL30 % WwBE 308 035@65?@, corn became very dear; ——mz%r‘% TP BR3P ATE S, buttermllk i1s very sour; 'Soz;%‘% w93, buttermilk was spilt; =& 3 w8 353, fever comes; RE, u0 w@d@ yesterday fever had eome 220 rain falls from DS, ), fever ceased;— es ‘SJaecéfi%?fi SoeSB 2eLIE, 3, those clouds;— 23u33on %0 e%@éfid@z% Too° eunosase, if (he) cut devo- tees with (his) nails, will milk come forth? (this sentence is from the medieval dialect) e 405 s On the other hand we find e. g. Qecs 39308y, the water became clear; 9oy derires, the waters (in tanks, etc.) became clear; =63 y 030 QDo WSS PP, land (the crop of) which grows by means of the water of rain; TR, QLT IW W, he brought water so that (his) eyes filled (¢.e. his eyes became full of tears); Qedy ®Dodwd W, the water runs; o9, ’a’o@ofioo;fid-‘é’% edy BeRy, O mother, give (me) water to é drink; Soes8e e z:s'ejgj, $00233 edNR Fo* w® & oon, he left the water of rain and held the joined palms of the hand to the water of dew | (¢.e. so as to catch the water of dew);-—zfiou;fi 392y, buttermilk was spilt; — DX TST BRY TR, ms;\dofie, O excellent guru, at once g remove the fever of (my) body!—=ZeeBow d Ry, SPIWVT TR, , a‘young crop without rain (is like) a motherless child;— & f\zé%% BWRT ) T TE ®eRT wi¥NF UYF, oo wgd, if (one) makes incisions S with a knife into that tree, white milk will come forth. Jy 4, If however a jati noun as subject stands in the singular and is 0 connected with a verb in the singular, it always conveys the meaning of ) the singular, e.g. IBRBoBY ToX, a (or the) swan walked; FOOTOT d [wen, a (or the) peacock cried; m&30T0 2oy, & (or the) black bee r Q.‘Q hummed; B3Iy BSR0B, -the (crop of) kalavé grew; need Teay, the wheat was destroyed; ZABBESQSO S28r3y, the corn increased; 3de° 6 3203y, the finger (is) big; 08 BRTovs, the word (is) imprecating. Ls, 9, Also where the noun is no jati noun, it occasionally happens 0 that such a noun as subject is used in the singular in the sense of the e plural, in which case the verb is to be in the plural, e. g. 080 Ro%m 0) o3 &80y, the minds became fickle. d\ 6, An optional use of the plural of the verb may take place, if oy some neuter nouns in the singular are combined by the conjunction 06 nn (wvo), ‘and’, e g. DBONF R FOSOT cSwer o3 odner3 0 W 0T BPITp BRB00Z. T or B3RS0, S, by learning wisdom is obtain- ed, by wisdom propriety, by propriety honour. o 0 II On the use of the plural of verbs in connection with pronouns. 0 1, If some pronouns as subjects of a sentence are joined together )it by the conjunction evo (enw), and the last one is &5 (Yo, DO, IOR), 0 = I, the first person plural of the verb is used or the <I’ has the pre-emi- he nence (mukhyatva), e.g. 83=00 2ERITS SRV JPEIMONTFYDEFHSR LRI i — R N AR Fo b T = " s e 406 — 2990, he and thou and I were not connected with the slanderers of (lit as regards) the king. o336 e8® SRR BREBI If the pronouns are in reversed order, the same takes place, e. g. Qe SR @3RT BRY0 ITRUINTE, Jpesy, thou and he and I shall go to the town of Manikita BIRIDF PRJV0 VR0 TRE S &SR0 2023 ), he and I and thou knew and told the manner of the affair BP0 JEDTS W3ZRoo WRF0 Y, I and thou and he shall worship 2, If two pronouns as subjects are joined by the conjunction eno (vw), and the second one is Jem® (Reo, VNI, thou, the second person plural of the verb is used or ¢thou’ has the pre-eminence, e. 9. &35v0 NERI0 TRABDT Q%gp 33033’6)565'@ %?Eoo PRV TRITA,, he and thou joined; when (it) happened (it Was) as if fire and wind Jomed for battle. BTRR ACRD DR If the two pronouns are in reversed order, the same takes place, e.g D99 ORRRYS PFITS B3T0 FRAZLTE, to-morrow thou and he will join III On the use of the plural of the verb, especially of its gender, when combined with nouns of different gender 1, If nouns of different gender are joined together by the conjunc- tion eve (ew), that noun which comes last, is the chief one, and the ! verb in the plural has to conform itself to it as to gender, e.g. Jex 0300535° ©BARBIZFE BWII[0 W of, the army and the queen and the king came HRRNDF WTRISS 90ARe W of, the elephant (or the ele- WTRTITS 9TAI0 uéc‘ phants) and the king and the queen came; 1] the king and the queen came WTRIIDI® WTA0 ?Eéodofiwwmoo wso ), the king and the queen and the complete army came NQ&O@J@ TORRP TOL30R W T; COWRP T30 R ReRWoR W J 2, If some neuter (here compound) nouns in the nominative singular (without the conjunction eno, see § 354, II, 4, foot-note) precede the verb 1§ this has to stand in the neuter form of the plural at the end of them all the nouns having to be supplied (adhyaharya, see § 3 b) for it, e. g Ui 29330 AP :9’ O3IBRO %*’%EEO%%Q&)FS 8o [RTFTD W dfimofibémdmamwdmawséo we)zsu@ w3 | ll 1,09 RW0e3, L Zwrao 30@)33?553 %o a‘éz: ) 3. IOBT0.0 ) || the beatmg of the blue lotus- of camomcen 407 — garland, the band of the gold-zone, the striking of the pleasant left foot with the anklet’s sound, the excessive threatening of the points of the moving-about creeper-like eyebrows (and) the tremulous red lower lip (of the woman) gave pleasure to the king IV. On the use of the singular and plural of Samskrita adjectives and their agreement with nouns 1 9 If a Samskrita adjective is preceded by a neuter noun in the plural (see § 103 about Kannada gender), it may stand in the singular e. 9. J0Be 533’05393?5 RBoFony® ARV S5 wgyZo, the great riches of the great Indra these all (are) impermanent 2, If a Samkrita noun in the singular is followed by an adjective in the plural, it gets a plural meaning, e.g. 93 03F=5° B3y, Jony*, riches (are) impermanent 3, If a Samskrita adjective precedes a neuter noun in the plural, it may stand in the plural, e.g. RYFa woOBAZPony® Nzonly®, when the cloud-resembling elephants roared. See an instance in § 313, 4 (9595&0 T3° osfi)waoa ?@F:’) ete.). 4, Regarding Samskrita adjectives and their use in general (and regarding so-called Kannada adjectives and their use) see §§ 273 {4 274. 275 5, If Samskrita adjectives (viséshanapadas, appositional nouns, with- out the conjunction evo, see § 354, II, 4, foot-note) in the nominative precede their ruling noun (karakapada, ¢f. § 354, I, 3, a), they receive in construing (anvayisuvalli, ¢f. 357, 3), the case of that noun, e. g i )0 DeTR® MGeTo 0¥ NI wn Jo 8030799 o302 Zp8,T 3930 | r\‘“c‘ IR TE (S@wé’oor’\ )L |j of which the construction (anvaya) "’:fidofiofi D, is: — QedonR evmadon fi;:)so Boft 833059OR T2 38,0 3ezon & I, 80 SEINTY, to erpa,tunéa- to the hero, to the liberal one, to the pure g one, to the profound one, to him who possesses political wisdom, to him who is the lord of them who carry weapons who will not make obeisance? Ron3x édo Bo0oT9%0 Fearor, of which the construction is: —Nofié“é Jond vodocozzofi Ieoron, to Karna, to the quick one in friendship, to the kmg of the Kurus b e P 408 356. On the order of words in sentences I From the simple sentences quoted in §§ 345. 346. 347. 348 349. 350 it appears that the nominative (subject) the accusative (object), the instrumental, the dative, the ablative and the locative precede the verb or that the verb stands at the end In § 350, 8 there is a sentence in which the order is locative, subject, verb; and in § 350, 9 one in which the order is: locative, the relative past participle connected with it, accusative, verb. § 851 shows that the genitive precedes the noun with which it is connected. § 352, 4, @ adduces two instances in which the order is: (instrumental or) ablative, subject, verb, and two in which the order 1is (instrumental or) ablative, verb, and exceptionally the subject at the end Sentences in which the order is: subject, object, verb, are e.g. modnc* enwpTo ZodW0 D3, TIVRY, 0353 The vocative begins a sentence, or stands at its end, e.g. T3, Te¢%*! { BT, IR0 & TRIBE 3308 TR TRE Oe? DD IIIW,, Nk eRE! Fog N> fig)oyae.)' BRENY, BoNe!l— AR, WTHTT) TR, To3e? II The following instances, quoted from the prose of the modern dialect will serve to show the order of words, when there are more component parts in sentences than subject, object and verb; it must however not be expected to find uniformity, as every author is apt to use more or less slight variations according to circumstances / L Regarding the accusative: QF [y GIP3R BE,T WINRBISOY . — J =2 ac o3 03;306 DT TR 3&’)37? TOVRY, T\ 3@00@ 3,. — & VAN wfio obe;?o Tfl)bfimo DTBRIR0ST ssa:m ve%fiozfiae) i 2, Regmdmg the instrumental: — To0 NPR TR [RI,BBRY, VRERY 3.053; TCPR 95y wRNBNYRS, HRRE.e8. — DANDR JR,®0, Bl 303008 T ¥o 3, Regarding the dative:—Qesy ¥, 5@0&3’371%‘-?7“% AE9Rs SR — 57 SO JReBTSOIZ [N @a” %Jaemsa%? _fsesjdo DY ONW DTBTR %’e'aofi%im %’Jaé.?aaa" TR TP Suooa,aa?e 83, z%fi;Sfi SRR BDREI é?)e(oo __ef% Nfir’» aézo &rio BoNe BROA %@doé Q;Sm BN T B, — DIBNF 33.¢ fac%oésfi VYRR I[RR, 3D, 3,NTRR, RoTZ, A %Ja%fio 380 mébm&ofio £9,. LAy s mmdcfifi SRLOMCR AN _§§ %‘ae‘)fi vozéofi@ee)o 3a%ao —_osonadd.@ SROT, BRI U s — SR . SNl - R e B R 409 E— 4, Regarding the ablative (in the form of the instrumental): — 2 - O 9T z@&o‘oa o Su AY, T SISECIMECE R TOVY BB %@& . !Sowuu (oM ..qu? u&m&ouoa TRT fiaoug — & %U.a@ 8&9 Uu Uu B3, la& as %&c BRI BB BTHD BRCTI. 5, Regarding the locative: — 3Ry D3RO R ©3yTV XY 0300 B TVE, 3. — W, RWHYTIOR U@@?@a%&fiw DY DT, TS TR DY 02,07 BN ToIRN BB BRIN R azfiwn@aou& AR 09,78% wFT FA, 0300009 — 2 TE BondRPR IR 8RS, WIROT W 030 SEIToORD R O TORENRBON TR RREJTIRIOA, 03 @z&aou&o SR T30 3003 DL TA TR, $IFTIIDZ DY, WS BRIG . — & FINDR 3008 TP BRI BREO YA WI030Z,eR. — ?uo &m@ Ou,m.u ocoo@w & &&o &%@8 WRWNR fiauolvs n39ns a(oa%.u Sup 2339, fiuo Il,@w%bm %G@ 33,N% BT I e me _Lu( 39 Wl T® olvm mmw,d Tl 6, Regarding site (expressed by adverbs): — 22, ToENWS B3,T BV ] BEPRD BB ). — IR, BoNB 2L, B WIINRI. — B FOBON 3¢S 307 BRRBY,.— BT BREIN F3, 3ReIF, 2! S T, Regarding time: — 5 206° 2SR FNT TN JReA 3R BeT it WR) OF W) VBN, 2Py IDR FRE BRI, — BRI 3 037 dween @dwuugm CERa %,@& Bo.— DRV AR S29, A Dvw WTO3, 239! Lo wufio &o&a 20027 BoI) DIINY IdN T 3LE30BNTOY . — Y %bovaozo @&98&@1 33 TOR DBRIALELY 39330, — ARRNT S/T (¥ TOR) IPABTP 08T, — qg @owo 3 30083 méau@m Q3TOY. (Cf. DT A above sub No. 1; @wa 8. Zo 2° v%& 5993 s. No. 3; 8809&15& s. No. 4; ) &0, Quo Ba s No.s; &vlb shoSonew further on s. No. 8; a@& s. No.9; Wy & 8. No. 11) 8 ? Regarding reason and purpose:— &G 30R0T BR3,0032. — [ b A% oleTenow 38 9%T BRTERITBER, a STIMOBIZ, 3. — uao 6 38 SwozaNode 030, FBT Sean %mm@om@alo&@ug&mbuo q%& 3Re WG WCPT BT &ml DRBTOY, Y FDTD DRRBe &3 ao@mwauuw Y i LRGN &mqo — (BEeITRY) SEN &aow &3 S9IINPNT, &&u SERE Q&&@% SECERTSN u@&c oo ] N 30653030 2w dR. 52 s P — 410 9, Regarding condition: — S3WR30 FRE3 &Mmo WHIBTR. — JF, L0033 SAOH] m@ouww L&M _F, uo.«#fi R, IPE ToWNRD. — A, TRB? 599 Swm uu&&o T 5 BIEES Bt 7@%&&.10@9& %m&ovfl Fox 30883 5 %b.cw nwbmw et w&&%m mww TONE WRIT. 10, Regarding the verbs ¢, eoT¢ (28, BRY) see § 332. I Regarding past participles (or gerunds, § 154 seq.): —Reom 3030 o Qo3 TR WRR) $90), ¢ PRBEN EFOT, WP, — & Tows TR’ %,@Bm% 95380 %bwwm @ovus %&awwmwuo.immog A as nwwow@av."w &mw %wo.&uwmwflfi WBTY, mSNV% 33, SED) SR WY Doy THB SN B30 WePR WRAZ, BHWWR. —FOR Wiy, W JFIY 2, ©B TRy, JEA SRS FRBG,T Yo, — BB Tea), YT VFR. — & TRTON u%b%o%% & WTWIY NI BTN %&mw&uo.lm%oao S3930 Tew, 30 BBy, NFIT TR, PETIRY, VT, BX IPR BIY, 39A ! v — SIFTIRY 0B, PO, T wI) wowwaouwf ¥9 3067, 3Re698.3 2B, ¥ZI.— & S0e3R & aMWmu VTPRFRIYFEWRIRY DPeR, IR WRY WBEINITI. (Regarding the present participle see e.g. the ancient sentence in § 339, 5: WRR RN FBRQ etc.) 12, Regarding questions: — &), To0308 08 90? on) [eS o A S\ rtwrola m,@mw BeBo? — BRINT &am PNOR BRENIZ, 37 — y@mwa%w it [ TORNS 07 — & wwuaauw e[ o%ww uw@ ARERS o&@ao&@% — TR FoR? — & MR 0359ILIT? — BN, wm 0359F? — Rore, & BRI, 05T WBY youaquvmwwlo&@mau &fl&& — s Qe TERRFNYY Boosys TIREN FReWNS o&au@flwl R, SHFRY. &&mw RBOBINTY @&wluawwa wea baw II Bo? — & BRHOTTY DR SPRZL? — 39 WS T2 D! — FoY RPENRY h el ou@w%lg RO BR3INS AN &aw YR} @ogm%.!v%fl 03593 T907 —2eR0 TSR JRER B3, &uw SonFy 0% &!ugmwao o35 I &@,m%!m@ao& e BT, 8&@ 59 IPBRISRER? — WorTITT R, 233, 9NN 3 %&%. TRZ D! —JF, DR L) (how old art thou)? Regarding questions see also §§ 265. 271. 283. Iy 13, Regarding exclamations: — & QBORIN AW, DR m@&aombw_l al @amw umw b&w &&yw_luomwu SoeS © RR,0 &/ w0 ¥ry B8l — 37 i %3 o DT BBRe Tona! — 3R, SReRY, BT &aw RBBRE FXB BRENY i\ P — 411 e — 33! — oo, & $IP o)c\) B 33— UTY T, Ao TR D38 éJafie)o T BREIVRIZ T @v%fi é@é’d SHBRH aosfi e3R8, 3! III As the works of the ancient dialect are principally in verse, it is Késava obvious that the order of words in them often varies considerably the grammarian, also wrote his Sabdamanidarpana in verse, and says in it that, as the words in the verses of his grammar may be in irregular order on account of the requirements of alliteration (préasa), poetical measure (Chandas) and construction (anvaya), he has added an expla- nation in prose (vritti) to each verse, to which explanations we must refer our readers regarding his order of words in prose Here follow some quotations made by KéSava from ancient poems which we give in order to show something of the license taken by their authors as to the order of words: — 1 The subject is placed after the verb, e.g. 9B Bone* Ry RERIJGeny® Rwmonys, when the horses neighed (and) when the cloud- resembling elephants roared éf:m.@ésd %aflo&?t&n ©f BBFo PeSe, ) Bhima was like blacksmith” who plied the bellows. zsa@wdo@ VBB WRRY 3a3e33n%¢, the sylvan deities continually menaced and checked. &1 Lo & DBoDF3wY*, that king was famous on the earth Nzgdo =0 223@ RR3 03000, Brahmi obtained the three worlds F0030.830 3039 3ewo 235 30 mooon, the sunshine increased, the forest-conflagration died away WEPTH TR 3TRRT I VY TF T, this woman knew the whole 2 manner of the sons of Pandu. 50&)&5 DERINV0 71;3 S0, the wind blew i} gently eFer Ry Yo 33 BuoNsoro %e@ 3, darkness had quite swallowed 0 up the sun and moon S PYOBRS BTF® BIPVDET0 DPYVE,FaTo0 ; in that town (there) is the light of the solar race, one of great valour VB T0, 830, 2390300 W T° z‘peoae Bhishma was astonished and cried <ah’. J TOARD),. SIRRDRBRY’ SPRF 0 a dazzling red colour spread about in the east SBBBY o, the swan walked iy 9 2, The accusative is placed after the verh, €. g. F3ToB300 DN Bedno I3 65805080300 Vishnu asked the king of the Kurus for the half o (his) land. 3zag5° mz; o Qgfigs S5 vy G090, he shot arrows at the enemy’s army (or r1ver) that was no river. B3 BEPIPRTS GUATS WBYTIE 8 &30, though we know (it), we cannot tell (you) the condition of the ruler WIS Rew o $0e83 FeoZwense, Arjuna quite alone overcame W D2 41 the force of the Kauravas. 02200030 ;isaeac‘fizggs‘ 80T 03Vo, till (he, or when he) suffered distress, he shot arrows at the enemy’s army. 3, The dative is placed after the accusative and also after the verb, e. g. ReI30300° 3&257 $0SS® ©TRoNI, o, the gods were pleased and gave a boon to the king. NBC3e FOWNo RV T [RTWT %Jae&?\;iss 33 239% o, the mountains and the elephants do not stand the point of the thufiderbolt’s head and his sword. Observe also the following verse (¢f. § 241): — WY 0% ST dfi&fi, R0 BAZE 3T BTN, FTIDRDTIF | WF,oNC 330 wIEN, BRF e PRIFEN T 3, weTTAd! || 4 o The genitive is placed after the noun it is connected with, e. g. TIOINTBT JQDARIT 3BT 230%° %@Sa-@, the sword of the arm of Tailapa caused itself to be called Rudra, the fire that is to destroy the world. HR3030 0BT 8P oS00 TRV LS00 TORIRY nwo FoSFToomome, the elephant of Bhuvanaikarima ran upon the elephants, and upon the warriors, and upon the horses. 5, Regarding time observe e.g. FoTH, TR DT, TRELF TRNTITIN. 3 357. As the words in the metrical compositions of the ancient dialect are combined strictly to the rules of euphonic junction (§ 213 seq.) and therefore are separated with some difficulty by a common reader, it has been thought necessary by commentators when commenting on verse, first to offer a padaééhéda or resolving a veese into its elementary parts, as has been done e. g. by the commentator on the Sabdamani- darpana. Thereupon an anvaya (¢f. No. 3 of this §) or arrangement of the words in their prose-order, without regard to euphonic junction, is adduced by them, and then they give the tiku or explanation. The grammarian KéSava, as told in § 356, III, wrote an explanation in prose l on his slitras in verse himself. In reading poetry the following remarks of Késava are to be noticed:— | 1, It is required to use adhyédropa, ¢. e. attributing or assigning, with néya, ¢. e. logical inference, e. g. in the half-verse 80T, 8¢ 8N [P G BRTNE BRTOY weRmanRo | the sky became reddish S] P 413 ] and became equal in appearance to (the colour of a ripe fruit of) the FEugenia jambolana, one has to assign as the cause the redness of evening and not red dust, though also red dust might (under circum- stances) be assigned as the cause. If adhyardopa becomes wanting in precision (asamartha), being referable to two or more things, there is no (definite) néya (possible, as perhaps in the half-verse quoted above). Adhyaropa is also needed regarding the six karakas and the genitive (§ 344) in verses like the following one:— FRNO, RO Poev ? WwiB0n 3% S TIT? ? cfiod%?\raficsmficac‘? | BRRBBPFR Fono WIIFo. RANSRIRY. BNy SeBYBEP BeT oo! || wherein ¢80, the nominative, is to be attributed to ¥@B:RY; &3 o, the f accusative, to Beax033 3ioac’; Y¥IQo, the instrumental, to 2EWBI0NS%0S ooo’; ©3on, the dative, to csod%?@%csmafloacé; »338 9o, the ablative, ) to 3RRBBNFB Fofo WHIFo; 3R, the genitive, to IBRTIRY; HIZNTF, 0 the locative, to 2030530 Soe33)c0: (He is) a great hero. What warriors do envy (him)? Who (are all) they that (through him became) intimate friends to (our) king? Who will come to war (against him)? If (they) attack (him), defeat will come (from him). This (is) the grandeur (of i him). Indeed victory will appear (in him). Know Boppala! ) 2, It is required to use adhyahara, 7. e. supplying, which refers )1, @) to the kiraka, in this case the kartri or subject (§§ 344, 1; 345), )l or also to a predicate of the subject, . 9. DB? JIIFRHT fie){)\fi&-), re)0) [y Il B8R Bo F)dwg Foo?, in which case %327 o is to be supplied (adyaharya) as subject: Why? will it (the kritiba:ndharh, ever) be accomplished, of 18 though (you) have promised the composition of the poem ? — FEOF S0 D9, S0 &3m0, in which case maR 1s to be supplied: Karna (is) a \he liberal person and this man too (is a dant). 080 b) to the kriyé or verb, e.g. PTIRPEZ,Ho0 ;Soa’ax_sfi@%ibo?, 1n which case 9o is to be supplied: (Is) Purushdttama a mere man? (no, ~:29 = Cie ith he is not, allan).— g 300, o MY aDEE ®BO Boriow FR! in which case &t (BCITF) is to be gupplied: (Is) Dhritarashtra able, when he speaks? (is) Hari able, when he hastens? (no, they are not able). ish (See @GN also in §§ 355, III, 2; 358.) e 414 P °) to the adverb o of doubt, e. g. eEB3B00330? BB=30? 33N 339, B¥exs?, in which case the final o of en@s33s which has disappeared in the initial & of 02330 on account of euphonic junction, is to be sup- plied: Shall we not hesitate? shall we not fear? shall we not be frightened? shall we not bow to the injunction, O king? d) to the conjunction evo, €. g. oo AD 3903000 33; TE 0 R3O RABTo fioofiéigfié\éwo, in which case evo is to be supplied for 2o, gfia and $8: King Simhaséna causes himself to be called (our) life and wealth and mother and father and eye and refuge. (See § 354, 11,4, foot-note.) e) to vakyadipaka, ¢. e. the clearing up (of the meaning) of a sentence, e.g. ¥3R035° B0 wio, in which case, in order to show that each one (pratyéka) came, &)E%o is to be supplied; 3x00 m%# ¥TS0 &)R’éo, that person came and that person came. 3, It is needed to use proper construction of words (vakyanvaya, cf. § the beginning of the present § and § 355, IV, 5) regarding €930, e953%¢ > 953, 3RV, e3TYS, e3Jso, that is to say regarding their use in so- called relative sentences. 2 ¥To, W39, ©¥K3o (and their plurals) are anvayasvatantras, . e. independent of another word, e. g. TpJd %g);fifi T09¢R0, he who has gold, (is) well born, in which case one cannot say esSo 3319%‘3353 F0©eR0; 3 fi@zom%é)afleé‘ “m°, she who possesses beauty (is) a .woman, and not e&z¢s 1§ ARWNE =8 IS¢ d@@o:ogs,)#%c% Sexo, that which has customary usage, (is) fit, and not &Yz PP HI SeRv. ¢ 9T0, 83%°, Yo (and their plurals) are anvayaparatantras, . e. dependent on another word, e.g. ©=Ix¢ ©wHT ooy T flesqso, who 0 (is) very virtuous, even he (is) to be served; eszes T3S, O 553323, who (is) a woman faithful to her husband, she (is) to be honoured; &g 39 z@mgmdm 5337 e03d0, what (is) beautiful, it (is) worthy to be seen. : See §§ 267. 316, 1. 330. N Also zo%¢ (and its plural) Késava classes with the anvayapara- €4 tantras, as it is to be followed by a demonstrative pronoun which shows its gender, e. g. 39R° @ZJo ®@WRITo, he (is) a clever man; sax® ©3%* @308, she (is) a clever woman; 3og° @ny LO®, that (is) a large thing. N About S0 (393°, S8y, 33) §§ 256. 259. \ 415 358. In §357, 2 the grammarian KéSava’s rules about adhyihira or supplying have been given; it remains to be shown how it is to be used also elsewhere, that is to say where pronouns (or their respective nouns or ‘one’) are to be supplied (see e.g. § 254, 2, a—d; § 315, 2, k. I). This can be best shown by citing some instances, putting into parenthesis the words to be supplied, wviz. 9 ¥ 2e8 DPe,ree, the terminations which (I) have mentioned. 2 ;’% Beo, the goddess whom (people) call speech. HRHROZ w3 BEPX So8nEy mz?’g 35y, the threads which (people) have sewed, will be torn and the leaves become loose (see § 315, k. 1). %Gfiiofiagfig n3rego, kalte (people) having said (is) a donkey (4. e. kalté means a donkey, see § 332). SBZpB Bro I93L°0cF, if (they) speak, all of them do not know (proper) words (see § 314). 333 B doo%&@‘a%ad@% PPRRTT DAY 803y AT, a cloth which (they) have woven after separating what silk-worms have made in the form of buds. es8c3 8065033&3@@65 SRR B3y Moe3?, a pit which (people) have made for catching elephants. CASORSA :33&3&;3:2) TRB ¥938 B,Be3 WM, if (one) measures (2 span) with both the thumb and forefinger, it is called a pradésa. BREN W05 még , & road which (people) are unable to go. T[pedy WP, a place (of the body) to which (somebody) has applied a blow. DRI BenooBB O3 BRETT %) Iy, what (is) the place of the temple where (you) rest? WEY TOY, u;gé’ 28 weay if (it) goes, (it is) a stome, if (it) comes, (it is) a ripe fruit (i.e. what goes in one’s giving, is a mere stone; what 7 comes for it, is a ripe fruit). AT BoO HIN, TREMITN ROW on, when (he) comes, (he is) like a tiger; when (he) goes, (he is) like a mouse. QJF, FATO TP zo;gz‘fi RRB T DBRR W QVIET, if (I) 10 come with thee to-morrow, my study will be interrupted for four days. 0 woR SWRT Fely, Beerad, if (thouw) behavest thus, thou wilt be ruined. y SPFT TRRT 23% 2003 R0, if (one) churns curds, butter is produced. 23692 WS, R %’J@sgé 38 Bwenog 3, if (I) buy sweetmeats, they will be eaten. 28e BonRe, nIT FRAE RE3E SPRIRE WX oazgt‘f:)@% SACIC 3¢o, O sonm, if (thou) wantest to form friendship with people, (thou) ) must do so with much caution. efigg@sm&s TRE 32,0300 fizé%@sg) =593 TOARDS 3¢5y, (we) must converse in love with (our) brothers. USSR NeRYy B 39308, 33, if (you) teach (them) words,' parrots will quickly RN T P —— 416 P — learn (them). See e.g. also §§ 302, 7 (o327 8). 314 (the conditional). 323 (bfig&%z@, etc.). 326 (Qé’fi%@, etc.). 332. 333 (g%& etc.). 3@03\®%36~%%C$o’ (he is) good to (his) mother. 7Ty éa’;{sdo sa,sfids'a 0T WOABo, the teacher caused (his) disciple to read the grammar. B0 S& pZ333F w0, please come as far as (my) house. 039235359 S0 T T 3RY '@@%@%’ 23 &, the master stood up to wash (his) hands and feet. ¥ BoRRY 3SWy [0S VR BRIy, %&mc% WBT, Y, what does that woman carry on (her) head? 2ZoNR ST° éeé.‘@?fi% , 2T So 89%0, Madana perceived “this man (is) a suitable husband for (my) younger sister”. 33 39030 60T MEIPRTY, a calf does not leave the company of (its) mother. RIBIDRR, 3, the pupil (is) like (his) spiritual teacher. %‘gga ) RReBOZ ¢3, we see with (our) eyes. 2R @C Sondne BIR Jw@ Bewendy, you ought to have given (it, 4. e. the money) six months ago. & [3I, 3T 3TN #éfi&eo)o IR, Fedoo, when that physician asked «“why will you not take (them, 7. e. the medicines)?” The grammar called Nudigattu adduces also the follow- ing instances: — ©sR Y03 [y, BRAEWy Ber, be (is) a good fellow, do not beat (him). 2598 com0 ma%%;m%a", ®3y, THATINY TWRRE), the Brahmana is an honest man, give (him_)‘ ten rupees. W:J;SQL T I[N SR IALN :-3%%803& %o, insipid milk does not agree with me; put (some) sugar (into it)! & IRBO RIFNG, %%fiofm &, this axe is sharp; cut the wood (with it)! 359 In § 275 there are various instances of the modern dialect in which the verb =%, to be, is the verb of a sentence, €. g. RIMF %KQ)& =Yoh) 3,33, elephants are black; 23970 We3weroy ©n, the penknife is beautiful; &3 :"_\séeododo %8 %3009 8, those women are small; 3 DRAFY BIT I, the flowers are green.' On the other hand we find there various instances in which the verb =g is omitted, e. 9. W=ty BBWe Bo@ono, he (1s) a nice boy; w8 08 Be@, his house (is) large; ete From such instances it might appear as if the insertion and omission of the verb 2T were arbitrary. n 1§ But the above instances belong to the present modern dialect; dl the ancient and medieval dialect the verb @0¢ (o) is always understood il and never expressed, if it is a mere copula to connect a subject with its predicate, e. 9. ©93FE &;%cfio, he (is) a good man. 3%* &%Cfiv‘, she (is) N — —— 417 | a good woman BSYS Be3T 3PCW she (is) the king’s maid-servant | Towf wWeRy, milk (is) white ©3o° WO B, they (are).able persons % ¥y D03, they (the pearls, are) large oo v, I (am) a servant %% @0, he (is) a servant Qoo FoSvo, thou (art) Kima &So oD (am) Gauri 03 oRPR Y IWEITxS® o3, B[oo, among jewels the ruby (1s) precious SRIIVRY YIRT® Y3 =ocf, among men males (are) chiefs (see § 350, 2, a. b. ¢; § 354, I, 2; § 348, 5. 1; § 349, s; § 357, 3). WINBRY* &Zo Fowy3o, this man as to generosity (is) a Mandhata. FoRXNITFYs, 33 30t 3 the mother (is) one (¢.e. the same), the father (is) different g3¢r 3BoTono, whose horse (is) this? NOTIT FoNY* whose daughter (art) thou? Instances like these are the rule and quite idiomatic In sentences like the following Kannada people would also nowadays scarcely use the verb wdo:— w380 035980 who (are) these persons? BT 03990 30 3, whose wife (is) she? 03599 30T, which (is) your 1S elder sister? BEBY T, I9OWOTY, Vo Jpe, this (is) your mother she not? (CEeTe) bl 3;5&;5 Sd‘) they (are) brothers In the following 1nstance of the present modern dialect also the past tense of the verb =T, when a mere copula, is to be understood:— — b SONFT [P PR RoR 9)5;5, eszICE° N sjoafi RoT) PIRNF ot zj@, [y the original language of the Aryas (wa,s) Samskuta from that, in course of time, several languages came into existence 360 It is a different thing, if the verb ‘to be’ is not a mere copula, 1 but expresses ‘to exist’, ‘to be’, ‘to have’, when the verbs evg, acf (D)) 3 and the forms es030 s, B8, @3, w3, are used (see §§ 196. 316 lg),eq 66 ATV céosf\) TR 0; & RERIBR, T '*“é& B worey, we?fioioasafi, ; b AETBR cfim)o BEL B : D DBV BF 2w§3, Ponodawme? || if thou art, (there) is an empire; if thou art, (there) are the insignia of royalty and (there) are boxes (with money); if thou art, (there) is the white umbrella if 10 od thou art (or be) not, will all these (things) exist? G TS eueny, (there) is money. Bo@BRYs wFay, (there) are horses RIS wved e30n, (there) is fame to him (4. e. he has fame) B30° WPT® 15) 53 ] 418 USRS, they are present. WIBZ, darh rafaRot=d efioushao&s;flo Trgns’ S to the north of that forest (there) is the mountain of AnJanaglrl BRE 8 SRy BT wEY WO YVELY, (there) is a well near that house ”@OVJD wwRe 2d §J (there) was even one man in the boat. B W& M) uaé%* %J@fi :3 (there) are many tigers in this jungle. 3038w & (there) is God 8 RRIE Rond wHs T [e3803 0o, (there) were many”® servants with that gentleman % 29003RYR Qe B, (there) is no water in the well 390003, 1330w, XF,8N8. IV, (there) are no greater benefactors than a mother, (there) is nothing sweeter than sugar N oRRE DRFIP* she is in the house D5,380 AD 33 Rote 3 300 Be=.08 %900, as long as they possess riches, will not also scoundrels be honourable persons? In such instances the verb evw$, ete. are often also not expressed, e. g TPOTRE® TSN (there is) fragrance in flowers B3R WH (there s) white colour in the flower. ToSRY* S0R0To, (there is) sweetness in milk. RENAN Bwes 3ewo, (there is) splendour in the disk of the sun. .-o@) 0309\> ézo B Dreawet (there are) eight chapters in the Sabda- manldar pana RTODRRY RReo, (be is) true to (his) guru. R BRY 3313 =28, woOR To.00mo0Tes, for s3oce0, (he is) proficient in adoration N the cat (it is) play, for the mouse (it is) extreme distress uonad%%;s =5 R 5‘52,% 330, knowledge (is) superior to gold. ¥ WRY [ 9 m@fido (there were) many players there. It will have been observed from the above sentences that the English terms ‘there’, ‘there is’, ‘there are’, ‘there were’, etc, used to begin sentences, cannot be expressed in Kannada, to which may be added e. g SZoMB* YFMo DasearZaTo 5383 &30, (there) was born to him and to her Vikhyatayasa 90X Bo TP wey 3y, (there) occurred an inroad from the side of the king. Notice also the following: a0 racs e or e, it is L. Y] fazf) 053 or m9s3¢, it is we. 830, [0 mfi efiwgé es3, it is we, not they, who say so RoBIN BT ¥ or Vi, it is a girl § 361 In §§ 154—170 the forms of the past verbal participle have been given (¢f. B3, ©®wd in § 338, and the repetition of verbs in § 339) It is used e 419 pe— J: 1, in simple succession of actions, the actions having the same subject | e. 9. wRB BP0, he was delighted (and) gave 30w RPneY o, he was l pleased (and) praised. Ho& Bo83x0, he sang (and) danced WeR BRMo ; he begged (and) received ©E9A Feoo, he sought (and) found. Fped § 308930, he saw (and) made obeisance R R EINTo, he ate (and) went to sleep TORTINVEY o, he drank (and) spit IR €20 . FBTY [Nl e he bathed, ate, drank (and) turned back. SPoZB3:3Z[o0 TBA 3T o9 ) PYOA. e030To BRCP. ¢ [wRFo, he ruined the country of Malava (and) ) I8 made the women of its (town of) Dharapura (his) maid-servants IPTLP TIPS’ pPT TP wpeBo 330, like a gold-coloured young antelope the white (horse) rolled about, sprang (and) went. [OIR) RhH 0 BPeN ey PYE,INATTY :%i?n €93 T30, 1 80 home, eat, take (my) Nfio&fi J books (and) come. emam 55@@ wdaé 3.e8, 1 will eat (and) come. RRFNT 0Ty VROR ToBY NOPIN e, BREN SF30R%N zuéjo NPE SWeRNS =nod 3, the water in the sea is heated by the sunshine becomes vapour, rises up, joins together in the air (and) becomes clouds BHROY FRRBY [BNRRY, =SWRS, 8, they churn curds (and) make buttermilk NeBJBmoRVTo, he seizes the pole (and) plays Sde y I wpedo, he did not make (it and) went %R0 T N0, he did not run away, fought (and) overcame 2 (It will be seen that in translating the past participle the verb finite in combination with ¢and’ has been used.) )| 2, in manner, the actions having the same subject, e. g. ToAZ SBTo he walked stoopingly. &% 208 o, he came on foot DARY T3 3o, he 1D tied (it) firmly Ton.&A wdBo, he wrote (it) in an abridged way (NES ol 234 23830, he wrote (it) commentatorially. 3903083 SR 2Ry, do il not speak without understanding 3, in means, the actions having the same subject, e. g. 30z)e90, he 3 ate by wandering in quest of alms 2R DR 33, WRR, THY TR ho 38, 2590%0, (one) may eat by begging, (but one) ought not to live by stealing CRNYRY, RRBRY BT, he drove the cattle away by beating 4, in cause, the actions having the same subject, e. g. ©25°03:83 %J o, Ve because he did not know, he was ruined. BTN WA BYR, the boy 10 was ruined, because he did not study. reg S FRD %J aaofiwo 30N Fe $o, the husband was ruined, because he sat (lazily); the woman was 53% 1 — 420 P ruined, because she rambled about. SEBR RBRS° BRCBR 91T zon, as if (one) springs into the river, because he is afraid of the rain. When a different subject from that of the last verb occurs, it is used chiefly 1, in cause, e.g. IS0 %’saga B3082035° &30, grief originated, because (he) saw the corpse. 3y oda¥o T RIDTS ST, joy originated, because (he) saw the beloved woman. no%® ed a’;xja;@ 359@533 03y, because the wind blew, (there) fell a ripe fruit from the tree. D VRN WRDTIRIY, because (his) money went, he became poor. 3 %z?;%r DRZEP BTRD =g, %9, the king died, because a snake bit (him), and the poison rose (to his head). nd $0TTB 0D0NT® A2 Fox® 3’2&) WA =33, as if (a man) ascended the top of a high tree, fell down, because his hand slipped, and died. Pod FpeRD T3, Bewe SRB By, because nobody took care of the fruit, it was spoiled; because nobody cultivated the field, it was ruined. Qo3 e%fi%g%% 28Ry B30y, the lead-pencil wore, because (people) wrote (with it). e300 WS¢ zm% R3,39, he died, because disease attacked (him). o33 WO o3 Reany z9d eeezég% ‘v‘o"gz%@%}fizs NBX BRJ) TR 03y, the flower of a shrub which was put there in a pot, fell down, because the end of his garment touched it. 2, in lapse of time, e.g. ©¥=3F0 BReN SIS B[R] BNy, it is five : days since he went. TR WRY Y Sonyaodn3y, it is a month since the king came. 362. The forms of the present verbal participle are adduced in §§ 172. 173 It expresses 1, contemporaneous action, e.g. SRo300 Wi o, he came laughing =@ oo0800 Ppedso, he went calling. B3 0 u%o, he came fighting a303y,0 PpWRo, he beat chiding. 39,3, F&o, he cut chipping Fate) 3, u%o, he came blessing. DuCorod Jpeso, he went shining. Frog 20e°BRy, he spoke laughing. %R03, BRLAITTDY ABD RapEAS he who goes running may stumble (and) fall. I3 3838, x93, he prates f (whilst) laughing (and) eating. TORIR THOBIY, Wl RIS, ‘g, Ted 03039,8, Rima dances singing, playing a musical instrument (and) i laughing. wwmp), 3007 ¥ FBOWT FREVI NWLNG, W, FNFHTI WI s— 421 — 39,8, see, father! from that side (there) comes an old man putting down (bis) stick on the ground (at every step to support himself). 2, continuation (¢/. § 339, 6) a) in the present tense (see § 313, 1). b) 1n the imperfect (see § 313, 2), e.g. v=08%Fo, he was shooting (arrows). MESDTF BHFo, he was eating. R Yo THR [RER T DR BT B8R, Ro38cF o, both of us looked about, did not see thee (and) were in anxiety (as to thee) up to this moment. SOBARZTREI w3908 SRBLo BN, SonoF 3,303 | Xy O WS 0F,35° eudodd 3D03R3, 3 %S:Soéfifiag\%@d?o pes3yo || Bhima seized the end of the tails of the two furious elephants, (and) whilst he crushed (them), was like a blacksmith who plied the bellows, the blood that came forth from (their) mouth being the flame. Reos 3030 3;& %ocfiazfic>:$o§o¢L RBITIZ, SBRRY, Ganapati walked seeking his horse. c) in the future (see § 313, 3). When in the modern dialect the present participle has its own subject, it suffixes the vowels » or » combined with a euphonic &f (see §§ 282. 285. 286), e. 9. IR, wTZ S %@Sfié 303, 3, the cuckoo cries even spring coming (¢.e. at the very time when spring comes, as soon as spring comes). SORDRIT SoS0TITE V0 TR WwBWBZO [No3T 36, do not laugh on account of love for (your) wife and son, (your) heart even taking pleasure (in them). 363 The forms of the past relative participle are given in §§175 —179. 0 Cf. § 254. It is used to take the place of the relative pronouns in other languages, L <l e.g. s9®T0, he who sang; Jpecio, he who went; 3e@k%¢, she who begged; 5 W30, he who considered; 2emory, it that drank; %€9os, those who rise; =83 Jpwo, a place in which (people) played; %@% S8y,, @ (or the) thing which (somebody) had given; 3p$3 3o, the grass which had germinated; o, medo, the lesson which (somebody) had learned; 3:'3;@’:3% ) 2263°, the place (of the body) to which (somebody) applied a blow; &3 DRo, Vishnu who had become; =o®R& Hos¢, a field which nobody ) ‘; P— 422 P cultivates: 833 2B o, in case that (something) should not be destroyed 3035 B0, an affair that does not end; ©o & s903sFo, an affair which is not proper; DAZ 0¥, a strap which has been tightened; 3¢&7 w0, a gift which has been asked for; 2,3 3¢ %=0AZ0, he whose affliction was removed; HI afio&j 5335y, they to whom a son has not been born %Je)fioo Al e 95350 an ox whose horns are broken. Cf. § 267 About its use before adverbs (postpositions, § 212, 6) see § 282 364. The forms of the present and future relative participles are given in §§ 180—186 Cf. § 254 They are used in the same way as the relative past participle (also before dverbs, see §§ 282. 365), e.g. o0, he who is or has (see §§ 185. 316); 592 3¢ she who knows or will know (see § 186); BRzs Ye*er, a sand- bank that is accumulating; 3RS RRRTE a lamp that hangs PR 3038, a rain which dashes; ©¢8)s3 t¥930T0, a chowrie which (somebody) waves; 393 33, an ear of corn that grows; Jpd= ¢3¢d, a kettle-drum that (somebody) beats $PB3003 Jo2yo, a conch-shell that (somedody) blows; =0z 30253, a stream that runs 283 3RS, a trumpet which (somebody) applies to his mouth for blowing; Jpees,s FPSoFRVoNy* perspiration which comes forth (see § 253, 2, d); RpdS3o, he that nourishes or will nourish PeSoF, a woman who scares away (see § 254) £ 2R s BRIy, &3y, the time in which (the cows) are milked, has come See §§ 273. 330, and ¢f. § 267 An additonal instance 1s:— TIRIT 300, BEBISVTF BREIT RPN FRFonBRY 80 TR 2923 BREBIS [LPYF BB TRBIS TWol S08, [0 | GRS ze 8- ROTIRIS %565;5% 'Soomain SR zsam % ST RREBITNFC, ofma UERY S@no || the black bees which hum, the wind which blows, the lea,ves of palms which wave about, the plantains which fluctuate in (the water of) the ponds, the small islands (in the river) which are cool, the herons which do meet together, the ruddy geese which mutually touch and kiss, the parrots which play about, the clever birds which utter pleasant words cause much pleasure to those who look on After one or more preceding past participles the present-future relative ! participle is often used iving it or them so to say the sense of the present, e. g. JeP ©IF wowo, a tail which is long and extends itself e 423 v e LBREPTOT B8, SRemo &030e9ne3 3y, the doorkeepers’ sticks which drive away and strike those who are dishonest oK Po2d RN 3@ B0, R¥0=0, the speed of the arrows that touch, knock against him (and) m1ss (their deadly aim). BOWFVTIBDTY aoejoud TON® HRBY QYA %e%;souo T 55(5;- TN acfic:‘“@s 9330R) afln@cfid@ Nomfi 399 FRED a‘éu@efi WPezonos. 3, because Weak persons have not suffiment power to seize the hand of very strong persons, to stop (them and) demand (their rights), they are obliged to bear quietly whatsoever those do It is still to be mentioned that occasionally present relative participles are put in an uninterrupted series one after another, e. g. MCPEIRTIRIT &e ANDAXRSITTORBITIRSS 8Nz 0o ©By0, the suffix atiga is used (regarding) a man who seizes a pole (and) plays, (regarding) one who bears (or uses to bear) a lamp, (and) regarding one who carries on a betel-leaf trade j 3T TR B OT IRFD VAV LA TISE TOIF 0™ BRonIDE 03 080,53 ¥V, RO, P | 2993 o@eja"e&‘) waofio DN PR, SRBoTIT é’JaeéSfioSa FRo %o:fl eve maoéda"ew« 03 oo WRAREN B 3&%'55@65@ || that 8 (kmg s) son’s grand army wh1ch was piercing, causing to retreat, whoop- ing, behaving proudly, shouting, crying aloud coming near and : N attacking, striving, crowding, surrounding, closing with, standing, gain- ing the victory, coming forth, jumping up, advancing, beating excessively, getting entangled, struggling, rising (and) pushing in a good manner, attracted the attention 365. The forms and signification of the infinitive appear in § 187. 188 k Here follow some instances;— ervcee® 28 o, he came to eat clolod 7e Lpeto, he went to bring 453 wRToo FIDRYF PETOIE ? e 3 e DGR BC@3 38F, which world doest thou go to subdue? Tell, O Vidya- of dbharacéakravarti! NS ;fiew SR 0308 ws o, he came to speak. I RoSHBReF3S,Txv0, tell to make large the heap of gold! ;Ss'acées‘ 3% o, §0 he (is) clever to make SReBSF S=2.8F0, he (is) suitable to examine MRS’ WP 3y, it (is) good to eat. SReRS RaSo03vo, it (is) time to see. { I RPENSF B, 1t (1s) time to go. URIL (OF RS Q\,j*?) tell (him) to put on clothes. 3gZecs¢ (or 33 QCOG) ~§dnaz%~ac§§;$oo tell to bring I e — — 424 the force of well equipped horses MTB,[RV0 BRA R (0r IBSF unoy Be®x0c0, that is fit (or about) to 23e®), do not cause trouble. become RoBONTY BRFHRY, fi&w@;@%flm the boys cannot understand the meaning 0 T ooaafi wdefiJae) 3o, mean persons will not come to the (proper) way. oz YWOR BREAOF, 3eB), it is necessary for me to go to the town 2P 30 £9,3 IR BREAOF, ISR L8300, they ordered us to go home early 333 WROR, wovd s, I can read 39 68-~ Besy, you must deliver D) PN wT WRoGY, you may come in BB 2590, @ BT BIWBINFIY you must not utter such words 9530 %\Dfi wt 3% cf)o it is proper for them to come here. See § 315 (concerning the passive); § 316, 3 seq The locative-infinitive (satisaptami satyartha, see Sabdamanidarpana 188, remark under its s@itra 133) has been touched upon in §§ 187, 4 286 It is the infinitive with the final vowel o (see also the passive in § 315 wherein it is used, and § 352, 1, @) According to the grammarian Sabdamani- Késava it is used when there are two subjects (ubhayakartri darpana under sfitra 249), e. g. ma00To Joe KBS0 9028 Bo, when the singer sang, the king was pleased (lit. the singer a singing, the king was pleased) D9Z,TeR [IBTo AT, When the actor played, the musi- cian sounded (hlS) musical instrument. s:s SPRCS3 wFan %@é&o when the bard praised, the liberal man gave. w3 3690, when (he) came (the king) saw (him). SO VAT IReLToS "’ea @i SOZoRWIR, when the earth quaked, when the spectators’ eyes became tired (and) when the mind was afflicted «Some authors”’, Késava says, “do not hesitate to use o¢ instead (of ), but that is not proper”, and adduces the following instances as wrong (abaddha): — 5323 oNnTTE 23),3,00° 3RD,FD TISDANCRIVNGF ¢ ©niys, when (they) shampooed (hisy lotus-like feet king Stdrika was then comfortably seated. &)OUJFS %Qo 2F YRS Qflcfio;saei S03Bon%*, when (they) desired the purple sunshme of evenmg, the trees of the hermitage appeared (see § 120,°a, 2). Késava remarks that in the above instances ©8nRo (2&f4wREo) % would have been right (Suddha), for which he gives the following in- stances: — D[RR 0 WOBPRBo BRENSWBWODMo when spring came the cuckoo sang. 7799 VeRSRRT S FLOwo Y, when the wind blew, leaves dropped down i — JR— 425 According to that grammarian substitutes (AdéSas, as to use) for are g0, ARNo, YB0 (FBI+¥00), BT ¢, ¥R Mo, ¥SRBo and also es3% BE (VS +LBo+ ), €.J. TZT00 FTESE BN fiofi;%sfio FoNT° Qficéofify.gofi%o, when (his) pride hides itself (and) is crushed completely, Skanda beats him so that he becomes ashamed. 38 wAFIrio ROvY, Ao, when extremity comes, he bears (it) patiently. cgsSe23s DTV TS Be ) VBT oPS* %5%@\330 ufiF*og&é@eadéo, when (he) said “tell Vishnu to come (him) who appears (and) is coming (there) like the Anjanacala!l” RYRR HeLE,080%° 388y D dpenYdso, when the female companion said «remain near thy beloved one’’, and went away. boono TI)BISS* SR/ IN ;fg’a%ég, when the assembly dispersed, he began to consider. (See § 286.) NT JTF RS SRSF0 ‘5353030%@3%%%?@550, when he who is on high jumps down, jump upon (him) in order to beat (him)! WO BIF=° $0a0ABo, so that (his son) may receive a boon, he worships. merRodd SOBNBR® VBIRA YNRoDFo P 300, when from fear (he) rushes for- ward (and) enters the pools of the Ganges. faasré"%)a‘;’gsg @3;,5 %fiego, N when he comes to meet (him), he embraces (him). HZE DS BnFo, $0 that (the king) may give, he remains. 2B38REE BB SRy I8 i} WHFRNDF 1o, be together with the fire-place when in (thy) old age 16 grey hair grows. BITVTTIDTo ReRGSReEo, When the chief of the 16 Kuru race spoke. D938 $RSRRBo JeTF 39T, when the duck-weed 16 was destroyed, the wate? became clear (see § 286). WOBRER %J&'egjo, when (he) came, he gave (him something). of Késava remarks that @g's;rio, Vg0, v3no, BFo use to express the 8 present and future, wuzoo, wBHNBo the past, and according to this his 2 remark the sentences quoted above have been translated. a5 ¥ ) Concerning Késava’s rule as to the use of the infinitive with final o the observation may be made that Bhattakalainka, the author of the he Sabdanugasana, does not take notice of it, because he quotes (as it seems) the following sentences regarding the use of «¢f without raising any 0) I objection: — a0 To TIBSS ©TRo ;ggaz%:cso, when the singer sang, the he king was pleased. ©@r Bedos mpINF,0, When the beggar begged, the 88 liberal man gave. g‘,g:‘)c& SORTBSS %cgaefi opessery, When the sun rose, darkness went. 54 — 426 s In the modern dialect there is no particular rule regarding the use of e (=u), although it is also employed to express ¢when’, e. g. Fedo, when (he, she, etc.) asked (lit. an asking). agé’;)) %fa%e)o, when (he, she, etc.) assented. 8wo, when (he, she, etc.) said. FZoro oaze%;S Qje;‘)%g geo RERT WHRT Ty, when Dharma was ruling the kingdom, (his) subjects were happy. eR0 WL TIRY Bwerud es, when thou comest, I shall go. It is however more common to suffix en (the past participle of &) to wwy, e.g. Fedwen, a hearing having become, . e. when (he, she, etc.) heard; IRRoeh, ©$3 TN, In § 188 it has been shown that the so-called infinitives ending in In modern poetry the form », Wof, ¥ey originally are verbal nouns. with o occurs occasionally; see e. g. the verse from the Dasapadas quoted in § 366 under remark a. 366. About the conjugation of verbs, (nouns, pronouns and adjectives) in the present, future and past see §§ 189-204. Some instances are — SFI TOWR® oai’gi"’a‘, O] 0% WRIF Q. Do3ee :j AR, the king of spring comes; to-day (and) to-morrow (there) is no life R0y for him who is separated from (his wife and other dear ones). DR WIYRPBRY® FoeTE, soN%, there are also devouring large fishes in the ocean. gems?y@a)zzow& 23%3’4';)\5%, if thou art, the white umbrella 18 SIS BR3R BReCBadTt 293¢, are there (any) deities like you? @02l 2B BRSHeF[eo 390F0, Taraka frightened the three worlds. 2roR030 3R Bo8n¥o BoedARo, he caused the kine to eat grass on the banks of the Yamuné. fi:yég-aaéoésjcfid(fie)si d%flmo, he increased in force like fire that has obtained an oblation of ghee. (Tlevdnl=d m)ea% 3 Soud 32989 Sox° &P, this woman knew the whole state of the sons of Pandu. S o Be B0, HROREP IV, DIRTOPBLP I ¥TFF ¥EPTo, BTy | gaamafieasa‘ Zovdn-¥ et efifir§gdoafis‘ ©e°300f, soedmde? || I shall I know, Prithé will know, Krishna will know, the sun (or Indra) will know, I the very wise person Sahadéva will know; thou to whom (didst thou make known)? When will nobody know, king of Anga? e 427 ] 323;52:%0 DoWRS F30 PP JIJIN [pNPRo®W®o 23@71&%0 JZNe30 ENIIN @zs%fifiofio RD a‘s’oé@gj\ofioo s:@efacflai%o I A3NeNo RoR ?33,3\)0 ARRPRVIRIDo TRR ZomoPoSoRdR,e Fvfod 'aa%dojo% 3%;&’@@@6%5@5@@'@3% S039B3TFy¢ || She was saying “I will give thee a fully ripe fruit as a present, O female parrot, quickly I will give thee a bunch of flowers, O black bee, ever without stopping I will give thee a soft shining bud of the red lotus, O swan, and I will give thee fragrance, O cool wind, if to-day (you) search, bring and place my lover near me”. ;jooé‘éjég m&&m DRTo Bo8,30 oYt TxeZwAT, TR’ HFRO* | 22)&53%‘3335*? &SNS DIWT @%fi RANNTHT B0F 305 SBoo || In front the moun- tain Mandara appeared to the eyes of the deities in such hugeness that (they) said: ¢did it touch (or) did it not touch heaven? did it place down (or) did it not place down (its) foot on the top of Rasatala?” &3 cx So8=d* VD BER, LR3I, %5&6%560, fsvara’s mind became agitated, the army of the Kinnaras ran away. SR0AG3), S0eBBISRY 23@?735—';333&, a dazzlingly red colour spread about in the east. Yoz, :‘)%aéo, lustre came in. ) BRIRD0 5#7%03;)30 TR0 RReDRT VI BRTHONT 3pee | 20300 JpeE 3SRETD w:smm%o wofio;)\zjsg BRI, SORT 230 |} With haste he will make a crop like a farmer who does not remove the weeds (and) sows; the wife examines the young plants, sighs deeply (and) reviles the AL . way in which (he) has done it. ZHZ[oWIPTo SRMTS & oR3on %a& 3,N 395 oo, the king told the messenger the meaning contained in his —— own mind. FReNSBORV0 fiofiaaa;’a DeRo0 IR S0, the cuckoo cried nicely, the wind blew. eFerginvo 33 BooNToFo TLI,8 ABY FEIMIMo, darkness had quite swallowed sun and moon, thunder-bolts came down. & 3RNBRY &3 SReRRwEIe HoXOo, in this manner (he) will | remove whatsoever sickness. 0%, 0 wABY Do FRwPTo, Brabhmd 3 rules the whole world. 3BoFnes BP0 WESLI3R o8 OF 30933030 00T BTIVFDTNV0 | 54% e — 428 WARFOD0WRY TRDRYE 853?03\)03&3\%5& TR OIBeRFRRY || Ringworm will disappear in five days when (one) rubs (it) with dried cow-dung, rubs, in a merciless manner, the root of Senna and also Emblic myrobalan in the juice of a well-matured lemon, and applies (this medicament to 1it). Remarks. @) In § 195 the contingent future of the modern dialect (the Nudigattu calls it samSayarthakriydpada) has been introduced. Here follow some additional instances: — 330 o9 ma'%do, they may come to-morrow. WRZ, RBLENITTRY. DB zbc:%a’g, he who goes running may stumble (and) fall. =9 AOTIRY, ABIVACS, a tiger may withstand a lion. gecdio FoR0NY vkl A e3y, in the king’s house a dinner may be obtained. VR &1 Wi we R, he may be coming now. AT GBoFSS S BRePA 3033 SodhoR Aenaede? ‘e’%d OBF DBZ D [eLv) T3 030 SagAon 39nede? | ‘@_9_’5%923‘95%3033 %80 W33 TN, %Jaégst% Sosvese? ¥2),080FIF g TrOBRY vl ©3rod 3093 20e3e? || Dasapada 9 || When (one) teaches (her) the duty of truth continually, could it be pleasant to the mind of a female servant? When (one) tells (it) the real nature of the soul manifoldly, could it be known to the 8 mind of a donkey? When (one) has drawn a figure of pure gold, if (one) 7 kisses (it), could it speak? When (one) applies a mark of musk to the fi forehead, will it possibly not cause a nice appearance? b) The past tense, as remarked in § 194, is not unfrequently used for the present or future, e. 9. ©cdn;, TR KGR, alas, I die (or shall die). %@%ESO %@%a"sé &9, know I shall certainly give. Fo=o WR B, W0 2008 R8odod, I come, walk on! ©&R0wa3), o3 xedd, dinner will (soon) be ready; put the leaves (used as plates)! =3 WY S0ed3 3%, T30 BEPRRE wiP 3’%, he who knows (proper) words, brings a ) ruby; (but) he who does not know (proper) words, brings quarrel. (It may be mentioned here that sometimes the English ¢is’ is expressed by e300, it became or has become, e. g. BRHF, W03y, it is late. XSaodo el 3y, 1t is morning. FaCoTILTOND, it is evening. DY, T390, Ca] do what o’clock is it? &;&5 fi%o&sasfioéo, it is one o’clock. &9y =38 fi%ofia (to — 429 — ®agy, it is half past six o’clock. =3 3B sow fi%o&ao&)é\), it is a quarter past twelve. zowo TRD B3I, fi%omaoméo, it is a quarter to ten; but efiod%% CEESY DI FRZJ ©33, it is four minutes to five.) ¢) The present tense may be used for the future, e. g. WRBRSNR PN sPTP DT NPRBOTS, T _8_’ ) 3%%0, . | I go into the garden (and) bring (for 3o, I shall bring) thee, sister, a bunch of fresh flowers (see § 215, 5, b). The Kannada grammar Nudigattu says that in speaking (e390359,30) the form of the future does not occur (in modern Kannada), in its stead the present is used, e. g. for gacdyds TP woo=ITY people say TOITL o9% w3y3d,3. Also when in the modern dialect the meaning of ‘to use’ is expressed either by the simple future tense, as 29, B000 DT AYR JIPRITT, people say 239, LeTY DTV XY SRS, 3, or by the continuative future tense, as ¢33,@Lady RHBY AYR SRBG,TH, they say 39,3, ITN) ~e, S SR8 Toae,B (see § 313, 3). l £900 @équf)e:)o X, A few additional sentences are:—ga$ LLero3, ex, I shall go to- s morrow. Qeds WeFoR3 FRBo3 ¢, if (you) want water, I shall give (you 19 some). Y WIS ITF R, T8, I shall stay till you come. % THED To¥ WIT SYE Towy, DTAB Wk DV EE, if (1) come with thee 16 to-morrow, my study will be interrupted for four days. 367 0 The forms of the imperative appear in § 205 —208." ) The following instances may be given:— 3 Singular. U B0 BP0, let me do it! 2 RS 0, ui)\“é Rend! edd N sez! hum, O black bee! ery, O cuckoo! blow, O wind! 20, Bes*, hear, Hari! It f 1) 1t may be remarked that according to the Sabdanusisana the imperative with final 73, W) ete. includes asis, blessing, benediction; vidhi, ordering ; nimantrana, bidding ; Amantrana, calling ; adhyéshana, soliciting; samprasna, questioning about or considering what is to be {), done ; préshana, urging (an inferior); vijndpana, begging (a superior); djnapana, directing \j (to ifollow a rule); prarthana, praying. s e 430 Se0VRTER, Jwero! 20‘6;3238 SO ;30&&! %%Téfae ToRoBRoR! Jef gfi);fiobz@sefi! 2,5300332398 fiz;stcam! & ] wg&oazfiwaafiafioo PPT DoowR Jped 3 DeRY! o ¥ aaqsoiobfie(%mo 32203 Foy,niedegar SResidny*! || Look like a crow! Step slowly like a crane! Hide with the stratagem of a tortoise! Stand like a spinning top (?)! Be roaming like a bee! Swing the sword-weapon-bow (?) whilst resembling a shining flash of lightning! In the manner of a scoundrel learn all well (and) become a teacher in the world! Qeg® @3y or Qe of, be thou! B0y, Forg (0. 1. FoF) ! B, FHowe F00oN0 éofi_&@a%‘r“%ofio 23% | 2,0NoNo DROVD T ) SN wé%éod%fi?dfi&%&):fiofioo? I Remain, O daughter! Have the vain grammarian and the vain disputant and the rustic as their aim excellent poems which are (only) the aim of the mass of very ‘clever poets? LX) RB3RBEI03 3092, 03003303038 FTXDWRSRDwo | ) H@’Je)a_%? DRTTENS Fo u%@ag $RoBy R0ReRTo Fu3weo || When the pond took the waters that fell from the hands of the young women who said «take! take!” and all at once sprinkled, it became reddish-brown water on account of the filaments (of lotus flowers) that became loose and ey | — were scattered about. 3359, aQR v, brother, come here!. 3one, emaé&%t} =@, sister, go to dine! soride, RWDT B0, daughter, be o2 Joyfull Qesse, SRRy em%@:fio, God, save me! come thou who Wol, [TeFFINTIR! SReR, zé%@ed&)e%@ee)fie:%! walkest like a female swan! see thou who hast the fickle eye of a partridge! Qew® a3, be thou! g% e BIFOPYD W B0, listen (thou) to (my) respectful petition! DB, save (thou) me! Zoroes? Beeo B wecdy @v, even pray (thon), 8 pray (thou) again! ¥Z0 ToroR, may he give! wZ0 3¥F, let him (or may he) bring! BesSTo TpW®RoR wogdo, let the wise man worship the gods! ZoRSRe f o0 Sse@en, let him perform the religious observance in the & o 431 — evening! 2B0T0 BREWN o0 may the hungry man eat! AV DIATD) oo TWEITTIS® wORIN, let the teacher instruct the boy in the Sastras T Do T TFURZIT BN, 00H SRR wion, the son may read the let the ser- grammar, or he may read the véda W NRCPRoN vant work! ¥0Ra° vBo Sw@on, may the king do this! 52008y e ®on, let the people do thus! DNeZ0 NPT [oo Toron, may this man give us alms! SRR @ 36IDo DWF B, SedonPo, may the king cause the countries to thrive in that manner! SeBRRY® 2R TIWN JIRNT, X no, may soon the life that is usual in the véda, become thine! 50330 AR BX0 I3RS, may God have compassion on thee! B3R WSk WIS let him come in! (see § 316, 10. 14) BRI 30N RoDToo 99 o, may the Jina give us joy Plural BRWTHSF WY N SO0 Nae)asama%?’-‘ let us altogether attack Phalguna! es35° DV TR BNy ©3 sgedofiojgo let all of us now per- form a horse—sacrlfice‘ D3y 0, what shall we do? = BRY, 3R BRERPED let us now go to (our) house! 33 oz BoPRY, Fewd let us ask the permission of (our) father! D PBR, Fo¥Do0 By FY0, make ye ready the thOp of beasts (and) elephants! Rogon®os, ;fiosd@a‘ TR B3RN0 BR300, O guru, delightfully commumcate a story tous! 0% o9, gg'scs@ z%ggjom BRNC?d, O children, T praise " God continually! 8w, B9 WD, 0 brother come here! z3 D9, d FORy TR ‘&@?b O sir, sit down ;3.@@@ 20:3), see ye! \s NES® oawompe@ S0R¢ BYT, give ye us the desired object! =5 ) B8Bo [eLd) 5o, make you this! 93T 33933 ] may they (or let them) do (it)! 3::3 SSCESEVAN N DWIGTE, 10 may the wise put their trust in true knowledge! “335% ;Sarfioh‘fic“ %e9 0 BoRoR, may they give a female to our son! @330 w3o®, may they (or let them) write : S92 B0 S5O Zo. let them do this! 380 Bwenosdy, let them go! J 368. The forms of the conjugated negative are given in §§ 209. 210 o ¢f. § 316, 5.6.8.9 Regarding bhavavacanas combined with @e) see §§ 209 he 298. 299. 316, 2.13; ¢f. 254, remark 1 ——— (TN 432 Here follow some modern instances:— o533y &R 239830, they do not come now RBOX BT BE9F0IR am SRF=O? ¥ 3 %am)csma DERNE Y. BRI CA e0300R), [9D NN @030;5 SREBRY EEpNa how much shall I praise the virtuous conduct of Yudhlshthlra‘? He did not utter abusive words even against his enemies, he did not look at the wives of others with a wicked eye, etc. 2Ry TS wRFERY, I shall live no longer BRTRY TPToBTH T 030@)13 &onzs, even the king’s chariot does not go without oil. deddo =09 %Jaéj TR Tpwed S0 FREIY, though God gives a boon, the officiating puest does not give the boon BeON BPCNE TN DVBIDRY St R DY Spl fido acting without God’s knowledge is never possible for us. esas Qs\ouo 25903 BDRBRCD =Sangy, he cannot bear such a load TITORY RO BReNISH , Rama does not go abroad Q. BREZTN Zody BReNOe, though (his) be- Tox0 3R ©x39e, I have wilderment goes, (his) fear has not gone said nothing XXVII. On words corrupted from Samskrita. 369 The Kannada language consists 1, of words that are peculiar to the country (de51yas) or are pure which are represented by fat types in the Kannada (ac¢Cagannada Mangalore Dictionary), & 2, of words that have been borrowed from Samskrita without any alteration (samasamskritas, see § 70) 3, of words that have been more or less corrupted from Sarmskrita (apabhram3as or tadbhavas, see §§ 74. 79. 81. 82. 84 —89. 218. 219. 223 : 273. 370), regarding which it is to be remarked that they may also (in ¢ speaking or writing) be used in their original form 4, of some words (about 21) that exist in Kannada as well as in (« Sarmskrita (tatsamas, see § 71, and compounds with them, § 252, s) or are as it were Kannada and Samskrita (x s Of these four kinds of words the language was made up at the time % of the grammarian KéSava and his learned predecessors Afterwards during the reign of the Musulmans many Hindusthini i terms were introduced, and also Mahratti words became naturalised in Kannada | — 433 e 370. Samskrita words which only change their finals when natural- ised or used as declinable bases in Kannada, have been introduced in §§ 74 —179. 81. 82. 84—39 Samskrita words which undergo further, so to say more essential changes when adopted by Kannada people, 7.e. the real-apabhramsas or tadbhavas, are now to be considered It will be sufficient for learning the way of their formation from the following alphabetical list in which all the Tadbhavas especially mentioned by Késava as such (about 800) are included, the terms in parenthesis denoting the original Samskrita terms Final e of Samskrita words is represented by o t ©%T (¥FT); VAR (¥3A); VR (v¥nFv); wn (@og"r") sh (o0),); BOTOR (esofios), BOTIED (WoTE O Gony); ms (& z‘i or D)’ 0923 & (e®F 8); ¥% BA (9TTA); 8B 0 (BI0F); ¥k (&9%) 003 (VT); Ve (YOBF); 6 05023 ('&oev) VN (VRN); VARD (BD); WG (¥FF); VAT (VGT); W8, (¥8,8); 98¢ (IRINEY); VRN (VR T); VR0 (VTYN) DITE (8598); ORPA (OBWTR;); VBN (BBRER); BTIB (LHF); LORM (Cfiu v), BOIT S (29); ¥B0 (958); ¥s3 (e«mN) ©33 (©T; ¢f. BT 3); @35:3 (d‘isaasaf\%, of. ¥BWR); VA or &R6 (B=R); VA (V); VAR (W3ReT or B30eF); weT (vdew); VPR (¥9TF); — STOIAT (YT peis } 10 N £); YTR (UT3; ¢f. wnR); wnd (¥3T); YRR (¥Te3); YNl (YT he 3: ¢f. ¢ $3); @oNT (BoNTX); YBRIRA (STR ) 353 (‘d&,) (SPONEY (d R ; GOWA (SRWT,); €T (YTY); €T (¥nod); YT 2 (8 d;’;o), 333 ) (¥090); 3T (¥308); YRR, see BRA;— AonY (efio*rad) Bony (&oerd); KT (& it PoNNOT (aoom@u) flaz% ('a?N fi (f‘aou%), “856 ('&5 ); — éz:),-—emfiéfi em‘e’éd) emomejox emomc&( ofioou),emzs m(emzsaéwfi), J I} ot (vw o); evwyr (eocdagen); eméfl% (o2 302); ZOR (903,00 i CT); WG (WF); NI TE (3 ); wuRy3 or uRy3, (WFE,) SIVEWN) 10 (GJ\)M );— o)% (81)%) DBF (vTF) 2% (Bd); — IR (VBT); — 0 Y — = (09%,);— wfi (23); WA (20F); — VI3 (BRG); — ToRIF (TR 390); (vé‘r'c’)) FoTO (220%0); %?3 (v%), TwOT (IIV); ‘c?:i (To03F); me ;; WoF); Fotd (T00%); ot (Tooxy); TEIT (TBRCT); ‘Gej ()3 3 :(z %é«) IEN (v&gv), U& (%afi), Fed (PR); T T, (Te); v"%vOX TR Il ..J_) TS (%’ ?); TEH (IT); %9" (aam) 3 (%a‘%), 23,0 (%5 1 g-\') "" ) FelT) (%m 9); U@d (203; of. -o‘OC’)J <% (vfi‘), v§ (v?”‘r‘) 'J'fo 55 — 434 PR (FRgB); TR (TR); TRR (ToFH); T (TRPFT); T (T9y); muo@ (F3©); TDY (TRoF); T, (TVIF); Ty oOr wwa (283); FT @gu 390 (33@); ¥ORA (¥9:F); TI=y, Rau 2); TS (TD0); TRP (FWW); TOonF O Fowd (TlLowW); q&& (3L8); TJoo (¥ B0T); TH (TIN); TY (VW); TIER (TuI); TLIF (FoR); FoN (39%); ToT (T3); TOON Or TPOAR (&593F); TR (L9K); TR b (Tomo); ToOA or 3o~ (T939); T o8 (TXSB); B%° A.&ev 363 EA& Hees (Zeo)s qo% Qfimv FIOTID Qbomou&v m%@ ASSY NS u (TR TOFR); TIFDYy wao& NE TITUE (TRIEY 9); T AB&% FoT chuu@a of. JHCT); .qt,v%mw,v Amouo& K TRS (TRB); BRCIF (TW,T); Feed (B¢e9); Fe3e9 Adazn@v SR oW AwLomafv BRY, (TRER); TRRBO (Food); TRRAR (W) B (Bo2) BRZ,TAD (FORY,BNT); FRR, (R,); TRET (®T); TRENS (B¢ 30); TR or FRe % (TRed)); TR (TRckd); Fwero (FRd) BROH A%LXBV FRCT Amomgqv BRESD (TPNER); TREES mmomo 0);—ned (RB); o2 (To0); NAR (PF); 1B (PV); %8 avv 13 (35); nos (5)383); i, Auuf ngee (B®e0); ANRFT ?}cfia Jfiv 3 :ACU R,3); neen (s839); mowd Adqfi mo® (Nag); Nas (RBR); madR, see Fo0R; oS OF 7193 (M9,R0); M (M,05); MR (Meg); NORY (ANFY); NOR (AD3); Rugd (Mwrd); Ml (Jokd); noed R Azc&.duvv 18, (Reg,) AN Qpawev IR R (MSyR); ¥ Qé&v e (083); Ngw Aaéwu ?2& 32& mbm% (B30e8); RReRID (RReFR); RPesH or mbma Amoa,u 9); Nwes¥ (Reempv); RPERH (RReR v w(@ KCU br@?u (DRed); RRePA, 0. . PREPA (PReBF); P (TT3); — .fl.“ ?VUMM,W (FHea);— BT (¥3F); BHYO (3539); B8, A%&v BB0T (W21 T); B (@, v“ BON Am&fi B (D); a@uz (a8 R); wWom¥ 2 33); Q 239 Gv M WS Aam@&&mov %¥TO (300); @mm&q A.%w@v B33, Awm )5 8% o R BT, (VF); 83, (d3v,); ¥R (893); wmd (3308);—wNR (RPR); wi (wief); wnd (Bpnd, o.1. TPRR); =R (DWR); WoF (TPoT) wowd (TPoBpR); kB3 (Tptdd); B (w8); w3 (B0F)); w8 (W3); T, (B8,)5 =, (98); w§, (o%); wF (Bosow; ¢f. wRY); wBY, (TPD)); %30 Az av 253 (03030); wRed A%maozv of. Besee); wIRNT fiaouv%vu WIP M Ao%uocv BRT (CNTY or ToY); BN (0N); BIR (CFPIR); WA R 435 P — (0303); fiz,@m&o (0303ReR); wom* (FoR); mwm (028); b A%@mv 200 (G922); WS (Fg®); 2% (:98); %5@ or ¢ (wowd); 2 0. r. 238, (23¢eoF); TN, 0. T. 230N (B¥eT7); Wesn (Be3F); w0 or B3 (C33,; ¢f. 208,); W (Ban); Wartaso (G300 ); W@, (RWE,) ga Aatavv WY, 566 WRT; WRTY, 0. I'. 2L A&b&uv 23083 Q\wm gum@ A%aao@ WRT, (BRg03); Bwert (Swen); Been (c5een); %,@m&u (Gpoeesn?); B0ed (2Rge8); BREONR (BRgedR); B0es (BRER);— TPVESP (TP D); ¥ (Tpd); p$s, or perhaps dypess (Bpod);— B2 (@%,); Bo0n or ST (B05r38); Bo# (FoF);— 33 (3); 9B (3K); 3aR (3,3¢03) 9,0 (88)); B8 (39%); IxA (BBA; ¢f. 3RA); 3[%0.© (soxoR ©); BTomy (EBom); 3T (39,09) @at (39)7); Bror (BooF) DA (3% avu 3% ml@v 399 ?@3 395 B (7% ®) 3L (390); s T %, (363,); o7 (§7); 30 (F); 3 (363); 8203 (8,203) 391 @Oma. Amomm &v 5 8 (R3,9); 300 Au @mv 3RY AZQ@ @v A%&Udv“ %&m@u \mo&vu 3030 (S2530); %bfi@w or 3R¥E ( 8@& 3Re3 (RR,630); Iado (Be3); B (BR); BR (B,Q); BY, (BEF); B3y, or G (BSoF); BB (FRormoeod); 33 (@9,3); BRS (BIFR); 3R (B3); ooB (Bos,); T9C (@9,8); ©8 (Fad); T (Fawv); TS (meBR); ol (otd); oed Awfimvv Dex (BeT); DD (B eR) U?uw (Be <)s 3 (&) aon AU& TOnoe m&omr@cv AN AN «naow,@mn&uv 3083 (Box); TR (Q); BRB (BRI); TR (BRT); BRT (FRSB); BRRED or (BRRD); BRAT (FWRT); Bwe (FRY); B3 (83R); 33 (83) Beeo (Bu,ee0); B0eed (B0 eed); B (BWRER); DR (BR,ER); — (FoF, see B3y,);—&F (Fw); 8@ (RSFS); &Y, a%wv [N Auavov SO0 (TR0 ¢ Beod); LY (Ded); TeLeR Afl@&%v ey (ER); @ Avmwv @ © Q% ¥ (D3 ©) v@wu A@w =) v&oaAvfioav Na& v&v RTOR (RFR) RO (¥); W (3G, v QB @8&.@ afs @sovv vszu @&o mau (RWFR T) QWD (DWFY) FAPONEN A@Uoofiv (dS0F); Ava,.@.lv» DI Amu&@@v A Av%v QX 0T Aduomv Q0T A@mqv "R Au,? ) 53 a& o3 (Re3o3) ReO3 Aa@ow&ov ~IOYS Aa&uv IL%AW. (=3) oJ (R2); =NBeo (T,T0es); B¢ (T,TRQ); o At?er () or = mt& 3) WS (BoB); ko (2Z); U (28, ot @ (T8 o W 2@R (FB%?); 2ERL, (GRE,) & (5,3 of. RCP); tw&u (5 W 55 27 436 $ ); T3 (5]); B8, (BE); =&, wv, P [ o] Au JE o< OS0 o A~ %0 : 039¢€9 A Ouu@mov“ b Aaauov NM mom%% ROT R (043); W Mv Mo P €9 TRM); e o~ oon A fln pJ = ee &mwm@ aaflo«fl M O or W N ~ORR) 3 oY aoA ¥ (Fo); fl’wnLL ST m 3,89); ¥Io Or Wt P, ) . a@JGw or JIN® (393, DT Auo.u&mvw B (F8; ¢+ B); FINB (J)T3) F90); DoLA0H (TaRLeR); TGO Or FRO (Waklv); [k (Ted); HIW? Ao (Powas); DR or HOYR (TatTF); TR (Te3; ¢f. mR); a@umw (PoRe3); ©oARE (JoFaLI); momety (Hemed); WOV O [a¥ (PHIV); (8] 9 By, or bl (DF); MBR (Re3P); Wedwod (Rewow); Seay or &eoy e ( EYan) @ ); 2RI (DBT; ¢+ &RED); 20898, 0. r. BeeFR (2edF, 0. I. %mw%m . . ) fi A@vnd > ¥3, %, or perhaps [ILP (PHEF); LR (VYTF); NVT = =) b . (Rp3); BP (R4); BeFo® (POR); TpOA ([p09); 9] .q.m.m@ T..w,mmm@v %www A%mg%w ¢of. 2esR); %&w (5e8d); 2eR A%muvw 2e9, or perhaps oy g ) . 2P (B9, [ed?); 29N Abmg%vw P ( S el ] ) b Bpeen, see BRYR; TR (FPUR); T[BVOB (£, TI0); — wT& (F,); wi (I1F); . WO Sfi Au@%muvm Sw@q% or Swmq%@ Aum&vw 2% A&%vm 2o (Fo3) 3 . £); Auowm%v 3 woed Auw@vw Y (PF); wiEN or wiEN (3FFF); W nm\.w fioL 3Fs v 8); weg Or gjeg (ReY); WD (Seer); W@, ([EF); wBBeo (I <\ wu@ ) WO (SRF); wy, (wR); wMh (W8RT); wpT (Wurd; of. BRw WRIF (B, of. BRDY); OB (S9F); wST (FIT); wd (FI); wAD (RRY); WAS, (JRR,); WAS (HYNF); wd (IF); we (TW); wond (TORR); wWaRy (Fekl); wady (Ted); wad (TYT); 20 (TON); RY, (SORR,); WIA (FoR); W (J90); VF (YF); Wonl (Fen); Wo T Or Wonel (&)oned); 8%% AUNm_ousf &mwmw Awfiwmv, 8&% A%.dw,f S%a A&%&vw 8%@%&& Amumu.@.mflavw Do AUM&vm WE,T (J7,0); WA (VY); 5,9 PN — e S wan (gecd); wg (F); B (Jgef); © n AU%@@Y WY T or S Awwaauvw V1T (TF); WD (F95R)s WO3aFon Aa@,wuouvw.%apfi (F95v); DR (DF); WEM (DeF); WeD (DeR); W3 (PR3 ¢f. 0es); WeT (6T); We (Pea); WIB (WF); WA (FRSY); WA (FRW); &N Aw&a@m Fow Aflwofiuvw &wwmqmu&mmmw&w 233 Aao%v 233 A%@r BT (DT0NT); wwm%o&mo A}mw&mbvw 3en Amwmlvm 2303 A%m&%vw 233 (3,0); ¥ed Ammmmvw Bexn (3,925 ¢f. %&M.@va AN eple A&&&&@avw &mw.m A%&%&vw mwm,va& Am.w&auvm Rewon (FPowent); BRWHO (WWFT, WWRFT); BRD, (1,3 ween (gwen); AN dal PSS 437 — A&(@myv am@ 568 e ; &@QAPB );— 30 F.B O VoTH Au&ng aom ® 3 A&o& 2); aouo& A&%moav o,zmq A&o&&v uo&q Adcmav uo&o /uowv uoofimw or aoo%&w Aabo%&mr 083 Au&v SR Auoav aOB (R022) 209R (R0 %); soa% (oBFR); E, (=%); D08, 59 A.&ouvv uouo AoLo Q\u 2R, T (F0F, Y SORLY (e 9); So03089 (STR); So8oR (30 SF); FOR (Y F); SR ( (3,29%); S0A (d); SePR (308%); [ (F0m3); Zoody, see BnA; BRN (395 ; 03 (Iok); BT (Sedsy) SR (FIWE,); SIOVA Auu@é&% BPJR (S0RRy); D3 (IYyn); N8 (QB); DSy, or DL, A&o@uoc AW (VW) ; BT (Sww; ¢f. Sen); BRTIG (F908,); SoMF* ([wFow); IR Aaoo&%v B0RR (VYR LF); SRR (F00F); SRR ([N TF); TR [[oLeR], [08Ry (R0R); 230069, Or 53063, (B9€®, 0.T. 30e8); B[R ([oeR) 3930 (Rods); Sy or 200 (Soddy);? BRR - (Bww) LD (Swow) BRER (SoRT); [T (F030RT) ; — coartaRe (SBon,); — 8,3 (TeF R); UF, (83); INS (S¥) o308 (T3 ¢f U8, ); O, (T3,); 030, (053),); TRCSE or TR (SHICIT) 09030 (To); TRA (TR8); D (88a20); 0o (33069); D3 (33:80); DA (3WON) SRA (BRF); BRTY) Or TR (SRT); 8RS (BRERY);— VTVTIED (VT ,F9) VTN (9F,); 0T, (VT); L.m (0329 oz (oBod); omR (97) AR or oA T (TNT); Q&S (eP0R); oI (VFXT); OB Y, or perhaps ©=0.83 (o b); weRB Or SIZB AG@uo,&v SPWY) A@.@ &v LR (VotleedT); S (Sewy); Snew (SRey); —ToT (3T); S8 (B&F); Soe¥ (Svedl); IR, or perhaps also Seen (ST); TR (T90F) TORIN (T9RVT); ToRY (F3my9); TP (ToTay 9); wa T (D%,0); D3 (HF); 92, (32); 28 ()B); V05 (D0aR); DI @83 28 (I 001- WR); RO (DNO3); vaou (Do) ; JeeR @m&& Se” (3eR); Fywon (Fpee; ¢f. WeRR); Be? or BJwa? Au@iu.m@vulzozao (Ro3630); ATV m&floo& : TR (BF0R); RHTB (RoFyy3); ATy 3 (29F9); RS, (79F; - l@.m.vv ZJ (R Jm.vu RoT AMOMCV“ RoT0 A&o%av 0TS m&&otcv pxfokod) (Bo); 20% (30%); Ronl (Rozd); Rontd (Rogpad); Roflss (Ronad) A aov =& A%%v 28 fi&@v 28 A&MOV lm,@ fl)v?owv Da.0 ar 5% = ( 2); BB (9839); AN (R %) b Al%,.@ mob 2% Alo)@v ) 1 A):cv uflow Alfl@ ®); lofifl o H. lwm,vfiA 3 @vv RWOT A&movu W Al&flv X828 (RRBR,0); "B (35,0); A=Y (I30); Aoy (I2); A — 438 e (@0F); RO Awao&o,&vw <Je} Awavw X8 (30); [T (30B); RTRS Auawmv“ RORT (IRFD; ¢f. 7IRD); KGR Awa,@af o (3o99); "D Aufivm =3 A&uovw = Au%bmfivw ptian) Acfl;flmo and mw&movw =9 (33); =2 (RBy); =0 (RR); =3, (%e3,); o or mam (Fa83); %od (A 8); AIWR (F3R); mov Auwuvw RoR, (I9R,); AIT (ToT); AOTY (IYT0); WO (Ay0); W98 (Z90F); AORT (I90LT); AOVM (IVW); 8 (299); ROTE, (FITT,); AN (I R); TR (FOWR); TORS Au@mmf AOR3 (REF )5 Aorl (AoR); NorT (Fyorved); RN (Fon); At (&) ABYT (AFT); AT (80); AD (3Q); ADS (30); AR (3WT); AN (33); Ae3 (3¢E); 26T (28¢T); Aee® (3ew); AT (3¢TT); ACKT (eRFT); RNT? (RNFY); B (308); u%w a&@w u%w@ (BRF); R, (D,); @R (RREI); AR Auove.fi Rw (3g9); RTy (o=); R0R (600F); Rowf or R (309); WY (00; of FRY); BRTF (IRF,); AW (38W); 2053 (RA%); BeY (F00); A (J0dy); AT S (RS o {3 3); 80 (RRQD); RS (38); Reed (3eed); Re3 @%ufi Ko (B o) Rem (3ex); ReR (3eR); %&mw& A%&Mg&vw %&& Am&&vw ART or AR (Row); RN (308F); JRT (Rog); AWT, (Beer); RRE, (397); ARwRY (2a53); RRTk Aada@m@vw AR (RyR); Awerd (3peed); AwemdA (RTAR); A°D (8°0); — =N (& B,®); BN (1)) ; Towd (FowT); &m%w A&wmw%vw RROR (HoF); 233 (& e3ed); g (:e2); ©3, (R5,); o or =od (58]); Tows or oW mfl@@%vm BT, Aodmwvw T (F%); B A@flwvv T3 (T,89) 5 reeJefewh) (79,03); BISK (RVTSF); BVOR (BRF); ROB (FoT); DY Or R0 DO 0hR); BART, see ITF; BRT (F,R0); TG0 (Totdw, ¢f. BY); TN (FwT, ¢f. TIJYR); TR (93, ¢f. TOR); moaw (DR, of- mo.awvw moB%w @mm% L] DN ) 5 wou&@ (28,9); &3 (030); oRED (WBT, ¢+ HR 0); ot (s y s () SH & k) () B8 (R, o B BY, (BR); B3R (28T, BT); B (FRod); Beont (FedT); FHen or ammww% A%&u&mvw mw(@mm.a& A@&mo&vm BRIZN (YR, T, o+ P3,R); RRE, (edF); Rwedn, or perhaps BwecsR (AR, ed3, of. Jpeen). Regarding compounds with them see § 252, 4 seq. In the Sabdanusisana there are the following additional tadbhavas:— @%cwmfi A@%@m@w ¥n® (N3, q); @fiqu, (VT TFF); BWAN (VR fiao&m 8 (%23); QonROT (RorhwT); Qcfl& Ameum&vm g B (3 ); 439 ot (s dl); ooz (YWR); 0% (0F 28E2 BTF); DOBITA (VFIRI) T (TR); TR (TowW); T (TR ); 300° (3€T); TONF (BF); TR (300); A8 (PY); BAD (BF); B, (§7); WS (BRGF); wRA (B30BF3); =AY (TpTE); woR (TpoF); w, (ZeR) 23539 (zfioafio) WX (TPR); Wan (0IaN); T (0WIR); WIST (CVINT); WOST (WoR v); 3BV (FMw); 33 (A8); 33X (FBReR); BB (3 &8 (§9); (B3); moY (wod); dT® (ByR); dont (BoriF); B3 (53935) o= o) (R3FR); SRB (Soom); 33%@%?5 (%33 @5) LORS (SSOL), S0Ron (TO son) 2913 (9,390); ;mad (3,850°); TIPS (J90EF); WD, (IN); uo:’m (8302); T3 (38); WRBA (9,833); VOR (DUeR); =T (afiofi W M (B8 8); Soen (S9F); SWYT (I9T0); NOR (3,0F); SRR (F003); SRexT (SRERR); 00T (0303); BT (Bwd,); 28 (3391); ORw (aR); WD (R); 0w (0F,); OFYER (0 FY); BFF (zoFS ]); TR (VwaF); Ve (&’)eéfi%) 2o (Safio), Rowod (Rowod); RS, (NOZ%), ESIAN (:dd@) ROS (3,0030); RO (3, ;So) 7% (RBw); NOBT Red (Wew); N@'Zé (m5%); AonT (59)07736), AeS (8¢); ~oé3 (Ry); (38); Bowns (FPyary); Aeesd (3068); 587"1("’3-&-), B3 (a'o;)do.,o) %0 (&e) &eTT (e:30) Of these 91 tadbhavas twenty-eight [viz. &3¢, emrizé TS, TIONT, za*(od T8, N, oS, 33, 3¢TX [as $¢TA], BA z58 BRS3 [as BRY], Ebcé csm 53;5 zfizéa*a SRT, ToRI, 0303F, RwTS See BBy, w8, DEP3, Ry ,Jau f\)or{d NQQB) are in the Dictionary. also the Sabdanusasana s words with €9 in § 231 It must not be thought that the tadbhavas mentioned by Késava in the ahove list and the Sabdinusisana, are all which Kannada contains Késava himself knew more, e. g. 2e302R, RCIR, etc There are many others, as the Dictionary will show It may be said that most of the tadbhavas are used in conversation by all classes of Kannada people XXVIII, On the doubling of consonants. 371 As in Samskrita so also in Kannada a doubling of consonants takes place which properly does not belong to the department of grammar It is now found mostly in ancient inscriptions (S4sanas), more Or less also in anclent manuscripts — 440 — The grammarian KéSava teaches such doubling in the following instances in all of which it is optional :(— 1, in the dative plural where R is preceded by ¢, e. g. BeSIRF, 23 ;;:- (§ 119, a, dative), & eo:bfir (§ 132, a, dative; § 240, 5); 2, in the past participle formed by @0 preceded by o, e. g. Ve 7, Nu@QCSOF' VEF, WABIF (§ 159); 3, in the present-future relative participle, if 3 and are preceded by of or e3¢ e. g OB F, TVIF, BTRISF (§ 180, 1), ¥vBIF, NAIFE e, F, WD F (§ 183, 1), agF, 3T F, ¥TF, 3eexF (§ 183, 1. 2); and also, if that is not the case, e. g 3RTT, mfiw SIES , 303 (§ 183, 7. 8) 4, in compounds after a répha, e.g. QenFwy, ewSerd (§ 246, a) and also when there are no compounds, e. g. 3oz FEPREIRY, Ve FLROT (§ 246, a) His other rules regarding the doubling of consonants (§ 109, a, dative s for &; § 194 e o ete. for esTo etc. in the present tense § 198, 3 3 %30, for 3y in the past tense; § 203 2,0 for 3o in the present, future and past tenses; §205 & for & in the imperative; 215, 7, d the doubling of ¢, =, of, o35°, ¥ in declinable bases § 215 7, e that of ¢3s® in certain verbal themes § 215, 7, f that of &%, =°, of, o3, ¥ in the negative § 248, s where a following consonant is doubled after Zw; and § 273 eno, for ¥n93,, etc.) belong to the sphere of grammar Bhattakalanka in his grammar Sabdanusasana (sfitra 65 seq.) expatiates on the doubling of consonants, giving e.g. the following instances:— TOP BN eFBITNVO, aafi% Fm ATITE, em'm Fos 3 ! nodzjgrifimaosfioc‘ RRBF T2 30, TR FBOTTE 'afiwafr'éce 2002 FOVATTY, WoR FRIeSZ0n I FFIORITS 23 DARTS, WP CFSFABTS, Ztrd FooRRY*, zozérficwf: 0. 0°, aia@smre;?c‘ @;Sms-'aado WIS, "dé F),3900 RR3Z3, Fai o5, ¥, fijwma%‘zfl&@dv *z%uzflrefifific‘ Bed 3YLF BT, e 3,89 3eF, QfiQ)w FODE SR, zo% urfififi W , R, 0F Tone?, BXBe3059,F DROITE, SEOTES %@wr%cfl SRS oMb ée), B03IRTY, QAY, 0, WU A E QESN— 441 o g &3O 3 030T0, BRI Loo%baouem wa o, muo BT0; — WOAD 5, @ORT0, Ty 2, ¥RT, SFRo; ...86 30, &%c oS 8@ &0, mw@@ G I.sa muo, VLD 239RC &,@ oy @2% ROy w9, oo g e &aa 3, ® RIPD, NSF; — %mzu% eF s & N ?mlfl.@ Feeo, %%8@3& FQo AoeEnees & 8@%8 £03;— PPEITPR n& (0. r. 7 &a&c@u@ @vu aflu@w@ n¥o; — AWIF, %N 1 eF aoo%,@ 02BSF, N [ e 03T @a&,@ mé o, .810 7, WROBLF, KNSy @1\0 Ow oJ NI Q @WS R FonodRys, Gu@@ B398 F, asgr £3 o, fia@@ m@o%& Bouvnw & P9 A o u.wuaao qowa?b FR,5300 @aufiuw mozo 2. .du‘@uwn @wmn 5 s : wu&@l@,wwv ROONR Fof auzm% & & mwflmw QUL O3, AR FRo Q o2 D P , TROD FO® ..\\.JL.J 3nes l\ o, ?zuono a&a@uoo B oo ol @.@08 m\mw%o \/ u Fos, BHROZFONS, TR 0T FRSF, T, 0, F O qm@%uoflo gzomo,mv A 239R0C) RTD , BATIH 03— FPEITIONRF, REITN Fo° ?a&,@fiwu n 9&153 s au,@mano WPRRCT FE0 2P RPLT FTOF 9@%2&8 W RN 7 , BOHIS & SOTILY %&?@@% v,dab@fi wmwaug o, ) D ) N3259C9 To , RS2 CI o, 3w o e uo%w aoou *, 33 T .%fi ) > N D D 3 = T 01— DA WA mumv <3 duc P, TID B, o mnwo (@] N N N Q 3 % N o~ = PR3, TR, 0, BBIVY 0; — LORR OF TP, RPNLIY 01RL0NRo, TZFEYF N N ,0300%, FWNVPD 0.8 BISFR T — TIRVRF, TIBVNFF;— T F £9533° DARITY; WR YLFo — BeRw nm&v 30RR,FB, SPWFY FATE, WANWFR SR — BB F e 33 3. — 30e39,F R0 S59R F e — TIOBW,eFSE 08,7, B3eT Fédo, vfin M b) FRRFO lwm&@oao, &m%na; v/uon%w BT, BIW,FN: — FS8, B FIR, (oa) o3 €9 o7, W eNFHT; — W 3,5 [} 03¢, BN FR;— BFD FAT0, WiFD FATO;— w ) ) 205, 78 g Professor Max Miiller gives the following instances on the doubling of consonants in Samskrita in his ¢A Sanskrit Grammar for Beginners 56 — 442 e, p. 59:—-&5%8_;- (for e3F), @)aéégs (for WB), s%e:s (for IFFR), 33, F 3e (for cfiég;ée, it is shown). His general remarks are as follows:—“According to some gram- marians any consonants except r and h, followed by another consonant and preceded by a vowel, may be doubled; likewise any consonant preceded As no by r or h, these letters being themselves preceded by a vowel. practical object is obtained by this practice, it is best, with (the gramma- rian) Sakalya, to discontinue it throughout.” 372. An alphabetically arranged list of words (compounds and others) which are contained in various places of the Sabdanusasana, the numbers referring to the sfitras under which they are found. When a word is explained in the Sabdanusisana, the explanation in that grammar’s generally Samskrita form is adduced immediately after it in the MNst. ;:j If a mere number is added, it denotes that the meaning of the term is not given by Bhattdkalanka and is not known to the author of the present grammar. )\ ©%.9 ¢, Tadbhava of ¥¥p 8. 160.— ¥nRA2, A washerwoman. 190,— @o¥Fo m®. A warrior. See under 83380me.—weHIB. 80. (f. ¥onIH in Dictionary #— @?38’%3. 2350?%0308 zéodona@a’:%es?deao <. \Vorking in leather or skins; the making ready or decorating horses ete. 425.— ©23) ©3039. A man who is at the head of, or engaged in, ®23) ¢, 425,— 98 ¢on. = W) ¥20d). 425, — BowT. 80. (Tbh. of 6:90503')?),——-39'355333. B3e[0 e BTI0TB 0. Producing dissension or disunion of others. 407.— w8J0WA. A man who practices VI8 407.— Z{; VU IR 67. (Of. ©83% in Dictionary?).— ©339. A female who carries her mistress’ betel-nut pouch. 200.— v&a8, The lower part of a spear. 348. — ©VRTI9. BBIdtws A man who practices cooking. 545.— ¥®AT., A man who q1 eooks. 410.— ©ToIN. = BN, 410. — @833, The act of touching, ete. 561.— VT, 441.— 98 8. Dative of ¥3, 265.— ¥BT0°, Grief, page 101 in the of following verse: BRR0THR ALPBIBIOOT ©0S° B0 GO0 INoRO® woudo | FII HR0BT T2AY W0 I IrIVBR R #oi;fifi qw [BRPS || Thereis no pillage, 1 enmity, captivity, grief, weeping, and poverty, cheat (?), fraud, bribery, theft, P slander, hunger, famine, blame, destruction, weariness, trembling, sickness in 44 that distriet,— ©dJ07. Tbh. of @adR. 138.—wonox:. Not to be passed beyond; not to be disregarded. 441.—®30%, 80, —- @08, 375, In that manner, so, thus. 437. — ©@Ron, Thh, of oR3on, 151, — @R, A joint- it bed. 73.—©03one°, A king’s daughter. 248, —wddg . A flower-garden. fy e 443 B 783.— @303, A flower-bud. 95.— 9333, Tbh. of ¥RBF3. 147.— 293, Thh of OFBF, 147, — VIR . = OB 147. — ©3%3. Grinding, ete. 561. — @I AW Six cubits 355, — PVONRFN,S 402, — A male who has a flower-like eye wonreerol, A flowering amaranth or barleria 74, — PDORHREFON,, = VTSR ¢B & 79 e RTOD) , A woman who is hasty from necessity. 195.— ©38033). = OIF T30 195.— . 4738. 515 (It appears there as a verb together with 23) YT, 473.— 939, 67. —°RI, TIB VIS A vile man 296. — BFL ¢, Tbhh. of &0 & 140. —on@, 3wy, At that time 19. 20. (Cf. @@ in Dictionary). — @833, A male addicted to play. 423, — @¥%er®. Addietion B3 I CIPFS Either -or 20. — IR0 (\’050 An to play. 431.—&%%0 elephant-killer: a lion. — ¥8,. Leaving upon, ete. 557. —&dR, JPFoIHee Vehemently, ete. 20.— @038, =&odR, 20, — &ody Selecting. 556.— &3 ©PT, 33 TI.T PTITS Placed at the head of, ete being engaged in or occupied with; ete. 425. — ¥ F, (¥3oF). An able, great man, 88. 352 in the following verse : FRSF NI & :Soa:ooSao a-’eaa F9,F0 AT BYBY oméss 8Ro | FORIE z.ufiaflo 083 JoRr Buerd ol P oo 23 fiuaz‘ao | — 80P (i, e. TBYY). 3,¢BIR 2153;5c 545, -maa A male who is mclmed to play. Smkmg in a fluid, ete. 140.— @00R. 80. (A sweet cake?). —98¥. In a crowd: greatly. Ina verse under 65, and in one under 193. — 93 8. Datwe of a8. 265. — as . '&3 o. Thus, in this manner. 437.— a38. A smxle 95, —A/INI (0. r. A3 ESE@) A sweet mango 55, — QFIFNRR Y In the sentence @VTIFI,0N3 B0 JB,03039° QFoFe? Aweo. 221.— 9B¥F38. Two pairs. 93. 94. — BWFSR Two choultries. 93.— 3 reony Two ends of a garment 93. — A®IFA. 90. 101 (Two armies ?, see a cat DoR). — B3eFI. Two points 92, — QOMID. LaPIT A rat-killer 547.— &3. Giving (3ID) 579. — &3d Bringing forth young (S:39)30) 579, — QUTFY, 30 & A rising river (WFIID 3w 333.— wwzdNn. Tbh. of QUWRR.LA. See WV WIN. — &V €9 pd Eating. 557.— v ©R. In the sentence & Forloea ORcdaey 214, — 202 8. Pulling up by the roots, destroying; a disease of the external ear See W . — I How? in what manner? W FZo ?) 437, — T 8. = q0Fd. 487. — 3.1 . 437, — V3.2, 308& 0, Silently, quietly. 437.— @v3338. The state of being high. 431.— ®IJAR. A man who abstains from food. 407. — VW &. Thh. of w3 &. 160 NBTRY Tbh of NW3I=°. 133. — VR e So mueh as this in an intermediate manner 441, — eVen. Foor. A suffix to denote a maker of 410, — VTS 140. — uerFey 140, — o> 140, — e, 140. — ol A great eater 415, — 0¥ NIV ESN] 3808, = ow8n. 415, — w8533, Feminine of YW&IBA. 196, — vwR 441. — «w¥. Crying out, ete. 558, — ~TF0A Tbh. of 9F0s3. 875.— R. A 1 stupid ete female 197. — 2833%0. To cause to reckon, ete. H41l.— 2B JIA Eight gavudas 351, — 8. 33.80¢ D0. Eight times. 351 — 30 &, FFo How? in what manner? 439, — 23.= 3380 489, — J0BI3PE A second female. Plural 23&88c309 0f 185 . — 02363, F9030023923¢ A wind-eater: a snake 56% P — 444 e 546, — obdw%@- Two times. 313.——m>5&“°g°%’6- Two knives or swords. 359, — D30F. A female buffalo. 444. — 20 or DVNVe. A particle used in smarana, vig¢ira and Amantrapa. 21.— 23¥ 8. The fragrance of flower-leaves. 73.— wR€3Z. A mat of (or for) petals. 73.— ~"®3e. A place of petals. 73.— 28¥,¢. A ring of petals, 72.— 2¥M®. A young calf. 87.— 2¥E2:0). A berd of young kine. 87.— 6. (¥TF, 0¥F). The gigantic swallow-wort. 140. 160.— 6. 140.—~®. 140. (Standing up?).— ~0,088. An upward look, a bigh view. 332.— »T093. A heap, a crowd. See »F03A. — HX3BA. Thh. of »T23d. The eleventh day. 160.— 9093 I3. Seven gavudas. 356.— 00303 "X ®% 3 A male who has seven hands. 356.— e, =T F023°. Seven times. 356.— w108, Bursting forth, ete. Plural %nodnee. 560, — w8S¢w?. Rising, etc. of the body. 335.—%®3. 67.— %03, Pulling or rubbing. 561.— e TSF. A female sheath-maker. 201, — WFF03°. One hand. 90. 101,— WTRFS’. One stick; one arrow. 101.-— %R¢F®°. One span; one sword. 73.— wdreomd. One end of a garment. 94.— wgRFAT. One thousand. 94.— w3FS, One head. 358.— %9 Trembling. See under ¥RZOOS. —u¥ FB3X. Ina verse on page 78 beginning ©0®.— %% 3n¢d. An inner garden. 101, — %% *@N¥. A quarrel of the inland country. 73.—%%. 566. (A verb from which %93 is derived). — %93. 566.— 2¥¢3. A good pearl. T1.— “¥AIBR. 71, — 0] %930. A fine string of pearls. 333.— 2¥0n8 3. Good Kannada. 55.— %% QY 02%. A male who has been born in a good village. 420.— %¥2,07. A male who belongs to, or has been born in, a good village. 419.'— &Boomn$. A fight in which one runs. 344.— %&®>%9. A person addicted to reading. 140.— . Loving. 573.— &onsadr. A female servant, in the sentence ¥OSoNs® BSF Lo R HONTF 3T ooen)flos éo?g)dcfi. 84, — L3399°%. The basiness of a 6]ékéra. | 431, — ToROME . = FoRMER in Dictionary. 431.— FoROIRN. EBO‘N’QSEBUS. A 3 R0 REIFO3V8 | 33° :5&5%"66. A male brazier. 416.—FEF. T 92 @Yo (s who makes a decision that is not to be disregarded. 441.—F&E 0. A strong § bone. 339.— TRF. A strong, or rough, man. 403.—F@BM&R. Great grace- fulness. 340. — FRo@BRBR. A great wonder. 93.— F&ooam. Excessive love, 8 ete. 296.— T T0&. A male who is blind of the eyes. 301.-— 0,03 Tbh. of § T 160. See however 3,038 — Fe§ 2. To be angry with, in the sentence v onc3es @%mw, D4k a*%ofmdd. Tbh. of ¥®,Fw3. 378, — TR 0. = %‘%ofiozfid. 8B s #%osowad. = #%ofiudd. S8 = %‘sg@iu@acae:). BT BB ¢FUTFo. I An eye-ball. 346.— F@ S0 ¢ (T I efr). 55— FB S . A water-lily-like eye. 95.— émwfl. The pupil of the eye. 89.-— ¥»,3. A male who has eyes. Bl 403. — FOIFY. A man who has ears of corn, etc. 73, — Fe203. 80.— T3R8 A man born in the Kannada country. 420. 421, — F382. A Kannada woman. 190. —Fw9n. A poet. 410.— ¥ T3 OWF. A fragrance-sucker. 308. ; 546.-—55@53- The wife of a blacksmith, ete. 199.._._3‘-‘;)%71. FIFFSF. A male who does any act or work. 412. —¥0®&3. A man born in the country of ¥ 44 A Karahida. 420.— #33@3. A woman born in Karahida. 196.— FS&an. A man who resides in, or has been born in, Karahdda. 419.—F0F. 5553%5559‘%? T0To 33,0 #330%53506 ©8w® &. Black colour, (as that of) cloth, blankets, etc.; one who has a black colour, one who is black. 402. 403.— TOFII. A man who has a black colour. 402. — F03%. A female who is black. 194, — T30, T B2 ¢ a’o;:eardusammeafimodo;gasm&msarsfie 0Re dReWBIPFo &%%afio)égéaf@é Sowe | fiq)aaa@amara’e‘é’e fioefl&s@p&égqflmém S928¢ 3. The word F39 denotes a likeness (or form) made of bee’s wax ete. (surrounded with clay) in order to pour out (the metal) in a fluid state (into the form), when one makes statues of gold, silver and other metals (¢. e. & mould); or at the construction of a house, ete. it denotes the first (or principal) post erected at an auspicious time. 296. See Mo #do.._@fimgs. 344. (Coulditbe FRFY ? CF. zscsfiregd under BINFR, ?), — FIIFE, A black pool. 334.—TFwx® 330, in the sentence B FuB&; (perhaps = a TOTIR, a quarrelsome female). — FOW. TSwY® YK WRo, BeF2s. Who has been born from the feet, a Stdra. 420.—FO3FS. A mutual fighting with stones. 331.— ¥o303), A superintendent of (precious) stones. 425.— FOI .= Fo3cdy. 425.—Foe® A plantain hard as a stone. 70.— Q0. Stone-rain. 93.— TSR 569. (A verbal theme from which TI&F comes). — FI*8 S. A forked hora of a bow. 83. — TIRIMIT® gr TIWIOMWEH’, / To see a wilderness. 380.,— 2030 @. A person addicted to take pods. 414.— 303 . Fruit having developed. Plural s2c3)0n®%.. 553, — Fo0RT?. mMI;=os, A village. 419.— To080n. A man who resides in, or is born in, a village. 419.—3v 8. A male lame in one leg or in the legs. 301.—T38e’. A tank with a channel. 305.— 0,3, A man who has feet. 403.— T23,cA. A fleet person. 223, — ®*R 3. A black belly (7). 91.— 3@ nies. ©ASvedse. A male who has eyes like fire. 311.— 33 @306 A small pile. 53.— ¥2¢¢. %e@ed. A small orange. 337.— 338, Low condition, ete. 368.— 33, Making close, ete. 557.— T®oRwed’. A small stick or arrow. 87.— ¥3. Tbh. of %F. 158.— 37:T9c. Red new leaves. 343. — 3030 or TY¥IYR. A certain imitative sound. 140.— 300 Uprooting, etc., that may stand for o 478, — 300 or $90S. A certain imitative f sound. 140.— 3w’ 368.— 3R ¥. The abdomen. 90. 368.— T3P IR An inexaet solligé. 93.— F0%,. Tbh. of 9. 110.— FoBRReSR 3. To cut 0 with the sickle. 300.— 303. Boiling. Plural $o0%0ne?, 562, — oI 3. A potter-female. 199.— S0P erd. =ToF)e3. 198.— TIDYT, TOTTSF. A potter. (6 412, — M. A potter. 384.— ToeRady. A male who has a small hand or S small hands. 97.— 30303, A small house. 369.—30&. 3 e)zgsofi:sa & QU3 BIFwo 23¢83. A mind deprived of strength by fear or shame. 441.— F3F. A man whose mind is deprived of strength by fear or shame. 441.— FoARRTY A woman with a short neck. 328.—39. A suffix used in 3¢o, 8,593 and 3,78 545. — F@s,. Bending. 557.— T203. Sharpness. See under RSdTomse. — Fp ;A O, A sharp warrior. 90. — FRn1Fe. A sharp knife or sword. 845.— FRnFd | % % e 446 P — =TFRFFO. 90, — TR E A structure where boiled rice is to be had (?). 90.— 111, — Fonaods® 342. — goned, A female with red eyes A red unripe fruit T3 T A red kind of rice 343. — @3, A reddish elephant 343. —TWO A red flame 343. — 89 ¢3. A red cadjan leaf, ete. 341.-— Fomox. A purple twilight 343, — FTR2RS. A dishevelled head of hair 83. — BRIFS. = TRZHTS 83. — TR ono. TFWBwedo. The red eocoanut tree (= ¥I0MY); (or a red plantain) 341. 342. — 5% 223 3. 343, — T00.=FWO. 343, — T3 A deaffemale 197 __-%‘:)o 3. A red seed, in a verse under 193 see it under =3 &.— B3R, I R)aao.n: 02380 Burnished gold. 341 Cf. B39 in Dictionary. — T, 0230, A red lightning, in the instance RIVAS T 0830 218, — TRV VNS A female weapon-maker, a woman of the weapon-makers. 192, — Tob@.e@. A handy earthen pan. 305.— FO30F. A few times. 441, — ¥$03383. Companion- ship, ete. 432.— ¥o. 140, — T 140.— Fenoodeeal. A erying peacock 344.— @I, Tbh of T8 155, — TS 67. — FHRoTHBAS A Concan Brahmana female 190, — FROTITIH crooked staff. 379, — TroTom) B = BROTOTIB, 379, — FROTIIJF A bent eyebrow. 372, — FRBORR, To cut with an axe 300, — THRTw &3 A stain on the throat. 305. — 3w &, o SO, 3 03FTA0E WD 3 Jumping and other surprising art 441, — TR P 140.— BR RO’ 380TT,3% ¢&F, Water from the end of a tank. 82. — TRtIITRD FRED0 FRED0 FP3,RY &8 A3NF BRYT BT A fight in which they mutually strike one another with sticks 331. — FRPR, 3. Bonn,o The top of a mountain. 82.— 3,¢83. Playing, sporting. See @) 9, — T 3,008, A woman of the Kshatriyas 190.— 299, 140. =0T, 67, — NS, Tbh, of P 143.— 183, ne3dzR o Tbh. of 133, 408.— AR, A man versed in arithmetie 408.— N 33 Valiantness See under R®IJBomew, — 18, Tbh of .37 e P i e e T - i Tnl¥, B o 160. —n@3. A false woman. 329. Cf. 8% in Dictionary. — %2 N3. A female seller of perfumes 192.— 1. See under NO38N. — n8333. The state of a decent woman 430, — 11938, See under NIJVN. — NTIWR. 118 BE ORI NPT aofioa? g A man who is engaged in (the business of) a certain water- engine. ©®F NI B Bomdra® I BBt I B¢ Jodor WdTd F0InBA¢ dsf D3N 88,2030% ¢, Or one who is engaged in the guarding which is made in a fort ete. = 2 £2 O £ o by wandering about from watch to watch, ete. 441, — RI0FAL. Fo23¢003 €. The i plant Bignonia suaveolens 716; DR A cow. See BF3MJe, 3 NDe. — BRI A man who bruises bamboo rods, ete. 548 B R e Boiled rice of the stick f B (¢. e. boiled rice which has been turned with a stick ?). 89.-— 1¢*Re®d (0. r. Me® of MR 6D 9) 78, — TEPIBN. TeB B[S VODTIE, 3 0NFFOL VR, LTFOMo 3n¢ eTeRede th 3. A Domba 441, — k3w, A charming man, in the instance to M& TIE0 al 80. — ma3n&. The wife of an oil-maker 190. — ARN&. To cut a tree 4 380. — NBMAA®. The unripe fruit of a tree. 380. — NBoR&. = NBINR. 380.— 203 As R ) FAL-plAf With a whirl ete 20. — RIBF30 fiui:eDESDO ;)) $;5°N & o S 296. See FTY. — ROBIF The most excellent of properties Cuffing. Plural E R 447 FESSEES NEOFRes. 552, — M9, TM@o, A seizer or taker. 414.— MO*Fe, 140. — nwe®dS, Tbh., of TR FIMT. 378,_710)%56. (flafiéeafi, fiag‘ée, fiéfisf). Seizing, taking, accepting; using, putting on; ete. 414. — R me, A gainer or winner. 383.-—Reomd0R. A knife (of the length) of a span. 55.—Red . The length 95. — RROR, of a span. 140. —tweds?. A tubular vessel of the throat. 346. (Qf. Rwewe®, R0e30m99 in Dietionary). — fwm 9, = ReeTP. 346, — BRGOB, Thh. of RRROZE. 129.—1n?&. A female servant. 240. (See & in Dictionary). — 9. Tbh. of M™&. 140.— $208. (=mMOR or 20K in Dictionary ?). See 9oTIR. — WIS A frightened cow. See fidfi?&.fifi&&. %9)9%3"0050 sw@fi%g;{s#drmfi)ém RTSWR0. A term for the perfuming (of the body) which is performed with an unguent of sandal, saffron and other fragrant substances. 441, —B8TF, 233373, A man who performs that perfuming. 441. (Cf. B8 in Dietionary). — @3 3%. Tbh. of @§ So=’. 133.—BZ°. 140. —. B398, A golden seat. 55.— @¥IBF. Cutting off with the nails, ete. 570, — 2830m9 0336, = Formd adde. 342.———?32335- %30,6F0. Manifestly, clearly. 20.—%0 mwo¥, = Towor. 343.-— B33 Beauty. 430.—2B8¢. 105. —WP&. 105. (A crested female? or cf. ¥J@ in Dictionary ?). — 23, Thh. of ¥3FF. 376.— @P303. Tbh. of 'aé:%m:doso. 376. — @B38. Tbh. of 2332373, 160, — B3I, A man who makes gaupadas. 410 FRIRDYN. = WIAN. 410, — ®PPaN. Sharing in, or entitled to, a fourth part. 376.—@*8. Four-fold; of four kinds, in four ways. 376.— g0, Deceit (?). See under VITOS®. — WY Tbh. of NPT, 143.— wni¥®am. A male who is clever in quarrels. 292.— ®R¥ST. A quarrelsome male. 402. — xoR. Tbh. of 0% 143. — wINTST. A man who has a sacrificial cord. 402.— 3. Tbh. of 33, 143, — BRI, A man who has fame. 402. — =¥%. Thh. of BV. 140.—=3933,. In a verse on page 77. Cf. @338, in Dictionary. — 23%. Tbh. of 035&0F, 141. — @R, 140, — BRWIMEF. A female gambler. 201. — ®2R1. A male gambler. 384. — mAWWM. A man who is expert in gambling. 305.—®ef. 140. — ¥eend, A female yogi. 202. 23w eeoons. 140,,__&'36053. Tbh. of ze;afioSmG. 184140 WR0NR. = W0, 134, —TPTU. = wnd. 143, 402, (Is SPFY in Samskrita Dictionaries ?). — 339, A spring, a jump; springing, jumping. — BN An imitative sound, in the instance TNVTLI WRWF. 20, — BHIEB. A mutual fight with tlubs. 331.— ®%. In the instance SATOS md®. 531. See 3@ i % 8, — ®¥F. In the instance &t @¥Fo. 80. Cf. F¥Fo?r —BaTR. A kind 3 of adverb. 49. — @Jafifi- b Cg@fiéfi- 49. — B3¥T. The bearer of a banner (?), in the instance S0RBT® E¥TCE. 65, — ST ™. Cutting, paring, planing; a cutter an abrader ; the divisor employed in certain computations. 538.—3&) 7. = 3&) 3. 441. — 38 WB. FHTYW FEFe. Bluntness or perplexity of speech. 20, — 33 . Tbh. of #e8©. 149.—330. Thh. of 38 . 147.—390. =330 147.— 3&Y0. =33 0. 147, —— S300°. 140, — 3FoFS0. Bringing. Plural S5oF3oi¢f. 572, — ) 3d93GF. Joining head to head. 570, — 3¥%. 8)98?@053@23& Decisively, certainly. ——— 448 — 20.-—893. Sprinkling, ete. Plural 8930n®* 562, — 3YRFIN The redness of young leaves it gy 140. — 3R, Becoming dry, ete 565, — 39e3T The tree Terminalia bellerica 82. — ZTFBA 90, in the verse 3¢FF 03 3W3® ¥ZBLe P’ TRTrONYS® 8 ATURBRST DT ITo | SITFB BTCFT IR IRTFFRNRRTO Sy PIVT0 OPWUT0 ||. —39R. Suffering, ete 565, — 336 r S3) The palm Plural 33t 9 or S0IN®° 140. 193. (See the verse (and other plants or trees) quoted under SI»6 &)..— 321N A woman engaged in (gaining her livelihood by = ZaeN. 193, — 3n. = 8¢ the produce of) the palmyra tree 193. — sd0N 378.— amye. Thh. of &30, 376.— 38 AR. 383. 49, See 283 in Dictionary.— 8383. Tbh. of 33. 376. — &3%n. Tbh. of 30, 376.— &00%F. Barterin ete. 557. — 8 R, 08 Jowegre. Whirlingly, ete. 20.— 833038F, Tbh. of TR F. 296, — 3930 ‘What is thin or delicate See 3930WRIB). — S8PIIWAIND 39,3, Boes 5.— 893, Becoming clear, etc. Plural 893on#¢, 562, — 93¢0 Bright lustre See the third verse on page 100.— ¢.=2n. Tbh. of &F 378. — 308 A wicked, ete. female. 197. — 2839 (7). See B980T, — S900T) Tbh. of 3082 160. — 3@y, A jungle for kine (to graze). &7.— 3RMORI & An oscillating staff. 344.— 333 Taking. 561 me 140, —33:03° A mass of gold. 332. — 3woF 80. (Cf. 3 in Dictionary ?). — ¢,80° Tender 2 green grass. 66.-—S€.970, Delicate lustre. In a verse on page 100. — S¥y5) 2O A thin or delicate belly 55. 347, — 3eo 3ex3¢R0 w3 FFF 982, In an unfirm ete. manner YN 3w 197 (It is a term for a certain female). — 38¢TR Thh. of 3,030¢%3 302, — 160.—3S¢30FS, A tree (used) for a chariot 2’ 3e=9 Plural snire or SNt 85. — 38R, /Proy Excessively, ( ete. 20. — SR U, Smearing, ete. 561. — 3#8I3. Swinging, ete. 561. — 29I T d STJYT0JIS A 3we 361, — 383 RishioR) Nine times Nine persons fa 361. — 3003 Becoming wet, ete. Plural $%03)ontes 553, — SR¥D Shining, Vi ete SRFDONPE 191. — 562. — 326 140, — 32¢83n2, A female florist E0t0%, A big male. 403.— 3n¢e3dF®™, A place of appearing. 87. — SR’ g 140. — 3R¢eE 140. — &%, Having three pits (?). 376. — &id¢t. Three cows See Sop9), — 8T, Three faced ; name of an Arhat. — 3,08. Making haste 534. _.sms Thh. of 33, 194 cSeJo 833, Page 65 in the instance I90° z:éjo S0R b} Cf. 53@35@ in Dictionary. ——-5@33 &% 140, — B30, To satisfy, fi i verse under 474, —5598 33. Having a stlck etc. 402, — 3353, Thh. of il 3,339 8. B39,0 FITFISe WoFTr0y 93,3 A mint 378, — B 14Q = TR0 A man who sells corn 160. — B, 140, — W [ 405. — B3, Tbh. of B3 9 880, A very liberal man. 65.— 20 DM B8 PoPISTFIFITDTIRIYUWF 0 di The (savage) bodily power of a man who is without fear and deliberation. 441.— b Qeay ¥, W, A man who is possessed of that (7. e. ®), a wild or savage man. W 441 .__@\a\?fi Tbh. of DwIIPF, 378, — Qe 3° (Do), Playing, sporting. of See ™Y, — BT, Thh. of & 0BT 377, — 5333033- Tbh. of &303> 377. — Ro&eodd Thbh. of & 8¢0d> 37 7. 22 BORT L Thh. of DB BT H; -~ R Tbh. of Wb ) R 449 —_— Qsa-’. BEQ e BEHT. =80 BT, - Bndodne=rmoded), (ST T. = 2adrd). = 36030, 377, — BRVVT. = HINF. 377, — BeSRNY. A female who worships an idol. 111, — Zedn. ReIBo INFoTo. A man who makes idols. 410, — B9, =GN, 410+~ B9, A woman who makes idols. 1992, — ®e3¢23°. Saeri- ficing to the gods. — @¢Sex. Tbh. of WS, 129, — ®WIFI; A man in whom faults are. 402. — 3,39, See under BIRB. A certain coin, a drachma, — 803395, Two night watches. — @,0M. A doorkeeper. 418. —@3oro®. A person who is addicted to receive money, etc. 383. — FIIS. A rickh woman. 402, — B83F3. Thh. o of 8. 123.— B3F. Holding, bearin a7 supporting ; a bearer, supporter, pre- server, — ®%. 466, in a verse. (Qf. @ in Dictionary?). — S35ve. GRS TR,B0 WELTW,¢ T, A man who is proficient in laughter (or jest) or addicted to it. 423, — 38587, A female who is proficient in laughter (or jest) or addicted to it. 201.— 32%. Being extinguished, ete. Plural 33 #ne°. 568, — 8200008 To bow, etc. 534.— S0n&y. A mauscle bundle (?). 332. —32F. A man who has 3R, q. v, 441. — IR0F0YR. Slight anger. 101, — IRD0®. Small power, ete. g1, 58, 35 93 Fohaw SERAR ':'r’e)%;so;m"esa =9 2ewro Mo, A body beecome 441, — 0%, decrepit by old age, sickness or artificially made poison. &3¢ A plant, a herb. 424, — 5300, S3050¢I®, A man who uses herbs, ete 424, — 300N, A woman who uses herbs, ete. 193.— I980N&. = TadoA, 193.— 93 I3, Four ghvudas. 351.— 808y, A male with four hands. 53.——33%93033. A male with four heads. 97.—3@@3‘0%- A male with four arms. 294, — IV, TaT DT, I, IITFs, 441, — S0, 140. D A navigator. (Cf. 3¢o® in Dictionary ?). — 698>, A district to be ruined. 03,8300, the district was ruined. 82.— R 3. A district-weight, ete. 90. — 83 8. Not false, firm, in the sentence StBT® IR0, k&3 to IVITWHN® or SN B¢, 461, —+ b0, 2R o, A long extent(?). 339.— dRINF S, A long or large head. 345. — awonim®» O, The pupil of a long eye. 53. — awoned. A female with long eyes. 29. 194, — d@MO°, A long foot. 327. — dB9NII°. A long row. 93. — pB)mB0%, A female with long braided tresses. 328.— o363, A man with a long body. 53. — B33, 80, — dBoFHHS, A man with a long forehead. 328, — 2833, A man with a long back. 329, — a®309, A female with long fingers. 29. 194, — B0Be&®. A long pregnancy. 87.— d037. A man who 401. 407, — RT3, Tbh. of ¥3RT, 1 practises or observes religious observances. 160, — acrires, BOAMFZOIW,Bo, The opening through which water goes out. 90, — JWRFY, 00 3wP, To wash with water. 292.— &emmifi, Buttermilk diluted with water. 92, 2e30F@wa%. The place of a water-pool. 87. — eIF 81, [0° 93 wwo IXYPRItws | VDO I JTL Ty Roa, w8 0mdews. A man who is in the habit of practising with water: one whose habit is to eross rivers ete. on rafts or also otherwise. 441.— 0% Eo3. A man with soft thighs. 328. — SoBn @ad¥°. A woman with soft thighs. 182, — BoRowy B3R, 72, — f 20R099,no°, A door (which is so narrow that) one has to squeeze through. 72, — 57 450 e I3 140. - 303023, Bearing in mind, ete. 561.— 3367, A neighbouring man, ete. 332. — SUM&. To seize land, ete. 381. — BVIR, =IVM2, 381, — Sdwee®, A firm condition of life. 74.—Jw)e, 140.-—:‘3358&55. Tbh. of 3¢, 124. — 3, One of the chief officiating priests at a S6ma sacrifice.—s¢RwIF . A sunny place. 73.— R¢RwWFE,. The disk of the sun. 82.— 8483, Swallowing. 561. — 30%°, (3@@35 9. A verbal theme from which 2% (3XWJ ?) comes. 569. — d¥MaB>, A wilderness (full) of flies. 332. — 300, 140.—IRBE>. Seeing, sight, ete. Plural 883119, 549, — 3?2, Tbh. of S0, 160. — 371 or 3%3. See 8T in Dictionary. 49. —IZReB), A bird’s nest. 304. — I ¢3. Thbh. of H530s. 160. — 3oy, The sun, 537, — Jonacds®, Jeoobds, Green, unripe fruit. 341, — Jow30d, Fivefold, having five parts or limbs. 376. — 3898, A man who resides in, or has been born in, a town. 419, — S meONe, A female silk-weaver. 192, — 387302, = I¥m9n2, 202. — B8, [y B ¢ BF T, A side, a faction. 441,——55&&5_ 38 (i. e. 5&5&) FoIFS, IT T8, A partisan. 441, — 33@3. Thh. of gér‘%fi 407, — SRR, PoRT,s. A man who eats the remainder of the food left by his master: a servant. 407.— S839. A female commander of an army. 200.— 32007139, A man who receives money (as a bribe?). 414, —3B,. + Ripe fruit being produced. 557.———598;)\@, A man who receives ripe fruits (as a bribe?). 414.— 3@ 8. 80. — IFW. E¥]nle) :a?pfio A8 Pradetne 99 | 333,373°. A man who makes a dwelling place or abode; one who makes verses. 441.— 300°% in TRBS* AT, a variety of sounds to join (?). 585.—33. Tbh. of ®3. A path, a road. 142.— 353 3. Tbh. of 8O, A path, aroad. 130.—333. 431.—33333, 431, — FoI. = Bed» in Dictionary. See w32 ) 033®, — BOWIR®). BB Sww). B3330. Ten hundred, a thousand. 363.— BoZ0°. Ten persons. 363, — T DO, B359033°, Ten times. 363. — Jo3 3, Do B s, Quickly. 20, — 38w, A pearl-merchant. 424.— O&%. Tbh. of 8,3, 147.— I0Ron, Tbh. of S0%,0M. 151, — Ze*. A drummer. 416, — 3*3&8N. = Je*n. 416. — SuRBFad. A man with a board-like chest. 328. - Boym™. Thh, of 8033, 160. DA 140, — S, D[IFFSF, A man §i who cooks, etc. 410. — TITOIN, = T3, 410. 411, — 3F9N3, A woman who cooks, ete. 192.— Twom, A singer. 384.— 830333, Thh. of ©IReIWT, 378, — T3030090. = TB3IWT3. 378, — TIJ. See VTIIFA. (Is Tamil, ma:aficfié, 553, — T2, an army, meant?). — 3303, Jumping, ete Plural o"SDOSiOfi %, %j Fighting. See ©w3%°. (Cf. Tamil] %), to fight). — DISH’. FoBdeed A ) A woman addicted to quarrel. 82.— B, A jumping iguana (?). 82.— FISFI, A Brahmana woman. 202, — I3 o~ o — oJ V35, 202. — ™I3IBN2, A female of j\j the caste of snake-catchers. 192. — 2Imd. A snake-killer: a mungoose ; a D peacock. 547. — %33 A snake-eater: a peacock. 546.— 29338 . A male with of a snake-ornament. 441. (Cf. c"éf?‘&i).~m°9e3€. Tbh. of T99:3. 140, 160, — »o2 s} @0y, The hind end of a garment. 93, — »3 &, The back of the head. 349. — 140. 160.-— 1 2Z0n. A seller of long pepper. 409.— 2¢93. Thh. of 2¢d%. iy 451 JUEEENES DTR TR Thh. of PTRIT&® 133 AW, A speaker of lies. 329, — Fixing, as an arrow admitting, ete HHT7.—pI&Ne, A female florist 192. — JEM S, A hind leg 369 50 9= One who has a wife 402, — X T WS‘SJB 95 m)swo 9D, N 0,80 0¢85 570 ° A man addicted to, or oceupied about, women 424 e wwac&@ 0. A man with a moon-like forehead 327. — I&°I800309° A woman with a moon-like forehead. 182. 328. 330.—I0I. 140, — 38WIJ0RA, 132, — 3ol In a verse under 140 (page 100):— T°03£9¢ WONFI® WA TR ¥6 WPTRA JVITIT0 T3 | T3P IO 33,030 Jeeworiodro Feodd 8T FoedeBo ) SRS Entering, etc Plural 2pR3nie° 560. — 3p%3 [IeTWI0 P00 TU, » I3 323w ¢ 1, a river; 2, an ornament (¢f. TIILW ; T3 in Dietion- ary) 311, — W@ 3B, An ornamental dress 441, —pow¥. A golden staff 93. — Y3, A male who has a (big) belly, in the instance 8,330 B3Fo 402, — xp00A To cause to fight, in the instance POART® w00 WeeBo 537. — Qprad, To cause (somebody) to make (something) fight, in the instance PROWF AR 30300 INRILNRJF® WoRo 541, — Jpeaedor, = PBORY, in the instance BpeawrB3® ¥R0do WaeRo, 537, — PI MR, A sheet of gold. 93. — PR F. Joining, ete. Plural 3pJFne° 568. — P, 0Nk A golden stone 55, — P31, A man who is addicted to, and busy with acquiring, gold. 424. —p3 9. 67. — P03 ¢ 561 Beating; a blow. Plural 23003 1¢* 555, — RS Nourishing, ete e FE An outer tie, ete 101. — peFodss The upper part of the hand. 101.— TR, An outer fort 101, — Jpeszwnre, Jposwes 13, A swelling at the 73. — POINRTFS 13— posteriors Cows of flight (?) 260%, Bearing on the head. ete 557. — &R 3. A wonderful elephant 46. — PR WITR A new choultry. 91.— PR 8n10 A beautiful antelope 93.— PR w39, New cloth 91 PR B0 A new balance, ete. 101.— PR 30¢8., A new garden. 101.— DRR VBT3B Fine loose pearls. 87.— P& W@, A new camp. 87.— PR SR A new pool 87. — PR Inew ., A new artificial structure 87. — PRI, P A new woman 169. — PR3, A wonderful mountain 92. — PR 33,3, Beautiful sugar 89. — pertd (A verb from which PGP comes). — PO 140. Plural FOJINYE 574.— 3ped. Name of a man 80. — 2w, Tbh. of A ¢4TF 160. — &pce’ Used as verb intransitive in the sentence PN 0 WO ONPS T 239,33 VO 463, — Jpee Bk Parts to be scattered 193 (in a verse). — J°30 B OIRTR %am’ar Oh! woe to me!; unexpectedly. 20. — 718) See reJa&:rfsao £ o - dJ D 0303, Na 3¢ RRARD mm e@a o3 n3as é@a poe ] o~ &Dfifi@v@%fi Efido?i- = ?3@@&350 € N, - 9T I3 el 3 . Pratisthana denotes the eating of the remainder (of the dinner) of him (i. e. of the master), one (who does so) sitting down in the very same place in which the master has eaten, risen and gone. 407.—%%322. A female of noble birth 191. — 235287, A mindful woman 201. — Wn R I A tiger- skin, 379.—woni¥x’. A man of Bangila 420. — W8 30BS030e° A woman with round breasts 328. —w¥H. A man on the road, a traveller, in the instance WAV’ WE T WD 536. —W&3. A female who beats; or a lean female e 452 — 29, — WBNRHYS. A woman of the north. 182, — WARH S, To take a cudgel. 380.— w&3R, To cause to make beat, in the instance WRIARFES BRI 3. 541.—weawd, 80. (Tbh. of 65, trade?). — WHOB). = WV, 80.— V3. 329, (Thbh. of 3,82 ¢f. WS, — WS),30d3°, WBL,IA BI®. Water, milk, ete. drying up. 333. 344, — o WAL YY), 50%"’a’?§~®§¢§8- What is born in the sky: a flash of lightning. 420.— WX, d{ePoBrs. Quickly. 20.—waA3). 205 036 ¥F, wody odY. In the evening. 278.— w83 Thh. of F38. 147, — w3, A road whereon (somebody or something) comes. 332.— we°T¥°." A naked foot. 101.-— &Jfimgy A vain man. 172.——%3630"30%’6- A vain woman. 172.— 2395, = we) B2,96. 172, — WsoFrR. Coming. Plural WFFSRes. 572, — W9 0. A big mountain. 463, — WS o8 . B A man with a strong hand. 331.— 233, Strong effort. 66.— &)?fl% A great villain. 66. — WV WIN. A man of great exertion, ete. 329.— g W BA. A great valiant man. 66, — w0308 Abundant duck-weed. 66.— 2% oJ 2&. To seize the pot-stone pencil. 298. — WI¥IIB. = WITNB. 381. — WIMPS'T. The making and selling of bracelets. 431. — wer3en. A regular lustre, in a verse under 140.— 2. Living (7). 140.— w2 3S. 140.— we” 9. Living, steady lustre, in a verse under 140.—2®713e. Thh. of F3F3e. 408, —WnTET. A grammarian, 408. —ACTH. A doorkeeper. 418.— A3, = WINSK. 425, — WITY,! Thh. of Fonod. 140. — w39R83." Thh. of a%d?fl 160. — w38. = 790. See DWW, —LIITONIEP. nnsndrs. A hollow of the sky. 346.—%371. One who resides, or is born, in the sky. 419.— w73 e & The swelling of a wale. 73.-- waer. = 2398y, flesh, in WO HCIPBT. 82, — W, A place of living. 90.— W) D). A happy living herd of kine. 87.—2on?. Thh. of Bord. 140.— Wzohonodr. In the second verse under 468, — VIR, 3nd . Silently, quietly. 20. — D33 = WA 20, — Ve[E. A rough manner or custom. 369.— W) =#03. A man of rough manners. 369. — 22 3. Stifly, in Yy 3 Verd. 20, —VER. Tbh. of V038, 160.—W%3%. Tbh. of V@Y. 140.— V9F. A white man. 403. — W93%. A white woman. 194. — 2903 A whitish male. Instance P00 &)?j\ o. 102, —A909°. A white female. @W9039° &37,8. 102. Plural 239?050%56- 884.— W9T*. (A certain verb). 507. (Cf. $¥0° in Dictionary?). — 0. 140. Cf. ¥y, in Dictionary? — ¥@3,97. 538. (jf. WFy 94 in Dictionary ? — De@32,1. To enter an abode, ete. 380. — WRBIPM. = VBBH, ™. 380.— Deedn. A lute-player. 406. — 20eR. Thh. of Peo. 144, — DetS. = e, of which the plural is WeRones, W, ¢° or W 9. 233, — VeI . A halting place. 55. (f. Dews3 3, — Ve 09, Ve 3969, dWT. A camp. 87. — D¢ T8, The econsonant ¥ 66, — WIS Tbh. of 3. 147, — WM&, =WoNS. 147. — WR3Y, 2996;5&. Deception, fraud (?). 415. — We3om. SRI[RENE. A man living on deception (?). 415.—we3on. A woman living on deception (?). 193.— We30N8. = we3dN. 193, — WeIBR=Wr3DR. 415.— Bondos. BVeFITMs. A sunbeam. 341.— Bones, fi@oflw%aé’gefio& The sun- stone: erystal. 342.— 3. Hot. See ©23 nwcr, @3y 0. — W3 eer’. Hot riee. 343.— %0 357 Manifestly, clearly. 20.— 2320, A hot flame. 343.— —— 453 PR @39 @, A hot potsherd. 336. 341. 343.— 383, A fiorce female. 102.— zfi&&nacsa. A hill-jungle. 379.— 380z, = zSédgdnado. 379, < zfié&&:‘)’@wcfi A hill-stream, or a hill-path. 379.— B8)3pc’ = S 3", 379, — e, 80, — ¥&e) na. (Originally @dernsd). =38nir. 83. — Bxe@. A frightened iguana (?). 82.-- ¥BNFR. (Originally B¥a3nFed). @33ne. A frightened cow. 83.— W3R S°. The skin of the back. 80.— #®830. A hot flame. 343.— $39,¢3). = 3udn . o G480 a:'sssmwtb. BN L4 Hot ashes. 341.—%¢0 (or ¥¥0). A rain of white colour. 93.— BT (or B¢ ¥). Podrid=sagrs. Frightened from fear, ete. 20.— 23%% ‘White eloth. 223. 347.—?»39{)71?3. ‘White flax. 336.-23%- A white female. 197. — ¥0J. 140.—3¢®, 140.— Beddon. A woman who deals in, or sells, roofs. 193, — 23¢30Nn 8. — 3edoN. 193.—@37%. An impediment of roots, ete. 90. — 28¢R0. Hotness. See ¥R, Ve @, — 23200, A hot flame. 334. 343. — BedRe¢@. A hot potsherd. 343.—3:330. A trader. 329.— BeB0RRC. A man clever in spying. 305.-— #383). RBHFIOISZ, 00 TEIOZ,ZTWIe. An old dirty piece of cloth, mat and other things. 441.— Ze 7. 3a° (oY) MBI, Aman who puts on an old dirty piece of cloth, ete. 441.— @3#%,. A vociferous woman (?). 197. — ¥ew. 140, — Bee® 140, —w,xo03. A Brahmana female. 28, 190.— 3 30. Deception, fraud (7). See W83 — 303039. 60. Cf. 393 &30 in Dictionary. — SRI9,. A washerwoman. 200.— 303820, Water of a pool. 380.— Sx@on5n . To fall into a pool. 380.— BBV’ = FBJR . 380, — 30838, Bending, ete. FBIR. 579, Plaral =oe830ones, 554. — B0 140. See STSOS@éCO’ in Diection- ary. — BITIN. FBITLe 8 HBeRFHF. A man who composes the madanavati metre. 412, — DRP0OZB. Thh. of IROZS. 129, — J0I3R3F0. The articles of a house. 89.— FBTHN. JF DBekne WTIBFY ™, A wood-pecker; a wood-cutter, 548, — J0BN&B, To cut a tree or wood. 382.— JVToNR. = SIVNE. a carpenter, 382.— 3ododdg @n. A foolish laugher. 66.— S0BoFTRe®. Rice with a drug in it 879, DRIFoRPES. = IBFNHLS. 379, — mw{s\. 140.— S»R. Tbh. of IPH. 143.— 390%0%. Disregard. See under RTodcTde. — SRoNAT. The splendour of a mango. 348. — I00B Y. A small branch of a mango tree. 348.— IPo®RTY. A cluster of mangoes. 348.—Sn®e H. 348.—In3N. A talkative woman. 193, — SP3DAL. = I030A. 193, — IN303IBN. A talkative man. 415. — SPSIMIEE. An opening bud of a mango. 332.—=3930%,. The flower of a mango. 348.— S932 600 A couple of mangoes. 348.— JPON. IPddo FeRIFo. A man who worships Mari. 413.— TI%e®2. Another iguana (7). 82.-—-SPRRCFSS. A staff that measures a fathom. 90.— SNIIEN. [NRCITITs. A male florist. 416.— SRS836n8. A female florist. 192._—;559;595& See uv%neéfi, m:’oo%’aéméfi. B r (> Fo Tbh. of 983, 160.— SRFO. = IRVS. 140. — J9E. 488.— IR, An artificial structure. See RPF-. — IRELY. Sn) B BewI® &3on. A man addieted to making, ete. 545. — IPQE. 140.=3nE. See also the following verse under 193:— =20 8 1e¢ 3recie ¥ Aee9 03 ¥¢ Wen BB FIY B MY0 | e BOFS 9T T3 830 ¢° IO OWNWEI® Ao || —INePR e’ An artificial stream. 87.— v i i 454 — 2rdd. Becoming great, ete. Plural DTSRe. 560. — 2002030, A fire-fly, ete. 344.—293). Past participle of 0. 482. 506.— BS. Pounding. Plural DOBTONS®. 562, — AR, Thh. of I)&eT. 160.— 9. (A certain verb). 566.— APJ. A bhava noun of 209. HE6. — QRONVD. PeITS T DBeRkpe ;. A fisherman; a crame. 547.— S0F. Tbh. of J0®. See BOIZNF. — 30T Thh. of =3I 147. —30Fy948>. To cause to rinse the mouth with water and spit it out, etc. Instance : — J0FY 93T TptA0 ©%eo. 541, —B0FR R Three crores, ete. 101. —30F8, 3. Three kos. 68.— S0mog. Closing, ote. 559. — ST 9. A budding pomegranate. 74.—I0NOEW on®. A cluster of buds. 73.— 3003 8. Three bankers, ete. (?). 94. — S0 3@ Three choultries. 93. — 30228 worfo. Three ends of a garment. 93.— fioozi\zg,. Three halting places for travellers, etc. 68.— &500%3531)335- Three thousand. 94.~—50023Jaw€@?3- 94.— J00). TN 3 ;7o Violence, audacity, ete. 423.— 328 F3®. A man disposed to violence, ete. 423.— 323 3. So00e88. Three heads. 360.— =03 @. Three ties, ete. 101, — S0R@Brea),. 2T0H o R A knot from the root to the top. 83.— TR 3. = FIWBINE), 83,_.3»&%53@5. Three spans. 68, — ;Sao:)go;wfi. The first sunshine of the morning. 536.— 3208, & 0. Three times, thrice. 360.— S0 dR.BA. Eighteen feet; (or three humble bees). 68.—=030833,%°. Three servants, ete. 68, — S00032,0°. Three persons. 360.— JVF0% = [o03)T¢. 354, — F0ge o oe, A cluster of thorns. 73.— 300?365 (or 309¢3). A prickly garment. 93. — BN 0 nee A bundle or cluster of thorns. 66.—=293n0%. A door of thorns. 72.— I eond. Prickly ends of a garment. 93.— S0e0n7R. To immerse (v. tr.) to let go down, ete., in the instance '&J%fio fi%fifi 9 P o SN0, 53 6. — [, 140.— Jonm@. Three heaps. 353. — SoenRa3y. A male with three hands. 97.— Swenie®. Three parasols. 353.— S0wdwedd. Three spans. 353.— S0LpBEE. A female of the east. 140. — SoRRSa). A male with three heads. 352, — J0® ©93. 31¢. Three cows. 352._._;:53.@@@0536. = mJafiojofi. 97, — FRBB03, = BoRRBE3. 352, — J0RIFA. Thrice. 88.— 3083, Thh. of 32t 160. See Bec3, in Dictionary. — 30207, A seller of black pepper. 409.— 3005 3°. The skin of the body. 89.—399&. To cause to chew. 62.—H03 0. A man with a soft hand. 331.—3988R. A tender bud, in a verse under 442, —39T¢. A gentle, etc. woman. 59.— 303 urod. A man with a kind heart. 14.—308adr o8, Jo0wo. A woman with a kind heart. 182, — B, Black pepper. 140. — 3% 140, —30¢w08. A man who has been born in a superior village or town. 420.—S0twsT%. A superior village or town. 420.— 3003, A precious pearl. 66.—350,%. An excellent coloug, 92.—3¢03,3%. An excellent word. 92.—3%0%. Scooping, ete. 561.—3we®, 140.— 383, Thbh. of Sa¢ é B8, 143.— 30T, Striking, ete. JHIR. 579. Plural SDINSS. 569. — 0 R, Striking, ete. Plural Swemonss. 549, — SBLATID. A deceiver, ete. 423.— 98,33 A man who is guarded; one who guards. Instance:— 0% 330 no®o, 402.— 08038, Thh. of BAIT. E 160.— 03302030 8oona0RPTITS. A P JR—— 455 chief of horsemen. 295.—032°Ft°. 140.—09. Tbh. of 88. 159, —doced. (A feminine noun). 197.—«*2¢@n. A laugher, etc. Seo 505393%@?1. — woun. wowdo ®eARITo. A man who lives by taking bribes. 401. 415, —©023A. A woman who takes bribes. 198. — vodAd. = wolA. 1983. — ©oB3B8R. = voidn. 196, — 8. A deeply designing woman. 197.—9309%. 140. (= 930987, - 030 eR. Thh. of GJDISQ,@% 160.— 035\;@3,5. Lasciviousness, lustiness, lewdness, dissoluteness. — Sn. Tbh. of IiF. 153.— 363, 80. (CF. w8 in Dictionary?). — S393. A man born in Varala. 420.—Svo. #)88rs. Clearly, manifestly. 20.— 89 0.= Soo. 20. — D3TIR. To pass over, ete. 59, — DRIMITL. To see the moon. 382. — DREIOMITE. = VP, 382. — ARSI . That has poison. Instance: — DRI o AeRo. 402, —Jwo. Ry tagrs Manifestly. 20.— 30829, Thh. of So® 3. %9. D 140. — Djes. Tbh. of ®,¢& 140.—®oZ. Tbh. of 3=y, 140; =AM, = fieaga. 441, — 30T, == nga&’. 441,_;399%. fis*ao:fis*ag(}zfim’go @oz&mmaafiosm;‘oéefiméa’a. Two words which denote the particular limbs of a hump-backed and dwarfish man. 441.— RO F. (A man who is small:) a man who is hump-k;acked or dwarfish. 441.— RASS,. A man with an umbrella. 402.— &3> Thh. of 3. 147.— A Tbh. of ¥ . 160.— AFodomam. A combatant, in the following verse under 384 : — WOTOMIBR nes) 380 TH 03 'éo;fiwoioacgpcs.wfi SWptido | FwoFos RITo Me JRoFoRcly me) 330 200¥33tw)0 || a warrior’s valiantness, sharpness, even the disregard of the combatant who pushes away fierce soldiers in a vehement fight one has to call the essence of valiantness.—R33IB . Tbh. of ?fgd&)%fi. 406. A man who binds, confines or checks the voice or tone (?). — 8SIB 3. A female saravandiga, 192.—R0&Z. Tbh. of ANFI. 147.— BABRe. A garden of young plants, etc., in a verse under 193.— 83&¢3. Tbh. of 3d3ed. 138, 29%. Tbh. of ROv. 139, —FWF. Thh. of FRFT. 143, — m0Y 9. Komdews. A man addicted to contracting debts. 545.— @m0, A place where calves are in a row or in rows. 87. — @ARFSR. A male with a thousand heads. 356.— AAVREFS. A male with a thousand arms. 356.—A%S. With the sound of splitting, in the sentence AT ANTW. 20.— A0FT, A0WT, 2B, Thh. of 2wWT. 378. (f. A00TT, ete. in Dictionary, and At030T3, ete. — 200230 Thh, of 3,¢0a0. 296.—2¥. 140, in a verse near the end. — 20333, A03WIT, 220392338, = AOWT, ete. 378. —AwB. 82. A screaming iguana (?).— dtS. Tbh. of 2¢3. A female ;: who is disposed to, ete. 160.— At¥oore. A split cheek. 55.— 2e¥ od®, A split capsula, 193 in a verse. — ¢8R &,. A split abdomen. 91.—AN3. Fearing; tearing off. Plural RonSores. 554.— R0o%N3. A female collector of customs. 191.— A8, Tbh. of A 160, — R0, Breathing, ete. Plural fiooflgpori s, 55H3. — RIFTUFonoBI?. A woman with curled hair. 194.— ?50?%3. With the sound of pouring, dropping, ete., in the instance Bogd R0D. 20, —AeATeY. T, ¢. 82.— Anodde. Thh. of eVA 0, TR0 A cook’s place, a cooking place, a kitchen. 378, — RRES. FTo ¥FWR0 J, A. time, a turn;— making known, announcing, proclaiming, apprising, publishing, relating, communication ; —— — 456 information ; representation ; delivering, giving, entrusting; an offering, oblation; dedication. 425.— RREs303). RREPR ¥ ©PF Zo. A man appointed to proclaiming, otc. 425.—RPEDN). A female AW 195.— AT, = AW, 425, — R&,2. A female banker, ete. 190. 200.— A3 . 67.— &SI, 140.— R¢%0. 140.— ARY or BBIY. A general. 426.— 3. Drawing water out. 569. — Awed Tbh. of ®22. 160. — 326 140 (where PS> is separately adduced). — Rpwor. 80.—ARAI0B). A kiss, or the affection, of a daughter-in-law. 101.— 3%, See 2%,.—-R3FC. Thbh. of AZF. 123. —F3)F. One who remembers or recollects. — ROWE T, See #OIY7. — YR Thh. of 383 145.— 3R. Tbh, of 154. —X8&. Tbh. of 29N 160. — BORT. 33,%. <) Seratching ; spreading. 569.— ®sF0. Tbh. of TSF. 123.— ®RB3. Thh. of 3,7933. 160, — T0A. See 7 - &)e}zanofl. —%B. Tbh. of fiédojo. 160.—% % Thbh. of 3, (3,53) 150. — e, Thh. of »¢3. 145, — Bu. By BW° 300CIRTS @dé@cmcfimr . 1, The body; 2, the front tuft of hair. 312.— BOYBY. a%e;mo fiieg‘mo ;30% [E), ofiaozgpo. 1, A fight in which they mutually trample on the body of each other. B Fvo T FF° LORT o HAIWIT oSoo%cms?G ©%). 2, A fight in which they mutually seize the front tuft of hair of each other. 312. RSP N R2I= o= s e S e G il Zan v iy INDEX. — e QAVASD T— The numbers refer to the pages. | Kannada and Samskrita letters, syllables and words, wherever required with due diacritical signs. a. 1. The final letter of many crude am. 2. Masculine pronominal suffix 111 nouns and pronouns 34 — 36. 46, 47. 119. 218. 60, comprising masculine, feminine am. 3. Termination of the third person and epicine words 37. 45. 47—49. masculine singular 88. 127. 51. 207, and neater words 41 — 44. am. 4. In the imperative 148 seq. a . 2, Sign of the nominative singular am. 5.= adi 213. 42. 43. 48, of the words under g 1. am. 6. And, ete. 266 seq. 49. 60. 61. (f. 218. akarmakadhétu. 89. a.3. (=4a1). Sign of the accusative akaranta. 31. akum. = akkum. 147. singular. and plural of the words under a 1. 42.43. 50. 52, H3. 62. 63. ake, = akke. 1. 59. 60. 62. 63. 73. akkara. b. a. 4 (=2a2). Sign of the genitive singular and plural, in the singular akkaramaleé. b occasionally suffixed by means of akku, = akkum. 147. akkum, Of agu 111. 147. one or more euphonic letters (see d, n2, ina 2, anal, dai, da, na, ara1) akke, 1. =arké. Sign of the dative 59. 60. 62. 63. 73. 42, 50—60. 63. 656—T5. 80. (Cf. 112 akke. 2. Imperative of agu 111. 150. 338 a. 5. Sign of the vocative 81. 82. a, 6. Sign of the infinitive 122. 157, akshara. 5. 160. 161. 324. aksharamalg. 5 7. Of the imperative 149 seq. aksharartpa. 4 8. In Tadbhavas 31. 32. aksharavritti 30 a., 9. Taddhita suffix 29. 36. 200. aksharasanjnakara. 4. 10.=am 3. 127. aksharasanjnartpa. 4. aksharatmaka. 4. a. 11, Vulgar form of va 1., 115. a. 12 Becomes 4 24. 189. 212, and ageé. 1. Sign of the dative 53. changes in 0 47. 51. 53. 58. 111. 112. agé, 2. In the formation of adverbs am. 1. Sign of the accusative 41. 43. 169 (and adjectives 243). 47. 48. 50 — 54. 56. 58. 59. 62. 65 — 67. ankitanima. 30. 69. 71. 73—715. ankeé. 22. 58 458 P angikara. 176. atva. 32; aéétana. 37. ada. = ada. 111. 142. ad8agannada. 5. 432. adu. 1. Demonstrative neuter pronoun atiga. Taddhita suffix 203. singular 47. 58 — 60. 112. 222 seq. adi, = am. 213. adu. 2. Termination of the third person adiga. = atiga. 203. neuter singular 127, 157, adé. =are, ode. 167. 271 seq. 319 seq. ade, 1 Sign of the negative participle an, 1 Augment 61. 62. 80. 106 seq. 111. an. 2. =ana 1. 60. ade. 2. Third person singular neuter 133. 135. ana. 1. (an-+a). Sign of the genitive 58 — 61. adhikarana. 381. 389. ana. 2.= ana. 111. 282, adhyarodpa. 412. 415. 416. adhyhhara. 413. anaké. (an -+ a+ke).=ange. 61. anakké, = anaké. 61 adhyaharya. 406. adhva. 382. anattanim. (ana + attanim). = anindé. 60 an, annu., Verb 352 seq. anada. (ana+-da). Signof the genitve 61. ana. 1. Sign of the accusative 60. 68. anadindé. (ana + da - inda). Sign of ana. 2. = antha. 248. the ablative 61. anaksharatmaka. 4. ananunasika. 16. anim, (ana+im). Sign of the ablative 58. 60. 61. anitu, ete. 257. anibar. 241. aniga, Taddhita suffix 203. aninda. (apa -+ inda). = anindam. 61. anishta. 382. 386. 389. 395. 43. 47—51. 53. 56. 60. anindam. (apa + indarm). = aninda. 60. anu. 1.=am 1. 63. 67— 69. 75. anindé. (ana +indé). Sign of the abla- tive 60. 61. anu, 2.=am 3. 127. anu, 3.=am 2. 218. ange. (an -+ ge). Sign of the dative 58. 60. 74. anunasika. 14. 16. anuloma. 11. atisaya. 302. atisayatara. 310. anusvara. 16, 21. atu, =adu 1. 4. 222 seq. 241. ané, 1.=ana 2. 248. attanim, Sign of the ablative 41. ané, 2. =age 2. 48 — 50. 52. 54. 67. 74. 75. anéya. 256 seq. anékakshara. 79. attaninda. = attanindam. 50. attanindam. = attapindé. 41. 48— 50, anékiksharadhatu. 22. 2> — 28. 52. 4. 67. anékaksharasabda. 32. 34. 35. attanindé. = attapim. 41. 48—50. 52. anta. 1. = antaha. 188. 54. 67. anta. 2. 109. 141. anté, On dit. 136. 142. 358. attu, 1.=atu. 74. 222 seq. attu. 2. Termination of the third person antha, etc. = antaha. 188. 248. 188. 189. neuter singular 127. anthavanu, ete. 459 antyalopa. 32. ari, =iri. 159. antyavarpa. 28. arir,=ar 1. 51. 70. arisamasa. 215. 216. 218. antyakshara. 28. anna. 1.=annu. 49. 53. 60 aru, I.=ar 1. 51. 52. 71. 72. 127, 139. anna. (annam). 2. = antaha. 188, 248. aru. 2=ar 3. annal. Feminine of annam (anna 2) arugal. = argal. 52. 188 arugalir, = arugal. 52. annu. =am 1. Sign of the accusative arugalu. = arugal. 52. 43. 48, 49.53. 56. 60. 65. 66. 68. 70. 75. aré. = adé, 6de. 167. 271 seq. 319 seq. anné, = annal. 188. arkal, = argal. 51. 70. anya. 88. arkalir, = arka). 51. 70. anyakartri. 89. argal.=ar 1. 5l. anyatotisaya. 302. Argala. 3. anyapurush&. 88, arghya. 386. artha. 29. 313. ayonya. 310. anvaya. 407. 411. 412. arthavyakti. 216. anvayasvatantra. 414, arthanurtpa. 30. anvayisu. 407. ar. 1. Augment 61. anvarthanama. 30. ai.l:o 2‘ Six. 252. 253. apa. = appa. 110. 117. 118. 144, ara. 1. (ar+a). Sign of the genitive apabhramsa. 30. 432 seq. 58—60. 62. 63. 73. apAdana. 380. 388. 395. ara. 2. =ar 2. 252 appa.=aha. 111. 117. 144. 188. 243, arattanim. (ara - attanim). Sign of abinduka. 187. the ablative 62. abhavakriyé. 106. arannu. (ara-annu). Sign of the abhtkshana. 363. accusative 60. ame Taddhita suffix 200. arali, = aralli. 59. 60. 62. ay. 1. Past participle 103. 142. 261. aralli. (ara-alli). Sign of the locative 59. 60. 62. 73. ay. 2. Termination of the second ari. Verb 339. person singular 127. ay. 8. Five 212. 252, 253. arim. (ara +im). Sign of the instru- mental 58. 59. 62. 73. ayatnakritagurutva. 399. ayl.=ay 3. 252. arinda. = arindé. 59. 60. 63. ayila. Taddhita suffix 204. arindavu. ==arindé. 59. ayté. Third person neuter singular 133. arindé. (ara + inds). = arim. 59. ar. 1. Sign of the nominative plural aru. Six. 212. 252, 253. 51. 70 —172. 136. arul. = arol. 59. alr. 2. Plural of am 2. 111. 119. 218. arol. (ara-+ol). Sign of the locative 59. 62. 73. ar. 3. Formation of the third person —— plural 127. aydlage. = 5 arol. 59. 60. 62. 63. aradésa, 32, arolu. = arol. 59. 62. 58% pa pee— 488 arke. (ar +ké). Sign of the dative 58 avu. 2. Termination of the third 59. 62. 73. person neuter plural 127. 157 al, 1. Sign of the locative 42. 54. 67. avu, 3. Taddhita suffix 200. allo 2' Sign of the infinitive 120. 121 avugalu.=avu 1. 73. 125. 324. ave. Third person neuter plural 133. al. 3. Sign of prohibition 153 seq. avyaya. 31. 39. 160. 164 seq. 179. 260 seq. al, 4. Defective verb 160. avyayapada. 260. al. 5 Euphonic 265. avyayalinga. 33. 37. 39, 261. alagi. (al+agi). 426. avyayibhava. 213 seq. ali 1. =alli. 43. 44. 49 —51. 54. 57. 68 asravya. 147. 70. 75. ashtu, ete. 257. 260. asamasa. 187. ali, 2 =alith. 151 seq. 153 seq. 333 338 asamasata. 30. asu. =isu. 1. 89. 90. 92. alim. In the imperative 153 seq. alu, 1.=al 1. 42. 43. 54. 67. 68, asiys. 304. 387. asvaravidhi. 5. alu, 2. =al 2. 121. 125. 159. 324. 426. altu. alté. 362. aha.=apa, appa. 111. 117. 118. 144. alpaprapa. 14. 145. 243. alla. 160. 161. 291 seq. 293. 339. al. 1. Feminine personal suffix 46. 71. allam. 160. 291. 111, 119. 218. 249. allada. 361 seq. al. 2. Termination of the third person alladé. 106. 293. 360 seq. feminine singular 127. alli, Sign of the locative 42— 44, ala.=ana 1. 60. 61. 49 — 54. 57. 60. 63. 66 —68. 70. 75. alu. 1.=al 1. 46. 71. ava. avam. avanu. Masculine demon- alu, 2. a] 2. 127. A strative pronoun,nominative singular a 1 Sign of the accusative singular 38. 47 seq. 112. 218. 222 seq. 234. 43. 53. 56. 60. avadharana. 175. 4. 2. Sign of the genitive singular and avayavasambandha. 392. plural 42. 44. 48. 49. 52 — 54. 60. 65- avar. avaru, Plural of ava 51. 52, 112, 67 —69. 189. 305. and of the feminine aval, avalu 51. ® 3 Sign of the vocative 81 seq. 52. 71. 72. 218, 234. > 4 Of the imperative 151. avarga. 14. 0> 5 Demonstrative pronoun 217."230. avargiya. 14. 6 The final letter of a few verbs &8> aval, avalu. Feminine of ava 38. 53 97. 107. seq. 112. 218, 222 seq. 234. o 7. It becomes g and & in personal avikara. 39. and reflexive pronouns 74 seq., may avikrita. 39. take the place of a in some verbs avu. 1. Plural of the pronoun adu 47. 24, 157, and in Samskrita nouns 13. 112. 218. changes in.to é and a 31. 461 am. 1. Sign of the accusative singular ayta. Taddhita suffix 29. 204. 53. 58, 189. 305. ayla, = ayila. 204. fr. L =mrd, Tk am. 2. (dn). Nominative singular and plural of the pronoun of the first ar, 2.=ar 3. 127, 139 person 4. 75. 222 seq. ar. 8. Plural of Avam and aval 72. 230. akara. 5. 235 seq. aké. Feminine of Ata, Atam, atanu 38. aAru.=Aar 3. 72. 67. 112, 218. 222 seq. 234. ar. aru. Verb 340. akshépa. 176. Aru, Six 212, 253, Akhyata. 88. aru kriyavibhakti. 126. akhyatapada. 30. 88. 126. artu. 235. 241, akhyatamarga. 126. ava. Interrogative pronoun 110. 217. avam. avanu., Masculine singular of akhyatavibhakti. 126. aga. For dgadu 160. ava 38. 47. 72. 110. 223 seq. 235. agadu. 160. 337. 339. dval. Feminine of avam 38. 53. 72. 110. dgama. 41.105. 125. 207. 223 seq. 235. aga.= aga. 160. avishtalinga. 398. agi 200 seq. avu. Plural of 4m 2. 75. agir (agi+ir). agiru. 244. 247, 248, Avudu. Neuter singular of Avam 58. 61. Agu. 334—336. 339. 110. 222 seq. 234. agutte, ete. 136. avuvu, Plural of Avadu 73. adu. 367. avé. 1. Interrogative pronoun 223. ina. 111. 282. ave. 2. 134 ata. atam. atanu.=ava, etc. 38. 47 asu 339 aba. 118. 243. seq. 112. 218. 222 seq. 234. ada, Past relative participle of dgu al.=al 2. 127. 139, 111. 243. ali. Taddhita suffix 29. 204. adésa. 117. 177, 208. i. 1. Final letter of many verbs 26. 28. adodam, ete. 278. 88.. 91 92.95. 10¢. 121. 122, and adhara. 389. of many nouns 34. 35. 45. 46. 66 — 70. adhikya. 302. 307. 308. 385. 80 ana. 111. 282. i, 2. It forms the nominative singular anu. anum. 282. 310. 67. 68. anuparvya. 300. i. 8. It forms the vocative singular 81 ané. 1.=ang 1. 248. seq. aneé. 2. 134. 135. i, 4. Sign of the locative 42. 43. i, 5. Sign of the instrumental 43. 44.69. Apa. 117. 118. abadha. 366. i. 6. Its being euphonic 23. 24. 28. 33. 90. 104. 249. 250. amantrana. 81. Ay.=ay 1. 103.261. i, 7. Its being a formative vowel in the ayila, Taddhita suffix 204. past participle 26. 137 seq. 462 P — i. 8. Appears as i 24, and becomes ¢ in ina. 2. (in-+a). Sign of the genitive some verbs 29; changes into u 91 55. B7 — 60. 64 — 66. 80. 101, and into a in some verbs 95. 100 inattanim. (ina 2 -+ attanim). = attanim. In some nouns it becomes i 36, & 36. 58. 64 — 66. 210. 211. 213, & 36, 210, and u 211. inattanindam. = inattanim. 58. 65. 1, 9. Proceeds from i in Tadbhavas 31. inattanindé. = inattanindam. 58. 65. i, 10. Sign of the second person singular inannu, Sign of the accusative singular 127 65 1. 11. Taddhita suffix 204. inali, = inalli. 57. 59. 65. im. Sign of the instrumental and inalli. (ina 2+ alli). =inol. 56. 57. 59. ablative 41. 43. 48 —54. 56. 58. 59. 60. 64 — 66. 63 —67. 69. 70. 74. inim. (ina 2+ im). = im. 58.59. 64 — 66. ininda. (ina 2 + inda). = inda. 56. 57. 60. ika. Taddhita suffix 204. iké. 1. =1ige. 56. 57. 59, 121. 64. 66. inindé. = ininda. H8. H9. iké. 2. Taddhita suffix 200. ikke. 1.=iké 1. 57. 59. 121. inibar, 241. ikké, 2. =iké 2. 200. indl. (ina 2 + 81). = 8] 1. 56. 59. 64 — 66. indlage. = indl. 59. 60. 65. iga. Taddhita suffix 29. 204. indlu. = indl. 59. 65, igeé. 1. Sign of the dative 50. 51. 53. 56. inta. 1. Another form of inda 263. 57. 59. 60. 64— 66. 69. 70. 75. inta. 2. = intha. 188. igé. 2. = iks 2. 201. inke, = ingé. 59. intaha. (intu + aha). 188. intha.=intaha. 188. 189. ingé. =igé 1. 55. 56. 58. 59. 64— 66. inda.=indam. 43. 44. 48 —51. b3. b4. i6a. Taddhita suffix 204, 56. 57. 59 — 61. 63. 64. 66 — 70. 75. 80. iéu. =1isu 1. 89. 90. 92. indam, = im. 41.43. 48— 53. 59. 65 — 67. idu, 367. 69. 74. itarétara. 310. indavu. = indam. 43. 49. 50. 59. 67. 74. iti., Taddhita suffix 46. 204. 75 itu. Third person neuter singular 127. indé. =indam. 41. 43. 48-——54;. 58. 60. 137 seq. 66. 67. 69. 4. 5. itti, = iti. 46. inna. = intaha. 188. itbu. =itu. 127. 137 seq. innd. 273. (Cf. indd). itthambhéitalakshana. 384. ip. Two. 252. idu, Demonstrative pronoun neuter ippa. = irpa. 118, singular 46. 58 — 60. 222 seq. ir. 1. Sign of the nominative plural 51 ] idé. Third person singular neuter 133 19 T1 ) 135. ir, 2. Termination of the second person 1 in, 1. (= inidu). 210. plural 127. 136. 137. in, 2. Two 253. ir. 3. Two. 178. 211. 252, 253. ina. 1. = inannu. 65. ir. iru. 4. Verb 332, 416 seq. 463 1ra (ir1+a). Sign of the vocative 2. Pronoun 173. 217. 230 plural 81. 82 3.=ay 2. 133 seq ira. (ir1+a). =ira. 81. 82 4, Verb 342 1r1 ir 2. 127 et P ped> — 5. As the initial syllable of a few irpa. Present-future relative participle nouns ete. 1t proceeds from i 36. 210 of ir 4 116 211 It takes the form of i in the irba, etc. 258 verbs i and mi 24 It becomes i il. Defective verb 160 in the personal pronoun ni (nir) ila. Taddhita suffix 205 4—176. il t=ah 54. 55. 57. 60 1. 6. Final i of Samskrita polysyllablc ili, 2. Taddhita suffix 205 nouns becomes i 31. illa 159. 161. 285 seq. 293. 331. 332 tkaranta. 31 337 340. 341 iké. Feminine of ita 38. 67. 222, 229 illam 160. 285. 331 234 illada 111. 333 ita. itam. itanu. =1iva. 38. 47. 79. 222 illade 106. 359 229..234 illavu 289 M. =1 1 210 1va. ivam. ivanu. Masculine demonstra- 1r.=1r $::211 . 254 tive pronoun, nominative singular iru. Sign of the plural 71 47— 49, 222 seq. 234 irshe. 384 ivar. ivaru. Plural of iva 51.52. and of ili. Sign of the locative singular 68 the feminine ival 51. 52. 71. 72. 234 isu. Verb 90. 342 ival. ivalu. Feminine of iva 53 seq u. 1. The final vowel of many verbs 292 seq. 234 27— 29. 88. 90. 91. 102. 103. 160, and ivi.=evu, 127 that of many nouns 33 — 36. 44. 45 ivu. ivugalu. Plural of idu 47. 73 64. 68 — 70. 80 ive, = ave. 133. 135 2. It is a kind of augment in the ishta. 381. 384. 386. 389. 395 nominative singular 67. 68 3. It is the ishtu, ete. 257. 260 ign of the nominative isu. 1. Causal suffix 23. 89. 91. 118. 146 singular 55. 56. 58 — 60. 62 — 67 It is however used also in transitive 4. Its radical character as the final and intransitive verbs 90. 118, and letter of nouns 64. 65. 69 appears at the end of repetitions 163 5. Its euphonic character 23 — 25, 28 The way of its being suffixed to final 33 —3b. 42. 44 —46. 57— 60. 62. 63 a1l 172, land 0 73 66. 68. 90. 95. 114. 212 ) isu. 2. Verb 342 6. It changes into 36, 6 29. 99 isu. 3. Taddhita suffix 201. 36, and i 118. 211 A iha,= ippa. 118. 144. 145. 245. 7 The final @ of polysyllabic i) ili. 20 Samskrita nouns becomes u 32 i. 1. Sign of the accusative singular 68 = 8. Taddhita suffix 203 and of the genitive singular 68 9. And, etc. 266 seq. 283 464 um. And, ete. 266 seq. 400 —402. 405 ubhayamatra. 11. 406 umuvidhi. 266. uka. Taddhita suffix 205. ume. Taddhita suffix 201, uké. = ugé. 121. ura. 16. ukti. 33. 38. urasya. 16. uga = uka. 205. ulli. 80 ugi Taddhita suffix 205. uvam. Masculine demonstrative pro- uge. Sign of the dative 69. noun, nominative singular 38. 47. uéita. 40. 222, 234. uéithksharagama. 170. uvar. Plural of uvam 51, and of the uni. Taddhita suffix 205. feminine uval Bl untu. 130. 376. uval. Feminine of uvam 38. 53. 222 uta. 1. = ute. 108. 234 uta. 2. Suffix of the present tense 126. uvu. 1. Piural of mdu i, 47.93: 1115 135 112. 218. utam. = ute. 108. uvu. 2. Termination of the third person uta. = uté. 108. neuater plural 127. 157. utu. =udu 1. 222, 241. ul. 1. Sign of the locative 42. 54. 67. utum. = uté. 108. ul. 2. Verb 130. 332. uté. Sign of the present participle 108. uliga. Taddhita suffix 205. utt&- lTy= uta: 1. 108. ulla. 1. 114. 331. 334, utta. 2.=uta 2. 126. 135. ulla. 2. Taddhita suffix 205. 244. uttam. = utam. 108 uliga. Taddhita suffix 205. A uttama. 89. u 1 The final letter of one or two uttamapurusha. 89. 126. Kannada nouns 66. uttd. = utd. 108. = . 2. It has proceeded from u in siidu uttum. = utum. 108. 36 utte. = ute. 108. . 3. It proceeds from uva 115. 146. utpata. 387. . 4, Pronoun 217. 230. udaya. 389. 395. . 5. And, ete. 266 seq. udu. 1. Demonstrative neuter pronoun, % . 8 Samskrita polysyllabic words nominative singular 46. 58.111. 112. change their final { into u 32. 218, 222. tkaranta. 32. udu 2. Termination of the third person fiké. Feminine of dtam 38. 67. 222. 234. neuter singular 127. 138 seq. 157. fitam. = uvam. 38. 47. 222. udum. 271 seq. Tl Generally remains in Samskrita untaha. (untu +aha). 188. nouns 66. 69. 70; in some Tadbhavas unna.= untaha. 188. it is cha.ngéd 32. unnati. 385. rikaranta. 32. upadhméantya. 16. 17. 21. ri. Remains in a few Samskrita nouns upadana. 383. 391. 66. 69. 465 8. 1. Final letter in many verbs 26. 28. elli. 231. 29. 36. 68. 70. 88. 91. 92. 95. 107. 121. évu. ém. Termination of the first 122 i g and in many nouns ,34h 36. 46. person plural 127. 69. 80. 81. 8l = él. 252, A 2. It forms the nominative singular e . 1. It is no real diphthong in Kannada 67 68, and also the accusative 185 singular 68. (42 . 2. It is final in the verbs ké and hé € . It forms the vocative 81 seq. 24, 92. 107. ‘i . Sign of the instrumental 67. Sign of the accusative singular 68. 2 . Sign of the infinitive 123. 125. 270. W W Sign of the genitive singular 68. Z 82. 324. 424 — 426. 428. Particle of emphasis 227. 291. é 6. Taddhita suffix 200. 205. Sign of the vocative 81 seq. [¢¢] 7. Particle of emphasis 107.133. 171. Adverbial suffix 265. 176. 227, Is used like ava 235. 8. =ay 2. 127. D> M > M > > > © B =N & O In the interrogative pronoun ¢ .= em. 127. (én, énu) it becomes yi (da) 62. 63. < < 10. It changes into i 43. 91, into a 110. 223. 238. 91. 95. 100, into & 211, and ya 21. > 10 Becomes é in the verb hé 24. See under ¢ 10. It proceeds from i 29. 36. 211. 213, and takes the place of & in hé. See ¢kate. 40. also under 3 6. ékatva. 40. 11. Final Samskrita & becomes é 31 . 9 ékamatraka. 11. but Samskrita monosyllabic terms ékavaéana. 40. retain their 3 32. ékasthani. 16. 194. ém. Termination of the first person ékaksharadhatu. 22. 24 —27 singular 127, ékaksharasabda. 32. éké- 620 234. én. Eight 212. 252. 253. ettantu. 241. ékokti. 40. én. énnu. Verb 352 seq. étake. étakke. 62. 238, énu, = ém. 127. dtarke. 62. 234. 238, énta. 1. = éntha. 188. éru. Sign of the nominative plural 71. énta. 2. 109. 141. gli. Sign of the locative singular 68. éntaha. (éntu -+ aha). 188. évaudu. = avudu. 235. éntha.= éntaha. 188. 189. €l. Seven 252. 253. énna.= éntaha. 188. ei. (ai). It is no real diphthong in ép. Seven 252. Kannada 185. 3 3 ém. Eight 252. 1. It takes the place of & in no 24, éral. 253. that of u 29. 211, that of a 47. 51. grdé. 16. 53. 58, that of uva 146, and may glla. éllam. élla. 62. 210. 232. 395 change into 6 189. See 0w 1 and 2, b élladu. 222. 232. 59 — 466 - 0. 2. Initial va occasionally becomes au. 2. Oceurs in Samskrita glau 66. 69. o 21. Qf. 4. 45. om. 1. partly =am 2, partly=am 8. 111. auéitya. 40. 119. 139. 218. m.=a 2. Sign of the nominative singu- 6m. 2.— aim 3. 127. 143. lar 41. 42. 45— 48. 62. 74. 75. ka. Taddhita suffix 201. 205. ode. If 167. 270 seq. 319 seq. kantha. 16. odéya. Taddhita suffix 205. ottakkara. 20. kanthosthya. 16. kanthya. 16. odu.=udu 1 and 2. 112, 218. kanthyatalavya. 16. ombay. 253. or 1.= ar 1. 51- kanthyanasikya. 16. kanda. 174. 92.—ar 2 and 3. 112. 119. 218. or . 3.=ar 3. 127. 139. 143. kannada. 1. 2. 432. or .4, “One 211. 253. karana. 380. 382. 391. karkasavarna. 14. orba, etc. 258. o karpatakaprakriti. 171. ol, ete. 1. 198 seq. karnatakabhishabhGshana. 3. 4. 97. 0l. 2. Verb 240 seq. karnatakasabdanusasana. 4. 8L 1.=ul1. 42. 43. 48—350. 52. 54 65— 70. 74. 75. kartri. 39. 380. 381. 384. karma. 380. 381. .2.=gal 1. 114. 119, 218. karmanpiprayoga. 323. cSe=al o 127,139, 2 %\ 42 — 44. 48 —54. 57 67 karmadharaya. 209 seq. 217. 232. ageé. =0l 1 kavarga. 14. (6} kavirajamarga. 2. ol u6 = ;;) 1. 42. 43. 49. 50. 52. 54. 67 68 o kal.=gal. 51 69. 71, kaliru. = kal. 52. Q> . 1, It is final in the verbs ko, t6 and kalu. = kal. 52. nd 24. 91. 92. 107. kalugal = kalu. 52. . 2. It isno real diphthong in Kannada kagunitakshara. 17. 185. kira. 21. > . 3. It proceeds from u 36, from ava karaka. 216. 217. 380. 398. 413. 113, and ¢ 211. See or. karakapada. 407 . 4. In Samskrita g6 it remains un- karakavasa. 380 changed 66. 69. Of. 44. 45. karana. 388. 396 Y . 5. Adverbial suffix 265 seq. 282. kéra. Taddhita suffix 205. onama. D. kala. 88. 382. 388. 391. 395. 397. Or.= or 4. 254, kalatraya. 88. 314. Oshtha. 16. kalatrayaparipami. 125. Oshthya. 16. kalatrayastcaka. 125. kalavacaka. 64. au. 1. Itisnoreal diphthong in Kannada 185. kalavaei. 64. 46 kavyamarga. 194. kriyaprayojana. 120. kavyavalokana. 3. kriyartha. 120. kriyavibhakti. 126. 170. kil. = kélagu. 178. 213. ku. = kum. 146 seq. kriyasamabhihara. 363. kum. Verbal termination 106. 146 seq kriyasamasa. 216. kutiga. Taddhita suffix 205. kriyasakalya. 364. kudu. Verb 368. kriyé. 29. 30. 88. 89. 125.-390. kutsana. 304. kvaéitprayoga. 39. kulasambandha. 391. kshala. 5. 13— 15. 189, 194. kuli. Taddhita suffix 206. khéda. 176. kula. 5. 14. 189. 194. 195. ga. Taddhita suffix 2086. kuli. Taddhita suffix 206. gada. 176. kidadu. 337. 339. gandakkara. 14. krit. 29. 39. 110. 119. 131. 198, 217, 218 gandu. 40. seq gadya. 197. krillinga. 29. 30. 33. 39. 119. 127. 139 gamakasamasa. 112. 119. 217, 218. 231 245. 143. 217. 218 seq. ké. 1. Sign of the dative 41. 43. 44. 46 gamana. 386. 51. 54. 55. 61 — 63. 121. gala. 16. ke. 2. Termination of the imperative 149. gal. Sign of the nominative plural 49 ke. 3. Taddhita suffix 201. 50. 52. 69. késava. 3. 4. 11. 14. 15. 22. 27 —29. 35 galir.= gal. 50. 70. 71. 37—39. 46 —48. 89. 94.105. 117 — 122 galu.= gal. 50. 52. 70. 123. 131. 153 seq. 160. 185. 187 — 191 ganta. 117. 195 197 — 200. 203 206. 207. géga. Taddhita suffix 206. 215 — 217. 223. 235. 245. 254. 261. 271. gu. 1. Final syllable of verbs 117. 323 —325. 393. 411. 424. 425. 433. gu. 2.= gum. 146 seq. 439. 440. gum. = kun 106. 146 seq. késiraja. 3. gugum. 147 kodisu. 342. gudasu. gudisu. gudusu. 20. f kédu. 342. 368. gupa. 11. 185. 390. kombu. 20. gunavaéana. 33. 37. 198, 217. 242 seq. koral. 16. gunavaéi. 33. ko. 152. gunanuriapa. 30. kopa. 304. gunokti. 33. guru. 11. kkum. = kum. 146 seq. kke. 1.=ké 1. 41. 43. 44. 46. 61 gurutva. 385. 389. i e kkéo 2.:: ké 2- 149- gul. Taddhita suffix 201. kriyatmaka. 160. guli. Taddhita suffix 206. kriyanimitta. 380. gé. 1.=ké. 1. 48—51. 54. 65. 66. 69 kriyapada. 30. 88. 125. 126. 170 11. 800 59F p— 468 — gé. 2. Termination of the imperative taddhitapratyaya. 198. 199. 200 seq. 149. 429, taddhitalinga. 29. 33. 36. 39. 200 seq. gé. 3. Taddhita suffix 201. tadbhava. 33. 214. 215. 432 seq. g‘g‘é: gé 1. Dl tana. Taddhita suffix 201. ngal.=gal. 49—51. 74. tapa.=dapa. 125. 128 seq. ngalir.=ngal. 49 —51. tappa.= tapa. 125. 128 seq. ngalu.=ngal. 49. 50. 52. talekattu, 6. 17. 20. 21. figé. = g8 1. 48. 49, T4. T5. 80. tavarga. 14. ¢. Stands for s 178. taha. 118. Gaturthi 40 $4. 1 153 364 éapalate ta. 2. tAm. tdnu. Reflexive pronoun, ¢avarga 14 nominative singular 74. 75. 223 seq. éakshusha. b. 225. ¢u. Causal suffix 23. 89. 90, 92. tam. Nominative plural of t4 2, ete. 74. éelvu. 188. tana. 16. éétana. 37. tadarthya. 387. ¢h. Stands for s 178. 233. talavya. 16. taluka. 16. ¢handas. 194. 197. 411. j- Stands for s 178. taluge. 16. jati. T1.390. 398. 404. 405. tavu. Nominative plural of 6 2, thm, tanu 74 —76. 228. jatisambandha. 391. jihvamila. 16. ti. Taddhita suffix 46. 206. tu. 1. Formative syllable of the past jihvamuliya. 16. 17. 21. jaina. 2—4. participle 25 — 27. ta. Changed info la 191. tu. 2. Neuter pronominal suffix 46. 57 tavarga. 14. 72, 74. 79. 249. tn: 8. =udu 2. 127, tiku. 412. tuti. 16. tha. Changes into la 191. d. May become | 117. 211. tritiye. 40. te. Taddhita suffix 201. dakara. 117. tom. 212. 252. 254, n. Final letter of nouns 33. 53. 69. 70, tti. =ti. 46. and of verbs 107. In sandhi and samasa 179. 187. ttu.=tu 2. 46. b7. 72. 249. triprayodga. 93. 162. 163. 362. ta. 1. Sign of the relative past participle tribhuvana. 400. 110. 125. 126. trimatraka. 11. ta. 2. Taddhita suffix 201. trilinga. 38. ta. 3. Changes into Ja 191. tva. 21. takkadu. 337. d. Euphonic. 42. 73. 249. 250 tatpurusha. 208 seq. 217. da. 1. (d+a). Sign of the genitive tatsama. 31. 214. 432. singular with a euphonic d before taddhita. 29. 35. 39. 198. 200 seq. the a 42 — 44. 46. e 469 — dési. 188. da. 2. Sign of the past and negative relative participle 110 seq. 126. 218 déestya. 5. 432. seq. 421 seq. dravida. 1. da. 3. Suffix for the past tense 125. 126 dravya. 390. da. 4. A so-called krit suffix 29. (f. dravida. 1. drdoha. 387. bhatavatikrit, bhavishyantikrit. dvandva. 213. 400. dam. In allidam. 207. dvihpraydga. 93. 162, 362 dadda. 20. daddakkara. 20. 196 seq. dvikarma. 382. 38). dvigu. 211 seq. danta. 16. dvitiye. 40. dantoshtya. 16. dvitva. 40. 88. 121. 188. dantya. 16. dvitvavikalpa, 121. dapa. Suffix for the present tense 125. 128 seq. dvitvakshara. 20. dvimatra. 11. dappa.= dapa. 125. 128 seq. dvirbhava. 32. 210. daha.=dapa. 125. 126. 128 seq. dvivaéana. 40. 88. dé. Sign of the genitive singular with dhatu. 23 seq. 30. 88. a euphonic d before the 4 42. 44. dhatupéatha. 22. 27. 28. 160. daru.= yaru. 72. dava.=yava. 231. dhéatusvarapa. 88. n. 1 Final letter of nouns 34, and of davadu.= yavadu. 72. 223. 231. verbs 88.167. davanu. = yavanu. 223. 231. n. 2. Euphonic 42. davavu.= yavavu. 73. n n. 3. Becomes 4 179, 187. davalu.= yavalu. 223. 231. na. Sign of the genitive singular with di. Taddhita suffix 206. a euphonic n before the g 42. 43. dikku. 387. 395. digvaéaka. 62. nage.=ngeé. 49. napumsaka. 37. digvaci. 62. napumsakalinga. 37 ditanama. 30. nappu. 37. dir. Sign of the nominative plural 52. namaskara. 38b. 70. 71. nammavaru. 224. diru.= dir. 52. nammake. 224. dirkal.= dir. 70. nalu.=nal. 252. dirgha. 11. 20. na. 1.=nAnu. 75. 222 seq. dirghakaku. 81. na. 2. Four 253. du. 1.=1tu 1. 26. 27 du. 2.=tu 2. 46. 57 :; 72 249 nam.=am 2, 74. 222 seq. nagavarma. 3. 1188 89. '105. 169. dushkara. 188. 323 —- 325. dushpratiti. 177. 198. nanu.=nim. Nominative singular of dira. 363. 387. 395. the pronoun of the first person 75. dévar. dévaru. 403. 222 seq. IS 2 T 470 nama. 30. nira. 252 seq. namapada. 30. 170 nfiru. 252 seq. namaprakriti. 30. nripatunga. 2. ndaru. = ndiru. 52. namalinga. 30. 33. 198 seq. namavibhakti. 40. 170. 380 ndir. Sign of the nominative plural 51. nami. 11. ndirir, = ndir. 51. nal. Four 212. 252. 253. ndirirgal. = ndir. 51. naligéya buda. 16. ndiru. = ndir. 52. 71. pavu. Plural of nénu (nam) 74—76 p. Takes the place of h 187. 188. 223 seq. pa. 1.=va 1. 113 seq. nasiké. 16. pa. 2.= va 3. 119. nasikya. 16. pa. 3.=va 2. 125. nige. =nageé. 49. pa. 4 Taddhita suffix 202. nijakartri. 90. paksha. 321. nijadhatu. 198. pancaka. 14. nityadvitva. 187. panéami. 40. nityabindu. 187. panéavarga. 14. nindé. 304. pada. 30. 88. 126. 198, i ninna and nimma. 225. padaééhéda. 412. J nipata. 39. 169, 175. 176. 260 seq. padamadhyasandhi. 170. I niyama. 194. L ] padantyasandhi. 170 P niyama. 194. padi. 212. 251. U niranunasika. 16. padin. 212. 251. Ui nirdosha. 216. padyardha. 174. nirdharana. 390. pan. 212. 251. i nirviséshapavap. 33. pampa (hampa). 3. it nivartya. 382. payin. 212. 253. juF niséitanama. 30. parakartri. 89, Pra ni.=ninu. 75. 222 seq. parushavarna. 14. Pra nim. Nominative singular and plural pal. 16. of the pronoun of the second person pavarga. 14. ?1at3‘ 4. 222 seq. 224. pi. Taddhita suffix 202. ninu. Nominative singular of the pro- pim. 213. 1 noun of the second person 75. 999 e pintu. 213. . \\H seq. 225. pids. 366. T U} i nivu. Plural of ninu 75. 76. 225. pu. 1. Taddhita suffix 202. Dt nu. Sign of the nominative singular pu. 2. Used instead of hu at the end of 42. 43. 48. 49. 62. 63. 5 verbal themes 28. Prat Iy nudigattu. 37. 38. 236. 246. 268. 365 pum. 37. prfin\ 397. 404. 408. pumstrilinga. 37. [ iy nfir.=ntru. 212. 253. punarukti. 199. Lt T?ba 471 punnapumsakalinga. 37. pluta. 11. 176. purusha (linga). 1. 37. ba, =yva 1. 113:ceq. purusha. 2. Person of the verb 88. 126 bha. 2.=va 3. 119. purushatraya. 89. ba. 3.=va 2. 125. 126. purushavaéaka. 39. bar. Sign of the nominative plural 81 pullinga. 37. baru. 1.=bar. d2. pljyasadhunipuna. 390. baru. 2. Verb. 368. parvakalakriyé. 93. barpa kala. 883. parvakriyé. 93. balla. 340 péda. 210, 214. balle. 284, pén. 40. baha. 118 pénnu. 40. bahuté. 40. pérma. 389. bahutva. 40. péram. 38. 222 seq. 231 seq. bahudu. 146. 337. 338. pératu. 222 seq. bahuvaéana. 40. peradu. 222 seq. bahuvrihi. 39. 212 seq. péral. 32. 222 seq. bali. 284. poda kala. 88. baradu. 336. 337. 339. balasiksha. 5. poy. Past participle 103. 142 ppa.=pa 3. 125. bidu. 342. 368. prakarsha. 302. bindu. 16. 17. prakara. 383. birudavali. 215. prakriti. Declinable base 29. 37. 40; a bilakkara. 13. verb’s crude form 88. bém. 213. prakritisvariipa. 88. béku. bélku. bélkum. 119. 333. 334. prati. 386. béda. 160. 161. 335. 336. pratinidhi. 386. bédarn. 160. pratimukhévaldkana. 263. béha. 118. pratishédha. 88. bhattakalanka. 4. 47. 89. 235. 323 — 325 pratishédhakriyé. 106 seq. 425. 440. 442 pratyaya. Suffix:—case terminations bhaya. 388. 395 40: verbal personal terminations 22 bhartsana. 403. 1265 taddhitas 29. 39: formative bhavat. 88. syllables 31; a euphonic syllable 35. bhavatkala. 88 pratyckartha. 302. bhavishyat. 88. prathama. 88. bhavishyatkala. 88. prathamapurusha. 88. 126, bhavishyanti. 88. gl prathams. 40. bhavishyantikrit. 110. 133. 218 seq. pranyanidarasmarana. 385. bhava. 71. 143. 200. 399. prapya. 382, bhavavaéana. 36. 100. 104. 123 — 125. prasa. 194 seq. 411. 130. 139. 143. 144. 148. 159. 198 — 200 472 maodalada, 401. 402. seq. 231 seq. 285. 287 seq. 332. 333 431. mbar. 51. % bhavavasi. 36. mbaru. 52. bhavi. 88. y. 1. The final letter of verbs 36. 88. 91. bhinnakartri. 89. 107. 121, and of nouns 34.53. 68 -- 70. bhiti. 38D. y. 2. Changes into v 93. bhata. 88. y. 3. Is sometimes nasal 186. bhatakala. 88. y. 4. Its euphonic character 45. 66. 67. bhutakalakriys. 93. 73. 88. 91. 92. 107. [21. 170 seq. 174 bhuatavati. 88. seq. 212. bhatavatikrit. 110. 111. 218 seq. ya. In attributive nouns 217. 245. 246, bhéda. 383. 388. 395. 249 ma. 1. Takes the place of va 189. yamaka. 194. ma. 2. Taddhita suffix 202. ya. In interrogative pronouns it takes madi. 259. the place of & and & 21. 38. 62. 72, mattam. 284. 73, and also in other nouns that of mattu. 285. é 21, matte. 284. yaké. 21. 63. 238, A matsara. 384. yaru. = aru. A 72. 235 seq. madhyama. 88, yava. = ava., — dava. 110. madhyamapurusha. 88. yavadu. = dvadu. 38. 60. 110. 223 seq. mastaka. 16. yavanu. = avam. 38. 49. 223 seq. 235. mahaprana. 14. 169. 185 seq. yavavu. = avavu. 73. 110. mahapranakshara. 28. yavalu. = aval- 110. 223 seq. 235. matra. 387. yugala. 398. matre. 11. yugaloé&arana. 93. 162. 362. mu. 1. Taddhita suffix 202 yogavaha. 17. mu. 2.=ma. 212. 252, 253. yogyate. 388. mum. 213. r. Final letter of verbs 25— 27. 92. 118, mun. 253. and of nouns 34. 53. 69. muntada. 402. rz. Changes into la 191, takes the place muy. 254. of la 193, and changes into 1 194. mfi. Three 211. 252, 253 ruéi. 384. murdhan. 16, ricdhanama. 30. murdhanya. 16. ripaka. 40. 194. 195. mriduvarpa. 14. T T Final letter of verbs 23. 24. 114. mé. 1. Taddhita suffix 202 116. 117, and of nouns ete. 177. 196. mée. 2. Time or times 259. 212. 253. Cf. 195. maédu. 176, rakara. 116. 1. 1. Final letter of verbs 24. 88. 91. 92. mém. 213. mén. 285. 107, and of nouns 34. 53. 69. 473 1. 2. Is sometimes nasal 186. vargadvitiyakshara. 14. 1. 3. Is euphonic 265. 270. vargapanéama. 14. 187. la. Is sometimes used for ra 193, and vargapanéamakshara. 14. changes into na and la 193. vargaprathama. 14. lakshana. 195. vargaprathamakshara. 14. lakshanasambandha. 392. vargakshara. 14. laghu. 11. vargiyakshara. 14. li, = ali or ili. 57. 68. varpa. 5. 21. linga. 29. 30. 33. 37 —40. 46. 47, varpasanjné. 4. lingatraya. 39. varnanks. 4. lekka. 32. varpavritti. 194, lopa. 117. 118. 122. A170. vartamana. S8. vartamanakala. 88. V. 1. Is eaphonic in nouns etc. 35. 45, 65. 69. 107—109. 170. 173 seq. 290 vartamanakalakriyé. 93. 108. seq. vartamanakriys. 93. 108. v. 2. Is sometimes nasal 186. vartipa kala. 88. va. 1. Signof the present-future relative vashatkara. 387. 118 participle 26, 27. 113 seq. vala. Taddhita suffix 29. 206 119 seq. 126. 144, vali. Taddhita suffix 202. va. 2. Suffix for the future tense 125. valla. = vala. 29. 206. 126 vakya. 178. 380. va. 8. A so-called krit suffix 29. 39.119. vakyadipaka. 414. vakyamals. 30. va. 4. Taddhita suffix 202. Cf. 122. 203, va. 5. Changed into ma 189. vakyavinyasa. 380. va. 6. When initial it sometimes be- vakyavéshtana. 174. comes 0 21. vakyanvaya. 414. vaéana. 40. vagyalinga. 38. 111. 119. 242. vadanatraya. 39. vi. Taddhita suffix 202. vaéanaftritaya. 39. vikarasambandha. 392. vatiga. Taddhita suffix 206 vikarya. 382. vadiga. = vatiga. 206. vidhi. 23. 88. 148 seq. 341. 383. 429. vanigeé. Taddhita suffix 202 vidhikriyé. 88. vanta. Taddhita suffix 206. vidhyartha. 88. var. = bar. 51. vipsa. 300. VAT — Vit D2. vipsasamasa. 218. varga. 14. vibhakti. Verbal personal terminations vargaéaturtha. 14. 22. 88. 126 seq.; case terminations vargaéaturthakshara. 14. 29. 30. 40. 41 seq. 208; case 40. vargatritiya. 14. Regarding the use of cases see 381 vargatritiyakshara. 14. seq vargadvitiya. 14. wibhakianals, 40 60 474 363 —366. 383. 384. 393. 438 —440. vibhaktisvara. 171. vir. Sign of the nominative plural 70 442 virir. = vir. 70. sasana. 2. 15. 40. 439. githila. 196. virkal. = vir. 70. virgal = virkal. 70. githilatva. 197. gira. 16. vilbma. 11. vildmakriyé. 106. suddhage. 5. visanke. 175. suddhikshara. 5. visésha. 40. 302. Stnya. 16. 17. viséshanapada. 407. séshasambandha. 392. viséshya. 40. srivana. 5. viséshyadhina. 223. 229. 242. srutikashta. 177. viséshyAdhinalinga. 38. 111. 119. shashthi. 40. sa. In sandhi 178. vishaya. 390. visarga. 16. 17. 21. 32. samnyoga. 383. visarjaniya. 16. samsayarthakriyapada. 428 vu. 1. Sign of the nominative singular samskritaprakriti. 171. 42. 43. 46. samsparsasambandha. 392. samhite. 170. vu. 2. Sign of the nominative plural 13—~ 79, sakarmaka. 89. sakarmakadhatu. 89. vu. 3. Taddhita suffix 203 vritti. 35. 411. sankhyana. 71. 399. vriddhi. 11. 185. sankhyanavastu. 71. ve. Taddhita suffix 203. sankhyéaptrvaka. 211. vaishayika. 382. sankhyavastu. 399. vol, ete. 198. 199. sankhyavaéi. 31. 33. vyanjana. 5. 13. 14, 21. 28 sakhys. 22. 33. 39. 71. 198. 217. vyanjanavidhi. 5. sankhéya. 71. 399. vyanjananga. 17. sati. 123. vyanjananta. 32. 33. satisaptami. 123. 424. vyavahara. 391. sattrinanta. 31. vyapaka. 390. sandhi. 34. 35. 170 seq. 180 seq. 208. sakti. 387, sandhyakshara. 11. sabda. 4. 5. 30. 38. sannida. 216. sabdadravya. 4. sannidhinasambandha. 392. Sabdamanidarpana. 3. 4. 35. 47. 48. 62. saptami. 40. 66. 98. 153. 164. 176. 192. 204. 229. saptavibhakti. 40. sabinduka. 187. 293. 323. 324. 363. 364. 411. sabdinusisana. 4. 62. 89. 97, 131. 134 samasamskrita. 31. 214. 215. 432. seq. 164. 167. 171. 176. 191. 192. 196. samanakshara. 11. seq. 199 —202. 204 —206. 294. 295. 323. samésa. 30. 31. 177 seq. 197. 198. 216 475 samipa. 363. svara. b. 10. 11. 21. samprati. 88. svarayuktavyanjana. 170. sampradana. 380. 384. svararahitavyanjana. 170. sambandha. 391. svaranga. 17. sambandhasambandha. 392. svaranta. 34. sambandhartha. 381. svasti. 38D. sambuddhi. 81. svamisambandha. 391. sambodhana. 40. 81 seq. svaha. 387. sambhrama. 364. svikara. 389. sammati. 304. h, Takes the place of p 187. 188. saralavarpa. 14. ha. 1.=va 1, 113. 118. 144. sarvanama. 31. 33. 38. 198. 217. ha. 2.= va 2. 125, 126. salla. 160. 161. 342, ha. 3. = va 3. 119. savarpa. 11. ha. 4. = va 4. 122. 203. sahaja. 185. 197. hadi. 212. 251. hadin. 212. 251. sahajadhatu. 36. sahajavyanjana. 177. han. 251. haku. 368. saku, 147. satatya. 364. hage. 289. 294, 322. sadrisya. 386. hangt. 285. snta. 118. hita. 384. sarthaka. 30. hu. 1. Instead of pu at the end of verbal sasira. 178. themes 28. siddhi. 383. hu. 2. Taddhita suffix 203. su. 1.=1i1su 1. 89— 91. 118. 147. hén. = pén. 40. su. 2. Taddhita suffix 203. hénnakkara. 14. sundara. 188. hénnu. 40. sitra. 3b. hétu. 89. 383. 384. 389. 395. sonné. 16. 17. 21. 44. 128. 136. 148 hétuka. 89. 179 seq. 187, 199. 216. b hétukartri. 89. strl. 37. hortu. 321 seq. strinapumsa. 38. hogu. 369. strinapurnsakalinga. 38.. hohg. 118. strilinga. 37. haudu. 145. 229. strivaéaka. 39. hrasva. 11. sthalasambandha. 392. hrasvakaku. 81. sthana. 16. 1. 1. Final letter of nouns and of feminine svakartri. 90. pronouns 34. 38. 53. 69. 190, and of svadha. 387. verbs 28. 88. 92. svabhava. 18b. 385. 1. 2. Final 1 occasionally becomes 1 svayankartri. 90. 190 60* —— 476 — la. Changes into na 190, and takes the L. 2. Proceeds from ¢ 105. 117. 177, and It proceeds changes into 1 190. place of 1 190. 191. 1, Occurs in a number of words from ta 190, and da 190. 191 —193. 211, and proceeds from - L. 1. Final letter of nouns 34. 53. 69, ta. tha, ta, ra, la 191. and of verbs 28. 88‘. 92 T0¢. 117, lakara. 117. 2 Indexical words in English. adverbs of circumstance or manner 165 continuative imperfect 215 seq. seq. 251 adverbs of place 164. 165. continuative (or habitual) future 316. 262 seq.; abverbs of time 165, 262 continuative present 315 seq. seq. crude base in the nominative 42. 43. Adverbs in general 260 seq. About their formation and expres- 48, 49. 53 — 68. 75; in the accusative sion 169. 295 seq. 43. 53. 4. 56. 59. 63 —68; and in alphabet 2. 5 — 10 ete. the vocative 81. 82. appellative nouns of number 258 seq. demonstrative pronouns neuter singular 305. 38. 57— 60. 79, plural 73 seq. 222 seq. appellative verbs 93. 229. 230 ; —masculine 38. 47 —49. 79, as — as. 346. plural 51 seq.; —feminine 38. 53 seq. as — 0. 348 seq. 67 seq., plural 69. 71 seq. attributive nouns 242. See gunavaéana. diacritical signs 6. distributiveness 305. 306. 308 seq. auxiliary verbs 330. Canara 1. 310 cardinal numbers 251 seq. doubling 93. 107. 162.163. 170. 177 — 179. Carnatic 1. 210. 439 seq. cases (vibhakti) and their use 381 seq. duplication 304. Interchange of the seven cases 393 either—or. 343 seq. seq examination of the terminations and change of verbal root vowels 24. 29. 36. augments in the seven cases 82 seq. 107. 157. Fleet, J. F., Dr. 15. 103. conjugated appellatives 93. 136 seq. for, because. 297 seq. 347. conjugation 426 seq.; that of the frequentative action 28. 93. 162 seq. negative 431. 432. future perfect 317 seq. conjunctions 167. 260 seq. future tense 142 seq. 340. combination of certain words 362 seq. Grammar in English of the Carpataka comparison 376 seq. Language by McKerrel Esq. 4. compound tenses 315 seq. Hindusthani 432. confingent future perfect 318. Hodson, Rev. Thomas, 323. 344. contingent present-future tense 132. how much—so much. 342 seq. 133. 315, 338. 428, imitative sounds 168. 169. 173. — [, 477 imperative 148 seq. Irregular forms Pathak, K. B., B. A. 3. perfect 316 seq. 152 seq. See vidhi. indefinite pronouns 39. 279 seq. 305. permutation of consonants in sandhi infinitive 120 seq. 122. 123. 433 seq. 177 seq. interchange of the seven cases 393 seq. personal pronouns 73 seq. 222 seq. interjections 168. personal terminations of the verb 126 interrogative pronouns 38. 58— 60. 72. seq. 223. 381. 13. 223. 231. 233. pluperfect 318 seq. Mahratti 432. possessive pronouns 39. 239 seq. Miiller, Max, Professor 431. postpositions 167. in sen- multiplication 254 seq. 310. present participle 108 seq.; Musulmans 432. tences 420 seq. . namely, as follows. 347. 348. present relative participle 23. 26. 29 113 seq. 218 seq. 422 seq. negative participle and relative negative participle 106 seq. 112. 113, 179. present tense 128 —133. 315; used for the future 429. negative, conjugated 157 seq. 179. 332. 341. Origin of the negative 160 seq. punctuation 32. neither — nor. 344 seq. reciprocal relation 307. 310. nouns identical with verbal themes 36. reflexive pronouns 73—76. 222 seq. numerals 251 seq. 225 seq. numerical adverbs 164. reflexive verbs 93. 369 seq. only, alone. 314. reiteration 304. 308. order of verbs in a sentence 408 seq. relative participle 110 seq. 317 seq. 410 seq. 421 seq. ordinal numbers 256. relative pronouns not in Kannada 110 233. 351 seq. orthography 5. other. 311. repetition, reduplication, doubling 28. 102. 107. 109. 160. 162. 208. 213. 218 passive 181. 323 seq. past participle ending in du 23. 93 — 99, 300 seq. 362 seq. and tu 24 — 26. 29. 94 — 99. Its short Rice, B. Lewis, M. R. A. 8., etc. 2—4. form without du and tu 99-—102. self 227 seq. Its ending in i 26. 102. 103. 105, and slackness of consonants 196 seq. specialities regarding the singular and idu 103. 104. See relative form under da 2. and ta 1. Irregular past plural 398 seq. 403 seq. 405 — 407. participles 103. Original meaning of spontaneously, of itself 227. 228. subjunctive 319 seq. the past participle 105 seq. Short past participles used with illa 282 seq. such —as. 346. The past participle in sentenceg syntax 380 seq. 419 seq. tense suffixes 125 seq. past tense 137 seq. ; used for the present the — the. 345 seq. or future 129. 428. there, there is, ete. 418. 478 time, times 255 seq. 259. vowel to become nouns, sometimes tripling. See tripraydga. also adding a vowel 36. twelve modes of declension 86. 87. verbal themes identical with nouns 36. verbal final consonants, vowels and very. 249. 261. 308. 310. vocative. See sambddhana. syllables 22 seq. 26 — 28. verbal forms etc. used as adverbs 167. what happened. 348. 168 what is that. 348. verbal noun. See bhavavaéana. when. 350. verbal themes altering their radical whether — or. 345. i O a7 X . S o ey W e S i e g g B e CORRECTIONS AND ADDITIONS. Page 2, note, read Khardshti for Kha- P. 39, L.12, read 253, 2, d for 258, 2, ¢ noshti. P. 40, 1. 29, put a stop after 3¢ ¢, 5, line 32, read &° for ¢*. and read (See 102, 9). 6, L. 29, read ri for 1i. 42, 1. 24, put , for ; 7, L. 11, read bottom for botom. 44, 1. 30, put @ comma after therefore. 8, L. 16, read sub letter for sub-letter. 45, 1. 3, read M J for M. g~ e Fa- - P s~ 10, L 24 (under Present Malayala), 47, 1. 28, put ( after accusative. read 11 for Ir. 47,1, 37, read <@ for Ta&. 11, 1. 17, read ® & for ¥ &, 48,1, 4, read dialect for dialects. 11, 1. 26, read 216 for 217. 49, 1. 1, read &g o for B 0. 11, 1. 35, read 19 for 18. 49, 1. 18, read are for and. 15, 1. 11, read &° for «°. o) ne) mel nejiilne) el no) o) o, 53, L. 28, read @%&6%%@6 for %9;3;)0 16, L. 2, read gala for galla. 48%¥3o%, and remove ; before it. o oW 16, 1. 18, read ananunisika for anu- 54, L. 8, read ¥o00% for Fodo3. nasika. 55, 1. 9, read dialect for dialects. 57. 1. 2, read 371 for 370. 19, L. 11, read tlri for tlri. 26, 1. 24, read e for Toen. me)lgolilaeliin, 59, 1. 7, read ¥JIRePRe® for VIR 20 $8. 26, L. 34, add, § 151, a, 4. 26, 1. 35, read 24 for 34. 60, 1. 31, read @V of for of wv. 27, L. 2, remove § 151, @, 4 65, 1. 19, remove B,F3F3PT°. 928, 1. 35, read 0001y for Soveno. 65, 1. 32, remove ®,¥3FRRQ. 29, 1. 19, read » for ®. 66, 1. 22, add B33 Fper. 31, 1. 34, read @ for . kg 'S FU R RY 66, after L 26, add, 7, Loc. B39, 32, L. 17, read 8,5 for ;2. e. g. %#%F&)dég’. eoigla= S e g s B B e B <5 e 33, 1. 20 after V839, read, and also ae! 71, 1. 26, read %0n3 30 for &3n ooegncso. gedo. 3 35, L. 18, read is for are. 72, 1. 36, remove letter c. 30, 1. 25, read 30001 for Joe> 7. 73, L. 14, read 2 J0 for dOZd0. o) dne 37, 1. 19, read (see No. 8, b) for (see 74, L 6, put ) after the plural. No. 8, remark). 76, 1. 24, read Malayala for Malyala. P. 37, 1. 20, read same for sume. %5 83, L 29, read ®° for ¢ and we&?, for P. 38, L. 29, note 1, read (’SF, I3, for eflwi_. (RRF 23)). 83, 1. 40, read dialects for dialect. P. 38, 1. 42, note 2, read = for an. P. 85, L. 40, read 131, a, b for 131, b, c. 430 88, 1. 11, remove ( before as. 147, 1. 32, remark, remove § §. 88, 1. 26, put a comma after SSF SN 149, 1. 36, read 203 for ez . 92, 1. 26, add deaF oA after LonR. 150, 1. 13, read ©9F for F9T. a=l ln=ltine e 92, 1. 29, remove REFT ARY. 151, 1. 19, remove the comma after o ge) lme) lgel el ne 93, 1. 4, add, Curious formations are 158, 1. 5, put ( before I have not 268 A (in Sasanas Feg 08) and B¢ seen. 0R0 from 9.)5%55'3 or ?%dfi, cutting, 160, 1. 3, remove the comma after engraving, and 3¢308. 23906, P 98, L 31, read must have been fidfiag& i P 161, 1. 24, read yet to be for yet be. 5 102, 1. 19, read 38 3B I@N> for G I3 IBoM. P. 164, 1. 33, after ¥ , behind, read med. 5 I 102, 1. 35, read ©@¥), for &99. 165, 1. 8, ¢nclude within the brackets %03, behind (d, med., mod.). P. 108, foot-note, read Dr. J. F. Fleet Jor Dr. I. F. Fleet. B 167, 1. 17, read 109, a, 7 for 109 a, 5; P. 104, 1. 10, read 308, . and 1. 82, put a semicolon after (see sub ©B). P 111, L 27, read wmgfiéofi for VB, Son. 168, 1. 15, read 316, 5 for 318, 5. P 111, 1. 28, put a comma after TRES*. 169, 1. 18, put a comma after $3»eo¢ o for the semicolon. 111, L. 29, after ©IQTT read DIRWI) for TARBOWO. 169, 1. 25, read @3 wver for ©3 v, 171, L. 32, read @ for . 118, 1. 2, read ¥= (of ¥®®) appears in this paragraph under No. 2 for 172, L 11, read 233,03 % for 239030 ¥°. ¥% (of ©®°) appears in the para- 174, 1. 6, read § 96 for § 97. % 176, 1. 7, read Fewaok3 for TRBD graph under No. 1. 118, 1. 8, read 320F & for 30oT&. o3 120, 1. 17, remove (of an ¥V%,3) and 176, 1. 12, remove 6. 177, L. 85, read in for see. read (of an @V¥; see page 114, remark). 182, 1. 5, read 235 for 23 ¢. % 182, 1. 35, read 30 + €903 for 830 + 120, 1. 29, add, It may be thought that at least in some of the above 23%) 030, mentioned instances, e. g. in DRI, 184, 1. 27, read 83&° + FO for 3VA°, e simply a euphonic =° may have +39; and L 29, read (or 3D 3 ¢w) been inserted to form the genitive. Sfor (3m3¢0), P, 127, 1. 14, read 254 for 253. 188, 1. 25, insert this before Nara- 129, 1. 26, read ¥ Y for T . simha. 141, 1. 28, read (23¢+ 03° + 93y for B 193, L. 4, add, Gf. § 372. (B + o3¢ + 92Y), and 1. 29, read (35¢ P 193, L. 8, read 5332523 for FBTWy. + 033¢ + g3) for 30+ ods® 4 93). P 193, 1. 22, remove the parenthesis of DQTE, P. 142, 1. 17, read &035° for ©03°. P. 142, 1. 30, read ¥3 for &3 194, 1. 35, read ® 3 for Js. P. 145, L. 10, read ©%30° for ©% °°. 195, 1. 22, read yamaka for vamaka. 481 P. 200, 1. 15, read 205, 1, 3rd person, a P. 291, 1. 8, read a euphonic °. for 205, 1, d. P. 294, 1. 17, read Q0N JoINZv0TE P. 201, L. 16, read W&FF for WAFF, and for TANSD bcafi;fioomf\. ¥ L. 21, put a stop for the comma after 297, 1. 10, read %0 for W¥d0. (WOF). P 298, L. 7, read dative for genitive . b} 204, 1. 33, read S0t020%3 for S000%. and 1. 25, read upon thee for upon 205, 1. 35, read Me*zoe for e®sae. you 2086, 1. 27, read B,B3¢ B3¢ for I I 304, 1. 17, put a semicolon after 8¢, and after 1. 28, add, See page 446. fellow. 306, 1. 14, read 2.30370° 33033 214, 1. 23, read m-%;s-’dso for meg AT, for %8005 LBRIFTS. 214, 1. 31, read 30 300098 Fo for = 309, L 29, read OR» 30,3, for BIR, VBNTIF, Fo. 32,335 and 1. 32, read ©F)y35° for 216, L. 9, put a quotation mark after wfi%a (arthavyakti). 312, L 24, put but in parenthesis; 219, L. 6, read played for sang. and 1. 25, read if one is a sensualist 233, L. 15, compound ©&F and Dea,°. JSor if one (is) a sensualist. 235, 1. 1, put for after used. P 317, 1. 27, read WBISRePR 1} for Wend 238, 1. 25, read ©3e for 23T. S8R ¥Ry and 1. 35, read W3RTOD g for W3RTBIJO. 239, L 10, remove the stop after genitives. 319, 1. 1 and 2, read having caused 240, 1. 13, read that for this. to make was, 2. e. had caused to 247, 1. 13, read (see § 355, I, 3). make or had made; and 1. 10, insert 249, 1. 8, read 2¢0 for &¢Td. 300N Y after QET/IT. g 251, L. 8, read of the uvula for of the 320, 1. 23, add, Let it be expressly eyes. stated here with regard to [¥ou 2563, 1. 28, read 26973 for PFITINT. 5P3 that 3 is attached also to the 255, 1. 27 and 28, read FR¢IF for participial form used for the form- %?daefifii ation of the present tense (see § 194) 259, 1. 11, read 'asi’o,e for 83. in the ancient dialect. 264, 1. 29, read of the becoming then 322, 1. 8, read we for (you), and 1. 4, Jfor of the coming then. read us for you. % e 265, 1. 1, remove the semicolon after 328, 1. 7, read BBpFN®° for WERF Wi, and put a comma for it. ot ol 265, 1. 21, read ©° (or ¥OF) for WL ; 829, 1. 1, read ™, ®% S0 and grihastha; and 1. 22, § 362, 2, ¢) for 362, after c). and L. 10, aéwg’fle?% Jfor B TII . 271, L. 24, put mango in parenthesis. ?32, L. 4, insert large after swallow- 213, L. 32, read :SdJaéedéofi for BX2¢ ing Zson. 334, 1. 29, read I2ec0RBS, for In¢ 276, L. 33, read 38233 for HeTA. MRS 1) .ljf. 285, 1. 25, read ¥, ®o) for Vo, 335, 5, read BoV) for B . 61 — 482 — P. 343, L 10, read €onon¥d for @orio P. 418, L 15, read is for s; and L 21, ned read Efld"’d&ifio for fidqu‘ageéo. P. 345, 1. 11, read ¥V, ¥w for ov. P 422, 1. 11, after 183 insert 186; and P. 346, 1. 31, read sne283, for Soewdl 1. 24, read TR0 for FwoB, ) = 423, 1. 16, remove 3 before TIFIT; % and 1. 84, remove 303, P. 350, 1. 16 and 17, read W for and L 17, insert 330 3 after 83303, 23REP A, 424, 1. 19, read SBFo for HITTo, P. 356, L 28, read aQ &% for ARM0T, 426, 1. 29, put a comma before ©FF e, P. 358, L 4, read ©@03>8 for ©%ad . 431, 1. 15, read &=0° for ¥, P. 365, 1. 7, read &RODRIR for BRIW % 434, 1. 14, add § 71 to F»¢&, where moRe, it appears as a 8 term. P. 367, 1. 9, read 3:a@330 for ¥t 435, 1. 5, read (%) for (Be). ) 536. 438, 1. 14, read AT (ASQT) for P. 370, 1 33, read F000) Fwes) for AT (23479); and L 24, read ¢f. L) 899, $8), for ¢f. 8. P. 377, L 1, read Soe3an0n¢3s for B¢ 441, 1. 1 and 2, read |RI&3 B> for Bo30n¢e3°, QIR 1. 10, read 3300 for 3d P. 382, 1. 28, add, Cf. § 352, 6, b. ; and L 21, read deRFodyo for - P. 383, 1. 24, read treatise for treaty. &eéffsoigao. P. 384, 1. 7, read kartri for kartri. 442, under 372, add — Through the P. 393, 1. 6, read (Candraprabhapurana) favour of Mr. B. Lewis Rice the fol- lowing “Explanation of some of the for (Candraprabhapurina). 396, 1. 9, add, Cf. 341, 8. words contained in Rev. Kittel’s list” 396, 1. 31, read No. 2, a for No. 2, c. kindly prepared by his Munshi, was 396, 1. 35, add, (f. 346, 7. forwarded to the author, and is given 397, 1. 17, read 330, 8, for 350, 8, etc. here as far as the explanations are sef el sl daeliae 397, 1. 27 and 83, read parenthesis not conjectural, viz. and brackets. gvere, A bird of omen. wcosvflfia'amsigo 400, 1. 19, read our for (our). 37038 39, (Karnatakasanjivana).— 402, 1. 14, read FROT for FROTV; ¢, A fool. Theold spelling of 7f.— and 1. 33, add 4. #Jaog‘ é&}d. Rice and a hollow made for 403, 1. 34, read 3IBRHT¢ for IVBBVTS, the reception of pepper-water, etc.— 408, 1. 10, read and one for and two. 26, The same as %10 in the Diction- 411, L 17, read like a blacksmith; ary.— 3¢¥,. The act of hearing. and 1. 35, read fi@g\ofor fiO%o, There is a game in cards called F¢¢, 412, 1. 1, read S08TINT0 for Foo®) (or FePod) LS. DR, = TR, AR rId3c; and 1. 2, read he incessantly ©s¢ »1 o (Karpatakasanjivana). — 0 shot. ©3,8. Imitation of the sound pro- 5 413, 1. 6, remove as perhaps in the duced when plunging into water.— half-verse quoted above. B er. B3P erodnd ¥ZW (Karpata- P. 414, 1. 17, read &3¢ for ¥I9°, kasanjivana).— 3tef. 3. As a verb 483 (=$¢322 of the Dictionary) it means for Xeros, to get pendent roots.— ¢to succeed ete.’ 3¢ BI @6’5316 0339 (,'Ssg 30 (zgeg $I®). Buffoonery (from 3ef. e wo (Karpataka nighantu). Samskrita 36 + 93%).— oo, The ® as a noun (=3¢3Y3) means ¢suc- same as the second part of Cicég)ozé._ cess’, 3enF 96 =successes.—REIE. ro%f\- Tadbhava of &‘55\ - =WoR e’ (Karpitakasanjivana). —8% 442, 1. 35, read ®RN,0N for @?p?u;jofl. ¢ (=R»¢%° of the Dictionary). 8¢ 443, 1, 6, read ¥H=d (Sabdanu- 38 3008 Jeedio(Karnatakasanjivana). sasana sttra 473. 480. 513). TQTE. FHBS® (HF) IQT® appears to 445, 1. 24, read a black, or bad, belly; mean [AT® (is) success (FRBLF).— L. 82, read solligé for solligé; and 1. TORRY, VBBOBY, TRIBY, AT, 85, read TOSYMoe. TodB), ete. are compounds of T, 446, 1. 37, read Domba for Démba. ete. with ev@), a well-known animal. 449, 1. 37, read Sw,W, 3 Teadews for 23> of the Dictionary seems to fimfidofié seodews. mean some animal rather than ‘a 452, 1. 32, read Wed3A T for W@ cascade’; it may be the correct form 5@wflo, of the modern '&emti - (B8 of the 453, 1. 2, read zfiédgdomab for @3&vo Dictionary?). — £©3. Lameness.— ™BY; and 1. 13, read ®¥eB08WT for R¢8220%. One who has cooked (from %3¢ BB TT. TW®, t0 cook).— PN, POJY IR 455, 1. 34, read 2¢9R,&, for Aedn . 456, 1. 4, read 203 and "‘Cbfi\); and B8R oy Fo. ((f. o in the Dictionary).— @90°, A clear mistake 1. 13, read QY3 @WBRET D g oA S TS BASEL MisstoN PRESS, MANGALORE. s ——— o s o R it | - - = o % rer BEE % » it 3 5 s e o N e S & N = Py 8 s o o & - = < # . S & e o » o o = s Cacen oo » G % o s Ao g ks & s . . o T w. i % £ o e > e s s N S i A S X £y o W w B o Wy oD = e 3 s - % o o i R S s sl . . o w o B = 6 A SRS o Ao SN, 03 O e £y axey A . S NN & e L a o, G Y o R 2y 4 S I oy e o 5« » ‘@? e 5 3 £ G S % - o o - o B B S B B - , . v - P et " = @ 5, B % Ny £ B B Rk S oAy o e e = “ h %, i o %, 5 bt Wk Ay o W I ot 508 S N S e RO S B ufiw 5 B e Y e e . & % i 05, s R . e % MJ,. o e 5 e B R Sa b AR e o e 35 Pt Kty ooy i b g o o o e T e e A LY Waan =4 Sz 5 5 =4 % . 5 o 5 ‘. i % e i 5 .\m , “ N oo e 3 B, A S % % 1 . R o 5 N S, N P e e 5 s % i “ % . . Py AN % 5 o 5oy A S g S e - A it e . o & e B s A e et e A ae R i H . 35 o %, LX 72 0 B s v 5. SR e Bt 5 2% 2 . o - ey . . v % b 5. i Ww N O 0, o iy %, e 5 o 2 g NN . =5 N e o S * 3 & S Fal b o - ~ Ny B Mfl. S e %% A e AT o B % = ¢ - T H L g v x o~ o %, e T S 5 iy % 63 AR R 2 = 5. o e &S s . Halem, o i 1 ) % e S m s U % o % 7 s s o o o P v 5 % Sy A . e S oy o o 0 Tt S e et s P G > Far s, S 2 3 % o e e R e oy W 2 5 o B vk % o R e 5 x k0 e i Y ' S alh. e R B it o A uu. 3 e e o o 5, 5 “ P 5 e e % o 1 g W A e St i o s e M O S 7 A A K i .0 B o . S e v S e S ot 5 e > A ) e o o R . a Bk B 3 CEeRe " b ot % e w M % 'h % i %, . A % i T Bk “ e e ¥ s 0% % o e 3 5. R . s A a8 ot £ C b o b ) Ay b T oS A B i A 1 N e S A e i i 3 W 2 e I & 5 pe G 5 s o B e B A e %, b o % i P % L% o ! N s ol b 5, %7 < b e o SN IS T & “ o o e B i 2 e o e G s v e o S s o i e s e s e i o G 5 s i e 8, e % A o s e e (e % e 4. o . 3 AN A % A0, . G S m \,« %, X e " 5 e B %, B SO e e “ Ay 5 o N 3 it A 1, i . o , S 5 i Eaoh i % S e AR B Bt SN R s = B AL NS %S - ety - o S 0 i Ko e B o e B £ £ B Ve, B B B . % .M " WY i % 8D s o o o e ok 3 B %, BB o i £ * R =, 7%, * B, S I o5 e 3% A £ i S Soaenta o, % o o B Bt i e e e iy e o et S 5 oo % > 0 g i s o 2N £, 5 (x b k \ 4K o % i BoS. 5 o 55 Sy ROR el % 5 5 B 5% W A o B BN, % 5 %0 S 50 @ o 5 e o e o ! 55 o >, A 5 i 5% o B s < oo o BN o N o e o e e i e o e S o e S 2 i e N A " g : X M 5 5 5 A N S > % N A £ G S o B o B - 5. o . i S i TN .4 2 5 7 Fu B i . ¢ 5 T A @3 e 38 ! S o 7 b s % L % o b i 7 T Ao e o 3 29 ia M 5 “ N 3. D5 o Vs 5 EoA k. i % Soa b S ot o s ot L N oA % o e T ALY 5 4 S = 5 5 LN S 7 s o A e % Ry s Ly g Ao e - % o o 38 Y L, o o B o e o - Fo b e = \.“ e e i 7 . = 0 T B = 5 £ e oAy 5 i 35 x AE . % . < 5. C « o e % S s -, ST 3. e h o 8 e b 45 o % e Py it o b e s o RAAT B e - L9 e T % R B e 3 nt PR, :, . e B e A 6 Sy 5 TS 8. %, " L - i 3 i G e o L o B e s = o B i % ey B . e %, B B B e 25 s 5 ce b i e e o5 G S PSP Tl e o T e I B R s B S e e 5 4 0 > 5. 0.5 8 % 5 5. X e ¥ % & C Ees s Pt o Ve 0N 2 N . 0 Mo % oF e M e s £ % &%, o i3 . 88 £y s i o i L% 5 2 A B i o o st o e S i " 25 e ER BB A X o A e P oy A .w 5 etk % x 5 7 78 5 s s W, e bt s £, % o5 . - 5. o5 L 6 S *e , b B Mo o s R o S b 8 e 55 Ok B PR oy v 9Cs Za 0 B ¥ T s E A 5 . ¢ S », AR e B o e . S el 5 oy Rt % 4 5 K %, S £ AN B A S % B 5, e oo A N X .t SN 5 ¥ 5 L A, e s £ = S o op By, e £y Bt T o g e ¢y Sy b7 i e @ B S, gty ¥ ; " T A e 5 S IR Vo A e W R G5 i i AR o, X 5o % 3 u ki o ” Ma, - A i s o . T nm. e 3. i 5 e o (4% <. T8 Rdn B i A B e S o % e oy A 5o . NS o i e o P oty % 78 B b o @ o o F A S . 2 . i -~ S Ko, e o B o % 3 RS o 5.5 - e % 4 = B U > e % ke 4 W Rt 5 ry e B, 5 i B T e 25 x T, B SN B 4% . ™ S 5 e v e % T s A . o e e e b *, . , =~ R S 4= v o e S o e T T e o ek s e % o o Y% A %% s D SR S 4 . % & 3 e "\ £ ok t . Do s 5 b e % 3 H e N K S 8, Y 57 % s SR g i % N S Ay S o ke o F T it = % o s 5 - e e A s e B £ A EUEeS s *, 5 'y b jre i A A S % Hu . e 5 y e - 5 o5 £y 2 S 2 o 5 5 5 ot 2 S o ke Son e £ 5 W % - 5% in, S e A T, s A o i I e 5 e 2 n. XX % e g e s % % oo 4 CHHE A oy & . Sy £ Ty N e o Y At o o R e Tl = * i A ' N e 55, Ao M«WA " SR ki A L N % & iy Aa = b % . 5 o % o B 5 Sy S 90 ) * e i oy B ', ! e e N e Sk b S e o e % s i A X e S 3 iy A Tt i s i D, e ST v Gt B M Soh a3 = e 5 B o +; o S 25, % ot e = o o Y et o ‘ e, o T S i i %, % 5 5 . i B S s Y o . & ot bE e e 2 T W S e S M A 4 S e 5. oH Y o e e 25 R ey A oo ! R B, S i e, % . i e b . % o L 5 Y X5, ¥ 3 Y P i w o, e o i o ¢ . b . e S Yy e bk % i e B e i ) e ek i oy y N e e S P A, g < = - 5 s S5y 5 e % Ak e N . £k . v, 5 k b % % o5 o 5 by’ ¥ A %8 % S ” 5. 2 o b0 o, A o S e TN o b “ A o b T o o P A - o ». 93 s : e Tt iy a o B 5 e i e s e oy R u©h »: e o Sy as N % “ M e . N o % % 5 . 5 %, y e s, v ‘o o . vk B bt % o % o i i . . NM« s s B e S 8 e e, Vi K 0 0 £y b o 7 i % % o - », o e - ol 0 i i 4 . oS 2 > “ s ol L e o g DAY W A :4 % A BB, 4 LN S s 3% s N 5. .M “ & o ) B oy R R W wfl e ek b \ . s i } ,.m; e w‘ % o S o . =~ S A v , e -5 PR K e 5 5 . - T ) s S Tl e e ol A By i o v o s, Nk %R, % N o, i ) B % e 7, WA M 4 I . % = . e She % " winle, oA 4 il ot - % 9 s rat = o ! % SN A e 5 o e b = o 5 o o A e S o Co oy 5% - %y T e e 56 i e . < XX " . % T N N e " % o o i e 5 % s o N 5 R 15 " Kok o Bk B T e A S < o g e S P e 5 - o e % . e ) e &, L, = = 2N - o iy S < 5 M % 5y N T B a b3 % . v “Se e k- M. RNy 5 5 o = 5 e Bk s s ok, A . % el o " n A iy Ta e o i S i o 3 "y & % - o Tt e Ay e SN G IA A 5 % i s % s o o % i % . 3 s w. ok o m % < 7 ;- e 5 L Sy no ko b 3 2 A A = e’ i Ca Oa N 2 £ v PN S et o = 2ot S o B Bty T S s oo S & i 2 B ey B 2, A Y M ; N e e R ROk % e i o ) i A =% e s NS i S T Yer. " e B 4 £y 0 5 ks & g re P s 2, i e o A ) o £ o W v B L o W 5, W £ s - e o e e e ” P Ty s e e, & S s % . s h i e s % r R " % o . R L o5 i by S o e ¥ e R r e Ay " e T A Sty s o e e " o iy, & & G0 " S S % e o e n i o o o x & o e 7 B 2B e 2 g % S 0y @, A3 b <3 . o % 9.2 e o X % a Y Y . o4 A o8 o b oy o 3 2 ’ Ve b 4, i . e e & i % i e o 5 0% e O o Boite o e i o oy Foptne p Chs % " SN Wy S i Ui 1 g e A o o a ArNAR ) 3 %, ‘" E m e P 5 oA i e 5 o 4 AN 5 e D Sk, P o, oD o . Bt A R S . . T b S e > m T 1 1 5 A o e Gy o (5 o P Pl o e 5 4y % . e e’ .y iy T e e 526 o 2 b v “, O e 3 & 5l . o5 e . 0 e e S 5 = B 6 i H 0% ' s Se A . A d b, 2% Bt b L, ks 5 e N . N e B o o 3 2 B > Y e - %, 2 o5 sy S 5 . .” o e ATy o . S . s o i S yar - A . A %6 i P R o i = W\ S X B & . ta i & Y N BB, 5 g L% iy e e i %, % % ok D P % et e o " - R W S e 2 55 s = 5 5 o P i . it A e ey o T e PN I e s S o o 0 & At 2 > o X ¥, % X 5 > a o5 5 Gt 78 i L ) ok s oot b o i, D 5 4y =4 b X e A ENEN 5 s ! R o % B i Y 2 A g e b s I - A e s iy iy > S TS 7 s B % B B i Je B . S, = e A, B N Y R ek % e R = Sk NV b % S Y B i 4 A = e % % 5 e s e NS - ;. - S e hi CY “ L v o ST S S i A % e b 0 TR B0 e o o e e TR e % A3 Sy e % a0 e 5. g S 5 . 25 25 o B N “ - g SN o % e $ i i i e ey s o e 5 o8 < 4 3 o a 1 4 y . we e s 5. o, - 5% 3% 3 o s e s o o s e e . ) W " g e St v . Y i s B o ke by P AN e a, e 5 % e 5 R A7 3 T bk 5, s -, . - BT T S e . %S - s % o S T o o e o = S - s s e A A i g * e e - et & T ¥y e P i 5 5 % o S “h o Rl A i . e Sy ot S o B b v e B b 9 4 “ - e T ’ - > x B o oy Sy g S Gy b S % e 5 i s ol e ® . ] 23 s T At 5 T o lu e P "5 B X G A e s o o B SN Lt b o, LY, 5 i A % e e B I S e e . w e S oy v i e o . 5 . v e S S R Mgk, % A Y g A T £ %y 2 B 3 Sk e b WP 4%, o T i 5 i o N S s, A5 T s 28, . e o N S - . i B B i o . i o %, e o Bthl >4, o - i, s % e e 4 ot H 5 w:, X o e % A LY % o o o & 8 B i R o o o e o 5 S S e A i 5 X T G B ! A e % 55 Bk £ s % N e i s % e o, e o, w4 . e e o o M Mw . s b 4 o TN e i g e > e Sy i b Lo 5, o #, e s e 3 o T P 5 m = N4, s 4, % A, 5 o ~.,. e s x % 5 I A28 v A b S e S S % e B v X 5 Tk Bt e e % %, T 2, "y Lot i o . = 5 Sy a s, - e N i~ s R e AR el ey . s, P o o R T R R X . s 5 $om 5 N b, % LT 5% S 4 N i, e s 8. . BN 3 - M 5 5 = % 5 ys - o " o < 5 s . CEr = i e B oA R g R o R o e - o R e 2 M %, % 2 n e 3 5 25 a e 5 f S o 1 R S e s o bt % Ve s 5 O b e e . . v o A . T e e o o % 2 2 i - o b g o 50N e 75 . £ & oo PR N e = A s a4 o I e S o > o 5 v T e - ey . B ) b - R R S % e N 25 P 7T A o B oo % % i » % 5, o it D s 5 s 5. e i B o s 5%, ST 2 & o e LN i i 5 e % 5. = S - e Rt G . e o o, “, Ly S oo A 8 " s e i e v e o P e T P T oy 05 oy fon N B R v %, - v B 8 Y e B g Ty o &) o e iz ey . o . - e, &) oo - ey g g Sty EiNe S i e S s e Shuc o N M T 4 (o oS 5 S oo EN N B - B 9y Nt % AL LSS M s e X S % e - ) 3 5 % . %0 s . 5 Hm B 3 . % % o i " i 2. 5 S v L e & e & 2 A 0 Sl ! > R o o i e £y o o " S N O . AT A 3. B A e 5 A s s % % 5 . g 5 o 4 o SN S $ R, T £y & R A oy o 7 » i aas g : T e % ' e 5 5 e % 4 5, K% S e RO " 5 he e 5 & S He s 7 4 i i 5 B i . B e e % % s st Rt b < e . S e A . A = o s g e 5 i R oE R A vy oy 5 Yo R 3 = ey b ~e e 5 % LN v 55 % % B s 5o e & % o % 5 n o *, b A £ S o : T bt pAy e B Py s 3 e o £t a e &5 Lors Rt i s =, . RS S P iy ey o e v " i X N “ e 8 - = ya b . % X g .,rn . .m = 2o %, o, oS A M = R o 5 R S e e 0 2. o o » s e >y e s s 5 S N -3 % . 5 0% 03 ¥ ’ 5 e % e o % & A v, w e S B o . R S v S '~ e 5 A = a5 Ao 0 1 2N 5 i s i R A Ty = P e = . S & i > o % w % S 4 s y ¢ NS o s o 5 0] o e . o = o 4 e 4 4 ' o i i > ~ i it S TN ey v o . S 2 = 5 > a - Sy . ek % 5 s i - & ’ % 3 o L 7 7 R % B 5 o T = W b 5, o = oL . o & - St N St o Ny Ay e el s " >, - At M A o % 4 e 7 Lo Y 3 8 . ! 5 % b B, i o i o Yy A 4 B e L o v - e o oA 4 G e 9 S 8 s P o 5 5 o o St . e e o - e A LK e Sy AN % = < % SO R i W, . 5, 5 7 5 e = ’, e = i s Ao 8 e % s -y - - o o . ” 5 to o h % - B S e a7 T 1o 7, Y R o, % " e - - S e A % i 38, e M % « o 5 bk i b m b & b s ot N > b M e 5 o e oo s 5, % o N 5%, ¥ L e v, o e . > o T R & o s E A e P P . 5, e S eI e 5 A "y % R 5 5 % % e o < A et SV B 6% oy % A % e A 5 .w b b o s, 5. Y - B % - A v £ . = e 5 - h o 0 i e M Sy S = i B T N e o s s T B 3 @ < " - v it s 50 e >, i o L, - g ’ W %y oo Shih g Sk 3 5 9 = . =4 %, o * “ % e S N e =y i o ~ e g E 2 : o, = = A A 5 X A = A 5 il e by B, R 6% - Bt 5 s % o = s Bt 3 5 7 o o i 1y e o i 5 5 o o = e o = o . o o~ i - % A Yar L T % - S %5, & “er M 4 b, " o % H ,m ‘ > . = L = o .s . o faat e - - X B g e T 5 S ~ 506 A o “ R % ) G e % 0y . A L 5w L g e 5 4 % e m o = & ~ o e B o o - Ay E S e e a B & e *, e 508 Ch 5, = b w v & r . % r s A b 7. BB A %, o Y Y " o . = B “ b ¢ SN - i o A ~ B e o e ey . R i - i W T LR ~ M e, S o e b M A~ o o, ey o S > % o &80 Ny A T § %, 8 A bt . M B M. Ko 2o e 'y By > ol . o S : 5 5 A, % e . i Sy A i o ;- S ol A, i, * St 5 ! N - G i b ko o ) Vv g 5. B e i 5 e S . o S s s 5 LR S et o ! ¢ 3 e % n . s o) ey » e o % % o N i e A, T i, 5. % - Sy o e o o . i e e e e T i g8 e = oy R ke A, o 3 R b o 4 i A i . % oS o . i oV o £ ke heh e . e g S # o o e ok T i i § v % e 5 e A v i S o o, o b i iy o (2 ™ % 0 SN “ap . o Ned s . e b . N e o o M 3 B 2 . = o Y o > 3 i Y - e o e 3P 8 et i e o < T ¥ AR s o S 5 s T 5 e 7 v P o AR R . s A A e v Sy S " o ' - e s i ey s e, S e g o A % : S o o % e 4 e “ £t A e SR e oy % o 2 e b ) % S T, % 4 L5 508 S b B ey f N o % N S iy = = A s o - = A > > W e ST T e o S ~ e Ag? “a ~ S o = ey e e 5. % Y o o & % SR 8 R LT e y e = = - i (o 5 o A B e Y 3 5 e o A i o - M X e - ia = » s % 5 i o 4 s TR i b s S g b 4 o Nt R A % S Lox e * X i 4 . - £ 4 o7 . s o5 ¥ I , % e o 90 M % S5 $ 3 o 5 % ot e b 18 o i o Y R S % & % A e S 5. " N8, e Ny G o o e R & 5, Ay ES ,,., g . Sy s i 0a % i SAr A B %, 5 % b, - o e o 5 Y 5 s e e % % s CATH s s o s o . e i B o 35, W . Y S T s ik e . . ” L o o i e e R B “d m. e d i £y w H, e . Ca o i " 5 oy e o e . o “ o o) # & 8 5, 0, 4 o W c S o i o - s . e “ S G o 5 i ¢ " 2 s e 7 A % 5 {AA Y Y o s R A N 2 . N ) o - n/ o ohEN 4 e 5 % s Y, g e AN e e v Ay o e A w~ 5K o " S R N o e 1 % e v %, 0. o A ) ) i 5 7 - X! % & % o S5 o S > e - s A R > 5 o e " . o % 3 S . J § ,“ 5 Pl e 4 % % o 5 ,. S ! 4 =4 W o e *. 3 o 5 T ; i % R N S T %, b 5, " x - W.(,x % S % T % i~ Fig i o o W " S A 2 e &~y ot 4 o " R e "y % A s i 4 5 o s, P e e % % 2 L % % 50 Y s T 7 P A T - et ' Cu A e e i o S 5 . % 4 . o 5 ,.» o 5 ' o pode A s - o S h o , AT AN - ~ M X o Hir? s “ e Vs, R e S - s 2, - u =3 " o T s, NiT % N 2 i A S > W o i 0 2, R 5. w Y O i S e 5 % o o w ey ol o 9 o o o & o' i o e s o~ i P . - . - - S s X >3 g o 85 i .,~ R N s e 5 B o EATS K 4 X % % o A i e o 7 A R “ ” e e N U % Ew, e ey ¥ & o . s S o Wk 5 B S0 . % o oy i o) Py o 5 3 3 e 4y S AR A ¢ %, (e 5 Vi = - s o, R 5 ¥ e s e Sk . a5 el % e & # R o . Y . kg - i e b & Bh N o " s = o 5 5 L i i S ,m e e . =3 o S %k e Hm - % 2 a i e S o S Fo e e i & Rt ~ % s e 3 M BOGR A 5 " 59 o A a5, o = % % y o & o o LA i B s o -~ o = v T 74 . r 5 G i B : ~ . ! e A G w2 . N A e o e ot 3 s o . S o o i ‘n’ n = Sy % b & BB ?, A N th O 4 e s I o o i Dok o - " 5 o e ;i R - b - i s % 8 ~ - s S0 r 3 (- b o ;- - 5 m % i & 2 peey = e i~ e iy, £ e D 5 > i 2 b B v 5 508, o s ok " s “ S e W L e Lo o i o o S % W % i o e 5 S S, e (AL A B = " S & Y T e B g Uy % 4 av % e 5 %, 7t B 2 “ e -, 7 . - e % . e 5 ” < S . . S LN % % 5 A T o 5 gy & L, g " . n i, i i & LT . ’, % “ IR n, o A o A S iy 3 . e e % o “; e 26 Pt iy g T - g at g R 5 o, 3 s b Ay S 0, 5 o T .5, el 4 A A e % N % s T A, S A i Py ok LA o e - %, N T & 36 e S o o e A 3 g . s S ke e % 6 55 e P Sk 9. s £ g A 4 o s b e o ey - -t % ~ a0 o 5 5 * L il b . - °y A Py 7 G 2y o e o % Pyt - m Y o A e 5 ES) S 1ty s A o % ot 5. s A % % . % 2% % 2N 5 8 g = . 2. 5 A Y e i "N % 5 5, 7] 1% A o e s 4 . ; N -, % ” =y e 5 1 Fo [ . N S Zpty Ak e . s & WV b s e % i a b o % Feol Eor o o . W % b i, ” Sy e ) i - RO o 3 e A 9 e ¥ S : B, 5 i o .3 . i e S, 3 g 2k 4 e Y SRR 2~ e WokIh B o %, o RN o A 5 T P e e S0 s Hyt £ i % S m M ) . o o5, 4 A > o A, AR e r o ~ 5 o o 3, 3 n e S i i £ o o % > 2 5 o e 5 p RS A % o o T ’ tak 3 x - & ! oy 5 a -y % 3 . Sl et - o % Yo b 5 N R A S 4 . 5 < % %%, e s i s s g S % R s e 7Y 8 ot R o e ~ S m - o e S e A 0 s i ! % - )»e“ X v 5 % 0y Ehe N b Rk £ > o e b 5 or S e - S s SN P b < s R = S i I N S o 4 S T et o R 5 WS *, 2% s o e o o w % B 4 o LA s, % B it .. 5 > e S . . P A A % Ty S Sy e oy o N 6 o 5 S i i & % E 2 E i % 27 o s fid % o 5 S 2t s o e ok = - e 5 &S > < = o A B S U s 0 Y Tory gty Ay . Ll . i e SR e o = - % T = W ~ - = B B by % . % 2 e P % s St . N > AN o, 7 S ) ) 3 5 S e % % " o . x R .\h 5 - ey < e £y s ~ M o i % e e 2 S, 8 “ay % & £ 3 ey S o o Tt 24 ; RN = > i, o T S o S, s Do e 3 S ,, S i B e < o % s 53, o 08, S b e M o8 . oy i e 2 s NS M S % Yo e f o s oA s o % 5 o oy -y ' Nt = i, Y52 % n e b ot e S - Ay S5 e 2 S - Yo " ¥ i S . iy " e g s O > - “ £y ot K % e = g Dk W o ik, e ) v 5 e s - sy & St o o - o % i S A Cip e % s S o iy st = 5o % % S 5 . 5 % o, - Ly % m % - S5 9”\ e e o ‘ % % R L A 805 < B on o <5 o, e 45 e LA " S W ;- % . 5 . B A A o & ; ¥ 5 - i . Sy 5 iy, o P S o 7 S R N = S 5 2y % e I PNy B A o o . 5 AH 5 “ s e o = o e ey i SRR - v o w T o e Sy W " o ik - Y g e e C "y o, e o o s - o % P ¥y A i 5 o A A 4 b , 3% N & " e e g = - K - T o el s . o e o % : e s o s b ~ % [u 5 - Tt e K g % ko - i LY S e 2 S o i B P A A S S ; o P & o 5 b, 4 Sy S g o . e - . i 2 e e "5 oy e A b Sy % = e £ g~ o A % s . e AT i 8 .;\r Yo v o = S R S o Ay E b e e 2 s sy s e LS g2 = g P KOk, % e o~ X 6 = o S oA 55 i o . i 2% @ e e i Aaln o P g o A & e =% ' i 5 L rm % ‘e o o iy o £ A o o i - o g . it A& g e NG oy ot 5 N % E % Co B i S 8 s ey 9 ” # i A pr 8 - e % a e - oA " o 7 -~ 2 ) o a e a o G Sy Ane 7 - 5 i v p % v 5 G0 e A o s 7 . Aot # e Lo . e T " # o e ) A . o M o o o T o8 o ; = S «, i A L i T ) 5 e i . T o LS e o iyt oy R it I s o R T g, ' 5 T I e A < % "~y M & i N 5 MJ“ - 75 T st s R ey B . - e o " i i r = o - 2 » v £ s 2 R, 5 o Rpint 5 > %) % o e e e i e a iy g o " Sy = 22 - b % i T 5" % Ty ey % Y A - 7 7 s e 54 e, e T s @ N S S % s ’, - 5 e % = S S o e s i e P S e S ey Lo w i, e e 5 = o 2 e i Se S ! Pk s ok - % - o . ,z. ” S % = " v e oy A 5 = Ty N et N 7, D) bt = L e e e e v gy v ¥ S5y o e 6 e % % aly -y 5 s - % % Lo Sy ‘. g T 0N e e S s A N o v % G e 2 % 3 . - A % Apr B N Pt i o g - o~ i o s . W g2 2 LA " - 2 - 75 " > £ - w o . a; "oy . s A = R o Lt o o S i <y T A s o o, f\ % " S s o i, 2E i ¥ .m ot A = i o D ey g = < " “ L o " 5= e % £ 3% % % A o %57 o e e ] oy o S £ R =, S 3 ,“/ £ e ey T - 2 3 4 . % £ - o i A in e o e e 3 i 5 ) o B 0k . o Ry l L, or = o~ 4 i . ) 7 % o . i e e “ o ” e ¥ S = v % 5 3 AR W % e ~ o o o i ~ e e o o v Y = 3 e -, = e Ay Ry % A W e S N o £ v ey e A i o - - " = - T s = = A LR 23 . W, B "y £ P 5 - s : pa Py r L0 i ot S e o o ey e 4 - - g A oy L e i o S, R I B 5 a s roy T " o 2! S S p g ) = - PR S s = > Lo e 33 - - o = T2 % ok L s Pyt S e i v o x - 5 . i i P s ¥ Lo - & d - £ A o S ~ - s ’y Il S s - . o v s Kooy & - fr i . o oo i = A, - - iy e s * S 2 R s Z, e . o K o % o =S & £ G oo B30 3 5 o . o g o ’y o Ly )i m e A % A L s g e 1 e o a 4 S o oy 2y S X e ey S o 2] = 'y i - oy 6 5 2, Py e = s L % % g i o Pl ¥ ey e > o & & s SRR g s - Lt - & o - s e s iy o oA ks e S P s i e o e i - 0 “ W 3 P =9 i rs P b - e g v % % % 5 i - i i e A b i ¥ ¥ i L g e A % Tyt % . o) " g s e A 5 S e it . v 5 -~ e Ly e e s, A p %, " “ £ R & A N e o o - e e <7 ‘) ; o e ‘o i oy “ M Sy i s 5 o iy i o L S - XL B o £ o o 2 '\ . ko z )e 7ty - it e < Syt Al - S A e o Ay - & = I S P’ Pt -, e K a o e & £y 2 S ~ - #ia S e o - e £ : i o T : S i i - rs i alm R i Sy = S e s o8 i < Vi - %) . & T i e o ip e o s o e . % 5 A % \ 3 4 S g £ b % & p s 0 P 2 & M o % o v < " A > o % el X oy oy s s o 47 # iy % o 7 - A T i ™~ i . R = N . R, ro. -, s A % P 2 - ¥ 5 5 Gl 2 P i3 S et o =5 i < F ) ~ ” s S = 3 P i 5 Ww K 2 2. Sy s T 2 B i % ~ 3 5 5 S v R 4 o 2 e - = < o o I % % o A e % % i x o LA - w ARSES 8 Fres 2o % sy a ‘.h« 2 5 s - o A = s % &) e 5 o 5% 1 ¥ % 7% Calm : o AR - o o PR Ly SO Rires e p 2 X Y v & % P S 60 g S v . e 3 i A A 2 i) A R A, 7 P g " B ey & s o Te B s B & e et J ot AL g o o F) £ iy S oy o v oE " ;. SINRR s 8 el i 4 2 SR e el Ve i 27 7 A T LR A i PANIr 2 (38 A A - Vs Ay %o A = el A P Aty SN AT AT 7 ,u“ e oy i " i . s PR ¥ ot g o o e s 54y AT itnis tacdhecria iy g & a s i 3 20 GRAMMAR OF THE JA LANGUAGE R =4 Q o VierFarbSelector Standard * - Euroskala Offset IN ENGLISH 15 L Balance o o E THREE DIALECTS OF THE LANGUAGE NT, MEDIZEVAL AND MODERN) Focus 15 ; N 14 BY M 13 EV Dr. F-RETTEL L 12 10 K 11 J 10 AXTTD A ,B\«s Ca l/ ) 22 I é‘ €, \ S~ NS \iD 1 ! 0 N 3_. | :: £ & "‘: H % vy *ue: g t\N[‘ 9 G /< 5 . - el 5 F 6 R !h res P E 5 MANGALORE Il ImER {ON BOOK AND TRACT DEPOSITORY D 4 1903 3 Cc 2 y & & Copyright 4/1999 YxyMaster GmbH www.yxymaster.com